Bid Document Mawa Mongla

Source: Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd.
(PGCB) - QF-SPL-14
Bidding Document for Design, Supply,

Installation, Testing & Commissioning of
Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation on Turnkey Basis
Volume 1
Issued on: 24 April, 2017
Invitation for Bids No. 01/PGCB/Sec(SSD&QC)/2017/2562
ICB No. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS
Country: Bangladesh
Employer:
Power Grid Company of Bangladesh (PGCB)
IEB Bhaban (4th Floor), IEB
8/A Ramna, Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh
Consultant:
GOPA-International Energy Consultants GmbH
Justus-von-Liebig-Str. 1, 61352 Bad Homburg, Germany
Phone: +49 (6172) 1791-800; Fax: +49 (6172) 944 95 20
eMail: info@gopa-intec.de; www.gopa-intec.de
Contents of the Bidding Documents
VOLUME 1
Part 1: Bidding Procedures
Section 1: Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

Section 2: Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section 3: Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC)
Section 4: Bidding Forms (BDF
Section 5: Eligible Countries (ELC)
Part 2: Employers Requirements
Section 6: Employers Requirements (ERQ)
Part 3: Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
Section 7: General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

Section 8: Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
Section 9: Contract Forms (COF)
VOLUME 2
Requirements (REQ)
VOLUME 3
Schedule A: Introduction & Preamble to the Price & Technical Schedules

Schedule B: Bid Prices & Schedules
Schedule C: Bar Chart Program of Key Activities - Delivery & Completion Time Schedule
Schedule D: Manufacturers, Places of Manufacture and Testing
Schedule E: Technical Particulars and Guarantees
Schedule F: Departure from the Specifications
Schedule G: Proposed Alternative Standards
Schedule H: Proposed Contract and Site Organization
Schedule I: Drawings and Documents to be submitted with the Bid
Schedule J: Proposed Subcontractors
Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 0 .docx
Preface
This Bidding Document for Procurement of Plant - Design, Supply, and Installation, has been prepared
by Power Grid Company of Bangladesh (PGCB) and is based on the Standard Bidding Document
for Procurement of Plant - Design, Supply, and Installation (SBD Plant) issued by the Asian Develop-
ment Bank dated December 2015.
ADBs SBD Plant has the structure and the provisions of the Master Procurement Document entitled
"Procurement of Plant - Design, Supply, and Installation", prepared by multilateral development banks
and other public international financial institutions except where ADB-specific considerations have re-
quired a change.

Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders 1-1
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders
Table of Clauses
A. General......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1. Scope of Bid .................................................................................................................................. 1-3

2. Source of Funds ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
3. Fraud and Corruption .................................................................................................................... 1-3
4. Eligible Bidders.............................................................................................................................. 1-4
5. Eligible Plant and Services ........................................................................................................... 1-6
B. Contents of Bidding Document .................................................................................. 1-6
6. Sections of Bidding Document ..................................................................................................... 1-6

7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting ..................................................... 1-7
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ................................................................................................ 1-8
C. Preparation of Bids ..................................................................................................... 1-8
9. Cost of Bidding .............................................................................................................................. 1-8

10. Language of Bid ............................................................................................................................ 1-8
11. Documents Comprising the Bid..................................................................................................... 1-8
12. Letter of Bid and Schedules .......................................................................................................... 1-9
13. Alternative Bids ............................................................................................................................. 1-9
14. Documents Establishing the Eligibility of Plant and Services .................................................... 1-10
15. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Qualifications of the Bidder ..................................... 1-10
16. Documents Establishing Conformity of the Plant and Services .................................................. 1-10
17. Technical Proposal, Subcontractors ........................................................................................... 1-10
18. Bid Prices and Discounts ............................................................................................................ 1-11
19. Currencies of Bid and Payment .................................................................................................. 1-13
20. Period of Validity of Bids ............................................................................................................. 1-13
21. Bid Security/Bid-Securing Declaration ........................................................................................ 1-13
22. Format and Signing of Bid ........................................................................................................... 1-14
D. Submission and Opening of Bids ............................................................................ 1-15
23. Submission, Sealing, and Marking of Bids .................................................................................. 1-15

24. Deadline for Submission of Bids ................................................................................................. 1-16
BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

1-2 Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders
25. Late Bids ..................................................................................................................................... 1-16

26. Withdrawal, Substitution, and Modification of Bids.................................................................... 1-16
27. Bid Opening ................................................................................................................................ 1-16
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ........................................................................ 1-18
28. Confidentiality .................................................................................................................................18

29. Clarification of Bids ..................................................................................................................... 1-19
30. Deviations, Reservations, and Omissions .................................................................................. 1-19
31. Examination of Technical Bids .................................................................................................. 1-19
32. Responsiveness of Technical Bid ............................................................................................... 1-19
33. Nonmaterial Nonconformities ..................................................................................................... 1-20
34. Detailed Evaluation of Technical Bids ........................................................................................ 1-20
35. Eligibility and Qualification of the Bidder .................................................................................... 1-21
36. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ................................................................................................ 1-21
37. Conversion to Single Currency ................................................................................................... 1-22
38. Margin of Preference .................................................................................................................. 1-22
39. Evaluation of Price Bids .............................................................................................................. 1-22
40. Comparison of Bids .................................................................................................................... 1-23
41. Employers Right to Accept Any Bid, and to Reject Any or All Bids ........................................... 1-23
F. Award of Contract ..................................................................................................... 1-23
42. Award Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 1-23

43. Notification of Award ................................................................................................................... 1-23
44. Signing of Contract ..................................................................................................................... 1-24
45. Performance Security ................................................................................................................. 1-24

Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders

A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 In connection with the Invitation for Bids (IFB) indicated in the Bid Data
Sheet (BDS), the Employer, as indicated in the BDS, issues this Bidding
Document for the procurement of plant and services as specified in Section
6 (Employers Requirements). The name, identification, and number of lot/s
(contract/s) of the international competitive bidding (ICB) are provided in
the BDS.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, throughout this Bidding Document definitions and
interpretations shall be as prescribed in Section 7 (General Conditions of
Contract (GCC)).
2. Source of 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called Borrower) indicated in the
Funds BDS has applied for or received financing (hereinafter called funds) from
the Asian Development Bank (hereinafter called ADB) toward the cost of
the project named in the BDS. The Borrower intends to apply a portion of
the funds to eligible payments under the contract(s) for which this Bidding
Document is issued.
2.2 Payments by ADB will be made only at the request of the Borrower and
upon approval by ADB in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Financing Agreement between the Borrower and ADB (hereinafter called
Financing Agreement), and will be subject in all respects to the terms and
conditions of that Financing Agreement. No party other than the Borrower
shall derive any rights from the Financing Agreement or have any claim to
the funds.
3. Fraud and 3.1 ADBs Anticorruption Policy requires Borrowers (including beneficiaries of
Corruption ADB-financed activity), as well as Bidders, Suppliers, and Contractors
under ADB-financed contracts, observe the highest standard of ethics
during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance of
this policy, ADB
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as
follows:
(i) corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, anything of value to influence
improperly the actions of another party;
(ii) fraudulent practice means any act or omission, including a
misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or
attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit
or to avoid an obligation;
(iii) coercive practice means impairing or harming, or threatening to
impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of
the party to influence improperly the actions of a party;
(iv) collusive practice means an arrangement between two or more
parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including

influencing improperly the actions of another party;

(v) obstructive practice means (a) deliberately destroying, falsifying,
altering, or concealing of evidence material to an ADB
investigation; (b) making false statements to investigators in order
to materially impede an ADB investigation; (c) failing to comply
with requests to provide information, documents, or records in
connection with an Office of Anticorruption and Integrity (OAI)
investigation; (d) threatening, harassing, or intimidating any party
to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to
the investigation or from pursuing the investigation; or (e)
materially impeding ADBs contractual rights of audit or access to
information; and
(vi) integrity violation" is any act which violates ADBs Anticorruption
Policy, including (i) to (v) above and the following: abuse, conflict
of interest, violations of ADB sanctions, retaliation against
whistleblowers or witnesses, and other violations of ADB's
Anticorruption Policy, including failure to adhere to the highest
ethical standard.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder
recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in
corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices or other
integrity violations in competing for the Contract;
(c) will cancel the portion of the financing allocated to a contract if it
determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a
beneficiary of ADB-financing engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive,
coercive, or obstructive practices or other integrity violations during the
procurement or the execution of that contract, without the Borrower
having taken timely and appropriate action satisfactory to ADB to
remedy the situation;
(d) will impose remedial actions on a firm or an individual, at any time, in
accordance with ADBs Anticorruption Policy and Integrity Principles
and Guidelines (both as amended from time to time), including
declaring ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to
1
participate in ADB-financed, administered, or supported activities or to
benefit from an ADB-financed, administered, or supported contract,
financially or otherwise, if it at any time determines that the firm or
individual has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices or other integrity
violations; and
(e) will have the right to require that a provision be included in the Bidding
Documents and in contracts financed by ADB, requiring Bidders,
suppliers and contractors to permit ADB or its representative to inspect
their accounts and records and other documents relating to the bid
submission and contract performance and to have them audited by
auditors appointed by ADB.
3.2 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in GCC 9.6
and GCC 42.2.1 (c).
4. Eligible 4.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or government-owned
1
Whether as a Contractor, Subcontractor, Consultant, Manufacturer or Supplier, or Service Provider; or in any other capacity
(different names are used depending on the particular Bidding Document).

Bidders enterprise subject to ITB 4.5 - or any combination of them with a formal
intent to enter into an agreement or under an existing agreement in the
form of a Joint Venture. In the case of a Joint Venture,
(a) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable, and
(b) the Joint Venture shall nominate a Representative who shall have the
authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the
partners of the Joint Venture during the bidding process and, in the
event the Joint Venture is awarded the Contract, during contract
execution.
4.2 A Bidder, and all partners constituting the Bidder, shall have the nationality
of an eligible country, in accordance with Section 5 (Eligible Countries). A
Bidder shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder is
a citizen or is constituted, incorporated, or registered, and operates in
conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country. This criterion
shall also apply to the determination of the nationality of proposed
subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including related
services.
4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All Bidders found to have a
conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may be considered to be
in a conflict of interest with one or more parties in this bidding process if
any of, including but not limited to, the following apply:
(a) they have controlling shareholders in common; or
(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any of
them; or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or through common
third parties, that puts them in a position to have access to material
information about or improperly influence the bid of another Bidder, or
influence the decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding process;
or
(e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this bidding process,
either individually or as a partner in a joint venture, except for
alternative offers permitted under ITB 13. This will result in the
disqualification of all Bids in which it is involved. However, subject to
any finding of a conflict of interest in terms of ITB 4.3 (a) - (d) above,
this does not limit the participation of a Bidder as a subcontractor in
another Bid or of a firm as a subcontractor in more than one Bid; or
(f) a Bidder or any affiliated entity, participated as a consultant in the
preparation of the design or technical specifications of the plant and
services that are the subject of the Bid; or
(g) a Bidder was affiliated with a firm or entity that has been hired (or is
proposed to be hired) by the Employer or Borrower as Project
Manager for the Contract.
4.4 A firm shall not be eligible to participate in any procurement activities under
an ADB-financed, administered, or supported project while under
temporary suspension or debarment by ADB pursuant to its Anticorruption
Policy (see ITB 3), whether such debarment was directly imposed by ADB,

or enforced by ADB pursuant to the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of

Debarment Decisions. A bid from a temporary suspended or debarred firm
will be rejected.
4.5 Government-owned enterprises in the Borrowers country shall be eligible

only if they can establish that they (i) are legally and financially
autonomous, (ii) operate under commercial law, and (iii) are not dependent
agencies of the Employer.
4.6 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibility

satisfactory to the Employer, as the Employer shall reasonably request.
4.7 Firms shall be excluded if by an act of compliance with a decision of the

United Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of
the United Nations, the Borrowers country prohibits any import of goods or
contracting of works or services from that country or any payments to
persons or entities in that country.
4.8 In case a prequalification process has been conducted prior to the bidding
process, this bidding is open only to prequalified Bidders.
5. Eligible Plant 5.1 The plant and services to be supplied under the Contract shall have their
and Services origin in eligible source countries as defined in ITB 4.2 and all expenditures
under the Contract will be limited to such plant and services.
5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, origin means the place where the plant,
or component parts thereof are mined, grown, produced, or manufactured,
and from which the services are provided. Plant components are produced
when, through manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major
assembling of components, a commercially recognized product results that
is substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its
components.
B. Contents of Bidding Document
6. Sections of 6.1 The Bidding Document consists of Parts I, II, and III, which include all the
Bidding sections indicated below, and should be read in conjunction with any
Document addenda issued in accordance with ITB 8.
PART I Bidding Procedures
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC)
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF)
Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC)
PART II Requirements
Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ)
PART III Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF)
6.2 The Invitation for Bids (IFB) issued by the Employer is not part of the
Bidding Document.

6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the Bidding
Document and its addenda, if they were not obtained directly from the
source stated by the Employer in the IFB.
6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms, and
specifications in the Bidding Document. Failure to furnish all information or
documentation required by the Bidding Document may result in the
rejection of the Bid.
7. Clarification of 7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification on the Bidding Document
Bidding shall contact the Employer in writing at the Employers address indicated in
Document, Site the BDS, or raise inquiries during the pre-bid meeting if provided for in
Visit, Pre-Bid accordance with ITB 7.4. The Employer will respond to any request for
Meeting clarification, provided that such request is received no later than 21 days
prior to the deadline for submission of bids. The Employers response shall
be in writing with copies to all Bidders who have acquired the Bidding
Document in accordance with ITB 6.3, including a description of the inquiry
but without identifying its source. Should the Employer deem it necessary
to amend the Bidding Document as a result of a request for clarification, it
shall do so following the procedure under ITB 8 and ITB 24.2.
7.2 The Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site where the plant is to be
installed and its surroundings and obtain for itself on its own responsibility
all information that may be necessary for preparing the Bid and entering
into a contract for the provision of plant and services. The costs of visiting
the site shall be at the Bidders own expense.
7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted permission
by the Employer to enter its premises and lands for the purpose of such
visit, but only upon the express condition that the Bidder, its personnel,
and agents, will release and indemnify the Employer and its personnel and
agents from and against all liability in respect thereof, and will be
responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to property, and
any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses incurred as a result of the
inspection.
7.4 The Bidders designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bid

meeting, if provided for in the BDS. The purpose of the meeting will be to
clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at
that stage.
7.5 The Bidder is requested to submit any questions in writing, to reach the
Employer not later than 1 week before the pre-bid meeting.
7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the questions raised,
without identifying the source, and the responses given, together with any
responses prepared after the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to all
Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB
6.3. Any modification to the Bidding Document that may become
necessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the
Employer exclusively through the issue of an addendum pursuant to ITB 8
and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.
7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for

disqualification of a Bidder.
8. Amendment of 8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of Bids, the Employer may
Bidding amend the Bidding Document by issuing addenda.
Document
8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Document and shall be
communicated in writing to all who have obtained the Bidding Document
from the Employer in accordance with ITB 6.3.
8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take an

addendum into account in preparing their Bids, the Employer may, at its
discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Bids, pursuant to ITB
24.2
C. Preparation of Bids
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and
submission of its Bid, and the Employer shall in no case be responsible or
liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding
process.
10. Language of 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bid
Bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be written in the English
language. Supporting documents and printed literature that are part of the
Bid may be in another language provided they are accompanied by an
accurate translation of the relevant passages into the English language, in
which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall
govern.
11. Documents 11.1 The Bid shall comprise two envelopes submitted simultaneously, one
Comprising the containing the Technical Bid and the other the Price Bid, both envelopes
Bid enclosed together in an outer single envelope.
11.2 The Technical Bid submitted by the Bidder shall comprise the following:
(a) Letter of Technical Bid;
(b) Bid Security or Bid-Securing Declaration, in accordance with ITB 21;
(c) alternative Bids, if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13;
(d) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to commit the
Bidder, in accordance with ITB 22.2;
(e) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 14.1, that the plant and
services offered by the Bidder in its Bid or in any alternative Bid, if
permitted, are eligible;
(f) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 15, the Bidders
eligibility and qualifications to perform the contract if its Bid is
accepted;
(g) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 17.
(h) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 16, that the plant and
services offered by the Bidder conform to the Bidding Document;

(i) in the case of a bid submitted by a Joint Venture, the Bid shall include
a copy of the Joint Venture Agreement entered into by all partners.
Alternatively, a Letter of Intent to execute a Joint Venture Agreement in
the event of a successful bid shall be signed by all partners and
submitted with the Bid, together with a copy of the proposed
agreement;
(j) list of subcontractors, in accordance with ITB 17.2; and
(k) any other document required in the BDS.
11.3 The Price Bid submitted by the Bidder shall comprise the following:
(a) Letter of Price Bid;
(b) completed schedules as required, including Price Schedules, in
accordance with ITB 12 and ITB 18;
(c) alternative price Bids, if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13; and
(d) any other document required in the BDS.
12. Letter of Bid 12.1 The Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid, and the Schedules, and all
and Schedules documents listed under ITB 11, shall be prepared using the relevant forms
furnished in Section 4 (Bidding Forms). The forms must be completed
without any alterations to the text, and no substitutes shall be accepted. All
blank spaces shall be filled in with the information requested and as
required in the BDS.
13. Alternative 13.1 The BDS indicates whether alternative Bids are allowed. If they are
Bids allowed, the BDS will also indicate whether they are permitted in
accordance with ITB 13.3, or invited in accordance with ITB13.2 and/or ITB
13.4.
13.2 When alternatives to the Time Schedule are explicitly invited, a statement
to that effect will be included in the BDS, and the method of evaluating
different time schedules will be described in Section 3 (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria).
13.3 Except as provided under ITB 13.4 below, Bidders wishing to offer
technical alternatives to the Employers requirements as described in the
Bidding Document must also provide: (i) a price at which they are prepared
to offer a plant meeting the Employers requirements; and (ii) all
information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternatives by the
Employer, including drawings, design calculations, technical specifications,
breakdown of prices, and proposed installation methodology and other
relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest
evaluated Bidder conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be
considered by the Employer.
13.4 When Bidders are invited in the BDS to submit alternative technical
solutions for specified parts of the facilities, such parts shall be described
in Section 6 (Employers Requirements). Technical alternatives for the
specific parts of the facilities that comply with the performance and
technical criteria specified for the plant and services shall be considered by

the Employer on their own merits, pursuant to ITB 32.
14. Documents 14.1 To establish the eligibility of the plant and services in accordance with ITB
Establishing 5, Bidders shall complete the country of origin declarations in the Price
the Eligibility of Schedule Forms, included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).
Plant and
Services
15. Documents 15.1 To establish its eligibility and qualifications to perform the Contract in
Establishing accordance with Section 3 (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria), the
the Eligibility Bidder shall provide the information requested in the corresponding
and information sheets included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).
Qualifications
of the Bidder
15.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures, applying for eligibility for
domestic preference shall supply all information required to satisfy the
criteria for eligibility as described in ITB 38.
16. Documents 16.1 The documentary evidence of the conformity of the plant and services to
Establishing the Bidding Document may be in the form of literature, drawings and data,
Conformity of and shall furnish:
the Plant and
(a) a detailed description of the essential technical and performance
Services
characteristics of the plant and services, including the functional
guarantees of the proposed plant and services, in response to the
Specification;
(b) a list giving full particulars, including available sources, of all spare
parts and special tools necessary for the proper and continuing
functioning of the plant for the period named in the BDS, following
completion of plant and services in accordance with provisions of the
contract; and
(c) a commentary on the Employers Specifications and adequate
evidence demonstrating the substantial responsiveness of the plant
and services to those specifications. Bidders shall note that standards
for workmanship, materials and equipment designated by the
Employer in the Bidding Document are intended to be descriptive
(establishing standards of quality and performance) only and not
restrictive. The Bidder may substitute alternative standards, brand
names and/or catalog numbers in its Bid, provided that it demonstrates
to the Employers satisfaction that the substitutions are substantially
equivalent or superior to the standards designated in the
Specifications.
17. Technical 17.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including a statement of
Proposal, work methods, equipment, personnel, schedule and any other information
Subcontractors as stipulated in Section 4 (Bidding Forms), in sufficient detail to
demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders proposal to meet the work
requirements and the completion time.
17.2 For major items of plant and services as listed by the Employer in Criterion
2.5 of Section 3 (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria), which the Bidder
intends to purchase or subcontract, the Bidder shall give details of the

name and nationality of the proposed Subcontractors, including

Manufacturers, for each of those items. In addition, the Bidder shall include
in its Bid information establishing compliance with the requirements
specified by the Employer for these items. Bidders are free to list more
than one Subcontractor against each item of the plant and services.
Quoted rates and prices will be deemed to apply to whichever
Subcontractor is appointed, and no adjustment of the rates and prices will
be permitted.
17.3 The Bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that any Subcontractor
proposed complies with the requirements of ITB 4, and that any plant, or
services to be provided by the Subcontractor comply with the requirements
of ITB 5 and ITB 15.1
18. Bid Prices and 18.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS and/or Section 6 (Employers
Discounts Requirements), bidders shall quote for the entire plant and services on a
single responsibility basis such that the total Bid price covers all the
Contractors obligations mentioned in or to be reasonably inferred from the
Bidding Document in respect of the design, manufacture, including
procurement and subcontracting (if any), delivery, construction, installation,
and completion of the plant. This includes all requirements under the
Contractors responsibilities for testing, pre-commissioning and
commissioning of the plant and, where so required by the Bidding
Document, the acquisition of all permits, approvals, and licenses, etc.; the
operation, maintenance, and training services and such other items and
services as may be specified in the Bidding Document, all in accordance
with the requirements of the General Conditions. Items against which no
price is entered by the Bidder will not be paid for by the Employer when
executed and shall be deemed to be covered by the prices for other items.
18.2 Bidders are required to quote the price for the commercial, contractual and
technical obligations outlined in the Bidding Document.
18.3 Bidders shall give a breakdown of the prices in the manner and detail
called for in the Price Schedules included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).
Where no different Price Schedules are included in the Bidding Document,
Bidders shall present their prices in the following manner: Separate
numbered Schedules included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms) shall be used
for each of the following elements. The total amount from each Schedule
(Nos. 1 to 4) shall be summarized in a Grand Summary (Schedule No. 5)
giving the total bid price(s) to be entered in the Letter of Price Bid.
Absence of the total bid price in the Letter of Price Bid may result in the
rejection of the Bid.
Schedule No. 1: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within
the Employers Country
Schedule No. 3: Design Services
Schedule No. 4: Installation and Other Services
Schedule No. 5 Grand Summary (Schedule Nos. 1 to 4)

Schedule No. 6: Recommended Spare Parts

Bidders shall note that the plant and mandatory spare parts included in
Schedule Nos. 1 and 2 above exclude materials used for civil, building,
and other construction works. All such materials shall be included and
priced under Schedule No. 4, Installation and Other Services.
18.4 In the Schedules, Bidders shall give the required details and a breakdown
of their prices as follows:
(a) Plant to be Supplied from Abroad (Schedule No. 1):
(i) the price of the plant shall be quoted carriage and insurance paid
(CIP)-named place of destination basis specified in the BDS;
(ii) all customs duties and other taxes paid or payable in the
Employers country on the plant if the contract is awarded to the
Bidder; and
(iii) the total price for the plant.
(b) Plant Supplied from Within the Employers Country (Schedule No. 2):
(i) the price of the plant shall be quoted on an EXW Incoterm basis
(ex works, ex factory, ex warehouse, ex showroom, as
applicable), including all customs duties and sales and other
taxes already paid or payable on the components and raw
material used in the manufacture or assembly of plant quoted ex
works or ex factory, or on the previously imported plant of foreign
origin quoted ex warehouse, ex showroom;
(ii) sales tax and other taxes payable in the Employers country on
the plant if the contract is awarded to the Bidder, and
(iii) the total price for the plant.
(c) Design Services. (Schedule No. 3). Rates or prices shall include all
taxes, duties, levies, and charges payable in the Employers country as
of 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of Bids.
(d) Installation and Other Services (Schedule No. 4) shall be quoted
separately and shall include rates or prices for local transportation,
insurance, and other services incidental to delivery of the plant, all
labor, contractors equipment, temporary works, materials,
consumables, and all matters and things of whatsoever nature,
including operations and maintenance services, the provision of
operations and maintenance manuals, training, etc., where identified in
the Bidding Document, as necessary for the proper execution of the
installation and other services, including all taxes, duties, levies, and
charges payable in the Employers country as of 28 days prior to the
deadline for submission of bids.
(e) Recommended spare parts (Schedule No. 6) shall be quoted

separately as specified in either subparagraph (a) or (b) above in
accordance with the origin of the spare parts.
18.5 The current edition of Incoterms, published by the International Chamber

of Commerce shall govern.

18.6 The prices shall be either fixed or adjustable as specified in the BDS.
(a) In the case of Fixed Price, prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed
during the Bidders performance of the contract and not subject to
variation on any account. A Bid submitted with an adjustable price
quotation will be treated as nonresponsive and rejected.
(b) In the case of Adjustable Price, prices quoted by the Bidder shall be
subject to adjustment during performance of the contract to reflect
changes in the cost elements such as labor, material, transport, and
contractors equipment in accordance with the procedures specified in
the corresponding appendix to the Contract Agreement. A Bid
submitted with a fixed price quotation will not be rejected, but the price
adjustment will be treated as zero. Bidders are required to indicate the
source of labor and material indexes in the corresponding Form in
Section 4 (Bidding Forms).
18.7 If so indicated in BDS 1.1, Bids are being invited for individual lots
(contracts) or for any combination of lots (packages). Bidders wishing to
offer any price reduction (discount) for the award of more than one contract
shall specify in their Letter of Price Bid the price reductions applicable to
each package, or alternatively, to individual contracts within the package,
and the manner in which the price reductions will apply.
19. Currencies of 19.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be, as specified in the BDS.
Bid and
Payment
19.2 Bidders may be required by the Employer to justify, to the Employers

satisfaction, their local and foreign currency requirements.
20. Period of 20.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the BDS after the bid
Validity of Bids submission deadline date prescribed by the Employer. A bid valid for a
shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive.
20.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validity period,
the Employer may request Bidders to extend the period of validity of their Bids.
The request and the responses shall be made in writing. If a bid security is
requested in accordance with ITB 21, it shall also be extended 28 days
beyond the deadline of the extended bid validity period. A Bidder may
refuse the request without forfeiting its bid security. A Bidder granting the
request shall not be required or permitted to modify its Bid.
21. Bid Security/ 21.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Bidder shall furnish as part of
Bid Securing its Bid, in original form, either a Bid-Securing Declaration or a bid security
Declaration as specified in the BDS. In the case of a bid security, the amount and
currency shall be as specified in the BDS.
21.2 If a Bid-Securing Declaration is required pursuant to ITB 21.1, it shall use
the form included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms). The Employer will declare
a Bidder ineligible to be awarded a Contract for a specified period of time,
as indicated in the BDS, if a Bid-Securing Declaration is executed.

21.3 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 21.1, the bid security shall be,
at the Bidders option, in any of the following forms:
(a) an unconditional bank guarantee,
(b) an irrevocable letter of credit, or
(c) a cashiers or certified check,
all from a reputable source from an eligible country as described in Section
5 (Eligible Countries). In the case of a bank guarantee, the bid security
shall be submitted using either the Bid Security Form included in Section 4
(Bidding Forms) or another form acceptable to the Employer. The form
must include the complete name of the Bidder. The bid security shall be
valid for 28 days beyond the original validity period of the Bid, or beyond
any period of extension if requested under ITB 20.2.
21.4 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, any Bid not accompanied by a
substantially compliant bid security or Bid-Securing Declaration, if one is
required in accordance with ITB 21.1, shall be rejected by the Employer as
nonresponsive.
21.5 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 21.1, the bid security of the
unsuccessful Bidder shall be returned as promptly as possible upon the
successful Bidders furnishing of the performance security pursuant to ITB
45.
21.6 If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 21.1, the bid security of
successful Bidders shall be returned as promptly as possible once the
successful Bidder has signed the Contract and furnished the required
performance security.
21.7 The bid security may be forfeited or the Bid-Securing Declaration

executed:
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its Bid during the period of bid validity specified
by the Bidder on the Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid, except as
provided in ITB 20.2 or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:
(i) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 44;
(ii) furnish a performance security in accordance with ITB 45; or
(iii) accept the arithmetical corrections of its Bid in accordance with
ITB 36.
21.8 The bid security or the Bid-Securing Declaration of a Joint Venture shall be
in the name of the Joint Venture that submits the Bid. If the Joint Venture
has not been legally constituted at the time of bidding, the bid security or
the Bid-Securing Declaration shall be in the names of all future partners as
named in the letter of intent referred to in ITB 4.1.
22. Format and 22.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original set of the Technical Bid and one
Signing of Bid original set of the Price Bid comprising the Bid as described in ITB 11 and
clearly mark it ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID and ORIGINAL - PRICE

BID. Alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, shall be

clearly marked ALTERNATIVE. In addition, the Bidder shall submit
copies of the Bid, in the number specified in the BDS and clearly mark
each of them COPY. In the event of any discrepancy between the
original and the copies, the original shall prevail.
22.2 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink
and shall be signed by a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the
Bidder. This authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in
the BDS and shall be attached to the Bid. The name and position held by
each person signing the authorization must be typed or printed below the
signature. All pages of the bid, except for unamended printed literature, shall
be signed or initialed by the person signing the Bid. If a Bidder submits a
deficient authorization, the Bid shall not be rejected in the first instance.
The Employer shall request the Bidder to submit an acceptable
authorization within the number of days as specified in the BDS. Failure to
provide an acceptable authorization within the prescribed period of
receiving such a request shall cause the rejection of the Bid.
22.3 A Bid submitted by a Joint Venture shall be signed so as to be legally

binding on all partners.
22.4 Any amendments such as interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be

valid only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the Bid.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids

23. Submission, 23.1 Bidders may submit their Bids by mail or by hand. When so specified in the
Sealing, and BDS, Bidders shall have the option of submitting their Bids electronically.
Marking of Bids Procedures for submission, sealing and marking are as follows:
(a) Bidders submitting Bids by mail or by hand shall enclose the original
and each copy of the Bid, including alternative Bids, if permitted in
accordance with ITB 13, in separate sealed envelopes, duly marking
the envelopes as ORIGINAL, ALTERNATIVE, and COPY. These
envelopes containing the original and the copies shall then be
enclosed in one single envelope. The rest of the procedure shall be in
accordance with ITB 23.2 to ITB 23.6.
(b) Bidders submitting Bids electronically shall follow the electronic bid
submission procedures specified in the BDS.
23.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall

(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder,
(b) be addressed to the Employer in accordance with ITB 24.1, and
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process indicated in the
BDS 1.1.
23.3 The outer envelopes and the inner envelopes containing the Technical Bid
shall bear a warning not to open before the time and date for the opening
of Technical Bid, in accordance with ITB 27.1.

23.4 The inner envelopes containing the Price Bid shall bear a warning not to
open until advised by the Employer in accordance with ITB 27.7.
23.5 Alternative Bids, if permissible in accordance with ITB 13, shall be

prepared, sealed, marked, and delivered in accordance with the
provisions of ITB 20 and ITB 21, with the inner envelopes marked in
addition ALTERNATIVE NO. as appropriate.
23.6 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the Employer will
assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the
Bid.
24. Deadline for 24.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address and no later than the
Submission of date and time indicated in the BDS.
Bids
24.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of
bids by amending the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 8, in which
case all rights and obligations of the Employer and Bidders previously subject
to the deadline shall thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.
25. Late Bids 25.1 The Employer shall not consider any Bid that arrives after the deadline for
submission of Bids, in accordance with ITB 24. Any Bid received by the
Employer after the deadline for submission of Bids shall be declared late,
rejected, and returned unopened to the Bidder.
26. Withdrawal, 26.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its Bid after it has been submitted
Substitution, by sending a written notice, duly signed by an authorized representative, and
and shall include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITB 22.2, (except
Modification of that withdrawal notices do not require copies). The corresponding substitution
Bids or modification of the Bid must accompany the respective written notice. All
notices must be:
(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 22 and ITB 23 (except
that withdrawal notices do not require copies), and in addition, the
respective envelopes shall be clearly marked Withdrawal,
Substitution, Modification; and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed for
submission of Bids, in accordance with ITB 24.
26.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 26.1 shall be returned
unopened to the Bidders.
26.3 No Bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the interval between the
deadline for submission of Bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity
specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical Bid or any extension thereof.
27. Bid Opening 27.1 The Employer shall open the Technical Bids in public at the address, on the
date, and time specified in the BDS in the presence of Bidders designated
representatives and anyone who choose to attend. Any specific electronic bid
opening procedures required if electronic bidding is permitted in accordance
with ITB 23.1, shall be as specified in the BDS. The Price Bids will remain

unopened and will be held in custody of the Employer until the specified
time of their opening. If the Technical Bid and the Price Bid are submitted
together in one envelope, the Employer may reject the entire Bid.
Alternatively, the Price Bid may be immediately resealed for later
evaluation.
27.2 First, envelopes marked WITHDRAWAL shall be opened and read out
and the envelope with the corresponding Bid shall not be opened, but
returned to the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless the
corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid authorization to request
the withdrawal and is read out at bid opening.
27.3 Second, outer envelopes marked SUBSTITUTION shall be opened. The

inner envelopes containing the Substitution Technical Bid and/or
Substitution Price Bid shall be exchanged for the corresponding envelopes
being substituted, which are to be returned to the Bidder unopened. Only
the Substitution Technical Bid, if any, shall be opened, read out, and
recorded. Substitution Price Bid will remain unopened in accordance with
ITB 27.1. No envelope shall be substituted unless the corresponding
Substitution Notice contains a valid authorization to request the
substitution and is read out and recorded at bid opening.
27.4 Next, outer envelopes marked MODIFICATION shall be opened. No

Technical Bid and/or Price Bid shall be modified unless the corresponding
Modification Notice contains a valid authorization to request the
modification and is read out and recorded at the opening of Technical Bids.
Only the Technical Bids, both Original as well as Modification, are to be
opened, read out, and recorded at the opening. Price Bids, both Original
as well as Modification, will remain unopened in accordance with ITB 27.1.
27.5 All other envelopes holding the Technical Bids shall be opened one at a
time, and the following read out and recorded:
(a) the name of the Bidder;
(b) whether there is a modification or substitution;
(c) the presence of a bid security or a Bid-Securing Declaration, if
required; and
(d) any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.
Only Technical Bids and alternative Technical Bids read out and recorded
at bid opening shall be considered for evaluation. Unless otherwise
specified in the BDS, all pages of the Letter of Technical Bid are to be
initialed by at least three representatives of the Employer attending the bid
opening. No Bid shall be rejected at the opening of Technical Bids except
for late Bids, in accordance with ITB 25.1.
27.6 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Technical Bids that
shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there is a
withdrawal, substitution, or modification; and alternative Bids; and the
presence or absence of a bid security or a Bid-Securing Declaration, if one
was required. The Bidders representatives who are present shall be
requested to sign the record. The omission of a Bidders signature on the
record shall not invalidate the contents and effect of the record. A copy of
the record shall be distributed to all Bidders who submitted Bids on time,

and posted online when electronic bidding is permitted.
27.7 At the end of the evaluation of the Technical Bids, the Employer will invite
bidders who have submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids and
who have been determined as being qualified for award to attend the
opening of the Price Bids. The date, time, and location of the opening of
Price Bids will be advised in writing by the Employer. Bidders shall be
given reasonable notice of the opening of Price Bids.
27.8 The Employer will notify Bidders in writing who have been rejected on the
grounds of their Technical Bids being substantially nonresponsive to the
requirements of the Bidding Document and return their Price Bids
unopened.
27.9 The Employer shall conduct the opening of Price Bids of all Bidders who
submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids, in the presence of
Bidders` representatives who choose to attend at the address, on the date,
and time specified by the Employer. The Bidders representatives who are
present shall be requested to sign a register evidencing their attendance.
27.10 All envelopes containing Price Bids shall be opened one at a time and the
following read out and recorded:
(a) the name of the Bidder;
(b) whether there is a modification or substitution;
(c) the Bid Prices, including any discounts and alternative offers; and
(d) any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.
Only Price Bids, discounts, and alternative offers read out and recorded
during the opening of Price Bids shall be considered for evaluation. Unless
otherwise specified in the BDS, all pages of the Letter of Price Bid and Price
Schedules are to be initialed by at least three representatives of the
Employer attending bid the opening. No Bid shall be rejected at the opening
of Price Bids.
27.11 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Price Bids that shall
include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder, the Bid Price (per lot if
applicable), any discounts, and alternative offers. The Bidders
representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record.
The omission of a Bidders signature on the record shall not invalidate the
contents and effect of the record. A copy of the record shall be distributed
to all Bidders who submitted Bids on time, and posted online when
electronic bidding is permitted.
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
28. Confidentiality 28.1 Information relating to the evaluation of Bids and recommendation of contract
award, shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially
concerned with such process until information on the Contract award is
communicated to all Bidders.
28.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the evaluation of the
Bids or Contract award decisions may result in the rejection of its Bid.

28.3 Notwithstanding ITB 28.2, from the time of bid opening to the time of Contract
award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the Employer on any matter related to
the bidding process, it should do so in writing.
29. Clarification of 29.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the Technical and
Bids Price Bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the Employer may, at its
discretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its Bid. Any clarification
submitted by a Bidder that is not in response to a request by the Employer
shall not be considered. The Employers request for clarification and the
response shall be in writing. No change in the substance of the Technical
Bid or prices in the Price Bid shall be sought, offered, or permitted, except to
confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the Employer in the
evaluation of the Bids, in accordance with ITB 36.
29.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its Bid by the date and time set in
the Employers request for clarification, its Bid may be rejected.
30. Deviations, 30.1 During the evaluation of Bids, the following definitions apply:
Reservations,
and Omissions (a) Deviation is a departure from the requirements specified in the
Bidding Document;
(b) Reservation is the setting of limiting conditions or withholding from
complete acceptance of the requirements specified in the Bidding
Document; and
(c) Omission is the failure to submit part or all of the information or
documentation required in the Bidding Document.
31. Examination 31.1 The Employer shall examine the Technical Bid to confirm that all
of Technical documents and technical documentation requested in ITB 11.2 have been
Bids provided, and to determine the completeness of each document submitted.
If any of these documents or information is missing, the Bid may be
rejected.
31.2 The Employer shall confirm that the following documents and information
have been provided in the Technical Bid. If any of these documents or
information is missing, the offer shall be rejected.
(a) Letter of Technical Bid;
(b) written confirmation of authorization to commit the Bidder;
(c) Bid Security or Bid-Securing Declaration, if applicable; and
(d) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 17.
32. Responsivenes 32.1 The Employers determination of a bids responsiveness is to be based on the
s of Technical contents of the Bid itself, as defined in ITB11.
Bid
32.2 A substantially responsive Technical Bid is one that meets the requirements
of the Bidding Document without material deviation, reservation, or omission.
A material deviation, reservation, or omission is one that,
(a) if accepted, would:

(i) affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of

the plant and services specified in the Contract; or
(ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding
Document, the Employers rights or the Bidders obligations under
the proposed Contract; or
(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position of other
Bidders presenting substantially responsive Bids.
32.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the Bid submitted in
accordance with ITB 17, Technical Proposal, in particular to confirm that all
requirements of Section 6 (Employers Requirements) have been met without
any material deviation, reservation, or omission.
32.4 If a Bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding

Document, it shall be rejected by the Employer and may not subsequently be
made responsive by correction of the material deviation, reservation, or
omission.
33. Nonmaterial 33.1 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may waive any
Nonconformities nonconformities in the Bid that do not constitute a material deviation,
reservation, or omission.
33.2 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may request
that the Bidder submit the necessary information or documentation, within
a reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities in the
Bid related to documentation requirements. Requesting information or
documentation on such nonconformities shall not be related to any aspect
of the Price Bid. Failure of the Bidder to comply with the request may result
in the rejection of its Bid.
33.3 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer shall rectify
quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid Price. To this
effect, the Bid Price shall be adjusted, for comparison purposes only, to
reflect the price of a missing or non-conforming item or component. The
adjustment shall be made using the method indicated in Section 3
(Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
34. Detailed 34.1 The Employer will carry out a detailed technical evaluation of the Bids not
Evaluation of previously rejected as being substantially nonresponsive, to determine
Technical Bids whether the technical aspects are in compliance with the Bidding
Document. The Bid that does not meet minimum acceptable standards of
completeness, consistency, and detail, and the specified minimum and/or
maximum requirements for specified functional guarantees, will be treated
as nonresponsive and hence rejected. To reach such a determination, the
Employer will examine and compare the technical aspects of the bids on
the basis of the information supplied by the Bidders, taking into account
the following:
(a) overall completeness and compliance with the Employers
Requirements; deviations from the Employers Requirements;
conformity of the plant and services offered with specified performance
criteria; suitability of the plant and services offered in relation to the

environmental and climatic conditions prevailing at the site; and

quality, function and operation of any process control concept included
in the Bid. The Bid that does not meet minimum and/or maximum
acceptable standards of completeness, consistency, and detail will be
rejected for non-responsiveness;
(b) type, quantity, and long-term availability of mandatory and
recommended spare parts and maintenance services; and
(c) other relevant factors, if any, listed in Section 3 (Evaluation and
34.2 Where alternative technical solutions have been allowed in accordance with
ITB 13, and offered by the Bidder, the Employer will make a similar evaluation
of the alternatives. Where alternatives have not been allowed but have been
offered, they shall be ignored.
35. Eligibility and

35.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction during the evaluation of
Qualification of
Technical Bids whether a Bidder meets the eligibility and qualifying criteria
the Bidder
specified in Section 3 (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
35.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary

evidence of the Bidders qualifications submitted by the Bidder, pursuant to
ITB 15.
35.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for the opening and

evaluation of a Bidders Price Bid. A negative determination shall result
into the disqualification of the Bid, in which event the Employer shall return
the unopened Price Bid to the Bidder.
35.4 The capabilities of the manufacturers and subcontractors proposed in its Bid
for the major items of plant and services to be used by the Bidders will also
be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with Section 3 (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria). Their participation should be confirmed with a letter of
intent between the parties, as needed. Should a manufacturer or
subcontractor be determined to be unacceptable, the Bid will not be
rejected, but the Bidder will be required to propose, without changing its bid
price, an acceptable substitute manufacturer or subcontractor meeting the
minimum technical specifications stated in Section 6 (Employers
Requirements). If a Bidder does not provide an acceptable substitute
manufacturer or subcontractor by the date and time set in the Employers
request for substitution of manufacturer or subcontractor, its Bid may be
rejected.
35.5 Prior to signing the Contract, the corresponding Appendix to the Contract
Agreement shall be completed, listing the approved manufacturers or
subcontractors for each item concerned.
36. Correction of 36.1 During the evaluation of Price Bids, the Employer shall correct arithmetical
Arithmetical errors on the following basis:
Errors
(a) where there are errors between the total of the amounts given under
the column for the price breakdown and the amount given under the
Total Price, the amounts given under the column for the price

breakdown shall prevail and the Total Price will be corrected

accordingly;
(b) where there are errors between the total of the amounts of Schedule
Nos. 1 to 4 and the amount given in Schedule No. 5 (Grand
Summary), the total of the amounts of
Schedule Nos. 1 to 4 shall prevail and the Schedule No. 5
(Grand Summary) will be corrected accordingly;
(c) if there is a discrepancy between the grand total price given in
Schedule No. 5 (Grand Summary) and the bid amount in item (c) of the
Letter of Price Bid, the grand total price given in Schedule No. 5
(Grand Summary) will prevail and the bid amount in item (c) of the
Letter of Price Bid will be corrected; and
(d) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in
words shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related to
an arithmetical error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevail
subject to (a), (b), and (c) above.
36.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated Bid does not accept the
correction of errors, its Bid shall be disqualified and its bid security may be
forfeited or its Bid-Securing Declaration executed.
37. Conversion to 37.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the currency(ies) of the Bid shall be
Single converted into a single currency as specified in the BDS .
Currency
38. Margin of 38.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, a margin of preference shall not apply.
Preference
39. Evaluation of 39.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies listed in this clause.
Price Bids No other evaluation criteria or methodologies shall be permitted.
39.2 I. To evaluate a Price Bid, the Employer shall consider the following:
(a) the bid price, excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any, for
contingencies in the Price Schedules;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetical errors in accordance with
ITB 36.1;
(c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance with ITB 18.7;
(d) price adjustment due to quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities in
accordance with ITB 33.3;
(e) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to (c) above, if
relevant, to a single currency in accordance with ITB 37; and
(f) the evaluation factors indicated in Section 3 (Evaluation and
II. The Employers evaluation of a Bid will exclude and not take into account,
(a) in the case of Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts (Schedule No. 1)
supplied from abroad, all taxes and duties, applicable in the
Employers country and payable on the Plant and Mandatory Spare
Parts if the Contract is awarded to the Bidder; and
(b) in the case of Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts (Schedule No. 2)

supplied from within the Employers country, sales and other taxes,
applicable in the Employers country and payable on the Plant and
Mandatory Spare Parts if the Contract is awarded to the Bidder.
39.3 If price adjustment is allowed in accordance with ITB 18.6, the estimated effect
of the price adjustment provisions of the Conditions of Contract, applied over
the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in bid
evaluation.
39.4 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate prices for different
lots (contracts), and the award to a single Bidder of multiple lots (contracts),
the methodology to determine the lowest evaluated price of the lot (contract)
combinations, including any discounts offered in the Letter of Price Bid, is
specified in Section 3 (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
39.5 If the Bid, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid Price, is seriously
unbalanced or front loaded in the opinion of the Employer, the Employer may
require the Bidder to produce detailed price analyses for any or all items of the
Price Schedules, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices with
the methods and time schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price
analyses, taking into consideration the terms of payments, the Employer may
require that the amount of the performance security be increased at the
expense of the Bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against
financial loss in the event of default of the successful Bidder under the
Contract.
40. Comparison of 40.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive Bids to determine the
Bids lowest evaluated Bid, in accordance with ITB 39.2.
41. Employers 41.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid, and to annul the
Right to Accept bidding process and reject all Bids at any time prior to contract award, without
Any Bid, and to thereby incurring any liability to Bidders. In case of annulment, all Bids
Reject Any or submitted and specifically, bid securities, shall be promptly returned to the
All Bids Bidders.
F. Award of Contract
42. Award Criteria 42.1 The Employer shall award the Contract to the Bidder whose offer has been
determined to be the lowest evaluated Bid and is substantially responsive to
the Bidding Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to be
eligible and qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
43. Notification of 43.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the Employer shall notify
Award the successful Bidder, in writing, that its Bid has been accepted.
43.2 At the same time, the Employer shall also notify all other Bidders of the
results of the bidding. The Employer will publish in an English language
newspaper or well-known freely accessible website the results identifying
the Bid and lot numbers, and the following information: (i) name of each
Bidder who submitted a bid; (ii) bid prices as read out at bid opening; (iii)
name and evaluated prices of each bid that was evaluated; (iv) name of
Bidders whose Bids were rejected and the reasons for their rejection; and
(v) name of the winning Bidder, and the price it offered, as well as the
duration and summary scope of the contract awarded. After publication of
award, unsuccessful Bidders may request in writing to the Employer for a

debriefing seeking explanations on the grounds on which their Bids were

not selected. The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, after publication of contract award, request for a
debriefing.
43.3 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the notification of award shall
constitute a binding Contract.
44. Signing of 44.1 Promptly after notification, the Employer shall send the successful Bidder the
Contract Contract Agreement.
44.2 Within 28 days of receipt of the Contract Agreement, the successful Bidder
shall sign, date, and return it to the Employer.
45. Performance 45.1 Within 28 days of the receipt of notification of award from the Employer, the
Security successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security in accordance with
the conditions of contract, subject to ITB 39.5, using for that purpose the
Performance Security Form included in Section 9 (Contract Forms), or another
form acceptable to the Employer.
45.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-mentioned

Performance Security or sign the Contract shall constitute sufficient
grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the bid security or
execution of the Bid-Securing Declaration. In that event, the Employer
may award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder whose offer is
substantially responsive and is determined by the Employer to be qualified
to perform the Contract satisfactorily.

Section 2- Bid Data Sheet
Section 2- Bid Data Sheet
This section consists of provisions that are specific to this procurement and supplement the
information or requirements included in Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders.
Bangladesh: Bidding Document forAminbazar400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 2.docx
Section 2: Bid Data Sheet Page 2-1
A. General
ITB 1.1 The number of the Invitation for Bids (IFB) is:
01/PGCB/Sec(SSD&QC)/2017/2562, dated:24.04.2017
The Employer is:
Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Limited(PGCB)
The name of the international competitive bidding (ICB) is:
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of

Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation on turnkey basis
The identification number of the ICB is:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS
The number and identification of lots (contracts) comprising this ICB is:
None
ITB 2.1 The Borrower is:
The Peoples Republic of Bangladesh
The name of the project is:

ITB 4.8 Deleted

B. Contents of Bidding Document

ITB 7.1 For clarification purposes only, the Employer's address is:
Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Limited (PGCB)

Attn.: Company Secretary
Street address: Institution of Engineers Building Bhaban
th
Floor/room number: 4 Floor, IEB
City, ZIP code: 8/A Ramna, Dhaka-1000
Country: Bangladesh
Telephone: +88 (2) 9553663, 9550514, 9560064, 9558054
Fax: +88 (2) 9582382
E-mail address: se-design@pgcb.org.bd;
pgcbprojectone@yahoo.com
ITB 7.4 A pre-bid meeting will take place.
The Pre-Bid meeting will take place, at the date, time and place as follows:
Date: 21.05.2017
Time: 11:00 hours Bangladesh Standard Time
Place: Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Limited (PGCB)
Institution of Engineers Building Bhaban
Conference Room, 4th Floor, IEB
8/A Ramna, Dhaka-1000,
Bangladesh
Site visit will not be organized by the Employer.
Bidders are advised to conduct site visits at their own responsibility.
The Employer may arrange necessary permissions if requested by the Bidders.

C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 10.1 The following text is added at the end:
Such kind of translation shall be certified by any notary public or any Gov-
ernment-authorized agency of the Bidder's country.
ITB 11.2 (k) The Bidder shall submit with its Technical Bid the following additional documents:
Not Applicable
ITB 11.3 (d) The Bidder shall submit with its Price Bid the following additional documents:
Cash flow statement for project implementation
ITB 12.1 The units and rates in figures entered into the Price Schedules should be typewrit-
ten or if written by hand, must be in print form. Price Schedules not presented ac-
cordingly may be considered nonresponsive.
ITB 13.1 Alternative bids are:
not permitted
ITB 13.2 Alternatives to the Time Schedule are:
not permitted
ITB 13.4 Alternative technical solutions are:
not permitted
ITB 16.1 (b) The period following completion of plant and services in accordance with provi-
sions of the contract shall be
5 (five) years
ITB 18.1 Bidders shall quote for
The entire plant and services on a single responsibility basis
ITB 18.4 (a)(i) The Incoterm for quoting plant to be supplied from Abroad is:
CIP
Destination is Aminbazar under Dhaka division
ITB 18.6 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall be
Adjustable
The formula for adjusting the prices and explanatory details are speci-
fied in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) clause 11.2 and Ap-

pendix 2 of Contract Agreement. Bidder shall fill out the Tables of Ad-
justment Data in section 4 (Bidding forms).
ITB 19.1 The currencies of the Bid shall be as follows:
(a) The prices shall be quoted either in the currency of Bidders home country,
or in any fully convertible currency of up to three foreign currencies.
(b) A Bidder expecting to incur a portion of its expenditures in the performance
of the Contract in more than one currency, and wishing to be paid accord-
ingly, shall so indicate in the Schedule of Prices and the Letter ofPrice Bid.
(c) If some of the contract expenditures related to Design, Installation and Oth-
er Services are to be incurred in the Employer's country, such expenditures
shall be quoted in either foreign and/or local currency, depending upon the
currency in which the costs are to be incurred.
(d) Bidders may be required by the Employer to clarify their local and foreign
currency requirements, and to substantiate that the amounts included in the
Price Schedules are reasonable and responsive to ITB 18.1 in which case a
detailed breakdown of its foreign currency requirements shall be provided
by the Bidder
(e) During the performance of the contract, the foreign currency portions of the
outstanding balance of the Contract Price may be adjusted by agreement
between the Employer and the Contractor to reflect any changes in foreign
currency requirements for the contract. Any such adjustment shall be ef-
fected by comparing the amounts quoted in the bid with the amounts al-
ready used in the Facilities and the Contractor's future needs for imported
items.
ITB 20.1 The bid validity period shall be.
180 (one hundred eighty) days
ITB 21.1 The Bidder shall furnish a bid security in the amount of:
USD 700,000 (United States dollars seven hundred thousand only)
The following sub-clauses shall be added:
(i) If a Bidder submitted a bid security/bank guarantee which is issued

by any foreign bank located outside Employer's country, such bid se-
curity shall be confirmed by a correspondent bank registered in the
Employer's country.
(ii) The authenticity of the bid security/bank guarantee submitted by a
Bidder shall be examined and verified by the Employer in writing from
the bank issuing the security, prior to finalization of the evaluation re-
port.
(iii) If a bid security/bank guarantee was found non-authentic, the bid
which it covers shall not be considered for subsequent evaluation and
in such case the Employer shall proceed to take punitive measures
against that Bidder as stated under ITB 3.

ITB 21.2 The ineligibility period will be:
Not Applicable
ITB 21.4 Subject to the succeeding sentences, any bid not accompanied by an irrevocable
and callable bid security shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive. If a
Bidder submits a bid security that (i) deviates in form, amount, and/or period of va-
lidity, or (ii) does not provide sufficient identification of the Bidder (including, with-
out limitation, failure to indicate the name of the Joint Venture or, where the Joint
Venture has not yet been constituted, the names of all future Joint Venture Part-
ners), the Employer shall request the Bidder to submit a compliant bid security
within 14 days of receiving such a request. Failure to provide a compliant bid se-
curity within the prescribed period of receiving such a request shall cause the re-
jection of the Bid.
ITB 22.1 In addition to the original Bid, the number of copies is:
3 (three) hardcopies and 2 (two) electronic copies.
In case of discrepancies, the information provided in the "Original" hard

copy of the bid shall prevail.
The electronic copy of the technical bid shall be included in the envelope with
the original technical bid. Data storage medium for electronic submission will
be CD or USB memory.
The electronic copy of the price bid shall be included in the envelope with the
original price bid. Data storage medium for electronic submission will be USB
memory.
The electronic copy of the price bid shall additionally include the price sched-
ules in editable format (MS Excel).
Packing:
Technical Bids:
Each technical bid (original, copy (1 No.), copy (2 No.) and copy (3 No.))
shall be packed in a separate "inner" envelope.
These three inner" envelopes containing the technical bids shall be
packed together in one outer" envelope.
Price Bids:
Each price bid (original, copy (1 No.), copy (2 No.) and copy (3 No.))
shall be packed in a separate inner" envelope.
These three inner" envelopes containing the price bids shall be packed
together in one outer" envelope.
Finally, Technical and Price Bids shall be packed together in one envelope.

ITB 22.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder shall con-
sist of An organisational document, board resolution or its equivalent, or power of
attorney specifying the representative's authority to sign the Bid on behalf of, and
to legally bind, the Bidder. If the Bidder is an intended or an existing Joint
Venture, the power of attorney should be signed by all partners and specify the
authority of the named representative of the Joint Venture to sign on behalf of, and
legally bind, the intended or existing Joint Venture. If the Joint Venture has not yet
been formed, also include evidence from all proposed Joint Venture partners of
their intent to enter into a Joint Venture in the event of a contract award in accord-
ance with ITB 11.2.
ITB 22.2 The Bidder shall submit an acceptable authorization within
15 (fifteen) days.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

ITB 23.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids electronically.
ITB 24.1 For bid submission purposes only, the Employer's address is:
Power Grid Company of BangladeshLimited (PGCB)

Attn.: Company Secretary
Floor/room number: 4th Floor, IEB
Country: Bangladesh
The deadline for bid submission is:
Date: 21.06.2017
Time: 11:30 h Bangladesh Standard Time
ITB 27.1 The bid opening of Technical Bids shall take place at:

Floor/room number: Conference Room, 13th Floor, IEB
Country: Bangladesh
Date: 21.06.2017
Time: 11:35 h Bangladesh Standard Time
ITB 27.5 The Letter of Technical Bid shall be initialled by at least three representatives of
the Employer attending Technical Bid opening.
ITB 27.10 The Letter of Price Bid and Price Schedules shall be initialled by at least three rep-
resentatives of the Employer attending the Price Bid opening.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

ITB 37.1 The currency that shall be used for bid evaluation and comparison purposes to
convert all bid prices expressed in various currencies into a single currency is:
BDT (Bangladesh Taka)
The source of the selling exchange rate shall be:
The selling exchange rate of Sonali Bank Limited in Bangladesh.

For the date selling exchange rates not quoted/available from Sonali
Bank Limited, rate available on the previous working day shall be
used.
The date for the selling exchange rate shall be:
The date of opening of the Technical Proposal
ITB 38.1 A margin of preference shall apply.

Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria 3-1
Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Table of Criteria
1. Evaluation ................................................................................................................... 3-2

1.1 Technical Evaluation .........................................................................................................3-2
1.2 Alternative Technical Solutions .......................................................................................3-2
1.3 Economic Evaluation ........................................................................................................3-2
1.4 Multiple Contracts .............................................................................................................3-5
2. Qualification ............................................................................................................... 3-5
2.1 Eligibility .............................................................................................................................3-5

2.1.1 Nationality ..................................................................................................................3-5
2.1.2 Conflict of Interest ......................................................................................................3-5
2.1.3 ADB Eligibility.............................................................................................................3-5
2.1.4 Government-Owned Enterprise .................................................................................3-5
2.1.5 United Nations Eligibility ............................................................................................3-5
2.2 Pending Litigation and Arbitration ..................................................................................3-6
2.2.1 Pending Litigation and Arbitration...............................................................................3-6
2.3 Financial Requirements ....................................................................................................3-6

2.3.1 Historical Financial Performance ...............................................................................3-6
2.3.2 Average Annual Turnover ..........................................................................................3-7
2.3.3 Financial Resources Requirements ...........................................................................3-7
2.4 Bidder's Experience ........................................................................................................3-08

2.4.1 Contracts of SImilar Size and Nature ......................................................................3-08
2.4.2 Experience in Key Activities .....................................................................................3-10
2.5 Subcontractors ................................................................................................................3-11

3-2 Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
1. Evaluation
1.1 Technical Evaluation

In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 34.1 (a) (b), other relevant factors are as follows:
Evaluation of the Bidders Technical Proposal will include an assessment of the Bidders
technical capacity to mobilize key equipment and personnel for the contract consistent with
its proposal regarding work methods, scheduling, and material sourcing in sufficient detail
and fully in accordance with the requirements stipulated in Volume-II, Section 6 (Employers
Requirements).
Non-compliance with equipment and personnel requirements described in Section 6

(Employers Requirements) shall not normally be a ground for bid rejection and such non-
compliance will be subject to clarification during bid evaluation and rectification prior to
contract award.
1.2 Alternative Technical Solutions
Technical alternatives, if permitted under ITB 13.4, will be evaluated as follows:

Technical alternatives are not permitted.
1.3 Economic Evaluation

The criteria listed in ITB 39.2 I (a)-(e) shall apply.
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 39.2 I (a)(e), other relevant factors are as follows:
Adjustments in price that result from the procedures outlined below shall be added, for
purposes of comparative evaluation only, to arrive at an Evaluated Bid Price. Bid prices
quoted by Bidders shall remain unaltered.
1.3.1 Quantifiable Deviations and Omissions

Quantifiable Deviations and Omissions from the contractual obligations: the evaluation shall
be based on the evaluated cost of fulfilling the contract in compliance with all contractual
obligations under this Bidding Document.
(a) Pursuant to ITB 33.3 & 39.2, the cost of all quantifiable non-material non-conformities or
omissions (minor omissions or missing items) shall be evaluated. The Employer will make its
own assessment of the cost of any non-material non-conformities and omissions for the
purpose of ensuring fair comparison of bids.

(b) Scope of work of each bid will be examined for completeness and compliance with the
contract requirements. If item(s) appear to be excluded, an amount representing the average
amount for these excluded items of all other responsive bids will be added to the bid price for
evaluation purposes.
If any Bidder has not quoted price against any particular item or kept blank in price column,
the price of that item will be deemed to be included in the total bid price.
(c) In case there is a discrepancy between the quantity of an item quoted by the Bidder and the
quantity specified in the bidding documents,the quantity specified in the bidding documents
shall prevail, and the total cost will be corrected by multiplying the unit rate and quantity.
(d) In case a Bidder quotes any additional item(s) not mentioned in the bidding documents,
these items shall be excluded and the total quoted bid price shall be corrected accordingly.
(e) In case an item is quoted without indicating any quantity, the total price quoted for this item
shall prevail and the unit price of that item shall be obtained by dividing the total quoted price
by the quantity specified in the bidding documents.
(f) If
(i) discount(s)/rebate(s) offered by the Bidder is/are percentage discount(s) and the price
component(s) on which the said discount(s) apply is not indicated in the bid, this
discount / rebate shall be considered on the total bid price [i.e. proportionately on each
price component] during evaluation and in the event of award.
(ii) However, if a lumpsum discount is offered, the foreign currency portion of the same shall
be considered in full on the foreign currency price component of the bid price, and the
Bangladesh Taka portion shall be considered in full on the Bangladesh Taka price
component of the bid price (by proportionately reducing foreign currency/Bangladesh
Taka price of individual items) during evaluation and in case of award.
To obtain unit prices of each item, the discount mentioned in (i) and (ii) above shall be
applied proportionately to each individual item, and the above unit price shall be applicable
for the entire contract period.
1.3.2 Time Schedule

Time to complete the plant and services from the effective date specified in Article 3 of the
Contract Agreement for determining the time for completion of pre-commissioning activities
is: 24 months (twenty four months). No credit will be given for earlier completion.
1.3.3 Operating and Maintenance Costs

To arrive at an "evaluated bid price", operating costs of the transformers (each transformer of the
scope, except the auxiliary transformer) will be taken into account which includes the
capitalization of transformer losses which will be evaluated in accordance with the following
formula.
For each unit of transformer, Capitalization of transformer losses = N * a + L * b + M * c
Where
N= No-load loss (core loss) at rated voltage in kW
L= Load loss (copper loss) at 75 C, 50 Hz maximum continuous rating in kW

M= Total load of transformer cooling fans at transformer maximum continuous rating

in kW (when all cooling fans are in operation)
a= Cost/kW of no-load loss (core loss) valued at 600,000 Bangladesh Taka
b= Cost/kW of load loss (copper loss) valued at 300,000 Bangladesh Taka
c= Cost/kW of auxiliary power valued at 300,000 Bangladesh Taka
The details of the above are explained in the technical specifications of the transformer
in Section 4 of volume 2 of the bidding documents.
1.3.4 Functional Guarantees of the Facilities

Not Applicable
1.3.5 Work, Services, Facilities, etc., to be Provided by the Employer

Please refer to the Annexure-6 of Section-9 (Contract Forms) in Volume-I.
1.3.6 Specific Additional Criteria
Not applicable
1.3.7 Domestic Preference

A margin of preference will be granted to eligible domestically produced Plant and Equipment
in accordance with the following provisions:
(a) The preference margin shall not be applied to the whole facility but only to the eligible
domestically produced Plant and Equipment within the contract.
(b) Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts supplied from abroad shall be quoted CIP (Section 4,
Bidding Forms, Schedule No. 1) and Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts supplied from
within the Employers country shall be quoted EXW (ex works, ex factory, ex
warehouse, ex showroom, or off-the-shelf, as applicable) free of sales and similar taxes
(Section 4, Bidding Forms, Schedule No. 2).
(c) All other cost components for services and works such as costs for design, local
handling, transportation, storage, installation, and commissioning shall be quoted
separately (Section 4, Bidding Forms, Schedule No. 3 - Design Services and Schedule
No. 4 - Installation and Other Services).
(d) In the comparison of Bids, only the CIP price component of each Bid for the Plant and
Equipment offered from outside the Employers country shall be increased by 15%.
(e) No margin of preference shall be applied to any of the services or works included in the
contract.
(f) Bidders shall not be permitted or required to modify the mix of local and foreign Plant
and Equipment after bid opening.

1.4 Multiple Contracts

Not applicable
2. Qualification
It is the legal entity or entities comprising the Bidder, and not the Bidders parent companies,
subsidiaries, or affiliates, that must satisfy the qualification criteria described below.
2.1 Eligibility
Criteria Compliance Requirements Documents
Joint Venture
Single Submission
Requirement All Partners Each One
Entity Requirements
Combined Partner Partner
2.1.1 Nationality
Nationality in accordance with must meet must meet must meet not Forms
requirement requirement requirement applicable
ITB Subclause 4.2. ELI - 1; ELI - 2
with attachments
2.1.2 Conflict of Interest

No conflicts of interest in must meet must meet must meet not Letter of Technical
accordance with ITB Subclause requirement requirement requirement applicable Bid
4.3.
2.1.3 ADB Eligibility

Not having been declared must meet must meet must meet not Letter of Technical
ineligible by ADB, as described requirement requirement requirement applicable Bid
in ITB Subclause 4.4.
2.1.4 Government-Owned Enterprise

Bidder required to meet must meet must meet must meet not Forms
conditions of ITB Subclause 4.5. requirement requirement requirement applicable ELI - 1; ELI - 2
with attachments
2.1.5 United Nations Eligibility

Not having been excluded by an must meet must meet must meet not Letter of Technical
act of compliance with a UN requirement requirement requirement applicable Bid
Security Council resolution in
accordance with ITB Subclause
4.7.

2.2 Pending Litigation and Arbitration
Pending litigation and arbitration criterion shall apply.
2.2.1 Pending Litigation and Arbitration

Joint Venture
Single Submission
Entity Requirements
All pending litigation and must meet not must meet not Form LIT - 1
requirement applicable requirement applicable
arbitration, if any, shall be
by itself or by itself or
treated as resolved against the as partner to as partner to
Bidder and so shall in total not past or past or
represent more than 50(fifty) existing Joint existing Joint
Venture Venture
percent of the Bidders net worth
calculated as the difference
between total assets and total
liabilities.
2.3 Financial Situation

2.3.1 Historical Financial Performance

Joint Venture
Single Submission
Entity Requirements
Submission of audited financial must meet not must meet not Form FIN - 1 with
statements or, if not required by requirement applicable requirement applicable attachments
the law of the Bidders country,
other financial statements
acceptable to the Employer, for
the last 3(three) years to
demonstrate the current
soundness of the Bidders
financial position. As a
minimum, the Bidders net worth
for the last year calculated as
the difference between total
assets and total liabilities should
be positive.

2.3.2 Average Annual Turnover

Joint Venture
Single Submission
Entity Requirements
Minimum average annual must meet must meet must meet must meet Form FIN - 2
turnover of $ 31,250,000 (USD requirement requirement 25% (ten 40% (forty
thirty one point two five percent) percent)
million) calculated as total of the of the
requirement requirement
certified payments received for
contracts in progress or
completed, within the last
3(three) years.
2.3.3 Financial Resources
If the bid evaluation process and the decision for the award of the Contract takes more than one (1) year
from the date of bid submission, Bidders may be asked to resubmit their current contract commitments and
latest information on financial resources supported by latest audited accounts / audited financial statements,
or if not required by the law of the Bidders country, other financial statements acceptable to the Employer,
and the Bidders financial capacity shall be reassessed on this basis.

Joint Venture
Single Submission
Entity Requirements
For Single Entities: must meet not not not Form FIN 3 and
requirement applicable applicable applicable Form FIN - 4
The Bidder must demonstrate that
its financial resources defined in FIN
- 3, less its financial obligations for
its current contract commitments
defined in FIN - 4, meet or exceed
the total requirement for the Subject
Contract of $4 million.
For Joint Ventures: not not not must meet Form FIN 3 and
applicable applicable applicable requirement Form FIN - 4
(1) One partner must demonstrate
that its financial resources
defined in FIN - 3, less its
financial obligations for its own
current contract commitments
defined in FIN - 4, meet or
exceed its required share of 1.6
million from the total
requirement for the Subject
Contract.

AND
(2) Each partner must demonstrate not not must meet not Form FIN 3 and
applicable applicable requirement applicable Form FIN - 4
that its financial resources
defined in FIN - 3, less its
financial obligations for its own
current contract commitments
defined in FIN - 4, meet or
exceed its required share of 1.0
million from the total
requirement for the Subject
Contract.
AND
(3) The joint venture must not must meet not not Form FIN 3 and
applicable requirement applicable applicable Form FIN - 4
demonstrate that the combined
financial resources of all
partners defined in FIN - 3, less
all the partners total financial
obligations for the current
contract commitments defined
in FIN - 4, meet or exceed the
total requirement for the
Subject Contract of $4 million
2.4 Bidders Experience

2.4.1 Contracts of Similar Size and Nature
Joint Venture
Single Submission
Requirement
Entity All Partners Each One Requirements
Participation in at least three must meet must meet not not Form EXP 1
contracts that have been requirement requirement applicable applicable
successfully or substantially as follows;
completed within the last 10(ten)
years ( counting backward from Either one
the bid submission deadline) partner must
and that are similar to the meet the
proposed contract, where the requirement
value of the Bidders
participation in each contract
exceeds Or
$ 21,000,000 (USD Twenty one
million)

The similarity of the Bidders One partner

participation shall be based on must
the physical size, nature of demonstrate
works, complexity, methods, two (2)
technology or other successfully
characteristics as described in or
Section 6 (Employers substantially
Requirements). completed
contract and
The scope of each contract must another
include design, supply, partner
installation, testing & demonstrate
commissioning of new or one (1)
extension of existing 380/X kV or successfully
above voltage AIS/GIS or
substation with at least four (4) substantially
bays of 380 kV or above voltage completed
and at least one (1) power contract
transformer 380/X kV voltage
rating or above and 300 MVA
power rating or above.
For the above mentioned

contracts executed during the
period mentioned above :
At least one (1) of the above

mentioned contracts shall be
completely new 380/X kV or
above voltage AIS substation

mentioned contracts shall be in
successful operation for a
minimum of three (3) years
counting backward from the bid
submission deadline.

mentioned contracts must be
completed outside the Bidder's
own country.

Evidence of above experience

shall be submitted in the bid. It
shall be given on the user's
letterhead, indicating address,
telephone and fax numbers of
the user. It shall include the
name of the project, name of the
employer, description of the
work, commissioning date and
contract amount.
2.4.2 Experience in Key Activities (Not Applicable)

(Must be complied with by the Bidder. In case of a Joint Venture Bidder, at least one of the partners must have
experience in the key activity. If the activity can be subcontracted, the requirement must be specified in criterion 2.5 of
Section 3.)
Single Joint Venture Submission

Entity Combined Partner Partner
Requirements
For the above or other must meet not applicable not must meet Form EXP - 2
applicable
contracts executed during the requirements requirements
period stipulated in 2.4.1
above, a minimum experience
in the following key activities:

2.5 Subcontractors
Subcontractors or Manufacturers for the fallowing major items of plant and services must meet the
following minimum criteria, herein listed for that item. Failure to comply with this requirement will result
in rejection of the subcontractor but not the Bidder.
List of minimum required Type test reports can be found in Volume III: Schedule-I.
Evidence from the End Users of satisfactory service of respectable equipment shall be issued by the
end users respective letterhead stationary indicating:
official name, address, telephone and fax numbers of the user

project/contract name & number against which the equipment has been supplied & installed
technical details of the equipment (indicated in the table below)
substation name where the equipment has been installed
Installation date
end users issuing date in their letter
Equipment/
No. Minimum Criteria to be met Document Submission Requirements
Services
1. Power At least ten (10) years of experience in Form EXP-3
Transformer manufacturing minimum 380 kV or Reference list : Bidder shall
higher rating power transformers, with provide Manufacturers supply
the transformer capacity of 500 MVA and record (Reference list) of the 3-
above, with the equipment in satisfactory phase power transformers, with
service for a minimum of three (3) years the rating of 380 kV, 500 MVA or
on the date of bid opening. above in the last ten (10) years
Minimum delivery of at least six (6) 3- Users letter: Evidence from end
phase power transformers, 380 kV, 500 users (at least three (3)) of
MVA or above ratings over the last ten satisfactory service of equipment
(10) years. (same or higher rating) of
Minimum technical details of the minimum three (3) years
equipment which have to be mentioned Authorization letter:
in the End Users letter: transformers Manufacturer's authorization letter,
voltage level, capacity, type of with confirmation of experience
transformer - single phase or three and satisfactory operation of the
phase and installation/commissioning offered equipment and
date. Manufacturer's reference list
Implemented ISO 9001 ISO certificates
Type test report on 3-phase power Test report: Bidder shall submit
transformers with minimum rating of satisfactory type test & short-circuit
380kV, 500MVA manufactured by withstand test reports of required
proposed manufacturer shall fulfil the transformer.
requirements mentioned in schedule-I of Technical data sheets, drawings,
volume-3 of 3. wiring diagrams, catalogues and
other technical documents as per
tender requirement
2. Circuit At least ten (10) years of experience in Form EXP-3

Equipment/
Services
Breaker manufacturing minimum 380 kV or Reference list: Manufacturers
higher rating circuit breakers, with the supply record (Reference list) of
equipment in satisfactory service for a the 380 kV or higher rating circuit
minimum of three (3) years as on the breaker in the last ten (10) years
date of bid opening Users letter: Evidence from end
Minimum delivery of at least one users (at least two (2)) of
hundred (100) 380 kV or higher rating satisfactory service of equipment
circuit breaker over the last ten (10) (same or higher rating) of
years. minimum three (3) years
Minimum technical details of the Authorization letter:
equipment which have to be mentioned Manufacturer's authorization letter,
in the End Users letter: circuit breakers with confirmation of experience
voltage level and capacity (rated current and satisfactory operation of the
and short circuit current) and offered equipment and
installation/commissioning date. Manufacturer's reference list
Implemented ISO 9001 ISO certificates
The type test reports shall fulfil the List of performed type tests and
requirements mentioned in schedule-I of type test reports for each type as
volume-3 of 3. per schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.
Technical data sheets, drawings,
wiring diagrams, catalogues and
other technical documents
3. Disconnector At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
Switch experience in manufacturing minimum Reference list: Manufacturers
380 kV or higher rating disconnectors, supply record (Reference list) of
with the equipment in satisfactory service the 380 kV or higher rating
for a minimum of three (3) years as on disconnectors in the last ten (10)
the date of bid opening. years
Minimum delivery of at least one Users letter : Evidence from end
hundred (100) 380 kV or higher rating users (at least one) of satisfactory
disconnectors over the last ten (10) service of equipment (same or
years. higher rating) of minimum three (3)
Minimum technical details of the years
in the End Users letter: disconnectors Manufacturer's authorization letter,
voltage level and capacity (rated current with confirmation of experience
and short circuit current) and satisfactory operation of the
Implemented ISO 9001 offered equipment and
Type tests for each type as per in Manufacturer's Reference list
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3. ISO certificates
List of performed type tests and
type test reports for each type as
per in schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.

Equipment/
Services
4 Instrument At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
Transformers experience in manufacturing minimum Reference list: Manufacturers
380 kV or higher rating Instrument supply record (Reference list) of
transformers, with the equipment in the 380 kV or higher rating
satisfactory service for a minimum of instrument transformers in the last
three (3) years on the date of bid ten (10) years
opening Users letter: Evidence from end
Minimum delivery of at least one users (at least one) of satisfactory
hundred (100) 380 kV or higher rating service of equipment (same or
instrument transformers over the last ten higher rating) of minimum three
(10) years. (3) years
in the End Users letter: instrument with confirmation of experience
transformers voltage level and type and satisfactory operation of the
Performed type tests for each type as Manufacturer's reference list
per schedule-I of volume-3 of 3. ISO certificates
List of performed Type tests and
reports
5 Surge At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
Arrester experience in manufacturing minimum Reference list: Bidder shall
380 kV or higher rating surge arresters, provide Factory's supply record
with the equipment in satisfactory service (Reference list) of the 380 kV or
for a minimum of three (3) years on the higher rating surge arresters in the
date of bid opening. last ten (10) years
Minimum delivery of at least one Users letter : Evidence from end
surge arresters over the last ten (10) service of equipment (same or
years. higher rating) of minimum three
Minimum technical details of the (3) years
in the End Users letter: surge arresters Manufacturer's authorization letter,
voltage level and type with confirmation of experience
Implemented ISO 9001 and satisfactory operation of the
Type tests for each type as per offered equipment and
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3. Manufacturer's reference list
ISO certificates
per schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.

Equipment/
Services
catalogues and other technical
documents
6 Post & Disc At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
Insulators experience in manufacturing minimum Reference list: Manufacturers
380 kV or higher rating post insulators, supply record (Reference list) of
with the equipment in satisfactory service the 380 kV or higher rating post
for a minimum of three (3) years on the insulators in the last ten (10) years
date of bid opening. Users letter: Evidence from end
Minimum delivery of at least one users (at least one) of satisfactory
hundred (100) 380 kV or higher rating service of equipment (same or
post insulators over the last ten (10) higher rating) of minimum three
years. (3) years
in the End Users letter: post insulators with confirmation of experience
voltage level and type and satisfactory operation of the
Type tests for each type as per Manufacturer's reference list
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3. ISO certificates
documents
7 Wave trap At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
experience in manufacturing minimum Reference list: Bidder shall
380 kV or higher rating wave traps, with provide Manufacturers supply
the equipment in satisfactory service for record (Reference list) of the 380
a minimum of three (3) years on the date kV or higher rating wave traps in
of bid opening. the last ten (10) years
Minimum delivery of at least one Users letter: Evidence from end
wave traps over the last ten (10) years. service of equipment (same or
Minimum technical details of the higher rating) of minimum three (3)
equipment which have to be mentioned years
in the End Users letter: wave traps Authorization letter:
voltage level and rated current Manufacturer's authorization letter,
Implemented ISO 9001 with confirmation of experience
Type tests for each type as per and satisfactory operation of the
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3. offered equipment and
Manufacturer's reference list
ISO certificates

Equipment/
Services
documents
8 Battery & At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
Charger experience in manufacturing ACU Reference list: Supply Record of
battery, Changer and/or complete DC at least last 10 (ten) years
system, with the equipment in Users letter: Evidence from end
satisfactory service for a minimum of users (at least one) of satisfactory
three (3) years on the date of bid service of equipment
opening Authorization letter:
Minimum average delivery over the last Manufacturer's authorization letter,
3 years of ten (10) complete substation with confirmation of experience
DC systems and satisfactory operation of the
Type tests as per schedule-I of volume- Manufacturer's reference list
3 of 3. ISO certificates
List of performed Type tests &
type test reports as per schedule-I
of volume-3 of 3.
block diagrams, wiring diagrams,
documents
9 Substation The manufacturer of Substation Control & Form EXP-3
Automation Automation System and Protection Relay Reference list: Supply Record of
system & shall be the same. at least last 5 (five) years
Protection
At least last five (5) years of experience Users letter: Evidence from end
Relay
in manufacturing high-voltage substation users (at least three) of
automation systems, as per IEC 61850 satisfactory service of equipment
standard, with the equipment in Authorization letter:
satisfactory service for a minimum of Manufacturer's authorization letter,
three (3) years on the date of bid with confirmation of experience
opening and satisfactory operation of the
At least last ten (10) years of offered equipment and
experience in manufacturing protection Manufacturer's reference list
relay with the equipment in satisfactory ISO certificates
service for a minimum of three (3) years List of performed Type tests &
on the date of bid opening type test reports as per schedule-I
Minimum average delivery over the last of volume-3 of 3.
3 years of ten (10) complete substation Technical data sheets, drawings,
automation systems, as per IEC 61850 block diagrams, wiring diagrams,
standard catalogues and other technical
Implemented ISO 9001 documents

Equipment/
Services
Type test as per schedule-I of volume-3
of 3.
10 Telecommuni At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
cation experience in manufacturing Reference list: Supply Record of
System - communication equipment, with the at least last 10 (ten) years
Fibre optic
equipment in satisfactory service for a Users letter: Evidence from end
multiplexer
equipment minimum of three (3) years on the date users (at least one) of satisfactory
for of bid opening service of equipment
communicati Minimum average delivery over the last Authorization letter:
on and 3 years of ten (10) complete substation Manufacturer's authorization letter,
protection communication equipment with confirmation of experience
Implemented ISO 9001 and satisfactory operation of the
Type test as per schedule-I of volume-3 offered equipment and
of 3. Manufacturer's reference list
ISO certificates
List of performed Type tests and
Type test reports as per schedule-I
of volume-3 of 3.
documents
11 DFDR At least last ten (10) years of Form EXP-3
experience in manufacturing DFDR for Reference list: Supply Record of
high voltage substations, with the at least last 10 (ten) years
equipment in satisfactory service for a Users letter: Evidence from end
minimum of three (3) years on the date users (at least one) of satisfactory
of bid opening. service of equipment
Minimum average delivery over the last Authorization letter:
3 years of ten (10) DFDR Manufacturer's authorization letter,
Implemented ISO 9001 with confirmation of experience
Type test as per schedule-I of volume-3 and satisfactory operation of the
of 3. offered equipment and
Manufacturer's reference list
ISO certificates
List of performed Type tests &
Type test reports as per schedule-I
of volume-3 of 3.
documents
12 Subcontract- If a bidder himself will do electrical and civil Form EXP-3
or for work, EQC 2.4.1 only will be applied. If a Subcontractors reference list and
executing the bidder proposes a subcontractor, the end users letters
installation

Equipment/
Services
works subcontractor shall meet the following
criteria:
At least three contracts for the
installation of new AIS substation 220/X
kV or higher rated voltage with at least
two bays and one power transformer in
the last ten (10) years
In the case of a Bidder who offers to supply and install major items of plant under the contract, which
the Bidder did not manufacture or otherwise produce, the Bidder shall provide the Manufacturers
authorization, using the form provided in Section 4 (Bidding Forms), showing that the Bidder has been
duly authorized by the Manufacturer or producer of the related plant and equipment or component to
supply and install that item in the Employers country. Failure to submit the Manufacturers
authorization at the first instance is considered a minor, nonmaterial omission and shall be subject to
clarification. However, failure of the Bidder to submit the omitted authorization shall lead to rejection of
the Subcontractor or Manufacturer of the item under evaluation in accordance with ITB 35.4.

Section 4 - Bidding Forms 4-1
Section 4 - Bidding Forms

This section contains the forms to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of its Bid.
Table of Forms
Letter of Technical Bid .............................................................................................................. 4-2

Letter of Price Bid ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Price Schedules ......................................................................................................................... 4-6

Schedule No. 1. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad .............................................4-7
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employers Country ........4-7
Schedule No. 3. Design Services ............................................................................................................4-7
Schedule No. 4. Installation and Other Services .....................................................................................4-7
Schedule No. 5. Grand Summary ............................................................................................................4-7
Schedule No. 6. Recommended Spare Parts ..........................................................................................4-7
Tables of Adjustment Data ........................................................................................................ 4-8
Bid Security................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Technical Proposal .................................................................................................................. 4-10

Site Organization .....................................................................................................................................4-11
Method Statement ...................................................................................................................................4-12
Mobilization Schedule ..............................................................................................................................4-13
Construction Schedule.............................................................................................................................4-14
Plant ........................................................................................................................................................4-15
Personnel ................................................................................................................................................4-16
Form PER 1: Proposed Personnel .................................................................................................4-16
Form PER 2: Resume of Proposed Personnel ..............................................................................4-17
Equipment ...............................................................................................................................................4-18
Proposed Subcontractors/Manufactureres for Major Items of Plant and Services .................................4-19
Manufacturer's Authorization ..................................................................................................................4-20
Time Schedule ........................................................................................................................................4-21
Bidders Qualification ............................................................................................................... 4-22

Form ELI - 1: Bidders Information Sheet .................................................................................................4-23
Form ELI - 2: Joint Venture Information Sheet .........................................................................................4-24
Form LIT - 1: Pending Litigation and Arbitration .......................................................................................4-25
Form FIN - 1: Historical Financial Performance .......................................................................................4-26
Form FIN - 2: Average Annual Turnover ..................................................................................................4-27
Form FIN 3: Availability of Financial Resources ...................................................................................4-28
Form FIN- 4: Financial Requirements for Current Contract Commitments .............................................4-29
Form FIN- 5: Compliance Check of Financial Resources ......................................................................4-30
Form EXP 1: Contracts of Similar Size and Nature ..............................................................................4-31
Form EXP 2: Experience in Key Activities............................................................................................4-33
Form EXP 3: Subcontractors ...............................................................................................................4-34
BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 4.doc4

4-2 Section 4 - Bidding Forms
Letter of Technical Bid

-- Note
The bidder must accomplish the Letter of Technical Bid on its letterhead clearly showing the bidders complete name
and address.
Date: ..................................................
ICB No.: PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS
Invitation for Bid No.: 01/PGCB/Sec(SSD&QC)/2017/2562
To:.............................................................................................................................................................
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addenda
issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) 8._____________________________
(b) We offer to design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, pre-commission, and commission in
conformity with the Bidding Document the following Plant and Services:
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Aminbazar 400/230 kV

Substation on turnkey basis
(c) Our Bid consisting of the Technical Bid and the Price Bid shall be valid for a period of . . . . .
days from the date fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding
Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the
expiration of that period.
(d) We, including any Subcontractors or Manufacturers for any part of the Contract, have or will
have nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB 4.2.
(e) We, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part of the Contract, do not have any
conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4.3.
(f) We are not participating, as a Bidder in more than one bid in this bidding process in accordance
with ITB 4.3(e), other than alternative offers submitted in accordance with ITB 13.
(g) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part of
the contract, has not been declared ineligible by ADB, under the Employers country laws or
official regulations or by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security
Council.

(h) [We are not a government-owned enterprise] / [We are a government-owned enterprise but
1
meet the requirements of ITB 4.5].
(i) We agree to permit ADB or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and other
documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors appointed by
ADB.
(j) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to mobilizing key equipment and personnel in accordance
with the requirements set forth in Section 6 (Employers Requirements), volume-I and our
technical proposal, or as otherwise agreed with the Employer.
Name .................................................................................................................................................
In the capacity of ...............................................................................................................................
Signed ...............................................................................................................................................
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of .........................................................................
Date ...................................................................................................................................................
1
Use one of the two options as appropriate.

Letter of Price Bid

-- Note
The bidder must accomplish the Letter of Price Bid on its letterhead clearly showing the bidders complete name and
address.
Date: ..................................................
ICB No.: PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS
Invitation for Bid No.: 01/PGCB/Sec(SSD&QC)/2017/2562
To:.............................................................................................................................................................
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including Addenda
issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) 8.______________________________
(b) We offer to design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, pre-commission, and commission in
conformity with the Bidding Document the following Plant and Services:
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Aminbazar 400/230 kV

Substation on turnkey basis
(c) The total bid price, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is the sum of
[amount of foreign currency in words], [amount in figures], and [amount of local currency in words], [amount
in figures]
The total bid price from the Grand Summary (Schedule No. 5) should be entered by the Bidder inside this
box. Absence of the total bid price in the Letter of Price Bid may result in the rejection of the bid.
(d) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are as follows: _____________
(e) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of ............. days from the date fixed for the submission
deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and
may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.
(f) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the
Bidding Document.

(g) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to the
1
bidding process or execution of the Contract:
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount

......................................... ........................................ ............................... ......................
......................................... ........................................ ............................... ..................... .
(h) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your
notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is
prepared and executed.
(i) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that
you may receive.
(j) We agree to permit ADB or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and other
documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors appointed by
ADB.
Name .................................................................................................................................................
In the capacity of ...............................................................................................................................
Signed ...............................................................................................................................................
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of .........................................................................
Date ...................................................................................................................................................
1
If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate None.

Price Schedules
PREAMBLE
General
1. The Price Schedules are divided into separate Schedules as follows:
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from within the Employers Country
Schedule No. 5: Grand Summary
2. The Schedules do not generally give a full description of the plant to be supplied and the services
to be performed under each item. Bidders shall be deemed to have read the Employers
Requirements and other sections of the Bidding Document and reviewed the Drawings to
ascertain the full scope of the requirements included in each item prior to filling in the rates and
prices. The entered rates and prices shall be deemed to cover the full scope as aforesaid,
including overheads and profit.
3. If Bidders are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek clarification in
accordance with ITB 7 prior to submitting their bid.
Pricing
4. The units and rates in figures entered into the Price Schedules should be typewritten or if written
by hand, must be in print form. Price Schedules not presented accordingly may be considered
nonresponsive. Any alterations necessary due to errors, etc., shall be initialed by the Bidder.
As specified in the Bid Data Sheet and Special Conditions of Contract, prices shall be fixed and
firm for the duration of the Contract, or prices shall be subject to adjustment in accordance with
the corresponding Appendix (Price Adjustment) to the Contract Agreement.
5. Bid prices shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified in the
Instructions to Bidders in the Bidding Document.
For each item, Bidders shall complete each appropriate column in the respective Schedules,
giving the price breakdown as indicated in the Schedules.
Prices given in the Schedules against each item shall be for the scope covered by that item as
detailed in Section 6 (Employers Requirements) or elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
6. Payments will be made to the Contractor in the currency or currencies indicated under each
respective item.
7. When requested by the Employer for the purposes of making payments or part payments, valuing
variations or evaluating claims, or for such other purposes as the Employer may reasonably
require, the Contractor shall provide the Employer with a breakdown of any composite or lump
sum items included in the Schedules.

Schedules of Rates and Prices
Please refer to Schedule B (Bid Prices and Schedules) of Volume-III, for the following schedules:
Country of Origin Declaration Form
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employers Country
Schedule No. 4 - Installation and Other Services

Tables of Adjustment Data

Table A - Local Currency
Bidders Bidders
Index Base Value
Index Description Source of Index Local Currency Proposed
Code and Date
Amount Weighting
Non adjustable
--- --- --- a: 0.15
b: 0.22
c: 0.25
d: 0.15
e: __0.03_______
f: 0.20
Total 1.00
Table B - Foreign Currency
Name of Currency: __________________________________________________________________

Insert name of currency. If the bidder wishes to quote in more than one foreign currency , but in no case
more than three, this table shall be repeated for each foreign currency.
Bidders
Source of Base Value Equivalent in Bidders Proposed
Index Code Index Description Currency in
Index and Date FC1 Weighting
Type/Amount
Non adjustable --- --- --- a: 0.15

b: 0.22
c: 0.25
d: 0.15
e: __0.03_______
f: 0.20
Total 1.00
The base date shall be the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of the bid.
Tables of Adjustment Data shall only be included if prices are to be quoted as adjustable prices in accordance with ITB
18.6.

Bid Security
Bank Guarantee
1
............................................................. Banks name, and address of issuing branch or office .............................................................
Beneficiary: ................................ Name and address of employer ............................................

Date: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bid Security No.: ...................................................................................................................................................................................
We have been informed that . . . . . name of the bidder. . . . . (hereinafter called "the Bidder") has
submitted to you its bid dated . . . . . . . . . (hereinafter called "the Bid") for the execution of . . . . . . . .
name of contract . . . . . . . under Invitation for Bids No. . . . . . . . . . (the IFB).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a bid
guarantee.
At the request of the Bidder, we . . . . . name of Bank. . . . . hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you
any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of . . . . . . . . . .amount in figures . . . . . . . . . (. . . . . .
.amount in words . . . . . . . ) upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written
statement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its obligation(s) under the bid conditions, because the
Bidder:
(a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder in the Letters of
Technical and Price Bid; or
(b) does not accept the correction of errors in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders (hereinafter
the ITB); or
(c) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during the period of bid validity,
(i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Agreement, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the
Performance Security, in accordance with the ITB.
This guarantee will expire (a) if the Bidder is the successful Bidder, upon our receipt of copies of the
Contract Agreement signed by the Bidder and the Performance Security issued to you upon the
instruction of the Bidder; or (b) if the Bidder is not the successful Bidder, upon the earlier of (i) our
receipt of a copy of your notification to the Bidder of the name of the successful Bidder, or (ii) 28 days
after the expiration of the Bidders bid.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the office on
or before that date.
2
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 458.
. . . . . . . . . . . .Banks seal and authorized signature(s) . . . . . . . . . .
-- Note
In case of a joint venture, the bid security must be in the name of all partners to the joint venture that submits the
bid.
1
All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the final document.
2
Or 758 as applicable.

Technical Proposal
Site Organization
Method Statement
Mobilization Schedule
Construction Schedule
Plant
Personnel
Equipment
Proposed Subcontractors for Major Items of Plant and Services
Manufacturers Authorization
Time Schedule
Functional Guarantee of the Proposed Facilities

Site Organization

Method Statement

Mobilization Schedule

Construction Schedule

Plant

Personnel
Form PER 1: Proposed Personnel
Bidders should provide the details of proposed personnel and their experience record in the relevant
Information Forms below for each of the candidate.
1. Title of position*
Name
Name
Name
Name
etc. Title of position*
Name
-- Note --
* As listed in Section 6 (Employers Requirements).

Form PER 2: Resume of Proposed Personnel
The Bidder shall provide all the information requested below. Use one form for each position.
Position
Personnel Name Date of birth

information
Professional qualifications
Present Name of employer

employment
Address of employer
Telephone Contact (manager/personnel officer)
Fax E-mail
Job title Years with present employer
Summarize professional experience in reverse chronological order. Indicate particular technical and
managerial experience relevant to the project.
From To Company/Project/Position/Relevant Technical and Management Experience

Equipment
Form EQU: Equipment
The Bidder shall provide adequate information and details to demonstrate clearly that it has the capability
to meet the equipment requirements indicated in Section 6 (Employers Requirements), using the Forms
below. A separate Form shall be prepared for each item of equipment listed, or for alternative equipment
proposed by the Bidder.
Item of Equipment
Equipment Name of manufacturer Model and power rating

Information
Capacity Year of manufacture
Current Current location

Status
Details of current commitments
Source Indicate source of the equipment
Owned Rented Leased Specially manufactured
Omit the following information for equipment owned by the Bidder.
Owner Name of owner
Address of owner
Telephone Contact name and title
Fax Telex
Agreements Details of rental/lease/manufacture agreements specific to the project

Proposed Subcontractors and/or Manufacturers for Major Items of Plant and

Services
The following Subcontractors and/or Manufacturers are proposed for carrying out the item of the
facilities indicated. Bidders are free to propose more than one for each item.
Major Items of Plant and Services Proposed Subcontractors or Nationality

Manufacturers

Manufacturer's Authorization
Date: [insert date (as day, month and year) of bid submission]
ICB No.: [insert number of bidding process]
To: [insert complete name of employer]
WHEREAS
We [insert complete name of manufacturer or manufacturers authorized agent], who are official manufacturers or
agent authorized by the Manufacturer of [insert type of goods manufactured], having factories at [insert full
address of manufacturers factories], do hereby authorize [insert complete name of bidder] to submit a bid the
purpose of which is to provide the following goods, manufactured by us [insert name and/or brief description
of the goods], and to subsequently negotiate and sign the Contract.
We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty in accordance with Clause 27 of the General
Conditions of Contract, with respect to the goods offered by the above firm.
Signed: [insert signature(s) of authorized representative(s) of the manufacturer]
Name: [insert complete name(s) of authorized representative(s) of the manufacturer]
Title: [insert title]
Duly authorized to sign this Authorization on behalf of: [insert complete name of bidder]
Dated on ____________ day of __________________, _______ [insert date of signing]
-- Note --
The bidder shall require the manufacturer to fill out this form in accordance with the instructions indicated. This letter
of authorization should be signed by a person with the proper authority to sign documents that are binding on the
manufacturer. The bidder shall include it in its bid, if so indicated in the BDS.

Time Schedule
To be used by Bidder when alternative Time for Completion is invited in ITB 13.2.

Bidders Qualification
To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section 3 (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the information requested in the corresponding
Information Sheets included hereunder.

Form ELI - 1: Bidders Information Sheet
Bidders Information
Bidders legal name
In case of Joint Venture,

legal name of each partner
Bidders country of
constitution
Bidders year of
constitution
Bidders legal address in

country of constitution
Bidders authorized
representative
(name, address, telephone
numbers, fax numbers, e-mail
address)
Attached are copies of the following documents:.
1. In case of single entity, articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in accordance with ITB
4.1 and ITB 4.2
2. Authorization to represent the firm or Joint Venture named above, in accordance with ITB 22.2
3. In case of Joint Venture, letter of intent to form Joint Venture or Joint Venture agreement, in accordance with ITB 4.1
4. In case of a government-owned enterprise, any additional documents not covered under 1 above required to comply with
ITB 4.5

Form ELI - 2: Joint Venture Information Sheet
Each member of the Joint Venture must fill out this form separately. Subcontractor must fill out this form.
Joint Venture/Subcontractor Information
Bidders legal name
Joint Venture Partners or

Subcontractors legal
name

Subcontractors country of
constitution

Subcontractors year of
constitution

Subcontractors legal
address in country of
constitution

Subcontractors authorized
representative information
(name, address, telephone
numbers, fax numbers, e-mail
address)
Attached are copies of the following documents:

1. Articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in accordance with ITB 4.1 and ITB 4.2
2. Authorization to represent the firm named above, in accordance with ITB 22.2
3. In the case of government-owned enterprise, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance with
commercial law, in accordance with ITB 4.5
Subcontractors are those listed in Technical Proposal Proposed Subcontractors and/or Manufacturers for
Major Items of Plant and Services.

Form LIT 1: Pending Litigation and Arbitration
Each Bidder must fill out this form if so required under Criterion 2.2 of Section 3 (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria) to describe any pending litigation or arbitration formally commenced against it.
In case of joint ventures, each Joint Venture Partner must fill out this form separately, and provide the Joint
Venture Partner name below:
Joint Venture Partner: ___________________
Pending Litigation and Arbitration
Choose one of the following:
No pending litigation and arbitration.
Below is a description of all pending litigation and arbitration against the Bidder (or each Joint Venture member if Bidder is
a Joint Venture).
Value of
Value of
Pending
Pending
Year Matter in Dispute Claim as a
Claim in US$
Percentage of
Equivalent
Net Worth

Form FIN - 1: Historical Financial Performance
Each Bidder must fill out this form.
Financial Data for Previous . . . . . Years [US$ Equivalent]

Year 1: Year 2: Year __:
Information from Balance Sheet
Total Assets (TA)
Total Liabilities (TL)
Net Worth = TA-TL
Current Assets (CA)
Current Liabilities (CL)
Working Capital = CA -
CL
To be obtained for most recent year and carried forward to FIN-

Most Recent
3 Line 1; in case of Joint Ventures, to the corresponding Joint
Working Capital Venture Partners FIN-3
Information from Income Statement
Total Revenues
Profits Before Taxes
Profits After Taxes
Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets including all related notes, and income statements) for the last
_____ years, as indicated above, complying with the following conditions.
Unless otherwise required by Section 3 of the Bidding Documents, all such documents reflect the financial situation of
the legal entity or entities comprising the Bidder and not the Bidders parent companies, subsidiaries or affiliates.
Historical financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant.
Historical financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial statements.
Historical financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no statements for
partial periods shall be requested or accepted).

Form FIN - 2: Average Annual Turnover
Each Bidder must fill out this form.
The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Bidder or each member of a Joint Venture
in terms of the amounts billed to clients for each year for work in progress or completed, converted to US
Dollars at the rate of exchange at the end of the period reported.
Annual Turnover Data for the Last . . . . Years

Amount Exchange US$
Year
Currency Rate Equivalent
Average Annual Turnover

Form FIN 3: Availability of Financial Resources
Bidders must demonstrate sufficient financial resources, usually comprising of Working Capital supplemented
by credit line statements or overdraft facilities and others to meet the Bidders financial requirements for
(a) its current contract commitments, and

(b) the subject contract.
In case of joint ventures, each Joint Venture Partner must fill out this form separately and provide the Joint
Financial Resources
No. Source of financing Amount (US$ equivalent)
1 Working Capital (to be taken from FIN-1)
a
2 Credit Line
3 Other Financial Resources
Total Available Financial Resources
a
To be substantiated by a letter from the bank issuing the line of credit.

Form FIN- 4: Financial Requirements for Current Contract Commitments
Bidders (or each Joint Venture partner) should provide information on their current commitments on all
contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been received, or for
contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be
issued.
In case of joint ventures, each Joint Venture Partner must fill out this form separately and provide the Joint
Current Contract Commitments

Employers Outstanding Remaining
Contract Monthly Financial Resources
Name of Contact Contract Contract
No. Completion Requirement
Contract (Address, Tel, Value Period in
Date (X / Y)
Fax) (X) months (Y)
Total Monthly Financial Requirement for Current Contract Commitments US$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Form FIN - 5: Self-Assessment Tool for Bidders Compliance to Financial Resources (Criterion 2.3.3
of Section 3)
This form requires the same information submitted in Forms FIN - 3 and FIN - 4. All conditions of
Available Financial Resources Net of CCC Requirement for the Subject Contract must be
satisfied to qualify.
Form FIN - 5A: For Single Entities

Results:
Total Available Total Monthly Financial Yes or No
Financial Requirement for Current Available Financial Requirement [D must be
For Single Resources from Contract Commitments Resources Net for the Subject greater than or
Entities: FIN 3 (CCC) from FIN 4 of CCC Contract equal to E]
(A) (B) (C) D = (B - C) (E) (F)
_________ ...........
(Name of Bidder)
Form FIN - 5B: For Joint Ventures

Total Available Total Monthly Financial Available Results:
Financial Requirement for Current Financial Requirement Yes or No
For Joint Resources Contract Commitments Resources Net for the Subject [D must be greater
Ventures: from FIN 3 (CCC) from FIN 4 of CCC Contract than or equal to E]
(A) (B) (C) D = (B - C) (E) (F)
One Partner:
____________ ...........
(Name of Partner)
Each Partner:
_____________ ...........
(Name of Partner 1)
_____________ ...........
(Name of Partner 2)
_____________ ...........
(Name of Partner 3)
All partners D = Sum of available financial resources net of D = _______ ...........

combined current contract commitments for all partners
- Note -
Form FIN 5 is made available for use by the bidder as a self-assessment tool, and by the employer as an evaluation work sheet,
to determine compliance with the financial resources requirement as stated in 2.3.3. Failure to submit Form FIN - 5 by the Bidder
shall not lead to bid rejection.

Form EXP 1: Contracts of Similar Size and Nature
Fill out one (1) form per contract.

Contract of Similar Size and Nature

Contract
Contract No . . . . . . of . . . . . .
Identification
Award Date Completion Date
Role in Contract Contractor

Management
Subcontractor
Contractor
Total Contract Amount US$
If partner in a Joint Venture or subcontractor, Percent of

Amount
specify participation of total contract amount Total
Employers name
Address
Telephone number
Fax number
E-mail
Description of the similarity in accordance with Criterion 2.4.1 of Section 3

The similarity of the Bidders participation shall be based
on the physical size, nature of works, complexity,
methods, technology or other characteristics as
described in Section 6 (Employers Requirements).
The scope of each contract must include design, supply,
installation, testing & commissioning of new or extension
of existing 380/X kV or above voltage AIS/GIS
substation with at least four (4) bays of 380 kV or above
voltage and at least one (1) power transformer 380/X kV
voltage rating or above and 300 MVA power rating or
above.
For the above mentioned contracts executed during the
period mentioned above :
At least one (1) of the above mentioned contracts shall
be completely new 380/X kV or above voltage AIS
substation
At least one (1) of the above mentioned contracts shall
be in successful operation for a minimum of three (3)
years between 1July, 2006 and the bid submission
deadline.
At least one (1) of the above mentioned contracts must
be completed outside the Bidder's own country.
Evidence of above experience shall be submitted in the
bid. It shall be given on the user's letterhead, indicating
address, telephone and fax numbers of the user. It shall
include the name of the project, name of the employer,
description of the work, commissioning date and contract
amount.

Form EXP - 2: Experience in Key Activities
Contract with Similar Key Activities

Contract No . . . . . . of . . . . .
Contract Identification
.

Management
Subcontractor
Contractor
If partner in a Joint Venture

or subcontractor, specify
Percent of Total Amount
participation of total
contract amount
Employers name
Address
Telephone number
Fax number
E-mail
Description of the key activities in accordance with Criterion 2.4.2 of Section 3
Not Applied

Form EXP - 3: Subcontractors

Contract for the Major Items

Contract
Contract No . . . . . . of . . . . . .
Identification

Management
Subcontractor
Contractor
If partner in a Joint Venture or

Percent of
subcontractor, specify participation of total Amount
Total
contract amount
Employers name
Address
Telephone number
Fax number
E-mail
Description of the major items in accordance with Criterion 2.5 of Section 3

(Minimum Criteria to be met)
1. Power Transformer:
At least ten (10) years of experience in
manufacturing minimum 380 kV or higher rating
power transformers, with the transformer
capacity of 500 MVA and above, with the
equipment in satisfactory service for a minimum
of three (3) years on the date of bid opening.
Minimum delivery of at least six (6) 3-phase
power transformers, 380 kV, 500 MVA or above
ratings over the last ten (10) years.
Minimum technical details of the equipment
which have to be mentioned in the End Users
letter: transformers voltage level, capacity, type
of transformer - single phase or three phase
and installation/commissioning date.
Implemented ISO 9001
Type test report on 3-phase power transformers
with minimum rating of 380kV, 500MVA
manufactured by proposed manufacturer, shall
fulfill the requirements mentioned in schedule-I
of volume-3 of 3.
2. Circuit Breaker:
At least ten (10) years of experience in
circuit breakers, with the equipment in
satisfactory service for a minimum of three (3)
years as on the date of bid opening
Minimum delivery of at least one hundred (100)
380 kV or higher rating circuit breaker over the
last ten (10) years.

letter: circuit breakers voltage level and

capacity (rated current and short circuit
current)and installation/commissioning date.
The type test reports shall be issued as per
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.
3. Disconnector:
At least last ten (10) years of experience in
disconnectors, with the equipment in
years as on the date of bid opening.
380 kV or higher rating disconnectors over the
letter: disconnectors voltage level and capacity
(rated current and short circuit current)
Type tests for each type as per in schedule-I of
volume-3 of 3.
4. Instrument Transformer:
Instrument transformers, with the equipment in
years on the date of bid opening
380 kV or higher rating instrument transformers
over the last ten (10) years.
letter: instrument transformers voltage level
and type
Performed type tests for each type as per
schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.
5. Surge Arrester:
surge arresters, with the equipment in
years on the date of bid opening.
380 kV or higher rating surge arresters over the
letter: surge arresters voltage level and type
Type tests for each type as per schedule-I of
volume-3 of 3.
6. Post & Disc Insulator:
post insulators, with the equipment in
years on the date of bid opening.
380 kV or higher rating post insulators over the


letter: post insulators voltage level and type
volume-3 of 3.
7. Wave Trap:
wave traps, with the equipment in satisfactory
service for a minimum of three (3) years on the
date of bid opening.
380 kV or higher rating wave traps over the last
ten (10) years.
letter: wave traps voltage level and rated
current
volume-3 of 3.
8. Battery & Charger:
manufacturing ACU battery, Changer and/or
complete DC system, with the equipment in
years on the date of bid opening
Minimum average delivery over the last 3 years
of ten (10) complete substation DC systems
Type tests as per schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.
9. Substation Automation system &
Protection Relay
The manufacturer of Substation Control &
Automation System and Protection Relay shall
be the same. If the bidder proposes
manufacturer from any of the followings: ABB
(CH/S), Alstom (UK), GE (USA/Canada/UK),
Hitachi (Japan), Mitsubishi (Japan), SEL
(USA/UK/Canada). Siemens (Germany) or
Toshiba (Japan). Bidder shall provide only
Manufacturers Authorisation for SAS &
Protection Relay from the above mentioned
manufacturers. If bidder proposes
manufacturers other than above, the
manufacturer shall meet the following criteria
submit the required documents:
At least last five (5) years of experience in
manufacturing high-voltage substation
automation systems, as per IEC 61850
standard, with the equipment in satisfactory
date of bid opening
of ten (10) complete substation automation
systems, as per IEC 61850 standard
Type test as per schedule-I of volume-3 of 3.
10. Telecommunication System - Fibre optic
multiplexer equipment for communication
and protection

If the bidder proposes manufacturer of

Telecommunication System - Fibre optic
multiplexer equipment for communication and
protection from any of the followings: ABB
(CH/S) or GE (Canada/UK/USA); the bidder
shall provide only Manufacturers Authorisation
letter for above mentioned manufacturers. If
bidder proposes manufacturers other than
above, the manufacturer shall meet the
following criteria submit the required
documents:
manufacturing communication equipment, with
the equipment in satisfactory service for a
minimum of three (3) years on the date of bid
opening
of ten (10) complete substation communication
equipment
11. DFDR:
If the manufacturer of Digital Fault &
Disturbance Recorder is proposed from any of
followings: GE (USA/Canada/UK), Qualitrol
(UK), SEL (USA/UK/Canada) or Siemens
(Germany); bidder shall provide only
Manufacturers Authorisation letter for above
mentioned manufacturers. If bidder proposes
manufacturers other than above, the
manufacturer shall meet the following criteria
submit the required documents:
manufacturing DFDR for high voltage
substations, with the equipment in satisfactory
date of bid opening.
of ten (10) DFDR
12. Subcontract-or for executing the field
works
If a bidder himself will do electrical and civil
work, EQC 2.4.1 only will be applied. If a bidder
proposes a subcontractor, the subcontractor
shall meet the following criteria:
At least three contracts for the installation
of new AIS substation 220/X kV or higher
rated voltage with at least two bays and one
power transformer in the last ten (10) years

Section 5- Eligible Countries
Section 5- Eligible Countries

Section 5- Eligible Countries Page 5-1
Eligible Countries
The list of member countries of ADB is as follow:
Regional Members:
Afghanistan; Armenia; Australia; Azerbaijan; Bangladesh; Bhutan; Brunei Darussalam; Cambodia;
People's Republic of China; Cook Islands; Fiji; Georgia; India; Indonesia; Japan; Kazakhstan; Kiribati;
Republic of Korea; Kyrgyz Republic; Lao PDR; Malaysia; Maldives; Marshall Islands; Federated States
of Micronesia; Mongolia; Myanmar; Nauru; Nepal; New Zealand; Pakistan; Palau; Papua New Guinea;
Philippines; Samoa; Singapore; Solomon Islands; Sri Lanka; Taipei, China; Tajikistan; Thailand; Ti-
mor-Leste; Tonga; Turkmenistan; Tuvalu; Uzbekistan; Vanuatu; Viet Nam
Non-Regional Members:
Austria, Belgium, Canada, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, The
Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, United Kingdom, United States.

Part 2- Employers Requirements
PART 2- (Section 6)

Section 6: Employer's Requirements
Section 6: Employers Requirements

Section 6: Employer's Requirements
Table of Contents Page
1. Scope of Supply of Plant and Services 1

2. Technical Specifications 1
3. Technical Data Schedules and Guarantees 1
4. Drawings 1
5. Supplementary Information 2
5.1 Project Country 2
5.2 Contract Site 2
5.3 Port Facilities and Transport to Site 2
6. Certificates 3
6.1 Form of Completion Certificate 3
6.2 Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate 4
7. Change Orders 5
7.1 Change Order Procedure 5
7.1.1 General 5
7.1.2 Change Order Log 5
7.1.3 References for Changes 5
7.2 Change Order Forms 6
7.2.1 Request for Change Proposal Form 6
7.2.2 Estimate for Change Proposal Form 7
7.2.3 Acceptance of Estimate Form 8
7.2.4 Change Proposal Form 9
7.2.5 Change Order Form 11
7.2.6 Pending Agreement Change Order Form 12
7.2.7 Application for Change Proposal Form 13
8. Form-JV: Form of Joint Venture Agreement 14

Section 6: Change Orders Page 6-1
1. Scope of Supply of Plant and Services

Please refer to Volume 3 of the Bidding Document.
2. Technical Specifications
3. Technical Data Schedules and Guarantees

4. Drawings

5. Supplementary Information
5.1 Project Country
The works will be performed in Bangladesh.
5.2 Contract Site
The project is located in Aminbazar region.
5.3 Port Facilities and Transport to Site
Chittagong, Dhaka, Narayanganj, Benapole and Mongla are the ports of entry for material to Bangla-
desh by sea and road. Inland transport from Chittagong, Narayanganj, Benapole and Mongla to the
site can be by barge or road.
The Contractor is responsible for performing all dispatch, shipment, delivery, unloading, inland trans-
portation and obtaining all approvals and consents etc. necessary for the movement of plant and con-
tractors equipment from the port to the site.
All necessary access roads, jetties or offloading points etc. required for the transport of the plant etc.
to site will be the Contractor's responsibility.
Where heavy loads are to be moved, the Contractor shall be responsible for performing surveys of the
roads to ensure that all portions have adequate load bearing capacity.
A comprehensive method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer/Employer detailing the pro-
posed transport route(s) and requirements. Plans indicating all bridges, ducts, culverts, railway cross-
ings, overhead lines, water mains etc., and their load bearing capacity or clearances as appropriate
shall be given together with proposed means of achieving the transportation requirements. Any rein-
forcement, strengthening, modifications or temporary works required to obtain the necessary capacity
shall be the responsibility of the contractor. The cost of the above is to be included in the Bid price.
No plant is to be consigned to Bangladesh by air freight without the prior written approval of the Em-
ployer.

6. Certificates
6.1 Form of Completion Certificate
Contract: ____________ (insert name of contract and contract identification details]
Date:
Certificate No.:
To: _______________ [insert name and address of contractor]
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
Pursuant to GCC Clause 24 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions of the Contract
entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated ____ [insert date], relating to the _____
[brief description of the Facilities], we hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities was
(were) complete on the date specified below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the Contract,
the Employer hereby takes over the said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the responsibility for
care and custody and the risk of loss thereof on the date mentioned below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: _____ [description]

2. Date of Completion: ______ [date]
However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto as soon
as practicable.
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in accord-
ance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
__________________
[Signature]
Project Manager

6.2 Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate
Contract: ____________ (insert name of contract and contract identification details]
Date:
Certificate No.:
To: _______________ [insert name and address of contractor]
Pursuant to GCC Subclause 25.3 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions of the Contract
entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated ____ [date], relating to the ____ [brief de-
scription of the facilities], we hereby notify you that the Functional Guarantees of the following part(s)
of the Facilities were satisfactorily attained on the date specified below
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: _____ [description]

2. Date of Operational Acceptance: ____ [date]
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in accord-
ance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
________________
[Signature]
Project Manager

7. Change Orders
7.1 Change Order Procedure
7.1.1 General
This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in the Facilities dur-
ing the performance of the Contract in accordance with GCC Clause 39 (Change in the Facilities) of
the General Conditions.
7.1.2 Change Order Log
The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status of Requests for
Change and Changes authorized or pending. Entries of the Changes in the Change Order Log shall
be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the current Change
Order Log in the monthly progress report to be submitted to the Employer.
7.1.3 References for Changes
(1) Request for Change as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CR-X-nnn.
(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CN-
X-nnn.
(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CA-X-nnn.
(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CP-X-nnn.
(5) Change Order as referred to in GCC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CO-X-nnn.
Note:
(a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer's Home Office and the Site representatives of
the Employer shall have the following respective references:
Home Office CR-H-nnn

Site CR-S-nnn
(b) The above number "nnn" is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for Change Proposal,
Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change Order.

7.2 Change Order Forms
7.2.1 Request for Change Proposal Form
[Employer's letterhead]
Date:
To: [Contractor's name and address]
Attention: [Name and title]
Contract Name: _____ [Contract name]

Contract Number: _____ [Contract number]
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:
With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a Change Pro-
posal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within ____ [number]
days of the date of this letter [or on or before ____ (date)].
1. Title of Change: ____ [Title]

2. Change Request No. / Rev.: ____ [Number]
3. Originator of Change:
Employer: ____ [Name]
Contractor ____ (by Application for Change Proposal No. ____ [Number Refer to Annex 6.2.7])
4. Brief Description of Change____ [Description]
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: ____ [Description]
6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:
(Drawing No. / Document No. Description
7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change: ____ [Description]
8. General Terms and Conditions:
(a) Please submit your estimate showing what effect the requested Change will have on the
Contract Price.
(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for completing the
requested Change.
(c) If you have any opinion that is critical to the adoption of the requested Change in connec-
tion with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the safety of the
Plant or Facilities, please inform us in your proposal of revised provisions.
(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of its per-
sonnel shall be calculated.
(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change until we
have accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.
[Employer's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]
[Title of signatory]

7.2.2 Estimate for Change Proposal Form
[Contractor's letterhead]
Date:
To: ____ [Employer's name and address]

Attention: ____ [Name and title]
Contract Name: ____ [Contract name]

Contract Number: ____ [Contract number]
With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the approximate
cost to prepare the below-referenced Change Proposal in accordance with GCC Subclause 39.2.1 of
the General Conditions We acknowledge that your agreement to the cost of preparing the Change
Proposal, in accordance with GCC Subclause 39.2.2, is required before estimating the cost for change
work.

2. Change Request No. / Rev.: ____ [Number]
3. Brief Description of Change: ____ [Description]
4. Scheduled Impact of Change: ____ [Description]
5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: ____ [insert costs, which shall be in the currencies of
the contract]
(a) Engineering (Amount)

(i) Engineer hours (hrs) x rate/hr =
(ii) Draftsperson hrs x rate/hr =

Sub-total hrs
Total Engineering Cost
(b) Other Cost
Total Cost (a) + (b)
[Contractor's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]

7.2.3 Acceptance of Estimate Form
Date: ____
To: ____ [Contractor's name and address]

We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with the
preparation of the Change Proposal.
2. Change Request No. / Rev.: _____ [Request number/revision]
3. Estimate for Change Proposal No. / Rev.: _____ [Proposal number/revision]
4. Acceptance of Estimate No. / Rev.: _____ [Estimate number/revision]
5. Brief Description of Change: _____ [Description]
6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change accepted, you
shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparing the Change Proposal described in
your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in para3 above in accordance with GCC Clause
39 of the General Conditions.
[Employer's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]

7.2.4 Change Proposal Form
Date: ____
To: ____ [Employer's name and address]

In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. ____ [Number], we hereby submit our proposal
as follows:
1. Title of Change: ____ [Name]
2. Change Proposal No. / Rev.: ____ [Proposal number / revision]
3. Originator of Change: Employer: ____ [Name] / Contractor: ____ [Name]
5. Reasons for Change: ____ [Reason]
6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change: ____ [Facilities]
7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:

[Drawing/Document No. / Description]
8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from the Change Proposal:
8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal:
Amount
(Insert amounts in the currencies of the contract)
(a) Direct material

(b) Major construction equipment
(c) Direct field labour (total ___ hrs)
(d) Subcontracts
(e) Indirect material and labour
(f) Site supervision
(g) Head office technical staff salaries
Process engineer: __ hrs @ ____ rate/hr
Project engineer: __ hrs @ ____ rate/hr
Equipment engineer: __ hrs @ ____ rate/hr

Amount
(Insert amounts in the currencies of the contract)
Procurement: __ hrs @ ____ rate/hr
Draftsperson: __ hrs @ ____ rate/hr
Total
(h) Extraordinary costs (computer, travel, etc.)
(i) Fee for general administration, __ % of Items
(j) Taxes and customs duties
Total lump sum cost of change proposal
[Sum of items (a) to (j)]
Cost to prepare estimate for change proposal
[Amount payable if change is not accepted]
9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal
10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees
11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract
12. Validity of this Proposal: within ____ [Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the Em-
ployer
13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:

(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this detailed
Change Proposal within ____ [Number] days from your receipt of this Proposal.
(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in the adjust-
ment of the Contract Price.
(c) Contractor's cost for preparation of this Change Proposal: ____[insert amount]. This cost
shall be reimbursed by the employer in case of employer's withdrawal or rejection of this
Change Proposal without default of the contractor in accordance with GCC Clause 39 of
the General Conditions]
[Contractor's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]

7.2.5 Change Order Form
Date: ____


We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. ____ [number]),
and agree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion, and/or other conditions of the Contract in
accordance with GCC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: ____[Name]
2. Change Request No. / Rev.: ____[Request number / revision]
3. Change Order No. / Rev.: ____ [Order number / revision]
4. Originator of Change: Employer: ____ [Name] / Contractor: ____ [Name]
5. Authorized Price:
Ref. No.: ____ [Number], Date: ____ [Date]
Foreign currency portion ____ [Amount] plus Local currency portion ____ [Amount]
6. Adjustment of Time for Completion

None Increase ____ [Number] days Decrease ____ [Number] days
7. Other effects, if any
Authorized by:
Employer Date:
Accepted by:
Contractor Date:

7.2.6 Pending Agreement Change Order Form
Date: ____

We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with GCC
Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
2. Employer's Request for Change Proposal No./Rev.: ____ [number/revision], dated: ____ [date]
3. Contractor's Change Proposal No./Rev.: ____ [number / revision], dated: ____ [date]
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change: ____ [Facilities]
6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:

[Drawing / Document No/ Description]
7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:
8. Other change in the Contract terms:
9. Other terms and conditions:
[Employer's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]

7.2.7 Application for Change Proposal Form
Date:
To: _____ [Employer's name and address]

We hereby propose that the work mentioned below be treated as a Change in the Facilities.
2. Application for Change Proposal No./Rev.: ____ [Number / revision], dated: ____ [Date]
4. Reasons for Change:
5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (amount in the currencies of the Contract): ____ [Amount]
6. Scheduled Impact of Change:
7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:
8. Appendix:
[Contractor's name]
[Signature]
[Name of signatory]

8. Form-JV: Form of Joint Venture Agree-

ment
To: The Company Secretary
Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd.
Address:
THIS JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT is made and entered into this the th day
of., 20 of the Christian Era.
BETWEEN
M/s........................a company organized and existing under the laws of with its reg-
istered office located at..,hereinafter called as "the Part-
ner of the FIRST PART".
AND
M/s.....................a company organized and existing under the laws of ...with its reg-
istered office located at,hereinafter called as "the
Partner of the SECOND PART".
1. Formation of the Joint Venture
1.1 The partners aforesaid herewith forms a Joint Venture ("Joint Venture") with the follow-
ing objectives:
to prepare and submit a joint bid ("bid") to Power Grid Company of Bangladesh
("PGCB") in respect of construction of, Contract
No..("Project") to be implemented by PGCB.
to entirely and completely execute and perform the contract concluded between
PGCB and the Joint Venture ("Contract").
to comply with all the relative provisions as set out in the bidding documents of the
Project.
1.2 The Joint Venture operates under the name of "." (PGCB..Project). The seat
of the Joint Venture Partner in Charge shall be at..Its address
is:
..................................................(PGCB.Project)
1.3 The Partner of the..part is the Partner-in Charge of the Joint Venture.
1.4 The percentage of share of each partner in this Joint Venture Agreement is as follows:
a) First Part: ......% of the Bid Price
b) Second Part:.......% of the Bid Price
c) ............................................................

1.5 Joint Venture's local address shall be: ..
2. Supplies and service ("Works")
2.1 The partners of the Joint Venture shall be jointly and severally responsible for success-
ful execution of the aforesaid Project of PGCB.
2.2 Allocation of supplies and services ("Works") between/among the partners to prepare
and submit the bid/offer and to perform the Contract shall cover value and scope as de-
fined in clause 4 and 5 of this Joint Venture Agreement.
3. Principles of Cooperation
3.1 Each partner shall be responsible for the completeness of its scope of work and shall
bear all risks including commercial and technical risks.
3.2 Each partner shall provide the entirety of supplies and services required for the fulfil-
ment of its share of work.
3.3 Each partner will be totally (technically/commercially) responsible for its own part and
will execute its part and shall also be responsible for getting its part tested and ap-
proved by PGCB as per contract. It shall also be responsible for removing any and all
deviations/deficiencies, which may occur or may be pointed out by PGCB or its Con-
sultant up-till Final Acceptance Certificate (FAC) about the Project.
3.4 Each partner shall contribute working capital for equipment, labour and materials or
any expense to be incurred for execution of the Project or any other investment re-
quired in connection with implementation of the Project work in proportion to its partici-
pation ratio.
3.5 Each partner shall be fully responsible for the fulfilment of all obligations jointly and
severally for execution of the contract in the event the Project is awarded to the Joint
Venture and shall hold each other harmless and indemnify against any damage arising
from its default or non-fulfilment of obligations to perform the respective share of re-
sponsibilities as per this Joint Venture Agreement.
3.6 Each partner shall assist each other to the best of its ability and protect mutual interest
as if it were its own.
4. Responsibilities of the Partner in Charge
In addition to its scope as defined in clause 2.1 hereof
overall responsibility.
coordination and supervision of the time schedule, as well as of all technical questions
and queries of interest to the partners.
bidding, commercial negotiation, signing and execution of contract.

incur liabilities, receive payments, take in instruction for and on behalf of any or all part-
ners during entire execution of the Contract.
5. Responsibilities of the Partner of.Part
In addition to its scope as defined in clause 2.1
it shall keep the Partner in Charge informed of any matter in due time, that may affect per-
formances of the Contract.
6. Joint Venture Partner's Authority
6.1 Mr.. and Mr.shall represent the Partner of

.Part and the Partner of thePart respectively and
Mr...shall be the Project In charge.
7. Liability and Warranty
7.1 Liability Arising out of PGCB's Claims
7.1.1 The partners shall be jointly and severally liable to PGCB for the performance of the
Contract. With respect to one another, each partner shall be solely responsible for its
share of the work.
7.1.2 If PGCB claims penalty or liquidated damages for delay, the partner responsible for the
delay shall be solely liable without prejudice to the PGCB's further right to hold the oth-
er partner responsible.
7.1.3 Any defect and damage resulting from such defect shall immediately be rectified by the
partner in whose share of the work it is located or occurs. These costs shall also in-
clude of experts for establishing the defect, for additional measures necessitated as a
result of the defect, for changes in the share of the work of another partner necessitat-
ed by correction of such defect and for repeat inspections or acceptance tests.
7.2 Liability Arising out of 3rd Party Claims
In case of 3rd party claims, the partner responsible for the event causing the claim shall
be solely liable.
7.3 Liability of the Partner with Respect to each other
With respect to claims of the partner against each other, unless governed by Article 6.1
and 6.2 hereof, the following shall apply:
7.3.1 Each partner shall be liable to the other partner for damages which it, its employees,
agent or subcontractor, if any, wilfully or negligently cause to the other partner.

8. Insurance
The Joint Venture shall arrange all insurance including Erection All Risk insurance for the
whole Project as per provisions of the bidding document of PGCB.
9. Finance and Securities
Each partner shall bear the cost for any financing of its scope of supplies and services,
where PGCB requires guarantee, securities or any other securities, the partner shall share
such cost to the extent of the value of their respective scope of supplies and services.
10. Invoicing and Payment
The Partner in Charge shall invoice for the Joint Venture's scope of supplies and services to
PGCB and receive payments directly.
11. Bid Security, Performance Bond and Advance Payment Bond
Bid Security, Performance Bond, Advance Payment Bond etc. will be issued in the name of
the Joint Venture or the Partner in Charge. The partners shall bear the costs and risk in the
proportion to their participation ratio.
12. Scope of Joint Venture's Activities
The activities of the Joint Venture are limited to the bidding and, on being awarded, to the
performance of contract with PGCB for execution of the Project.
13. Arbitration
Any/all disputes arising out of this agreement shall be amicably and promptly settled upon di-
rect negotiation between/among the parties; otherwise, the dispute shall be referred to arbi-
tration for settlement under the Rules of Arbitration of the International Chamber of Com-
merce, Paris.
14. Governing Laws
This Joint Venture Agreement, supplements and arrangements regarding its performance
shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the substantive laws of
______________ without reference to other laws.
15. Supplementary
The partners may sign supplementary agreement as an amendment to this agreement con-
cerning the relevant matters arising from the performance of the Project. Such supplemen-
tary agreement shall come into force with the ratification of PGCB.

16. Miscellaneous
No partner shall disclose or divulge this Joint Venture Agreement to any other third party ex-
cept to PGCB nor shall it assign, pledge, sell or otherwise dispose of or part with all or part of
its designated responsibility to the others without the agreement of PGCB in writing.
17. Commencement and Validity of the Agreement
17.1 This Agreement shall come into force upon signing of the partners.
17.2 This Agreement shall terminate:
when the Project is awarded by PGCB to a bidder other than this Joint Venture.
in the event of an order, after total performance of the Contract (expiry of period of
warranty, payment of the last instalment, return of equipment etc.) and after fulfil-
ment of all obligations of the partners as provided for in this Agreement.
In witness whereof, the partners hereby have caused this Joint Venture Agreement to be exe-
cuted by their duly authorized representatives as appear below on the day, month and the
year first above written.
Signed by: Signed by:

On behalf of: On behalf of:

Witness Witness

Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract 7-1
Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract

These General Conditions of Contract (GCC) are based on the Model Form of International Contract for
Process Plant Construction published by the Engineering Advancement Association of Japan (ENAA).
The Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs) participating in the procurement harmonization process
gratefully acknowledge the contribution of ENAA to the advancement of good contracting practices by
its borrowers. The GCC contain general clauses to be applied on all contracts. The GCC in this section,
read in conjunction with the Special Conditions of Contract in Section 8 and other documents listed
therein, should be a complete document expressing all the rights and obligations of the contracting
parties. The General Conditions herein shall not be altered.
Table of Clauses
A. Contract and Interpretation............................................................................ 7-3

1. Definitions .................................................................................................................. 7-3
2. Contract Documents .................................................................................................. 7-5
3. Interpretation ............................................................................................................. 7-5
4. Communications ........................................................................................................ 7-7
5. Law and Language .................................................................................................... 7-7
6. Fraud and Corruption ............................................................................................... 7-7
B. Subject Matter of Contract ............................................................................. 7-9

7. Scope of Facilities ..................................................................................................... 7-9
8. Time for Commencement and Completion ............................................................. 7-10
9. Contractors Responsibilities ................................................................................... 7-10
10. Employers Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 7-11
C. Payment ........................................................................................................ 7-12

11. Contract Price .......................................................................................................... 7-12
12. Terms of Payment ................................................................................................... 7-13
13. Securities ................................................................................................................. 7-13
14. Taxes and Duties..................................................................................................... 7-14
D. Intellectual Property ..................................................................................... 7-15

15. License/Use of Technical Information ..................................................................... 7-15
16. Confidential Information .......................................................................................... 7-15
E. Execution of the Facilities ........................................................................... 7-16

17. Representatives....................................................................................................... 7-16
18. Work Program ......................................................................................................... 7-18
19. Subcontracting......................................................................................................... 7-19
20. Design and Engineering .......................................................................................... 7-19
21. Procurement ............................................................................................................ 7-21
22. Installation ............................................................................................................... 7-23
23. Test and Inspection ................................................................................................. 7-29
24. Completion of the Facilities ..................................................................................... 7-30
25. Commissioning and Operational Acceptance .......................................................... 7-32

7-2 Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract
F. Guarantees and Liabilities ............................................................................ 7-35

26. Completion Time Guarantee ....................................................................................7-35
27. Defect Liability..........................................................................................................7-35
28. Functional Guarantees.............................................................................................7-37
29. Patent Indemnity ......................................................................................................7-38
30. Limitation of Liability.................................................................................................7-39
G. Risk Distribution ........................................................................................... 7-39

31. Transfer of Ownership .............................................................................................7-39
32. Care of Facilities ......................................................................................................7-40
33. Loss of or Damage to Property; Accident or Injury to Workers; Indemnification .....7-41
34. Insurance .................................................................................................................7-42
35. Unforeseen Conditions ............................................................................................7-44
36. Change in Laws and Regulations ............................................................................7-45
37. Force Majeure ..........................................................................................................7-45
38. War Risks .................................................................................................................7-47
H. Change in Contract Elements ...................................................................... 7-48

39. Change in the Facilities............................................................................................7-48
40. Extension of Time for Completion............................................................................7-51
41. Suspension ..............................................................................................................7-52
42. Termination ..............................................................................................................7-53
43. Assignment ..............................................................................................................7-59
I. Claims, Disputes and Arbitration .................................................................. 7-59

44. Contractors Claims..................................................................................................7-59
45. Disputes and Arbitration ...........................................................................................7-60

General Conditions of Contract

A. Contract and Interpretation
1. Definitions 1.1 The following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby
assigned them:
Contract means the Contract Agreement entered into between the

Employer and the Contractor, together with the Contract Documents
referred to therein; they shall constitute the Contract, and the term the
Contract shall in all such documents be construed accordingly.
Contract Documents means the documents listed in Article 1.1

(Contract Documents) of the Contract Agreement (including any
amendments thereto).
GCC means the General Conditions of Contract.
SCC means the Special Conditions of Contract.
day means calendar day.
year means 365 days.
month means calendar month.
Party means the Employer or the Contractor, as the context requires.
Employer means the person named as such in the SCC and includes
the legal successors or permitted assigns of the Employer.
Project Manager means the person appointed by the Employer in the

manner provided in GCC Subclause 17.1 (Project Manager) hereof
and named as such in the SCC to perform the duties delegated by the
Employer.
Contractor means the person(s) named as Contractor in the Contract

Agreement, and includes the legal successors or permitted assigns of
the Contractor.
Contractors Representative means any person nominated by the

Contractor and approved by the Employer in the manner provided in
GCC Subclause 17.2 (Contractors Representative and Construction
Manager) hereof to perform the duties delegated by the Contractor.
Construction Manager means the person appointed by the

Contractors Representative in the manner provided in GCC Subclause
17.2.4.
Subcontractor, including manufacturers, means any person to whom

execution of any part of the Facilities, including preparation of any
design or supply of any Plant, is sub-contracted directly or indirectly by

the Contractor, and includes its legal successors or permitted assigns.
Dispute Board means the person or persons named as such in the

SCC appointed by agreement between the Employer and the
Contractor to make a decision on or to settle any dispute or difference
between the Employer and the Contractor referred to him or her by the
parties pursuant to GCC Subclause 45.1 (Dispute Board) hereof.
The Bank means the financing institution named in the SCC.
Contract Price means the sum specified in Article 2.1 (Contract Price)
of the Contract Agreement, subject to such additions and adjustments
thereto or deductions therefrom, as may be made pursuant to the
Contract.
Facilities means the Plant to be supplied and installed, as well as all

the Installation Services to be carried out by the Contractor under the
Contract.
Plant means permanent plant, equipment, machinery, apparatus,

articles and things of all kinds to be provided and incorporated in the
Facilities by the Contractor under the Contract (including the spare
parts to be supplied by the Contractor under GCC Subclause 7.3
hereof), but does not include Contractors Equipment.
Installation Services means all those services ancillary to the supply

of the Plant for the Facilities, to be provided by the Contractor under
the Contract, such as transportation and provision of marine or other
similar insurance, inspection, expediting, site preparation works
(including the provision and use of Contractors Equipment and the
supply of all construction materials required), installation, testing,
precommissioning, commissioning, operations, maintenance, the
provision of operations and maintenance manuals, training, etc. as the
case may require.
Contractors Equipment means all facilities, equipment, machinery,

tools, apparatus, appliances, or things of every kind required in or for
installation, completion and maintenance of Facilities that are to be
provided by the Contractor, but does not include Plant, or other things
intended to form or forming part of the Facilities.
Country of Origin means the countries and territories eligible under

the rules of the Bank as further elaborated in the SCC.
Site means the land and other places upon which the Facilities are to
be installed, and such other land or places as may be specified in the
Contract as forming part of the Site.
Effective Date means the date of fulfillment of all conditions stated in

Article 3 (Effective Date) of the Contract Agreement, upon which the
period until the Time for Completion shall be counted from.
Time for Completion means the time within which Completion of the
Facilities as a whole (or of a part of the Facilities where a separate

Time for Completion of such part has been prescribed) is to be

attained, as referred to in GCC Clause 8 and in accordance with the
relevant provisions of the Contract.
Completion means that the Facilities (or a specific part thereof where
specific parts are specified in the Contract) have been completed
operationally and structurally and put in a tight and clean condition,
that all work in respect of Precommissioning of the Facilities or such
specific part thereof has been completed, and that the Facilities or
specific part thereof are ready for Commissioning as provided in GCC
Clause 24 (Completion) hereof.
Precommissioning means the testing, checking and other

requirements specified in the Employers Requirements that are to be
carried out by the Contractor in preparation for Commissioning as
provided in GCC Clause 24 (Completion) hereof.
Commissioning means operation of the Facilities or any part thereof

by the Contractor following Completion, which operation is to be
carried out by the Contractor as provided in GCC Subclause 25.1
(Commissioning) hereof, for the purpose of carrying out Guarantee
Test(s).
Guarantee Test(s) means the test(s) specified in the Employers

Requirements to be carried out to ascertain whether the Facilities or a
specified part thereof is able to attain the Functional Guarantees
specified in the Appendix (Functional Guarantees) to the Contract
Agreement in accordance with the provisions of GCC Subclause 25.2
(Guarantee Test) hereof.
Operational Acceptance means the acceptance by the Employer of

the Facilities (or any part of the Facilities where the Contract provides
for acceptance of the Facilities in parts), which certifies the
Contractors fulfillment of the Contract in respect of Functional
Guarantees of the Facilities (or the relevant part thereof) in accordance
with the provisions of GCC Clause 28 (Functional Guarantees) hereof
and shall include deemed acceptance in accordance with GCC Clause
25 (Commissioning and Operational Acceptance) hereof.
Defect Liability Period means the period of validity of the warranties

given by the Contractor commencing at Completion of the Facilities or
a part thereof, during which the Contractor is responsible for defects
with respect to the Facilities (or the relevant part thereof) as provided
in GCC Clause 27 (Defect Liability) hereof.
2. Contract 2.1 Subject to Article 1.2 (Order of Precedence) of the Contract

Documents Agreement, all documents forming part of the Contract (and all parts
thereof) are intended to be correlative, complementary and mutually
explanatory. The Contract shall be read as a whole.
3. Interpretation 3.1 In the Contract, except where the context requires otherwise,
(a) words indicating one gender include all genders;
(b) words indicating the singular also include the plural and words

indicating the plural also include the singular;

(c) provisions including the word agree, agreed, or agreement
require the agreement to be record in writing;
(d) the word tender is synonymous with bid, tenderer with

Bidder, and tender documents with Bidding Documents;
and
(e) written or in writing means handwritten, typewritten, printed
or electronically made, and resulting in a permanent record.
The marginal words and other headings shall not be taken into
consideration in the interpretation of these Conditions.
3.2 Incoterms
Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract, the meaning of

any trade term and the rights and obligations of parties thereunder
shall be as prescribed by Incoterms.
Incoterms means international rules for interpreting trade terms

published by the International Chamber of Commerce (latest edition),
er
38 Cours Albert 1 , 75008 Paris, France.
3.3 Entire Agreement

Subject to GCC Subclause 16.4 hereof, the Contract constitutes the
entire agreement between the Employer and Contractor with respect to
the subject matter of Contract and supersedes all communications,
negotiations, and agreements (whether written or oral) of parties with
respect thereto made prior to the date of Contract.
3.4 Amendment
No amendment or other variation of the Contract shall be effective
unless it is in writing, is dated, expressly refers to the Contract, and is
signed by a duly authorized representative of each party hereto.
3.5 Independent Contractor

The Contractor shall be an independent contractor performing the
Contract. The Contract does not create any agency, partnership, joint
venture, or other joint relationship between the parties hereto. Subject to
the provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the manner in which the Contract is performed. All
employees, representatives, or Subcontractors engaged by the
Contractor in connection with the performance of the Contract shall be
under the complete control of the Contractor and shall not be deemed
to be employees of the Employer, and nothing contained in the
Contract or in any subcontract awarded by the Contractor shall be
construed to create any contractual relationship between any such
employees, representatives, or Subcontractors and the Employer.
3.6 Non-Waiver
3.6.1 Subject to GCC Subclause 3.6.2 below, no relaxation,
forbearance, delay, or indulgence by either party in enforcing

any of the terms and conditions of the Contract or the granting

of time by either party to the other shall prejudice, affect, or
restrict the rights of that party under the Contract, nor shall any
waiver by either party of any breach of Contract operate as
waiver of any subsequent or continuing breach of Contract.
3.6.2 Any waiver of a partys rights, powers, or remedies under the

Contract must be in writing, must be dated, and signed by an
authorized representative of the party granting such waiver,
and must specify the right and the extent to which it is being
waived.
3.7 Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or rendered
invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity, or unenforceability
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provisions and
conditions of the Contract.
3.8 Country of Origin

Origin means the place where the plant and component parts thereof
are mined, grown, produced, or manufactured, and from which the
services are provided. Plant components are produced when, through
manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major assembling of
components, a commercially recognized product results that is
substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its
components.
4. Communications 4.1 Wherever these Conditions provide for the giving or issuing of
approvals, certificates, consents, determinations, notices, requests,
and discharges, these communications shall be
(a) in writing and delivered against receipt; and
(b) delivered, sent, or transmitted to the address for the recipients
communications as stated in the Contract Agreement.
When a certificate is issued to a Party, the certifier shall send a copy to
the other Party. When a notice is issued to a Party, by the other Party
or the Project Manager, a copy shall be sent to the Project Manager or
the other Party, as the case may be.
5. Law and 5.1 The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with
Language laws of the country specified in the SCC.
5.2 The ruling language of the Contract shall be that stated in the SCC.
5.3 The language for communications shall be the ruling language unless
otherwise stated in the SCC.
6. Fraud and 6.1 ADBs Anticorruption Policy requires Borrowers (including

Corruption beneficiaries of ADB-financed activity), as well as Bidders, Suppliers,
and Contractors under ADB-financed contracts, observe the highest
standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of such
contracts. In pursuance of this policy, ADB
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth

below as follows:
(i) corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, anything of value to
influence improperly the actions of another party;
(ii) fraudulent practice means any act or omission,

including a misrepresentation, that knowingly or
recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party
to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an
obligation;
(iii) coercive practice means impairing or harming, or

threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly,
any party or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
(iv) collusive practice means an arrangement between

two or more parties designed to achieve an
improper purpose, including influencing improperly
the actions of another party;
(v) obstructive practice means (a) deliberately

destroying, falsifying, altering, or concealing of
evidence material to an ADB investigation; (b)
making false statements to investigators in order to
materially impede an ADB investigation; (c) failing
to comply with requests to provide information,
documents, or records in connection with an Office
of Anticorruption and Integrity (OAI) investigation;
(d) threatening, harassing, or intimidating any party
to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of
matters relevant to the investigation or from
pursuing the investigation, or (e) materially
impeding ADBs contractual rights of audit or
access to information; and
(vi) integrity violation" is any act which violates ADBs

Anticorruption Policy, including (i) to (v) above and
the following: abuse, conflict of interest, violations of
ADB sanctions, retaliation against whistleblowers or
witnesses, and other violations of ADB's
Anticorruption Policy, including failure to adhere to
the highest ethical standard.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder
recommended for award has, directly or through an agent,
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or
obstructive practices or other integrity violations in competing
for the Contract;
(c) will cancel the portion of the financing allocated to a contract if it

determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or
of a beneficiary of ADB-financing engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices or other
integrity violations during the procurement or the execution of

that contract, without the Borrower having taken timely and

appropriate action satisfactory to ADB to remedy the situation;
(d) will impose remedial actions on a firm or an individual, at any

time, in accordance with ADBs Anticorruption Policy and
Integrity Principles and Guidelines (both as amended from time
to time), including declaring ineligible, either indefinitely or for a
1
stated period of time, to participate in ADB-financed,
administered, or supported activities or to benefit from an ADB-
financed, administered, or supported contract, financially or
otherwise, if it at any time determines that the firm or individual
has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices or other
integrity violations; and
(e) will have the right to require suppliers and contractors to permit
ADB or its representative to inspect their accounts and records
and other documents relating to the bid submission and contract
performance and to have them audited by auditors appointed by
ADB.
B. Subject Matter of Contract
7. Scope of 7.1 Unless otherwise expressly limited in the Employers Requirements,

Facilities the Contractors obligations cover the provision of all Plant and the
performance of all Installation Services required for the design, the
manufacture (including procurement, quality assurance, construction,
installation, associated civil works, pre-commissioning and delivery) of
the Plant and the installation, completion, and commissioning of the
Facilities in accordance with the plans, procedures, specifications,
drawings, codes, and any other documents as specified in the section
Employers Requirements. Such specifications include, but are not
limited to, the provision of supervision and engineering services; the
supply of labor, materials, equipment, spare parts (as specified in GCC
Subclause 7.3 below) and accessories; Contractors Equipment;
construction utilities and supplies; temporary materials, structures, and
facilities; transportation (including, without limitation, unloading and
hauling to, from and at the Site); and storage, except for those
supplies, works, and services that will be provided or performed by the
Employer, as set forth in the Appendix (Scope of Works and Supply by
the Employer) to the Contract Agreement.
7.2 The Contractor shall, unless specifically excluded in the Contract,

perform all such work and/or supply all such items and materials not
specifically mentioned in the Contract but that can be reasonably
inferred from the Contract as being required for attaining Completion of
the Facilities as if such work and/or items and materials were expressly
mentioned in the Contract.
1
Whether as a Contractor, Subcontractor, Consultant, Manufacturer or Supplier, or Service Provider; or in any other capacity
(different names are used depending on the particular Bidding Document).

7.3 In addition to the supply of Mandatory Spare Parts included in the

Contract, the Contractor agrees to supply spare parts required for the
operation and maintenance of the Facilities for the period specified in
the SCC and the provisions, if any, specified in the SCC. However, the
identity, specifications, and quantities of such spare parts and the
terms and conditions relating to the supply thereof are to be agreed
between the Employer and the Contractor, and the price of such spare
parts shall be that given in Price Schedule No. 6, which shall be added
to the Contract Price. The price of such spare parts shall include the
purchase price therefore and other costs and expenses (including the
Contractors fees) relating to the supply of spare parts.
8. Time for 8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within the period
Commencement specified in the SCC and without prejudice to GCC Subclause 26.2
and Completion hereof, the Contractor shall thereafter proceed with the Facilities in
accordance with the time schedule specified in the Appendix 4 (Time
Schedule) to the Contract Agreement.
8.2 The Contractor shall attain Completion of the Facilities or of a part
where a separate time for Completion of such part is specified in the
Contract, within the time stated in the SCC or within such extended
time to which the Contractor shall be entitled under GCC Clause 40
hereof.
9. Contractors 9.1 The Contractor shall design, manufacture, including associated
Responsibilities purchases and/or subcontracting, install, and complete the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract. When completed, the Facilities should
be fit for the purposes for which they are intended as defined in the
Contract.
9.2 The Contractor confirms that it has entered into this Contract on the
basis of a proper examination of the data relating to the Facilities,
including any data as to boring tests provided by the Employer, and on
the basis of information that the Contractor could have obtained from a
visual inspection of the Site if access thereto was available and of
other data readily available to it relating to the Facilities as of the date
28 days prior to bid submission. The Contractor acknowledges that any
failure to acquaint itself with all such data and information shall not
relieve its responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost of
successfully performing the Facilities.
9.3 The Contractor shall acquire and pay for all permits, approvals, and/or
licenses from all local, state, or national government authorities or
public service undertakings in the country where the Site is located,
which such authorities or undertakings require the Contractor to obtain
in its name and which are necessary for the performance of the
Contract, including, without limitation, visas for the Contractors and
Subcontractors personnel and entry permits for all imported
Contractors Equipment. The Contractor shall acquire all other permits,
approvals, and/or licenses that are not the responsibility of the
Employer under GCC Subclause 10.3 hereof and that are necessary
for the performance of the Contract.
9.4 The Contractor shall comply with all laws in force in the country where
the Facilities are to be implemented. The laws will include all local,
state, national, or other laws that affect the performance of the
Contract and bind upon the Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify

and hold harmless the Employer from and against any and all
liabilities, damages, claims, fines, penalties, and expenses of whatever
nature arising or resulting from the violation of such laws by the
Contractor or its personnel, including the Subcontractors and their
personnel, but without prejudice to GCC Subclause 10.1 hereof.
9.5 Any plant and services that will be incorporated in or be required for
the Facilities and other supplies shall have their origin as specified
under GCC Clause 1 (Country of Origin). Any Subcontractors retained
by the Contractor shall be from a country as specified in GCC Clause 1
(Country of Origin).
9.6 The Contractor shall permit ADB to inspect the Contractors accounts
and records relating to the performance of the Contractor and to have
them audited by auditors appointed by ADB, if so required by ADB.
9.7 If the Contractor is a joint venture or consortium of two or more

persons, all such persons shall be jointly and severally bound to the
Employer for the fulfillment of the provisions of the Contract and shall
designate one of such persons to act as a leader with authority to bind
the joint venture or consortium. The composition or the constitution of
the joint venture or consortium shall not be altered without the prior
consent of the Employer.
9.8 Protection of the Environment

(a) The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the
environment (both on and off the Site) and to limit damage and
nuisance to people and property resulting from pollution, noise,
and other results of his operations.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure that emissions, surface discharges,
and effluent from the Contractors activities shall not exceed the
values stated in the Specification or prescribed by applicable Laws.
10. Employers 10.1 All information and/or data to be supplied by the Employer as
Responsibilities described in the Appendix (Scope of Works and Supply by the
Employer) to the Contract Agreement shall be deemed to be accurate,
except when the Employer expressly states otherwise.
10.2 The Employer shall be responsible for acquiring and providing legal
and physical possession of the Site and access thereto, and for
providing possession of and access to all other areas reasonably
required for the proper execution of the Contract, including all requisite
rights of way, as specified in the Appendix (Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer) to the Contract Agreement. The Employer
shall give full possession of and accord all rights of access thereto on
or before the date(s) specified in that Appendix.
10.3 The Employer shall acquire and pay for all permits, approvals, and/or
licenses from all local, state, or national government authorities, or
public service undertakings in the country where the Site is located
which (a) such authorities or undertakings require the Employer to

obtain in the Employers name, (b) are necessary for the execution of
the Contract, including those required for the performance by both the
Contractor and the Employer of their respective obligations under the
Contract, and (c) are specified in the Appendix (Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer) to the Contract Agreement.
10.4 If requested by the Contractor, the Employer shall use its best
endeavors to assist the Contractor in obtaining in a timely and
expeditious manner all permits, approvals, and/or licenses necessary
for the execution of the Contract from all local, state, or national
government authorities, or public service undertakings that such
authorities or undertakings require the Contractor or Subcontractors or
the personnel of the Contractor or Subcontractors, as the case may be,
to obtain.
10.5 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract or agreed upon by the

Employer and the Contractor, the Employer shall provide sufficient,
properly qualified operating and maintenance personnel; shall supply
and make available all raw materials, utilities, lubricants, chemicals,
catalysts, other materials and facilities; and shall perform all work and
services of whatsoever nature, including those required by the
Contractor to properly carry out Pre-commissioning, Commissioning,
and Guarantee Tests, all in accordance with the provisions of the
Appendix (Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer) to the
Contract Agreement at or before the time specified in the program
furnished by the Contractor under GCC Subclause 18.2 hereof and in
the manner thereupon specified or as otherwise agreed upon by the
Employer and the Contractor.
10.6 The Employer shall be responsible for the continued operation of the
Facilities after Completion, in accordance with GCC Subclause 24.8,
and shall be responsible for facilitating the Guarantee Test(s) for the
Facilities, in accordance with GCC Subclause 25.2.
10.7 All costs and expenses involved in the performance of the obligations
under this GCC Clause 10 shall be the responsibility of the Employer,
except those incurred by the Contractor with respect to the
performance of Guarantee Tests, in accordance with GCC Subclause
25.2.
10.8 In the event that the Employer shall be in breach of any of his
obligations imposed by the Contract, then the additional cost
reasonably incurred by the Contractor in consequence thereof shall be
added to the Contract Price.
C. Payment
11. Contract Price 11.1 The Contract Price shall be as specified in Article 2 (Contract Price and
Terms of Payment) of the Contract Agreement.
11.2 Unless an adjustment clause is provided for in the SCC, the Contract
Price shall be a firm lump sum not subject to any alteration, except in
the event of a Change in the Facilities or as otherwise provided in the

Contract.
11.3 Subject to GCC Subclauses 9.2, 10.1, and 35 hereof, the Contractor
shall be deemed to have satisfied itself as to the correctness and
sufficiency of the Contract Price, which shall, except as otherwise
provided for in the Contract, cover all its obligations under the Contract.
12. Terms of 12.1 The Contract Price shall be paid as specified in Article 2 (Contract
Payment Price and Terms of Payment) of the Contract Agreement and in the
Appendix (Terms and Procedures of Payment) to the Contract
Agreement, which also outlines the procedures to be followed in
making application for and processing payments.
12.2 No payment made by the Employer herein shall be deemed to

constitute acceptance by the Employer of the Facilities or any part(s)
thereof.
12.3 In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment by its
respective due date or within the period set forth in the Contract, the
Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest on the amount of such
delayed payment at the rate(s) shown in the Appendix (Terms and
Procedures of Payment) to the Contract Agreement for the period of
delay until payment has been made in full, whether before or after
judgment or arbitrage award.
12.4 The currency or currencies in which payments are made to the

Contractor under this Contract shall be specified in the Appendix
(Terms and Procedures of Payment) to the Contract Agreement,
subject to the general principle that payments will be made in the
currency or currencies in which the Contract Price has been stated in
the Contractors bid.
13. Securities 13.1 Issuance of Securities

The Contractor shall provide the securities specified below in favor of
the Employer at the times, and in the amount, manner, and form
specified below.
13.2 Advance Payment Security

13.2.1 The Contractor shall, within 28 days of the notification of
contract award, provide a security in an amount equal to the
advance payment calculated in accordance with the Appendix
(Terms and Procedures of Payment) to the Contract Agreement,
and in the same currency or currencies.
13.2.2 The security shall be in the form provided in the Bidding
Documents or in another form acceptable to the Employer. The
amount of the security shall be reduced in proportion to the
value of the Facilities executed by and paid to the Contractor
from time to time, and shall automatically become null and void
when the full amount of the advance payment has been
recovered by the Employer. The security shall be returned to the
Contractor immediately after its expiration.
13.3 Performance Security

13.3.1 The Contractor shall, within 28 days of the notification of

contract award, provide a security for the due performance of

the Contract in the amount specified in the SCC.
13.3.2 The security shall be denominated in the currency or currencies

of the Contract, or in a freely convertible currency acceptable to
the Employer, and shall be in one of the forms of bank
guarantees provided in the Bidding Documents, as stipulated by
the Employer in the SCC, or in another form acceptable to the
Employer.
13.3.3 Unless otherwise specified in the SCC, the security shall be
reduced by half on the date of the Operational Acceptance.
The Security shall become null and void, or shall be reduced
pro rata to the Contract Price of a part of the Facilities for which
a separate Time for Completion is provided, 540 days after
Completion of the Facilities or 365 days after Operational
Acceptance of the Facilities, whichever occurs first; provided,
however, that if the Defects Liability Period has been extended
on any part of the Facilities pursuant to GCC Subclause 27.8
hereof, the Contractor shall issue an additional security in an
amount proportionate to the Contract Price of that part. The
security shall be returned to the Contractor immediately after its
expiration, provided, however, that if the Contractor, pursuant
to GCC Subclause 27.10, is liable for an extended defect
liability obligation, the performance security shall be extended
for the period and up to the amount specified in the SCC.
14. Taxes and 14.1 Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the
Duties Contractor shall bear and pay all taxes, duties, levies, and charges
assessed on the Contractor, its Subcontractors, or their employees by
all municipal, state, or national government authorities in connection
with the Facilities in and outside of the country where the Site is
located.
14.2 Notwithstanding GCC Subclause 14.1 above, the Employer shall bear
and promptly pay all customs and import duties as well as other local
taxes like, e.g., a value-added tax (VAT), imposed by the law of the
country where the Site is located on the Plant specified in Price
Schedule No. 1 and that are to be incorporated into the Facilities.
14.3 If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances, or privileges may be

available to the Contractor in the country where the Site is located, the
Employer shall use its best endeavors to enable the Contractor to
benefit from any such tax savings to the maximum allowable extent.
14.4 For the purpose of the Contract, it is agreed that the Contract Price
specified in Article 2 (Contract Price and Terms of Payment) of the
Contract Agreement is based on the taxes, duties, levies, and charges
prevailing at the date 28 days prior to the date of bid submission in the
country where the Site is located (hereinafter called Tax in this GCC
Subclause 14.4). If any rates of Tax are increased or decreased, a
new Tax is introduced, an existing Tax is abolished, or any change in
interpretation or application of any Tax occurs in the course of the
performance of Contract, which was or will be assessed on the
Contractor, Subcontractors, or their employees in connection with

performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment of the Contract

Price shall be made to fully take into account any such change by
addition to the Contract Price or deduction therefrom, as the case may
be, in accordance with GCC Clause 36 hereof.
D. Intellectual Property
15. License/Use of 15.1 For the operation and maintenance of the Plant, the Contractor hereby
Technical grants a non-exclusive and nontransferable license (without the right
Information to sublicense) to the Employer under the patents, utility models, or
other industrial property rights owned by the Contractor or by a third
party from whom the Contractor has received the right to grant
licenses thereunder, and shall also grant to the Employer a
nonexclusive and nontransferable right (without the right to
sublicense) to use the know-how and other technical information
disclosed to the Employer under the Contract. Nothing contained
herein shall be construed as transferring ownership of any patent,
utility model, trademark, design, copyright, know-how, or other
intellectual property right from the Contractor or any third party to the
Employer.
15.2 The copyright in all drawings, documents, and other materials

containing data and information furnished to the Employer by the
Contractor herein shall remain vested in the Contractor or, if they are
furnished to the Employer directly or through the Contractor by any
third party, including suppliers of materials, the copyright in such
materials shall remain vested in such third party.
16. Confidential 16.1 The Employer and the Contractor shall keep confidential and shall not,
Information without the written consent of the other party hereto, divulge to any
third party any documents, data or other information furnished directly
or indirectly by the other party hereto in connection with the Contract,
whether such information has been furnished prior to, during, or
following termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding the above, the
Contractor may furnish to its Subcontractor(s) such documents, data,
and other information it receives from the Employer to the extent
required for the Subcontractor(s) to perform its work under the
Contract, in which event the Contractor shall obtain from such
Subcontractor(s) an undertaking of confidentiality similar to that
imposed on the Contractor under this GCC Clause 16.
16.2 The Employer shall not use such documents, data, and other
information received from the Contractor for any purpose other than the
operation and maintenance of the Facilities. Similarly, the Contractor
shall not use such documents, data, and other information received
from the Employer for any purpose other than the design, procurement
of Plant, construction, or such other work and services as are required
for the performance of the Contract.
16.3 The obligation of a party under GCC Subclauses 16.1 and 16.2 above,
however, shall not apply to that information, which

(a) now or hereafter enters the public domain through no fault of that
party;
(b) can be proven to have been possessed by that party at the time
of disclosure and which was not previously obtained, directly or
indirectly, from the other party hereto; and
(c) otherwise lawfully becomes available to that party from a third

party that has no obligation of confidentiality.
16.4 The above provisions of this GCC Clause 16 shall not in any way
modify any undertaking of confidentiality given by either of the parties
hereto prior to the date of the Contract in respect of the Facilities or any
part thereof.
16.5 The provisions of this GCC Clause 16 shall survive termination, for
whatever reason, of the Contract.
E. Execution of the Facilities

17. Representatives 17.1 Project Manager
If the Project Manager is not named in the Contract, then within 14
days of the Effective Date, the Employer shall appoint and notify the
Contractor in writing of the name of the Project Manager. The
Employer may from time to time appoint some other person as the
Project Manager in place of the person previously so appointed, and
shall give notice of the name of such other person to the Contractor
without delay. No such appointment shall be made at such a time or in
such a manner as to impede the progress of work on the Facilities.
Such appointment shall only take effect upon receipt of such notice by
the Contractor. The Project Manager shall represent and act for the
Employer at all times during the performance of the Contract. All
notices, instructions, orders, certificates, approvals, and all other
communications under the Contract shall be given by the Project
Manager, except as herein otherwise provided.
All notices, instructions, information, and other communications given
by the Contractor to the Employer under the Contract shall be given to
the Project Manager, except as herein otherwise provided.
17.2 Contractors Representative and Construction Manager
17.2.1 If the Contractors Representative is not named in the Contract,
then within 14 days of the Effective Date, the Contractor shall
appoint the Contractors Representative and shall request the
Employer in writing to approve the person so appointed. If the
Employer makes no objection to the appointment within 14
days, the Contractors Representative shall be deemed to have
been approved. If the Employer objects to the appointment
within 14 days giving the reason therefor, then the Contractor
shall appoint a replacement within 14 days of such objection,
and the foregoing provisions of this GCC Subclause 17.2.1 shall
apply thereto.
17.2.2 The Contractors Representative shall represent and act for the

Contractor at all times during the performance of the Contract

and shall give to the Project Manager all the Contractors
notices, instructions, information, and all other communications
under the Contract.
All notices, instructions, information, and all other
communications given by the Employer or the Project Manager
to the Contractor under the Contract shall be given to the
Contractors Representative or, in its absence, its deputy,
except as herein otherwise provided.
The Contractor shall not revoke the appointment of the
Contractors Representative without the Employers prior written
consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. If the
Employer consents thereto, the Contractor shall appoint some
other person as the Contractors Representative, pursuant to the
procedure set out in GCC Subclause 17.2.1.
17.2.3 The Contractors Representative may, subject to the approval of
the Employer which shall not be unreasonably withheld, at any
time delegate to any person any of the powers, functions and
authorities vested in him or her. Any such delegation may be
revoked at any time. Any such delegation or revocation shall be
subject to a prior notice signed by the Contractors
Representative, and shall specify the powers, functions, and
authorities thereby delegated or revoked. No such delegation or
revocation shall take effect unless and until a copy thereof has
been delivered to the Employer and the Project Manager.
Any act or exercise by any person of powers, functions and
authorities so delegated to him or her in accordance with this
GCC Subclause 17.2.3 shall be deemed to be an act or exercise
by the Contractors Representative.
17.2.4 From the commencement of installation of the Facilities at the
Site until Completion, the Contractors Representative shall
appoint a suitable person as the Construction Manager. The
Construction Manager shall supervise all work done at the Site
by the Contractor and shall be present at the Site throughout
normal working hours except when on leave, sick, or absent for
reasons connected with the proper performance of the Contract.
Whenever the Construction Manager is absent from the Site, the
Contractors Representative or the Construction Manager shall
appoint a suitable person to act as the Construction Managers
deputy.
17.2.5 The Employer may by notice to the Contractor object to any
representative or person employed by the Contractor in the
execution of the Contract who, in the reasonable opinion of the
Employer, may behave inappropriately, may be incompetent or
negligent, or may commit a serious breach of the Site
regulations provided under GCC Subclause 22.4. The
Employer shall provide evidence of the same, whereupon the
Contractor shall remove such person from the Facilities.
17.2.6 If any representative or person employed by the Contractor is
removed in accordance with GCC Subclause 17.2.5, the
Contractor shall, where required, promptly appoint a

replacement.
18. Work Program 18.1 Contractors Organization

The Contractor shall supply to the Employer and the Project Manager a
chart showing the proposed organization to be established by the
Contractor for carrying out work on the Facilities within 21 days of the
Effective Date. The chart shall include the identities of the key
personnel, and the curricula vitae of such key personnel to be
employed shall be supplied together with the chart. The Contractor
shall promptly inform the Employer and the Project Manager in writing
of any revision or alteration of such an organization chart.
18.2 Program of Performance
Within 28 days after the Effective Date, the Contractor shall submit to
the Project Manager a detailed program of performance of the
Contract, made in a form acceptable to the Project Manager and
showing the sequence in which it proposes to design, manufacture,
transport, assemble, install, and pre-commission the Facilities, as well
as the date by which the Contractor reasonably requires that the
Employer shall have fulfilled its obligations under the Contract so as to
enable the Contractor to execute the Contract in accordance with the
program and to achieve Completion, Commissioning, and Acceptance
of the Facilities in accordance with the Contract. The program so
submitted by the Contractor shall accord with the Time Schedule
included in the Appendix (Time Schedule) to the Contract Agreement
and any other dates and periods specified in the Contract. The
Contractor shall update and revise the program as and when
appropriate or when required by the Project Manager, but without
modification in the Times for Completion given in the SCC and any
extension granted in accordance with GCC Clause 40, and shall submit
all such revisions to the Project Manager.
18.3 Progress Report

The Contractor shall monitor progress of all the activities specified in
the program referred to in GCC Subclause 18.2 above, and supply a
progress report to the Project Manager every month.
The progress report shall be in a form acceptable to the Project

Manager and shall indicate: (a) percentage completion achieved
compared with the planned percentage completion for each activity;
and (b) where any activity is behind the program, giving comments and
likely consequences and stating the corrective action being taken.
18.4 Progress of Performance

If at any time the Contractors actual progress falls behind the program
referred to in GCC Subclause 18.2, or it becomes apparent that it will
so fall behind, the Contractor shall, at the request of the Employer or
the Project Manager, prepare and submit to the Project Manager a
revised program, taking into account the prevailing circumstances, and
shall notify the Project Manager of the steps being taken to expedite
progress so as to attain Completion of the Facilities within the Time for
Completion under GCC Subclause 8.2, any extension thereof entitled
under GCC Subclause 40.1, or any extended period as may otherwise
be agreed upon between the Employer and the Contractor.

18.5 Procedures
The Contract shall be executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents including the procedures given in the Forms and
Procedures of the Employers Requirements.
The Contractor may execute the Contract in accordance with its own
standard project execution plans and procedures to the extent that they
do not conflict with the provisions contained in the Contract.
19.Subcontracting 19.1 The Appendix 5 (List of Major Items of Plant and Services and List of
Approved Subcontractors) to the Contract Agreement specifies major
items of plant and services and a list of approved Subcontractors
against each item, including manufacturers. Insofar as no
Subcontractors are listed against any such item, the Contractor shall
prepare a list of Subcontractors for such item for inclusion in such list.
The Contractor may from time to time propose any addition to or
deletion from any such list. The Contractor shall submit any such list
or any modification thereto to the Employer for its approval in sufficient
time so as not to impede the progress of work on the Facilities. Such
approval by the Employer for any of the Subcontractors shall not
relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations, duties, or
responsibilities under the Contract.
19.2 The Contractor shall select and employ its Subcontractors for such
major items from those listed in the lists referred to in GCC Subclause
19.1.
19.3 For items or parts of the Facilities not specified in the Appendix (List of
Major Items of Plant and Services and List of Approved
Subcontractors for Major Items) to the Contract Agreement, the
Contractor may employ such Subcontractors as it may select, at its
discretion.
19.4 Each subcontract shall include provisions which would entitle the
Employer to require the sub-contract to be assigned to the Employer
under GCC 19.5 (if and when applicable), or in event of termination by
the Employer under GCC 42.2.
19.5 If a Sub-contractor's obligations extend beyond the expiry date of the
relevant Defects Liability Period and the Project Manager, prior to that
date, instructs the Contractor to assign the benefits of such obligations
to the Employer, then the Contractor shall do so.
20. Design and 20.1 Specifications and Drawings
Engineering 20.1.1 The Contractor shall execute the basic and detailed design and
the engineering work in compliance with the provisions of the
Contract, or where not so specified, in accordance with good
engineering practice.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies,

errors, or omissions in the specifications, drawings, and other
technical documents that it has prepared, whether such
specifications, drawings, and other documents have been
approved by the Project Manager or not, provided that such
discrepancies, errors, or omissions are not because of
inaccurate information furnished in writing to the Contractor by

or on behalf of the Employer.
20.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to disclaim responsibility for any

design, data, drawing, specification, or other document, or any
modification thereof provided or designated by or on behalf of
the Employer, by giving a notice of such disclaimer to the
Project Manager.
20.2 Codes and Standards
Wherever references are made in the Contract to codes and standards
in accordance with which the Contract shall be executed, the edition or
the revised version of such codes and standards current at the date 28
days prior to date of bid submission shall apply unless otherwise
specified. During Contract execution, any changes in such codes and
standards shall be applied subject to approval by the Employer and
shall be treated in accordance with GCC Clause 39.
20.3 Approval/Review of Technical Documents by Project Manager
20.3.1 The Contractor shall prepare or cause its Subcontractors to
prepare, and furnish to the Project Manager the documents
listed in the Appendix (List of Documents for Approval or
Review) to the Contract Agreement for its approval or review as
specified and in accordance with the requirements of GCC
Subclause 18.2 (Program of Performance).
Any part of the Facilities covered by or related to the documents

to be approved by the Project Manager shall be executed only
after the Project Managers approval thereof.
GCC Subclauses 20.3.2 through 20.3.7 shall apply to those

documents requiring the Project Managers approval, but not to
those furnished to the Project Manager for its review only.
20.3.2 Within 14 days after receipt by the Project Manager of any

document requiring the Project Managers approval in
accordance with GCC Subclause 20.3.1, the Project Manager
shall either return one copy thereof to the Contractor with its
approval endorsed thereon or shall notify the Contractor in
writing of its disapproval thereof and the reasons therefor and
the modifications that the Project Manager proposes.
If the Project Manager fails to take such action within the said 14
days, then the said document shall be deemed to have been
approved by the Project Manager.
20.3.3 The Project Manager shall not disapprove any document,

except on the grounds that the document does not comply with
the Contract or that it is contrary to good engineering practice. If
the Project Manager disapproves a document, he shall specify
the reasons for his decision.
20.3.4 If the Project Manager disapproves the document, the

Contractor shall modify the document and resubmit it for the
Project Managers approval in accordance with GCC Subclause
20.3.2. If the Project Manager approves the document subject
to modification(s), the Contractor shall make the required

modification(s), whereupon the document shall be deemed to

have been approved.
20.3.5 If any dispute or difference occurs between the Employer and

the Contractor in connection with or arising out of the
disapproval by the Project Manager of any document and/or any
modification(s) thereto that cannot be settled between the
parties within a reasonable period, then such dispute or
difference may be referred to an Dispute Board for
determination in accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3 hereof.
If such dispute or difference is referred to an Dispute Board, the
Project Manager shall give instructions as to whether and, if so,
how, performance of the Contract is to proceed. The Contractor
shall proceed with the Contract in accordance with the Project
Managers instructions, provided that if the Dispute Board
upholds the Contractors view on the dispute and if the
Employer has not given notice under Subclause 45.3 hereof,
then the Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Employer for any
additional costs incurred by reason of such instructions and
shall be relieved of such responsibility or liability in connection
with the dispute and the execution of the instructions as the
Dispute Board shall decide, and the Time for Completion shall
be extended accordingly.
20.3.6 The Project Managers approval, with or without modification of
the document furnished by the Contractor, shall not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility or liability imposed upon it by
any provisions of the Contract except to the extent that any
subsequent failure results from modifications required by the
Project Manager.
20.3.7 The Contractor shall not depart from any approved document
unless the Contractor has first submitted to the Project Manager
an amended document and obtained the Project Managers
approval thereof, pursuant to the provisions of this GCC
Subclause 20.3.
If the Project Manager requests any change in any already
approved document and/or in any document based thereon, the
provisions of GCC Clause 39 shall apply to such request.
21. Procurement 21.1 Materials

Subject to GCC Subclause 14.2, the Contractor shall procure and
transport all materials in an expeditious and orderly manner to the Site.
21.2 Employer-Supplied Materials
If the Appendix (Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer) to the
Contract Agreement provides that the Employer shall furnish any
specific items to the Contractor, the following provisions shall apply:
21.2.1 The Employer shall, at its own risk and expense, transport each
item to the place on or near the Site as agreed upon by the
parties and make such item available to the Contractor at the
time specified in the program furnished by the Contractor,
pursuant to GCC Subclause 18.2, unless otherwise mutually
agreed.

21.2.2 Upon receipt of such item, the Contractor shall inspect the same
visually and notify the Project Manager of any detected
shortage, defect, or default. The Employer shall immediately
remedy any shortage, defect, or default, or the Contractor shall,
if practicable and possible, at the request of the Employer,
remedy such shortage, defect, or default at the Employers cost
and expense. After inspection, such item shall fall under the
care, custody, and control of the Contractor. The provision of
this GCC Subclause 21.2.2 shall apply to any item supplied to
remedy any such shortage or default or to substitute for any
defective item, or shall apply to defective items that have been
repaired.
21.2.3 The foregoing responsibilities of the Contractor and its
obligations of care, custody, and control shall not relieve the
Employer of liability for any undetected shortage, defect, or
default, nor place the Contractor under any liability for any such
shortage, defect or default whether under GCC Clause 27 or
under any other provision of Contract.
21.3 Transportation
21.3.1 The Contractor shall at its own risk and expense transport all the
materials and the Contractors Equipment to the Site by the
mode of transport that the Contractor judges most suitable
under all the circumstances.
21.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall

be entitled to select any safe mode of transport operated by any
person to carry the materials and the Contractors Equipment.
21.3.3 Upon dispatch of each shipment of materials and the

Contractors Equipment, the Contractor shall notify the Employer
by telex, cable, facsimile, or electronic means, of the description
of the materials and of the Contractors Equipment, the point
and means of dispatch, and the estimated time and point of
arrival in the country where the Site is located, if applicable, and
at the Site. The Contractor shall furnish the Employer with
relevant shipping documents to be agreed upon between the
parties.
21.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, if necessary,

approvals from the authorities for transportation of the materials
and the Contractors Equipment to the Site. The Employer shall
use its best endeavors in a timely and expeditious manner to
assist the Contractor in obtaining such approvals, if requested
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless the Employer from and against any claim for damage
to roads, bridges, or any other traffic facilities that may be
caused by the transport of the materials and the Contractors
Equipment to the Site.
21.4 Customs Clearance

The Contractor shall, at its own expense, handle all imported materials
and Contractors Equipment at the point(s) of import and shall handle

any formalities for customs clearance, subject to the Employers

obligations under GCC Subclause 14.2, provided that if applicable laws
or regulations require any application or act to be made by or in the
name of the Employer, the Employer shall take all necessary steps to
comply with such laws or regulations. In the event of delays in customs
clearance that are not the fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall
be entitled to an extension in the Time for Completion, pursuant to
GCC Clause 40.
22. Installation 22.1 Setting Out/Supervision

22.1.1 Benchmark
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and
proper setting-out of the Facilities in relation to bench
marks, reference marks, and lines provided to it in writing
by or on behalf of the Employer.
(b) If, at any time during the progress of installation of the

Facilities, any error shall appear in the position, level, or
alignment of the Facilities, the Contractor shall forthwith
notify the Project Manager of such error and, at its own
expense, immediately rectify such error to the reasonable
satisfaction of the Project Manager. If such error is based
on incorrect data provided in writing by or on behalf of the
Employer, the expense of rectifying the same shall be
borne by the Employer.
22.1.2 Contractors Supervision

The Contractor shall give or provide all necessary
superintendence during the installation of the Facilities, and the
Construction Manager or its deputy shall be constantly on the
Site to provide full-time superintendence of the installation. The
Contractor shall provide and employ only technical personnel
who are skilled and experienced in their respective callings and
supervisory staff who are competent to adequately supervise
the work at hand.
22.2 Labor
22.2.1 Engagement of Staff and Labor
(a) Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the
Contractor shall make arrangements for the engagement
of all staff and labor, local or otherwise, and for their
payment, housing, feeding, and transport.
(b) The Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site in the
installation of the Facilities such skilled, semi-skilled, and
unskilled labor as is necessary for the proper and timely
execution of the Contract. The Contractor is encouraged
to use local labor that has the necessary skills.
(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all

necessary permit(s) and/or visa(s) from the appropriate
authorities for the entry of all labor and personnel to be

employed on the Site into the country where the Site is

located. The Employer will, if requested by the Contractor,
use his best endeavors in a timely and expeditious
manner to assist the Contractor in obtaining any local,
state, national, or government permission required for
bringing in the Contractors personnel.
(d) The Contractor shall at its own expense provide the

means of repatriation to all of its and its Subcontractors
personnel employed on the Contract at the Site to the
place where they were recruited or to their domicile. It
shall also provide suitable temporary maintenance of all
such persons from the cessation of their employment on
the Contract to the date programmed for their departure.
In the event that the Contractor defaults in providing such
means of transportation and temporary maintenance, the
Employer may provide the same to such personnel and
recover the cost of doing so from the Contractor.
22.2.2 Persons in the Service of Employer

The Contractor shall not recruit, or attempt to recruit, staff and
labor from amongst the Employers Personnel.
22.2.3 Labor Laws

(a) The Contractor shall comply with all the relevant labor
Laws applicable to the Contractors Personnel, including
Laws relating to their employment, health, safety, welfare,
immigration, and emigration, and shall allow them all their
legal rights.
(b) The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the
Contract use its best endeavors to prevent any unlawful,
riotous, or disorderly conduct or behavior by or amongst
its employees and the labor of its Subcontractors.
(c) The Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labor and the
labor of its Subcontractors currently employed on or
connected with the Contract, pay due regard to all
recognized festivals, official holidays, religious, or other
customs and all local laws and regulations pertaining to
the employment of labor.
22.2.4 Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labor

(a) The Contractor shall pay rates of wages, and observe
conditions of labor, which are not lower than those
established for the trade or industry where the work is
carried out. If no established rates or conditions are
applicable, the Contractor shall pay rates of wages and
observe conditions which are not lower than the general
level of wages and conditions observed locally by
employers whose trade or industry is similar to that of the
Contractor.
(b) The Contractor shall inform the Contractors Personnel

about their liability to pay personal income taxes in the

Country in respect of such of their salaries, wages, and
allowances as are chargeable under the Laws for the time
being in force, and the Contractor shall perform such
duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be
imposed on him by such Laws.
22.2.5 Working Hours

(a) No work shall be carried out on the Site on locally
recognized days of rest, or outside the normal working
hours stated in the SCC, unless
(i) otherwise stated in the Contract;
(ii) the Project Manager gives consent; or
(iii the work is unavoidable, or necessary for the
protection of life or property or for the safety of the
Works, in which case the Contractor shall
immediately advise the Project Manager.
(b) If and when the Contractor considers it necessary to carry
out work at night or on public holidays so as to meet the
Time for Completion and requests the Project Managers
consent thereto, the Project Manager shall not
unreasonably withhold such consent.
(c) This Subclause shall not apply to any work which is
customarily carried out by rotary or double shifts.
22.2.6 Facilities for Staff and Labor

(a) Except as otherwise stated in the Specification, the
Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary
accommodation and welfare facilities for the Contractors
Personnel. The Contractor shall also provide facilities for
the Employers Personnel as stated in the Specification.
(b) The Contractor shall not permit any of the Contractors
Personnel to maintain any temporary or permanent living
quarters within the structures forming part of the
Permanent Works.
22.2.7 Health and Safety

(a) The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable
precautions to maintain the health and safety of the
Contractors Personnel. In collaboration with local health
authorities, the Contractor shall ensure that medical staff,
first aid facilities, sick bay, and ambulance service are
available at all times at the Site and at any
accommodation for Contractors and Employers
Personnel, and that suitable arrangements are made for
all necessary welfare and hygiene requirements and for
the prevention of epidemics.
(b) The Contractor shall appoint an accident prevention officer
at the Site, responsible for maintaining safety and

protection against accidents. This person shall be qualified

for this responsibility, and shall have the authority to issue
instructions and take protective measures to prevent
accidents. Throughout the performance of the Contract,
the Contractor shall provide whatever is required by this
person to exercise this responsibility and authority.
(c) The Contractor shall send to the Project Manager, details

of any accident as soon as practicable after its
occurrence. The Contractor shall maintain records and
make reports concerning health, safety, and welfare of
persons, and damage to property, as the Project Manager
may reasonably require.
22.2.8 Funeral Arrangements
In the event of the death of any of the Contractors personnel
or accompanying members of their families, the Contractor
shall be responsible for making the appropriate arrangements
for their return or burial, unless otherwise specified in the
SCC.
22.2.9 Records of Contractors Personnel

The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the Contractors
personnel, including the number of each class of Contractors
Personnel on the Site and the names, ages, gender, hours
worked, and wages paid to all workers. These records shall be
summarized on a monthly basis in a form approved by the
Project Manager and shall be available for inspection by the
Project Manager until the Contractor has completed all work.
22.2.10 Supply of Foodstuff

The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of a sufficient
supply of suitable food as may be stated in the Specification at
reasonable prices for the Contractors Personnel for the
purposes of or in connection with the Contract.
22.2.11 Supply of Water

The Contractor shall, having regard to local conditions, provide
on the Site an adequate supply of drinking and other water for
the use of the Contractors Personnel.
22.2.12 Measures against Insect and Pest Nuisance

The Contractor shall at all times take the necessary
precautions to protect the Contractors Personnel employed on
the Site from insect and pest nuisance, and to reduce their
danger to health. The Contractor shall comply with all the
regulations of the local health authorities, including use of
appropriate insecticide.
22.2.13 Alcoholic Liquor or Drugs

The Contractor shall not, otherwise than in accordance with
the Laws of the Country, import, sell, give barter, or otherwise
dispose of any alcoholic liquor or drugs, or permit or allow
importation, sale, gift barter, or disposal by Contractor's
Personnel.

22.2.14 Arms and Ammunition

The Contractor shall not give, barter, or otherwise dispose of,
to any person, any arms or ammunition of any kind, or allow
Contractor's Personnel to do so.
22.2.15 Prohibition of All Forms of Forced or Compulsory Labor

The contractor shall not employ "forced or compulsory labor"
in any form. "Forced or compulsory labor" consists of all work
or service, not voluntarily performed, that is extracted from an
individual under threat of force or penalty.
22.2.16 Prohibition of Harmful Child Labor

The Contractor shall not employ any child to perform any work
that is economically exploitative, or is likely to be hazardous
to, or to interfere with, the child's education, or to be harmful to
the child's health or physical, mental, spiritual, moral, or social
development.
22.3 Contractors Equipment

22.3.1 All Contractors Equipment brought by the Contractor onto the
Site shall be deemed to be intended to be used exclusively for
the execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall not
remove the same from the Site without the Project Managers
consent that such Contractors Equipment is no longer
required for the execution of the Contract.
22.3.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, upon completion of

the Facilities, the Contractor shall remove from the Site all
Equipment brought by the Contractor onto the Site and any
surplus materials remaining thereon.
22.3.3 The Employer will, if requested, use its best endeavors to

assist the Contractor in obtaining any local, state or national
government permission required by the Contractor for the
export of the Contractors Equipment imported by the
Contractor for use in the execution of the Contract that is no
longer required for the execution of the Contract.
22.4 Site Regulations and Safety

The Employer and the Contractor shall establish Site regulations
setting out the rules to be observed in the execution of the Contract at
the Site and shall comply therewith. The Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Employer, with a copy to the Project Manager, proposed
Site regulations for the Employers approval, which approval shall not
be unreasonably withheld.
Such Site regulations shall include, but shall not be limited to, rules in
respect of security, safety of the Facilities, gate control, sanitation,
medical care, and fire prevention.
22.5 Opportunities for Other Contractors

22.5.1 The Contractor shall, upon written request from the Employer
or the Project Manager, give all reasonable opportunities for
carrying out the work to any other contractors employed by the

Employer on or near the Site.
22.5.2 If the Contractor, upon written request from the Employer or

the Project Manager, makes available to other contractors any
roads or ways the maintenance for which the Contractor is
responsible, permits the use by such other contractors of the
Contractors Equipment, or provides any other service of
whatsoever nature for such other contractors, the Employer
shall fully compensate the Contractor for any loss or damage
caused or occasioned by such other contractors in respect of
any such use or service, and shall pay to the Contractor
reasonable remuneration for the use of such equipment or the
provision of such services.
22.5.3 The Contractor shall also so arrange to perform its work as to

minimize, to the extent possible, interference with the work of
other contractors. The Project Manager shall determine the
resolution of any difference or conflict that may arise between
the Contractor and other contractors and the workers of the
Employer in regard to their work.
22.5.4 The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager promptly of

any defects in the other Contractors work that come to its
notice, and that could affect the Contractors work. The
Project Manager shall determine the corrective measures, if
any, required to rectify the situation after inspection of the
Facilities. Decisions made by the Project Manager shall be
binding on the Contractor.
22.6 Emergency Work

If, by reason of an emergency arising in connection with and during the
execution of the Contract, any protective or remedial work is necessary
as a matter of urgency to prevent damage to the Facilities, the
Contractor shall immediately carry out such work.
If the Contractor is unable or unwilling to do such work immediately, the

Employer may do or cause such work to be done as the Employer may
determine is necessary in order to prevent damage to the Facilities. In
such event the Employer shall, as soon as practicable after the
occurrence of any such emergency, notify the Contractor in writing of
such emergency, the work done and the reasons therefor. If the work
done or caused to be done by the Employer is work that the Contractor
was liable to do at its own expense under the Contract, the reasonable
costs incurred by the Employer in connection therewith shall be paid by
the Contractor to the Employer. Otherwise, the cost of such remedial
work shall be borne by the Employer.
22.7 Site Clearance

22.7.1 Site Clearance in Course of Performance
In the course of carrying out the Contract, the Contractor shall
keep the Site reasonably free from all unnecessary
obstruction, store, or remove any surplus materials, clear
away any wreckage, rubbish, or temporary works from the
Site, and remove any Contractors Equipment no longer

required for execution of the Contract.
22.7.2 Clearance of Site after Completion

After Completion of all parts of the Facilities, the Contractor
shall clear away and remove all wreckage, rubbish, and debris
of any kind from the Site, and shall leave the Site and
Facilities in a clean and safe condition.
22.8 Watching and Lighting

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at its own expense all
lighting, fencing, and watching when and where necessary for the
proper execution and the protection of the Facilities, or for the safety of
the owners and occupiers of adjacent property and for the safety of the
public.
23. Test and 23.1 The Contractor shall at its own expense carry out at the place of
Inspection manufacture and/or on the Site all such tests and/or inspections of the
Plant and any part of the Facilities as are specified in the Contract.
23.2 The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated

representatives shall be entitled to attend the aforesaid test and/or
inspection, provided that the Employer shall bear all costs and
expenses incurred in connection with such attendance including, but
not limited to, all traveling and board and lodging expenses.
23.3 Whenever the Contractor is ready to carry out any such test and/or
inspection, the Contractor shall give a reasonable advance notice of
such test and/or inspection and of the place and time thereof to the
Project Manager. The Contractor shall obtain from any relevant third
party or manufacturer any necessary permission or consent to enable
the Employer and the Project Manager or their designated
representatives to attend the test and/or inspection.
23.4 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a certified report
of the results of any such test and/or inspection.
If the Employer or Project Manager or their designated representatives

fails to attend the test and/or inspection, or if it is agreed between the
parties that such persons shall not do so, then the Contractor may
proceed with the test and/or inspection in the absence of such persons,
and may provide the Project Manager with a certified report of the
results thereof.
23.5 The Project Manager may require the Contractor to carry out any test
and/or inspection not required by the Contract, provided that the
Contractors reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the carrying
out of such test and/or inspection shall be added to the Contract Price.
Further, if such test and/or inspection impedes the progress of work on
the Facilities and/or the Contractors performance of its other
obligations under the Contract, due allowance will be made in respect
of the Time for Completion and the other obligations so affected.
23.6 If any Plant or any part of the Facilities fails to pass any test and/or
inspection, the Contractor shall either rectify or replace such Plant or

part of the Facilities and shall repeat the test and/or inspection upon
giving a notice under GCC Subclause 23.3.
23.7 If any dispute or difference of opinion shall arise between the parties in
connection with or arising out of the test and/or inspection of the Plant
or part of the Facilities that cannot be settled between the parties within
a reasonable period of time, it may be referred to an Dispute Board for
determination in accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3.
23.8 The Contractor shall afford the Employer and the Project Manager, at
the Employers expense, access at any reasonable time to any place
where the Plant are being manufactured or the Facilities are being
installed, in order to inspect the progress and the manner of
manufacture or installation, provided that the Project Manager shall
give the Contractor a reasonable prior notice.
23.9 The Contractor agrees that neither the execution of a test and/or
inspection of Plant or any part of the Facilities, nor the attendance by
the Employer or the Project Manager, nor the issue of any test
certificate pursuant to GCC Subclause 23.4, shall release the
Contractor from any other responsibilities under the Contract.
23.10 No part of the Facilities or foundations shall be covered up on the Site

without the Contractor carrying out any test and/or inspection required
under the Contract. The Contractor shall give a reasonable notice to
the Project Manager whenever any such parts of the Facilities or
foundations are ready or about to be ready for test and/or inspection;
such test and/or inspection and notice thereof shall be subject to the
requirements of the Contract.
23.11 The Contractor shall uncover any part of the Facilities or foundations,
or shall make openings in or through the same as the Project Manager
may from time to time require at the Site, and shall reinstate and make
good such part or parts.
If any parts of the Facilities or foundations have been covered up at the

Site after compliance with the requirement of GCC Subclause 23.10
and are found to be executed in accordance with the Contract, the
expenses of uncovering, making openings in or through, reinstating,
and making good the same shall be borne by the Employer, and the
Time for Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to the extent that the
Contractor has thereby been delayed or impeded in the performance of
any of its obligations under the Contract.
24. Completion of 24.1 As soon as the Facilities or any part thereof has, in the opinion of the
the Facilities Contractor, been completed operationally and structurally and put in a
tight and clean condition as specified in the Employers Requirements,
excluding minor items not materially affecting the operation or safety of
the Facilities, the Contractor shall so notify the Employer in writing.
24.2 Within 7 days after receipt of the notice from the Contractor under GCC
Subclause 24.1, the Employer shall supply the operating and
maintenance personnel specified in the Appendix (Scope of Works and
Supply by the Employer) to the Contract Agreement for Pre-

commissioning of the Facilities or any part thereof.
Pursuant to the Appendix (Scope of Works and Supply by the

Employer) to the Contract Agreement, the Employer shall also provide,
within the said 7-day period, the raw materials, utilities, lubricants,
chemicals, catalysts, facilities, services, and other matters required for
Pre-commissioning of the Facilities or any part thereof.
24.3 As soon as reasonably practicable after the operating and maintenance

personnel have been supplied by the Employer and the raw materials,
utilities, lubricants, chemicals, catalysts, facilities, services, and other
matters have been provided by the Employer in accordance with GCC
Subclause 24.2, the Contractor shall commence Pre-commissioning of
the Facilities or the relevant part thereof in preparation for
Commissioning, subject to GCC Subclause 25.5.
24.4 As soon as all works in respect of Pre-commissioning are completed

and, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Facilities or any part thereof is
ready for Commissioning, the Contractor shall so notify the Project
Manager in writing.
24.5 The Project Manager shall, within 14 days after receipt of the
Contractors notice under GCC Subclause 24.4, either issue a
Completion Certificate in the form specified in the Employers
Requirements (Forms and Procedures), stating that the Facilities or
that part thereof have reached Completion as of the date of the
Contractors notice under GCC Subclause 24.4, or notify the Contractor
in writing of any defects and/or deficiencies.
If the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of any defects and/or

deficiencies, the Contractor shall then correct such defects and/or
deficiencies, and shall repeat the procedure described in GCC
Subclause 24.4.
If the Project Manager is satisfied that the Facilities or that part thereof
have reached Completion, the Project Manager shall, within 7 days
after receipt of the Contractors repeated notice, issue a Completion
Certificate stating that the Facilities or that part thereof have reached
Completion as of the date of the Contractors repeated notice.
If the Project Manager is not so satisfied, then it shall notify the

Contractor in writing of any defects and/or deficiencies within 7 days
after receipt of the Contractors repeated notice, and the above
procedure shall be repeated.
24.6 If the Project Manager fails to issue the Completion Certificate and fails
to inform the Contractor of any defects and/or deficiencies within 14
days after receipt of the Contractors notice under GCC Subclause 24.4
or within 7 days after receipt of the Contractors repeated notice under
GCC Subclause 24.5, or if the Employer makes use of the Facilities or
part thereof, then the Facilities or that part thereof shall be deemed to
have reached Completion as of the date of the Contractors notice or
repeated notice, or as of the Employers use of the Facilities, as the
case may be.
24.7 As soon as possible after Completion, the Contractor shall complete all

outstanding minor items so that the Facilities are fully in accordance

with the requirements of the Contract, failing which the Employer will
undertake such completion and deduct the costs thereof from any
monies owing to the Contractor.
24.8 Upon Completion, the Employer shall be responsible for the care and
custody of the Facilities or the relevant part thereof, together with the
risk of loss or damage thereto, and shall thereafter take over the
Facilities or the relevant part thereof.
25. Commissioning 25.1 Commissioning

and Operational
25.1.1 Commissioning of the Facilities or any part thereof shall be
Acceptance
commenced by the Contractor immediately after issue of the
Completion Certificate by the Project Manager, pursuant to
GCC Subclause 24.5, or immediately after the date of the
deemed Completion, under GCC Subclause 24.6.
25.1.2 The Employer shall supply the operating and maintenance

personnel and all raw materials, utilities, lubricants, chemicals,
catalysts, facilities, services, and other matters required for
Commissioning.
25.1.3 In accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the

Contractors and Project Managers advisory personnel shall
attend the Commissioning, including the Guarantee Test, and
shall advise and assist the Employer.
25.2 Guarantee Test

25.2.1 Subject to GCC Subclause 25.5, the Guarantee Test and
repeats thereof shall be conducted by the Contractor during
Commissioning of the Facilities or the relevant part thereof to
ascertain whether the Facilities or the relevant part can attain
the Functional Guarantees specified in the Appendix (Functional
Guarantees) to the Contract Agreement. The Employer shall
promptly provide the Contractor with such information as the
Contractor may reasonably require in relation to the conduct and
results of the Guarantee Test and any repeats thereof.
25.2.2 If for reasons not attributable to the Contractor, the Guarantee

Test of the Facilities or the relevant part thereof cannot be
successfully completed within the period from the date of
Completion specified in the SCC or any other period agreed
upon by the Employer and the Contractor, the Contractor shall
be deemed to have fulfilled its obligations with respect to the
Functional Guarantees, and GCC Subclauses 28.2 and 28.3
shall not apply.
25.3 Operational Acceptance

25.3.1 Subject to GCC Subclause 25.4 below, Operational Acceptance
shall occur in respect of the Facilities or any part thereof when
(a) the Guarantee Test has been successfully completed and
the Functional Guarantees are met; or

(b) the Guarantee Test has not been successfully completed

or has not been carried out for reasons not attributable to
the Contractor within the period from the date of
Completion specified in the SCC, or any other agreed upon
period as specified in GCC Subclause 25.2.2 above; or
(c) the Contractor has paid the liquidated damages specified
in GCC Subclause 28.3 hereof; and
(d) any minor items mentioned in GCC Subclause 24.7 hereof
relevant to the Facilities or that part thereof have been
completed.
25.3.2 At any time after any of the events set out in GCC Subclause
25.3.1 have occurred, the Contractor may give a notice to the
Project Manager requesting the issue of an Operational
Acceptance Certificate in the form provided in the Employers
Requirements (Forms and Procedures) in respect of the
Facilities or the part thereof specified in such notice as of the
date of such notice.
25.3.3 The Project Manager shall, after consultation with the Employer,
and within 7 days after receipt of the Contractors notice, issue
an Operational Acceptance Certificate.
25.3.4 If within 7 days after receipt of the Contractors notice, the

Project Manager fails to issue the Operational Acceptance
Certificate or fails to inform the Contractor in writing of the
justifiable reasons why the Project Manager has not issued the
Operational Acceptance Certificate, the Facilities or the relevant
part thereof shall be deemed to have been accepted as of the
date of the Contractors said notice.
25.4 Partial Acceptance
25.4.1 If the Contract specifies that Completion and Commissioning
shall be carried out in respect of parts of the Facilities, the
provisions relating to Completion and Commissioning including
the Guarantee Test shall apply to each such part of the Facilities
individually, and the Operational Acceptance Certificate shall be
issued accordingly for each such part of the Facilities.
25.4.2 If a part of the Facilities comprises facilities such as buildings,

for which no Commissioning or Guarantee Test is required, then
the Project Manager shall issue the Operational Acceptance
Certificate for such facility when it attains Completion, provided
that the Contractor shall thereafter complete any outstanding
minor items that are listed in the Operational Acceptance
Certificate.
25.5 Delayed Pre-Commissioning and/or Guarantee Test

25.5.1 In the event that the Contractor is unable to proceed with the
Pre-commissioning of the Facilities pursuant to Subclause 24.3,
or with the Guarantee Test pursuant to Subclause 25.2, for
reasons attributable to the Employer either on account of non
availability of other facilities under the responsibilities of other

contractor(s), or for reasons beyond the Employers control, the

provisions leading to deemed completion of activities such as
Completion, pursuant to GCC Subclause 24.6, and Operational
Acceptance, pursuant to GCC Subclause 25.3.4, and
Contractors obligations regarding Defect Liability Period,
pursuant to GCC Subclause 27.2, Functional Guarantee,
pursuant to GCC Clause 28, and Care of Facilities, pursuant to
GCC Clause 32, and GCC Clause 41.1, Suspension, shall not
apply. In this case, the following provisions shall apply.
25.5.2 When the Contractor is notified by the Project Manager that he

will be unable to proceed with the activities and obligations
pursuant to above Subclause 25.5.1, the Contractor shall be
entitled to the following:
(a) the Time of Completion shall be extended for the period

of suspension without imposition of liquidated damages
pursuant to GCC Subclause 26.2;
(b) payments due to the Contractor in accordance with the

provision specified in the Appendix (Terms and
Procedures of Payment) to the Contract Agreement,
which would not have been payable in normal
circumstances due to noncompletion of the subject
activities, shall be released to the Contractor against
submission of a security in the form of a bank guarantee
of equivalent amount acceptable to the Employer, and
which shall become null and void when the Contractor
will have complied with its obligations regarding those
payments, subject to the provision of Subclause 25.5.3
below;
(c) the expenses towards the above security and extension

of other securities under the contract, of which validity
needs to be extended, shall be reimbursed to the
Contractor by the Employer;
(d) the additional charges towards the care of the Facilities

pursuant to GCC Subclause 32.1 shall be reimbursed to
the Contractor by the Employer for the period between
the notification mentioned above and the notification
mentioned in Subclause 25.5.4 below. The provision of
GCC Subclause 33.2 shall apply to the Facilities during
the same period.
25.5.3 In the event that the period of suspension under above

Subclause 25.5.1 actually exceeds 180 days, the Employer and
Contractor shall mutually agree to any additional compensation
payable to the Contractor.
25.5.4 When the Contractor is notified by the Project Manager that the
plant is ready for Pre-commissioning, the Contractor shall
proceed without delay in performing all the specified activities

and obligations under the contract.
F. Guarantees and Liabilities

26. Completion 26.1 The Contractor guarantees that it shall attain Completion of the
Time Guarantee Facilities (or a part for which a separate time for completion is
specified) within the Time for Completion specified in the SCC
pursuant to GCC Subclause 8.2, or within such extended time to which
the Contractor shall be entitled under GCC Clause 40 hereof.
26.2 If the Contractor fails to attain Completion of the Facilities or any part
thereof within the Time for Completion or any extension thereof under
GCC Clause 40, the Contractor shall pay to the Employer liquidated
damages in the amount specified in the SCC as a percentage rate of
the Contract Price or the relevant part thereof. The aggregate amount
of such liquidated damages shall in no event exceed the amount
specified as Maximum in the SCC as a percentage rate of the
Contract Price. Once the Maximum is reached, the Employer may
consider termination of the Contract, pursuant to GCC Subclause
42.2.2.
Such payment shall completely satisfy the Contractors obligation to

attain Completion of the Facilities or the relevant part thereof within the
Time for Completion or any extension thereof under GCC Clause 40.
The Contractor shall have no further liability whatsoever to the
Employer in respect thereof.
However, the payment of liquidated damages shall not in any way

relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations to complete the
Facilities or from any other obligations and liabilities of the Contractor
under the Contract.
Save for liquidated damages payable under this GCC Subclause 26.2,
the failure by the Contractor to attain any milestone or other act, matter
or thing by any date specified in the Appendix (Time Schedule) to the
Contract Agreement and/or other program of work prepared pursuant
to GCC Subclause 18.2 shall not render the Contractor liable for any
loss or damage thereby suffered by the Employer.
26.3 If the Contractor attains Completion of the Facilities or any part thereof
before the Time for Completion or any extension thereof under GCC
Clause 40, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor a bonus in the
amount specified in the SCC. The aggregate amount of such bonus
shall in no event exceed the amount specified as Maximum in the
SCC.
27. Defect Liability 27.1 The Contractor warrants that the Facilities or any part thereof shall be
free from defects in the design, engineering, materials, and
workmanship of the Plant supplied and of the work executed.
27.2 The Defect Liability Period shall be 540 days from the date of
Completion of the Facilities (or any part thereof) or 1 year from the

date of Operational Acceptance of the Facilities (or any part thereof),

whichever first occurs, unless specified otherwise in the SCC pursuant
to GCC Subclause 27.10.
If during the Defect Liability Period any defect should be found in the
design, engineering, materials, and workmanship of the Plant supplied
or of the work executed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall
promptly, in consultation and agreement with the Employer regarding
appropriate remedying of the defects, and at its cost, repair, replace, or
otherwise make good as the Contractor shall determine at its
discretion, such defect as well as any damage to the Facilities caused
by such defect. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the repair,
replacement, or making good of any defect or of any damage to the
Facilities arising out of or resulting from any of the following causes:
(a) improper operation or maintenance of the Facilities by the
Employer,
(b) operation of the Facilities outside specifications provided in the
Contract, or
(c) normal wear and tear.
27.3 The Contractors obligations under this GCC Clause 27 shall not apply
to:
(a) any materials that are supplied by the Employer under GCC
Subclause 21.2, are normally consumed in operation, or have a
normal life shorter than the Defect Liability Period stated herein;
(b) any designs, specifications or other data designed, supplied, or
specified by or on behalf of the Employer or any matters for
which the Contractor has disclaimed responsibility herein; or
(c) any other materials supplied or any other work executed by or on
behalf of the Employer, except for the work executed by the
Employer under GCC Subclause 27.7.
27.4 The Employer shall give the Contractor a notice stating the nature of
any such defect together with all available evidence thereof, promptly
following the discovery thereof. The Employer shall afford all
reasonable opportunity for the Contractor to inspect any such defect.
27.5 The Employer shall afford the Contractor all necessary access to the
Facilities and the Site to enable the Contractor to perform its
obligations under this GCC Clause 27.
The Contractor may, with the consent of the Employer, remove from
the Site any Plant or any part of the Facilities that are defective if the
nature of the defect, and/or any damage to the Facilities caused by the
defect, is such that repairs cannot be expeditiously carried out at the
Site.
27.6 If the repair, replacement or making good is of such a character that it

may affect the efficiency of the Facilities or any part thereof, the
Employer may give to the Contractor a notice requiring that tests of the
defective part of the Facilities shall be made by the Contractor
immediately upon completion of such remedial work, whereupon the

Contractor shall carry out such tests.
If such part fails the tests, the Contractor shall carry out further repair,
replacement or making good, as the case may be, until that part of the
Facilities passes such tests. The tests shall be agreed upon by the
Employer and the Contractor.
27.7 If the Contractor fails to commence the work necessary to remedy

such defect or any damage to the Facilities caused by such defect
within a reasonable time (which shall in no event be considered to be
less than 15 days), the Employer may, following notice to the
Contractor, proceed to do such work, and the reasonable costs
incurred by the Employer in connection therewith shall be paid to the
Employer by the Contractor or may be deducted by the Employer from
any monies due the Contractor or claimed under the Performance
Security.
27.8 If the Facilities or any part thereof cannot be used by reason of such
defect and/or making good of such defect, the Defect Liability Period of
the Facilities or such part, as the case may be, shall be extended by a
period equal to the period during which the Facilities or such part
cannot be used by the Employer because of any of the aforesaid
reasons.
27.9 Except as provided in GCC Clauses 27 and 33, the Contractor shall be
under no liability whatsoever and howsoever arising, and whether
under the Contract or at law, in respect of defects in the Facilities or
any part thereof, the Plant, design, or engineering, or work executed
that appear after Completion of the Facilities or any part thereof,
except where such defects are the result of the gross negligence,
fraud, criminal, or willful action of the Contractor.
27.10 In addition, any such component of the Facilities and during the period
of time as may be specified in the SCC shall be subject to an extended
Defect Liability Period. Such obligation of the Contractor shall be in
addition to the Defect Liability Period specified under GCC Subclause
27.2.
28. Functional 28.1 The Contractor guarantees that during the Guarantee Test, the
Guarantees Facilities and all parts thereof shall attain the Functional Guarantees
Agreement, subject to, and upon the conditions therein specified.
28.2 If, for reasons attributable to the Contractor, the minimum level of the
Functional Guarantees specified in the Appendix (Functional
Guarantees) to the Contract Agreement are not met either in whole or
in part, the Contractor shall at its cost and expense make such
changes, modifications, and/or additions to the Plant or any part
thereof as may be necessary to meet at least the minimum level of
such Guarantees. The Contractor shall notify the Employer upon
completion of the necessary changes, modifications, and/or additions,
and shall request the Employer to repeat the Guarantee Test until the
minimum level of the Guarantees has been met. If the Contractor
eventually fails to meet the minimum level of Functional Guarantees,
the Employer may consider termination of the Contract, pursuant to
GCC Subclause 42.2.2.

28.3 If, for reasons attributable to the Contractor, the Functional Guarantees
Agreement are not attained either in whole or in part, but the minimum
level of the Functional Guarantees specified in the said Appendix to
the Contract Agreement is met, the Contractor shall, at the
Contractors option, either
(a) make such changes, modifications, and/or additions to the
Facilities or any part thereof that are necessary to attain the
Functional Guarantees at its cost and expense, and shall request
the Employer to repeat the Guarantee Test or
(b) pay liquidated damages to the Employer in respect of the failure
to meet the Functional Guarantees in accordance with the
provisions in the Appendix (Functional Guarantees) to the
Contract Agreement.
28.4 The payment of liquidated damages under GCC Subclause 28.3, up to
the limitation of liability specified in the Appendix (Functional
Guarantees) to the Contract Agreement, shall completely satisfy the
Contractors guarantees under GCC Subclause 28.3, and the
Contractor shall have no further liability whatsoever to the Employer in
respect thereof. Upon the payment of such liquidated damages by the
Contractor, the Project Manager shall issue the Operational
Acceptance Certificate for the Facilities or any part thereof in respect of
which the liquidated damages have been so paid.
29. Patent 29.1 The Contractor shall, subject to the Employers compliance with GCC
Indemnity Subclause 29.2, indemnify and hold harmless the Employer and its
employees and officers from and against any and all suits, actions, or
administrative proceedings, claims, demands, losses, damages, costs,
and expenses of whatsoever nature, including attorneys fees and
expenses, which the Employer may suffer as a result of any
infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, utility model,
registered design, trademark, copyright, or other intellectual property
right registered or otherwise existing at the date of the Contract by
reason of (a) the installation of the Facilities by the Contractor or the
use of the Facilities in the country where the Site is located, and (b) the
sale of the products produced by the Facilities in any country.
Such indemnity shall not cover any use of the Facilities or any part
thereof other than for the purpose indicated by or to be reasonably
inferred from the Contract, any infringement resulting from the use of
the Facilities or any part thereof, or any products produced thereby in
association or combination with any other equipment, plant, or
materials not supplied by the Contractor, pursuant to the Contract
Agreement.
29.2 If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Employer arising out of the matters referred to in GCC Subclause 29.1,
the Employer shall promptly give the Contractor a notice thereof, and
the Contractor may at its own expense and in the Employers name
conduct such proceedings or claim and any negotiations for the
settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Employer within 28 days after receipt
of such notice that it intends to conduct any such proceedings or claim,

then the Employer shall be free to conduct the same on its own behalf.
Unless the Contractor has so failed to notify the Employer within the
28-day period, the Employer shall make no admission that may be
prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
The Employer shall, at the Contractors request, afford all available

assistance to the Contractor in conducting such proceedings or claim,
and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable expenses
incurred in so doing.
29.3 The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and its
employees, officers, and Subcontractors from and against any and all
suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims, demands, losses,
damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever nature, including
attorneys fees and expenses, which the Contractor may suffer as a
result of any infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, utility
model, registered design, trademark, copyright, or other intellectual
property right registered or otherwise existing at the date of the
Contract arising out of or in connection with any design, data, drawing,
specification, or other documents or materials provided or designed by
or on behalf of the Employer.
30. Limitation of 30.1 Except in cases of criminal negligence or willful misconduct,

Liability
(a) the Contractor shall not be liable to the Employer, whether in
contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or consequential loss
or damage, loss of use, loss of production, or loss of profits or
interest costs, provided that this exclusion shall not apply to any
obligation of the Contractor to pay liquidated damages to the
Employer, and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Employer, whether
under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not exceed a
multiple of the Contract Price specified in the SCC or, if a
multiple is not so specified, the total Contract Price, provided that
this limitation shall not apply to the cost of repairing or replacing
defective equipment, or to any obligation of the Contractor to
indemnify the Employer with respect to patent infringement.
G. Risk Distribution
31. Transfer of 31.1 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) to be imported into the
Ownership country where the Site is located shall be transferred to the Employer
upon loading on to the mode of transport to be used to convey the
Plant from the country of origin to that country.
31.2 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) procured in the country
where the Site is located shall be transferred to the Employer when the
Plant are brought on to the Site.
31.3 Ownership of the Contractors Equipment used by the Contractor and

its Subcontractors in connection with the Contract shall remain with the
Contractor or its Subcontractors.

31.4 Ownership of any Plant in excess of the requirements for the Facilities
shall revert to the Contractor upon Completion of the Facilities or at
such earlier time when the Employer and the Contractor agree that the
Plant in question are no longer required for the Facilities.
31.5 Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership of the Plant, the

responsibility for care and custody thereof together with the risk of loss
or damage thereto shall remain with the Contractor pursuant to GCC
Clause 32 (Care of Facilities) hereof until Completion of the Facilities
or the part thereof in which such Plant are incorporated.
32. Care of Facilities 32.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and custody of the
Facilities or any part thereof until the date of Completion of the
Facilities pursuant to GCC Clause 24 or, where the Contract provides
for Completion of the Facilities in parts, until the date of Completion of
the relevant part, and shall make good at its own cost any loss or
damage that may occur to the Facilities or the relevant part thereof
from any cause whatsoever during such period. The Contractor shall
also be responsible for any loss or damage to the Facilities caused by
the Contractor or its Subcontractors in the course of any work carried
out, pursuant to GCC Clause 27. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the
Contractor shall not be liable for any loss or damage to the Facilities or
that part thereof caused by reason of any of the matters specified or
referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GCC Subclauses 32.2 and
38.1.
32.2 If any loss or damage occurs to the Facilities or any part thereof or to
the Contractors temporary facilities by reason of
(a) insofar as they relate to the country where the Site is located,
nuclear reaction, nuclear radiation, radioactive contamination,
pressure wave caused by aircraft or other aerial objects, or any
other occurrences that an experienced contractor could not
reasonably foresee, or if reasonably foreseeable could not
reasonably make provision for or insure against, insofar as such
risks are not normally insurable on the insurance market and are
mentioned in the general exclusions of the policy of insurance,
including War Risks and Political Risks, taken out under GCC
Clause 34 hereof; or
(b) any use or occupation by the Employer or any third party other
than a Subcontractor, authorized by the Employer of any part of
the Facilities; or
(c) any use of or reliance upon any design, data, or specification
provided or designated by or on behalf of the Employer, or any
such matter for which the Contractor has disclaimed
responsibility herein,
the Employer shall pay to the Contractor all sums payable in respect of
the Facilities executed, notwithstanding that the same be lost,
destroyed, or damaged, and will pay to the Contractor the replacement
value of all temporary facilities and all parts thereof lost, destroyed, or
damaged. If the Employer requests the Contractor in writing to make
good any loss or damage to the Facilities thereby occasioned, the
Contractor shall make good the same at the cost of the Employer in

accordance with GCC Clause 39. If the Employer does not request the
Contractor in writing to make good any loss or damage to the Facilities
thereby occasioned, the Employer shall either request a change in
accordance with GCC Clause 39, excluding the performance of that
part of the Facilities thereby lost, destroyed or damaged, or, where the
loss or damage affects a substantial part of the Facilities, the Employer
shall terminate the Contract pursuant to GCC Subclause 42.1 hereof.
32.3 The Contractor shall be liable for any loss of or damage to any
Contractors Equipment, or any other property of the Contractor used
or intended to be used for purposes of the Facilities, except (i) as
mentioned in GCC Subclause 32.2 with respect to the Contractors
temporary facilities, and (ii) where such loss or damage arises by
reason of any of the matters specified in GCC Subclauses 32.2 (b) and
(c) and 38.1.
32.4 With respect to any loss or damage caused to the Facilities or any part
thereof or to the Contractors Equipment by reason of any of the
matters specified in GCC Subclause 38.1, the provisions of GCC
Subclause 38.3 shall apply.
33. Loss of or 33.1 Subject to GCC Subclause 33.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and
Damage to hold harmless the Employer and its employees and officers from and
Property; against any and all suits, actions, or administrative proceedings,
Accident or Injury claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of
to Workers; whatsoever nature, including attorneys fees and expenses, in respect
Indemnification of the death or injury of any person or loss of or damage to any
property other than the Facilities whether accepted or not, arising in
connection with the supply and installation of the Facilities and by
reason of the negligence of the Contractor or its Subcontractors, or
their employees, officers, or agents, except any injury, death, or
property damage caused by the negligence of the Employer, its
contractors, employees, officers, or agents.
33.2 If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Employer that might subject the Contractor to liability under GCC
Subclause 33.1, the Employer shall promptly give the Contractor a
notice thereof and the Contractor may at its own expense and in the
Employers name conduct such proceedings or claim and any
negotiations for the settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Employer within 28 days after receipt
of such notice that it intends to conduct any such proceedings or claim,
then the Employer shall be free to conduct the same on its own behalf.
Unless the Contractor has so failed to notify the Employer within the
28-day period, the Employer shall make no admission that may be
prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
The Employer shall, at the Contractors request, afford all available

assistance to the Contractor in conducting such proceedings or claim,
and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable expenses
incurred in so doing.
33.3 The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and its

employees, officers, and Subcontractors from any liability for loss of or

damage to property of the Employer, other than the Facilities not yet
taken over, that is caused by fire, explosion, or any other perils, in
excess of the amount recoverable from insurances procured under
GCC Clause 34, provided that such fire, explosion, or other perils were
not caused by any act or failure of the Contractor.
33.4 The party entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this GCC Clause
33 shall take all reasonable measures to mitigate any loss or damage
which has occurred. If the party fails to take such measures, the other
partys liabilities shall be correspondingly reduced.
34. Insurance 34.1 To the extent specified in the Appendix (Insurance Requirements) to
the Contract Agreement, the Contractor shall at its expense take out
and maintain in effect, or cause to be taken out and maintained in
effect, during the performance of the Contract, the insurances set forth
below in the sums and with the deductibles and other conditions
specified in the said Appendix. The identity of the insurers and the
form of the policies shall be subject to the approval of the Employer,
who should not unreasonably withhold such approval.
(a) Cargo Insurance During Transport
Covering loss or damage occurring while in transit from the
Contractors or Subcontractors works or stores until arrival at the
Site, to the Plant (including spare parts therefor) and to the
Contractors Equipment.
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance
Covering physical loss or damage to the Facilities at the Site,
occurring prior to Completion of the Facilities, with an extended
maintenance coverage for the Contractors liability in respect of
any loss or damage occurring during the Defect Liability Period
while the Contractor is on the Site for the purpose of performing
its obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
(c) Third Party Liability Insurance

Covering bodily injury or death suffered by third parties including
the Employers personnel, and loss of or damage to property
occurring in connection with the supply and installation of the
Facilities.
(d) Automobile Liability Insurance
Covering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors, whether or not owned by them, in connection
with the execution of the Contract.
(e) Workers Compensation

In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any
country where the Contract or any part thereof is executed.
(f) Employers Liability

In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any

country where the Contract or any part thereof is executed.
(g) Other Insurances

Such other insurances as may be specifically agreed upon by
the parties hereto as listed in the Appendix (Insurance
Requirements) to the Contract Agreement.
34.2 The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance

policies taken out by the Contractor pursuant to GCC Subclause 34.1,
except for the Third Party Liability, Workers Compensation, and
Employers Liability Insurances, and the Contractors Subcontractors
shall be named as co-insureds under all insurance policies taken out
by the Contractor pursuant to GCC Subclause 34.1 except for the
Cargo Insurance During Transport, Workers Compensation, and
Employers Liability Insurances. All insurers rights of subrogation
against such co-insureds for losses or claims arising out of the
performance of the Contract shall be waived under such policies.
34.3 The Contractor shall, in accordance with the provisions of the

Appendix (Insurance Requirements) to the Contract Agreement,
deliver to the Employer certificates of insurance or copies of the
insurance policies as evidence that the required policies are in full
force and effect. The certificates shall provide that no less than 21
days notice shall be given to the Employer by insurers prior to
cancellation or material modification of a policy.
34.4 The Contractor shall ensure that, where applicable, its

Subcontractor(s) shall take out and maintain in effect adequate
insurance policies for their personnel and vehicles and for work
executed by them under the Contract, unless such Subcontractors are
covered by the policies taken out by the Contractor.
34.5 The Employer shall at its expense take out and maintain in effect
during the performance of the Contract those insurances specified in
the Appendix (Insurance Requirements) to the Contract Agreement, in
the sums and with the deductibles and other conditions specified in the
said Appendix. The Contractor and the Contractors Subcontractors
shall be named as co-insureds under all such policies. All insurers
rights of subrogation against such co-insureds for losses or claims
arising out of the performance of the Contract shall be waived under
such policies. The Employer shall deliver to the Contractor satisfactory
evidence that the required insurances are in full force and effect. The
policies shall provide that not less than 21 days notice shall be given
to the Contractor by all insurers prior to any cancellation or material
modification of the policies. If so requested by the Contractor, the
Employer shall provide copies of the policies taken out by the
Employer under this GCC Subclause 34.5.
34.6 If the Contractor fails to take out and/or maintain in effect the
insurances referred to in GCC Subclause 34.1, the Employer may take
out and maintain in effect any such insurances and may from time to
time deduct from any amount due the Contractor under the Contract
any premium that the Employer shall have paid to the insurer, or may
otherwise recover such amount as a debt due from the Contractor. If

the Employer fails to take out and/or maintain in effect the insurances
referred to in GCC 34.5, the Contractor may take out and maintain in
effect any such insurances and may from time to time deduct from any
amount due the Employer under the Contract any premium that the
Contractor shall have paid to the insurer, or may otherwise recover
such amount as a debt due from the Employer. If the Contractor fails
to or is unable to take out and maintain in effect any such insurances,
the Contractor shall nevertheless have no liability or responsibility
towards the Employer, and the Contractor shall have full recourse
against the Employer for any and all liabilities of the Employer herein.
34.7 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare
and conduct all and any claims made under the policies effected by it
pursuant to this GCC Clause 34, and all monies payable by any
insurers shall be paid to the Contractor. The Employer shall give to the
Contractor all such reasonable assistance as may be required by the
Contractor. With respect to insurance claims in which the Employers
interest is involved, the Contractor shall not give any release or make
any compromise with the insurer without the prior written consent of
the Employer. With respect to insurance claims in which the
Contractors interest is involved, the Employer shall not give any
release or make any compromise with the insurer without the prior
written consent of the Contractor.
35. Unforeseen 35.1 If, during the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall encounter
Conditions on the Site any physical conditions other than climatic conditions, or
artificial obstructions that could not have been reasonably foreseen
prior to the date of the Contract Agreement by an experienced
contractor on the basis of reasonable examination of the data relating
to the Facilities including any data as to boring tests, provided by the
Employer, and on the basis of information that it could have obtained
from a visual inspection of the Site if access thereto was available, or
other data readily available to it relating to the Facilities, and if the
Contractor determines that it will in consequence of such conditions or
obstructions incur additional cost and expense or require additional
time to perform its obligations under the Contract that would not have
been required if such physical conditions or artificial obstructions had
not been encountered, the Contractor shall promptly, and before
performing additional work or using additional Plant or Contractors
Equipment, notify the Project Manager in writing of
(a) the physical conditions or artificial obstructions on the Site that

could not have been reasonably foreseen;
(b) the additional work and/or Plant and/or Contractors Equipment

required, including the steps which the Contractor will or
proposes to take to overcome such conditions or obstructions;
(c) the extent of the anticipated delay; and
(d) the additional cost and expense that the Contractor is likely to
incur.
On receiving any notice from the Contractor under this GCC Subclause

35.1, the Project Manager shall promptly consult with the Employer
and Contractor and decide upon the actions to be taken to overcome
the physical conditions or artificial obstructions encountered. Following
such consultations, the Project Manager shall instruct the Contractor,
with a copy to the Employer, of the actions to be taken.
35.2 Any reasonable additional cost and expense incurred by the Contractor
in following the instructions from the Project Manager to overcome
such physical conditions or artificial obstructions referred to in GCC
Subclause 35.1 shall be paid by the Employer to the Contractor as an
addition to the Contract Price.
35.3 If the Contractor is delayed or impeded in the performance of the

Contract because of any such physical conditions or artificial
obstructions referred to in GCC Subclause 35.1, the Time for
Completion shall be extended in accordance with GCC Clause 40.
36. Change in Laws 36.1 If, after the date 28 days prior to the date of Bid submission, in the
and Regulations country where the Site is located, any law, regulation, ordinance, order
or by-law having the force of law is enacted, promulgated, abrogated,
or changed, which shall be deemed to include any change in
interpretation or application by the competent authorities, that
subsequently affects the costs and expenses of the Contractor and/or
the Time for Completion, the Contract Price shall be correspondingly
increased or decreased, and/or the Time for Completion shall be
reasonably adjusted to the extent that the Contractor has thereby been
affected in the performance of any of its obligations under the Contract.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or reduced costs shall
not be separately paid or credited if the same has already been
accounted for in the price adjustment provisions where applicable, in
accordance with the SCC, pursuant to GCC Subclause 11.2.
37. Force Majeure 37.1 Force Majeure shall mean any event beyond the reasonable control
of the Employer or of the Contractor, as the case may be, and which is
unavoidable notwithstanding the reasonable care of the party affected,
and shall include, without limitation, the following:
(a) war, hostilities, or warlike operations whether a state of war be

declared or not, invasion, act of foreign enemy and civil war;
(b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, usurpation of civil or

military government, conspiracy, riot, civil commotion, and
terrorist acts;
(c) confiscation, nationalization, mobilization, commandeering or

requisition by or under the order of any government or de jure or
de facto authority or ruler or any other act or failure to act of any
local state or national government authority;
(d) strike, sabotage, lockout, embargo, import restriction, port

congestion, lack of usual means of public transportation and
communication, industrial dispute, shipwreck, shortage or
restriction of power supply, epidemics, quarantine, and plague;
(e) earthquake, landslide, volcanic activity, fire, flood or inundation,

tidal wave, typhoon or cyclone, hurricane, storm, lightning, or

other inclement weather condition, nuclear, and pressure waves
or other natural or physical disaster; and
(f) shortage of labor, materials, or utilities where caused by

circumstances that are themselves Force Majeure.
37.2 If either party is prevented, hindered, or delayed from or in performing

any of its obligations under the Contract by an event of Force Majeure,
then it shall notify the other in writing of the occurrence of such event
and the circumstances thereof within 14 days after the occurrence of
such event.
37.3 The party who has given such notice shall be excused from the
performance or punctual performance of its obligations under the
Contract for so long as the relevant event of Force Majeure continues
and to the extent that such partys performance is prevented, hindered,
or delayed. The Time for Completion shall be extended in accordance
with GCC Clause 40.
37.4 The party or parties affected by the event of Force Majeure shall use
reasonable efforts to mitigate the effect thereof upon its or their
performance of the Contract and to fulfill its or their obligations under
the Contract, but without prejudice to either partys right to terminate
the Contract under GCC Subclauses 37.6 and 38.5.
37.5 No delay or nonperformance by either party hereto caused by the

occurrence of any event of Force Majeure shall
(a) constitute a default or breach of the Contract; or
(b) give rise to any claim for damages or additional cost or expense
occasioned thereby, subject to GCC Subclauses 32.2, 38.3 and
38.4
if and to the extent that such delay or nonperformance is caused by the

occurrence of an event of Force Majeure.
37.6 If the performance of the Contract is substantially prevented, hindered,

or delayed for a single period of more than 60 days or an aggregate
period of more than 120 days on account of one or more events of
Force Majeure during the currency of the Contract, the parties will
attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory solution, failing which either
party may terminate the Contract by giving a notice to the other, but
without prejudice to either partys right to terminate the Contract under
GCC Subclause 38.5.
37.7 In the event of termination pursuant to GCC Subclause 37.6, the rights
and obligations of the Employer and the Contractor shall be as
specified in GCC Subclauses 42.1.2 and 42.1.3.
37.8 Notwithstanding GCC Subclause 37.5, Force Majeure shall not apply
to any obligation of the Employer to make payments to the Contractor
herein.

38. War Risks 38.1 War Risks shall mean any event specified in paragraphs (a) and (b)
of GCC Subclause 37.1 and any explosion or impact of any mine,
bomb, shell, grenade, or other projectile, missile, munitions or
explosive of war, occurring or existing in or near the country (or
countries) where the Site is located.
38.2 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor

shall have no liability whatsoever for or with respect to
(a) destruction of or damage to Facilities, Plant, or any part thereof;
(b) destruction of or damage to property of the Employer or any third
party; or
(c) injury or loss of life
if such destruction, damage, injury or loss of life is caused by any war

risks, and the Employer shall indemnify and hold the Contractor
harmless from and against any and all claims, liabilities, actions,
lawsuits, damages, costs, charges, or expenses arising in
consequence of or in connection with the same.
38.3 If the Facilities or any Plant or Contractors Equipment or any other

property of the Contractor used or intended to be used for the
purposes of the Facilities shall sustain destruction or damage by
reason of any war risks, the Employer shall pay the Contractor for
(a) any part of the Facilities or the Plant so destroyed or damaged to
the extent not already paid for by the Employer and so far as
may be required by the Employer, and as may be necessary for
completion of the Facilities;
(b) replacing or making good any Contractors Equipment or other
property of the Contractor so destroyed or damaged; and
(c) replacing or making good any such destruction or damage to the
Facilities or the Plant or any part thereof.
If the Employer does not require the Contractor to replace or make

good any such destruction or damage to the Facilities, the Employer
shall either request a change in accordance with GCC Clause 39,
excluding the performance of that part of the Facilities thereby
destroyed or damaged or, where the loss, destruction, or damage
affects a substantial part of the Facilities, shall terminate the Contract,
pursuant to GCC Subclause 42.1.
If the Employer requires the Contractor to replace or make good on

any such destruction or damage to the Facilities, the Time for
Completion shall be extended in accordance with GCC 40.
38.4 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Employer shall

pay the Contractor for any increased costs or incidentals to the
execution of the Contract that are in any way attributable to,
consequent on, resulting from, or in any way connected with any war
risks, provided that the Contractor shall as soon as practicable notify
the Employer in writing of any such increased cost.

38.5 If during the performance of the Contract any war risks shall occur that
financially or otherwise materially affect the execution of the Contract
by the Contractor, the Contractor shall use its reasonable efforts to
execute the Contract with due and proper consideration given to the
safety of its and its Subcontractors personnel engaged in the work on
the Facilities, provided, however, that if the execution of the work on
the Facilities becomes impossible or is substantially prevented for a
single period of more than sixty (60) days or an aggregate period of
more than one hundred and twenty (120) days on account of any war
risks, the parties will attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory
solution, failing which either party may terminate the Contract by giving
a notice to the other.
38.6 In the event of termination pursuant to GCC Subclauses 38.3 or 38.5,

the rights and obligations of the Employer and the Contractor shall be
specified in GCC Subclauses 42.1.2 and 42.1.3.
H. Change in Contract Elements
39. Change in the 39.1 Introducing a Change

Facilities
39.1.1 Subject to GCC Subclauses 39.2.5 and 39.2.7, the Employer
shall have the right to propose, and subsequently require, that
the Project Manager order the Contractor from time to time
during the performance of the Contract to make any change,
modification, addition, or deletion to, in or from the Facilities
hereinafter called Change, provided that such Change falls
within the general scope of the Facilities and does not constitute
unrelated work and that it is technically practicable, taking into
account both the state of advancement of the Facilities and the
technical compatibility of the Change envisaged with the nature
of the Facilities as specified in the Contract.
39.1.2 The Contractor may from time to time during its performance of
the Contract propose to the Employer with a copy to the Project
Manager, any Change that the Contractor considers necessary
or desirable to improve the quality, efficiency, or safety of the
Facilities. The Employer may at its discretion approve or reject
any Change proposed by the Contractor, provided that the
Employer shall approve any Change proposed by the Contractor
to ensure the safety of the Facilities.
39.1.3 Notwithstanding GCC Subclauses 39.1.1 and 39.1.2, no change
made necessary because of any default of the Contractor in the
performance of its obligations under the Contract shall be
deemed to be a Change, and such change shall not result in any
adjustment of the Contract Price or the Time for Completion.
39.1.4 The procedure on how to proceed with and execute Changes is
specified in GCC Subclauses 39.2 and 39.3, and further details
and forms are provided in the Employers Requirements (Forms
and Procedures).
39.2 Changes Originating from Employer

39.2.1 If the Employer proposes a Change pursuant to GCC Subclause

39.1.1, it shall send to the Contractor a Request for Change
Proposal, requiring the Contractor to prepare and furnish to the
Project Manager as soon as reasonably practicable a Change
Proposal, which shall include the following:
(a) brief description of the Change,
(b) effect on the Time for Completion,
(c) estimated cost of the Change,
(d) effect on Functional Guarantees (if any),
(e) effect on the Facilities, and
(f) effect on any other provisions of the Contract.
39.2.2 Prior to preparing and submitting the Change Proposal, the

Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager an Estimate for
Change Proposal, which shall be an estimate of the cost of
preparing and submitting the Change Proposal.
Upon receipt of the Contractors Estimate for Change Proposal,

the Employer shall do one of the following:
(a) accept the Contractors estimate with instructions to the

Contractor to proceed with the preparation of the Change
Proposal,
(b) advise the Contractor of any part of its Estimate for

Change Proposal that is unacceptable and request the
Contractor to review its estimate
(c) advise the Contractor that the Employer does not intend to
proceed with the Change.
39.2.3 Upon receipt of the Employers instruction to proceed under GCC

Subclause 39.2.2 (a), the Contractor shall, with proper
expedition, proceed with the preparation of the Change Proposal,
in accordance with GCC Subclause 39.2.1.
39.2.4 The pricing of any Change shall, as far as practicable, be

calculated in accordance with the rates and prices included in the
Contract. If such rates and prices are inequitable, the parties
thereto shall agree on specific rates for the valuation of the
Change.
39.2.5 If before or during the preparation of the Change Proposal it

becomes apparent that the aggregate effect of compliance
therewith and with all other Change Orders that have already
become binding upon the Contractor under this GCC Clause 39
would be to increase or decrease the Contract Price as originally
set forth in Article 2 (Contract Price) of the Contract Agreement
by more than 15%, the Contractor may give a written notice of

objection thereto prior to furnishing the Change Proposal as

aforesaid. If the Employer accepts the Contractors objection,
the Employer shall withdraw the proposed Change and shall
notify the Contractor in writing thereof.
The Contractors failure to so object shall neither affect its right to

object to any subsequent requested Changes or Change Orders
herein, nor affect its right to take into account, when making such
subsequent objection, the percentage increase or decrease in
the Contract Price that any Change not objected to by the
Contractor represents.
39.2.6 Upon receipt of the Change Proposal, the Employer and the
Contractor shall mutually agree upon all matters therein
contained. Within 14 days after such agreement, the Employer
shall, if it intends to proceed with the Change, issue the
Contractor with a Change Order.
If the Employer is unable to reach a decision within 14 days, it

shall notify the Contractor with details of when the Contractor can
expect a decision.
If the Employer decides not to proceed with the Change for

whatever reason, it shall, within the said period of 14 days, notify
the Contractor accordingly. Under such circumstances, the
Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement of all costs
reasonably incurred by it in the preparation of the Change
Proposal, provided that these do not exceed the amount given by
the Contractor in its Estimate for Change Proposal submitted in
accordance with GCC Subclause 39.2.2.
39.2.7 If the Employer and the Contractor cannot reach agreement on

the price for the Change, an equitable adjustment to the Time for
Completion, or any other matters identified in the Change
Proposal, the Employer may nevertheless instruct the Contractor
to proceed with the Change by issue of a Pending Agreement
Change Order.
Upon receipt of a Pending Agreement Change Order, the

Contractor shall immediately proceed with effecting the Changes
covered by such Order. The parties shall thereafter attempt to
reach agreement on the outstanding issues under the Change
Proposal.
If the parties cannot reach agreement within 60 days from the

date of issue of the Pending Agreement Change Order, then the
matter may be referred to the Dispute Board in accordance with
the provisions of GCC Subclause 45.3.
39.3 Changes Originating from Contractor

39.3.1 If the Contractor proposes a Change pursuant to GCC Subclause
39.1.2, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a
written Application for Change Proposal, giving reasons for the

proposed Change and including the information specified in GCC

Subclause 39.2.1.
Upon receipt of the Application for Change Proposal, the parties

shall follow the procedures outlined in GCC Subclauses 39.2.6
and 39.2.7. However, should the Employer choose not to
proceed, the Contractor shall not be entitled to recover the costs
of preparing the Application for Change Proposal.
40. Extension of Time 40.1 The Time(s) for Completion specified in the SCC shall be extended if
for Completion the Contractor is delayed or impeded in the performance of any of its
obligations under the Contract by reason of any of the following:
(a) any Change in the Facilities as provided in GCC Clause 39;
(b) any occurrence of Force Majeure as provided in GCC Clause 37,

unforeseen conditions as provided in GCC Clause 35, or other
occurrence of any of the matters specified or referred to in
paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GCC Subclause 32.2;
(c) any suspension order given by the Employer under GCC Clause
41 hereof or reduction in the rate of progress pursuant to GCC
Subclause 41.2; or
(d) any changes in laws and regulations as provided in GCC Clause

36; or
(e) any default or breach of the Contract by the Employer, or any

activity, act or omission of the Employer, or the Project Manager,
or any other contractors employed by the Employer; or
(f) any other matter specifically mentioned in the Contract; or
(g) any delay on the part of a sub-contractor, provided such delay is

due to a cause for which the Contractor himself would have been
entitled to an extension of time under this Subclause
by such period as shall be fair and reasonable in all the circumstances

and as shall fairly reflect the delay or impediment sustained by the
Contractor.
40.2 Except where otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the

Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a notice of a claim for an
extension of the Time for Completion, together with particulars of the
event or circumstance justifying such extension as soon as reasonably
practicable after the commencement of such event or circumstance. As
soon as reasonably practicable after receipt of such notice and
supporting particulars of the claim, the Employer and the Contractor
shall agree upon the period of such extension. In the event that the
Contractor does not accept the Employers estimate of a fair and
reasonable time extension, the Contractor shall be entitled to refer the
matter to a Dispute Board, pursuant to GCC Subclause 45.3.
40.3 The Contractor shall at all times use its reasonable efforts to minimize
any delay in the performance of its obligations under the Contract.

In all cases where the Contractor has given a notice of a claim for an
extension of time under GCC 40.2, the Contractor shall consult with the
Project Manager in order to determine the steps (if any) which can be
taken to overcome or minimize the actual or anticipated delay. The
Contractor shall there after comply with all reasonable instructions,
which the Project Manager shall give in order to minimize such delay. If
compliance with such instructions shall cause the Contractor to incur
extra costs and the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under
GCC 40.1, the amount of such extra costs shall be added to the
Contract Price.
41. Suspension 41.1 The Employer may request the Project Manager, by notice to the
Contractor, to order the Contractor to suspend performance of any or all
of its obligations under the Contract. Such notice shall specify the
obligation of which performance is to be suspended, the effective date
of the suspension and the reasons therefor. The Contractor shall
thereupon suspend performance of such obligation, except those
obligations necessary for the care or preservation of the Facilities, until
ordered in writing to resume such performance by the Project Manager.
If, by virtue of a suspension order given by the Project Manager, other

than by reason of the Contractors default or breach of the Contract, the
Contractors performance of any of its obligations is suspended for an
aggregate period of more than 90 days, then at any time thereafter and
provided that at that time such performance is still suspended, the
Contractor may give a notice to the Project Manager requiring that the
Employer shall, within 28 days of receipt of the notice, order the
resumption of such performance or request and subsequently order a
change in accordance with GCC Clause 39, excluding the performance
of the suspended obligations from the Contract.
If the Employer fails to do so within such period, the Contractor may, by

a further notice to the Project Manager, elect to treat the suspension,
where it affects a part only of the Facilities, as a deletion of such part in
accordance with GCC Clause 39 or, where it affects the whole of the
Facilities, as termination of the Contract under GCC Subclause 42.1.
41.2 If
(a) the Employer has failed to pay the Contractor any sum due under
the Contract within the specified period, has failed to approve any
invoice or supporting documents without just cause pursuant to
the Appendix (Terms and Procedures of Payment) to the
Contract Agreement, or commits a substantial breach of the
Contract, the Contractor may give a notice to the Employer that
requires payment of such sum, with interest thereon as stipulated
in GCC Subclause 12.3, requires approval of such invoice or
supporting documents, or specifies the breach and requires the
Employer to remedy the same, as the case may be. If the
Employer fails to pay such sum together with such interest, fails to
approve such invoice or supporting documents or give its reasons
for withholding such approval, or fails to remedy the breach or
take steps to remedy the breach within 14 days after receipt of the

Contractors notice; or
(b) the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its obligations under
the Contract for any reason attributable to the Employer, including
but not limited to the Employers failure to provide possession of
or access to the Site or other areas in accordance with GCC
Subclause 10.2, or failure to obtain any governmental permit
necessary for the execution and/or completion of the Facilities,
then the Contractor may by 14 days notice to the Employer suspend
performance of all or any of its obligations under the Contract, or reduce
the rate of progress.
41.3 If the Contractors performance of its obligations is suspended, or the

rate of progress is reduced pursuant to this GCC Clause 41, then the
Time for Completion shall be extended in accordance with GCC
Subclause 40.1, and any and all additional costs or expenses incurred
by the Contractor as a result of such suspension or reduction shall be
paid by the Employer to the Contractor in addition to the Contract Price,
except in the case of suspension order or reduction in the rate of
progress by reason of the Contractors default or breach of the Contract.
41.4 During the period of suspension, the Contractor shall not remove from
the Site any Plant, any part of the Facilities or any Contractors
Equipment, without the prior written consent of the Employer.
42. Termination 42.1 Termination for Employers Convenience

42.1.1 The Employer may at any time terminate the Contract for any
reason by giving the Contractor a notice of termination that refers
to this GCC Subclause 42.1.
42.1.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GCC Subclause

42.1.1, the Contractor shall, either immediately or upon the date
specified in the notice of termination,
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the
Employer may specify in the notice of termination for the
sole purpose of protecting that part of the Facilities already
executed, or any work required to leave the Site in a clean
and safe condition;
(b) terminate all subcontracts, except those to be assigned to
the Employer pursuant to paragraph (d) (ii) below;
(c) remove all Contractors Equipment from the Site, repatriate
the Contractors and its Subcontractors personnel from the
Site, remove from the Site any wreckage, rubbish and
debris of any kind, and leave the whole of the Site in a
clean and safe condition; and
(d) subject to the payment specified in GCC Subclause 42.1.3,
(i) deliver to the Employer the parts of the Facilities
executed by the Contractor up to the date of
termination;
(ii) to the extent legally possible, assign to the Employer
all right, title and benefit of the Contractor to the

Facilities and to the Plant as of the date of

termination, and, as may be required by the
Employer, in any subcontracts concluded between
the Contractor and its Subcontractors; and
(iii) deliver to the Employer all non-proprietary drawings,

specifications and other documents prepared by the
Contractor or its Subcontractors as at the date of
termination in connection with the Facilities.
42.1.3 In the event of termination of the Contract under GCC Subclause

42.1.1, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor the following
amounts:
(a) the Contract Price, properly attributable to the parts of the

Facilities executed by the Contractor as of the date of
termination;
(b) the costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the

removal of the Contractors Equipment from the Site and in
the repatriation of the Contractors and its Subcontractors
personnel;
(c) any amounts to be paid by the Contractor to its

Subcontractors in connection with the termination of any
subcontracts, including any cancellation charges;
(d) costs incurred by the Contractor in protecting the Facilities

and leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition pursuant
to paragraph (a) of GCC Subclause 42.1.2; and
(e) the cost of satisfying all other obligations, commitments

and claims that the Contractor may in good faith have
undertaken with third parties in connection with the
Contract and that are not covered by paragraphs (a)
through (d) above.
42.2 Termination for Contractors Default

42.2.1 The Employer, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies
it may possess, may terminate the Contract forthwith in the
following circumstances by giving a notice of termination and its
reasons therefor to the Contractor, referring to this GCC
Subclause 42.2:
(a) if the Contractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent, has a

receiving order issued against it, compounds with its
creditors, or, if the Contractor is a corporation, a resolution
is passed or order is made for its winding up, other than a
voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or
reconstruction, a receiver is appointed over any part of its
undertaking or assets, or if the Contractor takes or suffers
any other analogous action in consequence of debt;
(b) if the Contractor assigns or transfers the Contract or any

right or interest therein in violation of the provision of GCC

Clause 43; and
(c) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has

engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices, as defined in
GCC Clause 6, in competing for or in executing the
Contract.
42.2.2 If the Contractor
(a) has abandoned or repudiated the Contract;
(b) has without valid reason failed to commence work on the

Facilities promptly or has suspended, other than pursuant
to GCC Subclause 41.2, the progress of Contract
performance for more than 28 days after receiving a
written instruction from the Employer to proceed;
(c) persistently fails to execute the Contract in accordance

with the Contract or persistently neglects to carry out its
obligations under the Contract without just cause;
(d) refuses or is unable to provide sufficient materials, services

or labor to execute and complete the Facilities in the
manner specified in the program furnished under GCC
Subclause 18.2 at rates of progress that give reasonable
assurance to the Employer that the Contractor can attain
Completion of the Facilities by the Time for Completion as
extended;
then the Employer may, without prejudice to any other rights it

may possess under the Contract, give a notice to the Contractor,
stating the nature of the default and requiring the Contractor to
remedy the same. If the Contractor fails to remedy or to take
steps to remedy the same within 14 days of its receipt of such
notice, then the Employer may terminate the Contract forthwith
by giving a notice of termination to the Contractor that refers to
this GCC Subclause 42.2.
42.2.3 Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GCC Subclauses

42.2.1 or 42.2.2, the Contractor shall, either immediately or upon
such date as is specified in the notice of termination,
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the
Employer may specify in the notice of termination for the
sole purpose of protecting that part of the Facilities already
executed, or any work required to leave the Site in a clean
and safe condition;

the Employer pursuant to paragraph (d) below;
(c) deliver to the Employer the parts of the Facilities executed

by the Contractor up to the date of termination;

(d) to the extent legally possible, assign to the Employer all

right, title and benefit of the Contractor to the Facilities
and to the Plant as of the date of termination, and, as may
be required by the Employer, in any subcontracts
concluded between the Contractor and its Subcontractors;
and
(e) deliver to the Employer all drawings, specifications and
other documents prepared by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors as of the date of termination in connection
with the Facilities.
42.2.4 The Employer may enter upon the Site, expel the Contractor,
and complete the Facilities itself or by employing any third party.
The Employer may, to the exclusion of any right of the Contractor
over the same, take over and use with the payment of a fair
rental rate to the Contractor, with all the maintenance costs to
the account of the Employer and with an indemnification by the
Employer for all liability including damage or injury to persons
arising out of the Employers use of such equipment, any
Contractors Equipment owned by the Contractor and on the Site
in connection with the Facilities for such reasonable period as
the Employer considers expedient for the supply and installation
of the Facilities.
Upon completion of the Facilities or at such earlier date as the
Employer thinks appropriate, the Employer shall give notice to
the Contractor that such Contractors Equipment will be returned
to the Contractor at or near the Site and shall return such
Contractors Equipment to the Contractor in accordance with
such notice. The Contractor shall thereafter without delay and at
its cost remove or arrange removal of the same from the Site.
42.2.5 Subject to GCC Subclause 42.2.6, the Contractor shall be

entitled to be paid the Contract Price attributable to the Facilities
executed as of the date of termination, the value of any unused
or partially used Plant on the Site, and the costs, if any, incurred
in protecting the Facilities and in leaving the Site in a clean and
safe condition pursuant to paragraph (a) of GCC Subclause
42.2.3. Any sums due the Employer from the Contractor
accruing prior to the date of termination shall be deducted from
the amount to be paid to the Contractor under this Contract.
42.2.6 If the Employer completes the Facilities, the cost of completing

the Facilities by the Employer shall be determined.
If the sum that the Contractor is entitled to be paid, pursuant to
GCC Subclause 42.2.5, plus the reasonable costs incurred by
the Employer in completing the Facilities, exceeds the Contract
Price, the Contractor shall be liable for such excess.
If such excess is greater than the sums due the Contractor under
GCC Subclause 42.2.5, the Contractor shall pay the balance to
the Employer, and if such excess is less than the sums due the
Contractor under GCC Subclause 42.2.5, the Employer shall pay
the balance to the Contractor.

The Employer and the Contractor shall agree, in writing, on the

computation described above and the manner in which any sums
shall be paid.
42.3 Termination by Contractor

42.3.1 If
(a) the Employer has failed to pay the Contractor any sum due
under the Contract within the specified period, has failed to
approve any invoice or supporting documents without just
cause pursuant to the Appendix (Terms and Procedures
of Payment) to the Contract Agreement, or commits a
substantial breach of the Contract, the Contractor may give
a notice to the Employer that requires payment of such
sum, with interest thereon as stipulated in GCC Subclause
12.3, requires approval of such invoice or supporting
documents, or specifies the breach and requires the
Employer to remedy the same, as the case may be. If the
Employer fails to pay such sum together with such interest,
fails to approve such invoice or supporting documents or
give its reasons for withholding such approval, fails to
remedy the breach or take steps to remedy the breach
within 14 days after receipt of the Contractors notice; or
(b) the Contractor is unable to carry out any of its obligations

under the Contract for any reason attributable to the
Employer, including but not limited to the Employers
failure to provide possession of or access to the Site or
other areas or failure to obtain any governmental permit
necessary for the execution and/or completion of the
Facilities;
then the Contractor may give a notice to the Employer thereof,
and if the Employer has failed to pay the outstanding sum, to
approve the invoice or supporting documents, to give its reasons
for withholding such approval, or to remedy the breach within 28
days of such notice, or if the Contractor is still unable to carry out
any of its obligations under the Contract for any reason
attributable to the Employer within 28 days of the said notice, the
Contractor may by a further notice to the Employer referring to
this GCC Subclause 42.3.1, forthwith terminate the Contract.
42.3.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract forthwith by giving a
notice to the Employer to that effect, referring to this GCC
Subclause 42.3.2, if the Employer becomes bankrupt or
insolvent, has a receiving order issued against it, compounds
with its creditors, or, being a corporation, if a resolution is passed
or order is made for its winding up (other than a voluntary
liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction),
a receiver is appointed over any part of its undertaking or assets,
or if the Employer takes or suffers any other analogous action in

consequence of debt.
42.3.3 If the Contract is terminated under GCC Subclauses 42.3.1 or
42.3.2, then the Contractor shall immediately
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as may be
necessary for the purpose of protecting that part of the
Facilities already executed, or any work required to leave
the Site in a clean and safe condition;
the Employer pursuant to paragraph (d) (ii);
(c) remove all Contractors Equipment from the Site and

repatriate the Contractors and its Subcontractors
personnel from the Site; and
(d) subject to the payment specified in GCC Subclause 42.3.4,
(i) deliver to the Employer the parts of the Facilities

executed by the Contractor up to the date of
termination;
(ii) to the extent legally possible, assign to the Employer

all right, title and benefit of the Contractor to the
Facilities and to the Plant as of the date of
termination, and, as may be required by the
Employer, in any subcontracts concluded between
the Contractor and its Subcontractors; and
(iii) deliver to the Employer all drawings, specifications

and other documents prepared by the Contractor or
its Subcontractors as of the date of termination in
connection with the Facilities.
42.3.4 If the Contract is terminated under GCC Subclauses 42.3.1 or

42.3.2, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor all payments
specified in GCC Subclause 42.1.3, and reasonable
compensation for all loss, except for loss of profit, or damage
sustained by the Contractor arising out of, in connection with or
in consequence of such termination.
42.3.5 Termination by the Contractor pursuant to this GCC Subclause

42.3 is without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the
Contractor that may be exercised in lieu of or in addition to rights
conferred by GCC Subclause 42.3.
42.4 In this GCC Clause 42, the expression Facilities executed shall include
all work executed, Installation Services provided, and all Plant acquired,
or subject to a legally binding obligation to purchase, by the Contractor
and used or intended to be used for the purpose of the Facilities, up to
and including the date of termination.
42.5 In this GCC Clause 42, in calculating any monies due from the Employer to
the Contractor, account shall be taken of any sum previously paid by the
Employer to the Contractor under the Contract, including any advance
payment paid pursuant to the Appendix (Terms and Procedures of

Payment) to the Contract Agreement.
43. Assignment 43.1 Neither the Employer nor the Contractor shall, without the express prior
written consent of the other party which consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld, assign to any third party the Contract or any part
thereof, or any right, benefit, obligation or interest therein or thereunder,
except that the Contractor shall be entitled to assign either absolutely or
by way of charge any monies due and payable to it or that may become
due and payable to it under the Contract.
I. Claims, Disputes, and Arbitration

44. Contractors 44.1 If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to any extension of the
Claims Time for Completion and/or any additional payment, under any Clause
of these Conditions or otherwise in connection with the Contract, the
Contractor shall submit a notice to the Project Manager, describing the
event or circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall be given
as soon as practicable, and not later than 28 days after the Contractor
became aware, or should have become aware, of the event or
circumstance.
If the Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such period of 28

days, the Time for Completion shall not be extended, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to additional payment, and the Employer shall be
discharged from all liability in connection with the claim. Otherwise, the
following provisions of this Subclause shall apply.
The Contractor shall also submit any other notices, which are required
by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the claim, all as relevant
to such event or circumstance.
The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be

necessary to substantiate any claim, either on the Site or at another
location acceptable to the Project Manager. Without admitting the
Employers liability, the Project Manager may, after receiving any notice
under this Subclause, monitor the record keeping and/or instruct the
Contractor to keep further contemporary records. The Contractor shall
permit the Project Manager to inspect all these records, and shall (if
instructed) submit copies to the Project Manager.
Within 42 days after the Contractor became aware (or should have
become aware) of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim, or
within such other period as may be proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall send to the
Project Manager a fully detailed claim, which includes full supporting
particulars of the basis of the claim and of the extension of time and/or
additional payment claimed. If the event or circumstance giving rise to
the claim has a continuing effect,
(a) this fully detailed claim shall be considered as interim;
(b) the Contractor shall send further interim claims at monthly

intervals, giving the accumulated delay and/or amount claimed,

and such further particulars as the Project Manager may

reasonably require; and
(c) the Contractor shall send a final claim within 28 days after the
end of the effects resulting from the event or circumstance, or
within such other period as may be proposed by the Contractor
and approved by the Project Manager.
Within 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars

supporting a previous claim, or within such other period as may be
proposed by the Project Manager and approved by the Contractor, the
Project Manager shall respond with approval, or with disapproval and
detailed comments. He may also request any necessary further
particulars, but shall nevertheless give his response on the principles of
the claim within such time.
Each payment certificate shall include such amounts for any claim as
have been reasonably substantiated as due under the relevant
provision of the Contract. Unless and until the particulars supplied are
sufficient to substantiate the whole of the claim, the Contractor shall
only be entitled to payment for such part of the claim as he has been
able to substantiate.
The Project Manager shall agree with the Contractor or estimate: (i) the
extension (if any) of the Time for Completion (before or after its expiry)
in accordance with GCC Clause 40, and/or (ii) the additional payment
(if any) to which the Contractor is entitled under the Contract.
The requirements of this Subclause are in addition to those of any other

Subclause, which may apply to a claim. If the Contractor fails to comply
with this or another Subclause in relation to any claim, any extension of
time and/or additional payment shall take account of the extent (if any)
to which the failure has prevented or prejudiced proper investigation of
the claim, unless the claim is excluded under the second paragraph of
this Subclause.
In the event that the Contractor and the Employer cannot agree on any
matter relating to a claim, either party may refer the matter to the
Dispute Board pursuant to GCC 45 hereof.
45. Disputes and 45.1 Appointment of the Dispute Board

Arbitration
Disputes shall be referred to a Dispute Board for decision in
accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3. The Parties shall appoint a
Dispute Board by the date stated in the SCC.
The Dispute Board shall comprise, as stated in the SCC, either one or
three suitably qualified persons (the members), each of whom shall be
fluent in the language for communication defined in the Contract and
shall be a professional experienced in the type of activities involved in the
performance of the Contract and with the interpretation of contractual
documents. If the number is not so stated and the Parties do not agree
otherwise, the Dispute Board shall comprise three persons, one of

whom shall serve as chairman.
If the Parties have not jointly appointed the Dispute Board 21 days
before the date stated in the SCC and the Dispute Board is to comprise
three persons, each Party shall nominate one member for the approval
of the other Party. The first two members shall recommend and the
Parties shall agree upon the third member, who shall act as chairman.
However, if a list of potential members is included in the SCC, the

members shall be selected from those on the list, other than anyone
who is unable or unwilling to accept appointment to the Dispute Board.
The agreement between the Parties and either the sole member or
each of the three members shall incorporate by reference the General
Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement contained in the Appendix to
these General Conditions, with such amendments as are agreed
between them.
The terms of the remuneration of either the sole member or each of the
three members, including the remuneration of any expert whom the
Dispute Board consults, shall be mutually agreed upon by the Parties
when agreeing the terms of appointment of the member or such expert
(as the case may be). Each Party shall be responsible for paying one-
half of this remuneration.
If a member declines to act or is unable to act as a result of death,

disability, resignation or termination of appointment, a replacement
shall be appointed in the same manner as the replaced person was
required to have been nominated or agreed upon, as described in this
Subclause.
The appointment of any member may be terminated by mutual

agreement of both Parties, but not by the Employer or the Contractor
acting alone. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, the appointment
of the Dispute Board (including each member) shall expire when the
Operational Acceptance Certificate has been issued in accordance with
GCC Clause 25.3.
45.2 Failure to Agree Dispute Board

If any of the following conditions apply, namely:
(a) the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the sole
member of the Dispute Board by the date stated in the first
paragraph of GCC Subclause 45.1;
(b) either Party fails to nominate a member (for approval by the other
Party) of a Dispute Board of three persons by such date;
(c) the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the third
member (to act as chairman) of the Dispute Board by such date;
or
(d) the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of a replacement

person within 42 days after the date on which the sole member or

one of the three members declines to act or is unable to act as a

result of death, disability, resignation, or termination of
appointment;
then the appointing entity or official named in the SCC shall, upon the
request of either or both of the Parties and after due consultation with
both Parties, appoint this member of the Dispute Board. This
appointment shall be final and conclusive. Each Party shall be
responsible for paying one-half of the remuneration of the appointing
entity or official.
45.3 Obtaining Dispute Boards Decision

If a dispute (of any kind whatsoever) arises between the Parties in
connection with the performance of the Contract, including any dispute
as to any certificate, determination, instruction, opinion or valuation of
the Project Manager, either Party may refer the dispute in writing to the
Dispute Board for its decision, with copies to the other Party and the
Project Manager. Such reference shall state that it is given under this
Subclause.
For a Dispute Board of three persons, the Dispute Board shall be

deemed to have received such reference on the date when it is
received by the chairman of the Dispute Board.
Both Parties shall promptly make available to the Dispute Board all
such additional information, further access to the Site, and appropriate
facilities, as the Dispute Board may require for the purposes of making
a decision on such dispute. The Dispute Board shall be deemed to be
not acting as arbitrator(s).
Within 84 days after receiving such reference, or within such other

period as may be proposed by the Dispute Board and approved by
both Parties, the Dispute Board shall give its decision, which shall be
reasoned and shall state that it is given under this Subclause. The
decision shall be binding on both Parties, who shall promptly give effect
to it unless and until it shall be revised in an amicable settlement or an
arbitral award as described below. Unless the Contract has already
been abandoned, repudiated or terminated, the Contractor shall
continue to proceed with the performance of the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract.
If either Party is dissatisfied with the Dispute Boards decision, then

either Party may, within 28 days after receiving the decision, give
notice to the other Party of its dissatisfaction and intention to
commence arbitration. If the Dispute Board fails to give its decision
within the period of 84 days (or as otherwise approved) after receiving
such reference, then either Party may, within 28 days after this period
has expired, give notice to the other Party of its dissatisfaction and
intention to commence arbitration.
In either event, this notice of dissatisfaction shall state that it is given

under this Subclause, and shall set out the matter in dispute and the
reason(s) for dissatisfaction. Except as stated in GCC Subclauses 45.6
and 45.7, neither Party shall be entitled to commence arbitration of a

dispute unless a notice of dissatisfaction has been given in accordance

with this Subclause.
If the Dispute Board has given its decision as to a matter in dispute to

both Parties, and no notice of dissatisfaction has been given by either
Party within 28 days after it received the Dispute Boards decision, then
the decision shall become final and binding upon both Parties.
45.4 Amicable Settlement

Where notice of dissatisfaction has been given under GCC Subclause
45.3 above, both Parties shall attempt to settle the dispute amicably
before the commencement of arbitration. However, unless both Parties
agree otherwise, arbitration may be commenced on or after the fifty-
sixth day after the day on which notice of dissatisfaction and intention
to commence arbitration was given, even if no attempt at amicable
settlement has been made.
45.5 Arbitration
Unless settled amicably, any dispute in respect of which the Dispute
Boards decision (if any) has not become final and binding shall be
finally settled by international arbitration. Unless otherwise agreed by
both Parties,
(a) arbitration proceedings shall be conducted as stated in the

Special Conditions;
(b) if no arbitration proceedings is so stated, the dispute shall be

finally settled by institutional arbitration under the Rules of
Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce;
(c) the dispute shall be settled by three arbitrators; and
(d) the arbitration shall be conducted in the language for

communications defined in GCC Subclause 5.3.
The arbitrator(s) shall have full power to open up, review and revise
any certificate, determination, instruction, opinion or valuation of the
Project Manager, and any decision of the Dispute Board, relevant to
the dispute. Nothing shall disqualify the Project Manager from being
called as a witness and giving evidence before the arbitrator(s) on any
matter whatsoever relevant to the dispute.
Neither Party shall be limited in the proceedings before the arbitrator(s)

to the evidence or arguments previously put before the Dispute Board
to obtain its decision, or to the reasons for dissatisfaction given in its
notice of dissatisfaction. Any decision of the Dispute Board shall be
admissible in evidence in the arbitration.
Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after completion of the

Works. The obligations of the Parties, the Project Manager and the
Dispute Board shall not be altered by reason of any arbitration being
conducted during the progress of the Works.

45.6 Failure to Comply with Dispute Boards Decision

In the event that a Party fails to comply with a Dispute Board decision
which has become final and binding, then the other Party may, without
prejudice to any other rights it may have, refer the failure itself to
arbitration under GCC Subclause 45.5. GCC Subclauses 45.3 and 45.4
shall not apply to this reference.
45.7 Expiry of Dispute Boards Appointment

If a dispute arises between the Parties in connection with the
performance of the Contract, and there is no Dispute Board in place,
whether by reason of the expiry of the Dispute Boards appointment or
otherwise,
(a) GCC Subclauses 45.3 and 45.4 shall not apply, and
(b) the dispute may be referred directly to arbitration under GCC

Subclause 45.5.

APPENDIX A
General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement
1 Definitions
Each Dispute Board Agreement is a tripartite agreement by and between
(a) the Employer;
(b) the Contractor; and
(c) the Member who is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement as being
(i) the sole member of the "Dispute Board" and, where this is the case, all references to the
Other Members do not apply; or
(ii) one of the three persons who are jointly called the Dispute Board and, where this is the
case, the other two persons are called the Other Members.
The Employer and the Contractor have entered (or intend to enter) into a contract, which is called the
"Contract" and is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement, which incorporates this Appendix. In the
Dispute Board Agreement, words and expressions which are not otherwise defined shall have the
meanings assigned to them in the Contract.
2 General Provisions
Unless otherwise stated in the Dispute Board Agreement, it shall take effect on the latest of the
following dates:
(a) the Commencement Date defined in the Contract;
(b) when the Employer, the Contractor and the Member have each signed the Dispute Board
Agreement; or
(c) when the Employer, the Contractor and each of the Other Members (if any) have respectively
each signed a dispute board agreement.
This employment of the Member is a personal appointment. At any time, the Member may give not
less than 70 days notice of resignation to the Employer and to the Contractor, and the Dispute Board
Agreement shall terminate upon the expiry of this period.
3 Warranties
The Member warrants and agrees that he/she is and shall be impartial and independent of the
Employer, the Contractor and the Project Manager. The Member shall promptly disclose, to each of
them and to the Other Members (if any), any fact or circumstance which might appear inconsistent
with his/her warranty and agreement of impartiality and independence.

When appointing the Member, the Employer and the Contractor relied upon the Members
representations that he/she is
(a) experienced in the work, which the Contractor is to carry out under the Contract,
(b) experienced in the interpretation of contract documentation, and
(c) fluent in the language for communications defined in the Contract.
4 General Obligations of the Member
The Member shall
(a) have no interest financial or otherwise in the Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager,
nor any financial interest in the Contract except for payment under the Dispute Board
Agreement;
(b) not previously have been employed as a consultant or otherwise by the Employer, the
Contractor, or the Project Manager, except in such circumstances as were disclosed in writing
to the Employer and the Contractor before they signed the Dispute Board Agreement;
(c) have disclosed in writing to the Employer, the Contractor, and the Other Members (if any),
before entering into the Dispute Board Agreement and to his/her best knowledge and
recollection, any professional or personal relationships with any director, officer, or employee of
the Employer, the Contractor, or the Project Manager, and any previous involvement in the
overall project of which the Contract forms part;
(d) not, for the duration of the Dispute Board Agreement, be employed as a consultant or otherwise
by the Employer, the Contractor, or the Project Manager, except as may be agreed in writing by
the Employer, the Contractor, and the Other Members (if any);
(e) comply with the annexed procedural rules and with GCC Subclause 45.3;
(f) not give advice to the Employer, the Contractor, the Employers Personnel, or the Contractors
Personnel concerning the conduct of the Contract, other than in accordance with the annexed
procedural rules;
(g) not while a Member enter into discussions or make any agreement with the Employer, the
Contractor, or the Project Manager regarding employment by any of them, whether as a
consultant or otherwise, after ceasing to act under the Dispute Board Agreement;
(h) ensure his/her availability for all site visits and hearings as are necessary;
(i) become conversant with the Contract and with the progress of the Facilities (and of any other
parts of the project of which the Contract forms part) by studying all documents received, which
shall be maintained in a current working file;
(j) treat the details of the Contract and all the Dispute Boards activities and hearings as private
and confidential, and not publish or disclose them without the prior written consent of the
Employer, the Contractor, and the Other Members (if any); and

(k) be available to give advice and opinions on any matter relevant to the Contract when requested
by both the Employer and the Contractor, subject to the agreement of the Other Members (if
any).
5 General Obligations of the Employer and the Contractor
The Employer, the Contractor, the Employers Personnel and the Contractors Personnel shall not
request advice from or consultation with the Member regarding the Contract, otherwise than in the
normal course of the Dispute Boards activities under the Contract and the Dispute Board Agreement.
The Employer and the Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with this provision, by the
Employers Personnel and the Contractors Personnel respectively.
The Employer and the Contractor undertake to each other and to the Member that the Member shall
not, except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer, the Contractor, the Member and the
Other Members (if any)
(a) be appointed as an arbitrator in any arbitration under the Contract;
(b) be called as a witness to give evidence concerning any dispute before arbitrator(s) appointed
for any arbitration under the Contract; or
(c) be liable for any claims for anything done or omitted in the discharge or purported discharge of
the Members functions, unless the act or omission is shown to have been in bad faith.
The Employer and the Contractor hereby jointly and severally indemnify and hold the Member
harmless against and from claims from which he is relieved from liability under the preceding
paragraph.
Whenever the Employer or the Contractor refers a dispute to the Dispute Board under GCC
Subclause 45.3, which will require the Member to make a site visit and attend a hearing, the
Employer or the Contractor shall provide appropriate security for a sum equivalent to the reasonable
expenses to be incurred by the Member. No account shall be taken of any other payments due or
paid to the Member.
6 Payment
The Member shall be paid as follows, in the currency named in the Dispute Board Agreement:
(a) a retainer fee per calendar month, which shall be considered as payment in full for
(i) being available on 28 days notice for all site visits and hearings;
(ii) becoming and remaining conversant with all project developments and maintaining
relevant files;
(iii) all office and overhead expenses including secretarial services, photocopying and office
supplies incurred in connection with his duties; and
(iv) all services performed hereunder except those referred to in sub-paragraphs (b) and (c)
of this Clause.

The retainer fee shall be paid with effect from the last day of the calendar month in which the
Dispute Board Agreement becomes effective; until the last day of the calendar month in which
the Taking-Over Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works.
With effect from the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Taking-Over
Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works, the retainer fee shall be reduced by one-third.
This reduced fee shall be paid until the first day of the calendar month in which the Member
resigns or the Dispute Board Agreement is otherwise terminated.
(b) a daily fee, which shall be considered as payment in full for
(i) each day or part of a day up to a maximum of 2 days travel time in each direction for the
journey between the Members home and the site, or another location of a meeting with
the Other Members (if any);
(ii) each working day on site visits, hearings, or preparing decisions; and
(iii) each day spent reading submissions in preparation for a hearing.
(c) all reasonable expenses, including necessary travel expenses (air fare in less than first class,
hotel and subsistence and other direct travel expenses) incurred in connection with the
Members duties, as well as the cost of telephone calls, courier charges, facsimiles, and
telexes, and use of the internet: a receipt shall be required for each item in excess of 5% of the
daily fee referred to in sub-paragraph (b) of this Clause;
(d) any taxes properly levied in the Country on payments made to the Member (unless a national
or permanent resident of the Country) under this Clause 6.
The retainer and daily fees shall be as specified in the Dispute Board Agreement. Unless it
specifies otherwise, these fees shall remain fixed for the first 24 calendar months, and shall
thereafter be adjusted by agreement between the Employer, the Contractor and the Member, at
each anniversary of the date on which the Dispute Board Agreement became effective.
If the parties fail to agree on the retainer fee or the daily fee, the appointing entity or official
named in the SCC shall determine the amount of the fees to be used.
The Member shall submit invoices for payment of the monthly retainer and air fares quarterly in
advance. Invoices for other expenses and for daily fees shall be submitted following the
conclusion of a site visit or hearing. All invoices shall be accompanied by a brief description of
activities performed during the relevant period and shall be addressed to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall pay each of the Members invoices in full within 56 calendar days after
receiving each invoice and shall apply to the Employer (in the Statements under the Contract)
for reimbursement of one-half of the amounts of these invoices. The Employer shall then pay
the Contractor in accordance with the Contract.
If the Contractor fails to pay to the Member the amount to which he/she is entitled under the
Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer shall pay the amount due to the Member and any
other amount which may be required to maintain the operation of the Dispute Board; and
without prejudice to the Employers rights or remedies. In addition to all other rights arising from
this default, the Employer shall be entitled to reimbursement of all sums paid in excess of one-
half of these payments, plus all costs of recovering these sums and financing charges
calculated at the rate specified in accordance with GCC Subclause 12.3.

If the Member does not receive payment of the amount due within 70 days after submitting a
valid invoice, the Member may (i) suspend his/her services (without notice) until the payment is
received, and/or (ii) resign his/her appointment by giving notice under Clause 7.
7 Termination
At any time: (i) the Employer and the Contractor may jointly terminate the Dispute Board Agreement
by giving 42 days notice to the Member, or (ii) the Member may resign as provided for in Clause 2.
If the Member fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer and the Contractor
may, without prejudice to their other rights, terminate it by notice to the Member. The notice shall take
effect when received by the Member.
If the Employer or the Contractor fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the Member may,
without prejudice to his other rights, terminate it by notice to the Employer and the Contractor. The
notice shall take effect when received by them both.
Any such notice, resignation and termination shall be final and binding on the Employer, the
Contractor and the Member. However, a notice by the Employer or the Contractor, but not by both,
shall be of no effect.
8 Default of the Member
If the Member fails to comply with any of his obligations under Clause 4 concerning his impartiality or
independence in relation to the Employer or the Contractor, he/she shall not be entitled to any fees or
expenses hereunder and shall, without prejudice to their other rights, reimburse each of the Employer
and the Contractor for any fees and expenses received by the Member and the Other Members (if
any), for proceedings or decisions (if any) of the Dispute Board which are rendered void or ineffective
by the said failure to comply.
9 Disputes
Any dispute or claim arising out of or in connection with this Dispute Board Agreement, or the breach,
termination or invalidity thereof, shall be finally settled by institutional arbitration. If no other arbitration
institute is agreed, the arbitration shall be conducted under the Rules of Arbitration of the International
Chamber of Commerce by one arbitrator appointed in accordance with these Rules of Arbitration.

Annex - DISPUTE BOARD GUIDELINES
1. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer and the Contractor, the Dispute Board shall visit the
site at intervals of not more than 140 days, including times of critical construction events, at the
request of either the Employer or the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer, the
Contractor, and the Dispute Board, the period between consecutive visits shall not be less than
70 days, except as required to convene a hearing as described below.
2. The timing of and agenda for each site visit shall be as agreed jointly by the Dispute Board, the
Employer, and the Contractor, or in the absence of agreement, shall be decided by the Dispute
Board. The purpose of site visits is to enable the Dispute Board to become and remain
acquainted with the progress of the Works and of any actual or potential problems or claims,
and, as far as reasonable, to prevent potential problems or claims from becoming disputes.
3. Site visits shall be attended by the Employer, the Contractor, and the Project Manager and
shall be coordinated by the Employer in cooperation with the Contractor. The Employer shall
ensure the provision of appropriate conference facilities and secretarial and copying services.
At the conclusion of each site visit and before leaving the site, the Dispute Board shall prepare
a report on its activities during the visit and shall send copies to the Employer and the
Contractor.
4. The Employer and the Contractor shall furnish to the Dispute Board one copy of all documents
which the Dispute Board may request, including Contract documents, progress reports,
variation instructions, certificates, and other documents pertinent to the performance of the
Contract. All communications between the Dispute Board and the Employer or the Contractor
shall be copied to the other Party. If the Dispute Board comprises three persons, the Employer
and the Contractor shall send copies of these requested documents and these communications
to each of these persons.
5. If any dispute is referred to the Dispute Board in accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3, the
Dispute Board shall proceed in accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3 and these Guidelines.
Subject to the time allowed to give notice of a decision and other relevant factors, the Dispute
Board shall
(a) act fairly and impartially as between the Employer and the Contractor, giving each of
them a reasonable opportunity of putting his case and responding to the others case;
and
(b) adopt procedures suitable to the dispute, avoiding unnecessary delay or expense.
6. The Dispute Board may conduct a hearing on the dispute, in which event it will decide on the
date and place for the hearing and may request that written documentation and arguments from
the Employer and the Contractor be presented to it prior to or at the hearing.
7. Except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer and the Contractor, the Dispute Board
shall have power to adopt an inquisitorial procedure, to refuse admission to hearings or
audience at hearings to any persons other than representatives of the Employer, the
Contractor, and the Project Manager, and to proceed in the absence of any party who the
Dispute Board is satisfied received notice of the hearing; but shall have discretion to decide
whether and to what extent this power may be exercised.
8. The Employer and the Contractor empower the Dispute Board, among other things, to
(a) establish the procedure to be applied in deciding a dispute;

(b) decide upon the Dispute Boards own jurisdiction, and as to the scope of any dispute
referred to it;
(c) conduct any hearing as it thinks fit, not being bound by any rules or procedures other
than those contained in the Contract and these Guidelines;
(d) take the initiative in ascertaining the facts and matters required for a decision;
(e) make use of its own specialist knowledge, if any;
(f) decide upon the payment of financing charges in accordance with the Contract;
(g) decide upon any provisional relief such as interim or conservatory measures;
(h) open up, review and revise any certificate, decision, determination, instruction, opinion or
valuation of the Project Manager, relevant to the dispute; and
(i) appoint, should the Dispute Board so consider necessary and the Parties agree, a
suitable expert at the cost of the Parties to give advice on a specific matter relevant to the
dispute.
9. The Dispute Board shall not express any opinions during any hearing concerning the merits of
any arguments advanced by the Parties. Thereafter, the Dispute Board shall make and give its
decision in accordance with GCC Subclause 45.3, or as otherwise agreed by the Employer and
the Contractor in writing. If the Dispute Board comprises three persons
(a) it shall convene in private after a hearing, in order to have discussions and prepare its
decision;
(b) it shall endeavour to reach a unanimous decision: if this proves impossible the applicable
decision shall be made by a majority of the Members, who may require the minority
Member to prepare a written report for submission to the Employer and the Contractor;
and
(c) if a Member fails to attend a meeting or hearing, or to fulfil any required function, the
other two Members may nevertheless proceed to make a decision, unless
(i) either the Employer or the Contractor does not agree that they do so, or
(ii) the absent Member is the chairman and he/she instructs the other Members to not
make a decision.

Section 8- Special Conditions of Contract

The following Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall supplement the General Conditions of Con-
tract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GCC.
The clause number of the SCC is the corresponding clause number of the GCC.

1. Definitions 1
5. Law and Language 2
7. Scope of Facilities 2
8. Time for Commencement and Completion 2
9. Contractor's Responsibilities 3
11. Contract Price 4
13. Securities 4
14. Taxes and Duties 4
15. License/Use of Technical Information 7
18. Work Program 7
19. Subcontracting 7
20. Design and Engineering 7
21. Procurement 7
22. Installation 7
23. Test and Inspection 10
24. Completion of the facilities 11
25. Commissioning and Operational Acceptance 11
26. Completion Time Guarantee 12
30. Limitation of Liability 12
35. Unforseen Conditions 12
37. Force Majeure 13
39. Change in the Facilities 13
45. Disputes and Arbitration 14
46. Eligibility 15
47. Environment Management Plan 15

Section 8: Special Conditions of Contract Page 8-1
1. Definitions
The definitions are supplemented as follows:
The Employer is:
Registered Office:
Red Crescent Concord Tower

17, Mohakhali Commercial Area (6th floor)
Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
Head Office:
Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh (IEB)

Bhaban (4th floor), 8/A, Ramna, Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh
Telephone: +880-2-9555475, -9550514, -9558054
Fax No.: +880-2-9582382, +880-2-9557880
The Project Manager is:
Superintending Engineer of Project, Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Limited

Telephone: +880-2-9555475, -9550514, -9558054
Fax No.: +880-2-95 82 382, +880-2-95 57 880
The Bank is:
ADB (Asian Development Bank)
Country of Origin:
All countries as indicated in Section 5 - Eligible Countries.
Completion, Tight and clear condition:

"Completion" means that the Facilities (or a specific part thereof where specific parts are speci-
fied in the Contract) have been completed operationally and structurally and put in a tight and
clean condition (meaning that all wastes and equipment have been removed from con-
struction sites and camp areas, all areas which have been temporarily used by the pro-
ject have been restored to the original conditions, all payments for compensation of all
damages have been completed, all potential soil and water contaminations have been
cleaned to the satisfaction of the authorities and the bank, generally potential environ-

mental liabilities have to be transferred to the operator), that all work in respect of Precom-
missioning of the Facilities or such specific part thereof has been completed, and that the Facili-
ties or specific part thereof are ready for Commissioning as provided in GCC Clause 24 (Com-
pletion) hereof.
5. Law and Language

5.1 The Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of:
The Peoples Republic of Bangladesh
5.2 The ruling language is:
English
5.3 The language for communications is:
English
7. Scope of Facilities
7.3 The Contractor agrees to supply spare parts for a period of years: 5 (five) years
The Contractor shall carry sufficient inventories to ensure an ex-stock supply of consumable
spares for the Plant. Other spare parts and components shall be supplied as promptly as possi-
ble, but at the most within 6 months of placing the order and opening the letter of credit. In addi-
tion, in the event of termination of the production of spare parts, advance notification will be
made to the Employer of the pending termination, with sufficient time to permit the Employer to
procure the needed requirement. Following such termination, the Contractor will furnish to the
extent possible and at no cost to the Employer the blueprints, drawings and specifications of the
spare parts, if requested.
8. Time for Commencement and Completion

8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within 30 (thirty) days from the Effective
Date for determining Time for Completion as specified in the Contract Agreement.
8.2 The Time for Completion of the whole of the Facilities shall be 30 (thirty) months from the Ef-
fective Date as described in the Contract Agreement.

A new Sub-Clause 8.3 is added:
8.3. The Contractor can start on-site work only when (C) ESMP is approved.
9. Contractor's Responsibilities
A new Sub-Clause 9.8.c) is added:
9.8.c) The Contractor shall elaborate and submit for approval within 30 (thirty) days from the ef-
fective date of the contract, his own and works-specific (Construction) Environmental and
Social Management Plan ((C)ESMP) in line with the ESMP attached in Annex 1 of Vol-
ume II - Employer's Requirements. The Employer shall comment or approve the docu-
ment within 14 days from the receipt. The final (C)ESMP should be concluded in joint
workshops Employer/Contractor.
A new Clause 9.9 is added:
The Contractor shall supply any raw materials, utilities, lubricants, chemicals, catalysts,
facilities, services and other matters in an amount sufficient to carry out the pre-
commissioning, commissioning and guarantee tests as prescribed and required in the
Scope of Works under the Contract.
A new Clause 9.10 is added:
9.10. The Contractor, immediately after notification of award, shall provide the Employer free of
charge with 8 (eight) hardcopies of all engineering data, drawings and descriptive materials
submitted with the bid, which will form part of the contract.
A new Clause 9.11 is added
9.11. The contract shall be signed in three originals.
The Contractor will receive one signed original while the Employer will keep the other two origi-
nals.
A new Clause 9.12 is added
9.12. The Contractor, at his own cost, at within 30 (thirty) days after contract signature, shall provide
the Employer with fifteen (15) hard copies of the contract document.

11. Contract Price

11.2 The Contract Price shall be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 2 (Price Ad-
justment) to the Contract Agreement and on the actual quantity of plant and installation services
completed by the contractor during the contract execution stage.
Payment will be made on the actual quantity of plant and installation services that will be com-
pleted by the contractor during the contract execution stage.
13. Securities
Clause 13.2.1 is amended as follows:
The expression "notification of contract award" shall be replaced by "contract signature".
The following shall be added at the end of Sub-Clause 13.3.1:
13.3.1 The amount of performance security, as a percentage of the contract price for the facility or
for the part of the facility for which a separate time for completion is provided, shall be 10%
of the contract price
The following shall be added at the end of Sub-Clause 13.3.2:
13.3.2 The performance security shall be in the form of the unconditional bank guarantee as per
form included in Section 9 (Contract Forms).
In case the institution issuing the security is located outside of Bangladesh, it shall have a
correspondent financial institution located in the territory of Bangladesh to make it enforcea-
ble.
14. Taxes and Duties

The following is added at the end of Sub-Clause 14.1:
The Employer is responsible for deducting income tax at source (i.e. tax deducted at source
(TDS)) at the rate applicable in accordance with the government rules of Bangladesh at the time
of making any payment to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall consider TDS in his unit price and in the total price.

Pursuant to this provision, the Employer shall deduct the tax at source (TDS) and deposit the
same to the government's exchequer and provide the records of such deposit to the Contractor
for facilitating its tax assessment or obligations in Bangladesh.
Bidders may acquire information regarding taxes and duties from the National Board of Reve-
nue (NBR) of Bangladesh.
Sub-Clause 14.2 is replaced by the following:
a. VAT on EXW amounts is not included in the contract price. VAT on EXW shall be paid by
the Contractor and shall be reimbursed by the Employer to the Contractor on actual basis
in accordance with the government rules upon submission of relevant documents in origi-
nal.
b. For Price Schedule No. 1: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad:
Not withstanding GCC sub-clause 14.1, Custom Duties (CD), VAT and other charges re-
lated to the port of entry incurred in the Employer's country required for the project shall
be borne by the Employer upon submission by the Contractor of the necessary documen-
tation as detailed in clause 14.2(e). Consequently, all bid prices shall be exclusive of cus-
toms, import duties, VAT and Tax for import materials.
c. For the other price schedules:
Applicable VAT will be borne by the Employer, and consequently, all bid prices shall be
exclusive of VAT.
The Employer shall not be responsible for the payment of customs duties and VAT for the
items imported for civil works specified in Price Schedule No. 4. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the payment of customs duties and VAT for the items imported for civil
works, and it shall be included in the bid unit prices and total bid prices.
d. The Contractor shall, at his cost and expense, secure any work permit, labour permit, tax
clearance, tax exemption certificate and any other authorization, which may be required
by the Government of Bangladesh to permit imported personnel of Contractor and his
subcontractors to perform their work at site.
e. The Contractor shall be liable to the Employer for customs duties and taxes paid by the
Employer, and for other lawful taxes which may be or may become payable on the Con-
tractor's equipment, tools and supplies imported for the works and subsequently sold in
Bangladesh to a party or parties other than the Employer. The Contractor has to obtain
the permission of the Employer prior to any sale.
f. To obtain the necessary import permits and satisfy the requirements of the customs au-
thorities, the Employer requires the following documentation:
Within 60 days of contract signature, the Contractor shall submit a detailed delivery
schedule of plant he is to provide under the contract, indicating the type of equipment,

name of the manufacturer and country of origin. Six copies of the schedule have to be
submitted to the Employer.
On behalf of the Government of Bangladesh, the Ministry of Commerce annually issues a

schedule of import-protected items. The Contractor shall be responsible for advising the
Project Manager of any plant he intends to ship under the contract, which is import-
protected. The Project Manager has to receive this advice at least four months before the
plant reaches Bangladesh in order to permit the Employer to obtain the necessary import
permits.
For the shipment of plant, shipping documents need to be distributed as follows:
(i) To the Company Secretary, Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd, Institution of
Engineers Bangladesh (IEB), Bhaban (4th floor), Ramna, Dhaka 1000:
1 original plus 10 copies of the invoices endorsed by the Contractor

1 negotiable plus 10 copies of the bill of lading endorsed by the Contractor
1 original plus 10 copies of the insurance certificate
10 copies of packing lists
10 copies of the freight memo
1 original plus 10 copies of the certificate of origin
10 copies of the insurance invoice
10 copies of the application for payment
10 copies of the pre-shipment inspection certificate or waiver thereof
(ii) To the Project Manager:
2 copies of the above documentation
(iii) To the Representative of Project Manager:
2 copies of the above documentation.
g. Import licenses and permits for the plant shall be obtained by the Employer at no cost to
the Contractor. No import and export customs duties levied on food of any sort or per-
sonal effects imported for consumption by the Contractor's imported personnel shall be
paid by the Employer.
h. If, however, after payment of customs and import duties by the Employer, goods are dis-
covered to have arrived in Bangladesh in such a badly damaged condition due to the
Contractor's negligence that they have to be replaced, the Contractor will be responsible
for the payment of the customs and import duties levied on all the replacement of the im-
ported plant.
i. The Contractor will be responsible for payment of all costs, with the exception of those
costs that are specifically to the account of the Employer as described in SCC 14.2(a-b),
related to clearances of plant and Contractor's equipment at the port of entry. The Con-
tractor shall perform all necessary customs formalities for clearance of materials from the
port in consultation with PGCB.
j. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all negotiable shipping documentation

and all necessary import information are forwarded to the Employer so the Employer re-
ceives them in Bangladesh at least 14 days prior to the arrival of the ship in the Bangla-
desh port. Demurrage and any other charges resulting from the lack of documents or in-
correct documentation received in Bangladesh shall be to the Contractor's account.
15. License/Use of Technical Information

Clause 15.2 is replaced by the following:
15.2. The Employer shall be vested with the copyright for all drawings, documents and other
materials containing data and information prepared exclusively for the project and directly
related to the project (such as Single Line Diagrams, Layouts, Line routes, etc.) furnished
to the Employer by the Contractor.
18. Work Program

The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 18.3:
c) monitoring of the obligations in Sub-Clauses 22.2.1, 22.2.3, 22.2.4, 22.2.7(a), 22.2.15,

22.2.16 and 22.9(a) and (b)."
19. Subcontracting
The following Sub-Clause 19.6. is added:
19.6 The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole of the facility.
21. Procurement
Clauses 21.1 is amended as follows:
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 21.1 Materials:
The Contractor shall adequately record the condition of roads, agricultural land and other infrastruc-
ture prior to the start of transporting materials, goads and equipment, and construction."

22. Installation
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.1.1 Benchmark, end of sub-paragraph
a):
The Contractor shall comply with (i) the measures and requirements relevant to the Contractor which
are set forth in the Resettlement Plan ("RP") attached hereto as Appendix [1], to the extent it concerns
impacts on respective affected people during construction; and (ii) any corrective or preventive actions
set out in Safeguards Monitoring Report that the Employer will prepare from time to time to monitor
implementation of the resettlement plan.
The Contractor shall allocate a budget for compliance with these measures, requirements and ac-
tions."
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.2.3 Labour Laws, as sub-clause
22.2.3 (d):
The Contractor shall not make employment decisions based upon personal characteristics unrelated
to job requirements. The Contractor shall base the employment relationship upon equal opportunity
and fair treatment, and shall not discriminate with respect to aspects of the employment relationship,
including recruitment and hiring, compensation (including wages and benefits), working conditions and
terms of employment or retirement, and discipline. The Contractor shall provide equal wages and
benefits to men ond women for work of equal value or type.
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.2.4:
c) The Contractor shall:

(i) comply with all applicable labour laws and related international treaty obligations of
the Employer and shall not employ child labour, as defined under Bangladeshi law;
(ii) provide safe working conditions for male and female workers;
(iii) carry out HIV/AIDS and human trafficking prevention and awareness campaigns in
the campsites and corridors of influence;
(iv) engage women workers as wage labourers depending on their skill; and
(iv) provide equal wages for equal work between men and women.
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.2.5:
d) Normal working hours are from 9:00 am to 5:00 pm.
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.2.7 Health and safety, as sub-clause
22.2.7 (d):
(d) The Contractor shall throughout the contract (including the Defect Liability Period):

(i) conduct Information, Education and Consultation Communication (IEC) campaigns,

at least every other month, addressed to all the Site staff and labour (including all
the Contractor's employees, all Sub-Contractors and Employer's and Project Man-
ager's employees, and all truck drivers and crew making deliveries to Site for con-
struction activities) and to the immediate local communities, concerning the risks,
dangers and impact, and appropriate avoidance behaviour with respect to Sexual-
ly Transmitted Diseases (STD) - or Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) in general
and HIV/AIDS in particular;
(ii) provide male or female condoms for all Site staff and labour as appropriate; and
(iii) provide for STI and HIV/AIDS screening, diagnosis, counselling and referral to a
dedicated national STI and HIV/AIDS program, (unless otherwise agreed) of all
Site staff and labour.
(iv) conduct health and safety programs for workers employed under the project, and
shall include information on the trafficking of women and the risk of sexually trans-
mitted diseases, including HIV/AIDs in such programs
The Contractor shall include in the program to be submitted for the execution of the Facilities
under Subclause 18.2 an alleviation program for Site staff and labour and their families in re-
spect of Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) and Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STD) includ-
ing HIV/AIDS. The STI, STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation program shall indicate when, how and at
what cost the Contractor plans to satisfy the requirements of this Subclause and the related
specification. For each component, the program shall detail the resources to be provided or uti-
lized and any related sub-contracting proposed. The program shall also include provision of a
detailed cost estimate with supporting documentation. Payment to the Contractor for the prepa-
ration and implementation this program shall not exceed the amount dedicated for this purpose.
The following text is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22.2.16 Prohibition of Harmful Child Labor:
Child" means a child below the statutory minimum age specified under applicable national, provincial
or local law of Bangladesh."
Sub-Clause 22.6 is amended as follows:
In the last sentence of the second paragraph, the word "Otherwise" is replaced by "In case such
work is not in the scope of the Contractor".
The following Sub-Clause 22.9. is added at the end of Sub-Clause 22:
22.9 The Contractor shall:
(a) comply with the measures and requirements relevant to the Contractor set forth in
the IEE, the EMP, the present national resettlement policy and any small ethnic
community peoples plan (to the extent they concern impacts on affected people
during construction), and any corrective or preventative actions set out in a safe-
guards monitoring report;
(b) make available a budget for all such environmental and social measures;

(c) provide the Employer with a written notice of any unanticipated environmental, re-
settlement or small ethnic community peoples risks or impacts that arise during
construction, implementation or operation of the project that were not considered in
the IEE, the EMP, the present national resettlement policy or any small ethnic
community peoples plan;
(d) adequately record the condition of roads, agricultural land and other infrastructure
prior to starting to transport materials and construction; and
(e) fully reinstate pathways, other local infrastructure, and agricultural land to at least
their pre-project condition upon the completion of construction.
23. Test and Inspection

Sub-Clause 23.2 is replaced by the following:
23.2 (a) The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated representatives are enti-
tled to attend the factory acceptance tests, which shall be performed at the Manu-
facturer's works/testing laboratories. Factory acceptance tests shall be organized for
each equipment and shall be performed for the following equipment:
power transformer 400/230 kV,

circuit breaker 400 kV,
disconnectors 400 kV,
instrument transformers 400 kV,
surge arresters 400 kV
substation automation system and protection relays, and
communication equipment, and
.
The Contractor is responsible for bearing the costs for the above mentioned witness-
ing of factory acceptance tests for 2 (two) Employer's Engineers in each visit, consid-
ering visa fees and health insurance to cover all medical costs that may be required
during the visits, return economy-class air fare, hotel charges, travelling expenses
from airport to hotel and hotel to place of testing and return, together with a per diem
allowance of USD 100 for actual working days, excluding travelling time, for each visit
and for each of the Employer's Engineers.
23.2 (b) The Contractor shall provide separate trainings for:
Operation & Maintenance of HV switchgear equipment including power transformer

Basic & Design of substation automation system & protection equipment
The Contractor is responsible for bearing the costs for the above mentioned trainings
for 4 (four) Employer's Engineers in each training, considering visa fees and health
insurance to cover all medical costs that may be required during the visits, the return
air fare (economy class), hotel charges, travelling expenses from airport to hotel and
hotel to place of training and return, together with a per diem allowance of USD 100
for minimum 10 (ten) working days, excluding travelling time, (as per the necessary

and agreed training schedule), for each training and for each of the Employer's Engi-
neers.
23.2 (c) The Contractor shall provide, during and after the installation, on-site training for opera-
tion and maintenance of the works, for 10 (ten) Employer's staff, for the duration of
minimum 1 (one) week.
The Contractor shall be responsible for bearing all costs for the above-mentioned
training. All costs are deemed included in the contract price.
The following sentence is added at the end of Sub-Clause 23.3:
The advance notification period for testing is four weeks.
24. Completion of the Facilities

The following Sub-Clause (sub-clause 24.9) is added at the end Clause 24:
24.9 Upon the completion of construction, the Contractor shall fully reinstate pathways, other local
infrastructure, and agricultural land to at least their pre-project condition as recorded by the
Contractor in consonance with its obligation in Clause 21.1.
25. Commissioning and Operational Accept-

ance
25.2.2 The guarantee test of the facilities shall be successfully completed within 180 (one hun-
dred eighty) days from the date of completion.

26. Completion Time Guarantee

26.2 The applicable rate for liquidated damages is 0.5% (zero point five percent) of the contract
price per week
The maximum deduction for liquidated damages is 10% (ten percent) of the contract price.
26.3 No bonus will be given for earlier Completion of the Facilities or part thereof.
30. Limitation of Liability

30.1 (b) The multiplier of the Contract Price is: 1 (one)
35. Unforeseen Conditions

The following texts are added at the end of sub-clause 35.3:
In addition to notice of any Unforeseeable physical conditions, the Contractor shall provide the Engi-
neer with a written notice of any unanticipated environmental or resettlement risks or impacts that
arise during construction, implementation or operation of the Plant or Permanent Works, which were
not considered in the initial environmental examination, the environmental management plan or the
resettlement plan attached hereto as Appendix [1] through Appendix [3].

37. Force Majeure
Sub-Clause 37.1.f is deleted.
A new Sub-Clause 37.1.g) is added as follows.
g) In case of occurrence of strike, sabotage, lockout, shortage of labour, material or utility,

such event will be treated as ''special risk'' and shall be discussed and resolved mutually.''
39. Change in the Facilities

A new Sub-Clause is added at the end of Clause 39:
39.4 The following provisions shall supplement the provisions of Sub-Clauses 39.1, 39.2 and
39.3:
The contract price for:
(i) the items for which quantities have been indicated as lump sum or lot or set and/or
(ii) quantities that are to be estimated by the Contractor
shall remain constant unless the Employer makes a change in the scope of works.
The quantities and unit prices:
(i) subsequently arrived at while approving the BoQ / billing breakdown of lump sum
quantities / lot / set and/or
(ii) estimated by the Contractor
shall be for on-account payment purposes only.
In case additional quantities over and above the quantities in BoQ / billing breakdown
and / or estimated by the Contractor are required for successful completion of the scope
of work as per the technical specifications, the Contractor shall execute additional quanti-
ties of these items for which no additional payment shall be made over and above the
lump sum contract price.
In case quantities of these items supplied at site are in excess of those required for the
successful completion of the scope of work, such additional quantities shall be the prop-
erty of the Employer.
Furthermore, in case the actual requirement of quantities for the successful completion of
scope of works is less than the quantities identified in the approved BoQ / billing break-

down and/or estimated by the Contractor, the lump sum contract price shall remain un-
changed, and no deduction shall be made from the lump sum price due to such reduction
of quantities.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to pay all statutory taxes, duties and levies
to the concerned authorities for such surplus material which would otherwise have been
lawfully payable in case of non-deemed export contracts. The Contractor shall submit an
indemnity bond to keep the Employer harmless from any liability prior to the release of
such material to the Contractor by Employer.
Sets / lots / lump sums shall be governed by the requirements of the corresponding item
description read in conjunction with relevant provisions of the technical specifications.
45. Disputes and Arbitration

45.1 The Dispute Board shall be appointed within 30 (thirty) days after the effective date.
The Dispute Board shall consists of 3 (three) members. The list of potential dispute
board members is:
(i) The President of the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh (IEB).

(ii) The President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Bangladesh (ICAB).
(iii) The President of the Institute of Project Management Bangladesh (IPMB).
45.2 Appointment (if not agreed) to be made by:
Head, Department of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Bangladesh University of En-

gineering & Technology, Bangladesh
45.5 Rules of procedure for arbitration proceedings:
(a) Contracts with foreign contractors:
International arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of the Singapore
International Arbitration Centre (SIAC).
Arbitration shall be administered by the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (SIAC).
The place of arbitration shall be the place of the institution administering the arbitration.
(b) Contracts with contractors being nationals of the Employer's country:
Dhaka, Bangladesh
The following clause is added as clause 46:

46. Eligibility
46.1 The Contractor shall have the nationality of an ADB member country. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Contractor is a citizen or is
constituted, incorporated, or registered, and operates in conformity with the provisions of
the laws of that country. This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the nation-
ality of proposed subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including related
services. .
46.2 The materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract shall have their
origin in eligible source countries, and all expenditures under the Contract will be limited
to such materials, equipment, and services. At the Employer's request, the Contractor
may be required to provide evidence of the origin of materials, equipment and services.
46.3 For the purposes of Sub-Clause 46.2, "origin" means the place where the materials and
equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from which the services are
provided. Materials and equipment are produced when, through manufacturing, pro-
cessing, or substantial or major assembling of components, a commercially recognized
product results that differs substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or utility
from its components.
The following clause is added as clause 47:
47. Environmental Management Plan

47 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable national, provincial and local environmen-
tal laws and regulations.
The Contractor shall (a) establish an operational system for managing environmental im-
pacts, (b) carry out all of the monitoring and mitigation measures set forth in the [Initial
Environmental Examination ("lEE")] or [Environmental Management Plan ("EMP")] and (c)
allocate the budget required to ensure that such measures are carried out. The Contrac-
tor shall submit semi-annual reports on the carrying out of such measures to the Employ-
er.
More particularly, the Contractor shall comply with (i) the measures and requirements set
forth in the initial environmental examination and the environmental management plan at-
tached hereto as Appendix [2,3]; and (ii) any corrective or preventative actions set out in
safeguards monitoring reports that the Employer will prepare from time to time to monitor
implementation of the initial environmental examination and the environmental manage-
ment plan.
The Contractor shall allocate a budget for compliance with these measures, requirements
and actions."
Appendix to SCC:
1. Resettlement Plan (RP)
2. Initial Environment Examination (IEE)
3. Environment management Plan (EMP)

Section 9- Contract Forms
Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar400/230 kV Substation

1. Notification of Award 1
2. Contract Agreement 3
Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment 7
Appendix 2 - Price Adjustment 10
Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements 12
Appendix 4 - Time Schedule 15
Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Plant and Services and List of Approved
Subcontractors 17
Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer 19
Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review 20
Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees 21
3. Performance Security 23
4. Advance Payment Security 25

Section 9: Contract Forms Page 9-1
1. Notification of Award
Letter of Acceptance
No. :
Date :
To:
(Name and address of the Contractor)
This is to notify you that your Bid No. dated

[Number of Bid] [Date of Bid]
for execution of the:

Contract No.: __________________
(Name of the contract and identification number, as given in the Bid Data Sheet)
for the Contract Price in the aggregate of:
(amount of foreign currency in numbers and words), (name of foreign currency), and
(amount of local currency in numbers and words)
as corrected and modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by our
Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance with the Condi-
tions of Contract, using for that purpose one of the Performance Security Forms included in Section 9
(Contract Forms) of the Bidding Document.
You are, requested to convey your written and unconditional acceptance of this Notification of Award
until ________(deadline).
You are requested to submit _____ (Number of sets) sets of the Draft Contract Documents until _____
(date).

You are also requested to send your authorized representative(s), for the finalization of the contract
documents.until _____ (date)
A copy of the unsigned Contract Agreement is enclosed for your necessary actions
Yours sincerely,
The Company Secretary

Institution of Engineers Building Bhaban (IEB) 4th Floor
Copy to:
1. Managing Director, Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd., Dhaka,

IEB Bhaban (4th Floor), 8 Ramna, Dhaka-1000.
2. Director (P&D) / (Finance), Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd., Dhaka,
3. GM (P&D)/(Projects), Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd., Dhaka,
4. DGM (Design), Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd., Dhaka,
IEB Bhaban (3rd Floor), 8 Ramna, Dhaka-1000.
5. Project Director, PGCB, Dhaka.
Attachment: Contract Agreement

2. Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT made on the of , year,
(day) (month) (year)
BETWEEN
(1) Power Grid Company of Bangladesh (PGCB) a corporation incorporated under the laws of
Bangladesh and having its principal place of business at Institution of Engineers Building
Bhaban (IEB) 4th Floor, 8/A Ramna, Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh (hereinafter called "the
Employer"),
and
(2)
(name of Contractor)
a corporation incorporated under the laws of
(country of Contractor)
and having its principal place of business at
(address of Contractor)
(hereinafter called "the Contractor").
WHEREAS the Employer desires to engage the Contractor to design, manufacture, test, deliver, in-
stall, complete and commission certain Facilities, viz.
(list of facilities)
("the Facilities") and the Contractor have agreed to such engagement upon and subject to the terms
and conditions hereinafter appearing.
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows:
Article 1 1.1 Contract Documents (Reference GCC Clause 2)

Contract Documents
The following documents shall constitute the Contract between the
Employer and the Contractor, and each shall be read and con-
strued as an integral part of the Contract:
(a) This Contract Agreement and the Appendixes hereto
(b) Letter of Bid and Price Schedules submitted by the Contrac-
tor
(c) Special Conditions of Contract
(d) General Conditions of Contract
(e) List of Eligible Countries that was specified in Section 5 of
the Bidding Document
(f) Specifications
(g) Drawings
(h) Other completed Bidding Forms submitted with the Letter of
Bid
(i) Any other documents forming part of the Employer's Re-

quirements
1
(j) Any other documents shall be added here
1.2 Order of Precedence (Reference GCC Clause 2)
In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the Contract
Documents listed above, the order of precedence shall be the or-
der in which the Contract Documents are listed in Article 1.1 (Con-
tract Documents) above.
1.3 Definitions (Reference GCC Clause 1)
Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the same
meanings as are ascribed to them in the General Conditions.
Article 2 2.1 Contract Price (Reference GCC Clause 11)

Contract Price and
Terms of Payment The Employer hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor the Contract
Price in consideration of the performance by the Contractor of its
obligations hereunder. The Contract Price shall be the aggregate
of
(amounts of foreign currency in words]
(amounts of foreign currency in figures)

as specified in Price Schedule No. 5 (Grand Summary),
(amounts of local currency in words)
(amounts of local currency in figures)
or such other sums as may be determined in accordance with the

terms and conditions of the Contract.
2.2 Terms of Payment (Reference GCC Clause 12)

The terms and procedures of payment according to which the
Employer will reimburse the Contractor are given in the Appendix
1 (Terms and Procedures of Payment) hereto.
The Employer shall instruct its bank to issue an irrevocable con-

firmed documentary credit made available to the Contractor in a
bank in the country of the Contractor. The credit shall be for an
amount of
(amount equal to the total named in Schedule 1
less the advance payment to be made for plant and
mandatory spare parts supplied from abroad];
and shall be subject to the Uniform Customs and Practice for

2
Documentary Credits 1993 Revision, ICC Publication No. 500.
In the event that the amount payable under Schedule No. 1 is ad-
justed in accordance with GCC 11.2 or with any of the other terms
1 Tables of Adjustment Data may be added if the contract provides for price adjustment (see GCC 11).
2 Or Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits 2007 Revision, ICC Publication No. 600 (or the latest version).

of the Contract, the Employer shall arrange for the documentary

credit to be amended accordingly
Article 3 3.1 Effective Date (Reference GCC Clause 1)

Effective Date
The Effective Date upon which the period until the Time for Com-
pletion of the Facilities shall be counted from is the date when all
of the following conditions have been fulfilled:
(a) This Contract Agreement has been duly executed for and on
behalf of the Employer and the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor has submitted to the Employer the perfor-
mance security and the advance payment guarantee.
(c) The Employer has paid the Contractor the advance pay-
ment.
(d) The Contractor has been advised that the documentary
credit referred to in Article 2.2 above has been issued in its
favour.
Each party shall use its best efforts to fulfil the above conditions for
which it is responsible as soon as practicable.
3.2 If the conditions listed under 3.1 are not fulfilled within 2 months
from the date of this Contract notification because of reasons not
attributable to the Contractor, the parties shall discuss and agree
on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Price and the Time for
Completion and/or other relevant conditions of the Contract.
Article 4
Communications 4.1 The address of the Employer for notice purposes, pursuant to
GCC 4.1 is:
(Employer's address)
4.2 The address of the Contractor for notice purposes, pursuant to

GCC 4.1 is:
(Contractor's address)
Article 5
Appendixes 5.1 The Appendixes listed in the attached List of Appendixes shall be
deemed to form an integral part of this Contract Agreement.
5.2 Reference in the Contract to any Appendix shall mean the Appen-
dixes attached hereto, and the Contract shall be read and con-
strued accordingly.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer and the Contractor have caused this Agreement to be duly
executed by their duly authorized representatives the day and year first above written.
Signed by, for and on behalf of the Employer

____________
[Signature] [Title]
in the presence of
____________
[Signature] [Title]
Signed by, for and on behalf of the Contractor
____________
[Signature] [Title]
in the presence of
[Signature] [Title]
Appendixes
Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment

Appendix 2 - Price Adjustment
Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements
Appendix 4 - Time Schedule
Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Plant and Services and List of Approved Subcontractors
Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer
Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review
Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees

Appendix 1 - Terms and Procedures of Payment
In accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 12 (Terms of Payment), the Employer shall pay the
Contractor in the following manner and at the following times, based on the Price Breakdown given in
the section on Price Schedules. Payments will be made in the currencies quoted by the Bidder unless
otherwise agreed between the parties. Applications for payment in respect of part deliveries may be
made by the Contractor as work proceeds.
(A) Terms of Payment
Schedule No. 1 - Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad
In respect of plant and mandatory spare parts supplied from abroad, the following payments shall be
made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total CIP amount as an advance payment against receipt of invoice
and an irrevocable advance payment security for the equivalent amount
made out in favour of the Employer. The advance payment security may be
reduced in proportion to the value of the plant and mandatory spare parts
delivered to the site, as evidenced by delivery documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata CIP or amount upon Incoterm "CIP," upon delivery to
the site within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata CIP or amount upon issue of the Completion Certifi-
cate, within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata CIP or amount upon issue of the Operational Ac-
ceptance Certificate, within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Schedule No. 2 - Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employer's Coun-
try
In respect of plant and mandatory spare parts supplied from within the Employer's country, the follow-
ing payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total EXW amount as an advance payment against receipt of invoice,
and an irrevocable advance payment security for the equivalent amount
made out in favour of the Employer. The advance payment security may be
reduced in proportion to the value of the plant and mandatory spare parts
delivered to the site, as evidenced by delivery documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon Incoterm "Ex-Works," upon deliv-
ery to the site within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Completion Certifi-
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Operational Ac-

Schedule No. 3 - Design Services
In respect of design services for both the foreign currency and the local currency portions, the follow-
ing payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total design services amount as an advance payment against receipt
of invoice and an irrevocable advance payment security for the equivalent
amount made out in favour of the Employer.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata design services amount upon acceptance of Final de-
sign by the Project Manager within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata design services amount upon acceptance of Detail
design by the Project Manager and upon issue of the Completion Certifi-
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata design services amount upon acceptance of As-build
design by the Project Manager and upon issue of the Operational Ac-
Schedule No. 4 - Installation and Other Services
In respect of installation services for both the foreign and local currency portions, the following pay-
ments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total installation and other services amount as an advance payment
against receipt of invoice and an irrevocable advance payment security for
the equivalent amount made out in favour of the Employer. The advance
payment security may be reduced in proportion to the value of work per-
formed by the Contractor as evidenced by the invoices for installation ser-
vices.
Eighty percent (80%) of the measured value of work performed by the Contractor, as identified in
the said Program of Performance, during the preceding month, as evi-
denced by the Employer's authorization of the Contractor's application, will
be made monthly within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services performed by the Con-
tractor as evidenced by the Employer's authorization of the Contractor's
monthly applications, upon issue of the Completion Certificate, within 45
days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services performed by the Con-
tractor as evidenced by the Employer's authorization of the Contractor's
monthly applications, upon issue of the Operational Acceptance Certificate,
within 45 days after receipt of invoice.
In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment on its respective due date, the Employer
shall pay to the Contractor interest on the amount of such delayed payment at the rate of point zero
five percent (0.05%) per annum for period of delay until payment has been made in full.
(B) Payment Procedures
When applying for certification and making payments, the procedures shall be as follows:

Foreign Currency Portion:
The payment of the contract price (except the advance payment portion) will be made through an ir-
revocable commercial Letter of Credit to be opened by the Employer in favour of the Contractor as
appropriate. All costs in connection with the Letter of Credit inside Bangladesh shall be borne by the
Employer and costs outside Bangladesh shall be borne by the Contractor.
Only the advance payment (10% of the foreign currency portion) will be paid through direct disburse-
ment by ADB, without letter of credit. The remaining payments (90% of the foreign currency portion)
will be made through an irrevocable commercial Letter of Credit.
Local Currency Portion:
The local currency portion of the contract price will be paid as per PGCB's financial and account rules
or any other account rules in force and adopted by the Employer.

Appendix 2 - Price Adjustment
Prices payable to the Contractor, in accordance with the Contract, shall be subject to adjustment dur-
ing performance of the Contract to reflect changes in the cost of labour and material components, in
accordance with the following formula:
Power Transformers
The formula for calculating the price adjustment to be applied to the contract price components of the
power transformer is as follows:
P1 = P0 x {0.15 + 0.22 x (A1/A0) x f1 + 0.25 x (B1/B0) x f2 + 0.15 x (C1/C0) x f3 + 0.03 x (D1/D0) x

f4 + 0.2 x (L1/L0) x fL} - P0
Where,
P1 = Price adjustment amount of fabricated power (auto) transformers (if the figure is
negative, the amount has to be recovered by the Employer from the Contractor)
P0 = Contract price (base price)
A&C= Price indices of core (Si steel) & steel in the Manufacturer's country
B&D= LME mid-day cash settlement prices of copper and zinc in US$/mt.
L= Price index of labour of Manufacturer's country
f1, f2, f3, f4 & fL = Exchange rate correction factor, such that f = Z0/Z1
Where,
Z is the number of units of currency of the index which is equivalent to one unit of the
bid currency.
Subscript '0' refers to indices as on 28 days prior to the bid opening date, for material & labour.
In case of Z0,
Subscript '0' refers to the value as on 7 days prior to the bid opening date.
Subscript '1' refers to indices and exchange rate as on 30 days prior to the shipment date.
Conditions Applicable to Price Adjustment
Country of Origin; Source of Indices Used Base Date Indices

Item
Currency of index Title / Definition Value Date
A (Si Steel)
B (Cooper)
C (Steel)
D (Zink)
L (Labour)

The following conditions shall apply:
a. The base date shall be the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of the Bid.
b. The date of adjustment shall be the mid-point of the period of manufacture or installation of the
component or Plant. The mid-point shall be determined by considering the start date of manu-
facture to be 30 days prior to the opening of the L/C. The end date of manufacture is considered
to be 30 days prior to the shipping date.
c. No price increase will be allowed beyond the original delivery date unless covered by an exten-
sion of time awarded by the Employer under the terms of the Contract. No price increase will be
allowed for periods of delay for which the Contractor is responsible. The Employer will, however,
be entitled to any price decrease occurring during such periods of delay.
d. If the currency in which the Contract price, P0, is expressed is different from the currency of the
country of origin of the labour and/or materials indexes, a correction factor will be applied to
avoid incorrect adjustments of the Contract price. The correction factor shall correspond to the
ratio of exchange rates between the two currencies on the base date and the date for adjust-
ment as defined above.
e. No price adjustment shall be payable on the portion of the Contract price paid to the Contractor
as an advance payment.
f. If no data is entered for one item in the above table, the price adjustment does not apply to this
item.
g. Any payments resulting from price adjustments will be settled at the end of contract.

Appendix 3 - Insurance Requirements
(A) Types of Insurance to be taken out by the Contractor
In accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 34, the Contractor shall at its expense take out and
maintain in effect, or cause to be taken out and maintained in effect, during the performance of the
Contract, the types of insurance set forth below in the sums and with the deductibles and other condi-
tions specified. The identity of the insurers and the form of the policies shall be subject to the approval
of the Employer, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld.
The Contract has to follow the existing insurance act and related acts of the Government of Bangla-
desh.
(a) Cargo Insurance
The Cargo Insurance covers losses or damages occurring, while in transit from the supplier's or manu-
facturer's works or stores until arrival at the Site, to the Facilities (including spare parts therefore) and
to the construction equipment to be provided by the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
Amount Deductible Limits Parties Insured From To

[in Currency(ies)] [in Currency(ies)] [Names] [Place] [Place]
Supplier's or
110% of the Power Grid Company Contractor's store in
- Manufacturer's works
contract price of Bangladesh Limited Bangladesh
or stores
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance
The Installation All Risk Insurance covers physical losses or damages to the Facilities at the Site, oc-
curring prior to completion of the Facilities, with an extended maintenance coverage for the Contrac-
tor's liability in respect of any loss or damage occurring during the defect liability period while the Con-
tractor is on the Site for the purpose of performing its obligations during the defect liability period.

[in Currency(ies)] [in Currency(ies)] [Names] [Names] [Names]
Power Grid Company of

100% of the contract Bangladesh Limited
- - -
price and
Contractor / Subcontractor

(c) Third Party Liability Insurance
The Third Party Liability Insurance covers bodily injury or death suffered by third parties (including the
Employer's personnel) and loss of or damage to property (including the Employer's property and any
parts of the Facilities that have been accepted by the Employer) occurring in connection with the sup-
ply and installation of the Facilities.

Power Grid Company

EUR 2.0 million - - -
of Bangladesh Limited
(d) Automobile Liability Insurance
The Automobile Liability Insurance covers use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its Subcontrac-
tors (whether owned by them or not) in connection with the supply and installation of the Facilities.
Comprehensive insurance in accordance with statutory requirements.
(e) Workers' Compensation
Workers compensation shall be In accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any coun-
try where the Facilities or any part thereof is executed.
(f) Employer's Liability
Employers liability shall be in accordance with the statutory requirements applicable in any country
where the Facilities or any part thereof is executed.
(g) Other Insurance
The Contractor is also required to take out and maintain at its own cost the following types of insur-
ance:
Details:

- - - - -
The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the Contractor
pursuant to GCC Subclause 34.1, except for the Third Party Liability, Workers' Compensation, and
Employer's Liability Insurance, and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall be named as co-insureds
under all insurance policies taken out by the Contractor pursuant to GCC Subclause 34.1, except for

the Cargo, Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance. All insurer's rights of subroga-
tion against such co-insureds for losses or claims arising out of the performance of the Contract shall
be waived under such policies.
(B) Types of Insurance to be taken out by the Employer
The Employer shall at its expense take out and maintain in effect during the performance of the Con-
tract the following insurance policies.
Details:
None

Appendix 4 - Time Schedule
Time for completion of the whole facilities shall be 30 (thirty) months from the effective date as de-
scribed in Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract, Sub-Clause 8.2.
The Bidder shall provide
Filled general Time schedule, provided as Appendix 4 to the Section 9: Contract Forms,
Detail proposal for Mobilization Schedule, Section 4: Bidding Forms, item 5.3. and
Detail proposal for the Construction Schedule , Section 4: Bidding Forms, item 5.4.
Please find the time schedule attached.

Time Schedule

Appendix 5 - List of Major Items of Plant and Services and List of

Approved Subcontractors
A list of major items of plant and services is provided below.
The following Subcontractors and Manufacturers are approved for carrying out the item of the facilities
indicated. Where more than one Subcontractor is listed, the Contractor is free to choose between
them, but it must notify the Employer of its choice in good time prior to appointing any selected Sub-
contractor.
In accordance with GCC Sub-clause 19.1, the Contractor is free to submit proposals for Subcontrac-
tors for additional items from time to time. No Subcontracts shall be placed with any such Subcontrac-
tors for additional items until the Subcontractors have been approved in writing by the Employer and
their names have been added to this list of Approved Subcontractors.
Approved Manufacturers and Subcontractors for the Major Items of Plant and
Services
Approved Manufacturers/Subcontractors
Approved Manufacturers
No. Equipment Nationality
Name and Address
1.1. Power transformer 400/230/33 kV
2.1.
3.1. Circuit breakers 400 kV
3.2. Disconnectors 400 kV
3.3. Current transformers 400 kV
3.4. Voltage transformers 400 kV
3.5. Surge arresters 400 kV
3.6. Post & Disc insulators 400 kV
4.6. Post & Disc insulators 230 kV

Approved Manufacturers
No. Equipment Nationality
Name and Address
6.1
6.2 SAS & Relay protection equipment
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6. DFDR
Communication system and Fiber Optic
7.
multiplexer equipment
8.1. ACU battery
8.2. Charger
8.3
8.4
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
10.1
11.1
11.2
Subcontract-or for executing the field
12
works*
13 Wave Trap
*Approved Subcontractors
Approved Subcontractor
No. Service Nationality
Name and Address

Appendix 6 - Scope of Works and Supply by the Employer
The following personnel, facilities, works, and supplies will be provided or supplied by the Employer,
and the provisions of GCC Clauses 10, 21, and 24 shall apply as appropriate.
All personnel, facilities, works, and supplies will be provided by the Employer in good time so as not to
delay the performance of the Contractor, in accordance with the approved Time Schedule and Pro-
gram of Performance pursuant to GCC Sub-clause 18.2.
Unless otherwise indicated, all personnel, facilities, works, and supplies will be provided free of charge
to the Contractor.
Personnel Charge to Contractor (if any)
Employer's personnel will be engaged

to supervise and certify the works and tests. No charge to Contractor.
Names of personnel will be communicated later.
Facilities Charge to Contractor (if any)
- -
Works Charge to Contractor (if any)
- -.
Supplies Charge to Contractor (if any)
The Employer will not generally supply any

machinery/equipment and materials to the Contractor.
In the event of any such requirement The Contractor will be required to pay
and subject to availability, the amount to be determined by the
the Employer may extend the facilities to use Employer for such facilities.
such machinery and materials by the Contractor
on rental charge/cost under normal terms and conditions.

Appendix 7 - List of Documents for Approval or Review
Pursuant to GCC Sub-clause 20.3.1, the Contractor shall prepare, or cause its Subcontractor to pre-
pare, and present to the Project Manager in accordance with the requirements of GCC Sub-clause
18.2 (Program of Performance), the following documents for
(A) Approval
1. CESMP
2. Weekly and Monthly H&S Reports
3. Site Survey Elaborate
4. Geotechnical Elaborate
5. General design & Fire protection design
6. Electrical Final Design
7. Civil Final Design
8. Mechanical Final Design
9. Detail Electrical Design
10. Detail Civil Design
11. As-build design
12. Manufacturers
13. Detail description of the equipment, drawings, characteristics, type tests, etc.
14. Plan and program of Training
15. Plan and program for Factory Acceptance Test
16. Routine Test Reports
17. Plan and program of deliveries
18. Delivery documentation
19. Subcontractors
20. Plan and program for Site Test
21. Site Test Reports
22. Plan and program for Commissioning
23. Final Testing & Commissioning Report
24. Other
(B) Review
1. Plan and Program of Works and Services

2. Organization Schedule
3. Site Organization
4. Monthly Progress Reports
5. Final Report
6. Other

Appendix 8 - Functional Guarantees
1. General
This Appendix sets out
(a) the functional guarantees referred to in GCC Clause 28 (Functional Guarantees)

(b) the preconditions to the validity of the functional guarantees, either in production and/or con-
sumption, set forth below
(c) the minimum level of the functional guarantees
(d) the formula for calculating liquidated damages for failure to attain the functional guarantees.
2. Preconditions
The Contractor gives the functional guarantees (specified herein) for the facilities, subject to the fol-
lowing preconditions being fully satisfied:
2.1 The Employer's advisory personnel shall attend the commissioning, including the guarantee
test, and shall advise and assist the Contractor.
2.2 The Employer shall promptly provide the Contractor with such information as the Contractor
may reasonably require in relation to the conduct and results of the guarantee test and any rep-
etitions thereof.
3. Functional Guarantees
Subject to compliance with the foregoing preconditions, the Contractor guarantees as follows:
3.1 Technical requirements fulfilled

3.2. Testing & commissioning of all the equipment & materials performed and test results in the
standard limits
3.3. Plant & equipment and making ready for commercial operation of the facilities.
4. Failure in Guarantees and Liquidated Damages
4.1 Failure to Attain Guaranteed Production Capacity and delay for making changes
If the production capacity of the facilities attained in the guarantee test, pursuant to GCC Sub-
clause 25.2, is less than the guaranteed figure specified in para. 3.1 above, but the actual pro-
duction capacity attained in the guarantee test is not less than the minimum level specified in
para. 4.3 below, and the Contractor elects to pay liquidated damages to the Employer for the
delay in lieu of making changes, modifications and/or additions to the Facilities, pursuant to
GCC Sub-clause 28.3, then the Contractor shall pay liquidated damages at the rate of 0.5 %
(zero point five percent) of the contract price per week, in the proportions of currencies in
which the contract price is payable.

Failure to attain guaranteed values of component losses for Power Transformer, article/clause
no. 4.3.6 of volume-II shall be applied.
4.2 Raw Materials and Utilities Consumption in Excess of Guaranteed Level
Not Applicable
4.3 Minimum Levels

Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, if as a result of the guarantee test(s), the fol-
lowing minimum levels of performance guarantees (and consumption guarantees) are not at-
tained by the Contractor, the Contractor shall at its own cost make good any deficiencies until
the Facilities reach any of such minimum performance levels, pursuant to GCC Sub-clause
28.2:
(a) Commissioning of the Facilities attained in the guarantee test: 100 % (one hundred per-
cent) of the facility
4.4 Limitation of Liability
Subject to para. 4.3 above, the Contractor's aggregate liability to pay liquidated damages for
failure to attain the functional guarantees shall not exceed 10 % (ten percent) of the Contract
price

3. Performance Security
3
_________ [Bank's name, and address of issuing branch or office ]
Beneficiary: _____ [Name and address of Employer]
Date: _____
Performance Guarantee No.: _____
We have been informed that _____ [name of the Contractor] (hereinafter called "the Contractor") has
entered into Contract No. _____ [reference number of the contract] dated _____ with you, for the exe-
cution of _____ [name of contract and brief description of plant and services] (hereinafter called "the
Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance guaran-
tee is required.
At the request of the Contractor, we _____ [name of the bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay
you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of ____ [name of the currency and amount in
4
figures _____ (amount in words)] such sum being payable in the types and proportions of currencies
in which the Contract Price is payable, upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied
by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract,
without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire no later than the earlier of
(a) 18 months after our receipt of
(i) a copy of the Completion Certificate; or

(ii) a registered letter from the Contractor, attaching a copy of the notice to the project man-
ager that the Facilities are ready for commissioning, and stating that 14 days have
elapsed from receipt of such notice (or 7 days have elapsed if the notice was a repeated
notice) and the project manager has failed to issue a Completion Certificate or inform the
Contractor in writing of any defects or deficiencies; or
(iii) a registered letter from the Contractor stating that no Completion Certificate has been is-
sued but the Employer is making use of the Facilities; or
(b) the ____ day of, 201_.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on
or before that date.
3 All italicized text is for guidance on how to prepare this demand guarantee and shall be deleted from the final document.
4 The guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the contract price specified in the contract and denom-
inated either in the currency(ies) of the contract or a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Employer.

This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 458 (or
ICC Publication No. 758 as applicable), except that subparagraph (ii) of Sub-Article 20(a) is hereby
5
excluded.
Seal of bank and signature(s)
Note to Bidder: If the institution issuing the performance security is located outside the
country of the Employer, it shall have a correspondent financial institution
located in the country of the Employer to make it enforceable.
5 Or the same or similar to this clause specified in the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 758,
where applicable.

4. Advance Payment Security

6
________________ [Banks name, and address of issuing branch or office ]
Beneficiary: _____ [Name and address of Employer]
Date: _____
Advance Payment Guarantee No.:
We have been informed that _____ [name of the Contractor] (hereinafter called "the Contractor") has
entered into Contract No: _____ [reference number of the contract] dated _____ with you, for the exe-
cution of _____ [name of contract and brief description of works] (hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an advance payment in
7
the sum of _____ [name of the currency and amount in figures ] [amount in words] is to be made
against an advance payment guarantee.
At the request of the Contractor, we _____ [name of the bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay
you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of _____ [name of the currency and amount in
8
figures (amount in words)] upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written
statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Con-
tractor used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in respect of the
Works.
It is a condition for any claim and payment under this guarantee to be made that the advance payment
referred to above must have been received by the Contractor on its account number _____ [Contrac-
tor's account number] at _____ [name and address of the bank].
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of the advance
payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim statements or payment certificates,
which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copy of
the interim payment certificate, indicating that 80% of the Contract Price has been certified for pay-
ment, or on the day of _____ 9 whichever is earlier. Consequently, any demand for payment under this
guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that date.
6
All italicized text serves as a guide for preparing this demand guarantee and shall be deleted from the final document.
7 The guarantor shall insert an amount representing the amount of the advance payment denominated either in the curren-
cy(ies) of the advance payment as specified in the contract, or in a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Employer.
8 Footnote 2.
9 Insert the expected expiration date of the time for completion. The Employer should note that in the event of an extension of
the time for completion of the contract, the Employer would need to request an extension of this guarantee from the guaran-
tor. Such request must be in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the guarantee. In preparing
this guarantee, the Employer might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the penultimate paragraph:
"The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed ______ [6 months]______ [1
year], in response to the Employer's written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the Guarantor be-
fore the expiry of the guarantee."

This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 458 (or
ICC Publication No. 758 as applicable).
Seal of bank and signature(s)
Note to Bidder. If the institution issuing the advance payment security is located outside the
country of the Employer, it shall have a correspondent financial institution
located in the country of the Employer to make it enforceable.

Source: Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd. (PGCB) - QF-SPL-14

Volume 2
Issued on: 24th April, 2017
Country: Bangladesh
Employer:
Consultant:
Phone: +49 (6172) 1791-800; Fax: +49 (6172) 944 95 20
Volume 2
VOLUME 1


VOLUME 2
Scope of Work
Technical Specifications
Drawings forming Part of Specifications
VOLUME 3

Schedule C: Bar Chart Program of Key Activities - Delivery & Completion Time Schedule

BGD 2440 SS Vol 2_open manufacturer.docx
Volume 2

2. Ancillary Mechanical and Electrical Apparatus 2
2.1 Scope 2
2.2 References 2
2.2.1 ISO Standards 2
2.2.2 IEC Standards 2
2.2.3 British Standards 4
2.2.4 BS European Standards 4
2.3 Definition of Terms 5
2.4 Statutory Regulations 5
2.5 Design Standards and Codes 5
2.5.1 General Compliance with International Standards and Codes 5
2.5.2 Standards Named in Specification 5
2.5.3 Hierarchy of Standards 5
2.5.4 Substitution of Standards and Design Codes 5
2.6 Erection Marks 6
2.7 Cleaning and Painting 6
2.7.1 General 6
2.7.2 Schedules for Indoor Surfaces Finishes 8
2.7.3 Schedules for Outdoor Surfaces Finishes 10
2.8 Rating Plates, Nameplates and Labels 13
2.8.1 General 13
2.8.2 Rating Plates 13
2.8.3 Circuit Labels 13
2.8.4 Pipe Service Identification 14
2.9 Environmental Protection & Tropicalisation 14
2.9.1 General 14
2.9.2 Tropicalisation 15
2.10 Platforms, Stairways, Ladders and Hand-Railing 15
2.10.1 General 15
2.10.2 Flooring 16
2.10.3 Hand-Railing and Protective Barriers 16
2.10.4 Stairways 17
2.10.5 Fixed Access Ladders 17
2.11 Nuts, Bolts, Studs and Washers 17
2.12 Forgings 18
2.13 Castings 18
2.13.1 General 18
2.13.2 Steel Castings 19
2.13.3 Iron Castings 19
2.13.4 Aluminium Bronze Castings 20
2.14 General Welding Requirements 20
2.14.1 General 20
2.14.2 General Fabrication 20
2.14.3 Weld Procedure Documents 20
2.14.4 Weld Procedure Qualification Tests 21
2.14.5 Welder's Qualification Tests 21

Volume 2

2.14.6 Storage of Welding Consumables 21
2.14.7 Welding Equipment 21
2.14.8 Visual Weld Inspection 21
2.14.9 Internal Examination 22
2.14.10 Non-destructive Examination 22
2.14.11 Ultrasonic Examination 22
2.14.12 Magnetic Crack Detection 22
2.14.13 Dye Penetrant Tests 22
2.14.14 Quality Requirements for Welds 22
2.14.15 Weld Repairs 22
2.14.16 Mandatory Inspections 23
2.15 Galvanised Work 23
2.16 Chromium Plating 24
2.17 Pumps 24
2.18 Pipework 24
2.19 Valves 25
2.20 Pressure Vessels 25
2.21 Lubrication 26
2.22 Oil Level Indicators 26
2.23 Pressure Gauges 27
2.24 Thermometer Pockets 27
2.25 Gauge Cubicles and Panels 27
2.26 Locking Facilities 27
2.27 Electrical Equipment 28
2.27.1 General 28
2.27.2 Electrical Equipment Enclosures 29
2.28 Current Ratings 29
2.28.1 Normal Current Ratings 29
2.28.2 Temperature Rise 29
2.28.3 Short-Time Current Ratings 30
2.29 Voltage Ratings 30
2.29.1 Normal Voltage Ratings 30
2.29.2 Short-Time Voltage Ratings 31
2.30 Electrical Insulation 31
2.31 Insulating Oil 31
2.32 Control and Selector Switches 32
2.33 Panels, Desks and Cubicles 32
2.34 Instruments & Meters 34
2.34.1 Indicating Instruments 34
2.34.2 Electrical Meters 35
2.35 Indicating Lamps and Fittings 35
2.36 Anti-Condensation Heaters 36
2.37 Control and Instrument Panel Wiring, Cable Terminations and Terminal Boards 37
2.37.1 General 37
2.37.2 Identification of Wires 38
2.37.3 Terminals and Terminal Blocks 38
2.38 Cable Boxes and Glands 39
2.38.1 General 39
2.38.2 Additional Requirements for Compound-filled Cable Boxes 40

Volume 2

2.38.3 Cable Glands 41
2.39 Box-Filling Compounds 41
2.40 Oil or Compound-Filled Chambers 41
2.41 Joints and Gaskets 42
2.42 Valves on Electrical Equipment Fluid Lines and Vessels 42
2.43 Junction and Marshalling Boxes 42
2.44 Conduit and Accessories 43
2.45 Trunking 43
2.46 Electric Motors 44
2.46.1 General 44
2.46.2 Type and Rating 44
2.46.3 Insulation 44
2.46.4 Conditions of Operation 44
2.46.5 Starting Performance 44
2.46.6 Bearings 45
2.46.7 Enclosures and Methods of Cooling 45
2.46.8 Anti-condensation Heaters 45
2.46.9 Terminals and Terminal Boxes 46
2.46.10 Earth Terminal 46
2.46.11 D.C. Motors 46
2.47 Motor Starters and Contactors for Separate Mounting 47
2.48 Pushbuttons and Separately Mounted Pushbutton Stations 47
2.49 Miniature Circuit Breakers, Fuses and Links 48
2.50 Earthing and Bonding 49
3. HV Switchgear and Neutral Earthing Equipment 50
3.1 Scope 50
3.2 References 50
3.3 Design Principles 52
3.3.1 General Requirement 52
3.3.2 Availability for Maintenance, Repair, Extensions, Testing 52
3.4 Outdoor HV Switchgear 53
3.4.1 Switchgear - Design and Performance 53
3.4.2 Current Ratings 53
3.4.3 Corona 54
3.4.4 Local, Remote and Supervisory Control 54
3.4.5 HVAC Circuit Breakers 54
3.4.6 HV Disconnectors 60
3.4.7 HV Instrument Transformers 64
3.4.8 Surge Arresters 69
3.4.9 Post Insulators 71
4. Power Transformers 74
4.1 Scope 74
4.2 References 74

Volume 2

4.2.3 BS European Standards 75
4.3 Power Transformers 75
4.3.1 Types of Transformers and Operating Conditions 75
4.3.2 Continuous Maximum Rating 75
4.3.3 Electrical Connections 76
4.3.4 Ability to Withstand Short Circuit 76
4.3.5 Stabilizing Windings 76
4.3.6 Losses and Evaluation of Losses 76
4.3.7 Impedance 77
4.3.8 Noise 78
4.3.9 Harmonic Suppression 78
4.4.1 Magnetic Circuit 78
4.4.2 Flux Density 79
4.4.3 Windings 79
4.4.4 Internal Earthing 79
4.5 Tanks and Ancillary Equipment 80
4.5.1 Transformer Tanks 80
4.5.2 Conservator Tanks, Breathers and Air Dryers 81
4.5.3 Valves 81
4.5.4 Joints and Gaskets 82
4.5.5 Pressure Relief Device 82
4.5.6 Earthing Terminals 83
4.5.7 Rating, Diagram and Valve Plates 83
4.6 Cooling Plant 83
4.6.1 Cooling Plant General 83
4.6.2 Radiators Connected Directly to Tank 83
4.6.3 Cooler Banks 84
4.6.4 Forced Cooling 84
4.6.5 Oil Pipes and Flanges 84
4.6.6 Air Blowers 85
4.6.7 Cooler Control 85
4.7 Voltage Control 86
4.7.1 General 86
4.7.2 On-Load Tap Changers 86
4.7.3 Automatic Voltage Control 87
4.7.4 Voltage Regulating Relays 88
4.7.5 Remote Control Panels 88
4.7.6 Off-Load Tap Changers 89
4.8 Supervisory Control 89
4.8.1 Requirements 89
4.9 Terminal Bushings and Connections 90
4.9.1 General 90
4.9.2 Porcelain 91
4.9.3 Marking 91
4.9.4 Mounting of Bushings 91
4.10 Auxiliary Power and Control Cables 92
4.10.1 Scope of Supply 92
4.10.2 General 92
4.11 Temperature and Alarm Devices 92

Volume 2

4.11.1 Temperature-Indicating Devices and Alarms 92
4.11.2 Gas and Oil-Actuated Relays 93
4.12 Shipment and Drying Out 95
4.12.1 Shipment 95
4.12.2 Drying Out 95
4.12.3 Fire Protection System 95
4.12.4 Fire Wall 100
4.13 Transformer Oil and Treatment 100
4.13.1 Transformer Oil 100
4.13.2 Oil Treatment Plant 101
4.13.3 Oil Storage 101
4.14 Earthing/Auxiliary Transformers 101
4.14.1 General 101
4.14.2 Electrical and Short Circuit Characteristics 102
4.14.3 Tanks and Fittings 102
4.14.4 Secondary Windings 102
4.14.5 Terminal Connections 103
4.15 Inspection and Testing 103
4.15.1 Factory Acceptance Tests 103
4.15.2 Site Tests 104
5. Protection, Metering and Control 105
5.1 General 105
5.2 Fault Clearance Times 106
5.3 Protection System 106
5.5 Cubicles, Panels and Wiring 109
5.5.1 Panel Construction Features 109
5.5.2 Panel Mounting 110
5.5.3 Terminal Blocks 110
5.5.4 Labels 112
5.5.5 Miscellaneous Accessories 112
5.5.6 Earthing 112
5.5.7 Testing Facilities 113
5.6 Relays and Scheme 113
5.6.1 General 113
5.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 114
5.6.3 Scheme 115
5.7 Overhead Line Protection 117
5.7.1 400 kV Transmission Line Protection 117
5.7.2 Distance and Directional Earthfault Protection 117
5.7.3 Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection 121
5.8 Busbar Protection 122
5.8.1 Busbar Protection 122
5.8.2 Conditions of Acceptance of Busbar Protection Systems Submitted
on the Basis of Calculated Performance 123
5.9 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 124
5.10 Auto-Reclosing Scheme 125
5.12 Transformer Protection 127
5.12.1 Biased Differential Protection 127

Volume 2

5.12.2 Restricted or Balanced Earth Fault Protection 128
5.12.3 Transformer Back-up Overcurrent Protection 129
5.12.4 Gas Pressure (Buchholz) Protection 129
5.12.5 Oil and/or Winding Temperature 129
5.12.6 Low Oil Level and Pressure Relief Devices 129
5.12.7 Tap Changer Oil Surge 129
5.12.8 Standby Earth Fault Protection 130
5.12.9 Tripping Relays 130
5.13 DC Auxiliary Voltage Operating Range 130
5.14 Teleprotection Signalling 130
5.15 Protection Settings 131
5.16 Testing and Inspection 131
5.16.1 General 131
5.17 Factory Tests 131
5.17.1 Type Tests 131
5.17.2 Routine Tests 132
5.18 Site Tests 132
5.19 Digital Fault and Disturbance Recorder (DFDR) 133
5.20 Tripping Relays 135
5.21 Substation Automation (SA) System 135
5.21.1 Scope of Supply 135
5.21.2 Compliance with Standards 137
5.21.3 Design and Operating Requirements 138
5.21.4 General System Design 140
5.21.5 Flexibility and Scalability 142
5.21.6 System Hardware 142
5.21.7 Material Inspection and Testing 169
5.21.8 Routine Tests 170
5.21.9 Type Test 170
5.21.10 Factory Acceptance Tests 170
5.21.11 Inspection 170
5.21.12 Commissioning and Site Performance Tests 172
5.21.13 Packing Shipping and Transport 173
5.21.14 Documents Shipped with the Equipment 173
5.21.15 Spare Parts and Tools 173
5.21.16 Training 174
5.21.17 Documentation 174
5.21.18 Software Structure 176
5.21.19 System Functions 177
5.21.20 Availability Calculations 183
5.22 Busbar Voltage Selection 183
5.23 Synchronising 184
5.23.1 Synchronising Scheme 184
5.24 Diagrams 184
5.25 Current Transformer Calculations 184
5.26 Energy Meter (Tariff Metering) 185
5.26.1 Meter Requirements 185
5.26.2 Additional Requirements 185
5.26.3 Normal Display List 185

Volume 2

5.26.4 Alternate Mode Display List 186
5.26.5 Interval Date (Load Profile) 186
5.26.6 Interval Date (Instrumentation) 187
6. Auxiliary Power and Control Cables 188
6.1 Scope 188
6.2 General Description of Installation 188
6.3 Standards 188
6.4 Cable Installation 189
6.4.1 General 189
6.4.2 Installation Criteria 189
6.4.3 Reduced Fire Propagation 190
6.4.4 Type Approval 190
6.4.5 Cable Sizing and Routing 190
6.5 Cable Construction 192
6.5.1 Oversheaths 192
6.5.2 Armouring 192
6.5.3 Laying Up 192
6.5.4 Cable Drums 192
6.5.5 Sealing and Drumming 193
6.5.6 Spare Cable 193
6.5.7 Jointing Accessories 193
6.6 Types of Cable 194
6.6.1 Low Voltage Cables 194
6.6.2 Control Cables and Instrumentation Cables 194
6.7 Straight-through Joints 196
6.8 General Methods of Cable Installation 196
6.9 Cables laid directly in the Ground 197
6.10 Cables drawn into Ducts 197
6.11 Cables installed in Concrete Trenches 198
6.12 Cables Supported on Racks, Trays, etc. 198
6.12.1 General 198
6.12.2 Supporting Steelwork 199
6.12.3 Cable Clamps, Cleats, Saddles and Ties 199
6.12.4 Trays and Racks 199
6.13 Cables Installed on Structural Steelwork and Brickwork or Concrete 200
6.14 Terminations 200
6.14.1 General 200
6.14.2 Power Cables 200
6.15 Terminating and Jointing Conductors 201
6.16 Core Identification 201
6.17 Cable Identification and Schedules 202
7. Earthing System and Lightning Protection 204
7.1 Scope 204
7.2 References 204
7.2.1 American Standards 204
7.2.2 German Standards 204

Volume 2

7.3 General 204
7.4 Extent of Work 205
7.5 Soil Survey 205
7.6 Fault Current and Duration 206
7.7 Earth Electrode System Design 206
7.7.1 Design Calculations 206
7.7.2 Earth Electrode 206
7.7.3 Mesh System 207
7.7.4 Earthing Rods 207
7.7.5 Other Conductors 207
7.7.6 Reinforcing Steel 208
7.7.7 Conductors Outside Perimeter Fence 208
7.8 Design of Earthing System 208
7.8.1 Earthing System 208
7.8.2 Connection of System Neutrals and Earth 209
7.8.3 Main Earthing Bar 209
7.8.4 Electrical Equipment and Structure Connections to Earth 209
7.8.5 Connections to Non-Electrical Structural Metalwork and Equipment 210
7.9 Materials and Installation 210
7.9.1 Earthing Conductors 210
7.9.2 Earthing Rods 211
7.9.3 Fittings 212
7.9.4 Joints 212
7.10 Lightning Protection 213
7.11 Earthing of Fences 213
7.11.1 Method 213
7.11.2 Separately Earthed Fences 213
7.11.3 Bonded Fences 214
7.11.4 Bonding of Fence Components 214
7.11.5 Gates 214
7.11.6 Potential Control Outside Fences 214
7.11.7 Conductors 215
7.12 Portable Earthing Devices 215
8. Batteries, Chargers and DC Switchgear 216
8.1 Scope 216
8.2 References 216
8.3 Design Requirements 216
8.3.1 General 216
8.4 Batteries 217
8.4.1 Type of Battery 217
8.4.2 Initial Charge and Test Discharge 217
8.4.3 Battery Duty 218
8.4.4 Location of Batteries 218
8.4.5 Battery Mounting Connections and Accessories 219
8.5 Control and Charging Equipment 219

Volume 2

8.6 Distribution Switchboards 223
8.7 Labelling 224
8.8 Special Tools 224
9. LV AC Distribution Switchgear 225
9.1 Scope 225
9.2 References 225
9.3 Switchboard Design 225
9.3.1 General 225
9.3.2 Rating 226
9.3.3 Busbars 226
9.3.4 Busbar and Circuit Shutters 226
9.3.5 Circuit Labels 226
9.4 Circuit Breakers 227
9.5 Switch Fuses 227
9.6 Oil Filtration Socket Outlet and Plug 227
10. National Load Dispatch Centre (NLDC) 229
10.1 Scope 229
10.2 Requirements 231
10.2.1 Indications 231
10.2.2 Load Flows, System Voltage and Frequency 232
10.2.3 Alarms 232
10.2.4 Controls 233
10.2.5 Network Parameters 233
10.2.6 Interfaces 233
11. Supporting Structures for Outdoor Equipment 234
11.1 Scope 234
11.2 Structure Arrangement 234
11.3 Design 234
11.3.1 General 234
11.3.2 Assumed Loading Combinations 235
11.3.3 Line Termination Structures 237
11.3.4 Partial Load Factors 237
11.3.5 Wind Loading 238
11.3.6 Equipment and Conductor Terminations 238
11.3.7 Safety and Access Requirements 239
11.3.8 Structural Design 239
11.3.9 Design Submissions 240
11.4 Materials 240
11.5 Workmanship 241
11.6 Protective Treatment 241
11.7 Quality Control 242
11.7.1 General 242
11.7.2 Welding 242
11.7.3 Check Erection 242

Volume 2

11.7.4 Galvanising 242
11.7.5 Tolerances 243
11.7.6 Erection 243
12. Buildings and Civil Engineering Works 244
12.1 General 244
12.1.1 Scope of Work 244
12.1.2 Contractor to Satisfy himself as to all Conditions 244
12.1.3 Way Leaves, Land Purchase and Planning Permission 245
12.1.4 Site Survey Drawings 245
12.1.5 Earth Works 245
12.1.6 Engineer's and Employer's Accommodation/Surveying Equipment 246
12.1.7 Programme 246
12.1.8 Monthly Progress Certificates/Progress Reports 247
12.1.9 Temporary Facilities 247
12.1.10 Site Supervision 247
12.1.11 Designs and Drawings 247
12.2 References 248
12.2.1 General 248
12.2.2 Design and Construction Standards 248
12.3 Design 249
12.3.1 Architectural and Structural Requirements of Buildings 249
12.3.2 Ground Conditions, Foundations and Site Investigation 251
12.3.3 Drainage 255
12.3.4 Surfacing 256
12.3.5 Roads 256
12.3.6 Water Supply 257
12.3.7 Plumbing and Sanitary Fittings 258
12.3.8 Control Building Floors 258
12.3.9 Cable Basement 259
12.3.10 Battery Room Floors 259
12.3.11 Control Room Floors 259
12.3.12 Site Clearance, Obstructions and Adjacent Structures 260
12.3.13 Guard Houses, Boundary Walls, Fences and Entrance Gates 261
12.3.14 Windows 261
12.3.15 Doors 262
12.3.16 Brickwork 262
12.3.17 Expansion Joints, Joint Fillers and Sealants 263
12.3.18 Cable Trenches in Switchyards 263
12.3.19 Cable Trenches in Buildings 264
12.3.20 Rainwater Pipes 264
12.3.21 Switchyard Foundations 264
12.3.22 Transformer Bases 265
12.3.23 Blast Walls 266
12.3.24 Paints and Painting 266
12.3.25 Furniture 266
12.3.26 Concrete 267
12.3.27 Concrete Reinforcement 268
12.3.28 External Render 268

Volume 2

12.3.29 Goalposts 268
12.3.30 Lifting Beams 269
12.3.31 Stairs 269
12.4 Concrete Workmanship 269
12.4.1 General 269
12.4.2 Aggregates 269
12.4.3 Sampling 270
12.4.4 Grading 270
12.4.5 Cement 270
12.4.6 Water 270
12.4.7 Reinforcing 271
12.4.8 Storage 271
12.4.9 Design Mix 271
12.4.10 Mixing and Placing of Concrete 272
12.4.11 Testing of Concrete 273
12.4.12 Formwork 274
12.4.13 Reinforcing Steel 274
12.4.14 Consolidation of Concrete 275
12.4.15 Curing of Concrete 275
12.4.16 Hot Weather Concreting 275
12.5 Workmanship of all Other Materials 275
12.6 Fire Extinguisher 276
12.6.1 Control Room / Communication Room / Battery Rooms 276
12.6.2 Cable Room / Outdoor Switchyard 276
13. Lighting, Small Power, Heating and Ventilation 277
13.1 Scope 277
13.2 References 277
13.3 Defects Liability Period 278
13.4 Approvals 278
13.5 Lighting Requirements 278
13.6 Schedule of Design Requirements 279
13.7 Coding Systems 279
13.8 Distribution Boards 280
13.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers 281
13.10 Cables 281
13.11 Cable Terminations 282
13.12 Sealing and Drumming 282
13.13 Conduit 282
13.14 Cable Trunking 286
13.15 Cable Trays 286
13.16 Cable Jointing 286
13.17 Contactors 286
13.18 Switches and Pushbuttons 287
13.19 Lighting Fittings 287
13.20 Lamps 288
13.21 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets 289
13.22 Time Switches 289
13.23 Poles 289

Volume 2

13.24 Interior Installations 290
13.25 Exterior Installation 291
13.26 Emergency Lighting 291
13.27 Telephone System 292
13.28 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Socket Outlets 292
13.29 Schedule of Lighting Requirements 293
13.29.1 Control Building 293
13.29.2 Outdoor Areas 294
13.30 Air Conditioning and Ventilation 294
13.30.1 Scope of Work 294
13.30.2 Heating 294
13.30.3 Air Conditioning 294
13.30.4 Mechanical Ventilation 295
13.30.5 Basis for Design 295
13.30.6 Air Cooled Condensing Units 296
13.30.7 Refrigeration Systems 297
13.30.8 Console Air Conditioning Units 298
13.30.9 Ductwork 298
13.30.10 Condensate Drains 299
13.30.11 Extract Ventilation Units 299
13.30.12 Air Filters 299
13.30.13 Grilles and Louvres 300
13.30.14 Control Equipment 300
13.30.15 Electrical Connections 300
13.30.16 Manufacturers 301
13.30.17 Standards 301
13.30.18 Approval 301
13.30.19 Maintenance 301
13.31 Earthing and Bonding 301
13.32 Testing and Commissioning 302
14. Fibre-Optic Multiplexer Equipment for Communication and
Protection 303
14.1 Scope of Specification 303
14.2 Summary of Standards 304
14.2.1 PDH Interfaces 304
14.2.2 Architecture of Optical SDH Interfaces 304
14.2.3 Synchronisation and Timing of Optical SDH Interfaces 305
14.3 Abbreviations 306
14.4 General Requirements 306
14.4.1 Equipment Requirements 308
14.4.2 Special Equipment and Tools 318
14.4.3 Installation Requirements 318
14.4.4 Performance Guarantees 319
14.4.5 Inspection and Tests 319
14.4.6 Documentation 322
14.4.7 Spare Parts 324
14.5 Tributary Units 325
14.5.1 4-Wire Interface (VF Interface) 325

Volume 2

14.5.2 Analogue Subscriber Interface 326
14.5.3 Exchange Interface 326
14.5.4 Party Line Telephone System (Engineering Order Wire) 327
14.5.5 V. 24N.28 RS232 Interface 327
14.5.6 V.11/X.24 Interface 327
14.5.7 V.35 Interface 327
14.5.8 V.36 / RS 449 Interface 328
14.5.9 64 kbit/s Co-directional Interface 328
14.5.10 LAN Interface 328
14.5.11 Alarm Interface 328
14.5.12 Teleprotection Interface 329
14.5.13 Optical Protection Relays Interface 329
14.5.14 Binary Contact Interface 329
14.5.15 2NIbit/s G.703 / G.704 Interface 330
14.6 Telephone System 330
14.7 Communications DC Power Supply Equipment 331
14.7.1 General 331
14.7.2 Configuration 331
14.7.3 Charger 331
14.7.4 Battery 333
14.7.5 D.C. Distribution and Instrumentation 335
14.7.6 Housing 335
14.8 Schedule of Requirements 336
15. Quality Assurance, Inspection, Testing, Commissioning and
Warranty 338
15.1 Scope of Section 338
15.2 Subcontracts 339
15.3 Guarantees 340
15.4 Quality Audit 340
15.5 Measuring and Testing Equipment 341
15.6 Inspection Plan and Procedure 341
15.7 Test Certificates 341
15.8 Material Tests 342
15.9 General Requirements for Tests at Manufacturers' Works 342
15.9.1 Testing of Plant 342
15.9.2 Rejection of Plant 343
15.10 Specific Requirements for Tests at Manufacturers' Factories 343
15.10.1 Pressure Vessels 343
15.10.2 Substation Automation System, Control, Relay Protection and
Metering 343
15.10.3 Relays 346
15.10.4 Electrical Instruments and Meters 346
15.10.5 AC Switchboards 346
15.10.6 Contactors 346
15.10.7 PVC Cable 346
15.10.8 Switchgear (Other than GIS) 347
15.10.9 Disconnectors and Earth Switches 347
15.10.10 Current and Voltage Transformers 347

Volume 2

15.10.11 Structures of Electrical Equipment 347
15.10.12 Surge Arresters 347
15.10.13 Batteries and Battery Chargers 347
15.10.14 Control Panels 348
15.10.15 Busbars 348
15.10.16 Instruments 348
15.10.17 Neutral Earthing Resistor 348
15.10.18 Power Transformers 348
15.10.19 Outdoor Bushing Assemblies with Porcelain Insulators 350
15.10.20 Tanks 350
15.10.21 Cooling Plant 351
15.10.22 Gas and Oil-Actuated Relays 351
15.10.23 Galvanizing 351
15.10.24 Earthing Transformers 351
15.10.25 Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment 351
15.10.26 Deleted 351
15.10.27 Telephone Equipment 351
15.10.28 Teleprotection Equipment 352
15.10.29 Transducers 352
15.11 Dismantling Prior to Shipment 352
15.12 Inspection and Testing during Site Erection 352
15.12.1 General 352
15.12.2 Mechanical Equipment 353
15.12.3 Electrical Equipment 354
15.13 Staffing 360
15.14 Taking Over 360
15.15 Defects after Taking Over 360
15.16 Final Acceptance Certificate 361
16. Power Cables and Cable Terminating Accessories 362
16.1 Scope 362
16.2 Standards 362
16.3 Conditions of Operation 362
16.4 Type Approval 363
16.5 Cable Lengths 363
16.6 Cable Drums 364
16.7 Spare Cable 364
16.8 Special Tools 364
16.9 Cable Jointing Instructions and Drawings 364
16.10 Cable Specification 365
16.10.1 General 365
16.10.2 Conductors 365
16.10.3 Conductor Screen 365
16.10.4 Insulation 365
16.10.5 Insulation Screen 365
16.10.6 Metallic Screen 365
16.10.7 Intermediate Layer 366
16.10.8 Corrugated Seamless Aluminium Sheath 366
16.10.9 MDPE Outer Sheath 366

Volume 2

16.10.10 Identification of Cable 366
16.11 Sealing and Drumming 366
16.12 Terminating Accessories 367
16.13 Installation of Cable 367
16.13.1 Cable Tunnels and Trenches with Pits, Ducts and Drains 367
16.13.2 Supports and Racks 368
16.13.3 Bonding 368
16.14 Tests 369
16.14.1 Type Tests 369
16.14.2 Routine/Sample Tests 369
16.14.3 Tests at Site 369
16.15 Earthing System 369
17. Power Line Carrier, Teleprotection And Communication
Equipment 370
17.1 Power Line Carrier 370
17.1.1 General 370
17.1.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation 370
17.1.3 Line Coupling 370
17.1.4 Capacitor Voltage Transformers 372
17.1.5 HF Coupling Units 372
17.1.6 High Frequency Cable 373
17.1.7 Power Line Carrier High Frequency Unit 373
17.2 Teleprotection Equipment 376
17.2.1 Technical Requirements 376
17.2.2 Signalling Conditions 377
17.2.3 Signal Transmission Times 378
17.2.4 Interface 378
17.2.5 Service Conditions 379
17.2.6 Voltage Withstand Requirements 379
17.2.7 Test and Alarm Facilities 379
17.2.8 Housing 379
17.3 Operational Telephone System 380
17.4 Communications DC Power Supply Equipment 380
17.4.1 General 380
17.4.2 Configuration 380
17.4.3 Charger 381
17.4.4 Battery 383
17.4.5 D.C. Distribution and Instrumentation 384
17.4.6 Housing 385
18. Drawings 386

Volume 2 Page 1


Volume 2 Page 2
2. Ancillary Mechanical and Electrical Appa-

ratus
2.1 Scope
This section of the technical specifications describes the general requirements for mechanical and
electrical designs of all the plant being supplied under the contract, electrical aspects being covered in
another Section of the Specification. It shall be read in conjunction with the General Conditions, Draw-
ings, the Schedules and other sections of these technical specifications covering particular aspects of
the plant. In the event of conflict between the general and special contract requirements, the latter
shall take precedence.
2.2 References
2.2.1 ISO Standards
ISO 68 General Purpose Screw Threads

ISO 261 General Purpose Metric Screw Threads
ISO 262 Selected sizes for screws, bolts & nuts
ISO 272 Fasteners-hexagon products-widths across flats
ISO 274 Copper tubes of circular section.
ISO 448 Gas cylinders for industrial use-marking.
ISO 885 General purpose bolts and screws-metric series
ISO 888 Bolts, screws and studs-nominal lengths, and thread lengths
ISO 965 / 1, 2, 3 General purpose Metric screw threads
ISO 4759-1 Tolerances for fasteners
ISO 9000 Quality management and quality assurance standards
ISO 9001 Quality management systems-Requirements
2.2.2 IEC Standards
60034 Rotating Electrical Machines

60038 IEC Standard Voltage
60044-1 Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers
60044-2 Instrument transformers - Part 2: Inductive voltage transformers
60044-5 Instrument transformers - Part 5: Capacitor voltage transformers
60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their ac-
cessories
60055 Paper insulated metal sheathed cables up to 15 / 30 kV
60059 IEC Standard Current ratings
60072 Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
60073 Coding of indicating devices and actuators by colours
60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V

Volume 2 Page 3
60168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material

60228 Conductors of insulated cables
60228 A first supplement. Guide to dimensional limits of circular conductors
62155 Tests on hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment
60269 Low voltage fuses
60273 Characteristics of indoor & outdoor post insulators above 1000 V
60282 High voltage fuses
60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers & switchgear
60305 Characteristics of string insulator units of the cap & pin type
60332 Tests on electrical cables under fire conditions
60364 Electrical installations of buildings
60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride
60383 Insulators for overhead lines above 1000 V
60417 Graphical symbols for use on equipment
60423 Conduits for electrical purposes
60433 Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type
60437 Radio interference test on high voltage insulators
60439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
60455 Solventless polymersable resinous compounds used for electrical insulation
60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables from 1-30 kV
62052 Electricity metering equipment
60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Codes)
60587 Test methods for evaluating resistance to tracking
60614 Conduits for electrical installations-Specification
60621 Electrical installations for outdoor sites under heavy conditions
60644 Specification for high-voltage fuse links for motor circuit applications
60660 Tests on indoor post insulators of organic mats. between 1-300 kV
60672 Specification for ceramic & glass insulating mats.
60898 Circuit Breakers for overcurrent protection for households etc.
60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules
60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 2: Circuit breakers
60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5-1: Control circuit devices and
witching elements
60981 Extra heavy duty steel conduits for electrical installations
61035 Specification for conduit fittings for electrical installations
61084 Cable trunking & ducting systems for electrical installations
62271-1 High-voltage switchgear & controlgear - Part 1: Common specifications
62271-100 High-voltage switchgear & controlgear - Part 100: High-voltage alternating-
current circuit breakers
62271-102 High-voltage switchgear & controlgear - Part 102: Alternating current discon-
nectors and earthing switches
62271-105 High-voltage switchgear & controlgear - Part 105: Alternating current switch-
fuse combinations
62271-200 AC metal-enclosed switchgear & control gear for 1 kV and above
62271-203 Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 52 kV and
above
62271-209 Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated volt-
ages of 52 kV and above

Volume 2 Page 4
2.2.3 British Standards
BS EN 10250-2 Specification for Carbon steel forgings

BS 182 Specification for galvanised line wire for telephone & telegraphic purposes
BS EN 10244-2 Specification for testing zinc coatings on steel wire
BS 499 Welding terms & Symbols
BS 709 Method & testing fusion welded joints
BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings on iron & steel articles
BS 970 Specification for wrought steels for mechanical & allied Engineering
BS EN 12540 Specification for electroplate coatings of nickel and chromium
BS1710 Specification for identification of pipelines & services
BS EN 837-1 Specification for Bordon tube pressure and vacuum gauges
BS 1858 Specification for bitumen based filling compounds
BS EN 60068-218 Environmental Testing
BS 2569 Pt 2 Protection of iron & steel against corrosion at elevated temperature
BS EN 1435 Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel
BS 2765 Specification for dimensions of temperature detecting elements
BS 2910 Radiographic examination of fusion welded circumferential butt joints
BS 3858 Specification for sleeves for electric cables & wires
BS 3923 Pt 1 Methods of examination of fused welds and butt joints & Pt 2
BS 4211 Specification for ladders for permanent access to chimneys, other high struc-
tures, silos and bins
BS4395-1-2 Specification for High Strength Grip Bolts
BS 4479 Recommendations for coatings. Pts 1-9
BS EN 1412 Industrial type flooring, walkways and stair treads
BS 4604 Pt 1-2 Spec for high strength friction bolts
BS EN 10250-3 Spec for alloy steel forgings.
BS 4800 Schedule of Paint Colours for building
BS 4675 Pt 2 Mechanical vibration of rotating and reciprocating machinery
BS 4872 Pt 1 Fusion welding of steel
BS 5395-3 Code of Practice for the design of industrial type stairs, permanent ladders etc.
BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron & steel structures against corro-
sion
BS EN ISO 9934 Method for penetrant flaw detection
BS EN 50262 Specification for metallic cable glands
BS 6121-2 Specification for polymeric cable glands
BS 6121-3 Specification for special corrosion resistant cable glands
BS 6180 Code of Practice for barriers in and about buildings
BS 6231 Specification for PVC insulated cables for switch & control wiring
BS EN 571-1 Method of penetrant flaw detection.
BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints
2.2.4 BS European Standards
BS EN 287 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding-1 &-2

BS EN 288 1-8 Specification & Approval of welding procedures

Volume 2 Page 5
2.3 Definition of Terms
The definition of terms shall be as set out in the General Conditions of Contract.
2.4 Statutory Regulations
The Works and all equipment and materials forming part of this Contract shall comply in all respects
with any relevant statutory regulations, by-laws or orders currently in force in Bangladesh.
2.5 Design Standards and Codes
2.5.1 General Compliance with International Standards and Codes
The Contract Works shall comply with the relevant standards as specified. Provided there is no conflict
with the standards, and unless otherwise stated, all parts of the Works shall comply with the relevant
international standards and design codes. Where suitable international standards do not exist, interna-
tionally accepted national standards or other approved standards shall apply.
2.5.2 Standards Named in Specification
Although the Works shall generally comply with international standards, any instruction in this specifi-
cation that a particular aspect of the Works shall comply with a named code or standard that shall take
precedence and that particular aspect of the works shall comply with the named code or standard.
2.5.3 Hierarchy of Standards
In the event of any conflict in standards, the hierarchy of standards shall be as follows, with the stand-
ards occurring first in the list taking precedence over any standards later in the list:
1. Statutory regulations of Bangladesh

2. Standards named in the specification
3. Other international standards
4. Other standards approved by the Engineer
Where equipment is specified to a particular standard, the Contractor may supply equipment of an
equivalent standard, if approved by the Engineer.
2.5.4 Substitution of Standards and Design Codes
The Contractor may offer works that comply with international standards, or internationally recognised
national codes or standards, which differ from those specified. However the Contractor may offer
works, which comply with the different standards or codes, only if, when requested by the Engineer,
he is able to demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction that the Works offered are equal or superior to

Volume 2 Page 6
that which would have resulted had the specified code or standard been used. This substitution of
codes or standards for those specified will only be acceptable if the manufacturing organisation in
question has extensive experience with the alternative code or standard offered.
Any Contractor offering contract works or part of those works to standards and codes that differ from
those specified shall declare the fact to the Engineer. If requested to do so by the Engineer, the Con-
tractor shall supply to the Engineer, at his own cost, with two copies in English of the relevant code or
standard which he proposes to substitute for that specified.
2.6 Erection Marks
All members comprising multipart assemblies, e.g., towers, steel frameworks, piping installations, etc.,
shall be marked with distinguishing numbers and/or letters corresponding to those on the approved
drawings or material lists. These erection marks, if impressed, must be completed before painting or
galvanising, shall be clearly readable afterwards.
Colour banding to an approved code shall be employed to identify members of similar shape or type
but of differing strengths or grades.
2.7 Cleaning and Painting
2.7.1 General
Following award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the name of the proposed paint supplier
and applicator, together with a quality assurance programme, for approval. All paints for the outdoor
equipment on the Contract shall be provided by one Manufacturer and preferably shall be manufac-
tured in one country to ensure compatibility. All painting of outdoor equipment shall be carried out
strictly in accordance with the paint system Manufacturer's recommendations and the application shall
be checked and approved, in writing, by an authorised representative of the paint Manufacturer.
The painting of the plant shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate schedule later in this
section. The work is generally covered by the schedules but where particular items are not referred to
specifically, they shall be treated in a manner similar to other comparable items as agreed with the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that precautions are taken in packing and crating, to avoid damage to the
protective treatment during transportation to the site. Any damage to paintwork that occurs during
transport shall be made good at site.
The schedules indicate standards of surface preparation and painting which are intended to give a
minimum life of 10 years in a severe environment, with need for only minor remedial work in that peri-
od.
Steel sections and plate shall be free from surface flaws and laminations prior to blast cleaning and
shall not be in worse condition than ISO 8501-01.

Volume 2 Page 7
Where paint coatings are proposed for the protection of surfaces of equipment exposed to corrosive
conditions, such as plant items exposed to brine or sea water, or immersion in liquids or wet gases,
the coatings shall be formulated to be suitably corrosion resistant and shall be high voltage spark test-
ed at works and at Site prior to commissioning. The test procedure shall be based on the use of a high
voltage direct current. The voltage used shall be 75% of the breakdown voltage of the coating. This
breakdown voltage shall first be separately determined using test plates coated with the specified
coating formulation and thickness. The coating on the test plate shall also be micro-sectioned by the
applicator to show that it is free from vacuoles and other defects likely to invalidate the test procedure.
If the defects revealed by the above test procedure do not exceed one per 5 m of coating surface, the
coating need not be re-tested after the defects have been repaired. If the defects exceed one per 5 m
of coating surface, the repairs shall be re-tested after any curing is complete, and this procedure shall
be repeated until the defects are less than one per 5 m of coating surface. After repair of these de-
fects, the equipment can be placed in service without further testing.
All coatings proposed for the internal protection of domestic water storage tanks and desalination
plants shall be certified as suitable for use in potable water installations by an approved independent
authority and shall meet the non-tainting requirements of BS 3416.
The Engineer will consider alternative paint schemes to meet the requirements of fabrication using
modern automated materials handling systems, provided that the Contractor is able to demonstrate
that they offer the same standards of surface protection and service life as those intended by the
Schedules.
All paints shall be applied by brush or spray in accordance with the schedule, except for priming coats
for steel floors, galleries and stairways where dipping will be permitted.
Where paint is to be applied by spray, the applicator shall demonstrate that the spray technique em-
ployed does not produce paint films containing vacuoles.
All planished and bright parts shall be coated with grease, oil or other approved rust preventative be-
fore dispatch and during erection and this coating shall be cleaned off and the parts polished before
being handed over.
Where lapped or butted joints from part of an assembly that is assembled or part assembled prior to
final painting, the jointed surfaces shall be cleaned free from all scales, loose rust, dirt and grease and
given one brush-applied coat of zinc phosphate primer before assembly.
Paint shall not be applied to surfaces which are superficially or structurally damp and condensation
must be absent before the application of each coat. Painting shall not be carried out under adverse
weather conditions, such as low temperature (below 4C) or above 90 % relative humidity or during
rain or fog, or when the surfaces are less than 3C above dew point, except to the approval of the En-
gineer or his duly appointed representative.
Priming coats of paint shall not be applied until the surfaces have been inspected and preparatory
work has been approved by the Engineer or his duly appointed representative. No consecutive coats
of paints, except in the case of white, shall be of the same shade. Thinners shall not be used except
with the written agreement of the Engineer.
On sheltered or unventilated horizontal surfaces on which dew may linger, more protection will be
needed and to achieve this, an additional top coat of paint shall be applied.

Volume 2 Page 8
The schedules differentiate between "Treatment at Factory" and "Treatment at Site after Completion of
Erection" but the locations at which different stages of the treatments are carried out may be modified,
always providing that each change is specifically agreed to by the Engineer and the painting is fin-
ished or made good at Site to the Engineer's satisfaction.
The schedules also refer to "Indoor" and "Outdoor" locations. In this context the interiors of all build-
ings without air conditioning, heating or forced ventilation shall be treated as "Outdoor".
All paint film thicknesses given are minima and refer to the dry film condition. All thicknesses shall be
determined by the correct use of approved commercial paint film thickness measuring meters.
All outdoor painting shall be checked prior to issue of the final certificate and no visible corrosion or
spotting shall be present. Slight loss of gloss may acceptable. In the event of visible corrosion being
present, the Employer will retain the right to withhold such an amount from the Contractor as may be
necessary to repaint the entire exterior part of the works.
The painting requirements shall be interpreted in accordance with the requirements and recommenda-
tions of the standards and codes of practice referred to and the paint Manufacturer's special instruc-
tions where applicable, colours being in accordance with BS 1710 and BS 4800, or equivalent material
standards.
2.7.2 Schedules for Indoor Surfaces Finishes
Treatment at Factory Treatment at Site after Completion of Erection
General
(a) Structural and supporting steelwork, plant items above ground, tank external surfaces.
All not above 95C (or 65C for chlorinated rubber finishes).
Blast clean to BS 7079 2nd quality (SA 2.5) profile Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt.
amplitude 40-75 m. Paint coats to be touched up where necessary.
Then apply within 4 hours one coat (13 m) weldable Then apply one tie coat to finish (30 m) and one coat
holding primer for 12 months x match protection. alkyd gloss (25 m)
After fabrication is complete dress all welds, thorough-
ly clean to remove corrosion products, oil, grease and
dirt and apply one coat (50 m) of two pack epoxy
zinc phosphate primer followed by two coats two pack
epoxy micaceous iron oxide (250 m total).
(b) Steel floors, chequer plates, galleries, stairways, treads, kick stops.
Galvanise to BS 729 Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Where
galvanising is damaged, wire brush to BS 7079 3rd quali-
ty (SA2) and apply 1 coat zinc rich epoxy primer (50 m).
Then apply:
1st coat of etch primer
2nd coat epoxy zinc chromate
3rd coat 2-pack epoxy micaceous iron oxide (50 m).
On galleries and stairwaystop surfaces apply:
4th coat non-skid epoxy deck paint (30 m).

Volume 2 Page 9
(c) Galvanised iron and steel requiring paint finish

Galvanise to BS 729 Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat of etch primer
2nd coat of zinc chromate primer (30 m)
3rd coat alkyd undercoat (30 m)
4th coat alkyd gloss (25 m).
(d) Stainless steel, aluminium alloys and non-ferrous alloys requiring paint finish.
Not Applicable Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat alkyd undercoat (30 m)
2nd coat alkyd gloss (25 m).
(e) Bitumen dipped items

Bitumen dipped. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat general purpose aluminium paint (18 m)
2nd coat alkyd undercoat (30 m)
3rd coat alkyd gloss (25 m).
Battery Rooms (open top batteries), Chlorination Plant Rooms, Electrolytic Cell Rooms
(a) Steelwork
Blast clean to 2nd quality BS 7079 (SA2.5) profile Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Priming
amplitude 40-75 m coat to be touched up where necessary. Then apply:
1st coat chlorinated rubber primer to Manufacturer's
instructions
2nd coat high build chlorinated rubber (80 m)
3rd coat high build chlorinated rubber (80 m).
Bright Parts
Coat with a mixture of oil, grease or approved proprie- Clean and polish
tary inhibitor.
Instrument Panels, Relay Panels, Control Panels, 400V A.C. Boards, 110V D.C. Boards, Telemetry Mar-
shalling Kiosks, Lighting and Small Power Distribution Boxes, Battery Charger Cubicles, Metal Clad
Switchgear
Acid pickle or blast clean to 1st quality BS 7079. Then Touch up if necessary and burnish
apply:
1st coat zinc chromate primer (30 m)
Stop and fill. Then apply:
2nd coat alkyd undercoat (30 m).
Rub down with fine abrasive paper. Then apply
Rub down with fine abrasive paper. Then apply:
4th coat alkyd matt (25 m)

Volume 2 Page 10

Total film thickness (125 m).
2.7.3 Schedules for Outdoor Surfaces Finishes
General
(a) Structural and supporting steelwork, plant items above ground, tank external surfaces.
All not above 95C (or 65C for chlorinated rubber finishes).
Blast-clean to BS 7079 2nd quality (SA2.5) profile Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt.
amplitude 40-75 m. Paint coats to be touched up where necessary.
Then apply within 4 hours one coat (13 m) weldable Then apply one tie coat to match finish (30 m) and one
holding primer for 6 months protection or (25 m) coat alkyd gloss (25 m)
weldable holding primer for 12 months protection.
After the protection period, thoroughly clean to re-
move oil, grease and dirt and apply one coat (50 m)
of two pack epoxy zinc phosphate primer followed by
two coats two pack epoxy micaceous iron oxide (250
m total).
(b) Steel floors, chequer plates, galleries, stairways, treads, kick stops
Galvanised to BS 729 Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt.
Where galvanising is damaged, wire brush to BS 7079
3rd quality (SA2) and apply one coat zinc rich epoxy pri-
mer (50 m). Then apply:
1st coat epoxy etch primer
2nd coat epoxy zinc chromate (30m)
3rd coat two pack epoxy micaceous iron oxide (100
m)
On galleries and stairways top surfaces apply:
4th coat non-skid epoxy deck paint (30 m).
(c) Galvanised iron and steel requiring paint finish

Galvanised to BS 729 Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat etch primer
2nd coat zinc chromate primer (30m)
4th coat alkyd gloss (25 m).
(d) Stainless steel, aluminium alloys and non-ferrous alloys requiring paint finish
Not applicable. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat alkyd undercoat (30 m)
2nd coat alkyd gloss (25 m).

Volume 2 Page 11
(e) Bitumen dipped items

Bitumen dipped. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease and dirt. Then
apply:
1st coat general purpose aluminium paint (18 m)
2nd coat alkyd undercoat (30 m)
3rd coat alkyd gloss (25 m)
Bright Parts
Coat with a mixture of oil, grease or approved proprie- Clean and polish
tary inhibitor.
Instrument Panels, Control Panels, Marshalling Kiosks, Lighting and Small Power Distribution Boxes and
Junction Boxes etc.
Blast clean, prime, undercoat and paint in accordance Clean and touch up as necessary
with the painting schedule for structural and support-
ing steelwork, with finish coat of paint applied at Man-
ufacturer's works
Water and Oil Storage Tanks-Internal Surfaces

The epoxy paint formulation shall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
The finished coating shall be capable of being tested
with a high voltages spark tester for absence of pin-
holes and porosity.
For oil storage tanks, solvent-free epoxy paint formu-
lation shall be used.
For tanks delivered to site in plate sections, the plates Welded Construction at Site.
shall be blast cleaned to BS 7079 1st quality (SA3) After erection all welds shall be dressed to remove rough
profile amplitude 40-75 m and then within 4 hours edges and burrs and all sharp edges shall be radiused 3
coat with a weldable holding primer dry film thickness mm
25 m Prior to painting, all surfaces shall be sweep blast
cleaned to a sound surface free from rust and debris.
Then apply within 4 hours:
1st coat Isocyanate or amine cured epoxy primer 25
m
2nd coat Isocyanate or amine cured high build epoxy
(125 m)
3rd coat Isocyanate or amine cured high build epoxy
(125 m).
Sectional Construction: Sectional Construction:
Prior to assembly, all component items to be blast Touch up damaged areas as necessary.
cleaned to BS 7079 1st quality (SA3) profile amplitude
40-75 m. Then apply:
1st coat Isocyanate or amine cured epoxy primer
(25 m).
After assembly, clean all surfaces free from rust,
grease and dirt. Priming coat to be touched up as
necessary. Then apply:

Volume 2 Page 12
2nd coat Isocyanate or amine cured high build

epoxy (125 m)
3rd coat Isocyanate or amine cured high build
epoxy (125 m).
Radiators
Radiators shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated ex-
ternally by phosphating or other approved rust inhibit-
ing process and given, preferably by flood painting,
the same number and type of coats specified in Gen-
eral Sub-Clause of this Clause.
Radiators that are hot dip galvanised to BS.729, Part

1, shall be artificially weathered and given one coat of
zinc chromate primer followed by the same number
and type of paint coatings specified in Clause.
Radiators shall be painted with Munsell colour No. 5Y

7/1.

Volume 2 Page 13
2.8 Rating Plates, Nameplates and Labels
2.8.1 General
The Contractor shall supply and install all labels, name, rating, instruction and warning plates neces-
sary for the identification and safe operation of the Works. Samples shall be submitted for the approval
of the Engineer.
Nameplates or labels shall be of non-hygroscopic, non-deteriorating and non-warping material with

engraved lettering of a contrasting colour or, in the case of indoor circuit breakers, starters, etc., white
plastic material with black lettering engraved thereon.
Items of plant such as valves, mounted outdoors or subject to harsh operating conditions, shall be
provided with engraved chromium plated brass or stainless steel nameplates or labels with engraving
filled with black enamel.
All the above labels and plates shall be securely fixed to items of plant and equipment with stainless
steel rivets, plated self-tapping screws or other approved means. The use of adhesives will not be
permitted.
Individual plant items and all relevant areas within the contract works where a danger to personnel ex-
ists shall be provided with plentiful, prominent and clear warning notices.
These warning notices shall draw attention to the danger or risk with words in the language specified
which attract attention and summarise the type of risk or danger. The notices shall also carry a large
symbol that graphically depicts the type of risk.
All equipment within panels and desks shall be individually identified.
Items of plant, such as valves, which are subject to handling, shall be provided with nameplates with
permanent inscriptions thereon.
2.8.2 Rating Plates
Each main and auxiliary item of plant shall have attached to it in a conspicuous position, a rating plate
upon which shall be engraved all appropriate technical data and any identifying name, type or serial
number, and the requirements of the Standard specific to the item of plant. In addition, the Engineer
may require including details of the loading conditions under which the item of plant in question has
been designed to operate, such as the short-time rating of switchgear.
2.8.3 Circuit Labels
Each main item of plant shall be provided with an identification plate. The inscriptions shall be ap-
proved by the Engineer.
In addition, the device number allocated by the Engineer to each item of plant shall be displayed in
text height 30 mm on all operating mechanisms and 60 mm or larger in height on principal items of
Plant, e.g. busbars, transformers etc. The same device number shall be displayed on control cubicles
in text height 10 mm or larger as may be required by the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 14
2.8.4 Pipe Service Identification
A colour-banding scheme shall be used to identify pipework included within this Contract. The colours
employed shall be in accordance with the painting specification herein. Colour bands shall be painted
on each side of all valves and items of equipment in the piping systems. The use of adhesive-backed
colour bands is not permitted.
Valve labels shall be circular and fitted under the hand-wheel captive nut. For check valves and small
valves, the Contractor may provide rectangular labels fitted to the valve or secured close by the valve.
The inscription or "name" on each valve label shall summarise the duty of the valve, and the number
shown on each valve label shall be the number in the unified plant valve-numbering scheme.
Where the direction of flow through a valve or other device is an important requirement for correct
functioning, the body of the valve or device shall be legibly marked with a cast on or a properly se-
cured arrow, showing the direction of flow. Pipework shall be provided with plentiful large painted ar-
rows or other secure and durable arrow markings to allow the flows of fluids around the plant to be
readily understood.
2.9 Environmental Protection & Tropicalisation
2.9.1 General
All equipment shall be designed to operate in the environmental conditions specified.
Outdoor equipment shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. The undersides of all
tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion.
Where applicable, equipment should tolerate the effects of freezing and air pollution.
Outdoor plant shall be rated and constructed so that its performance, operation, reliability, mainte-
nance and or life shall meet the specified design and operating conditions.
Where personnel have to be in attendance frequently, or maintenance has to be regularly carried out,
permanent means weather protection or sunshades shall be provided.
Where the performance, reliability or life of the plant would be adversely affected by solar radiation, in-
cluding the effects of prolonged exposure to ultra violet light, suitable sunshades shall be provided.
Such sunshades shall be constructed from materials that are able to withstand the effects of the ambi-
ent conditions on site without suffering any deterioration in material strength or effectiveness.
Sunshades need not be provided on outdoor plant or equipment provided the Manufacturer could sat-
isfy the Engineer that the materials employed will not be adversely affected or the temperature rise
due to internal heat generation plus that due to solar radiation will not exceed the equipment design
temperature. However equipment requiring manual operation shall be provided with sunshades to en-
sure that surface temperatures will not exceed 50C.

Volume 2 Page 15
Sunshades shall protect plant and personnel when the sun is more than 45C above the horizon. They
shall not impede the operation or maintenance of the plant or the movement of ventilating air and shall
include adequate artificial light as necessary.
Facilities such as lighting, lifting beams and rainwater drainage shall be provided wherever necessary
to the approval of the Engineer as an integral part of the sunshade structure.
2.9.2 Tropicalisation
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical conditions un-
der which equipment shall work, and good proven practices shall be followed unless otherwise ap-
proved by the Engineer. Some relaxation of the following provisions may be permitted where equip-
ment is hermetically sealed but it is preferred that tropical grade materials should be used wherever
possible:
Metals: Iron and steel are generally to be painted or galvanised as appropriate. Indoor
parts may alternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plating or other approved
protective finish. Small iron and steel parts (other than stainless steel) of all in-
struments and electrical equipment, the cores of electromagnets and the metal
parts of relays and mechanisms shall be treated in an approved manner to prevent
rusting.
Screws, nuts, The use of iron and steel shall be avoided in instruments and electrical relays
springs, etc. wherever possible. Steel screws shall be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated, or
when plating is not possible owing to tolerance limitations, shall be of corrosion-
resisting steel. Instrument screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit)
shall be of brass or bronze. Springs shall be of non-rusting material, e.g., phos-
phor bronze or nickel silver, as far as possible.
Rubbers: Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the
climatic conditions, shall be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.
2.10 Platforms, Stairways, Ladders and Hand-Railing
2.10.1 General
The Contractor shall provide all platforms, galleries, stairways and ladders necessary to give access to
the various sections of the plant being supplied under this contract. They shall provide adequate
means of access for all operation, inspection and overhaul purposes and shall be of sufficient strength
to support workers, tools and portions of plant that may be placed on them during overhaul and in-
spection periods.
Galleries, platforms and stairways shall be designed generally for a load of 7.5 kN/m but where loads
in excess of this are likely to be imposed during operation or maintenance, the Contractor shall make
due allowance for the increased loads in the design. Particular care shall be given to their rigidity. All
the necessary supports from the floors, buildings and foundations shall be supplied under this con-
tract.
Galleries and platforms around plant subject to significant expansion shall be designed to allow for
such expansion and to provide safe and adequate access for both hot and cold conditions.

Volume 2 Page 16
Platforms and galleries shall have a minimum width of 850 mm clear passageway and shall be en-
closed by hand railing on both sides. In cases where there is a space not exceeding 200 mm on one
side of a passageway hand-railing need be supplied for one side only but an edging strip shall be pro-
vided on the side without handrail. The minimum headroom on platforms and galleries shall be 2100
mm.
Ladders will only be permitted where stairways are impractical and access is required for mainte-
nance. All platforms, stairways, ladders and other access ways, shall comply with the requirements of
BS 5395 Part 3, unless otherwise stated. As far as practical the flooring, stair treads and handrails
shall conform to a uniform pattern throughout the whole of the Contract Works.
2.10.2 Flooring
The flooring of all platforms, galleries and staircase treads shall consist of an approved type of galva-
nised mild steel open grid flooring except in those cases where chequer plate is specified.
Toe plates extending to a height of not less than 100 mm above the platform or gallery level and of a
thickness of not less than 6 mm shall be supplied. Any opening which it is necessary to cut in the open
grid flooring or chequer plate shall be finished off with an edging strip similar to that on the floor pan-
els.
The open grid flooring and stair treads shall be from an approved Manufacturer and generally in ac-
cordance with BS 4592. The pattern of open grid flooring and chequer plate shall be uniform and laid
with the pattern in one direction.
Open grid floor panels shall be not less than 25 mm in depth and shall be fitted neatly between kerbs
and clamped with nuts and bolts in such a manner as to permit ready removal or replacement. The
design of the clamps shall be for approval and only minimal protrusion above the floor level will be
permitted.
Where chequer plate is supplied it shall be galvanised mild steel to an approved design. No chequer
plate shall be less than 10 mm thick and all plates shall be secured to the supporting steel by galva-
nised countersunk screws of not less than 10 mm nominal size.
2.10.3 Hand-Railing and Protective Barriers
Hand-railing and protective barriers shall be provided wherever necessary to protect operation or
maintenance personnel from hazards, and shall comply with BS 6180.
Double hand railing shall be provided unless otherwise specified. Each length shall be joined by inter-
nal ferrules and all joints shall be neatly finished by the removal of all burrs.
The top rail shall be not less than 30 mm diameter and mounted at a height of not less than 1100 mm
from the gallery or platform level. The intermediate rail shall be not less than 25 mm diameter and
mounted at a height of not less than 535 mm from the gallery or platform level. Handrails for stairways
shall have the top rail at a height of not less than 900 mm and lower rail at not less than 420 mm
above the stairway pitch line.

Volume 2 Page 17
Tubular or solid forged stanchions shall be provided, spaced at a maximum distance of 1750 mm, and
to which hand-railing shall be firmly attached.
The stanchions shall be firmly and directly attached to the body of the platform, gallery, stairway or
ladder steelwork by bolting, and when erected shall be vertical. They shall not be attached to toe-rails.
In designing hand-railing and its supporting stanchions particular attention shall be paid to the provi-
sions of BS 6180 relating to design loads and to permissible deflections and flexibility.
2.10.4 Stairways
Where specified, main stairways shall have a minimum stair tread width of 1100 mm; other stairways
shall have a minimum width of 750 mm. Wherever possible, the angle of slope of stairways shall be
standardised. Angles exceeding 42 to the horizontal shall not be used.
No flight of stairs shall have more than 16 risers. Where a stairway requires more than 16 risers, each
flight shall have an approximately equal number of risers and shall be separated by a landing. Risings
shall be between 190 mm and 210 mm, and goings shall be between 220 mm and 250 mm in width.
Minimum headroom shall be 2.3 m.
2.10.5 Fixed Access Ladders
Ladders shall comply with BS 4211. The minimum width of ladders shall be 500 mm and inclination
shall be not less than 70, and not more than 80 to the horizontal.
2.11 Nuts, Bolts, Studs and Washers
The threads and other details of fasteners shall comply with the relevant ISO Standards for metric se-
ries fasteners. Nuts and bolts for pressure parts shall be of the best quality steel. Nuts, bolts, studs
and washers shall be of materials most suitable for the service operating conditions and designed to
ensure the stresses arising in normal operation shall not exceed those necessary to ensure that the
specified plant life is achieved.
Nuts and bolts for incorporation in the plant are preferably to conform to ISO Metric Coarse to ISO
272. Other sizes or threads are permitted for threaded parts not to be disturbed in normal use or
maintenance. Where the Contract includes nuts and bolts of different standards, then the tools to be
provided in accordance with this Specification shall include spanners, taps, and dies for these nuts
and bolts.
Fitted bolts shall be a driving fit in the reamed holes they occupy, and they shall have the screwed por-
tion of a diameter such that it will not be damaged in driving and shall be marked in a conspicuous po-
sition to ensure correct assembly at site.
Stud holes in those parts of the plant that are subjected to heat in use shall be adequately vented.
The threaded portion of any bolt or stud shall not protrude more than 1.5 threads above the surface of
its mating nut.

Volume 2 Page 18
Where practicable the use of slotted head screws shall be avoided in machinery component assem-
blies, hexagon socketed screws being preferred.
On outdoor equipment all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non-rusting material where they are in
contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere where specifically re-
quired by the Engineer.
All washers shall be included under this contract, including locking devices and anti-vibration ar-
rangements, which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Taper washers shall be fitted
where necessary.
2.12 Forgings
The Contractor shall supply a list of all important forgings and draw up material specifications for each
one. Copies of this list and specifications shall be supplied to the Engineer for his use. In each case
the quality and inspection requirements shall be clearly stated.
Wherever possible steel forgings shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS Standards 29,
970 or 4670, the equivalent ISO Standards or agreed national standards.
Test blocks from which mechanical test pieces will be machined shall be cut from forgings at positions
to be agreed by the Engineer. On large and important forgings several test pieces shall be taken from
radial and longitudinal directions.
Forgings shall be free from cracks externally or internally, extensive non-metallic inclusions and sur-
face defects. The Contractor shall carry out non-destructive testing of forgings during machining to
verify that no unacceptable defects are present.
Repairs by welding or other means shall not be undertaken on forgings at any stage of the production
cycle.
Each forging shall be suitably branded with an identification number that shall be transferred through-
out all final machining stages. The identification number shall be marked on all documents and test
certificates relative to the forging.
2.13 Castings
2.13.1 General
Test pieces shall be provided from medium and large castings for all necessary material and chemical
tests that are to be witnessed by the Engineer. If required by the Engineer any castings for rotating or
highly stressed parts are to be subjected to non-destructive testing by approved methods, including
radiographic and ultrasonic, the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor.
All castings shall be homogeneous and free of shrinkage, pipes, under-sizing, porosity or voids. "Bum-
in" repairs shall not be acceptable and no welding, filling, interlocking or plugging of defective parts
shall be done without the Engineer's approval in writing. All repairs shall be subjected to non-destruct-

Volume 2 Page 19
ive examination (ultra-sonic, X-rays, gamma-rays) after heat treatment. Welding repairs to castings
that will be in contact with corrosive liquids, such as seawater or brine, will only be permitted under
special circumstances.
2.13.2 Steel Castings
The Contractor shall prepare material purchasing specifications for all important castings. Each docu-
ment shall indicate fully the quality and inspection requirements for the component casting covered.
Copies of the specifications shall be issued to the Engineer for his use.
Castings may be repaired by welding providing the approval of the Engineer be first obtained. The
Contractor shall submit drawings, sketches or photographs showing the location and principal dimen-
sions of the defect together with the proposed weld repair procedure. The maximum size of defect for
which weld repair will be permitted is:
Maximum length of defect 20 mm

Maximum width of defect 10 mm
Maximum depth of defect no greater than 10% of the wall thickness
Only welders who have passed an appropriate qualification test shall be employed on the repair of
castings. All repairs shall be carried out by the metal arc process. Ultrasonic inspection shall be ap-
plied to all important castings to locate the extent of sub-surface defects and to check the wall thick-
ness.
All castings shall be identified by stamped or cast-on reference marks, which shall be entered on all
relevant documents and test certificates. The Engineer may require that certain castings be examined
using radiographic techniques. The Contractor shall include for this eventuality and shall comply with
the Engineer's instructions when issued.
2.13.3 Iron Castings
Cast iron shall not be used for any part of equipment which is in tension or which is subjected to im-
pact, or to a working temperature exceeding 200C, unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Nor
shall it be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus.
Weldable grades of iron castings may be repaired by welding provided the approval of the Engineer is
first obtained. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed weld repair procedure and weld
procedure qualification test prior to making any weld repairs.
The maximum size of defect for which weld repair will be permitted is:

Maximum depth of defect no greater than 10% of the wall thickness.
Test blocks shall be integrally cast on all medium and large castings. The Engineer may require that
certain castings be checked using radiographic techniques. The Contractor shall include for this even-
tuality and shall comply with the Engineer's instructions when issued.

Volume 2 Page 20
2.13.4 Aluminium Bronze Castings
The Contractor shall prepare material purchasing specifications for all important castings. Each docu-
ment shall indicate fully the quality and inspection requirements for the component casting covered.
Copies of the specifications shall be issued to the Engineer for his use.
The inspection and quality requirements shall include an analysis of each cast, mechanical testing of
test pieces from each cast, pressure testing, penetrant flaw detection and radiographic examination of
selected critical areas.
Weldable grades of aluminium bronze may be repaired by welding, provided the written approval of
the Engineer is first obtained. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed weld repair pro-
cedure and weld procedure qualification test prior to making any weld repairs. The maximum size of
defect for which weld repair will be permitted is:

Maximum depth of defect no greater than 10% of the wall thickness
On completion of repairs, welded areas shall be ground smooth and carefully blended into the parent
material. The repaired areas shall be examined for defects using penetrant flaw detection and radiog-
raphy. Crack-like linear defects shall not be permitted.
2.14 General Welding Requirements
2.14.1 General
All welding shall conform to the relevant British Standards, or other British or National Standard Speci-
fication as agreed by the Engineer. Where there is a conflict between Codes and/or Standards the
Engineer's decision will prevail.
2.14.2 General Fabrication
The Engineer shall be notified at least two days prior to commencement of any assembly or fabrication
work on site. The CO2 and flux-cored welding process will not be acceptable for site welding.
2.14.3 Weld Procedure Documents
Complete and fully detailed weld procedure documents shall be kept by the Contractor and these shall
be made available to the Engineer on request. Prior to commencement of welding the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer for approval the welding procedures to be used in the fabrication of the rele-
vant sections of work.
The weld procedure documents shall be fully detailed and each shall indicate clearly which item it is
intended to cover. The procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 499 Part 1, Ap-
pendices A-G.

Volume 2 Page 21
2.14.4 Weld Procedure Qualification Tests
Weld procedure qualification tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
288, or agreed National Standard for the item of plant under consideration. Provided that the Contrac-
tor confirms that the basic parameters of the procedure have not been changed since approval, the
results of weld procedure qualification tests previously carried out under the supervision of an interna-
tionally recognised inspecting authority may be accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any proposed changes to the welding procedures before
such changes are implemented. If in the opinion of the Engineer a further qualification test is required
as a result of such changes, then the Contractor shall perform the required test without additional
charge.
The results of all tests shall be made available, for examination by the Engineer, if required.
2.14.5 Welder's Qualification Tests
All welders and welding operators shall be qualified for the work and shall hold current welders' qualifi-
cation certificates in accordance with BS EN 287, BS 4872 or agreed National Standard for the work.
All welders' tests shall be witnessed and/or approved by the Engineer before the welder or operator is
permitted to work. The decision of the Engineer regarding the acceptability of any test or existing
qualification tests, shall be final.
Records showing the date and results of the qualification tests performed by each welder and weld
operator, together with the identification number assigned to him, shall at all times be available for
scrutiny by the Engineer.
2.14.6 Storage of Welding Consumables
Welding consumables shall be stored in a manner that will protect them from all forms of deterioration
prior to use and shall be properly identified. Gas cylinders for use with burning or welding equipment
shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of BS 349 or IS0448. Site storage procedures for
gas cylinders will require the approval of the Engineer.
2.14.7 Welding Equipment
Any welding equipment that in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable or unsatisfactory for the pur-
pose for which it is being used shall be replaced by the Contractor.
2.14.8 Visual Weld Inspection
Each weld shall be subjected to a stringent visual inspection and shall be free from undercut, exces-
sive spatter, craters, cracks, porosity and other surface imperfections. Welds shall be of regular con-
tour, even weld ripple and indicative of good workmanship. Fillet welds shall be checked for dimen-
sional tolerance and form using a fillet weld gauge. Fillet welds should be slightly concave in form and
each leg of the weld shall have equal length.

Volume 2 Page 22
2.14.9 Internal Examination
The internal root bead of tube butt welds shall be examined by intra-scope or other suitable optical de-
vice.
2.14.10 Non-destructive Examination
All non-destructive examinations shall be supervised by a fully qualified and experienced specialist
appointed by the Contractor. Individual operators in each of the respective techniques shall be quali-
fied and trained in the respective subject and shall have reached a standard comparable with the Cer-
tification Scheme of Weldment Inspection Personnel in the United Kingdom.
Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 709 "Methods of Testing Fusion Welded
Joints and Weld Metal in Steel" or an agreed National Standard.
2.14.11 Ultrasonic Examination
Ultrasonic examination of welds shall be carried out in accordance with BS 3923 Part 1 and Part 2 and
any other relevant British Standards or agreed National Standards.
2.14.12 Magnetic Crack Detection
Magnetic crack detection shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6072 or an agreed National
Standard.
2.14.13 Dye Penetrant Tests
Dye penetrant tests shall be in accordance with BS 6443 or any other relevant British or agreed Na-
tional Standards.
2.14.14 Quality Requirements for Welds
All welds subjected to non-destructive tests shall be entirely free from cracks or crack like defects, lack
of root fusion, lack of sidewall fusion, root bum through, or tailed pores. The standard for porosity and
slag inclusions will be as indicated in the agreed standards for design and welding.
2.14.15 Weld Repairs
The Engineer's approval shall be obtained prior to commencement of any repair or rectification work.
Weld repairs shall be made to the same procedure as for the original weld. All tests shall be repeated
after the repair has been completed and reports on radiographic and ultrasonic tests shall be marked
to indicate that the report refers to a repaired weld.

Volume 2 Page 23
2.14.16 Mandatory Inspections
All transition welds between dissimilar materials, such as high alloy steels to carbon steel, or austenitic
steels or non-ferrous materials to steels, shall be subjected to 100% ultrasonic examination or crack
detection wherever practicable. In addition, all butt welds between dissimilar materials shall be sub-
jected to 100% radiographic examination.
All welds in ferritic alloy steels, e.g. having a carbon equivalent value in excess of 0.40%, and high
yield-strength steels, e.g. having yield strength greater than 300 MPa, shall be subjected to 100% ul-
trasonic examination and crack detection wherever possible. In addition, all butt welds in these mate-
rials shall be subjected to 100% radiographic examination.
A minimum of 10% of all butt welds on all classifications of work shall be radiographically examined,
unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
2.15 Galvanised Work
All materials to be galvanised shall be of the full dimensions shown or specified and all punching, cut-
ting, drilling, screw tapping and the removal of burrs shall be completed before the galvanising pro-
cess commences.
All galvanising shall be done by the hot dip process, not less than 98% of which must be pure zinc and
in accordance with BS 729 or BS 443 as applicable. No alternative process shall be used without the
approval of the Engineer. Bolts shall be completely galvanised including the threads, but the threads
of nuts shall be left uncoated and shall be oiled. The zinc coating shall be uniform, clean, smooth and
as free from spangle as possible.
Galvanised wire shall comply with the requirements of BS 182 and the thickness of the coating and
testing thereof shall comply with BS 443. Nuts and bolts and small components shall be tested in ac-
cordance with BS 729. The Engineer may select for test as many components to be weighed after
pickling and before and after galvanising as he may think fit.
Galvanised steel shall be treated after galvanising with Sodium Dichromate solution or Pretan W20 to
prevent formation of white Storagstan. In addition, plastic or other non-metallic non-hygroscopic spac-
ers shall be used between packed members to facilitate ventilation of the zinc surface during shipping.
All galvanised parts shall be protected from injury to the zinc coating due to abrasion during periods of
transit, storage and erection. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the extent of the damage found on Site
to a galvanised part appears to be capable of repair the Contractor may, after receiving such agree-
ment, attempt to affect a repair by approved methods. The agreement to attempt the repair shall not
bind the Engineer to accept the repaired part when this is re-offered for inspection.
Should an emergency arise on Site necessitating drilling, cutting or any other process likely to damage
the protective zinc surface, this will be permitted only in extreme circumstances and with the Engi-
neer's express authority. In such a case, the bared metal will be coated with an approved zinc rich
paint of not less than 92 percent zinc content.

Volume 2 Page 24
2.16 Chromium Plating
The chromium plating of those components of the Plant where specified and where offered by the
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of BS 1224.
2.17 Pumps
Pumps should be of the centrifugal type unless strong technical or economic reasons dictate that a
positive displacement pump, either rotary or reciprocating, is more appropriate.
Preventive and routine maintenance time should be minimised by the selection of appropriate designs
of pump, preferably those that leave casing to piping joints intact, i.e. horizontal split-casing types for
large centrifugal pumps and horizontal, back pull-out types for smaller units. Where a significant sav-
ing in floor space or improvement of layout can be shown, a vertical pump may be acceptable.
Pumps shall be capable of continuous operation with minimum maintenance.
2.18 Pipework
During the contract Engineering, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer schedules of the pipe-
work provided under this contract. These schedules shall state for each pipework system or part of a
pipework system the design and operating pressures and temperatures, the fluid transmitted, the pip-
ing and valve materials, the types of valves, any corrosion allowance, the pipework design code, insu-
lation proposals, pipe supports and any other data relevant to the mechanical design of the pipework
system or part of a pipework system.
All piping shall be routed to provide a neat and economical layout requiring the minimum number of fit-
tings. Piping shall be arranged so that full access is provided for the operation and maintenance of
equipment and so that removal or replacement of equipment can be achieved with the minimum dis-
mantling of piping.
The Contractor is to be responsible for ensuring that the internal surface of each pipe line is thorough-
ly clean both during erection and before the pipe line is placed in commission.
The procedure for internal cleaning of pipes adopted by the Contractor is to include the following:
Thorough cleaning of all internal surfaces prior to erection to remove accumulations of dirt, rust,
scale etc., and welding slag due to site welding before erection.
Thorough cleaning of all pipework after erection by blowing through to atmosphere to ensure that
no extraneous matter is left in the system.
The Contractor is to provide all necessary facilities for carrying out these requirements.
Pipework shall be supported and anchored in an appropriate manner in accordance with the provi-
sions of US Standard ANSI B31.1 or the Standard to which the pipework is designed. The whole of the

Volume 2 Page 25
pipework and accessories included in this Contract are to be supported and mounted in an approved
manner. All necessary slings, saddles, structural steelwork, foundation bolts, fixing bolts and all other
attachments are to be supplied. The number and positions of all supports and the maximum weight
carried by a support is to be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.19 Valves
All valves shall be suitable for the service conditions under which they are required to operate. The
design, construction and choice of materials shall take into account all operational deviations including
pressure surge and thermal shock.
All valve hand operating mechanisms shall be easily operable by one man. The mechanisms shall be
such that the total force at the rim of the hand-wheel or other point of application of manual action
shall not need to exceed 400 N (normally 200 N pull plus 200 N push) to exercise any valve. Special
attention shall be given to the operating mechanism for large size valves with a view to ensuring that a
minimum of maintenance is required and to obtaining quick and easy operation.
All valves shall be closed by rotating the hand-wheels in a clockwise direction when looking at the face
of the hand-wheel. In cases where the hand-wheel is not directly attached to the valve spindle suitable
gearing shall be introduced to ensure clockwise closing. The face of each hand-wheel shall be clearly
marked "open" and "shut" or "closed" with arrows indicating the direction of rotation to which they re-
fer.
Plastic valve hand-wheels will not be acceptable, except where such hand-wheels are in the Employ-
er's best interests. All valve spindles shall be fitted with indicators so that the valve opening can be
readily determined. In the case of valves fitted with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted both to
the extended spindles and to the valve spindles.
Valves of 50 mm nominal bore and over are to be provided with indicators showing when the valve is
open or closed.
All valve hand wheels are to be fitted with nameplates complying with this Specification.
Suitable means are to be provided to protect the operating mechanisms of all valves against mechani-
cal damage and dust or dirt.
Valves that it will be necessary to lock in the open or closed position are to be provided with a non-
detachable locking arrangement.
2.20 Pressure Vessels
All vessels shall be designed, constructed and otherwise comply with appropriate international or na-
tional pressure vessel design codes, unless the vessel in question falls into one of the following
groups:
vessels with a water containment capacity of less than 454 litres for the containment of water under
pressure, including those containing air, the compression of which serves only as a cushion.

Volume 2 Page 26
hot water storage vessels heated by steam or any other indirect means when none of the following
limitations is exceeded:
a heat input of 58kW
a water temperature of 93C
a nominal water containment capacity of 454 litres.
vessels having an internal or external design pressure not exceeding 1.03 bar gauge, this design
pressure being not less than the maximum expected difference that may exist between the inside
and outside of the vessel at any time.
vessels having an internal diameter not exceeding 150 mm.
vessels and equipment covered more appropriately by boiler or pipework design codes.
Should any difficulty arise in the decision as to whether a particular vessel shall comply with a pres-
sure vessel code, the vessel shall be "coded" unless specifically excluded in clause U- 1 of the US
ASME Boiler and Pressure Code, Section VIII, division 1, dealing with the scope of that code.
Notwithstanding the foregoing exclusions, if it is stated elsewhere in the Specification that a particular
vessel shall comply with a pressure vessel design code, then a vessel complying with a suitable de-
sign code shall be provided.
In respect of the design codes to which "coded" vessels shall comply, attention is drawn to the provi-
sions of this Specification relating to design codes and standards.
2.21 Lubrication
The Contract is to include for the supply of flushing oil for each lubrication system when the item of
plant is ready for preliminary tests and the first filling of approved lubricants for the commercial opera-
tion of the plant.
A schedule of the oils and other lubricants recommended for all components of the Contract Works is
to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The number of different types of lubricants is to be kept
to a minimum. Copies of this schedule shall be included in both the draft and final copies of the operat-
ing and maintenance instructions. In the case of grease lubricated roller type bearings for electric mo-
tors a lithium based grease is preferred.
The Contractor shall supply at least one grease gun equipment for each type of nipple provided.
Where more than one special grease is required, a grease gun for each special type shall be supplied
and permanently labelled.
2.22 Oil Level Indicators
Oil level indicators of approved design are to be fitted to all oil containers such as transformer tanks
etc. The indicators are to show the level at all temperatures likely to be experienced in service, are to
be marked with the normal level at 20C clearly visible from normal access levels and are to be easily
dismantled for cleaning. In addition, the normal filling level of all removable containers is to be marked
on the inside.

Volume 2 Page 27
2.23 Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges are to comply with the requirements of BS 1780.
All pressure gauges are to be fitted with stop cocks immediately adjacent to each gauge and all pres-
sure gauge piping is to be fitted with an isolating valve at each point of connection to the main system.
Where pressure gauges are mounted on panels, the stop cocks are to be suitable for the connection
of a test gauge.
Gauges shall be calibrated to read pressure at the tapping point and a sealed pressure transmitting
system shall be used. All pressure gauges are to be clearly identified by means of labels of approved
type and lettering. All pressure gauge piping is to be of corrosion resistant steel or copper tube.
2.24 Thermometer Pockets
Thermometer pockets and instrument connections of an approved pattern are to be fitted in such posi-
tions as may be determined to suit the operation and testing of the plant to the approval of the Engi-
neer. A thermometer pocket is to be fitted adjacent to each point of connection for distant remote tem-
perature indication unless specifically stated to the contrary. Where necessary, the pocket is to be of
approved alloy material suitable for the required service.
All thermometer pockets are to comply with the requirements of BS 2765.
2.25 Gauge Cubicles and Panels
Gauges and instruments are to be grouped whenever possible and housed in suitable cubicles. Where
circumstances do not justify cubicle accommodation, they may be secured to flat back panels but in
such cases the approval of the Engineer is first to be obtained.
Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a thickness of 3 mm. The construction shall employ folding
technique with the use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcement where necessary. The stiff-
ness shall be such as to prevent mal-operation of relays or other apparatus by impact. The front of the
panel is to have a smooth well finished surface and, if of the "desk" type, the desk is not to protrude so
far as to hinder the easy reading of instruments and the operation of the controls.
2.26 Locking Facilities
Locking facilities including padlocks shall be provided under this contract for:
Control position selector switches in all positions provided, except where other electrical or me-
chanical interlocking is approved.
Marshalling, operating and terminal kiosks or cubicle access doors and panels.
Isolating valves in open or closed positions.

Volume 2 Page 28
Locking facilities shall be of an approved dead latch type. Three keys shall be supplied for each lock
and all locks and keys shall be non-interchangeable. Where a set of locks is provided under a particu-
lar section of the Plant, a group master key shall be supplied in addition.
A schedule of locks and keys shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.All locks and padlocks
shall be of brass and where they are fitted to switchboards or similar cubicles shall have the visible
parts chromium plated.
Where a group of locks is supplied under any part of the Contract, a rack or cabinet of approved de-
sign shall be supplied for the accommodation of all padlocks and/or keys while not in use. The pad-
locks and keys shall be engraved with an agreed identifying code or inscription and this shall be re-
peated on the racks or cabinets on engraved labels.
Where a mechanism is to be locked in a specific position, provision shall be made at that part of the
mechanism where the operating power is applied and not to remote or ancillary linkages.
Provision for locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that locks will re-
main serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or maintenance for continuous
periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for indefinite service.
2.27 Electrical Equipment
2.27.1 General
The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of operation under all working conditions obtaining at
the Site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All reasonable
precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure the safety of per-
sonnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works.
Outdoor equipment shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. The undersides of all
tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion.
Mechanisms shall be constructed to prevent sticking due to rust and corrosion, and the bearings of
exposed operating shafts shall be designed so as to prevent moisture seeping along shafts into the in-
terior of equipment.
Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully interchange-
able and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the Engineer's and Employer's
satisfaction.
All equipment shall operate without undue vibration and with the least practical amount of noise.
All equipment shall be designed to minimise corona or other electrical discharges, to comply with local
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards and in accordance with IEC standard 61000.
All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified am-
bient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due account shall be taken of
any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components shall be appropriately selected, rat-
ed or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous operating temperatures within the enclosure.

Volume 2 Page 29
Except where a different meaning is stated in an equipment standard, the term "low voltage" (LV) shall
refer to voltages up to and including 1 kV, and "high voltage" (HV) shall refer to all voltages exceeding
1 kV.
Fuses, circuit breakers and other electrical switchgear components shall comply with the relevant
clauses, for low voltage ac switchgear.
2.27.2 Electrical Equipment Enclosures
Equipment enclosures for electrical equipment shall comply with IEC 60079, IEC 60529 and IEC
60947-1 as applicable. Equipment enclosures for use in hazardous areas other than explosive gas
atmosphere shall comply with National and Local Regulations relating to this application. Unless oth-
erwise specified, minimum equipment enclosure classifications for non-rotating electrical equipment
shall be as follows:
Indoors only in totally enclosed rooms with provision for limiting ingress of dust: IP 31
Indoors, except as noted otherwise: IP 54
Outdoors, and indoors in areas subject to water spray, or heavy condensation: IP 55W
The enclosure classification of main and auxiliary cable boxes with the cable(s) terminated shall not be
less than that of the associated equipment, subject to a minimum classification of IP54.
2.28 Current Ratings
2.28.1 Normal Current Ratings
Current ratings in accordance with IEC 60059 shall be adopted, unless otherwise agreed with the En-
gineer.
Every current carrying part of the equipment shall be capable of carrying its site rated current continu-
ously under the site ambient conditions as specified and shall not be rated on the basis of air condi-
tioned rooms even when these are specified. In no conditions shall the specified maximum tempera-
ture be exceeded.
The current ratings specified are the continuous current ratings required at the Site, under the speci-
fied maximum temperature conditions.
2.28.2 Temperature Rise
Full provision shall be made for solar heat gain on all outdoor apparatus and any differential tempera-
tures attained as a result of the impingement of solar heat.
The allowable temperature rise shall be in accordance with the relevant Standard, except where the
ambient temperature exceeds the maximum permitted in that Standard, when the permitted tempera-
ture rise shall be reduced by one degree Celsius for every degree Celsius the maximum ambient tem-
perature exceeds the maximum permitted in the Standard.

Volume 2 Page 30
To allow for high ambient site temperatures, the allowable temperature rise for transformers shall be
reduced by a maximum of 10C from the standard value in IEC60076.
In such cases where the Contractor is unable to guarantee the permitted maximum temperature
reached under site conditions, taking account of solar heating, then sunshades shall be provided to
the Engineer's approval.
The maximum temperature attained by components under the most onerous service conditions shall
not cause damage or deterioration to the equipment or to any associated or adjacent components.
The Contractor shall submit his calculations to the Engineer to prove that all plant has been sufficiently
de-rated to suit the site conditions and any changes required by the Engineer shall be made at no ex-
tra cost.
2.28.3 Short-Time Current Ratings
Electrical equipment shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the forces associated with
the maximum short-circuit currents specified or pertaining, whichever is the greater, and assuming that
the inception of the short-circuit is at such a time that gives maximum peak currents. No provision for
current decrement shall be made unless specifically permitted by the appropriate Standard, or else-
where in this Specification.
Equipment shall be so constructed as to withstand the specified maximum short-circuit currents for the
time specified in the Schedules without the temperature exceeding the specified maximum short-time
temperature or value stated in the relevant standard, under these conditions. The equipment shall be
considered as being operated at the maximum permitted continuous temperature prior to inception of
the short circuit.
The final temperature attained as a result of the passage of short-circuit current shall not cause per-
manent damage, or deterioration sufficient to reduce the normal operating characteristics below the
specified or most onerous operating requirements, whichever is the highest.
2.29 Voltage Ratings
2.29.1 Normal Voltage Ratings
Unless otherwise specifically stated, any reference to voltage rating shall be deemed to refer to the
nominal rated voltage or voltages of electrical equipment. Standard voltage levels in accordance with
IEC 60038 shall be adopted, unless otherwise specified by or agreed with the Engineer.
All electrical equipment shall, except where otherwise specified, be capable of continuous operation at
a voltage in the range of 10% of the nominal voltage and at a frequency in the range of 47 to 51 Hz
coincidentally without deterioration.
The temperature rise of electrical equipment continuously operating at the specified extreme voltage
and frequency shall not exceed the temperature rise when operating at nominal voltage and frequency
by more than 5C

Volume 2 Page 31
2.29.2 Short-Time Voltage Ratings
All electrical equipment shall be so designed such as to withstand abnormal system voltages as re-
quired by the applicable BS, IEC or acceptable International Standard.
2.30 Electrical Insulation
Insulating materials shall be suitably finished so as to prevent deterioration of their qualities under the
specified working conditions. Account shall be taken of the IEC 60085 recommendations.
Ebonite, synthetic resin-bonded laminated material and bituminised asbestos cement-bonded panels
shall be of suitable quality selected from the grades or types in the appropriate IEC, or approved Na-
tional Standard.
The insulation of all machine windings, solenoids, etc. other than those immersed in oil or compound,
shall be of Class F materials, unless otherwise specified elsewhere.
All cut or machined surfaces and edges of resin-bonded laminated materials shall be cleaned and
then sealed with an approved varnish as soon as possible after cutting.
Linseed oil and untreated materials of fibre, leatheroid, presspahn, asbestos or other similar hygro-
scopic types of materials shall not be used for insulation purposes. Untreated leatheroid and
presspahn may be used for mechanical protection of winding insulation.
The use of asbestos is not permitted without the permission of the Engineer.
Wherever practicable, instrument, apparatus and machine coil windings, including wire wound resis-
tors, with the exception of those immersed in oil or compound, shall be thoroughly dried in a vacuum
or by other approved means and shall then be immediately impregnated through to the core with an
approved insulating varnish. Varnish with a linseed oil base shall not be used.
No material of a hygroscopic nature shall be used for covering coils. Where inter-leaving between
windings in coils is necessary, only the best manila paper, thoroughly dried, which permits penetration
by the insulating varnish or wax, shall be used.
Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) type materials shall not be used anywhere in the equipment or in any
component.
2.31 Insulating Oil
Insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60296. Insulating oil shall be provided by the
Contractor for all oil-filled apparatus and 10% excess shall be provided for topping up purposes in
sealed drums. The Contractor shall provide at no additional cost any oil treatment facilities he may re-
quire for his own use in order to ensure that insulating oil meets the requirements of the specification.

Volume 2 Page 32
2.32 Control and Selector Switches
Control switches shall be of the three-position type with a spring return action to a central neutral posi-
tion and without a locking feature. Circuit breakers shall have control switches which shall be labelled
open/N/close or (0/N/I) and arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit breakers and anti-
clockwise when opening them.
Control switches of the discrepancy type shall be provided where specified. Such discrepancy control
switches shall be arranged in the lines of the mimic diagram. Such switches shall include lamps and
be of the manually operated pattern, spring loaded such that it is necessary to push and twist the
switch past its indicating position for operation.
The lamp shall be incorporated in the switch base and shall flash whenever the position of the con-
trolled device is at variance with the position indicated by the control switch. Hand dressing of the con-
trol switch to the correct position shall cause the lamp to extinguish.
Pushbutton test switches shall be provided along the control panel that will illuminate all indicating dis-
crepancy lamps as well as spare lamps on the control panels. The scheme shall be complete with all
necessary diodes and other equipment required for satisfactory operation.
Switches for other apparatus shall be operated by pushbuttons, shrouded or well recessed in their
housings in such a way as to minimise the risk of inadvertent operation.
Multi-position selector switches shall have a lockable stayput action. Each position of the selector
switches shall be suitably labelled to signify the functions in accordance with the approved wiring dia-
grams. The switch handle shall be of the pistol grip spade type to the approval of the Engineer.
It shall not be possible at any time to close any switching device from more than one location simulta-
neously, and suitable lockable selector switches shall be provided to meet this requirement. Tripping
signals from all locations shall function at all times.
Particular variations of the above requirements may be agreed with the Engineer for special instru-
ment or control equipment, viz. main control room desks and panels, and electrical equipment cubi-
cles.
The contacts of all control and selector switches shall be shrouded to minimise the ingress of dust and
accidental contact, and shall be amply rated for voltage and current for the circuits in which they are
used.
2.33 Panels, Desks and Cubicles
Unless otherwise specified, panels, desks and cubicles, shall be of floor-mounted and free-standing
construction and be in accordance with the enclosure classification specified elsewhere. All control
and instrumentation panels in any one location shall be identical in appearance and construction.
Where new panels are supplied for existing substations, these shall match existing panels in appear-
ance, arrangement and devices and colour finishes.

Volume 2 Page 33
Panels shall be rigidly constructed from folded sheet steel of 3mm minimum thickness to support the
equipment mounted thereon, above a channel base frame to provide a toe recess.
Overall height, excluding cable boxes, shall not exceed 2.5m. Operating handles and locking devices
shall be located within the operating limits of 0.95m and 1.8m above floor level. The minimum height
for indicating instruments and meters shall be 1.5m unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Panels shall be mounted on an approved form of anti-vibration mounting whenever necessary.
All panels, desks and cubicles shall be vermin-proof. All cable entries to equipment shall be sealed
against vermin as soon as possible after installation and connecting-up of the cables to the approval of
the Engineer.
All cubicles, desks and panels shall be provided with a natural air circulation ventilation system. All
control equipment shall be designed to operate without forced ventilation.
For outdoor equipment, metal to metal joints shall not be permitted and all external bolts or screws
shall be provided with blind tapped holes where a through hole would permit the ingress of moisture.
For harsh environments, all nuts, bolts and washers shall be tropicalized as appropriate.
Door sealing materials shall be provided suitable for the specified site conditions. Doors shall be fitted
with handles and locks. Where walk-in type panels are supplied the door shall be capable of being
opened from inside the panel without the aid of a key after they have been locked from the outside.
Hinges shall be of the lift-off type, and shall permit the doors when open, to lie back flat so as not to
restrict access. Means shall be provided for securing the doors in the open position.
Cubicles and cubicle doors shall be rigidly constructed such that, for example, door mounted emer-
gency trip contacts can be set so that mal-operation will not be possible due to any vibrations or im-
pacts as may reasonably be expected under normal working conditions.
The bottom and/or top of all panels shall be sealed by means of removable gasketted steel gland
plates. Gland plates for bottom entry shall be at least 250mm above the floor of the cubicle.
Panels shall be suitably designed to permit future extension wherever appropriate or specified.
Each panel shall include rear access doors internal power sockets and door-operated internal lighting,
and be clearly labelled with the circuit title at front and rear, with an additional label inside the panel.
Panel sections accommodating equipment at voltages higher than 125V (nominal) shall be partitioned
off and the voltage clearly labelled. Each relay and electronic card within panels shall be identified by
labels permanently attached to the panel and adjacent to the equipment concerned. Where instru-
ments are terminated in a plug and socket type connection both the plug and the socket shall have
permanently attached identifying labels.
Instrument and control devices shall be easily accessible and capable of being removed from the pan-
els for maintenance purposes.
Terminations, wiring and cabling shall be in accordance with the requirements of this section of the
specification.
For suites of panels inter-panel bus-wiring shall be routed through apertures in the sides of panels and
not via external multicore cabling looped between the panels.

Volume 2 Page 34
All panels, whether individually mounted or forming part of a suite, shall incorporate a common internal
copper earthing bar onto which all panel earth connections shall be made.
Suitable studs or holes to the Engineer's approval shall be left at each end of the bar for connection to
the main station earthing system and possible future extension.
Earth connection between adjacent panels shall be achieved by extending the bar through the panel
sides and not by interconnecting external cabling.
Where intrinsically safe circuitry is routed from a hazardous area to a safe area instrument panel, it
shall be connected through Zener Barriers located in the safe area (instrument panel) of suitable rating
and mounted on an insulated earthing busbar having facilities for connection of a separate dedicated
outgoing cable to a "clean earth" system.
Control supplies in desks, panels and cubicles shall be derived from a duplicate standby/UPS system,
except if specified otherwise in this specification. The following alarms shall be provided to monitor the
systems: voltage high, voltage low, no volts and earth fault. The alarms shall be signalled to the Con-
trol Room.
Instruments having pressure pipe connections containing oil, water, steam or flammable or toxic fluids
shall be excluded from the Control Room.
All cubicles, desks and panels shall be painted externally with a high gloss paint of Munsell 5Y7/1 col-
our. The interiors of all cubicles, desks and panels shall be painted matt white.
All cubicles, or panels mounted external to control and apparatus rooms shall be fitted with thermostat
controlled anti-condensation heaters.
2.34 Instruments & Meters
2.34.1 Indicating Instruments
All indicating instruments shall be of the flush mounted pattern with dust and moisture proof cases
complying with BS 2011, Classification 00/50/04, and shall comply with IEC 60051-1.
Unless otherwise specified, all indicating instruments shall have 96 mm or 144 mm square cases to
DIN standard or equivalent circular cases.
Instrument dials in general should be white with black markings and should preferably be reversible
where double scale instruments are specified.
Scales shall be of such material that no peeling or discolouration will take place with age under humid
tropical conditions.
The movements of all instruments shall be of the dead beat type. Wherever possible, instruments shall
be provided with a readily accessible zero adjustment.

Volume 2 Page 35
2.34.2 Electrical Meters
All electrical meters shall comply with IEC 62053 and other relevant IEC standards and, unless other-
wise specified, shall be of accuracy Class 1, except Class 0.2 for energy meters. Three-phase power
measuring instruments shall be of the three-phase unbalanced load pattern wherever the current and
voltage references permit.
Where precision grade metering is specified meters shall be calibrated to precision grade accuracy to
IEC standards.
Due allowance shall be made for the errors of current and voltage transformers with which they shall
work and whose accuracy class shall be Class 0.2.
Where commercial grade metering is specified the meters shall be calibrated to commercial grade ac-
curacy to IEC standards.
Meters shall be single directional and shall be fitted where required with suitable devices for the
transmission of impulses to a summator. Var-hour meters shall be complete with phase shifting trans-
formers as necessary.
Front of panel test terminal blocks shall be provided for all meters.
Summators shall be equipped to summate the circuits specified and shall be equipped where required
with suitable contacts for the re-transmission of impulses to a printometer. They shall register in kilo-
watts the value of the impulses received from each kilowatt-hour meter. Printometers shall be of an
approved type having the specified demand interval.
Each 400 kV and 230 kV feeder shall be provided with Main 1 and Main 2 energy meters.
The energy meter shall be 3-element, 4-wire arrangement of programmable digital type and shall have
proven performance and shall consist of different types, from either the same Manufacturer or different
Manufacturers. The accuracy class of the energy meter shall be 0.2.
2.35 Indicating Lamps and Fittings
All indicating lamps shall be adequately ventilated and as far as practicable, lamps of a common type
and manufacture shall be used throughout the Contract.
Lamps shall be easily removed and replaced where possible from the front of the panel by manual
means preferably not requiring the use of extractors.
Where specified every circuit breaker panel shall be equipped with one red and one green indicating
lamp, indicating respectively circuit closed and circuit open and an amber lamp for indicating 'auto-trip'.
Where specified for in the lines of mimic diagrams, indicating lamps may be of the three-lamp single-
aspect type.
The variety of indicating lamps provided shall be rationalised to reduce maintenance and spares re-
quirements.

Volume 2 Page 36
The lamps shall be clear and shall fit into a lamp holder. The rated lamp voltage shall be at least 20%
in excess of nominal supply voltage, whether a.c. or d.c. The lamps shall have an operating life of at
least 10,000 hours, under site conditions. In the event that other indicating devices, such as light emit-
ting diodes, are used in place of lamps then these shall have the same life expectancy and perfor-
mance capability as the lamps they replace.
The lamp glasses shall comply with IEC 60073 and be in the standard colours, red, green, blue, white
and amber. The colour shall be in the glass and not an applied coating. Transparent synthetic materi-
als may be used instead of glass subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where illuminated pushbuttons are used for control purposes, the illuminated pushbuttons shall be
engraved with a clear instruction such as 'push to open' or 'push to close', and the lamp shall illumi-
nate in accordance with the above colour code after the instruction has been carried out and the de-
vice has operated.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer all lamp colours shall conform to the following practice:
Red energised or operative position

Green de-energised or inoperative position
Amber fault or abnormal condition
White healthy or normal condition
Blue other purposes, to be used with descriptive label
Lamp test facilities shall be provided for all switchboards, control panels etc. to enable all lamps to be
tested whilst the equipment is in service. Operation of the lamp test facility shall not cause any other
device to operate. Indication circuits shall be fused.
2.36 Anti-Condensation Heaters
All switchboards, panels, cubicles and the like shall incorporate thermostat controlled electric heaters
capable of providing movement of sufficient heated air to avoid condensation. The apparatus so pro-
tected shall be designed so that the maximum permitted rise in temperature is not exceeded if the
heaters are energised while the apparatus is in operation.
The switchboard anti-condensation heaters shall be fed from an LV single phase and neutral supply,
manually switched by a two-pole switch with red lamp, mounted on the back of the board, panel or cu-
bicle and bus-wired through the board. Labels shall be provided on the switch stating "Heater Supply".
Heater terminals shall be shrouded and labelled "Heater".
Motor anti-condensation heaters where fitted shall be fed from an LV single phase and neutral supply
bus-wired through the board. The supplies shall be individually fused and will be switched by auxiliary
contacts on the contactor and isolated by auxiliary contacts on the contactor isolator.

Volume 2 Page 37
2.37 Control and Instrument Panel Wiring, Cable Terminations and

Terminal Boards
2.37.1 General
All electrical equipment mounted in or on switchgear, panels and desks, shall have readily accessible
connections and shall be wired to terminal blocks for the reception of external cabling.
The wiring shall comply with BS 6231 and shall be capable of withstanding without deterioration the
conditions at Site, due allowance being made for such temperature conditions as may arise within any
enclosure. The insulating material shall be flame retardant in accordance with IEC 60332.
All wiring shall be of adequate cross-sectional area to carry prospective short-circuit currents without
risk of damage to conductors, insulation or joints.
The following classes of copper conductor, as defined in IEC 60228, shall be used for panel wiring:
Class 1: conductors up to a maximum of 0.9 mm diameter where necessary for wire-wrapped ter-
minations and similar techniques,
Class 2: conductors except where specified otherwise,
Class 5 and Class 6: conductors between points subject to relative movement.
The following minimum conductor sizes shall be used:
1.5 mm except where specified otherwise,

2.5 mm for current transformer secondary circuits with a rated secondary current of not exceed-
ing 1A.
4 mm for current transformer secondary circuits with a rated secondary current exceeding 1A.
Where an overall screen is used, this shall be a metallic screen or low resistance tape, with a drain
wire as above.
Wiring shall be supported using an insulated system that allows easy access for fault finding and facili-
tates the installation of additional wiring.
Small wiring passing between compartments that may be separated for transport shall be taken to
terminal blocks mounted separately from those for external cable connections.
Connections to apparatus mounted on doors or between points subject to relative movement shall be
arranged so that they are subjected to torsion rather than bending.
Ribbon cables or similar preformed cables with plug and socket connectors may be used for light cur-
rent wiring. Plug and socket connectors shall be polarised so that they can only be inserted into one
another in the correct manner.
If so required, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval samples of the types of wire,
numbered ferrules, and terminal washers or lugs as appropriate which he propose to use.

Volume 2 Page 38
2.37.2 Identification of Wires
All wiring and cores in control and instrument cables shall be identified in accordance with the associ-
ated schematic and/or wiring diagrams either by means of discrete wire numbers or wire colours, ex-
cept when an automatic or proprietary system of wiring is used, e.g. point-to-point wiring on a mother
board.
When a wire numbering system is used, it should be in accordance with IEC standards or with a func-
tional marking system. Both ends of every wire and core in control and instrument cables shall be fit-
ted with interlocking ring ferrules of white insulating material indelibly marked with black characters,
complying with BS 3858. Heat shrink marking sleeves may be used, but adhesive markers are not ac-
ceptable.
When plug and socket connectors are used, they shall be uniquely identified as mating pairs and each
connector pin shall be numbered. Wiring which is permanently connected to plugs or sockets need not
be identified.
Each core of multi-pair wiring shall be identified by colour and terminal block identification together
with an identification tracer per bundle.
Permanent identification of all terminals, wires and terminal blocks shall be provided.
A consistent system of wiring numbering shall be used throughout the plant, and it shall be agreed
with the Engineer at the start of the Contract.
2.37.3 Terminals and Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall have separate terminals for internal and external connections, and not more
than one wire shall be connected to each terminal.
Adjacent terminals to which wires of different voltage, polarity or phase are connected shall be sepa-
rated by a protruding insulating barrier. This requirement also applies to terminals carrying wires of the
same voltage but originating from different sources.
Trip circuit wiring and instrument transformer secondary wiring shall be connected using hook type
crimped terminations in screw clamp, spring loaded insertion type terminals.
Where clamp type terminals are used, Class 1 and Class 2 conductors may be terminated without
lugs. Crimp lugs shall be used for Class 5 and Class 6 conductors. Means shall be provided for retain-
ing the identifying ferrules of the wire end when it is disconnected.
Pinch screw type terminals shall not be permitted.
Subject to approval of the Engineer, "wire-wrap", "termi-point" or equivalent methods of terminations of

single strand conductors may be used.
Wires shall be grouped on the terminal boards according to their functions.
All terminal blocks shall provide a degree of protection of not less than IP2X when correctly installed,
either inherently or by provision of insulating covers.

Volume 2 Page 39
Terminal boards shall be mounted vertically, not less than 150 mm above the gland plates, and
spaced not less than 100 mm apart, on the side of the enclosure and set obliquely towards the rear
doors.
Sufficient terminals shall be provided to permit all cores on multicore cables to be terminated. Termi-
nals for spare cores shall be numbered and be located at such position as will provide the maximum
length of spare core. At least 10% spare terminals shall in all cases remain after commissioning.
The tails of multicore cables shall be bound and routed so that each tail may be traced without difficul-
ty to its associated cable. All spare cores shall be made off to terminals.
When two lengths of screened cable are to be connected at a terminal block (i.e. junction box) a sepa-
rate terminal shall be provided to maintain screen continuity.
In the main and local control and equipment rooms, means shall be provided on the terminal blocks of
panels, desks, cubicles, etc., for testing all the instrument circuits without the need to remove the in-
ternal or external wiring from the block.
The Contractor shall submit full details and specification of the proposed means of termination where
wire wrapping, soldering and similar methods are used. The adopted methods shall be to the Engi-
neer's approval.
The Contractor shall identify all special tools, such as wire wrapping tools required for termination, and
shall make provision for their supply in sufficient numbers.
The use of pre-formed factory tested cable connections to field mounted marshalling boxes shall be to
the Engineer's approval.
2.38 Cable Boxes and Glands
2.38.1 General
Electrical equipment shall be provided with all necessary cable boxes, which shall be complete with all
required fittings. All cable boxes shall be of adequate size to allow for the correct termination of the
cable sizes required or specified, taking into account the crossing of cores to achieve the correct phas-
ing, and to accommodate all cable fittings, including stress cones or other means of cable insulation
grading, if required. All cable boxes shall be designed in such a manner that they can be opened for
inspection without disturbing the gland plate or incoming cable.
All main cable boxes shall be air insulated for the termination of all types of cable at voltages up to and
including 33 kV nominal system voltage, unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification.
Compound-filled cable boxes may only be used for paper insulated cables, where specified else-
where.
The enclosure classification of main and auxiliary cable boxes on motors with the cable(s) terminated
shall not be less than that of the associated motor, subject to a minimum classification of IP54.
Clearance and creepage distances shall be adequate to withstand the specified alternating current
voltages and impulse voltages for service under the prevailing site conditions.

Volume 2 Page 40
Means shall be provided for preventing accumulation of dirt, dust, moisture, vermin or insects such as
to maintain the anticipated life of the equipment.
The terminals for 3 phase cables shall be clearly marked with the specified phase designations to en-
able the cables to be terminated in the correct sequence.
Flexible connections shall be provided between cable lugs and bushings for all cables of 300 mm
section and greater.
There shall be no possibility of oil entering the cable box from an associated oil filled compartment.
Inner sheaths shall be arranged to project at least 25 mm above the gland plate to avoid moisture col-
lecting in the crutch.
All cable boxes shall be designed to withstand the high voltage d.c. cable tests prescribed in
IEC 60055, IEC 60502 or other applicable standard.
Cable lugs and terminations for the receipt of all power, control and instrumentation cable cores shall
be provided.
Where air insulated terminations are used, the cable crutch within a cable box or equipment panel
shall be protected by the use of a heat-shrink plastic trifurcating sleeve or equivalent placed over the
cores and crutch.
The Contractor shall provide full information and instruction for his proposed method of terminating HV
cables.
Removable gasketted steel gland plates shall be provided for multicore cables. The cable entry into
the cable box shall be arranged so that there is adequate space to manipulate the cable for glanding
and termination.
When single core cables are used, particularly for currents in excess of 500 A, adequate steps must
be taken to minimise the effects of eddy currents in the gland and bushing-mounted plate.
Gland plates for externally mounted marshalling boxes shall be in the form of removable gasketted
steel plates, forming part of the underside of the box. Indoor marshalling boxes may be fitted with
gland plates on all four sides.
2.38.2 Additional Requirements for Compound-filled Cable Boxes
Cable boxes for paper insulated cables shall be complete with universal tapered brass glands, insulat-
ed from the box in an approved manner and including an island layer for testing purposes, together
with removable shorting links.
Filling and venting plugs, where required, shall be positioned so as to avoid the possibility of air being
trapped internally and adequate arrangements shall be made for expansion of compound, etc.
Compound-filled chambers shall be clean and dry and at such a temperature before filling that the
compound does not solidify during the filling process. Filling orifices shall be sufficiently large to permit
easy and rapid filling.

Volume 2 Page 41
2.38.3 Cable Glands
Cable glands for extruded solid dielectric insulated cables (PVC, EPR, XLPE) shall be of the compres-
sion type and as specified in BS 6121 Part 1.
All glands shall be provided with an earthing tag or equal facility. For cables having conductors not
larger than 4 mm serrated washers may be used in place of earthing tags to provide earth continuity.
Glands for armoured or screened cables greater than or equal to 240 mm and all insulated glands for
power cables shall be provided with an integral earthing lug. On cable glands up to and including 40
mm nominal size, the earthing connection shall have a short circuit rating of at least 25 kA for 1 se-
cond and of at least 40 kA for 1 second on larger sizes.
Insulated glands shall be provided with removable connections for bonding across the gland insula-
tion. The gland insulation shall withstand a wet insulation voltage withstand test of at least 2 kV a.c. for
1 minute.
Under conditions of severe corrosion, corrosion-resistant cable glands complying with BS 6121 Part 3
may be used, or the Contractor may use an alternative solution with the approval of the Engineer.
Polymeric cable glands complying with BS 6121 Part 2 may be used, but only when terminating un-
armoured cables.
Glands for MICS cables shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
2.39 Box-Filling Compounds
The type of compound shall be to the approval of the Engineer, who shall be supplied with sufficient
information by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply all compound required together with an ad-
ditional quantity of not less than 10% of normal requirements.
Where hot-pouring compounds are employed the pouring temperature shall be verified by use of
thermometers or similar instruments and the metallic case of all joints and terminal boxes shall be ad-
equately pre-warmed to drive off moisture.
The Contractor shall take particular care to adhere to the recommended topping-up procedures and to
ensure that no leakage or migration of the filling compound occurs.
Should leakages occur during the maintenance period the Engineer will require the joint to be re-made
at the Contractor's expense.
2.40 Oil or Compound-Filled Chambers
All joints of oil- or compound-filled fabricated chambers, other than those that have to be broken, shall
be welded and care shall be taken to ensure that the chambers are oil-tight. Defective welded joints
shall not be repaired but maybe re-welded subject to the written approval of the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 42
Insulating compound shall comply with BS 1858.
The correct oil or compound filling level shall be indicated on the inside and outside of chambers.
2.41 Joints and Gaskets
All joint faces are to be flat and parallel to the approval of the Engineer and arranged to prevent the
ingress of water or leakage of oil with a minimum of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.
Oil-resisting synthetic rubber gaskets are not permissible, unless the degree of compression is accu-
rately controlled. For gaskets of cork or similar, oil resisting synthetic rubber may be used as a bond-
ing medium.
2.42 Valves on Electrical Equipment Fluid Lines and Vessels
Valves shall comply with the requirements of Clause 2.19. All drain and filter valves shall be provided
with gun metal adaptors suitable for connecting a flexible hose having a screwed coupling of approved
size. Captive-screwed caps shall be provided for all such adaptors.
2.43 Junction and Marshalling Boxes
Junction and marshalling boxes for use in non-hazardous areas shall be of substantial sheet alumini-
um anodised coating construction to prevent corrosion, having an enclosure classification in accord-
ance with the requirements of clause 2.27.2. They shall be fitted with external fixing lugs and finished
in accordance with the requirements of the specification for cleaning, painting and finishing. The boxes
shall allow ample room for wiring, with particular regard to the routing of wires from the point of entry.
Boxes made from aluminium shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer.
Outdoor boxes shall have an anti-condensation finish and all boxes shall be designed such that any
condensed water cannot affect the insulation of the terminal boards or cables. No cables shall be ter-
minated into the top of outdoor boxes unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
All outdoor kiosks, cubicles and panels shall be provided with sun/rain shades. All kiosks, cubicles and
panels not in air-conditioned rooms shall be provided with thermostat controlled anti-condensation
heaters. All kiosks, and cubicles shall be fitted with door operated internal illumination lamps. All nec-
essary gland plates shall be provided undrilled.
Boxes shall be complete with suitably inscribed identification labels. Boxes for use in hazardous areas
shall have all entries factory pre-drilled. Every unused screwed entry shall be sealed by means of a
tamperproof screwed plug in accordance with IEC 60079. Hazardous area boxes with bolted or
screwed lids shall require the use of special keys or spanners, for lid removal, protected against the
ingress of moisture, by an approved means, compliant with local standards.
All box covers are to be arranged for padlocking and padlocks with keys shall be supplied.
All boxes shall be provided with adequate earthing bars and terminals.

Volume 2 Page 43
2.44 Conduit and Accessories
Conduit installations shall comply with IEC standards 60364, 60621, 60981 and 61035. Installations
shall also be compliant with local regulations, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
All conduit and conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 60423 and IEC 60614. Unless otherwise ap-
proved, all conduit and conduit fittings shall be threadable steel conduit with minimum enclosure clas-
sification IP55, heavy mechanical protection and high resistance to corrosion inside and outside.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
Standard circular boxes or machined face heavy duty steel adaptable boxes with machined heavy
type lids shall be used throughout. For outdoor mounting all boxes shall be galvanised, weatherproof
and fitted with external fixing lugs.
Where conduit is terminated so that the bare end of the conduit is exposed the conduit end shall be fit-
ted with a brass bush.
The use of running threads, solid elbows and solid tees will not be permitted.
Conduit ends shall be carefully reamed to remove burrs. Draw-in boxes shall be provided at intervals
not exceeding 10 m in straight-through runs.
Conduit runs shall be in either the vertical or horizontal direction, unless otherwise approved, and shall
be arranged to minimise accumulation of moisture. Provision for drainage shall be made at the lowest
points of each run.
Conduits shall be supported on heavy galvanised spacer saddles so as to stand off at least 6mm from
the fixing surface.
All conduits run in any circuit are to be completed before any cables are pulled in.
Flexible metallic conduit shall be used where relative movement is required between the conduit and
connected apparatus, and a separate earth continuity conductor shall be provided.
2.45 Trunking
Steel trunking may be used for running numbers of insulated cables or wires in certain positions to the
approval of the Engineer. The trunking thickness shall not be less than 1.2 mm. Connection of conduit
to trunking shall be with socket and male bush. All trunking shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc
coated steel sheet and conform to IEC 61084.

Volume 2 Page 44
2.46 Electric Motors
2.46.1 General
Motors shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60034 and IEC 60072 as amended and supple-
mented by this specification.
2.46.2 Type and Rating
Except where specified otherwise or economically justified, all a.c. motors shall be of the constant
speed, cage induction type with windings adequately braced for direct-on-line starting at the rated
voltage. They shall be suitable for control by either circuit breaker or fused contactor.
Motors shall be continuously rated, Duty Type S1. Exceptions shall be permitted only when the inter-
mittent or short time duty cycle can be accurately defined by the Contractor.
Three phase a.c. motors shall be rated for the voltages specified elsewhere in the Specification. The
minimum rated output of HV motors shall comply with IEC 60034-1. The maximum rated output of LV
motors shall not exceed 150 kW, except where approved by the Engineer.
2.46.3 Insulation
Motors shall be insulated with materials complying with IEC 60085. All motors shall have Class F insu-
lation but the temperature rise shall not exceed the limits applicable to Class B.
2.46.4 Conditions of Operation
A.C. motors shall be capable of continuous operation under the service conditions within the Zone A
voltage and frequency variations specified in IEC 60034-1 Figure 13 or as covered in Clause 4.1
whichever is the most onerous. Unless otherwise specified, the motors shall be capable of continued
operation at 75% rated voltage and rated frequency for a period of 5 minutes without injurious heating.
In the event of loss of supply, all motors shall be suitable for restarting against the full residual voltage
in the motor winding during motor run-down.
2.46.5 Starting Performance
Unless otherwise specified or required, cage induction motors up to and including 40 kW shall have a
starting performance better than or equal to Design N in accordance with IEC 60034 (External inertias
for 50 and 60 Hz motors shall be in accordance with BS 4999 Part 112). Cage induction motors above
40 kW shall have a starting performance better or equal to Design D in accordance with BS 4999 Part
112. The starting current at full voltage shall not exceed 6 times full load current.
The starting torque at 80% voltage shall be adequate for starting the driven load under the most ardu-
ous conditions, such as open fan vane or open pump discharge valve. The accelerating torque at any
speed and 80% rated voltage shall be not less than 10% of motor rated torque. In any event the motor
starting torque at 100% rated voltage, and at all speeds between standstill and the speed at which

Volume 2 Page 45
breakdown torque occurs, shall be not less than 1.7 times the torque obtained from a load curve which
varies as the square of the speed and is equal to 100% motor rated torque at rated speed.
The margins between the torques of the motors and driven plant shall include suitable allowances for
impeller wear, fouling etc. during the life of the plant.
Electric motors shall be suitable for two successive starts with the motor already at full load working
temperature, subject to the motor being permitted to decelerate to rest under operating conditions be-
tween successive starts. After a cooling period of 30 minutes at rest another starting sequence of two
successive starts shall be permissible.
2.46.6 Bearings
The type of bearings used in the motor shall be fully compatible with those used in the driven equip-
ment. The type of bearing, bearing numbers and regressing interval shall be stamped on each motor
rating plate. Bearings shall comply with the applicable ISO standards. Bearings shall be designed to
exclude the ingress of dust and water and sealed to prevent leakage of lubricant along the shaft.
2.46.7 Enclosures and Methods of Cooling
The degree of enclosure protection for motors shall be as follows unless otherwise specifically ap-
proved by the Engineer:
IP54 for indoor locations not subject to hosing.

Not less than IP 55W for outdoor locations, and indoor locations subject to hosing.
Where motors are exposed to solar radiation, sunshades shall be fitted, if required by the Manufac-
turer to meet his guarantees.
The cooling classification for motors shall be as follows unless otherwise specifically approved by the
Engineer:
IC4AlA1 or IC5AIA1 for LV motors, or IC4AIAO for small power LV motors.

IC4AlAl, IC5AlAI, IC6A1A1 or IC7AlW7 for HV motors.
Ferrous metals should be used for the frames and end shields of all ratings of motors.
Aluminium and its alloys shall only be used when the Manufacturer can demonstrate that such materi-
als are entirely suitable for the particular application at its installation location. Fans of identical motors
shall be interchangeable without affecting motor balance.
2.46.8 Anti-condensation Heaters
To minimise condensation in all outdoor 400V and intermittently used 400 V motors when out of ser-
vice, heaters of an approved type and rating, suitable for operation from a 230 V a.c. single phase
supply, shall be fitted inside the lower half of the stator frame.
The control of anti-condensation heaters shall be so arranged that they are normally energised when
the motor is not running.

Volume 2 Page 46
2.46.9 Terminals and Terminal Boxes
Winding terminations shall generally comply with BS 4999 Part 145. Separate non-compound filled,
terminal boxes shall be provided for each of the following, as applicable:
Main (line) connections.

Star point connections.
Anti-condensation heater connections.
Instrumentation and alarm devices.
All terminal boxes with the cables terminated shall have an enclosure classification not less than that
of the motor itself. All terminal boxes shall be of an adequate size for the satisfactory termination of the
cable(s) required or specified, including all applicable termination components. All HV terminal boxes
shall be provided with a desiccant indicator, externally sealed.
Terminals and terminal leads shall be to approval and shall be substantially designed for connection to
a system having the symmetrical short circuit rating of the source switchboard, as limited by fuses,
where applicable. The clearances and creepage distances shall apply also to insulated terminals and
connectors. Porcelain terminal bushings and insulators shall not be used.
Main and star point terminal boxes of HV motors shall be of steel. Cast iron may only be used for LV
motor terminal boxes and auxiliary terminal boxes. Star point terminal boxes shall only be provided
where required to accommodate neutral end current transformers and shall be positioned opposite the
main terminal box.
Main HV terminal boxes at voltages exceeding 7.2 kV (Um) shall be of a type that restricts internal
faults to earth faults only. Where pressure relief terminal boxes are used, they shall be designed to re-
lieve the products of an internal fault safely to the outside, and not into the interior of the motor.
Provision shall be made for earthing the cable armour and the cable insulation screens, where appli-
cable, in accordance with the cable termination method being used. In auxiliary cable boxes either
stud terminals or clamp terminals shall be provided. The anti-condensation heater terminal box shall
have a warning label adjacent to it, stating "motor heater-terminals live".
2.46.10 Earth Terminal
All motors shall be provided with a means of earthing the frame, which shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
2.46.11 D.C. Motors
D.C. motors that are to operate from batteries shall be capable of operating under the service condi-
tions at any voltage in the range of 80% to 110% of the nominal value.
Motors of the constant speed type shall be designed to operate with a permanent series resistor of
suitable rating and with a contactor such that starters with tagged resistors are not required.
All d.c. motors shall be provided with brush-gear that does not require to be moved to suit load condi-
tions.

Volume 2 Page 47
Motors connected to rectifier equipment shall meet the conditions of supply voltage and frequency
specified for a.c. motors. Where necessary, rectifier equipment shall be fitted with a current limiting
device.
2.47 Motor Starters and Contactors for Separate Mounting
In special cases for motors below 30 kW, and non-essential non-plant auxiliaries, such as roller shut-
ter doors, and where approved by the Engineer, separately mounted starters for motors may be pro-
vided. Each such motor starter shall be equipped with two or three pole control gear, as appropriate,
for direct-on-line starting and shall be complete with a fully shrouded lockable isolating switch, me-
chanically interlocked with the means of access. All starters shall be supplied by one Manufacturer,
except where otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Contactors shall be of robust design and shall comply with IEC 60947. All contactors and their associ-
ated apparatus for minor motors shall be capable of operating without overheating for all specified mo-
tor operating conditions, and including for a period of five minutes at normal frequency if the supply
voltage falls to 80% of nominal voltage.
For motors up to 30 kW rating motor starters shall be provided with direct connected thermal overload
and phase failure industrial pattern protection tripping devices, integral with the motor contactor.
Phase failure protection shall operate with out-of-balance currents not exceeding 85% of motor full
load current. Separate contacts for a remote trip alarm shall be provided, and connected up if re-
quired.
For motors above 30 kW starters shall not be wall mounted but included in a switchboard. For such
circuits motor protection relays with a more accurate and easily adjustable overload setting shall be
used, which are sensitive to out-of-balance currents not exceeding 20% of full load, and shall include
instantaneous earth fault elements. Alternatively, instantaneous earth fault protection may be incorpo-
rated in the motor circuit breaker. The earth fault protection shall not operate for unbalanced current
surges during motor starting.
2.48 Pushbuttons and Separately Mounted Pushbutton Stations
Pushbuttons, which may be of the illuminated or non-illuminated type, shall be shrouded or well re-
cessed in their housings in such a way as to minimise the risk of inadvertent operation. In instances
where "enable" pushbuttons are required they shall be electrically interlocked with the normal control
such that deliberate operation of the "enable" push-button is required before the normal control can
take place.
The colour of pushbuttons shall be as follows:
When mounted on pushbutton stations adjacent to running plant:

the stop button shall be coloured red and
the start button coloured green.
When mounted on the front of the contactor panel:
the stop button shall be coloured red and
the start button coloured green.

Volume 2 Page 48
When mounted on panels or desks with adjacent indication lights, unless required otherwise by the
Engineer:
both buttons shall be coloured black
Loose pushbutton stations, unless supplied as weatherproof free standing enclosures, shall be of the
metalclad weatherproof type suitable for wall or bracket mounting with a minimum enclosure classifica-
tion of IP55.
All outdoor mounted pushbutton stations shall incorporate a protective cover or guard (e.g. toughened
glass door) to prevent inadvertent operation.
Control stations shall be clearly labelled showing the duty or drive to which they are applicable. Loca-
tion of ammeters shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Any necessary pushbuttons used on covered desks, panels etc. have to be of special types (e.g. min-
iature, illuminated). The specifications and requirements for these special pushbuttons shall be agreed
with the Engineer.
Emergency stop pushbuttons shall be provided adjacent to all motors and machinery with exposed
moving parts, couplings etc. to prevent danger, and on main and local control panels. These pushbut-
tons shall have a large "mushroom" head, be coloured red and incorporate a protective cover or guard
to avoid accidental operation. These buttons shall automatically lock in the depressed position, requir-
ing twist or key resetting. Contacts shall be provided to cause tripping of the associated circuit, prevent
restart of the circuit and bring up an alarm in the Central Control Room.
Stop pushbuttons mounted local to motors shall trip the associated circuit breaker or contactor regard-
less of the control position selected.
The contacts of all pushbuttons shall be shrouded to minimise the ingress of dust, and accidental con-
tact, and shall be amply rated for voltage and current for the circuits in which they are used.
2.49 Miniature Circuit Breakers, Fuses and Links
Facilities shall be provided for protection and isolation of circuits associated with protection, control
and instruments. They shall be of approved type and grouped, as far as possible, according to their
functions. They shall be clearly labelled, both on the panels and the associated wiring diagrams.
Facilities shall be provided to enable the control circuits for any circuit breaker to be individually isolat-
ed for maintenance purposes.
Facilities for protection and isolation of control and tripping circuits are preferably to be mounted on
the outside of control panels in approved positions.
All fuses shall incorporate HRC cartridges to BS 88 or IEC 60269.Fuse holders shall be designed to
lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of screw clamping devices.
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB's) shall comply with IEC 60898.Where MCB's are used on control,
protection and alarm supplies, tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed.

Volume 2 Page 49
2.50 Earthing and Bonding
The main earthing conductors for connection to all electrical equipment, cables, motors, panels, etc.,
shall be provided for connection to the main earthing system.
All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be bonded to an earth terminal or
terminals mounted on the equipment and readily accessible.
All equipment terminals provided for an external earth connection shall be identified by indelible
means unless such terminals are directly and visibly mounted on metallic equipment frames or earth
bars, when such marking may be omitted.
Identification marks for earth terminals shall comprise the colours green/yellow in combination or a re-
production of the symbol no. 5019 in IEC 60417.
Assemblies containing electrical equipment, including switchboards, control boards and control desks,
shall be provided with a separate copper earth bar running the length of the assembly. All metal parts
and the earth terminal or terminals shall be bonded to this earth bar. Earthing connections shall not
depend upon the bolting of steel/steel joints between adjacent panels or cubicles.
Earth bars shall be of adequate size and suitably supported and braced to carry the rated short circuit
current for the associated electrical circuits for the rated short-circuit current duration, without damage
or excessive heating likely to damage joints, associated or adjacent components.
Switchgear and control gear assemblies shall be provided with two or more earth terminals unless
otherwise specified. The copper earth bar shall be sized to withstand the maximum system earth fault
current for three seconds without deterioration.
The size of the copper earth bar in control panels, control desks or similar enclosures containing low
voltage apparatus shall be such as to comply with the specified requirements for withstanding pro-
spective short-circuit currents. The size of this bar shall be a minimum of 100 mm cross-sectional ar-
ea, providing that sufficient mechanical integrity is provided by adequate supports and terminals, and
also providing this size is not less than the size of the largest incoming power supply conductor.
The metal cases of all instruments, relays and the like shall be connected to the panel earth bars by
copper conductors of not less than 1.5 mm cross-sectional area, or by other means to the approval of
the Engineer.
If the plant contains electronic equipment that is vulnerable to possible conductive interference, or if
the equipment generates electrical noise, which could interfere with other plant or equipment, then
separate earths may be supplied and the actual means of interconnecting with the station earth sys-
tem shall be agreed with the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 50
3. HV Switchgear and Neutral Earthing

Equipment
3.1 Scope
These clauses describe the general technical requirements for the new 400, 230 kV and 33 kV Air In-
sulated Switchgear (AIS) and shall be read in conjunction with the project requirements, schedules
and drawings in the specification.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the switchgear has been designed, built and installed in ac-
cordance with the relevant international standards and the specification. It shall also operate and per-
form on a site in accordance with the requirements of the specification and in the environment defined
therein.
The design shall be proven by the submission of test certificates at the time of bidding covering all
specified tests deemed to be pertinent to the plant and to the conditions in which it will operate.
The requirement for switchgear spares, tools and appliances, including test, maintenance and han-
dling equipment shall be as stated in the Bid document. All devices necessary for operation and earth-
ing shall be provided within the contract price.
Installation, testing and commissioning of all switchgears shall be done by the switchgear engineer(s)
of the switchgear(s) manufacturer(s).
3.2 References
3.2.1 IEC Standards
Except where modified by this specification, the switchgear and/or accessories shall be designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest IEC Standards and other publications quoted in
these Standards.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformers

IEC 60060 High voltage test techniques
IEC 60071 Insulation coordination
IEC 60099 Surge arresters
IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages
IEC 60265-1 High-voltage switches - Part 1: Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and less
than 52 kV
IEC 60265-2 High-voltage switches. Part 2: High-voltage switches for rated voltages of 52
kV and above
IEC 60269 Low voltage fuses
IEC 60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal
voltages greater than 1000V
IEC 60282 High voltage fuses.

Volume 2 Page 51
IEC 60305 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000V - Ceramic or
glass insulator units for ac systems - Characteristics of insulator units of the
cap and pin type.
IEC 60358 Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
IEC 60364 Electrical installation of buildings
IEC 60376 Specification of technical grade sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in electrical
equipment
IEC 60383 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000V
IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions
IEC 60865-1 Short-circuit currents - Calculation of effects
IEC 61639 Direct connection between power transformers and gas insulated metal en-
closed switchgear for rated voltages of 72.5 kV and above
IEC 62155 Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass insulators for use in
electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000 V
IEC 62271-1 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 1: common specifications
IEC 62271-100 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 100: AC circuit breakers
IEC 62271-103 Switches for rated voltage above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
IEC 62271-104 Switches for rated voltage of 52 kV and above
IEC 62271-102 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 102: AC disconnectors and earthing
switches
IEC 62271-200 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 200: A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
IEC 62271-203 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 203: Gas insulated metal-enclosed
switchgear for rated voltages 52 kV and above
IEC 62271-209 HV switchgear and controlgear - part 209: Cable connections for gas insulated
metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 52 kV and above
BS 7884 Specifications for hard-drawn copper and copper cadmium conductors for
overhead power transmission purposes
BS EN 60383-2 Insulators for overhead lines with voltage greater than 1000V.
BS 159 Specifications for HV busbars and busbar connections
BS 215S Specifications for aluminium conductors for overhead transmission
BS EN 13600 Specifications for high conductivity copper tubes for electrical purposes
BS 2898 Specifications for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes. Strip with drawn
or rolled edges.
BS 3288 Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines.
BS 3938 Current Transformers
BS 6651 Lightning Protection
BS 7354 Code of practice for design of HV open terminal stations.

Volume 2 Page 52
3.3 Design Principles
3.3.1 General Requirement
The normal operations will be effected from the National Load Dispatching Centre (NLDC) at Rampu-
ra. The Bidder shall take into consideration the unmanned operation of the substation in his design
(No operators are necessary in the new substation control rooms).
Control facilities shall be simple and clearly designated with the respective function and instructions on
operation and maintenance shall be unambiguous.
The following provisions shall be made for control and indications:
Local control cubicle to equipment - control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches
where power operated, complete with electrical indications, mimic diagram, gauges and alarm an-
nunciator.
Remote control panel in the control room on each substation site - control of circuit breakers, dis-
connectors and earthing switches where power operated, complete with electrical position indica-
tions, mimic diagram in each instance.
Supervisory control from NLDC - provision of control of circuit breakers and disconnectors switches
where power operated, with position indication in each instance.
All necessary local/remote and remote/supervisory control relays, interposing relays and selector
switches are to be provided as part of this Contract.
Circuit identifying labels shall be fitted at the front and rear of each individual circuit assembly and on
the local control cubicle. In case of labels not visible when standing on the floor, additional name plate
shall be fixed at a suitable location.
A single line diagram shall be marked along each bay showing the location of all items of switchgear.
In the event of leakage of SF6 gas from any compartment, equipment shall withstand rated voltage
with SF6 at atmospheric pressure.
The insulation levels shall be able to withstand test voltages in accordance with the relevant standards
for Synchronising Operation for Breakers.
Busbar connections and enclosures shall be designed to absorb the effects of thermal expansion
without application of stress to the supporting structure.
3.3.2 Availability for Maintenance, Repair, Extensions, Testing
Maintenance, repair or extension (MRE) and HV testing on one busbar with directly connected appa-
ratuses shall be possible with the other busbar in normal operation.
MRE testing on one switchgear bay shall be possible with all other switchgear bays in normal opera-
tion on one busbar.

Volume 2 Page 53
MRE testing on/of bus coupler bay shall be possible with one busbar at the time in normal operation
and all switchgear bays in normal operation.
Maintenance access to each module shall be possible without necessitating the outage of adjacent
modules.
3.4 Outdoor HV Switchgear
3.4.1 Switchgear - Design and Performance
The switchgear shall be suitable for outdoor installation and capable of continuous operation under the
climatic conditions existing on site.
It shall be designed to comply with this Specification and relevant IEC and British Standards where
applicable. Deviations from these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in Schedule F of De-
partures in Volume 3.
In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be included in
the Contract.
The disposition of plant in any substation is to be such that the operation of any item of plant under the
specified service conditions, shall in no way create a condition that could adversely affect the perfor-
mance of adjacent circuit breakers or any associated equipment.
The Contractor is to ensure that the complete substation installation will satisfy the requirements of
this Specification and the appropriate Standards in respect of insulation, fault levels, mechanical
stress etc., and any additional equipment found to be necessary to meet these requirements shall be
deemed to have been included in the Contract Price.
The layout and design of plant and equipment on substation sites shall make provision for the future
extensions shown on the layout drawings and shall provide for ready access for operation, mainte-
nance and extension whilst the remaining sections of equipment are alive.
Electrical clearances provided between isolated equipment and nearest live metal work shall not be
less than the distance data as mentioned in sub-clause 1.2.3 of Section 1 of this specification.
Insulation creepage distances shall not be less than 25 mm per kV of rated voltage between phases.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that insulation co-ordination in accordance with rec-
ommendation of IEC 60071 is achieved.
Dynamic and temporary over voltages shall be assumed to be in accordance with normally accepted
IEC levels and subject to approval of the Engineer.
3.4.2 Current Ratings
Every current-carrying part of the switchgear including circuit breakers, disconnectors, current trans-
formers, busbars, connections, contacts and joints shall be capable of carrying its specified rated cur-

Volume 2 Page 54
rent at rated frequency continuously, and in no part shall its temperature rise exceed that specified in
relevant standards.
Every part of the switchgear shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage, the rated in-
stantaneous peak currents and rated short time current.
3.4.3 Corona
Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise corona or other electrical discharge and radio interfer-
ence. The Contractor is to confirm and ensure adequacy of design in terms of corona performance.
Tests for corona and radio interference shall be carried out by the Contractor as per relevant IEC
standard.
3.4.4 Local, Remote and Supervisory Control
Circuit breakers and motorised disconnectors shall be electrically controlled locally, remotely and by
supervisory telecontrol.
Position indication of these devices shall be provided on their operating mechanisms and the Contrac-
tor shall include the supply and fitting of the necessary auxiliary switches for remote position indica-
tion.
For supervisory telecontrol, the interface between the telecontrol control equipment and the control
equipment being provided under this contract shall be as specified in Section 10.
3.4.5 HVAC Circuit Breakers
This specification of technical conditions and technical requirements for Circuit Breakers covers the
ratings, design, equipment requirements, inspection and testing of the equipment.
Here are stated only those general aspects that are meant to ensure minimum requirements with re-
spect of quality and performance.
Other details and specific data are contained in the Technical Data Schedules.
Properties, testing and ratings of the equipment shall at least conform to the latest edition of the rele-
vant IEC and British standards.
The Contractor is obliged to provide complete equipment, even if the details are not mentioned specif-
ically in the following specifications.
General Design
Circuit breaker shall be, for outdoor installation. The circuit breaker shall be with SF6 gas as the arc-
quenching and insulating medium. The circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of IEC
60273, IEC 60694, IEC 60815, IEC 62271-100.
Beside the rated short circuit breaking current, the circuit breakers shall be capable of making and
breaking the excitation all currents, without restricting and generating harmful over-voltage.

Volume 2 Page 55
Circuit breakers with two breaking chambers shall be constructed to provide voltage distribution per
breaking unit not above 55 % of the total voltage, at any circumstances.
The Contractor shall provide and deliver suitable horizontal and vertical supporting structure that shall
be galvanized
Operating Mechanism
The operating mechanism shall be of motor wound-spring charged type. Other type operating mecha-
nism is not allowed. Operating mechanism shall be of maintenance free type.
Operating mechanisms housing shall be made of aluminium or stainless steel. Anticorrosion protection
is not anticipated.
It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breaker in either the open or closed
positions.
In normal operation, recharging of the operating springs shall commence immediately and automati-
cally upon completion of the closing operation.
While a spring charging operation is in progress, closure shall be prevented.
Release of the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged.
Manual spring release shall be provided.
The operating mechanism shall have hand and electrically charging.
The operating mechanism shall have hand charging facility and it shall be possible to discharge the
operating springs, at site, from a charged condition without difficulty.
The state of charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device which shows
"spring charged" when operation is permissible and "uncharged" when operation is not possible.
A provision shall be made for remote indication of "spring charge fail" conditions. Therefore, a spare
spring-drive limit switch contacts and necessary time delay relays shall be provided.
The charging motor shall be connected to the a.c. supply.
The control circuits shall be connected to the d.c. supply.
The state of charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device which shows
"spring charged" when operation is permissible and "uncharged" when operation is not possible.
At the bottom of each operating mechanism cabinets provide the option of earthing together with the
earthing rails, by using the copper wire Cu from the outer side. Connection of Cu earthing rail shall be
adapted to Al material of operating mechanism using appropriate material (electrolytically between Cu
and Al).
Detachable plates for cable insertion rings shall be provided at the bottom of each operating mecha-
nisms cabinet.
Mechanically endurance of circuit breaker shall correspond to class M2.
High Speed Reclosing

The circuit breakers shall be constructed for high speed reclosure of the three poles simultaneously or
of a single pole at a time, as per the Technical Schedules.
Reclosing applies only to the circuit breakers used for transmission line feeders.
The operating mechanism shall be suitable for auto-reclosing (cycle 0 - 0.3 s - CO - 3 min - CO).
After loss of power supply the operating mechanism shall be capable of performing a complete cycle.
Control Circuits
All Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with Controlled Switching Device (or point-on-wave switching
devices) for each phase separately.
The Controlled Switching Devices shall be self-monitoring and adaptive so as to correct the timing to
meet the closing time objective within 2ms or less.
An alarm shall be issued if the timing is in error by more than 2ms.

Volume 2 Page 56
Circuit breaker shall be equipped with one closing coil per phase. The closing coil shall be supplied
with anti-pumping devices. Circuit breaker shall be equipped with two electrically independent trip coils
per phase. The trip coils shall be suitable for application of trip circuit supervision relays.
Means shall be provided to prevent the mechanism from responding to a closing signal when the trip
coils is energized.
Circuit breaker shall be designed and equipped with, at least, the following control devices that should
be situated in each central control panels:
Open and close push buttons.
Local/remote selector with possibility to be locked in "neutral" position. In neutral position provide
appropriate signal.
The control circuits shall be designed to operate under the following conditions:
Remotely, from a National Load Control Centre,
Remotely, from a substation control building,
Automatically, by the protective relays,
Locally, by electrical push buttons,
Locally, by mechanical arrangement.
Each pole of the HV line feeder circuit breakers shall have, its own distinct operating mechanism with
the controls grouped in a central control cabinet.
The circuit breaker shall be designed taking into consideration the following points:
The circuit assigned to the closing coil and the first tripping coil shall be separate from the circuit
assigned to the second tripping coil. This means that there are two different d.c. supplies.
Power supply for the motor operated mechanism shall be protected by moulded circuit breakers. It
is not allowed to cut-of neutral conductor.
Provide enough number of contacts of densimeter to fulfil previous preconditions.
Protective tripping of the circuit breaker shall not be blocked by the selector switch "Local/Remote".
A "Manual/Local/Remote" selector switch shall be provided in the central control cabinet.
A manual operating crank for each circuit breaker mechanism shall be provided.
Close-Trip" push buttons shall be provided in the central control panel.
Housing protection shall be at least of IP54.
A anti-condensation element, shall be provided in each operating mechanism housing and central
control panel.
Provide anti-pumping devices.
A time delayed adjustable alarm contact for "phase discrepancy" condition shall be provided.
Auxiliary Contacts
The Manufacturer shall provide, for each mechanism, the sufficient number of normal close and nor-
mal open mechanically operated auxiliary switches, but at least 20 percent spare and not below
amount specified in the Technical Schedules.
Position Indicator
A visual, mechanical, circuit breaker "Open-Closed" position indicator clearly visible from the ground
level and without the opening of any access door, shall be provided. It shall be positively driven (cord
drives excluded) directly from the mechanism.
Operating Counter
Each operating mechanism is to be equipped with an operation counter.
SF6 Gas
The circuit breaker shall use SF6 gas as the arc-quenching and insulating medium. Depending on the
design, each pole or complete circuit breaker shall have at least:

Volume 2 Page 57
Temperature compensated densimeter. Densimeter should be so designed to allow easy check

correctness contacts of densimeter. Pressure device must be temperature compensated.
Device must so designed to allow easy reading of a gas density, for each pole or complete circuit
breaker, without need for opening of operating mechanism housing or control panel housing.
Sufficient quantity of SF6 gas should be delivered for the first filling and additionally 20 % for even-
tually refilling.
One gas leakage alarm signal (S1) and one interlock signal (S2).
High-voltage Terminals
High-voltage terminals shall be:
horizontal,
flat,
for aluminium conductor,
minimum area of 200 or 100 x 100 mm.
with minimum eight or four holes 14 mm diameter, at 50 mm distance between each other.
Cables
The Contractor must deliver factory-prepared-and-tested all necessary equipment (cables, connectors
and similar) for mutual connection all operating mechanisms of circuit breakers and central control
panel of a circuit breaker (if exist). Cables must be only for connection between operating mechanisms
and central control panel. Cables should be for outdoor installation, equipped with appropriate con-
nectors for fast and reliable erection of circuit breaker.
Terminals for connection of cables within operating mechanism and central control panel must be
equivalent to PHENIX type UK6N and UK10N.
Provide a sufficient space for cables entrance inside operating mechanism and central control panel.
Support Metal Structure

Circuit breaker must be delivered with factory-prepared horizontal and vertical supporting structure
necessary for erection. Metal structures shall be galvanized.
Final design of construction will be subject of later agreement. Metal structures shall be galvanized
with minimum 70m zinc layer.
Environmental Protection
Design of circuit breakers shall be designed to take maximum care of environment.
Insulators
Insulators shall be made of brown porcelain, according to technical specifications. Any connection be-
tween porcelain and flange shall be made with Portland cement. The connection itself shall be han-
dled with such manner so as to prevent retaining or intrusion of moisture. During Acceptance tests
Manufacturer shall present a type and routine test report of porcelains.
Minimum creepage distance is 25 mm/kV.
Nameplates
Nameplates should have data written in English language:
Manufacturer name
Country of origin
Applicable standard
Type of circuit breaker
Type of operating mechanism
Rated voltage
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage

Volume 2 Page 58
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage

Rated frequency
Rated current
Rated duration of short circuit
Rated short time withstand current
Rated short time withstand current of a no-load OHL
Average making time
Rated operating sequence
Rated gas pressure on 20C
Mass of a SF6 gases
Weight of a circuit breaker
Year of production
Factory number
Factory number (numbers) of operating mechanisms
Special Equipment and Tools

The Contractor is obliged to deliver all equipment and tools required for installation, dismantling, test-
ing and maintenance of equipment. Special equipment and tools shall be of the highest quality and
suitable for field work.
A handle for manual winding shall be found in all operating mechanisms.
SF6 gas cylinder with valve and instruments for refilling and
SF6 leakage detector
All materials to be used shall be new. A list of a special equipment and tools shall be delivered with a
bid. The Employer reserves the right to request any other special equipment or tools during training or
testing, which he finds necessary, free of charge, although such equipment or tools were not on the
list of special equipment and.
Spare Parts
Contractor is obliged to enclose with the bid a list of recommended spares required for operation and
maintenance necessary for 10 years period.
Packing, Shipment and Transportation

The Contractor is obliged to arrange preparation, packing and transport of the equipment.
Each circuit breaker shall be separately packed. It is not allowed to pack parts for more circuit break-
ers in single package.
The equipment shall be packed and ready to be stored for a longer period. All operating mechanisms
shall be provided and packed so as the heater can be connected. For this purpose provide a suitable
cable with a plug.
Sufficient quantity of SF6 gas must be delivered for the first gas filling and eventually refilling.
Inspection and Tests

Tests shall be carried out in order to determine whether the material and equipment comply with the
required properties. All tests on the materials and equipment shall be made in accordance with IEC
standards. Testing shall not impair the properties and reliability of a test object or reduce its lifetime.
Type tests shall be performed on each type and rating of the specified equipment with the purpose
of proving its properties. Detailed list of type tests shall be attached to the bid along with the copies
of the Type tests certificates.
Routine tests shall be performed on each piece of equipment to be supplied, for the purpose of re-
vealing faults in material or construction.
Acceptance test shall be conducted in the Manufacturer's laboratory, according to clause SCC23 of
section-8 of volume-I, in presence of nominated representatives of the Employer, before delivery.

Volume 2 Page 59
All costs including visa fee, health insurance, transport, accommodation, food, daily allowance as
well as costs for the tests shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the contract price. Ac-
ceptance test will be conducted in accordance with the program of routine tests.
Type Tests
The following type tests shall be conducted on each type and class of the specified equipment for the
purpose of proving its properties:
Dielectric tests
Power frequency withstand voltage test (wet and dry)
Lightning impulse voltage tests
Test on auxiliary and control circuit
Radio interference voltage (r.i.v.) test
Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
Temperature rise test
Short time withstand current and peak withstand current test
Verification of the degree of protection
Tightness test
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) tests
Mechanical operation test at ambient air temperature
Static terminal load test
Short circuit current making and breaking tests, including short line fault tests
Capacitive current switching tests
Magnetizing and small inductive current switching tests
Routine Tests
The following type tests shall be conducted on each piece the equipment to be supplied for the pur-
pose of revealing faults in material or construction:
Dielectric test on the main circuit including partial discharge measurement
Dielectric test on auxiliary and control circuits
Measurements of the resistance of the main circuit
Design and visual checks
Mechanical operating tests
Tightness test
Measurement of gas condition
Training for Installation, Testing and Maintenance and Training Plan

Theoretical and practical (hands-on) training and issuance of certificates for the following works shall
be performed:
circuit breaker installation
pre-commissioning circuit breaker test
commissioning
maintenance of circuit breaker in a service
Training shall be on English language.
Training shall be provided in the Manufacturer's training centre for 4 (four) Employer's Engineers, prior
to acceptance test and prior to delivery. All costs including visa fee, health insurance, transport, ac-
commodation, food, daily allowance as well as costs for the training shall be borne by the Contractor
and included in the contract price.
Documentation
Documentation attached to the bid shall include minimum the following:

Volume 2 Page 60
Manufacturer's Quality control certificate

Detailed list of type test for each type and class of the specified equipment
Copies of type test reports
Equipment-related catalogues
Reference list for previous five years
Drawings, schematic diagrams and similar
List of special equipment and tools
List of recommended spare parts
Training plan
For each circuit breaker, in one of the operating mechanisms the following documentation shall be de-
livered:
Drawings
Schematic diagrams
Instruction manuals for installation, testing and maintenance
Test protocol of acceptance testing
All documents, tables and rating plates attached to the equipment shall be in English language.
3.4.6 HV Disconnectors
This chapter covers the ratings, design, equipment requirements, inspection and testing of the equip-
ment. It states only those general aspects that are meant to ensure minimum requirements with re-
spect of quality and performance. Other details and specific data are contained in the technical data
schedules.
vant IEC and British standards. The Contractor is obliged to provide complete equipment, even if the
details are not mentioned specifically in the following specifications.
General Design
Disconnectors shall be for outdoor installation, double column, centre break or three column with cen-
tre rotated insulator, double break. Disconnectors shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60129,
IEC 60265, IEC 60273, IEC 60694, IEC 60815, IEC 62271. Insulators shall be porcelain, brown colour
and follow the dimensions ad characteristics defined in the technical specifications.
Operating Mechanism
Disconnectors without earthing blade shall have three or one operating mechanisms, compliant to the
technical specifications.
Disconnectors with earthing blade shall have six or two separate operating mechanisms, compliant to
the technical specifications. It is not allowed that drive mechanisms of main and earthing blades be lo-
cated in the same housing.
Operating mechanisms housing shall be made of aluminium or stainless steel. Anticorrosion protection
is not anticipated. Operating mechanism shall be easily accessible constructed for exchange needs.
All operating mechanisms shall be motor driven, providing the option of manual operation, too. Motor
shall be maintenance-free unit. Motor shall be AC, single phase, designed for 230 V, 50 Hz. Motor
protection shall be provided with miniature circuit breaker (MCB) having alarm (signalling) contact.
Alarm for MCB outage shall be provided. If three-phase MCB is used, the circuit shall be made
through all three contacts. Neutral phase shall not be interrupted. After the MCB, the motor circuit shall
be positioned with the voltage presence controller (voltage detector relay). Control voltage for electric
controls of the disconnector shall be conditioned by the presence of voltage for the motor supply.

Volume 2 Page 61
Alarm (signalling) and control voltage shall be 220V, DC. Control over disconnectors shall be two-pole,
i.e. both polarities shall be interrupted in control circuits. Selection switch for local/neutral (manual)/
remote controls shall be provided in each operating mechanism. Suitable push buttons shall be pro-
vided on all control operating mechanisms.
Option of mechanical blocking and locking of disconnector at both work positions shall be provided.
Blockings shall have latches (bolts) for prevention of electric operation in case of manual manipulation,
when crank of manual unit is put in work position.
Provide that the crank for manual operation cannot be inserted if the selection switch has not been put
in manual position. When the crank is inserted, the electric control over disconnector shall not be pos-
sible regardless to the position of selection switch.
All operating mechanisms shall be equipped with heater to prevent condensation.
All operating mechanisms shall have lighting, with automatic switch located at the door of the operat-
ing mechanism.
Heater and lighting shall be for 230 V AC, 50 Hz.
The circuits for supply of heater and lighting and socket shall be independent from the circuits for mo-
tor supply.
All operating mechanisms shall be equipped with manual control regardless to the type of operating
mechanism.
A crank for manual control shall be found in each operating mechanisms.
Secondary connections must be made on terminal connections. Terminal connections shall be made
of best material. For AC circuits it shall be for 16 mm2 conductors and for other circuits it shall be for 6
mm conductors.
All operating mechanisms shall have copper latches at the bottom of the cabinet for earthing of the
cable sheath.
Detachable plates for cable glands shall be provided at the bottom of each operating mechanisms
cabinet.
Housing protection shall be at least IP 54. Operating mechanism housing shall have electric scheme
on inner side of the door.
Control Circuits
Disconnector shall be designed and equipped with at least the following control units to be found at all
operating mechanisms:
Buttons for manual closing/opening
Control switch for operation mode local / neutral (manual) / remote, with an option of electric block-
ing in "neutral" position,
Control circuits shall be designed to operate under the following conditions:
Remotely
Locally, via electric buttons in operating mechanism
Locally, using crank for manual operation.
Blocking
Mechanical and electrical blockings shall ensure to avoid minimum the following conditions:
Concurrent use of closing and opening Contractors
Use of electric motor in the course of manual operation
Electric operation when the crank for manual operation has been inserted.
Activation of main blades when earthing blades are activated and vice versa
Mechanical blocking of the main blades when earthing blades are activated and vice versa

Volume 2 Page 62
Auxiliary Contacts
Manufacturer shall for each mechanism provide sufficient number of mechanical auxiliary contacts for
normal closing and normal opening, number specified in the Technical Data Schedules. The auxiliary
contacts shall be Class 1 and shall offer the option of time adjustment.
High-Voltage Terminals
horizontal,
flat,
minimum area of 200 or 100 x 100 mm.
with minimum eight or four holes 14 mm diameter, at 50 mm distance between each other.
Metal Structure
The Contractor shall provide and deliver suitable horizontal supporting structure. The horizontal sup-
porting structure as well as all other pertinent metal components shall be galvanized with minimum
70m zinc layer.
Design of Disconnectors shall be designed to take maximum care of environment.
Insulators
dled with such manner so as to prevent retaining or intrusion of moisture. Metal parts shall be galva-
nized with minimum 70 m zinc layer.
Special Equipment AND Tools

The Contractor is obliged to deliver all equipment and tools required for installation, testing and
maintenance of disconnectors. Special equipment and tools shall be of the highest quality and suitable
for field work. All materials to be used shall be new.
Special equipment and tools list shall be defined by the Technical data Schedule. Special equipment
and tools shall be supplied in a number defined by the Technical data Schedule.
The Employer reserves the right to request any other special equipment or tools during training or test-
ing, which he finds necessary, free of charge, although such equipment or tools were not on the list of
special equipment.
Spare Parts
Contractor is obliged to enclose with the bid a list of recommended spares required for operation and
maintenance of disconnectors.

Each disconnector shall be separately packed. It is not allowed to pack parts for more disconnectors in
one package. The equipment shall be packed and ready to be stored for a longer period. All operating
mechanisms shall be provided and packed so as the heater can be connected. For this purpose pro-
vide a suitable cable with a plug.

Volume 2 Page 63

section-8 of volume-I, in a presence of nominated representatives of the Employer, before delivery.
well as costs for the tests shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the contract price.
Acceptance test will be conducted in accordance with the program of Routine tests.
Type Tests
Dielectric tests
Power frequency withstand voltage test (wet and dry)
Artificial contamination test
Auxiliary and control circuits test
Radio interference voltage test (r.i.v.)
Main circuit resistance test
Short circuit withstand current test and impulse withstand current tests
Earthing blade operation performance test
Operation and mechanical endurance tests
Busbar breaking currents test
A detailed list of type tests shall be attached to the bid.
Routine Test
Main circuit dielectric test
Auxiliary circuits and control circuits dielectric test
Main circuit resistance measurement
Visual inspection
Functionality check and mechanical operation test
Documentation
Manufacturer's authorization
Manufacturer's quality control certificate
List of special equipment and tools

Volume 2 Page 64
List of recommended spare parts

Training plan
For each disconnector, in one of the operating mechanisms the following documentation shall be de-
livered:
Drawings
Schematic diagrams
3.4.7 HV Instrument Transformers
This chapter covers the ratings, design, equipment requirements, inspection and testing of the equip-
spect of quality and performance.
Other details and specific data are contained in the Technical Data Schedules.
Current transformers in the existing substation shall be carefully chosen. Final characteristics
may be different from the characteristics in the single line diagram and/or in the technical
schedules. They shall be defined during the design stage and shall be appropriate for busbar
protection in the existing substation.
General Design - Current Transformers

The current transformers shall be for outdoor installation, single phase, head type, hermetically
sealed, oil-paper immersed. SF6 gas is not allowed. They shall be multi core with appropriate charac-
teristics. They shall be designed to allow secondary reconnection. Primary reconnection is not al-
lowed.
The current transformers shall be supported by a porcelain insulator. They shall comply with IEC
60044 and shall be equipped with:
Expansion chamber/and internal metal bellows type oil gauge diaphragm.
Device for determining insulating medium level.
Oil drain cock and sampling device.
tg measuring connection
Low voltage terminal box
Enable sealing after accuracy class checks (sealing possibilities).
Overpressure device
Adequate earth terminal connection
General Design - Voltage Transformers

The voltage transformers shall be for outdoor installation, single phase, hermetically sealed.
Capacitive voltage transformers as insulation medium shall be oil-paper immersed or impregnate-
mixed dielectric. Inductive voltage transformers as insulation medium shall be oil-paper immersed, on-
ly. SF6 gas is not allowed.

Volume 2 Page 65
The tg for capacitive divider of capacitive voltage transformers shall not be greater than 0.1%.For ef-
ficient suppression of the ferroresonance feature, working induction of intermediate transformer of ca-
pacitive voltage transformer should be 0.5 .
The voltage transformers shall have multi secondary windings appropriate characteristics. Capacitive
voltage transformers should be used as capacitor for HF connection. They shall be supported by
porcelain insulator.
The voltage transformers shall comply with IEC 60044. They shall be equipped with:
Expansion chamber/and internal metal bellows type oil gauge diaphragm.
Device for determining insulating medium level
Oil drain cock and sampling device
tg measuring connection
Low voltage terminal box
Adequate earth terminal connection
Enable sealing after accuracy class checks (sealing possibilities)
terminal connection for anti-ferroresonance control for capacitive voltage transformers
HF connection terminal for capacitive voltage transformers
Overpressure device
horizontal ( or vertical, for voltage transformers only ),
flat,
minimum area of 200 or 100 x 100 mm, with eight or four holes, 14 mm diameter, at 50 mm dis-
tance between each other
Permissible Partial Discharges Level

Instrument transformers should be so designed to have a neglect level of partial discharges. Contrac-
tor shall guarantee a partial discharge level lower or equal to maximum allowed according to the IEC
standards. It is desirable that partial discharge level should be as lower as it is possible.
Outdoor Insulation
Outdoor insulation of instrument transformers shall consist of porcelain insulator element.
dled with such manner so as to prevent retaining or intrusion of moisture. Metal parts shall be made of
aluminium, stainless steel or shall be galvanized with minimum 70 m zinc layer.
Design of Instrument transformers shall be designed to take maximum care of environment.
Mechanical Terminal Loads

Instrument transformers shall fulfil at least mechanical requirements of Class II.
Mechanical Protection
Design of instrument transformers shall provide hermetically sealing of active parts. Secondary termi-
nal box shall be mechanical protection level min. IP54.

Volume 2 Page 66
Anticorrosion Protection
All outdoor metal parts shall be made of aluminium, stainless steel or shall be galvanized with mini-
mum 70 m zinc layer. All screws and other connecting material must be made of stainless steel.
It is not allowed to use material with anticorrosion protection, except metal support structure, which
shall be galvanized with minimum 70 m zinc layer.
Packing, Shipment and Transport

The Contractor is obliged to arrange for preparation, packing and transport of the equipment. Each in-
strument transformer shall be separately packed. Copy of a routine test report shall be submitted to-
gether with each piece of instrument transformer.

Special tests shall be performed on each piece of equipment before delivery, during the ac-
ceptance test
section-8 of volume-I, in presence of nominated representatives of the Employer, before delivery.
well as costs for the tests shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the contract price.
Acceptance test will be conducted in accordance with the program of routine tests.
Type Tests of Current Transformers

Short-circuit withstand capability test
Short-duration current test
Lighting impulse tests
Switching impulse test
Wet test
Determination of errors
Test of secondary winding resistance for PR and TPY class
Determination induce characteristic of a secondary winding for TPY class
Determination of remanence factor for PR and TRY class
Determination of a secondary loop time constant for PR and TPY class
Accuracy class test for TPY class
Determination construction factor for TPY class
Radio interference voltage measurement test (RIV)
Seismic test
Wind pressure test.
Type Tests of Capacitive Voltage Transformers


Volume 2 Page 67
Accuracy class test

Measurement of capacitance and dielectric dissipation factor
Chopped impulse tests
Switching impulse test wet
Transient response test
Ferro-resonance test
Tightness test of liquid-filed electromagnetic unit
Voltage and phase accuracy test
Type Test of Inductive Voltage Transformers

Switching impulse test
Power frequency voltage wet test
Determination of voltage and phase errors
Seismic test
Wind pressure test
Measurement of capacitance and dielectric dissipation factor
Chopped impulse tests
Transient response test
Tightness test of liquid-filed electromagnetic unit
Routine Tests
Routine Tests - Current Transformers
Verification of terminal markings
Power frequency withstand tests on primary windings
Partial discharge measurement
Measurement of capacitance
Measurement of dielectric dissipation factor (tg)
Power frequency withstand tests on secondary windings
Power frequency withstand tests between sections
Inter-turn overvoltage test
Insulation resistant test
Instrument security factor test
Security factor test
Accuracy class test
Galvanizing test
Routine Tests - Capacitive Voltage Transformers
On capacitive divider of capacitive voltage transformers:

Volume 2 Page 68
Measurement of dissipation factor (tg)

Power frequency withstand tests
Measurement of capacitance (again)
Measurement of dissipation factor (tg)( again)
Measurement of capacitance separately 1 and 2
Power frequency withstand tests on low voltage terminals of capacitive divider.
On electromagnetic unit of capacitive voltage transformer:
Power frequency withstand tests
Power frequency withstand tests on low voltage terminals of capacitive divider
Power frequency withstand tests on secondary windings
On complete of capacitive voltage transformer:
Accuracy class test
Galvanizing test
Routine Tests - Inductive Voltage Transformers
Measurement of dissipation factor (tg) 2 kV
Power frequency withstand tests on low voltage terminals.
Power frequency withstand tests on secondary windings.
Accuracy class test
Galvanizing test
Special Tests- Inductive Voltage Transformers

High frequency transient voltage test
Over pressure device test
Documentation
List of special equipment and tools, if any
List of recommended spare parts, if any
For each instrument transformer, the following documentation shall be delivered:
Drawings
Schematic diagrams

Volume 2 Page 69
3.4.8 Surge Arresters
This section covers the ratings, design, equipment requirements, inspection and testing of the equip-
spect of quality and performance. Other details and specific data are contained in the Technical Data
Schedules.
General Design
Surge arresters will be metal-oxide, gapless, outdoor. Design shall comply with the requirements of
IEC 60099 and other relevant standards, if it is not requested in different manner in this specification.
Surge arresters be shall be hermetically sealed type, composite housing, on insulating basement and
with counter. Insulating basement shall be delivered together with the Surge arresters.
High-voltage terminals shall be as it is defined in a technical schedule:
Vertical,
Flat,
For aluminium conductor,
Minimum area of 200 or 100 x 100 mm
With at least eight or four holes 14 mm diameter, at 50 mm distance between each other
Insulating Basement
Surge arresters shall be equipped with appropriate insulating basement that is part of delivery. They
shall be fixed and electrically connected to insulating basement. Earthing shall be fixed and electrically
connected to surge arrester directly.
Earthing
Surge arresters will be equipped with appropriate earthing connector.
Surge Arresters Housing

Housing shall be made from silicon and/or composite material in accordance with Technical specifica-
tion. The connection itself shall be handled with such manner so as to prevent retaining or intrusion of
moisture. Minimum creepage distance is 25 mm/kV.
Design of surge arresters shall be designed to take maximum care of environment.
Nameplates
Nameplates should have data written in a English language:
Manufacturer name
Type of surge arrester
Rated voltage of surge arrester Ur
Continuous operating voltage of surge arrester Uc
Nominal discharge current of an arrester (8/20 s)
Rated short circuit current

Volume 2 Page 70
Rated frequency
Line discharge class
Number of a unit position in a set (for multi units surge arrester)
Mass of surge arrester
Year of production
Serial number
Special Equipment, Tools and Drawings

The Contractor is obliged to deliver all equipment and tools required for installation, dismantling, test-
ing and maintenance of equipment. Special equipment and tools shall be of the highest quality and
suitable for field work. All materials to be used shall be new. A list of special equipment and tools shall
be delivered with the bid. The Employer reserves the right to request any other special equipment or
tools during training or testing, which he finds necessary, free of charge, although such equipment or
tools were not on the list of special equipment.
Spare Parts
The Contractor is obliged to enclose with the bid a list of recommended spares required for operation
and maintenance necessary for 10 years period. All spare parts to be used shall be new. A list of
spare parts shall be delivered with a bid.

The Contractor is obliged to arrange for preparation, packing and transport of the equipment to the
destination point. The equipment shall be packed and ready to be stored for a longer period.

Acceptance tests shall be performed on each piece of equipment before delivery
Type Tests
Dielectric tests
Power frequency withstand voltage test of arrester housing
Lightning impulse voltage tests of arrester housing
Power frequency voltage wet and dry test of arrester housing
Residual voltage test
Steep current
Lightning impulse
Switching impulse
Test to verify long term stability under continuous operating voltage
Repetitive change behaviour verification
Operating duty tests
Power frequency voltage versus time
Short circuit test
Weather aging test

Volume 2 Page 71
Long duration current impulse withstand test

Pressure relief test.
Artificial pollution test
Partial discharge test
Seal leakage test
Short circuit test shall be conducted by the STL Short Circuit Testing Liaison and Short circuit test
report shall be certified from STL Short Circuit Testing Liaison authority.
Routine Tests
The following routine tests shall be conducted on each piece the equipment to be supplied for the
purpose of revealing faults in material or construction:
Measurement of reference voltage
Partial discharge and contact noise tests
Seal leakage test
Documentation
Drawings
For each surge arrester, the following documentation shall be delivered:
Drawings
3.4.9 Post Insulators
This Section covers the ratings, design, equipment requirements, inspection and testing of the equip-
spect of quality and performance. Other details and specific data are contained in the Technical Data
Schedules.
General Design
Post insulators should be solid core type post insulators, made of porcelain, for outdoor installation in
the three phase AC system. The post insulators shall comply with the requirements of following stand-
ards: IEC 60273, IEC 60437, 60815, 60672, IEC 60168, EN1562, EN1563, EN ISO 1461 and other
relevant standards if it is not required in this Specification.

Volume 2 Page 72
Post insulators should satisfy the best level of development for this kind of equipment in a field of de-
sign, construction and material.
Insulator Material
Insulators should be made of high quality aluminium oxide porcelain. Porcelain material shall fulfil re-
quirements of a class C130, which confirms to the standard IEC 60672. Insulators shall be cylindrical
with a hard core and metal base. Glazing shall be in brown colour.
RIV
The RIV performance of post insulator styles shall be tested in accordance with the standard
IEC60437. If corona rings are necessary to reach a certain RIV level for a single insulator column, the
appropriate ones shall be delivered with the insulator column.
Fittings
Fittings shall be made in malleable cast iron according to standard EN1562 or spheroidal graphite cast
iron according to standard EN1563. All fittings shall be hot dip galvanized according to standard EN
ISO 1461 with a zinc weight of min. 600 g/m2 (min. 85 m) as average value. Connection method of
Support insulators shall be in accordance with standard IEC 60273. Connection holes shall be equally
arrange on a circle meaning concentric with eight insulators. Holes in upper and lower part of connec-
tion equipment should be in line and so arranged to allow usage of standard screws with six-angle
heads.
Cementing
Any connection between porcelain and flange shall be made with Portland cement. The connection it-
self shall be handled with such manner so as to prevent retaining or intrusion of moisture by a silicone
or any other manner.
Insulation Level
Post insulators should be designed for standard value of lightning impulses voltage according IEC
60071-1. Minimal value for the height depend of lightning impulses voltage in dry, power frequency
voltage in wet and switching withstand voltage in wet where it is in accordance with relevant require-
ment from coordination insulation point.
Dimensions
Rated dimensions of insulator shall be in accordance with values defined in the Technical Data
Schedules, with appropriate tolerances referring to parallelism, eccentric and angle deviation, in ac-
cordance with standard IEC 60272. Minimum creepage distance is 25 mm/kV.

The Contractor is obliged to arrange for preparation, packing and transport of the equipment to the
destination point. The equipment shall be packed and ready to be stored for a longer period.

Type and special tests shall be performed on each type and rating of the specified equipment with
the purpose of proving its properties. Detailed list of type tests shall be attached to the bid along
with the copies of the Type tests certificates.

Volume 2 Page 73
Type Tests
Dielectric tests
Power frequency voltage wet and dry test
Power frequency withstand voltage test of arrester housing
Mechanical failing load test+
Special Tests
Test for deflection under load
Routine Tests
Routine thermal shock test
Routine visual examination
Routine electrical test
Routine mechanical test
Acceptance Tests
The following tests shall be conducted:
Verification of dimensions
Temperature cycle test
Dimension tests
Mechanical test
Puncture test
Porosity test
Galvanizing test
Documentation
Drawings
Following documentation shall be delivered together with the equipment:
Drawings

Volume 2 Page 74
4. Power Transformers
4.1 Scope
These clauses describe the general technical requirements for power transformers and shall be read
in conjunction with the schedule of requirements.
Installation, testing and commissioning of power transformers shall be done by the Manufacturer(s)'
Engineer(s).
4.2 References
4.2.1 IEC Standards
IEC 60076 Power transformers

IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for ac voltages above 1000V
IEC 60044-2 Voltage transformers
IEC 60044-5 - ditto -
IEC 60214-1 On load tap changers
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 62155 Tests on hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment
IEC 60289 Reactors and Earthing Transformers
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and switchgear
IEC 60354 Loading guide for oil immersed power transformers
IEC 60422 Supervision and maintenance guide for mineral insulating oils in electrical equip-
ment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
BS61 Specification for threads for light gauge copper tubes and fittings
BS EN 10220 Specification for dimensions and masses per unit length of welded and seamless
steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes
BS EN 1092 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated)
BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands
BS 6346 Specification for PVC insulated cables for electricity supply
BS 6435 Specification for unfilled enclosures for the dry termination of HV cables for trans-
formers and reactors
BS 7354 Code of practice for design of HV open terminal stations
BS EN 10137 Specification for hot rolled quenched and tempered weldable plates

Volume 2 Page 75
4.2.3 BS European Standards
BS EN 10029 Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolledsteel
plates 3mm thick and above
4.3 Power Transformers
4.3.1 Types of Transformers and Operating Conditions
General
The transformers shall be oil immersed and suitable for outdoor installation and shall comply with IEC
60076, Parts 1 to 5 inclusive.
Electrical clearances shall not be less than those in the appropriate sections of BS 7354, or as stated
in the System Electrical Parameters in Section-1 of Volume 2 of 3, whichever is the greater.
Cooling
The types of cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule A of Requirements, Appendix A2 in Schedule
A of Volume 1 of 3 and the letters relating to the method of cooling used in this Specification and
Schedules shall be in accordance with IEC 60076.
Where a combination of two methods of cooling is applied to one transformer, as for ONAN/ONAF
units, the transformer shall be capable of operating under the ONAN condition up to half full load or
more as stated in the Schedule of Requirements, after which the cooling equipment is to come into
operation and the Transformer will operate as an ONAF unit.
Transformers shall be fitted with at least two coolers or two banks of radiators each capable of dissi-
pating 50 per cent of the losses at continuous maximum rating. They shall be capable of remaining in
operation at full load for 20 minutes in the event of failure of blowers associated with one half of cool-
ers or radiators, without the calculated winding hot spot temperature exceeding 140C.
Failure of one fan in each group of blowers shall not reduce the continuous maximum rating of the
transformer.
Parallel Operation
Transformers supplied against each item shall be designed to operate satisfactorily, one with the oth-
er, when operating on the same tap position.
Handling on Site
For installation purposes and to permit the moving of any three phase unit, the transformers are to be
equipped with castors (rail wheels). A permanent rail transfer track system shall be provided, integrat-
ed with the transformer foundations. The castors should be able to swivel in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions.
A system of wedges shall be included to stop any unwanted movement of the transformer during its
operating life. The distance between rails must be compatible with the transformer dimensions and al-
so the rail gauge prevailing at existing substation sites.
4.3.2 Continuous Maximum Rating
Transformers shall have the rating stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall comply with the
requirements as regards temperature rise and overloads on all tapings, irrespective of the direction of
power flow and with the voltage of the lower voltage winding at the normal voltage stated in the

Volume 2 Page 76
Schedule of Requirements. To allow for high atmospheric temperatures, the allowable temperature
rises shall be reduced in accordance with IEC 60076-Part 2.
The overload capability shall be in accordance with IEC 60354.
4.3.3 Electrical Connections
Transformer windings shall be connected in accordance with the IEC 60076 group symbol specified in
the Schedule of Requirements.
All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed, subject to approval, mechanically crimped
joints may be used for round stranded conductors on tapping, bushing or earthing connections and on
bundle conductors where design has been proved by type test and application is subject to rigorous
quality control.
4.3.4 Ability to Withstand Short Circuit
General
All transformers shall be capable of withstanding, on any tappings and without damage, the thermal
and dynamic effects of external short circuits under the conditions stated in IEC 60076 Part 5. For this
purpose the design short circuit level for each system voltage is stated in the Schedule of Require-
ments.
Calculations and Tests

Evidence shall be submitted with the Bid as to the extent to which the Manufacturer has proved, or is
able to prove, either by calculation or test, the ability of the specified Transformers to withstand short
circuit.
The Bidder shall provide with his bid a brief description of those transformers, or parts thereof, which
have been subjected to short circuit test or for which short circuit calculations are available. It is pre-
ferred that this information relates to designs comparable with the transformers offered, but, in the
event this is not so, the Engineer reserves the fight to require calculations to prove that the design of
transformers offered will satisfactorily comply with this clause.
4.3.5 Stabilizing Windings
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Requirements, the product of the number of turns of the
stabilizing windings and the cross- sectional area of one such turn must not be less than 33 percent
of the corresponding product for the untapped main winding.
When required by the Schedule of Requirements, the stabilizing winding shall be capable of carrying
continuously the load specified therein.
4.3.6 Losses and Evaluation of Losses
Guaranteed values for component losses of the total loss of the transformers shall be as low as is
consistent with transport restrictions, reliability and economic use of materials, shall be as stated in the
Schedule B of Particulars and Guarantees.

Volume 2 Page 77
For the evaluation of the bid as per section 3 (Evaluation and qualification criteria) capitalization cost
(Evaluated price of transformer losses) due to transformer guaranteed losses shall be added with the
bid price. The evaluated price of the Power Transformer shall be the sum of the quoted bid price of the
transformer plus evaluated price of the transformer losses. The evaluated price of transformer loss
shall be:
For each unit of the three-phase transformers,
Evaluated price of transformer loss = N * a + L * b + M * c
Where
N= No-load loss (core-loss) at rated voltage in kW

L= Load loss (copper-loss) at 75C, 50 Hz maximum continuous rating in kW
M= Total load of transformer cooling fans at transformer maximum continuous rating in kW (when
all the cooling fans are in operation)
a= Cost/kW of no load loss (core-loss) valued at 600,000 BDT
b= Cost/kW of load loss (copper-loss) valued at 300,000 BDT
c= Cost/kW of auxiliary power valued at EUR 300,000 BDT
The acceptance of transformers (after Factory Acceptance Test) yielding component losses higher
than the guaranteed values shall be governed by either of the following:
(a) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values but within the tolerance permitted under IEC
60076 Part 1.
Transformers shall be acceptable subject to full compliance with all technical particulars, includ-
ing temperature rises at CMR and subject to the Bidder accepting deduction from the contract
Price of charges for each kW or part thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranteed
values, at the above evaluation rates.
(b) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values and exceeding the tolerance permitted under
IEC 60076 Part 1.
The acceptance or rejection of transformers shall be entirely at the discretion of the Employer and
subject to the Bidder accepting the deduction from the contract Price of charges for each kW or part
thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the above loss evaluation rates.
In the event of transformers yielding component and total losses that are either equal to or below the
guaranteed values, the Bidder will not be entitled to any premium in respect of reduction in losses be-
low the guaranteed values.
4.3.7 Impedance
The value of impedance measured on normal and extreme tappings shall be as stated in the Schedule
and minimum and maximum values where stated in the Schedule A of Requirements shall not be sub-
ject to tolerance.

Volume 2 Page 78
4.3.8 Noise
The transformer noise levels shall be measured as a type test and in accordance with IEC 60551. The
acceptance level of the transformers shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements.
Where the bottom plate of the transformer tank will be in direct contact with the surface of the founda-
tion, anti-vibration pads shall be provided under the contract for insertion between the transformer and
its foundation.
The anti-vibration mountings shall be of an oil and weather resisting rubber or other approved materi-
al, capable of operation at temperatures from minus 10'C to plus 80'C. Due regard shall be given to ir-
regularities in the tank underbase and the plinth surface. Anti-vibration mountings for separately
mounted coolers, pumps, etc. are not required.
The total unloaded depth of anti-vibration material (excluding load spreading plates) in the mountings
shall not exceed 40mm.
When loaded to the same pressure as in service, the anti-vibration mountings shall give, at normal
room temperature, a vibration attenuation at 100Hz of not less than 32dB (assuming an infinite ground
impedance value).
Representative samples of anti-vibration material for the mountings shall be subjected to sample tests.
4.3.9 Harmonic Suppression
Transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic voltages, es-
pecially the third, fifth and seventh harmonics, and to minimise the detrimental effects resulting there-
from.
4.4 Magnetic Circuit and Windings
4.4.1 Magnetic Circuit
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges, development of short
circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure, and the production of flux components
normal to the plane of the laminations. Each lamination shall be insulated with a material stable under
the action of pressure and hot oil.
The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an unobstructed flow of cooling
oil through core cooling ducts to ensure efficient core cooling.
With the earthing link removed, the magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts, and
shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2,000 volts RMS for
one minute.

Volume 2 Page 79
4.4.2 Flux Density
Cores shall be constructed from cold rolled grain oriented steel sheets. Design shall be such that there
will be no adverse effects due to core or stray flux heating with the quality of steel employed, and that
when operating under the most onerous conditions envisaged in IEC 60076 and IEC 60354, flux den-
sity in any part of the magnetic circuit does not exceed 1.9 Tesla.
4.4.3 Windings
Transformer 400 kV and 230 kV star connected windings shall have graded insulation as defined in
IEC 60076. For 33kV and below they shall have uniform insulation as defined in IEC 60076. All neutral
points shall be insulated to withstand the applied test voltage specified in the Schedule of Require-
ments.
The windings shall be located in a manner that will ensure that they remain electromagnetically bal-
anced and that their magnetic centres remain coincident under all conditions of operation.
The windings shall also be thoroughly dried and shrunk by the application of axial pressure for such
length of time as will ensure that further shrinkage will not occur in service.
The windings and leads of all transformers shall be braced to withstand the shocks that may occur
through rough handling and vibration during transport, switching and other transient service conditions
including external short circuit.
If the winding is built up of sections or of disc coils separated by spacers, the clamping arrangements
shall ensure that equal pressures are applied to all columns of spacers.
4.4.4 Internal Earthing
General
All metal parts of the transformer, with the exception of the individual core laminations, core bolts and
associated individual clamping plates, shall be maintained at some fixed potential.
Earthing of Core Clamping Structure

The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strap. The bot-
tom main core clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following methods:
(a) by connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure;
(b) by direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the ore and
windings;
(c) by connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth connection to
the tank.
Earthing of Magnetic Circuits

The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only through a removable
link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover and which,
by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core and clamping plates, etc., to be tested at
voltages up to 2 kV. The link shall have no detachable components and the connection to the link shall
be on the same side of the core as the main earth connection. These requirements are compulsory.

Volume 2 Page 80
All insulating barriers within magnetic circuits shall be bridged by means of aluminium or tinned copper
strips, so inserted as to maintain electrical continuity.
Earthing of Coil Clamping Rings

Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent
core clamping structure on the same side of the Transformer as the main earth connection.
Size of Earthing Connections

Main earthing connections shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 80 sq.mm but connec-
tions inserted between laminations may have cross-sectional areas reduced to 20 sq.mm when in
close thermal contact with the core.
4.5 Tanks and Ancillary Equipment
4.5.1 Transformer Tanks
Each transformer shall be enclosed in a suitably stiffened welded steel tank such that the transformer
can be lifted and transported without permanent deformation or oil leakage. The construction shall
employ weldable structural steel of an approved grade to BS 7613 and BS EN 10029. The final coat
colour of transformers shall be to Munsell notation N5Y-7/1.
Lifting lugs shall be provided, suitable for the weight of the transformer, including core and windings,
fittings, and with the tank filled with oil. Each tank shall be provided with at least four jacking lugs, and
where required, with lugs suitably positioned for transport on a beam transporter. Haulage lugs should
also be provided to enable a cable to be used safely for haulage in any direction.
The base of each tank shall be so designed that it is possible to move the complete transformer unit in
any direction without injury when using rollers, plates, or rails.
Transformers shall have wheel bases, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer.
All joints, other than those that may have to be broken, shall be welded.
The tank and cover shall be designed in such a manner as to leave no external pockets in which water
can lodge, no internal pockets in which oil can remain when draining the tank or in which air can be
trapped when filling the tank, and to provide easy access to all external surfaces for painting.
Where cooling tubes are used, each tube shall be of heavy gauge steel welded into the tank sides, top
and bottom.
Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, must not distort when lifted and shall be provided with
suitable flanges having sufficient and properly spaced bolts. Inspection openings shall be provided to
give access to the internal connections of bushings, winding connections and earthing links. Each
opening shall be correctly located and must be of ample size for the purpose for which it is intended.
All inspection covers shall be provided with lifting handles.
It must be possible to remove any bushing without removing the tank cover.

Volume 2 Page 81
Pockets shall be provided for a stem type thermometer and for the bulbs of temperature indicators
where specified. These pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil temperature and it
must be possible to remove any bulb without lowering the oil level in the tank. Captive screwed caps
shall be provided to prevent the ingress of water to the thermometer pockets when they are not in use.
Where called for in the Schedule A of Requirements, accommodation shall be provided for outdoor
weatherproof neutral current transformers.
A ladder shall be provided on one side of the tank as a means for inspection and access to the top of
the transformer. The lower section of the ladder shall be equipped with a barrier complete with provi-
sion for locking with a padlock.
4.5.2 Conservator Tanks, Breathers and Air Dryers
Each transformer shall be provided with an overhead conservator tank formed of substantial steel
plates and arranged above the highest point of the oil circulating system (see also Clause 4.6. 1).
Connections into the main tank shall be at the highest point to prevent the trapping of air or gas under
the main tank cover.
The capacity of each conservator tank shall be adequate for the expansion and contraction of oil in the
whole system under the specified operating conditions. Conservator tanks shall also be provided with
a cleaning door, filling cap, drain valve with captive cap and an oil level indicator with minimum and
maximum levels indicated. The normal level at an oil temperature of 25C shall be indicated and the
minimum and maximum levels shall also be correlated with oil temperature markings. The temperature
markings shall preferably be integral with the level indicating device.
The location of the conservator tank shall be so arranged that it does not obstruct the passage of high
voltage conductors immediately above the transformer.
The pipework between the conservator and the transformer tank shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 4.6.1 and a valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off the oil supply to the tank.
Each conservator shall be fitted with an air cell that shall be connected to a silica gel breather of a type
that permits the silica gel content to be removed for drying. Due to the climatic conditions at site, this
breather shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate. All breathers shall be
mounted at a height of approximately 1400 mm above ground level.
4.5.3 Valves
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following valves as a minimum requirement:
Main Tank
(A) One 50mm bore filter valve located near to the top of the tank.
(B) One 50 mm bore filter valve located near to the bottom of the tank and diagonally opposite to
the filter valve required against (A). Where design permits, this valve may be combined with
item (C).
(C) One 50mm drain valve with such arrangements as may be necessary inside the tank to ensure
that the tank can be completely drained of oil as far as practicable. This valve shall also be pro-
vided with an approved oil sampling device.

Volume 2 Page 82
(D) One valve between the main tank and gas actuated relay, complete with bypass facility to facili-
tate removal of relay and maintain oil flow.
Conservator
(E) One valve between the conservator and gas actuated relay for the main tank and, where appro-
priate, for the tap change diverter switch tank complete with bypass pipework for Buchholz relay
to facilitate maintenance of the relay.
(F) One drain valve for oil conservator tank so arranged that the tank can be completely drained of
all oil.
Tap Changer
(G) 50mm filter and 50mm drain valve where selector switches are contained in a separate tank.
Diverter Switch
(H) One drain valve to be fitted to each tank.
Radiators and Cooler Banks

(I) Valves at each point of connection to the tank and in accordance with Clauses 4.6.2 and 4.6.3.
The two valves (D) and (E) arrangement across the gas-actuated relay are to be connected with an oil
pipework bypass facility to facilitate removal of the relay, due to failure etc., and still maintain the oil
flow system between the conservator and main tank.
Blank flanges, plates or captive screw caps shall be fitted to all valves and pipe ends not normally
connected in service.
The omission of any, or the provision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements, will not
be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
4.5.4 Joints and Gaskets
All joint faces shall be arranged to prevent the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a minimum of
gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.
Oil resisting synthetic rubber gaskets are not permissible except where the synthetic rubber is used as
a bonding medium for cork, or similar material, or where metal inserts are provided to limit compres-
sion.
Gaskets shall be as thin as possible consistent with the provision of a good seal and full details of all
gasket sealing arrangements shall be shown on the Plant drawings.
4.5.5 Pressure Relief Device
An approved pressure relief device of sufficient size for the rapid release of over pressure that may be
generated in the tank, and designed to operate at a static pressure lower than the hydraulic test pres-
sure called for in Section 15, shall be provided. It shall be of the spring operated valve type ("Qualitrol"
or equivalent) and shall be provided with one set of normally open signalling contacts that will be used
for trip alarm purposes.

Volume 2 Page 83
The relief device is to be mounted on the tank cover and is to be provided with a skirt to project at
least 25mm into the tank to prevent gas accumulation. Discharge of oil shall be directed away from the
transformer top cover and clear of any operating position. Means shall be provided to direct the oil dis-
charge to the oil collecting pit.
4.5.6 Earthing Terminals
Two substantial steel flag type terminals each having two 14mm diameter holes on 55mm centres
shall be located one on either side and near to the bottom of the transformer to facilitate connection to
the local earthing system.
4.5.7 Rating, Diagram and Valve Plates
The following plates, or an approved combined plate, shall be fixed to each transformer tank at an av-
erage height of 1500mm above the ground level:-
(A) A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC 60076 Part 1. This plate shall also include the
short-circuit current rating and time-factor for each winding.
(B) A diagram plate showing in an approved manner the internal connections and the voltage vector
relationship of the several windings, in accordance with IEC 60076 Part I with the transformer
voltage ratio for each tap and, in addition, a plan view of the transformer giving the correct phys-
ical relationship of the terminals.
(C) A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs. This plate
shall also if necessary warn operators to refer to the Maintenance Instructions before applying
vacuum.
Plates are to be of stainless steel or other approved material capable of withstanding the rigours; of
continuous outdoor service at site.
4.6 Cooling Plant
4.6.1 Cooling Plant General
Radiators and coolers shall be hot-dip galvanised, designed so that all painted surfaces can be thor-
oughly cleaned and easily painted in situ with brush or spray gun. The design shall also avoid pockets
in which water can collect and shall be capable of withstanding the pressure tests specified in Section
15 for the transformer main tank.
The clearance between any oil or other pipework and live parts shall be not less than the minimum
clearances stated in the Schedule of Requirements.
4.6.2 Radiators Connected Directly to Tank
Where built-on radiators are used, each radiator shall be connected to the main tank through flanged
valves. Plugs shall be fitted at the top of each radiator for air release and at the bottom for draining.

Volume 2 Page 84
A valve shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank.
4.6.3 Cooler Banks
Each cooler bank shall be provided with:
(A) A valve at each point of connection to the tank.

(B) A valve at each point of connection of radiators.
(C) Loose blanking plates for blanking off the main oil connections.
(D) A 50mm filter valve at the top of each cooler bank.
(E) A 50mm drain valve at the lowest point of each interconnecting oil pipe.
(F) A thermometer pocket, fitted with captive screw cap, in the inlet and in the outlet oil pipes.
(G) Air release and drain plugs on each radiator.
The omission of any, or the provision of alternative, arrangements to the above requirements will not
be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
4.6.4 Forced Cooling
The type of forced cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements.
Forced cooling equipment for transformers of similar rating and design shall be completely inter-
changeable, one with the other, without modification on site.
4.6.5 Oil Pipes and Flanges
All oil piping necessary for the connecting of each transformer to its conservator, cooler banks etc.
shall be supplied and erected under this contract.
The oil piping shall be of approved material with machined flanged joints. Copper pipework is to com-
ply with BS 61.
Dimensions of steel pipes shall be in accordance with BS 3600 and the drilling of all pipe flanges shall
comply with BS EN 1092.
An approved expansion piece shall be provided in each oil pipe connection between the transformer
and each oil cooler bank.
All necessary pipe supports, foundation bolts and other attachments are to be provided.
It shall be possible to drain any section of pipework independently of the rest and drain valves or plugs
shall be provided as necessary to meet this requirement.

Volume 2 Page 85
4.6.6 Air Blowers
Air blowers for forced air cooling shall be of approved make and design and be suitable for continuous
operation out-of-doors. They shall also be capable of withstanding the stresses imposed when brought
up to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the motor.
To reduce noise to the practical minimum, motors shall be mounted independently from the coolers or,
alternatively, an approved form of anti-vibration mounting shall be provided.
It shall be possible to remove the blower, complete with motor, without disturbing or dismantling the
cooler structure framework.
Blades shall be of material subject to approval.
Blower casings shall be made of galvanised steel of thickness not less than 2.6mm (14 S.W.G.) and
shall be suitably stiffened by angles or tees.
Galvanised wire guards with mesh not exceeding 12.5mm shall be provided to prevent accidental con-
tact with the blades. Guards shall also be provided over all moving parts. Guards shall be designed
such that blades and other moving parts cannot be touched by test fingers to IEC 60529.
4.6.7 Cooler Control
Where forced cooling using multiple small single-phase motors is employed, the motors in each cool-
ing bank shall be grouped so as to form a balanced three-phase load.
Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a three-pole electrically operated contactor and
with control gear of approved design for starting and stopping manually.
Where forced cooling is used on transformers, provision shall be included under this contract for au-
tomatic starting and stopping from contacts on the winding temperature indicating devices as speci-
fied. The control equipment shall be provided with a short time delay device to prevent the starting of
more than one motor, or group of motors in the case of multiple cooling, at a time.
Where motors are operated in groups, the group protection shall be arranged so that it will operate
satisfactorily in the event of a fault occurring in a single motor.
The control arrangements are to be designed to prevent the starting of motors totalling more than
15kW simultaneously, either manually or automatically. Phase failure relays are to be provided in the
main cooler supply circuit.
All contacts and other parts that may require periodic renewal, adjustment or inspection shall be readi-
ly accessible.
All wiring for the control gear accommodated in the marshalling kiosk, together with all necessary ca-
ble boxes and terminations and all wiring between the marshalling kiosk and the motors, shall be in-
cluded in the contract.
An alarm of indicating "Transformer Cooling Fault" is to be provided and initiated in the event of any
ventilation/cooling motor trip, or failure of either main or control supplies.

Volume 2 Page 86
4.7 Voltage Control
4.7.1 General
Transformers shall be provided with tap changers for varying the effective transformation ratio. Control
schemes shall utilise voltage derived from the 400V, 3 phase, 4 wire system. Phase failure relays shall
be provided to ensure a secure supply.
Winding taps as called for in the Schedule A of Requirements shall be provided on the high voltage
winding.
All terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked with numbers corresponding to the cables con-
nected thereto.
Tap positions shall be numbered consecutively, ranging from one upwards. The tap positions shall be
numbered so that by raising the tap position the LV voltage is increased.
4.7.2 On-Load Tap Changers
General
On-load tap changers shall be from MR Germany or ABB Sweden make, oil immersed or vacuum
type, and comply with IEC 60214-1 and shall be suitable for power flow in both directions. Only de-
signs that have been type-tested in accordance with these standards will be accepted. Tap changers
in auto-transformers shall be located between the HV and LV windings.
The OLTC shall be installed inside the main tank.
Current making and breaking switches associated with the tap selectors or otherwise where combined
with tap selectors shall be contained in a tank in which the head of oil is maintained by means com-
pletely independent of that on the transformer itself. Details of maintaining oil separation, oil levels, de-
tection of oil surges and provision of alarm or trip contacts will be dependent on the design of tap-
changer and be to the approval of the Engineer.
Mechanisms
The tap change mechanism shall be designed such that when a tap change has been initiated, it will
be completed independently of the operation of the control relays and switches. If a failure of the auxil-
iary supply during tap change or any other contingency would result in that movement not being com-
pleted an approved means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment.
The driving motor shall be rated 400/230V ac and shall be equipped with thermal and over load pro-
tection located in the motor drive cubicle. Proper working of the drive motor shall be ensured up to
25% below the rated voltage.
Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the tap changing mechanism. These shall
be directly connected in the operating motor circuit. In addition, mechanical stops shall be fitted to pre-
vent over-running of the mechanism under any conditions. For on-load tap change equipment these
stops shall withstand the full torque of the driving mechanism without damage to the tap change
equipment.
Thermal devices or other approved means shall be provided to protect the motor and control circuit.
A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be provided and fitted inside the tap change mechanism
chamber.

Volume 2 Page 87
Local and Remote Control

Equipment for local manual and electrical operation shall be provided in an outdoor cubicle complying
with Section 2. A thermostat controlled anti-condensation heater is to be provided in the cubicle. Elec-
trical remote control equipment shall also be supplied as specified in the Schedule A - Schedule of
Requirements.
The following operating conditions are to apply to the on-load tap changer controls:
(A) It must not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear is in use.
(B) It must not be possible for two electric control points to be in operation at the same time.
(C) Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only, unless
the control switch is returned to the off position between successive operations.
(D) It must not be possible for any transformer operating in parallel with one or more transformers in
a group to be out of step with the other transformers in the group. Any deviation in the position
of tap changers has to stop further function of the AVR. (Out of step protection)
(E) All electrical control switches and local manual operating gear shall be clearly labelled in an ap-
proved manner to indicate the direction of tap changing, i.e. raise and lower tap number.
(F) Emergency stop push-button at local and remote control positions.
Indications
Apparatus of an approved type shall be provided on each transformer:
(A) To give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control point of
the number of the tapping in use.
(B) To give electrical indication, separate from that specified above, of tap position at the remote
supervisory point.
(C) To give indication at the remote control point and at the supervisory control point that a tap
change is in progress; this indication to continue until the tap change is completed.
(D) To give indication at the remote control point and at the supervisory control point when the
transformers operating in parallel are operating out of step.
(E) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the number of operations completed by the equip-
ment.
Oil Treatment
Each tap changer is to be equipped with a stationary on-line oil filter facility, complete with time switch
control in case of oil type switches used.
4.7.3 Automatic Voltage Control
Automatic control shall be suitable for control of transformers in parallel. In addition to the methods of
control covered by Clause 4.7.2, the following methods shall also be provided.
(A) Automatic Independent - It shall be possible to select automatic independent control for each
transformer irrespective of the method of control selected for any other of the associated trans-
formers.
(B) Automatic parallel - It shall be possible to select any transformer for master or follower control.
It must not be possible to operate any tap changer by supervisory, remote or local electrical hand con-
trol while the equipment is switched for automatic operation.

Volume 2 Page 88
4.7.4 Voltage Regulating Relays
Automatic voltage control shall be initiated by a voltage regulating relay of an approved type and suit-
able for flush mounting. The relay shall operate from the nominal reference voltage stated in the
Schedule of Requirements derived from a circuit mounted LV voltage transformer having Class 1.0 or
0.5 accuracy to IEC 60044-5 (for capacitive) IEC 60044-2 (for inductive) and the relay voltage refer-
ence balance point shall be adjustable.
The relay bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1.5 times and 2.5 times the
transformer tap step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the transformer tap step percentage.
The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation between the limits of 47Hz and 51Hz. The relay
shall be complete with a time delay element adjustable between 10 and 120 seconds. The relay shall
also incorporate an under voltage blocking facility which renders the control inoperative if the refer-
ence voltage falls below 80 percent of the nominal value with automatic restoration of control when the
reference voltage rises to 85 percent of nominal value.
On each transformer the voltage transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay shall be monitored
for partial or complete failure. The specified indicating lamp and alarm will be inoperative when the cir-
cuit breaker controlling the lower voltage side of the transformer is open and also that when the tap
changer is on control other than automatic control.
4.7.5 Remote Control Panels
The remote control panels specified in the Schedule A of Requirements shall be floor mounted sheet
steel cubicles of approved type, layout and colour to Munsell notation 5Y-7/1 and shall be provided for
each transformer. Each shall form a complete enclosure with lockable rear doors and shall be fitted
with interior lamp, door switch, heaters, cable gland plates for bottom entry of cables and all other
equipment to provide the features specified, the standard requirements (which may be varied to suit
Manufacturer's design) being as follows:
Instruments:
Voltmeter (voltage at the low voltage terminals of the transformer)
Tap position indicator with integral or separate scale to indicate the no-load (LV) Voltage in kV
appropriate to each winding tap.
Relays:
Automatic voltage control
Controls:
Automatic/Non-automatic voltage control selector switch
Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch
Pistol grip selector switch with centre zero
Independent/Master/Follower selector switch
AVR voltage reference adjuster
Indications and Alarms:
Tap change in progress - white lamp
Tap change out of step - amber lamp
Tap change incomplete - amber
Tap change control on "local"
Tap change control on auto/manual
Group 1 Air forced cooling equipment running - white

Volume 2 Page 89
Group 1 Air forced cooling overcurrent alarm - amber

Group 2 Air forced cooling equipment running - white
Group 2 Air forced cooling overcurrent alarm - amber
Forced cooling failure-amber lamp
VT Fail alarm - amber
Supply voltage to OLTC failure - amber lamp
Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitable for operation with the distance between the trans-
former and remote control panels as shown on the Specification drawings.
4.7.6 Off-Load Tap Changers
The off-circuit tappings as specified in the schedule of requirements shall be provided on the higher
voltage windings for a variation of no-load primary voltage as specified.
Off-load tap-changing shall be carried out by means of an external hand-operated tapping switch
mounted on the side of the tank. All phases of the tapping switch must be operated by one hand
wheel.
The tapping switch shall have a spring-loaded captive bolt or other approved means on the moving
part that positively locates the switch correctly at each tapping position. This bolt must be lockable at
each tapping position and shall be provided with a suitable padlock and keys. Moving the switch from
one tapping position to another shall require that the bolt be withdrawn by hand from its locating sock-
et on the transformer tank against the spring pressure.
Tap-position numbers corresponding to the tapping switch bolt-locating sockets shall be cast or en-
graved in a metal indication plate fixed to the tank and a keyed metal pointer on the tapping switch
operating handle shall show clearly at which tapping number the transformer is operating.
All tap-position indicators shall be marked with one integer for each tap position, beginning at number
1. Adjacent taps shall be numbered consecutively in such a manner that when moving a tap to a new
tapping position that has a higher number, the no-load output voltage of the untapped winding in-
creases.
4.8 Supervisory Control
4.8.1 Requirements
Transformer tap change control will be effected from the substation control room with facilities for re-
mote control from the load despatch centre. All necessary connections, indications, auxiliary switches,
relays and changeover switches to meet supervisory control requirements shall be provided and con-
nected under this contract to terminal blocks in the remote control panels. The supply and installation
of the multicore control cables between the remote control panels and the plant/telecontrol interface
cubicle shall be provided under the contract.
The following supervisory facilities are required:

Volume 2 Page 90
Controls:
i) Supervisory selection of auto/non-auto voltage control.
ii) Tap change raise/lower by direct operation of tap changer.
iii) Tap change blocking on/off.
iv) Remote/supervisory selection "override".
v) Parallel/independent control.
Indications and Alarms:

i) Tap position indication by means of transducer with 4-20 mA d.c. output range proportional to
step increment.
ii) Tap change out of step alarm.
iii) Buchholz and winding temperature non-trip alarm.
iv) Tap change control on Local/Supervisory.
v) Parallel/independent, master/follower.
vi) Tap change blocking on/off.
vii) Tap change control on automatic/manual.
All contacts for supervisory alarms and indications shall be potential free.
4.9 Terminal Bushings and Connections
4.9.1 General
Where stated in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers are to be provided with outdoor type
bushing insulators.
All bushings shall comply with IEC 60137 and the minimum creepage distance for outdoor bushings
shall not be less than 25mm per kV of rated voltage between phases.
Outdoor bushing insulators shall be provided with adjustable arcing horns and for rated voltages of
33kV and lower these shall be of the duplex gap type.
Bushings shall be of sealed construction suitable for service under the very humid conditions at Site
and, addition, for the very rapid cooling of equipment exposed to direct sunlight when this is followed
by sudden heavy rainstorms.
Typical sections of bushing insulators showing the internal construction, method of securing the top
cap and methods of sealing shall be included in the Bid.
The 400 &230kV outdoor bushings shall be oil impregnated paper insulated condenser type and have
no communication with the oil in the transformer. An oil gauge shall be provided to indicate that the
correct level is maintained. 33kV bushings shall be oil filled or solid type.
Completely immersed bushings and lower voltage outdoor immersed bushings may be of other type of
construction, subject to the approval of the Engineer but bushings of resin bonded paper construction
are not permitted.
On all condenser bushings a tapping shall be brought out to a separate terminal for testing purposes
on site.

Volume 2 Page 91
Special precautions shall be taken to exclude moisture from paper insulation during manufacture, as-
sembly, transport and erection.
4.9.2 Porcelain
Hollow porcelain shall meet the test requirements of IEC 60233 and shall be sound, free from defects
and thoroughly verified. Designs based on jointed porcelains will not be acceptable. The glaze must
not be depended upon for insulation. The glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown
and shall cover completely all exposed parts of the insulator. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be
unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in
temperature that may be experienced under working conditions.
The porcelain must not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, gaskets shall be inter-
posed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces in contact with gaskets
shall be accurately ground and free from glaze.
All fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and must not enter into chemi-
cal action with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Cement thicknesses are to
be as small and even as possible and proper care is to be taken to centre and locate the individual
parts correctly during cementing.
All porcelain insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning.
4.9.3 Marking
Each porcelain insulator shall have marked upon it the Manufacturer's name or identification mark and
year of manufacture. These marks shall be clearly legible after assembly of fittings and shall be im-
printed before firing, not impressed.
When a batch of insulators bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further insula-
tors bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate
steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected batch in such a way
that there can be no possibility of the insulators being re-submitted for the test or supplied for the use
of the Employer.
Each complete bushing shall be marked with the Manufacturer's name or identification mark, year of
manufacture, serial number, electrical and mechanical characteristics in accordance with IEC
60137:1973.
4.9.4 Mounting of Bushings
Bushing insulators shall be mounted on the tank in a manner such that the external connections can
be taken away clear of all obstacles. Neutral bushings shall be mounted in a position from which a
connection can be taken to a neutral current transformer mounted on a bracket secured to the trans-
former tank. The current transformer will be supplied by the switchgear Manufacturer but provision
shall be made on the tank for mounting to the Engineer's requirements.

Volume 2 Page 92
The clearances from phase to earth must not be less than those stated in the Schedule A of Require-
ments.
A flexible pull-through lead suitably sweated to the end of the winding copper shall be provided for the
bushings and is to be continuous to the connector that is housed in the helmet of the bushings.When
bushings with an under-oil end of a re-entrant type are used the associated flexible pull-through lead is
to be fitted with a suitably designed gas bubble deflector.
The bushing flanges must not be of re-entrant shape that may trap air.
Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised and all bolt threads are to be
greased before erection.
4.10 Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
4.10.1 Scope of Supply
This Contract includes the supply, installation and termination of the necessary auxiliary power and
control cables within items of plant supplied under the contract.
The Contractor shall produce, during the currency of the contract and in any case, before shipment of
plant commences, detailed cable core schedules for each transformer.
4.10.2 General
Auxiliary power and control cables shall have copper conductors, PVC insulated, armoured and PVC
sheathed overall. The cable design shall generally be in accordance with BS 6346 and Section 6 of
this Specification.
All cables installed under the contract shall utilise compression glands of type El to BS.6121 or other-
wise designed to secure armour wires and bond them to earthed metal and to provide seals between
sheath and gland and between inner sheath and threaded fixing component.
The Contractor shall supply and fit the compression gland and make off individual cores on to the ter-
minal boards, including the supply and fitting of numbered markers on each core.
4.11 Temperature and Alarm Devices
4.11.1 Temperature-Indicating Devices and Alarms
The transformers shall be provided with approved devices of Kilhstrom or equivalent for indicating the
top oil temperature and hottest spot winding temperatures. The devices shall have a dial type indicator
and, in addition, a pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding temperature de-
vice shall have four separate contacts fitted, two of which shall be used to control the two groups of
cooling plant motors (i.e. AF1 and AF2), one to give an alarm and one to trip the associated circuit
breakers.

Volume 2 Page 93
To simulate indication of the hottest spot temperature of the winding the device shall comprise a cur-
rent transformer associated with one phase only and a heating device designed to operate continu-
ously at 130 percent of transformer CMR current and for 30 minutes at 150 percent of CMR current,
associated with a sensing bulb installed in an oil tight pocket in the transformer top oil.
The winding temperature indicators (WTI) shall be housed in the marshalling cubicle. The tripping con-
tacts of the winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable to close between 80C and 150C and
to re-open when the temperature has fallen by not more than 5C.
The alarm contacts and the contacts used to control the cooling plant motors on the above devices
shall be adjustable to close between 50C and 100C and to re-open when the temperature has fallen
by a desired amount between 5C and 10C.
All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale and must be accessible on removal of the relay cover. Alarm
and trip circuit contacts shall be suitable for making or breaking 150 VA between the limits of 30 volts
and 250 volts AC or DC and of making 500 VA between the limits of 110 and 250V DC. Cooler motor
control contacts shall be suitable for operating the cooler contactors direct or, if necessary, through an
interposing relay.
The temperature indicators in the marshalling kiosk shall be so designed that it is possible to move the
pointers by hand for the purpose of checking the operation of the contacts and associated equipment.
The working parts of the instrument shall be made visible by the provision of cut-away dials and glass-
fronted covers and all setting and error adjustment devices shall be easily accessible.
Connections shall be brought from the device to terminal boards placed inside the marshalling cubicle.
Terminals, links and a moving iron ammeter shall be provided in the marshalling kiosk for each WTI
for:
(A) Checking the output of the current transformer.

(B) Testing the current transformer and thermal image characteristics.
(C) Disconnecting the bulb heaters from the current transformer secondary circuit to enable the in-
strument to be used as an oil temperature indicator. Links shall be provided as shown on the
drawing enclosed with this Specification.
4.11.2 Gas and Oil-Actuated Relays
Each transformer shall be fitted with gas and oil-actuated relay equipment having alarm contacts that
close on collection of gas or low oil level, and tripping contacts that close following oil surge condi-
tions.
Each gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible pipe connection for
checking the operation of the relay.
Each relay shall be fitted with a calibrated glass window for indication of gas volume.
To allow gas to be collected at ground level, a small bore pipe shall be connected to the gas release
cock of the gas and oil-actuated relay and brought down to a point approximately 1400MM above

Volume 2 Page 94
ground level, where it shall be terminated by a cock which shall have provision for locking to prevent
unauthorised operation.
The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipework and the cooling plant shall
be such that mal-operation of the relay will not take place under normal service conditions, including
starting or stopping of oil circulating pumps, whether by manual or automatic control under all operat-
ing temperatures.
The pipework shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the transformer will pass into the gas and
oil-actuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay must not form a delivery path in parallel with any cir-
culating oil pipe, nor is it to be teed into or connected through the pressure relief vent. Sharp bends in
the pipework shall be avoided.
When a transformer is provided with two conservators, the gas and oil-actuated relays shall be ar-
ranged as follows:
a) If the two conservators are connected to the transformer by a common oil pipe, one relay shall
be installed in the common pipe.
b) If the two conservators are piped separately to the transformer, two relays shall be installed,
one in each pipe connection.
The clearance between oil pipework and live metal shall be not less than the minimum clearances
stated in the Project Requirements of Section 1.

Volume 2 Page 95
4.12 Shipment and Drying Out
4.12.1 Shipment
Each transformer, when prepared for shipment, shall be fitted with a shock indicator or recorder that
shall remain in situ until the transformer is delivered to site. In the event that the transformer is found
to have been subjected to excessive shock in transit, such examination as is necessary shall be made
in the presence of the Engineer.
Where practicable, transformers shall be shipped with oil filling to cover core and windings but, when
shipped under pressure of gas, shall be fitted for the duration of delivery to Site and for such time
thereafter as is necessary, with a gauge and gas cylinder adequate to maintain internal pressure
above atmospheric.
All earthing transformers shall be shipped full of oil.
4.12.2 Drying Out
All transformers shall be dried out by an approved method at the Manufacturer's works and so ar-
ranged that they might be put into service without further drying out on site.
Clear instructions shall be included in the Maintenance Instructions regarding any special precaution-
ary measures (e.g. strutting of tap changer barriers or tank cover) which must be taken before the
specified vacuum treatment can be carried out. Any special equipment necessary to enable the trans-
former to withstand the treatment shall be provided with each transformer.
4.12.3 Fire Protection System
4.12.3.1 General
The new 400/230/33kV, 400/520 MVA, ONAN/ONAF autotransformers shall be provided with Nitrogen
Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS). General description, design and performance requirements
of the NIFPS is given below. It is not intended to completely specify all details of design and construc-
tion. Nevertheless, the system design and equipment shall conform in all respects to high standard of
engineering, design and workmanship.
The system design shall also conform to TAC / NFPA norms. The offered system shall comply with the
relevant international standards.Reference standards are listed below. Relevant international stand-
ards other than BS standards shall be subject to approval by the Employer:
4.12.3.2 BS Standards
BS 381 C Colours for Identification, Coding & Special Purpose

BS 7629-1 Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant electric cables having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire.
BS 8434-1 Methods of test for assessment for power integrity of electric cables

Volume 2 Page 96
BS 5839-1 Code of practice system design, installation, commissioning and maintenance for
fire detection and fire alarm system
BS EN50267-2-1 Common Test Methods for Cables Under Fire Conditions
The fire protection system shall have been in successful operation in for at least last three years for
protection of transformers of 400/230/33 kV and higher voltage class. The reference list along with
performance certificate from end users of the system shall be submitted with the bid.
The system shall be reliable without making any mal operation. Even if undesirable nitrogen gas injec-
tion is made into the transformer tank under normal transformer condition without the internal faults,
restoration of transformer by vacuum oil purification up to re-energizing shall complete as soon as
possible after the undesired gas injection.
In case of an event of the control power failure, the system shall be able to be operated manual-
ly.Various equipment to perform the required fire protection shall be provided under this contract.
4.12.3.3 Nitrogen Fire Fighting System
The Contractor has to make necessary provisions (in consultation with the Supplier of the NIFPS) for
the satisfactory operation of the nitrogen fire-fighting system without affecting the overall performance
of the transformer. Oil filled autotransformers shall be provided with an appropriate NIFPS for the fol-
lowing ratings: 400/230/33kV, 400/520 MVA, ONAN/ONAF.
The fire protective system shall prevent the explosion of the transformer oil tank and a possible fire in
case of internal faults. In the event of fire by external causes such as bushing fire, OLTC fires, fire
from surrounding equipment etc., it shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. It shall accomplish its
role as fire preventer and extinguisher without employing water and/or carbon dioxide.
Fire shall be extinguished within 3 minutes (maximum) of system activation and within 30 seconds
(maximum) of commencement of nitrogen injection.
4.12.3.4 Activation of the Fire Protective System
Mal-functioning of fire prevention/ extinguishing system could lead to an interruption in power supply.
The Bidder shall ensure that the probability of malfunctioning of the fire protective system is practically
zero. To achieve this objective, the Bidder shall plan out his scheme of activating signals which should
not be too complicated to make the fire protective system inoperative in case of actual need. The sys-
tem shall be provided with automatic control for fire prevention and fire extinction. Besides automatic
control, remote electrical push button control at the control box and local manual control in the fire ex-
tinguishing cubicle shall also be provided. The following electrical signals are required for activating
the fire protective system under prevention mode / fire extinguishing mode:
Auto Mode
For prevention of fire:
differential relay operation
Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (rapid pressure rise relay)
tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer is the pre-
requisite for activation of system
For extinguishing fire
fire detector

Volume 2 Page 97
Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (rapid pressure rise relay)
tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer is the pre-
requisite for activation of system.
Manual Mode (Local / Remote)

Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with transformer is the pre-requisite
for activation of system
Manual Mode (Mechanical)

The system shall be designed to be operated manually in case of failure of the power supply to the
fire protection system
4.12.3.5 Description
The nitrogen injection fire protection system should be a dedicated system for each oil-immersed
transformer. It should have a fire extinguishing cubicle (FEC) placed on a plinth at a distance of 5-10
m from transformer / reactor or placed next to the fire wall (if a fire-fighting wall exists).
The FEC shall be connected to the top of the transformer/reactor oil tank for depressurization of the
tank and to the oil pit (capacity is approximately equal to 10% of the total volume of the oil in the trans-
former /reactor tank) from its bottom through oil pipes.
The fire extinguishing cubicle should house a pressurized nitrogen cylinder(s) which is connected at to
the bottom of the transformer oil tank. The transformer conservator isolation valve (TCIV) is fitted be-
tween the conservator tank and the Buchholz relay. Cable connections are to be provided from the
signal box to the control box in the control room, from the control box to the fire extinguishing cubicle
and from the TCIV to the signal box. Fire detectors placed on the top of the transformer/reactor tank
are to be connected in parallel to the signal box by fire-survival cables. The control box is also to be
connected to the relay panel in the control room for receiving system activation signals.
4.12.3.6 Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, the system shall drain a pre-determined volume of hot oil from the
top of the tank (i.e. top oil layer) through an outlet valve to reduce the tank's pressure by removing top
oil and should simultaneously inject nitrogen gas at high pressure for stirring the oil at a pre-set rate,
thus bringing down the temperature of the top oil layer.
The transformer conservator isolation valve blocks the flow of oil from the conservator tank in case of
tank rupture / explosion or bushing bursting. Nitrogen occupies the space created by the drained out
oil and acts as an insulating layer over the oil in the tank, thus preventing an aggravation of the fire.
4.12.3.7 System Components
The nitrogen injection fire protection system shall broadly consist of the components mentioned below.
However, all other components which are necessary for fast, reliableand effective operation of the fire
protection system are deemed to be included in the scope of supply.

Volume 2 Page 98
Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC)

The FEC shall be made of CRCA sheets of a minimum thickness of 3 mm, complete with the base
frame, painted inside and outside with post office red colour (shade to be in line with BS: 381 C:
1988 -Colours for Identification, Coding and Special Purposes). It shall have hugged split doors fit-
ted with high-quality tamper proof lock. The degree of protection shall be IP55. The following items
shall be provided in the FEC.
a nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact manometer
oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve
electro-mechanical control equipment for draining of a pre-set volume of oil and for injecting a
regulated volume of nitrogen gas
a pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release
limit switches for monitoring of the system
a butterfly valve with flanges on the top of the panel for connecting the oil drain pipe and the ni-
trogen injection pipes for transformers
panel lighting (CFL type)
oil drain pipe extensions of suitable sizes for connecting the pipes to the oil pit
space heater
other items, if necessary
Control box
The control box shall be placed in the control room for monitoring system operation, automatic con-
trol and remote operation. The following alarms, indications, switches, push buttons, audio signal
etc. shall be provided.
system on
TCIV open
oil drain valve closed
gas inlet valve closed
TCIV closed*
fire detector trip *
Buchholz relay trip
oil drain valve open*
extinction in progress *
cylinder pressure low *
differential relay trip
PRV / RPRR trip
transformer/reactor trip
system out of service *
fault in cable connecting fault fire detector
fault in cable connecting differential relay
fault in cable connecting Buchholz relay
fault in cable connecting PRV / RPRR
fault in cable connecting transformer /reactor trip
fault in cable connecting TCIV
auto/ manual / off
extinction release on / off
lamp test
visual/ audio alarm*
visual/ audio alarm for DC supply fail *
space heater
others, if necessary

Volume 2 Page 99
Suitable provisions shall be made in the control box for monitoring of the system from a remote
substation using the substation automation system.
Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve

A transformer conservator isolation valve (TCIV) shall be fitted in the conservator pipeline, between
the conservator and the Buchholz relay.It shall isolate the conservator during abnormal flow of oil
due to rupture / explosion of tank or bursting of bushing. The valve shall not isolate the conservator
during normal flow of oil during filtration or filling or refilling. Locking plates shall be provided with
handle for pad locking. It shall have a proximity switch for remote alarm; indication shall be with
visual position indicator.
Fire Detectors
The system shall be complete with an adequate number of fire detectors (quartz bulb) fitted on the
top cover of the transformer / reactor oil tank.
Signal Box
The signal box shall be mounted away from the transformer's main tank, preferably near the trans-
former marshalling box, for terminating cable connections from TCIV & fire detectors and for further
connecting them to the control box. The degree of protection shall be IP55.
Cables
Fire-survival cables (capable to withstand 750C) of 4 core x 1.5 mm size for parallel connection of
the fire detectors shall be used. They shall conform to BS 7629-1, BS 8434-1 and BS 5839-1, BS
EN 50267-2-1 or relevant International standards.
Fire-retardant low smoke (FRLS) cables of 12 core x 1.5 mm size shall be used for connection of
the signal box / marshalling box near the transformer and the FEC mounted near the transformer
with the control box mounted in the control room. Such cables shall also be used for the connection
between the control box and the DC and AC supply source, the fire extinguishing cubicle and the
AC supply source, the signal box/ marshalling box and the transformer conservator isolation valve
connection on the transformer.
Pipes
Pipes complete with connections, flanges, bends and tees etc. shall be supplied alongwith the sys-
tem.
Other items
Oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer tank at suitable loca-
tions.
Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and conservator tank
for fixing TCIV.
Fire detector brackets on transformer / reactor tank top cover.
Spare potential free contacts for activating the system i.e. in differential relay, Buchholz relay,
Pressure Relief Device / RPRR, Circuit Breaker of transformer/reactor
Pipe connections between transformer / reactor and FEC and between FEC and oil pit required
for collecting top oil.
Cabling for fire detectors mounted on transformer /reactor top cover
Inter cabling between signal box, control box and Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC).
Butterfly valves /Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe which should be able
to withstand full vacuum.
Supports, signal box etc. which are to be painted with enamelled paint.

Volume 2 Page 100
4.12.3.8 Technical Particulars
Fire extinction period from commencement of nitrogen injection: 30 s. (max.)

Total duration from activation of fire protection system to com- 30 minutes (max.)
plete cooling:
Fire detectors' heat sensing temperature: 141 C
Heat sensing area per detector: Up to R = 800 mm
Transformer Conservator Isolation valve setting (minimum): 60 litre / min
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder (minimum water capacity): 68 litre
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder (minimum gas capacity, at 10 m
150 kg/cm pressure:
Power supply, for control box and for fire extinguishing cubicle 110 V DC / 240 V AC
for lighting:
4.12.3.9 Mandatory Spare Partsper Substation
Cylinder filled with nitrogen of required capacity per substation: 1 piece

Fire detectors: 3 pieces
Regulator assembly: 1 piece
4.12.3.10 Tests
Reports of all type tests conducted as per relevant IEC standards including test reports for the degree
of protection for FEC / control box / signal box shall be submitted with the bid.
The performance test of the complete system shall be carried out after installation of the system on
site. Detailed layout drawings, equipment drawing along with 4 sets of the operation and maintenance
manual along with soft copies (on CDs) shall be submitted by the Contractor.
4.12.4 Fire Wall
A fire wall of suitable height shall be installed between the transformers to prevent transformers from
the spread fire. The wall shall be made of reinforced concrete.
4.13 Transformer Oil and Treatment
4.13.1 Transformer Oil
The transformer oil shall be new, inhibited, naphthenic based mineral oil, free from additives. It shall
be acid-refined and pre-treated and shall have properties complying with IEC 60296-class II. The Con-
tractor shall supply the first filling of all insulating oil required for the operation of the Plant and, after
treatment, a test shall be made in the Engineer's presence to prove that the breakdown voltage is at
least 50kV at 2.5mm electrode gap.

Volume 2 Page 101
4.13.2 Oil Treatment Plant
The Contractor shall supply oil treatment plant for the treatment of insulating oil for the initial filling of
transformers at Site and handed over the same to Employer at the end of work.
The oil treatment plant is to be mounted on a steerable trailer equipped with pneumatic types, over-run
and parking brakes and weatherproof canopy. The plant shall be capable of treatment of oil to IEC
60296 and IEC 60422, shall be of the replaceable paper filter type and shall have the following facili-
ties:
(A) Oil treatment rate not less than 6000 litres per hour.
(B) Water extraction capability down to 5 ppm.
(C) Reduction of dissolved gas content to 1% by volume or less.
(D) Filtration level less than 1 micron.
(E) Oil transfer, vacuum pumps and heaters suitable for 40OV, 3 phase 50Hz, 4 wire, supply.
(F) Vacuum capability approximately 1 Torr.
(G) Facility to apply vacuum to transformer tank during oil filling.
(H) Two 15m lengths of wire reinforced hose coloured differently for clean and dirty oil.
(I) Facility for "closed loop" operation.
(J) One 20m length of power supply cable with plug and socket at the filter end only.
4.13.3 Oil Storage
As required by Clause 4.13. 1, the Contractor shall supply the first filling of transformer oil. It is envis-
aged that the oil will be supplied to site in 200kg drums and filtered by use of the plant described in the
preceding paragraph into a storage tank prior to transfer again via filter plant into the transformer.
Storage tanks shall be painted internally and externally and shall be equipped with:
50mm top inlet and bottom outlets with blank flanges.

50mm drain valve.
Oil level indicator.
Manhole.
Silica gel breather.
4.14 Earthing/Auxiliary Transformers
4.14.1 General
Earthing transformers shall comply with IEC 60289 and shall be of the oil immersed ONAN type suita-
ble for outdoor installation. They are to have a main interconnected star winding brought out via oil/air
terminal bushings, which will be directly connected to the lower voltage terminals of the associated
system transformer.
The neutral point of the interconnected star winding shall be brought out of the tank through a bushing
insulator. This point maybe isolated or connected to earth directly or through a resistance in order to
provide an earthing point for the neutral of the system.

Volume 2 Page 102
The earthing transformers shall have a secondary winding to supply the substation auxiliary load. The
voltage ratio shall be 33/0.415kV. The star-connected secondary windings shall be arranged to give a
three-phase, four wire supply with the star point solidly earthed. The secondary winding shall have a
continuous rating of 200kVA as stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall conform to IEC
60076.
4.14.2 Electrical and Short Circuit Characteristics
Earthing transformers will normally have their neutral points connected to earth via a resistance which
limits earth fault current to the full load current at the associated power transformer. However, provi-
sion is made for solidly earthing the neutral points and, under this condition, the earthing transformers
shall be capable of withstanding, both thermally and mechanically without damage, for a period of 2
seconds the application of normal three phase line voltage to the terminals of the interconnected star
winding with one line terminal earthed. The current density of the winding under this condition shall not
exceed 50A/mm.
In addition, the interconnected star winding of each earthing transformer, when at its maximum tem-
perature due to continuous full load on the auxiliary winding, shall be designed to carry for 10 seconds
without injurious heating an earth fault current in the neutral connection as specified. The current den-
sity under such conditions shall not exceed 23A/mm.
4.14.3 Tanks and Fittings
Earthing transformers shall be provided with the following fittings:
(A) Conservator vessel with removable end cover and prismatic oil gauge.
(B) Buchholz relay.
(C) One thermometer pocket with captive screw cap.
(D) Silica gel breather of the oil seal type with a minimum capacity of 1 kg.
(E) Pressure relief device.
(F) Filter valve and combined filter and drain valves.
(G) Oil sampling device.
(H) Rating plate.
(I) Tank earth terminals.
(J) Lifting lugs.
4.14.4 Secondary Windings
The three-phase, four-wire secondary windings shall be terminated at a three-pole MCCB unit with
bolted neutral link and gland entry for a four-core solid dielectric cable. This shall be accommodated in
a lockable, fully weatherproof compartment together with a neutral earthing link. The purpose of the
neutral earthing link is to connect the 400V system neutral to earth. It shall be connected between the
transformer winding end and a suitably located earthing terminal to which the system earth can be
connected.
The windings shall be fitted with off-load tap changer to vary the voltage 5 percent of the nominal
open circuit value in 2.5 percent steps.

Volume 2 Page 103
4.14.5 Terminal Connections
The 33 kV side of the earthing transformers shall be fitted with oil/air terminal bushings. The earth
point connection to the neutral shall be via a 33 kV conductor.
4.15 Inspection and Testing
Tests shall be carried out in order to determine whether the material and equipment complies with the
required properties. All tests on materials and equipment shall be made in accordance with IEC
Test shall be performed at all power transformers.
4.15.1 Factory Acceptance Tests
Factory acceptance tests shall be carried out at the Manufacturer's laboratory, following a mutually
agreed programme, in presence of Employer's authorized representatives, according to clause SCC23
of section-8 of volume-I.
Type Tests
The following type tests shall be conducted on the first power transformer of each type:
Temperature rise test.
The temperature rise test must be carried out in a manner that the highest losses are generated
(tap changer in the highest loss position) and the reserve cooling unit is not in operation.
Routine Tests
Routine tests will be performed to detect defects in material or construction. They shall not impair the
properties and reliability of any part being tested or reduce its lifetime. The following routine tests shall
be performed:
Visual inspection and dimension verification
Power transformer tank oil leakage test
Corrosion protection check
Autotransformer tank vibration test
Jacking pad test -checking of tank by lifting of power transformer
Welding check after jacking pad test
Oil dielectric strength
Winding resistance measurement
Transformation ratio measurements and winding connection verification
Measurement of winding insulation resistance (before and after dielectric tests)
Core insulation measurement (before and after dielectric tests)
Switching impulse withstand voltage (SI)
Impulse voltage test; primary voltage, secondary voltage, tertiary, including neutral point (LI)
Impulse chopped voltage (LIC)
Power frequency withstand voltage test, 50 Hz , 1 min (winding, core and secondary equipment)
Short-duration induced AC withstand voltage test (ACSD) with monitoring of partial discharges.
Long-duration induced AC withstand voltage test (ACLD) with measurement of partial discharges.
Measurement of no load losses and no-load current at rated frequency before and after impulse
test.

Volume 2 Page 104
Dissolved gas-in-oil analysis by chromatography prior to dielectric tests, after completion of dielec-
tric tests and prior and after the temperature rise tests.
Tap changer test for no load and short circuit conditions.
Functional tests of protection devices and related equipment.
Special Tests
Within the factory acceptance test, the following special tests shall be performed:
Noise level measurements, in line with the specifications of NEMA TR-1.
Measurement of zero-sequence impedance.
Measurement of no-load current harmonics.
Measurement of magnetizing current.
Measurement of power consumption for cooling system.
Measurement of capacitance (C), factor of dielectric losses (tg), (before and after dielectric test-
ing).
Measurement of the mutual inductance of the winding.
Sweep frequency response analysis (SFRA).
Measurement of transferred overvoltages.
Note: The transformer's capability to withstand thermal and dynamic effects of short circuit without any
damage should be presented by design analysis and calculation.
4.15.2 Site Tests
Tests During Installation

The following tests shall be performed during and after installation on the entire equipment in order to
ensure correct assembly of the equipment as well as to prove that the equipment has been correctly
installed:
Verification of proper and complete erection
Verification of the proper condition of porcelains, sealing and external surfaces
Verification of proper connection to the earthing system
Verification of transformer bolted connections by torque spanner
Voltage tests of all electrical LV circuits
Verification of the proper cabling and operation of all electrical LV equipment
Verification of control and protection circuits and wiring.
Commissioning Tests
Main objective of the commissioning tests is to check proper and safe operation of the equipment, and
in particular to verify and confirm the factory acceptance test results.
The following commissioning tests will be performed before putting the transformers into operation:
Measurements of insulation resistances of windings and magnetic core.
Capacitance (C), dielectric losses (tg) and winding inductance.
Measurement of winding resistance at all tap changer positions.
Measurement of voltage ratio at all tap changer positions and check of winding connection.
Operation test of all protection units, measuring and alarm (signalling) units, Buchholz relay, con-
tact thermometer, thermal image unit, etc.
Operation test of cooling-system controls and alarms.
Operation test of tap changer controls and alarms.
Oil dielectric strength.
Physical, chemical and electrical characteristics of oil.

Volume 2 Page 105
5. Protection, Metering and Control
5.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, factory tests, delivery to sites, erection, setting,
parameterisation and architecture configuration, field testing, commissioning, warranty and lifetime
support of 400/220/33kV substation automation system including protection, metering and control in-
cluded in the contract works.
All systems, subsystems and components shall be of approved and reliable design. The highest de-
gree of uniformity and interchangeability shall be attained, as far as possible. The design shall facili-
tate easy maintenance, fault diagnosis and repair of the components.
Relay panels shall be supplied by the respective relay manufacturers, with relays fully assembled,
wired and tested under their close supervision; they shall be fully responsible for design and engineer-
ing of protection systems, schematic diagrams and mature performance.
Testing of protection functions, including the full schemes involving control, communication, supervi-
sion, etc., shall be performed at the workshop (manufacturer's test field/laboratory) prior to shipment.
The protection, metering and control facilities shall be suitable for the power system arrangement as
shown on the bid drawings.
For standardisation of operating performance, facilities and spare requirements, the protection relays
and control systems, together with complete panels to be supplied under this project shall be manu-
factured by: ABB (CH/S), GE (USA/UK), SEL (USA/UK/Canada), Siemens (Germany) or equivalent.
From operational experience, including -system stability, protection condition, integration with existing
protection and control equipment, capitalizing of staff experience and familiarization with equipment,
protection settings calculation mechanism and methodology of operation, standardization of operation
performance, facilities and spare requirements, the protection relays, control & automation systems in-
cluding complete panel are being rationalized to specific types. The system operator is making every
effort to ensure smooth operation and better reliability of the system and to avoid serious system mal-
functioning; as such the types of relaying to be supplied for system expansion including this project
shall comprise equipment from the following manufacturers/countries of origin: ABB (CH/S), GE
(USA/France), SEL (USA/UK/Canada) and Siemens (Germany). Acceptance of any other relays with
similar characteristics shall have to undergo substantial field trials of at least one year upto employers
satisfaction to ensure satisfactory operation.
All relays shall operate correctly within system frequency limits of 47Hz to 51Hz.
Installation, testing and Commissioning of Control, protection and metering system shall be done by
the Manufacturer(s) Engineer(s)

Volume 2 Page 106
5.2 Fault Clearance Times
400 kV, 230 kV and 33 kV systems overall fault clearance times (i.e. from fault initiation to arc extinc-
tion) shall not exceed the following:
Type of Fault Maximum Fault Clearance Time

Nominal system voltage between phases kV 400 230 33
Substation and transformer fault msec. 80 100 160
Line faults:
Up to 72% of the line length (i.e. 90% of a distance relay zone msec. 80 100 160
1 reach setting of 80% of the line impedance)
72% of 100% of the line length where (@) plus protection msec. 100 130 190
signalling time
These requirements must be fulfilled under all system conditions including maximum dc current offset
and any time delay. Clearance within these times shall be achieved for all types of faults except high
resistance earth faults detected by DEF protection or under circuit breaker failure conditions.
5.3 Protection System
The general purpose of the protection equipment is to isolate every fault on the power system with
sensitivity, reliability and selectivity, and in the minimum desirable time. Protection equipment shall be
designed and applied to provide maximum discrimination between faulty and healthy circuits. All
equipment is to remain inoperative during transient phenomena which may arise during switching or
other disturbances to the system.
Simplified arrangements of the main connections and protection for the various items of plant are
shown in the bid drawings.
Protection relays must operate correctly and predictable, and must be stable during all passing system
transients caused by switching, external unconnected faults and other disturbances.
Current transformers, where possible, are to be located so as to include the associated circuit breaker
within the protected zone and shall be located generally as indicated on the schematic drawings in-
cluded in this specification.
As far as possible, numerical protection relays and products shall be provided. The hardware devices
shall be based on offering integrated functionality, a higher degree of self-supervision and data ex-
change with computer control systems (SAS) via serial communication ports using IEC protocols.
Where appropriate, 3rd party interrogation software shall be supplied to access the database of set-
tings and configuration files from SAS and allow read and modify relay operational settings and con-
figurations.
Insulation of all the related circuits shall comply with IEC60255 or other international standard(s).

Volume 2 Page 107
All protection relays and associated auxiliary equipment shall be of standard construction from the
manufacturers ABB (CH/S), GE (USA/UK), SEL (USA/UK/Canada), Siemens (Germany) or equivalent.
In addition to the fault measuring capabilities, important functions and features shall include:
Programmable scheme logic

Remote communication interface for setting/interrogation from SAS or control centre
Local communication interface via LCD keyboard and/or front panel serial port facilities
Time-tagged status events, alarms, fault and disturbance records
Display of measured/processed quantities
Self-monitoring (hardware/software)
Inter-protection communication
Real-time fault locating (distance relay)
Electronic transducer communication, if applicable
The protection scheme(s) shall include all hardware and software to permit remote set-
ting /interrogation /fault evaluation from the SAS (engineering) workstation or from the computer moni-
toring system.
If existing protection on a running remote-end circuit terminal needs to be modified for any reason, e.g.
to operate with newly installed equipment, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply all necessary relays,
boards, wiring terminals, wiring, etc. in order to ensure satisfactory coordination and performance.
Protection requirements shall include the necessary modifications of the "remote end" (other station
and/or other switchgear part) of any protected circuit/ system. The Bidder/Contractor shall also modi-
fy /improve the corresponding drawings, erect all necessary equipment and perform the commission-
ing with the requirements given in the specifications as agreed upon with PGCB. Tests shall include
secondary, primary and load tests on those protection systems affected by the modifications. The Bid-
der /Contractor shall also be responsible for providing the new as-built drawings for the remote-end
circuit terminals showing the design and engineering changes undertaken in both ACad and PDF for-
mats, in addition to supplying hardcopy drawings as agreed upon with PGCB.
In addition to all equipment and components, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply documents and calcu-
lations to prove the correct functioning of the equipment, and shall ensure and demonstrate that the
setting range of relays and the operating limits of all new and existing equipment are suitable for the
intended applications.
Control and relay circuits, current and voltage transformer secondary circuits, battery and auxiliary
power supply wiring, supervisory, alarm and communication circuits shall be protected against conduc-
tive, electrostatic and electromagnetic influences.
Wiring of CT and VT circuits and (cores) shall be in separate multi-core cables carefully segregated
and screened. The CT neutral shall be earthed either on S3 or S2 terminals (depending on the ratio
chosen) in the respective relay panels via an isolation bolted link. This link shall preferably be located
in the protection relay panel. The primary CT terminals P1 and P2 correspond to CT secondary termi-
nals S1 and S2/S3 respectively, the latter depends on CT secondary tap selection. The CT secondary
star points (neutral) S2/S3, is towards the item of plant being protected by the CT. This neutral is
earthed via a bolted link.
The minimum cross section of CT circuits inside the protection cubicle / control cubicle shall not be
less than 2.5 mmmm, whereas for the inter panel / field cabling it shall not be less than 4.0 mm.

Volume 2 Page 108
CT / VT field cables shall have the colour code of red, yellow, blue and black.
All CT / VT cables shall be of multi stranded cores.
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply block and circuit diagrams of the protection scheme, which shall be
subject to approval. These diagrams shall include information concerning control and alarm circuits,
secondary circuits of current and voltage transformers, circuit breaker trip coils, DC supplies and
communications circuits.
The block diagramsand any other documentation shall be updated whenever modifications are made
at a later date during contract execution.
Current transformer requirements shall be determined to ensure high protection performance. The
Bidder/Contractor shall submit a comprehensive technical report that includes the required CT ade-
quacy calculations. The report shall confirm that CTs will be designed to ensure a saturation-free per-
formance under both transient and steady state fault conditions, taking due account of system X/R ra-
tios, system fault levels and remnant flux conditions in the CT core.
Whether explicitly indicated or not, all necessary elements to coordinate and assure the approved and
correct functioning of the protection system, new or existing, in accordance with the requirements of
this specification shall be included.
The design life of numeric protection relays shall be more than 25 years. The Bidder /Contractor shall
state how long lifetime support for the protection and associated systems will be provided, shall assure
lifetime support maintenance and make recommendations on spare part provision.
The Bidder/Contractor shall give a one-year advance notice of the Manufacturer's intention to cease
supply of protective relaying hardware used in the contract works.
The bids shall include a list of spares required for the first 5 years of operation and additionally over
the design lifetime of protection.
Transformer Buchholz, winding temperature and tap changer protective devices are to be supplied
under this contract, and all necessary interposing relays, tripping relays and cabling associated with
these devices shall be supplied and mounted under this contract.
5.4 Arrangement of Facilities
Control and relay equipment shall be mounted on panels and cubicles as specified and shall be in-
stalled in permanent buildings on the substation sites. The order of the panels shall follow the se-
quence shown on the drawings.
Panels provided as extensions or for erection in the same room as existing panels shall be of similar
design and appearance to those existing. Equipment, meters, etc., mounted on such panels shall
likewise be of style and scaling similar to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all
connections of equipment to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully
compatible with and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment. The charac-
teristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 109
Backup Control panels shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for the operation
of the plant and equipment at the associated substation even in the case of failure of Substation Au-
tomation System. In addition, the plant may be remotely controlled and supervised from the National
Load Despatch Centre (NLDC) in Dhaka.
The Gateway system for communication to the NLDC shall be supplied under this contract including
all necessary items like auxiliary switches, relays and changeover switches etc. All circuits provided
under this contract whether or not they are subject to the system control requirements at the present
time, shall be designed and constructed so that the standard facilities specified can be readily provid-
ed as required in the future.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the protective equipment and
shall submit for approval recommended relay settings supported by design calculations for all protec-
tive equipment being supplied. The Engineer reserves the right to ask the Contractor to get the design
calculations approved by the Manufacturer of the Protection equipment and/or get the confirmation for
the suitability of the particular protective relay for the proposed application. In case the proposed Pro-
tective relay is not suitable for the proposed application the Contractor shall change to a suitable relay
as recommended by the Manufacturer without any cost implications to the Engineer.
5.5 Cubicles, Panels and Wiring
All cubicles and enclosures with their auxiliaries described in this specification are intended for contin-
uous duty at the specified ratings under the climatic conditions prevailing at the location where the rel-
evant equipment will be installed.
5.5.1 Panel Construction Features
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified
complementary equipment required for completeness of the protective/control schemes be properly
accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary.
Panels shall be completely metal-enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof. The enclo-
sure shall have protection class IP54 or better in accordance with IEC 60529.
All panels shall be of free-standing, floor-mounted type and shall comprise structural frames complete-
ly enclosed with specially selected smooth finish, cold rolled sheet steel with a thickness not less than
3mm for weight bearing members of the panels such as base frame, front sheet and door frames, and
2.00mm for sides, door, top, and bottom portions.
Swing frames for mounting of relays with glass door shall be provided. Doors shall have handles with
built-in locking facility. Panels shall be accessible from the front and rear sides after installation at the
final location.
Base frames shall be provided with anti-vibrationstrips made of shock-absorbing material.
Cable entries shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plates fitted on the bottom of the panel shall be
connected to the earthing of the panel/station through a flexible braided copper conductor.

Volume 2 Page 110
5.5.2 Panel Mounting
All equipment on and in the panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the terminal blocks
ready for external connections.
All protection relays shall be mounted on the swing frame. Other components shall be mounted on
mounting plates to be fitted inside the cubicle. The arrangements shall be shown in the general ar-
rangement drawing and be subject to approval during the detailed design stage.
Equipment shall be mounted in such a way that removal and replacement can be done individually
without interrupting the service to adjacent devices. Equipment shall be readily accessible without
needing special tools. The terminal marking on the equipment shall be clearly visible.
5.5.2.1 Panel Internal Wiring
Panels shall be supplied with interconnecting wiring between all electrical devices mounted and wired
in the panels and between all electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the de-
vices and terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels. When
panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring and connections be-
tween the panels shall be carried out internally.
The minimum cross-section of cables shall be 2.5 mm for any secondary wiring of transformer cir-
cuits. The minimum cross-section of cables in other circuits shall be 1.5 mm. Cables shall be placed
in insulated cable ducts with 30% free space.
All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and connected to
equipment terminals and terminal blocks.
Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits, annunciation circuits and
other common services shall be provided near the top of the panels running throughout the entire
length of the panels.
Wire termination shall be made with solderless crimping type and tinned copper lugs, which firmly grip
the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all the wire terminations. Cross feruling shall be
provided at both ends of each wire, the source and destination device and terminal block information
shall be available on the ferrule. The ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the
wire is disconnected from terminal blocks.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the internal wiring
and for the proper functioning of the connected equipment.
5.5.3 Terminal Blocks
All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on terminal blocks con-
sisting of a clamping yoke system, preferably vertically mounted on the side of the cubicle.
The terminal block design shall be such that various types and sizes can be mounted on TS 35 rails to
profile details in DIN 46277/EN. The surface protection of the mounting rail has to be zink plated and

Volume 2 Page 111
yellow cremated. Each individual block design shall have a foot design that ensures a secure fit on the
rail and allows removal of individual terminals from the centre of an assembly.
The moulding design shall ensure that all metal parts are shrouded to meet the requirements of the
IEC finger test (finger-safe) and to BS 3042 without the need for additional covers.
The rated current of the terminal blocks shall be according to DIN VDE 0611-1 with reference to the
rated cross-sections. The current bar shall be of a suitable electrical conducting material like cop-
per /alloy or copper plated with tin lead combination to guarantee the best connection between the
conductor and the current bar. The current bar shall be designed to retain high clamping pressure.
The rated voltage of the terminal block shall be based on the insulation tests and creepage distances
according to VDE 0110-1.
The terminals shall be such that the maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is terminat-
ed.The terminal shall have locking characteristics to prevent cable from escaping from the terminal
clamp unless it is done intentionally.
The terminal blocks shall be feed through clamping yoke type.
The terminal blocks shall be extendible design.
The terminal blocks shall have a self-locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the mounting
rails.
The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-inflammable,
non-deteriorating type plastic material.Insulating barriers Partition plate? shall be provided between
the terminal blocks.These barriers shall not hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without
removing the barriers.
The terminals shall be provided with the marking tags for wiring identification on both sides.
The arrangements shall be such that it is possible to safely connect or disconnect terminals on live cir-
cuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.
Terminal blocks shall be numbered consecutively, preferably beginning with 1, from left to right or top
to bottom.
All terminals shall have two separate pressure clamping points suitable for connection of incoming or
outgoing stranded or solid conductors, respectively, however only one wire per terminal will be ac-
cepted. Terminals with clamping screws in direct contact with the conductor and soldering are not ac-
ceptable. If stranded or fine stranded wire are in use the wire-end have to be prepared with wire-end-
ferrules made from copper und has to be crimped on the wire according DIN 46228 T 1 & T 4.
The following minimum categories of terminals shall be used:
Terminals for power circuits of 10 mm, 6 mm and 2.5 mm wire size

Terminals utilised in the secondary circuit of CTs (4mm wire size), VTs and measuring transducers
shall be supplied with a terminal with the following characteristics:
sliding link disconnect function
cross connecting disconnecting facilities
short circuit facilities for CT and instruments

Volume 2 Page 112
two integrated test sockets for test instruments per terminal, colored yellow, green & lilac
it shall be possible to cross-connect the K-point of the CT by a fixed cross connecting link on the
terminal, not by a wire link. A locking mechanism shall be included.
Terminals for wiring of 1.5 mm and 0.5 mm wire size with bridging facilities to the neighbouring
terminals.
Terminal blocks for protective conductors shall be designed to pollution severity category 3, rated to
DIN VDE 0110-1, VDE 0611, part 3 and IEC 60947-7-2 and coloured green/yellow. They shall be fixed
onto the mounting rail by means of a separate screw and clamping foot mechanism or by independ-
ent, self-locking metal foot clamping directly onto the assembly rail and shall have the ability to be ar-
ranged in the relevant sequences to match the phase circuits.
5.5.4 Labels
The boards shall be clearly labelled with the name of the circuit on the front, at the rear and inside the
board. All labels shall be in English.
Each relay and electronic card in the board shall be identified by labels fixed permanently to the board
next to the equipment concerned. If the equipment is connected to a terminal and to a socket, the ter-
minal and the socket shall have permanent identification labels.
The labels shall be solidly fixed using screws. The use of adhesive tape to fix labels will not be ac-
ceptable.
5.5.5 Miscellaneous Accessories
Plug Point
240V, single phase 50Hz, AC socket shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF
switch.
Interior Lighting
Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture rated for 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz
supply for the interior illumination of the panel controlled by the respective panel door switch.
Space Heater
Each panel shall be provided with a thermostatically connected space heater rated for 240V, single
phase, 50Hz AC supply for the internal heating of the panel to prevent condensation of moisture.
5.5.6 Earthing
All panels shall be equipped with an earthbus securely fixed. The material and sizes of the busbar
shall be at least 25x6 mm copper with threaded holes at a gap of 50 mm with provision of bolts and
nuts for connection with cable armours and mounted equipment etc. for effective earthing. When sev-
eral panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made continuous, and necessary
connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be provided. Provision shall be made for extending the
earth busbars to future adjoining panels on either side.

Volume 2 Page 113
All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment including gland plate,
shall be connected to the earth bus by yellow/green copper wire of not less than 2.5 mm.
5.5.7 Testing Facilities
Software for testing the protection and control devices shall be included in the scope of supply. In ad-
dition, for secondary injection testing of the protection & control devices, provision shall be made in the
panel for current & voltage injection using standard test set and disconnecting type terminal blocks
with facility for short circuiting of current transformer secondary circuit etc. by means of movement of
links from their normal operating position, or any other testing arrangement approved by the Engineer.
5.6 Relays and Scheme
5.6.1 General
Relays shall be of approved types complying with IEC 60255, IEC 61000 or British Standard 142 and
5992, Parts 1,2 and 3 as appropriate, fully tropicalized, and shall have approved characteristics. Re-
lays designed identical to relays with a minimum of five years proven field experience will only
be accepted. Supply record of proposed relays shall be furnished for the last five years. The Engineer
will reject any design he considers unsatisfactory or having insufficient field experience. All the protec-
tive relays shall be numerical type only. Numerical relays shall be configured in such a way that at
least 2 nos. relays shall be provided for each feeder.
The protection relays, shall be located in conventional panels and shall be flush mounted in dust and
moisture proof cases and of the draw out type with rear connections.
Relays shall be of approved construction and shall be arranged so that adjustments, testing and re-
placement can be effected with the minimum of time and labour. Relays of the hand reset type shall
be capable of being reset without opening the case.
Electrically reset tripping relays shall be provided where necessitated by the system of control, such as
for those circuits subject to remote supervisory control.
Relay contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents that they may be re-
quired to control in normal service but where contacts of the protective relays are unable to deal di-
rectly with the tripping currents, approved auxiliary contacts, relays or auxiliary switches shall be pro-
vided. In such cases the number of auxiliary contacts or tripping relays operating in tandem shall be
kept to the minimum in order to achieve fast fault clearance times. Separate contacts shall be provided
for alarm and tripping functions. Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the whole of the
relay mechanisms shall be as far as possible unaffected by vibration or external magnetic fields.
Relays, where appropriate, shall be provided with LED or flag indicators, phase coloured where appli-
cable. LED or Flag indicators shall be of the hand reset pattern and shall be capable of being reset
without opening the case. Where two or more phase elements are included in one case, separate in-
dicators shall be provided for each element.
All Relay settings shall be visible and readable without having to remove the relay front cover. It shall
not be possible to amend relay settings with the front cover in place; other than over a serial link.

Volume 2 Page 114
If a connector for local use is provided this shall be accessible only after removing the front cover.
Where a port is provided for permanent connection to a modem or other peripheral equipment, remote
access shall be password protected.
Relays which rely for their operation on an external DC supply shall utilise for this purpose the trip
supply of the associated circuit breaker trip coil. This supply shall be monitored and an alarm provided
in the event of failure.
Any auxiliary supplies needed shall be drawn from the main station batteries and not from separate in-
ternal batteries in the protection equipment.
Relays, whether mounted in panels or not, shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels describing
their function and designation in addition to the general purpose labels.
Attention is practically drawn to the tropical climate and relay designs should be entirely suitable for
duty under full tropical conditions.
To minimise the effect of electrolysis, relay coils operating on DC shall be so connected that the coils
are not continuously energised from the positive pole of the battery.
Relay shall be suitable for operation on 110 V nominal, 121 V float DC systems without the use of
voltage dropping resistors or diodes
Numerical protection shall be designed in such a way that in case of a failure of DC auxiliary infeed,
the full information needs to be maintained at least 24 hrs. After a recovery of DC auxiliary infeed the
last information and alarms will be displayed and the alarm "failure of DC auxiliary infeed" released.
The relay reset shall not erase the relay memory.
The Numerical protection functions shall be in the form of software such that additional or different
functions, application specific logic etc. can be readily implemented without changes to the existing
hardware. It shall be possible to programme/ parameterize by a portable computer (PC) all the numer-
ical protective relays and the entire relay operating and configuring software and the portable comput-
ers and other accessory equipment needed to communicate with the relays shall be provided.
All numerical relays shall be adequately protected against damage from incoming surge and shall
meet relevant IEC, BS and ANSI SWC test standards. Relays shall utilise a DC-DC converter type
regulated power supply to provide transient surge isolation between the station battery and protection
equipment. Each DC supply shall be designed to protect it from high voltage and surge and provide
electrically isolated contacts for annunciation.
In addition, to all equipment and components, the Contractor shall supply documents and calculations
to prove the correct functioning of the equipment and he shall ensure and demonstrate that the setting
range of relays and the operating limits of all equipment is suitable for the intended applications.
5.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility
In certain cases, e.g. distance protection, current differential etc., electronic relays, or devices utilising
microprocessors are specified and electromagnetic devices will not be accepted.

Volume 2 Page 115
Where such devices are required, they and the ancillary circuits connected to them, such as power
supplies, current and voltage transformer secondaries, status or tripping or alarm circuits shall be de-
signed to ensure that they are compatible for use in the hostile electrical environment found in an EHV
substation.
Adequate steps, by means of suitable design, shall be taken to prevent Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) (generated by sources such as circuit breakers, disconnectors, lightning, radio or radar emis-
sions, switching contactors in dc circuits etc.) or Electrostatic Discharges (ESD) from affecting relay
performance or causing damage to components.
All relays offered must therefore have been type tested to meet the current requirements of IEC 60255
with respect to High Frequency disturbance, Fast Transients, Electrostatic Discharge, Radio Frequen-
cy Interference testing etc.
5.6.3 Scheme
The protection schemes shall incorporate any interface facilities to transform any insufficient contact
rating used in the protection-related equipment, such as protection signalling equipment, to the rating
required in the input/output circuits, e.g. for tripping requirements of the relay functions with the appro-
priately designed contacts.
Any protection relay output contact shall be coordinated with the station requirements.
5.6.3.1 Trip Relays
Trip relays shall be provided, as per requirement of the protection schemes. Following shall be the
main features of a high speed tripping relays:
Tripping relays shall have an operation indicator. They shall be high-burden relays to ensure ca-
pacitor discharge due to panel wiring fault will not cause trip relay to operate.
All tripping relays shall be of the heavy-duty type suitable for panel mounting, and shall have oper-
ating coils, which are rated sufficiently to operate in conjunction with series flag relays.
If necessary, normally closed contacts in series with the relay operating coil, shall be delayed for a
period which will allow series flag relays to operate satisfactorily. All other tripping contacts should
be instantaneous i.e. no intentional time delay.
The operating range of the relay shall be from 70% to 120% of rated voltage.
Electrical reset facilities shall be available for operation from remote and supervisory controls.
High-speed tripping relays shall prevent closing of the associated circuit breakers until reset.
Wherever the tripping relay contacts need to break the DC current, sufficiently rated magnetic
blow-out contacts or other approved means shall be used.
Trip-repeat relays shall have fast operating times (below 10 ms at rated voltage) to achieve an
overall trip time of the scheme within the specified limits.
The trip relay must have a sufficient number of NO/NC contacts to cover all essential functions.
5.6.3.2 Trip Circuit Supervision
The tripping circuit of each phase of a circuit breaker shall be continuously monitored with both pre-
close and post-close supervision facilities. i.e. the tripping circuits of each phase of a circuit breaker
shall be continuously supervised in both circuit breaker positions.

Volume 2 Page 116
Trip circuit supervision relays shall have sufficient contacts for visual/audible alarm, indication and in-
terlocking purposes.
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on DC wiring on ad-
jacent circuits, or due to operation of a trip relay contact.
The trip circuit supervision relays shall be such that in the event of a fault in any one component it
shall not be possible to inadvertently trip the circuit breaker. The trip circuit supervision relays shall be
equipped with a delayed alarm indication and initiate alarm in the station. This alarm shall operate for
loss of trip supply and for any interruption in the trip circuit wiring.
Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with hand/electrical resetting flag indicators.
5.6.3.3 Protection Supply Supervision Relays
Protection supply supervision relays are to be provided to detect loss or interruption of supply of pro-
tection schemes so that the operator can clearly differentiate via the available alarms between loss of
supply due to a blown fuse / tripped MCB and failure of a protection relay.
5.6.3.4 VT Supervision Relays
VT supervision relays shall be provided for complete protection, synchronizing, measurements and in-
terlocking circuitries purposes, for necessary blocking and alarm.
Every cubicle and panel shall have at the top left-hand corner one easily visible lamp to indicate that
an element in the cubicle or panel has initiated an alarm.On the station alarm panel, an alarm shall be
given which can only be reset when this cubicle alarm has been reset at the panel or cubicle. The
panel alarm lamp can only be reset when the element in the cubicle causing the actual alarm has
been reset. The reset button shall be located outside on the door.
Where two groups of relays are used to protect a circuit, the VTcircuits and DC supplies shall be ar-
ranged in a redundant manner so that one group may be switched off without affecting the perfor-
mance of the other group.
Tripping supplies for each bay shall be engineered directly from the DC distribution boards. Any inter-
ruption of DC supply to relays (internal and external) shall initiate an alarm. Converters and inverters
used for energizing the relays shall have their outputs monitored and shall initiate an alarm in the
event of any failure. These devices shall be of short circuit-proof design.
Test blocks shall be provided to facilitate tests by secondary injection of all major fault-measuring re-
lays without disconnecting any wire or permanent connection. The test block shall permit direct injec-
tion of currents and voltages into the individual relays.
The test terminal blocks shall isolate the trip contacts of main protection relays on both sides. Injection
sockets shall be arranged so that it is impossible to open the circuit of the current transformer second-
ary circuits when inserting test plugs.
The trip functions, if not interrupted by a test switch, shall be blocked when inserting the test plugs. All
main protection relays shall be individually provided with an IN/OUT switch (lockable).
The incoming voltage, current and DC circuits shall be connected to the bottom of the test block and
the relay connection shall be taken from the top.
Four plugs for each type of test plug, provided per station, shall be supplied and handed over to
PGCB.
When separate interposing current transformers (ICTs) are used, there shall be a test socket or link to
measure both the primary and secondary currents of the ICTs.

Volume 2 Page 117
5.7 Overhead Line Protection
5.7.1 400 kV Transmission Line Protection
The 400kV overhead transmission lines shall be protected by a full scheme of distance relays with
PUTT/POTT scheme as a Main 1, and by another full scheme of distance relays with PUTT/POTT
scheme as a Main 2. Directional overcurrent and earthfault protection shall be provided as back-up.
Protective devices for Main 1 and Main 2 overhead line protection are shown in the bid drawings. The-
se devices shall comply with the following:
Two stages overvoltage protection shall be provided for 400kV lines. The O/V protection relays
shall have a high drop-off to pickup ratio with adjustable setting range for voltage and time. The low
set stage shall monitor any phase-to-phase voltage and shall have an associated timer. The high
set stage shall monitor all three phase-to-phase voltages and shall have an associated timer. This
shall be connected to trip the concerned line breakers, to start local breaker back-up, to block auto-
reclosure and to send direct trip commands. . Each set of protection will be energised from sepa-
rate current transformers and shall have facilities for independently tripping duplicated circuit
breaker tripping coils and initiating auto-reclosing, breaker failure protection, inter-tripping, alarms,
fault location equipment, disturbance recorders etc. The Contractor shall ensure that the relay con-
tacts used for initiation of auto reclosing shall have the same dwell time as the main tripping con-
tacts to avoid any problems arising from contact racing with the auto reclose relay.
The Main 1 and Main 2 400kV line protection relaysshall be from different Manufacturers. Separate
elements shall be provided for phase and earth fault measurement. Separate elements shall also
be provided for each zone. Phase and earth fault compensation features shall be incorporated to
ensure accurate distance measurement for all types of fault and to allow for variation in the path of
earth faults on the system.
5.7.2 Distance and Directional Earthfault Protection
Distance protection shall comprise at least duplicate three-zone distance relays capable of detecting
all types of phase and earth faults.
The Zone 1 elements will normally be set to approximately 80 per cent of the line impedance. They
shall trip the local line circuit breaker.
The Zone 2 elements will be set to overreach the remote substation and in the case of permissive
over-reaching mode operate in conjunction with teleprotection signalling channels to form a permissive
over-reaching scheme. They shall also act as a back-up time delayed zone which trips the local circuit
breaker. In the case of permissive under-reaching mode protection the overreaching Zone 2 unit will
be used as the permissive element to permit instantaneous tripping of the local circuit.
The Zone 3 elements shall provide a further time delayed back-up zone.
The relay scheme offered shall be suitable for use in the permissive under-reaching, permissive over-
reaching, blocking and unblocking modes. All these options shall be contained and selectable in the
standard relay scheme. The relay should be applicable to all neutral ground possibilities and should be
suitable for the protection of long or short overhead lines or cables, double circuit lines, heavily loaded
lines, lines with weak infeeds etc.

Volume 2 Page 118
The permissive overreach scheme shall operate in a permissive underreach/overreach transfer trip-
ping mode with underreaching zone I elements and overreaching zone 2 elements and suitable logic
to achieve fast tripping at the sending end in the event of a weak infeed at the receiving end. The
weak infeed logic shall comprise a zone 3 element set to look in the reverse direction, which "echoes"
back the received signal to the sending end if the reversed zone 3 comparator does not operate.
To provide high speed tripping when a line terminal is open a 'signal echo feature' shall be provided,
which is initiated when either the feeder disconnector is open, or when the associated circuit breakers
are open.
Distance protection back-up zones shall also trip the remote end circuit breaker(s) via a direct inter-
tripping channel.
Partially cross polarised mho or polygonal impedance characteristics relays are preferred for Zones 1
and 2 for 3-phase and 2-phase faults but other characteristics will be considered. Quadrilateral char-
acteristics with adaptive reactance measurement to avoid overreach or underreach for resistive faults
with pre fault load are preferred for earth faults. The relays shall operate for faults in the direction of
the protected line only. Under no circumstances shall they operate for reverse faults even when the
voltage supplied to the relay falls to zero on all three phases nor shall they operate due to the transient
response of the capacitive voltage transformers following reverse close-up faults. Details of methods
used for polarising the relays to deal with faults close to the relaying point shall be provided. Zone 3
shall be capable of being set as either directional or non-directional and shall be capable of being in-
dependently off set in both directions.
The reach of each zone and reverse element shall be individually adjustable by means of a multi-tap
voltage transformer or other approved method. The characteristic angle shall be adjustable between
approximately 40 and 80 degrees.
Where used in a permissive overreach transfer tripping scheme with weak infeed tripping the zone 3
unit may be set looking in the reverse direction. The reverse looking impedance/directional elements
shall detect all reverse faults capable of being detected by the Zone 2 relay at the remote substation.
Bidders shall explain how this is achieved.
Single pole tripping and auto-reclosing are being employed and the auto-reclosing scheme require-
ments are given in Section 5.11. The distance protection shall be suitable for such a scheme and the
Contractor shall substantiate by calculation or other means that phase selective tripping will be
achieved under the system conditions anticipated in the daily operation.
The Contractor may request whatever information he requires for carrying out the necessary calcula-
tions.
Auto reclosing shall be capable of being blocked for
i) any three phase fault

ii) any Zone 2 or Zone 3 time delayed trip
iii) carrier channel out of service
iv) DEF aided trip
v) DEF back up time delayed trip
vi) Switch on to fault.

Volume 2 Page 119
The necessary circuitry shall be incorporated to inhibit the Zone 1 and Zone 2 phase fault elements
when necessary during single phase to earth faults and during the single phase auto reclose dead
time. These features shall be selectable by links or switches. Provision shall also be made to ensure
that the earth fault elements reset during the single phase dead time.
The protection sensitivity shall be shown to be adequate for the minimum fault level conditions. These
will be advised to the Contractor at a later stage.
Where fault resistance may be significant, the Contractor shall illustrate that the distance protection
can cover such values taking fault current distribution and load conditions into account.
The operating time of each distance protection zone shall be substantially independent of fault current
magnitude. The operating times shall be stated in the Schedule of Particulars and, in addition, curves
shall be provided showing the effect of line and source impedance, fault position and operating cur-
rent.
Under no circumstances shall any line protection operate because of normal system switching includ-
ing de-energisation of the line.
A feature shall be incorporated to ensure instantaneous tripping in the event that the circuit breaker is
closed onto a fault on a previously de-energised line.
Distance protection back-up Zone 2 and Zone 3 time delay setting ranges shall be 0.2 to 1.0 seconds
and 0.5 to 3.0 seconds respectively.
A carrier receive signal extension timer with a delay on reset of 100 msec. shall be provided to ensure
that relays at both ends of a parallel feeder circuit have sufficient time to trip for faults occurring in the
end zones of the protected line.
A monitoring system shall be provided to supervise the voltage transformer supply to each set of dis-
tance protection. In the event of loss of one, two or three phases, the monitoring system shall inhibit
relay operation and initiate an alarm. The VT supervision unit associated with the distance relay shall
also inhibit the DEF protection in the event of VT fuse failure.
All relays shall incorporate indicators to show the relay tripped, zone indication and the phase or
phases faulted. Indication must not be lost in the event of a supply failure.
Directional earth fault protection operating in a permissive overreach scheme shall be provided to ca-
ter for high resistance faults which cannot be detected by the distance protection. The same telepro-
tection signalling channel shall be used for the directional earth fault scheme and the distance protec-
tion scheme. An echo feature shall be included with the DEF Scheme and shall be subject to approval
by the Engineer.
The directional relays shall be dual polarised i.e. polarised with zero sequence voltage and current.
The relay sensitivity shall be adjustable between approximately 5 and 10% of rated current. A relay
characteristic angle of 60 degrees is preferred but alternative angles will be considered. It is appreci-
ated that because the 230 kV system zero sequence source is an auto transformer with a delta tertiary
winding, that current polarising of a dual polarised relay is unreliable without careful analysis. The
Contractor shall be responsible for determining whether such a current signal can be taken from the
auto transformer neutral and safely used for polarising the relay within three months of being advised
of all transformer impedance parameters.

Volume 2 Page 120
The directional earth fault protection shall initiate three pole tripping. It must therefore include a short
time delay to permit single pole tripping by the distance protection. Initiation of three pole reclosing fol-
lowing operation of a DEF aided trip shall be selectable by means of a switch.
Directional earth fault relays shall incorporate a back-up stage in addition to the aided tripping unit.
The time delay range shall be 0.2 to 5.0 seconds or inverse time delayed with a characteristic to IEC
60255.
Neither the distance protection scheme nor the directional earth fault scheme shall mal-operate due to
fault current reversal during sequential clearance of a fault on the parallel circuit.
The effect of zero sequence mutual coupling between the double circuit lines on the protection shall
be described, together with any measures considered necessary to overcome this effect.
The distance protection time delayed back-up Zones 2 and 3 and the directional earth fault back-up
stage shall intertrip the remote station circuit breakers over direct intertripping channels.
Auto reclosing shall not be initiated on receipt of direct intertripping signal. Direct intertripping shall al-
so be initiated in the event of a 3 phase fault in any zone, or following a switch on to fault trip.
Distance relays shall be supplemented by power swing blocking relays. Power swing blocking relays
shall be compatible with their appropriate distance relays, and for distance relays having offset mho
zone 3 characteristics or starters shall comprise an offset mho characteristic which encompasses and
is concentric with the distance relay impedance starter or zone 3 characteristic. Similarly where it is
possible to shape the zone 3 or starter characteristic the power swing blocking relay characteristic
shall also be capable of similar shaping. Where zone 3 is set reverse looking the power swing blocking
characteristic shall be set such that it encompasses the forward looking zone 2 characteristic.
Facilities shall be provided to block zones 1, 2 and 3 of the distance relay from the power swing block-
ing logic as required.
Blocking logic shall be derived by determining the time taken for the apparent impedance of the power
swing locus to pass from the characteristic of the power swing relay to the appropriate distance relay
characteristic. Blocking shall not take place until the apparent impedance has passed through the two
power swing characteristics and the set time delay has expired.
The associated time delay relay shall have a setting range of 50-250 ms.
Relays shall be of numerical design. Electromechanical relays will not be accepted. The Numerical re-
lays shall be design with 16 bit Analogue to Digital converters, powerful Digital signal processors, CPU
etc. The relay should have continuous self-supervision and diagnosis. A local display unit shall be pro-
vided on the front of the relay for measure and display, Distance to fault indication, diagnostics, etc.
and also for acknowledging and resetting of latched outputs. The required software for setting and
configuring the relay shall be provided with the relay and this man machine communication (MMC)
shall be user friendly and should not require any special programming knowledge. It should be possi-
ble to do the settings off line and load the settings on to the relay with a standard portable PC. A sepa-
rate communication port shall be provided so that the distance relays can in future communicate with
the Station monitoring system as well as easily be integrated into Station Control Systems. A PC with
a man machine communication (MMC) software for setting of the relay shall be included in the scope
of supply.

Volume 2 Page 121
Reset times shall be low to ensure the associated distance relay reverts to its normal role as soon as
possible following a power swing.
Power swing blocking shall be inhibited during the single pole dead time of an auto reclose cycle so
that if a power swing develops during this period the distance protection can give an immediate three
phase trip. The Bidder shall advise whether it is possible to extend the inhibition of the power swing
blocking to cover a period immediately following auto reclosing so that if a power swing develops on
reclosing onto a permanent fault a 3-phase trip would be permitted. The Bidder shall also advise
whether power swing blocking can be inhibited if an earth fault occurs during a power swing.
If the associated VT supplies are lost due to VT fuse failure the power swing blocking relay shall not
operate.
Where protection is supplied from multi-ratio current transformers, the lowest ratio will be used for the
initial system configuration, when fault levels are low. The working ratio will be increased when the
system expands and the fault levels and load transfers increase.
Detailed relay setting calculations shall be furnished and submitted for approval. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to compile all required data for setting calculations in close coordination with PGCB. Fi-
nal setting tables shall be prepared and the relays shall be configured accordingly. All settings availa-
ble in the protection with set values shall be available in the setting table. All reference datasheets
used for setting calculations shall be attached to the setting calculations.
5.7.3 Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection
The overcurrent and earth fault relays shall be fully numerical and shall have multi characteristics (in-
verse, very inverse, extremely inverse) to IEC 60255.
Overcurrent relays shall have a current setting range from at least 50% to 200% in 25% setting steps.
Earth fault relays shall have a current setting range from at least 20% to 80% in 10% setting steps.
Time multiplier settings shall be continuously adjustable from 0 to 1 or, as an alternative, in steps of
0.025 from 0.05 to 1.0.
Transformer circuits relays shall be provided with high-set instantaneous units which can be set to
1.25 times the fault current in the HV winding for a fault on the LV terminals computed using the trans-
former minimum impedance and assuming negligible source impedance. The instantaneous unit shall
have a low transient overreach (less than 5% for system X/R ratio of 10) and an operating time of less
than 40 msec. at two times the current setting.
Line circuit relays should have a reset ratio greater than 95% to enable settings to be made which are
close to the circuit emergency rating. The relay contacts must close at a current equivalent to 110% of
the setting and relay overshoot must not exceed 50 msec.
Overcurrent and earth fault relays shall trip via the CB duplicate trip coils and shall initiate duplicated
direct intertripping to the remote line end CB.
Relays shall be thermally rated such that the operating time of the relay at the highest practical current
levels on any combination of current and time multiplier settings shall not exceed the thermal with-

Volume 2 Page 122
stand time of the relay. The Bidder shall provide copies of type test reports to show that this require-
ment is met.
Where directional back-up overcurrent and earth fault devices are specified, directional elements shall
be voltage-polarised.
Directional units for directional overcurrent protection shall be quadrature-connected with a relay char-
acteristic angle setting of 30 or 45 current leading voltage.
Directional units for directional earth fault back-up protection shall employ residual voltage quantities,
and the relay characteristic angle shall be variable 0, 45 and 60, current lag.
The nominal operating boundary shall be 90 from the relay characteristic angle, and the operating
time of the directional unit shall not exceed 20 ms at the relay characteristic angle.
The relay shall be capable of operating correctly when both the operating current and polarising volt-
age quantities are 1% of rated values at an angle equal to the relay characteristic angle.
The residual polarising voltage for earth faults may reach 190.5 volts; therefore it should withstand this
value continuously. The continuous withstand current should be no less than twice rated current.
5.8 Busbar Protection
5.8.1 Busbar Protection
The busbar protection for 400 kV (one and a half breaker scheme) shall be a low imped-
ance,decentralised-type numerical relay, capable of detecting all types of phase and earth faults under
all system generation conditions. Redundant (one + one) busbar protection shall be provided for each
400 kV busbar. The protection shall be extensible to cover the final substation arrangements and Bid-
ders shall state what extra material is required.
The busbar protection shall have the following features:
(a) Two independent measurement & tripping criteria. One based on stabilized current differential
algorithm and the other on directional current comparison and shall be capable of detecting
three phase, phase-phase and phase to earth faults, under all system generation plant condi-
tions. They shall meet the fault clearance time of 80 ms under all conditions.
(b) Two independent hand or electrically reset busbar protection trip relays shall be associated with
each circuit breaker. These trip relays may also be employed for circuit breaker failure. Opera-
tion of either of these relays shall block closing of the associated circuit breaker.
(c) Each trip relay shall trip the circuit breaker via both trip coils. Both relays on the 220 kV trans-
former circuits shall trip the associated circuit breakers.
(d) The operating time of the measuring relays shall not exceed 30 msec. at five times the relay
current setting.
(e) Continuous supervision of CT secondary against any possible open circuit; if it occurs, it shall
render the relevant protection zone inoperative and shall initiate an alarm.

Volume 2 Page 123
The busbar protection will be supplied from multi-ratio current transformers. The working ratio will be
selected on the basis of maximum load transfer in the same manner as the line current transformer ra-
tios.
The overall fault setting shall be between 10% and 30% of the minimum fault current available for any
type of fault, unless otherwise specified. The minimum fault current for 230 kV busbar faults will be ad-
vised at a later stage.
The rated stability limit of the protection shall not be less than the switchgear short circuit rating.
Automatic and continuous supervision of current transformer circuits shall be provided to give an
alarm when the out-of-balance current reaches an undesirable value. Operation of current transformer
supervision equipment should take the defective protection zone out-of-service.
The contract shall include for all necessary current transformers, relay panels, marshalling boxes, iso-
lating and shorting links, etc. A lockable busbar protection ON/OFF switch shall be provided. Lockable
maintenance switches shall be provided for each bay unit of busbar protection.
Test terminal blocks to be provided shall be fully enclosed with removable covers. All terminals shall
be clearly marked with identification numbers. Test terminal blocks shall have shorting, disconnecting
and testing facilities for CT circuits.
Current transformer secondary bus wiring should be suitably dimensioned to reduce current trans-
former burdens to a minimum.
Suitable voltage limiting devices shall be provided as necessary, including across the unused part of
the CT secondary when tappings are employed.
Full details of the scheme offered, together with performance figures for stability and sensitivity, shall
be provided in accordance with Clause 5.10.2.
The numerical busbar protection shall be multi-processor in structure, with extensive self-supervision,
16 bit analogue to digital converters, together with appropriate algorithms to provide phase segregated
measuring principles and multi criteria evaluations before initialisation of trip commands. The busbar
protection shall be of decentralised, with redundant DC/DC supplies type and the bay units shall be
fixed as close to the CTs as possible reducing the copper wiring to a bare minimum and thereby also
reducing the CT burden and CT dimension.
If the intercommunication between the bay unit and central unit by fibre optic cables, the required fibre
optic cable and all necessary items shall be supplied, connected and commissioned by the Contractor.
Busbar protection shall be provided for future bays as per the scope of this contract.
5.8.2 Conditions of Acceptance of Busbar Protection Systems Submitted

on the Basis of Calculated Performance
The Contractor shall prepare for approval calculated performance data for differential busbar protec-
tion systems in lieu of heavy current tests, subject to the following:
1. The rated stability limit shall be no less than the three phase symmetrical breaking capacity of
the associated switchgear.

Volume 2 Page 124
2. The overall fault setting for any type of fault shall be between 10% and 30% of the minimum
fault current available. The minimum fault current available for a busbar fault will be advised lat-
er.
3. Current transformer knee point voltages shall not be less than twice the relay circuit setting volt-
age.
4. The maximum peak voltage across current transformer secondary wiring shall not exceed 3 kV
under maximum internal fault conditions.
5. Associated current transformers shall be Class X or 5P, low reactance type. Split core type cur-
rent transformers will not be accepted.
6. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval a design report detailing the protected
equipment, design parameters of associated current transformers, details of connections and
burdens between current transformers and relays, details of the relay circuits and performance
calculations.
5.9 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
Breaker failure protection shall be fitted to all 400 kV circuit breakers of the substation. Separate
breaker failure protection on a circuit breaker shall be initiated by all other protection devices which
normally initiate tripping of that breaker including the receipt of a direct intertripping signal from a re-
mote line end. In the event of the circuit breaker failing to open within a pre-selected time, the breaker
failure protection shall initiate tripping of all adjacent circuit breakers. It shall also incorporate provision
for initiating tripping of any remote infeeds, via direct intertripping channels over optical fibre commu-
nication link or power line carrier circuits.
In the case of circuit breaker failure protection, the position and fault current of each circuit breaker
shall be monitored by a current check relays fed from the protection current transformers as shown on
the drawings... The relays shall be capable of remaining in the operated position continuously and of
carrying twice the circuit rated current continuously.
The scheme provided shall be suitable for use in a single pole and three pole tripping and auto reclos-
ing schemes as appropriate.
The operating time from initiation to back tripping output shall be selected by means of duplicated tim-
ers with a setting range of 50-500 msec. The two timers per circuit breaker shall be connected in se-
ries in a two-out-two basis and shall energise both trip coils of all adjacent circuit breakers via two
back tripping circuits from separate d.c. supplies.
The timers shall be of a modern design to minimise overtravel. With the approval of the Engineer the
busbar protection trip circuits may be employed for circuit breaker fail back tripping.
In the event that a circuit breaker is unable to trip due to low gas pressure, low hydraulic oil pressure
etc. the associated alarm shall be arranged to by-pass the breaker fail time delay. The breaker fail re-
lay/scheme shall be designed to accept this input.
Operation of the breaker fail protection shall block manual and automatic reclosure of the associated
circuit breaker. Breaker failure protections inbuilt in distance / transformer relays will not be accepted.

Volume 2 Page 125
5.10 Auto-Reclosing Scheme
Three pole and/or single pole, single shot repetitive auto-reclosing equipment, shall be provided for
the overhead line circuit breakers.
Reclosure shall be initiated following tripping by either main protection operating in Zone 1 or in con-
junction with a teleprotection receive signal. Selection facilities shall also be provided to enable or
block three pole delayed auto-reclosing following operation of the directional earth fault protection aid-
ed trip output. Reclosure shall not be initiated in the event of a three phase fault, nor any type of fault
in the second or third back-up zones, nor when a direct intertripping signal is received, nor when the
circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previously de-energised line, nor when the DEF back-up pro-
tection operates nor if the carrier channel is out of service.
The following modes of operation shall be selectable by means of a switch or switches or programma-
ble.
(a) Single pole, high speed, auto-reclose: Auto-reclosure shall only be initiated in the event of a
single phase to earth fault. All other types of faults shall result in three phase tripping without
auto-reclosing.
(b) Three pole delayed reclosing: Delaying reclosing shall only be initiated in the event of a single
phase or two phase fault. Three phase faults shall result in tripping without auto-reclosing.
(c) Single pole, high speed and/or three phase delayed, auto-reclosing as appropriate.
Single pole, high speed auto-reclosing shall be initiated only in the event of a single phase-earth
fault and delayed reclosing initiated in the event of a two phase fault. Three phase tripping with-
out re-closing shall take place for three phase faults.
(d) No auto reclosing: Three phase tripping without auto-reclose shall take place for any type of
fault.
If a second earth fault occurs during the single pole auto-reclose dead time, and the selector switch is
in the single and/or three pole reclosing mode three phase tripping with subsequent delayed three
pole auto-reclose shall take place. If the auto-reclose selector switch is in the single pole reclose
mode, three phase tripping with lockout should follow. Any auxiliary relays required to meet this logic
shall be deemed to be included.
The high speed and delayed reclosing dead times have to be coordinated with the equipment being
provided at the remote substation. Tentative ranges are, as follows:
High speed single pole reclose dead time: 0.3 to 3 seconds.

Delayed three pole reclose dead time: 3 to 30 seconds.
Bidders shall state available ranges.
The reclaim time i.e. the time period following the automatic reclosing of the circuit breaker, during
which any further fault results in three phase tripping and lockout, shall be chosen to match the duty
cycle of the circuit breakers, assuming the shortest available dead time is chosen. The reclaim time
shall, however, not be less than five seconds, and the reclaim timer range shall extend to 180 se-
conds. (The reclaim time commences at the instant the reclose command is given to the circuit break-
er and, therefore, includes the circuit breaker closing time).

Volume 2 Page 126
The closing command shall be limited to two seconds, after which time the reclosing equipment shall
be automatically reset without resetting the reclaim timer. The reclosing equipment shall also reset if
dead line check or synchronism check conditions are not satisfied within a predetermined time of the
check relays being energised.
A counter shall be provided to record the number of reclosures and lockout after a pre-selected num-
ber of reclosures has been reached.
The rated duty cycle of the circuit breaker as defined in IEC 60056 (and subsequent amendments)
states that following an initial trip and auto reclosure a further reclosure is not permitted for a further 3
mins.
Reclosing schemes shall include voltage monitoring and check synchronising relays as appropriate.
Dead line check relays shall monitor the condition of the line and busbar and permit three pole reclos-
ing only when the line is de-energised and the busbar is energised. The line is considered to be de-
energised when the voltage is less than twenty percent of rated voltage, and the busbar is considered
to be energised when the voltage is greater than eighty percent of rated voltage.
(A signal shall be provided from the dead line check relays for interlocking of the line earth switches to
prevent the switches being closed onto a live line).
When a voltage is present on both sides of a circuit breaker, the synchronism check relay shall moni-
tor the magnitudes of the two voltages across the open circuit breaker, and the phase angle and slip
frequency between these voltages. Closing shall only be permitted when these are within prescribed
limits.
Check synchronising relays shall comply with the requirements of Clause 5.24. 1. The same relays
may be used as for manual closing.
5.11 Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection
The overcurrent and earth fault relays shall be fully Numerical and have multi characteristics (inverse,
very inverse, extremely inverse) to IEC 60255.
Overcurrent relays shall have a current setting range from at least 50% - 200% in 25% setting steps.
Earth fault relays shall have a current setting range from at least 20% - 80% in 10% setting steps.
Time multiplier settings shall be continuously adjustable from 0 to 1 or, as an alternative in steps of
0.025 from 0.05 to 1.0.
In the case of transformer circuits relays shall be provided with high set instantaneous units which can
be set to 1.25 times the fault current in the HV winding for a fault on the LV terminals computed using
the transformer minimum impedance and assuming negligible source impedance. The instantaneous
unit shall have a low transient overreach (less than 5% for system X/R ratio of 10) and an operating
time of less than 40 msec. at two times the current setting.

Volume 2 Page 127
In the case of underground line circuits relays should have a reset ratio greater than 95% to enable
settings to be made which are close to the circuit emergency rating. The relay contacts must close at a
current equivalent to 110% of the setting and relay overshoot must not exceed 50 msec.
Overcurrent and earth fault relays shall trip via the CB duplicate trip coils and initiate duplicated direct
intertripping to the remote line end CB.
Relays shall be thermally rated such that the operating time of the relay at the highest practical current
levels on any combination of current and time multiplier settings shall not exceed the thermal with-
stand time of the relay. The Contractor shall provide copies of type test reports to show that this re-
quirement has been met.
Directional back up overcurrent and earth fault relays shall be provided for underground Cable feeders
and the directional elements shall be voltage polarised.
Directional units for directional overcurrent protection shall be quadrature connected with a relay char-
acteristic angle setting of 30 or 45 current leading voltage.
Directional units for directional earth fault back up protection shall employ residual voltage quantities
and the relay characteristic angle be variable 0, 45 and 60, current lag.
The nominal operating boundary shall be 90 from the relay characteristic angle and the operating
time of the directional unit shall not exceed 20 ms at the relay characteristic angle.
The relay shall be capable of operating correctly when both the operating current and polarising volt-
age quantities are 1% of rated values at an angle equal to the relay characteristic angle.
The residual polarising voltage for earth faults may reach 190.5 volts and therefore it should withstand
this value continuously. The continuous withstand current should be no less than twice rated current.
5.12 Transformer Protection
The 400/220/33kV auto transformers shall be provided with dual biased differential protection and re-
stricted earth fault relay as a main protection. Redundant biased differential relays shall be provided
as shown in the protection block diagram for transformer protection. Directional overcurrent relays and
over current relays shall also be installed for back-up protection. Additionally, over flux (V/Hz) relays
shall be provided in order to avoid any overheating. For relay and protection connections, refer to the
drawing.The detailed protection scheme shall be approved by the Employer.
5.12.1 Biased Differential Protection
The transformer differential protection shall be of fully numerical design, with 16 bit analogue to digital
converters, powerful digital signal processors, CPU, etc. The relay should have continuous self-
supervision and diagnosis. A local display unit shall be provided on the front of the relay for measure
and display, trip indications, diagnostics, etc., and also for acknowledging and resetting latched out-
puts. The required software for setting and configuring the relay shall be provided with the relay, and
this human machine interface (HMI) shall be user-friendly and should not require any special pro-

Volume 2 Page 128
gramming knowledge. It should be possible to do the settings offline and load the settings on to the re-
lay with a standard portable PC with a fibre optic connection.
Overall differential protection shall be of the biased differential type and be capable of detecting phase
and earth faults.
Separate facilities shall be provided to enable adjustment of bias and operating settings. The minimum
operating setting shall not be higher than 20 % of the rated full load current of the transformer.
The protection shall be designed to ensure stability on any transformer tap position under maximum
through fault conditions with maximum d.c. offset. An infinite source is to be assumed, and the through
fault current shall be calculated using the transformer impedance only.
Correction for matching transformer vector groups and main CT ratios for transformer differential pro-
tection shall be performed within the relay without the use of external interposingtransformer.
The relay shall have second harmonic or other inrush proof features. The relays shall have magnetis-
ing inrush current restraints of the second harmonic or other approved means. All necessary interpos-
ing current transformers shall be provided under the contract.
Where specified in the drawings, two biased transformer differential protection relays shall be provided
for each transformer.
The relays shall have an inbuilt event, fault and disturbance recorder. All binary inputs, binary out-
putsand analogue channels available in the relay shall be recorded in case of fault.
5.12.2 Restricted or Balanced Earth Fault Protection
Where specified, or shown on drawings, transformer windings and connections shall be protected by
restricted earth fault protection. Delta connected windings shall be protected by balanced earth fault
protection. Relays shall be of identical numerical design as the main protection and of the high imped-
ance type with necessary protection against over voltages. For reliability reasons the restricted earth
fault relay shall be separate from the transformer differential relay.
Relays shall have maximum sensitivity and minimum operating times consistent with stability for faults
outside the protected zone and on magnetising inrush surges.
The rated stability limit shall not be less than the maximum current available for an external fault. This
shall be taken as 16 times the rated current of the protected winding of the power transformer, or any
other value agreed by the Engineer.
For the purpose of calculations it shall be assumed that any neutral earthing impedance is short cir-
cuited.
The Contractor shall prepare for approval calculated performance for instantaneous high impedance
restricted earth fault protection in lieu of heavy current tests, subject to the conditions in Clause 5.10.2
except:
i) The rated stability limit shall be as specified above.

ii) The fault setting shall be as specified below.

Volume 2 Page 129
(a) When the transformer winding is connected to a solidly earthed power system, the fault
setting shall be between 10% and 60% of the rated current of the winding. When the
transformer winding has more than one rating, the setting shall be based on the lower rat-
ing.
(b) When the protected transformer is not connected to a solidly earthed power system the
fault setting shall be between 10% and 25% of the minimum current available for an earth
fault at the transformer terminals.
5.12.3 Transformer Back-up Overcurrent Protection
Three-pole inverse time back up overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be provided as shown on
the drawings. This shall comply generally with Clause 5.12 but in addition the overcurrent elements
shall also be a two stage device. Stage 1 will comprise the inverse time unit and stage 2 will comprise
an additional definite time unit with a setting range of 50 msec. - 5 secs.
5.12.4 Gas Pressure (Buchholz) Protection
Power transformers and earthing transformers shall be fitted with Buchholz devices under this con-
tract. The Buchholz device will be of the two element type giving operation under gassing and under
surge conditions.
All necessary flag indication, tripping relays and alarm relays associated with this protection shall be
provided, mounted and connected under this contract.
5.12.5 Oil and/or Winding Temperature
Transformers will be provided with oil and/or winding temperature protection under this contract. The-
se will be of the two stage type with adjustable settings giving alarm and trip facilities.
All necessary flag indication, tripping relays and alarm relays associated with this protection shall be
supplied and connected under this contract.
5.12.6 Low Oil Level and Pressure Relief Devices
Transformers shall be provided with low oil level with contacts for the purpose of providing remote
alarm. Transformers shall also be provided with a pressure relief device with contacts for purposes of
remote alarm and trip function.
The alarm relays associated with these devices shall be supplied and connected under this contract.
5.12.7 Tap Changer Oil Surge
Transformers will be provided with an oil surge or pressure operated device having contacts for pur-
poses of remote alarm and trip.
A relay associated with this device shall be supplied and connected under this contract.

Volume 2 Page 130
All necessary flag indication, tripping and alarm relays associated with tap change oil surge shall be
provided.
5.12.8 Standby Earth Fault Protection
Standby earth fault protection shall be provided for all earthing transformers/resistors, fed from a cur-
rent transformer in the transformer/resistor neutral connection.
The operating current shall be adjustable between 10 and 40 per cent of the resistor value. The time
delay shall be adjustable between 1 and 10 secs. As an alternative to a definite time relay, a long in-
verse time relay may be offered.
5.12.9 Tripping Relays
All tripping relays, where specified shall be of the heavy duty type suitable for panel mounting. The trip
relays of the offered numerical protections shall be directly capable of tripping the breaker coils. It shall
not be required to add additional trip relays
Trip relay contacts shall be suitably rated to satisfactorily perform their required duty and relay operat-
ing time shall not exceed 10 ms. from initiation of trip relay operating coil to contact close.
Where specified latching type relays shall have hand or electrically reset contacts and hand reset flag
indicators. Resetting of the flag indicator and the contacts shall be possible without having to open the
relay case.
Tripping relays shall operate when the supply voltage is reduced to not higher than 30% of nominal
battery voltage. It shall not operate for wiring leakage currents and discharge of wiring capacitance
400 kV and 230 kV circuit breakers are equipped with two trip coils. One tripping relay shall initiate
tripping via one trip coil and the other tripping relay via the second trip coil.
5.13 DC Auxiliary Voltage Operating Range
DC operated relays, coils, elements, etc. will be operated from a 110V rated dc. battery, which under
float charging conditions operates at about 125V. DC operated relays coils elements etc. shall be suit-
able for operation over a voltage range of 66V to 143V. i-e. 110 - 40% + 20%.
5.14 Teleprotection Signalling
Details of protection initiation and various permissive and direct intertripping signals are as specified in
Section-14, of Vol. 2 of 3.

Volume 2 Page 131
5.15 Protection Settings
Relay settings with calculation for all unit-type protective schemes shall be submitted to the Engineer
and Employer prior to commissioning of any plant for approval. Settings shall also be provided for
those relays and other equipment provided under this section of the contract which do not require an
intimate knowledge of existing relay settings e.g. circuit breaker fail relays. Detailed calculations shall
be provided supporting all recommended settings.
Any additional information needed by Contractors should be requested.
5.16 Testing and Inspection
5.16.1 General
All relays (including panels) shall be tested in the Manufacturer's work. The Bidder/Contractor may be
required to carry out any or all of the tests stated in this specification in presence of PGCB or its repre-
sentatives according to clause SCC23 of section-8 of volume-I.
Testing of relays and their components shall be performed in line with this specification and in accord-
ance with the relevant IEC standards (as minimum requirement) and other standards as may be ap-
proved by PGCB.
Acceptance by PGCB's Representative of any relay tests shall not relieve the Manufacturer from any
of his performance guarantees or from any other obligations.
PGCB reserves the right to perform checks during the manufacturing process at any time or all the
times. It shall be at the discretion of PGCB to witness tests on 100% or any percentage of each lot for
routine tests, apart from the type tests, wherever called for.
Tests of relays shall comprise factory tests and site tests.
5.17 Factory Tests
5.17.1 Type Tests
Evidence shall be given that the proposed relays to be supplied under the contract had already been
subjected to all type tests (including transient and steady-state tests) at an internationally recognised
testing station like KEMA or equivalent. If deemed necessary, PGCB will decide whether the Bid-
der/Contractor shall perform additional tests.
An internationally recognised laboratory shall certify the type test reports.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit certified copies of type test certificates covering the proposed relay
components.

Volume 2 Page 132
Type test certificates/reports shall be considered acceptable if they are in compliance with the relevant
standards and the following:
Type tests conducted at an internationally recognised laboratory acceptable to PGCB.

Type tests conducted at the Manufacturer's laboratory and witnessed by representatives from an
internationally recognised laboratory acceptable to PGCB.
If the presented type test reports are not in accordance with the above requirements, PGCB may de-
cide to ask for the type tests to be carried out afresh in the Manufacturer's premises or other places
subject to the approval of PGCB and at no additional cost. These tests shall be performed in the pres-
ence of an internationally recognised laboratory, which should issue the relevant type test certificates
upon successful completion of all tests.
5.17.2 Routine Tests
Protection relays and their components shall be subjected to routine tests as per the relevant IEC
standards. Protection relays mounted in cubicles shall be completely wired, tested and inspected at
the relay Manufacturer's factory.
Factory tests shall cover a subset of the following:
Secondary injection, scheme checks, relay logic, performance of engineer interface, functional-trip
tests, setting ranges and calibration accuracy, response(trip) times, functional availability and ap-
plication limits, system supervision, performance of communication interfaces with SAS, events
and disturbance records, etc.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide to PGCB a generic list of tests for approval, depending upon the
duration of factory tests, the importance and complexity of the protection system, familiarity of the sys-
tem being inspected, etc., However, test procedures shall be prepared to verify adequately the per-
formance, functionality and protection reliability.
The Bidder/Contractor shall indicate that the equipment has been manufactured, racked and correctly
wired by carrying out approved factory tests.
Routine test certificates shall be submitted to PGCB's review and approval before shipment of the re-
lays /panels.
5.18 Site Tests
The site tests of relays shall be mainly based on functional tests, in addition to the visual and wiring
checking of the relays, in order to ensure that all components are correctly installed and properly
aligned and that there are no imperfections due to damage during transport to site.
Relay site tests shall include comprehensive tests and checks with the protection equipment fully con-
nected to the array of all field devices (SAS, FMS, teleprotection signalling equipment, switchgear,
CTs/VTs, DC system, etc.).
Checks and tests shall include:

Volume 2 Page 133
Secondary and primary injections, scheme checks, relay logic, performance of engineer interface,
functional-trip tests, setting ranges and calibration accuracy, response (trip) times, functional avail-
ability, system supervision, performance of communication interfaces with SAS, events and dis-
turbance records etc.
Transient tests shall be included, simulating DC off-sets and harmonics, in order to verify the dynamic
behaviour, including the circuit breaker trip time, communication channel time and the effectiveness of
the settings adopted.
After energization, load tests shall be carried out.
Prior to field tests on protection relays, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide to PGCB for approval oper-
ational settings and parameters to set the protection relays/systems to the substation conditions and
power grid requirements.
Calculations for the revision of relay settings (e.g. zone 2 and 3 of distance relays) in the remote end
substations shall also be submitted to PGCB for approval.
Setting recommendations shall be submitted for approval at least 2 months before commission-
ing /energization.
Separate schedules for on-site tests shall be submitted for approval at least one month before start of
the tests.
The results of all tests shall be submitted immediately after satisfactory completion of tests in the form
of computer print-outs along with the hand written test sheets signed by PGCB for witness of the tests.
Site test reports shall illustrate all test details as well as details of all applied testing equipment and
their calibration validity.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of experienced test personnel during inspec-
tion tests and at site.
The Bidder/Contractor shall not withdraw or change the test engineer(s) before the completion of all
the testing activities, unless it is the requirement of PGCB in the event that the test personnel lacks
adequate skills, knowledge or technical expertise for the concerned protection systems /equipment.
Overall tests involving more than one Bidder's/Contractor's equipment shall be suitably and profes-
sionally coordinated and arranged by the main Bidder/Contractor. The test and commissioning pro-
grams shall be subject to approval by PGCB at site.
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out any additional site tests, other than those mentioned in the ap-
proved site test program, if deemed necessary by PGCB, due to some unforeseen technical require-
ments arising from operational contingencies in the network and loading conditions.
5.19 Digital Fault and Disturbance Recorder (DFDR)
The DFDR shall be delivered only for new 400 kV substations.

Volume 2 Page 134
The DFDR in PGCB's system are manufactured by Qualitrol, Belgium, BEN 6000/5000.
For the purpose of standardization, the DFDR to be supplied under this project shall be from GE
(USA/Canada/UK), Qualitrol (UK), SEL (USA/UK/Canada),Siemens (Germany) or equivalent.
Installation, testing & commissioning of the DFDR shall be done by the DFDR Engineer(s) of
the DFDR Manufacturer(s).
The DFDR shall have the following features:
a) The equipment shall be an independent stand-alone system to monitor analogue and digital
signals from all 400 kV feeders, including transformer and line bays that require to be moni-
tored.
b) The Manufacturer shall prove the system's reliability and good site performances by providing
substantial evidence of the systems already installed and commissioned for at least a duration
of 5 years, accompanied by the customer's recommendations and type test reports from inter-
nationally acclaimed laboratories.
c) The DFDR system shall be modular in design for easy expansion, upgrade and maintenance.
d) The acquisition system or its storage unit shall not be based on a PC platform.
e) The independent DFDR system shall be equipped with a minimum of 40 digital and 8 analogue
signals per bay and shall be suitable for AC/DC measurement without any hardware changes.
f) The system shall be equipped to monitor, detect and record simultaneously fast transient faults
(short-term) and slow phenomena disturbances (long-term) like power swing, frequency varia-
tion, voltage drop, etc., covering all the required feeders.
g) All input signals shall be able to scan and record simultaneously at least 2 or 3 user-
programmable sampling rates from 500Hz to 6kHz for fast (short-term) transient monitoring and
from 1Hz to 500Hz for slow phenomena (long-term) monitoring in order to detect and record fast
(short-term) and slow phenomena (long-term) events.
h) At least 25 sec. of memory for transient fault data recording (at 6 kHz sampling rate) and over
1000 sec. for slow (at 30 Hz) phenomena recording shall be provided in addition to the auto-
maintained, inbuilt hard disk unit which shall be installed for data storage. The inbuilt hard disk
unit shall be managed and operated by the identical industrially proven operating system of the
DFDR.
i) The graphical data should be recorded for all feeders simultaneously (snap shot image).The re-
cording should contain the data prior to the event and afterthe event, including the dynamic
length of the event / fault without any alterations.
j) The system should possess a library of sensors (triggering criteria), which should be selected by
the user and shall be able to detect and record various type of incidents. The system shall be
able to detect incidents by the selected starting criteria and should be able to produce a record.
k) The recordings shall contain the graphical data of physical inputs (voltage, currents, digitals)
and virtual inputs (e.g. frequency, dp/dt, dq/dt (3 phases / single phase), RMS values etc.).
l) The DFDR shall be able to communicate with local and / or remote master stations, using mas-
ter communication and analysis software. This software should permit the user either locally or
remotely to download the recorded data, to ascertain the system's operational status, to change
parameters, etc.
m) Master communication should be able to communicate via RS 232 (direct connection), through
modem (dial-up telephone line) and LAN (Ethernet (TCP / IP) - IEEE 802.3) networking.
n) The DFR shall perform the following functions:
fault location (including impedances and report),
graphical display of data,
phase measurement & display,

Volume 2 Page 135
transient fault recording,

dynamic swing recording,
harmonics' measurement & display,
integrated SER function,
calculated channels etc.
o) The system shall be able to calibrate at site, and the required menu-driven software and other
required accessories shall be supplied along with a notebook computer, colour printer etc.
p) The system shall be equipped for time synchronization by the external GPS clock receiver for
real time synchronizing (including antenna).
q) Local printing facility shall be provided with the system.
r) The master station (a latest version of PC) and the relevant software shall be supplied with the
equipment for analysis and communication.
s) Power quality monitoring or continuous monitoring (periodical recording) shall be made availa-
ble for at least 4 feeders.
5.20 Tripping Relays
All tripping relays, where specified, shall be of high-speed (less than 10 ms.), high-burden, heavy-duty
(larger than 150W) type and shall be suitable for panel mounting. Relays shall comply with the re-
quirements of Clause 5.14.8.
5.21 Substation Automation (SA) System
5.21.1 Scope of Supply
This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing at the Manufacturer's works,
erection and commissioning of a substation automation system, as shown in drawing of this technical
specifications& described in the following sections, to control and operate 400/220 kV grid substation.
This describes the facilities required to provide the control of plant and system within a substation and
outlines the facilities to be provided on site, interface requirements and performance criteria.
The substation automation system (SAS) shall comprise full station and bay protection as well as con-
trol, monitoring and communication functions; it shall provide all functions required for the safe and re-
liable operation based on IEC 61850 standards. It shall enable local station control via PC by means
of a human machine interface (HMI) and control software package, and shall perform the necessary
system control and data acquisition functions. It shall include communication gateway to NLDC, inter-
bay bus, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay control and protection as shown in the enclosed
general system architecture drawing.
The communication gateway shall secure control from and information flow to remote network control
centres. The inter-bay bus shall provide independent station-to-bay and bay-to-bay data exchange.
The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall be directly connected
to the instrument transformer and trip/close coils in the switchgear without any interposing equipment
and perform control, protection, and monitoring functions subject to a detail proposal approved by the
Employer.

Volume 2 Page 136
The Contractor will have the option to choose different types of communication networks for the bay
level and the process level based on IEC 61850. However, network topology and access mode shall
be clearly indicated. The availability shall be maintained with suitable topology of ring, star or bus. The
physical medium of those shall be glass fibre optics.
The IEDs for protection and control functions shall maintain high availability and reliability together
with bay independence through extensive self-supervision and state-of-the-art technology. All IEDs
shall be directly connected to the IEC 61850 bus and shall use only the IEC 61850 protocol for com-
munication. No proprietary protocols shall be used.
The system shall be capable of having its computing power increased in the future through the addi-
tion of additional computing systems.
The system design life shall be not less than 20 years.
The capacity of the SA system shall be sufficient for the ultimate development of the substation as set
out in the project requirements.
The SA Supplier shall demonstrate that the proposed system has been designed, installed and com-
missioned in accordance with the IEC 61850 standard and shall provide evidence of satisfactory ser-
vice experience during the past 5 years.
For detailed technical data, please refer to the technical data schedules.
These specifications describe the functional requirements of the substation control and supervisory
system. The frame structure of these systems is also defined. For implementation of these require-
ments, the Contractor shall use standard hardware and software to the maximum possibleextent.
The optimum solution of the substation control and monitoring system for the considered substation is
realized by three functionally independent subsystems:
the substation control system

the protection system and protection supervision system
the switchyard interlocking system
The protection system is described in a separate section of these specifications.
Both substation control and interlocking system should a have hierarchical structure, which best suits
the substation design, functions and its importance for the power system. The Contractor has to pro-
pose such a particular, his own, optimal solution and confirm its advantages and give the related ref-
erences confirmed by the Employer. The Contractor shall confirm continuity of his preferable philoso-
phy of the proposed solutions, utilization and compatibility of new products in the next 15 years after
commissioning.
The system between the bay control level and the substation control level and linked with higher level
control centre shall be of the "open" system design, i.e.:
it must be possible that equipment from different manufacturers works together,

easy extension shall be possible,
future upgrades (hardware and software) must be easily possible without changing existing equip-
ment or interfaces. Implemented protocols should also be replaceable without major modifications
(e.g. future IEC standards).

Volume 2 Page 137
For the purpose of the cooperation of equipment from different manufacturers, the internationally rec-
ognized and approved standard communication protocol shall be applied. The substation control and
supervision system shall have minimum 2 (two) interfaces for communication with the control centre.
5.21.2 Compliance with Standards
For design and type-testing of the protection and control equipment, the following standards shall ap-
ply:
5.21.2.1 Standards for Environment
IEC 60068-2-1/2: Environmental testing: Temperature

IEC 60068-2-3: Environmental testing: Humidity
IEC 60654: operating conditions: climatic conditions
IEC 60870-2-2: telecontrol equipment and system: environment conditions
5.21.2.2 Standards for Equipment
IEC 60044-1: current transformer

IEC 60056: earthing switch
IEC 60185: low voltage switchgear
IEC 60186: voltage transformer
IEC 60688: electrical measuring transducers
IEC 60227: polyvinyl insulated cables
IEC 60228: conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60297: dimensions of mechanical structures (19" panel, racks, cabinets etc.)
IEC 60309: plugs, socket-outlets and couplers
IEC 60352: solderless connections
IEC 60529: degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 62271-100: high voltage alternating circuit breaker
IEC 62271-102: Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 60129: high voltage switchgear and control gear. Alternating current disconnectors and earth-
ing switches.
IEC 60146: Rectifiers, converters, stabilized power supply.
5.21.2.3 Standards for Tests, Safety, Definitions
IEC 60605-7: Equipment reliability testing

IEC 60271: tests
IEC 60073: Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface
IEC 60050: international electrotechnical vocabulary
IEC 60038: IEC standard voltages
5.21.2.4 Standards for EMC
IEC 61000-4-2: Electromagnetic compatibility - electrostatic discharges

IEC 61000-4-3: Electromagnetic compatibility - electromagnetic field

Volume 2 Page 138
IEC 61000-4-4: Electromagnetic compatibility - fast transient (burst)

IEC 61000-4-5: Electromagnetic compatibility - impulse voltage immunity requirements (lightning)
IEC 61000-4-6: Electromagnetic compatibility - continuous wave (CW) current injection.
IEC60801: Electromagnetic compatibility for electrical and electronic equipment
IEC 60255-6: electrical relays: HF interference test.
IEC 60255-22: electrical relays: electrical disturbance tests
IEC 60255-3: electrical relays: surge voltage test
IEC 60255-5: electrical relays: HF interference test
IEC 60870-2-1: telecontrol equipment and system: power supply and electromagnetic compatibility
5.21.2.5 Standards for Interfaces
IEC 61850 Edition 2: communication networks and systems in substations.

IEC 60870-5-101: telecontrol equipment and system: transmission protocol (telecontrol tasks)
IEC 60870-5-102: telecontrol equipment and system: transmission protocol (integrated total in elec-
tric power systems)
IEC 60870-5-103: telecontrol equipment and system: transmission protocol (informative interface
for protection equipment)
IEC 60870-5-104: telecontrol equipment and system: transmission protocol: network access
IEC 60870-3: telecontrol equipment and system: Interfaces (electrical characteristics)
IEEE 803: Ethernet LAN
5.21.2.6 International Standards Organisation
The Manufacturer of the substation control and supervision system shall submit a certificate of a quali-
ty assurance system according to ISO 9001 in design, development, production, installation and ser-
vicing.
ISO 9001: Quality system model for quality assurance in design/development manufacture and
testing.
ISO 9002: Quality system model for quality assurance in production, installation and servicing.
5.21.3 Design and Operating Requirements
5.21.3.1 General
The SAS shall monitor and control the entire substation. It shall be a fully integrated system to bring
together independently operating subsystems, such as SCADA, communication, protective relaying,
control of substation primary equipment, metering and alarm annunciation, into a unified data acquisi-
tion, monitoring and control system in the substation. Maximum use shall be made of digital infor-
mation /communication resulting in minimal hard wiring. It shall have a LAN backbone to allow coordi-
nation and integration of these subsystems.
The SAS shall be suitable for operation and monitoring of the complete substation including future ex-
tensions. The offered products shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation and maintenance
support of the substations.

Volume 2 Page 139
The SAS system shall have state-of-the art design, suitable for operation in a high voltage substation
environment, follow the latest engineering practice; it shall ensure long-term compatibility require-
ments, continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.
As shown in the SAS structure, protection is an integral part of the SAS, and protective relays shall be
directly connected to the inter-bay bus in order to provide unrestricted access to all data and infor-
mation stored in the relays and for changing protection parameters from the remote control location.
Failure behaviour of the hardware and software functions shall be addressed, and related diagnostic
and rectification working instructions shall be provided. The system's performance in case of failure of
communication to NLDC, main and redundant computer base workstations, central functions, data
model, control and protection IEDs, station and bay level communication shall also be clearly ad-
dressed (shall be provided by the Manufacturer).
The following modes of operation shall be possible:
a. Emergency operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the control panel.
b. Emergency operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the backup mimic pan-
el located in the new control room. Both, bay controller-guided and unguided operation shall be
possible from this panel.
c. Normal operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the station automation sys-
tem's HMI located in the new control room.
5.21.3.2 Modes of Operation
The operator stations and specified remote users shall have the following operational modes, each
password protected.
Monitoring Ability to select graphic displays and lists for display only. No capability to
acknowledge alarms, complete controls or select items for inclusion in pro-
gram functions.
Control Selection of graphic display and lists. Able to acknowledge station and SAS
alarms, complete controls, dressing etc. associated with normal real time of
the control of the substation.
SAS Engineering To provide all SAS monitoring functions, together with online facilities for pro-
gram / database / format modifications and checking without the possibility of
executing power system controls.
System Manager To provide access to all system functions, including assignment of passwords
and system maintenance activities.
In addition, a facility to provide access to the numerical protection relays, change / modify relay set-
tings & AVR parameters and fault recorder data shall be provided.
A series of passwords shall be personally assigned to operators in each of the above categories.
Substation operators shall have the possibility to log on to either substation workstation and to be allo-
cated the appropriate mode of operation relevant to the password. SAS engineering work and access
to the protection relay and disturbance reorder information shall generally be carried out at the engi-
neering workstation or the remote master station.

Volume 2 Page 140
All workstations and the system database shall function as a system. It shall not be necessary for ex-
ample to acknowledge an alarm at more than one workstation.
Similarly, an operator's manual entry applied at one workstation shall be immediately displayed at oth-
er workstations where this data is presented.
5.21.3.3 Project Specifications
Specific functions required and boundary conditions of the SAS are detailed elsewhere in this specifi-
cation. The following project-specific drawings are attached:
Overall single line diagram

General system architecture
Location of substation buildings
Control and operation principles
Protection schemes
5.21.3.4 SAS Supplier's Local Support
The Supplier shall assure long-term maintenance and availability of spares. Moreover, a guarantee
shall be submitted for the availability of spares during the lifetime of the SAS equipment (not less than
10 years).
5.21.3.5 Quality Assurance and Inspection
Quality assurance of design and development, production, installation and servicing of material and
workmanship shall be governed by ISO 9001. Supporting documents to prove ISO 9001 third party
approvals shall be provided with the offer.
The SAS shall be pre-assembled and tested at the manufacturer's workshop before shipment.
5.21.4 General System Design
The system shall be so designed that personnel without any background in microprocessor-based
technology can operate the system easily after having received some basic training.
System control from the substation control room will be done by means of an industrial computer (PC)
operated by a mouse. The following HMI (Human Machine Interface) functions shall be provided:
1) Acquisition and plausibility check of switchgear status
2) Control of switchgear
3) Remote checking of device parameters and activation of alternative parameter sets in the con-
nected protective relays
4) Display of actual measured values (U, I, P, Q, f)
5) Display of events
6) Display of alarms
7) Display of trends

Volume 2 Page 141
8) Sequence control functions

9) Disturbance records and fault location
10) System self-supervision
11) Hard copy printing
12) Dynamic busbar colouring
The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from the NLDC via an industrial grade
gateway with redundant CPU as well as redundant DC/DC converters. PC-based gateways which con-
tain moving parts will not be accepted. The gateway should be designed for a life of at least 20 years.
The gateway shall provide for communication to/from remote control centres via the IEC 60870-5-101
protocol. Even if the station PC is not available, it shall be possible to control the station fromthe NLDC
as well as from the backup control panel in the individual bays with all interlocks. Interlocking in case
of emergency (i.e. if the bay controller fails) should be waived locally by means of a switch with key
lock by the Maintenance Engineer for all the switchgear.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components shall not require a shutdown of the whole sta-
tion automation system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and communication shall be
incorporated to increase the availability of the equipment while minimising maintenance time to repair.
As shown in the system drawing, the SAS shall be structured in two levels - station level and bay level.
The data exchange between the electronic devices on both levels shall take place via an inter-bay bus
using IEC 61850 standards. The entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station level
PC. It shall also be possible to control, monitor and protect each individual bay from the respective bay
level equipment for maintenance purposes or if the communication to a particular bay fails. Clear con-
trol priorities shall prevent initiation of operation of a single switch at the same time from more than
one of the various control levels viz. NLDC, station level, bay level or switchgear (apparatus) level.
The priority shall always be with the lowest enabled control level.
Bay control and protection units shall be independent of each other and their functioning shall not be
affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control and protection units of the station.
The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:
1) Human Machine Interface (HMI) with process database

2) Gateway function for remote control via an industrial grade hardware
3) Dial-in facility / laptop workstation for protection relay parameterisation, disturbance analysis
and SAS fault analysis.
4) Data exchange between the different system components via high speed bus
5) Bay level devices for control, monitoring and protection
6) Bay-oriented local control and protection panels with mimic inserts
7) Facility for emergency operation of all the switchgear, if the bay controller fails (key / master key
system).
The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The system shall
be based on a decentralised concept with bay-oriented distributed intelligence for safety and availabil-
ity reasons. Functions shall be decentralised, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the
process.
The substation monitoring/protection system shall supply data for maintenance, repair and remote pa-
rameter setting of protection and control devices in the switchyard.

Volume 2 Page 142
ln the event of a fault in the electrical network, the substation monitoring shall provide a quick means
for collecting the relevant and critical data of the fault.
The monitoring system shall be suitable for the supervision and monitoring of all the secondary (lED)
and primary devices in a substation including future extensions.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components shall not cause a shut-off of the whole station
monitoring system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and communication shall be incor-
porated to increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and to minimise maintenance.
It shall be possible to access all protection and control devices for reading the terminal parameters
(settings). The setting of parameters or activation of parameter sets shall be restricted by password to
the Protection Engineer.
One remote computer should be provided with access to the SMS and with different access levels.
The required SMS software and application-specific firmware (for relay parameterisation) shall be pro-
vided with associated tools and equipment. The required engineering tools and analysing software
shall also be provided/installed both in the station PC and the remote master analysis station. A back-
up copy of all the software shall be provided on CDs.
The SAS shall be capable of communicating with the remote master analysis station at the protection
development branch through a modem over a dedicated or dial-up voice grade telephone line or mi-
crowave channel.
5.21.5 Flexibility and Scalability
The offered SAS concept shall be flexible and shall permit future extensions to be implemented easily.
Preference will be given to those Suppliers who are in a position to provide protection and control de-
vices that can be freely adapted to the requiredapplication functions.
5.21.6 System Hardware
5.21.6.1 Bay Control Level
5.21.6.1.1 Bay Control Units (BCU)
For detailed technical data, please refer to the Technical Data Schedules.
Distributed (bay orientated) microprocessor devices, hierarchically linked with the central substation
control unit, are foreseen for bay control. The physical location of this device is inside the relay panels
(with protection devices) together with the local backup panel for emergency control.
A specially designed controller (local RTU) must be foreseen for acquisition of data gathered on the
substation level (aux. supply AC/DC, fire alarm, burglar alarm, etc.).
The bay level equipment shall comprise at least the following elements:
Bay computer,

Volume 2 Page 143
Input/output equipment for digital and analogue signals. The exact number of needed I/O must be
given from the Contractor's side after careful evaluation of the final design and chosen equipment.
20% of spares must be foreseen,
Communications with protection equipment and interlocking unit,
Local mimic for backup or maintenance control and monitoring of equipment in the bay.
Data Acquisition and Input

The digital alarms input shall allow collecting of signals e.g. alarm, fault and status signals from HV
apparatus and other indications from the power process. The input ports shall accept single and dou-
ble status inputs with the usual signalling voltage of 110 V DC without any additional interposing relay
or signal transformation. The digital inputs must be routed into the control system via galvanic sepa-
rated interference barriers or in a special case from a serial process bus. In this last case, all optical
elements and communication microprocessors shall be delivered.
All incoming digital signals shall be stamped with a time tag. The mode of time tag shall be selectable.
Each binary input shall be subject to application of filters to detect oscillation of contacts or malfunc-
tioning of inputs. The filter shall be configured in such a way that each change of digital input shall last
at least 10 to 100 ms., adjustable before selection, yet maintain event's real-time reporting of up to 1
ms. accuracy.
The required signal levels for the input units are as follows:
Digital input signals 110 V DC.
Analogue current signals 1 A AC.
Analogue voltage signals 100 V/3 and 100V/3 AC.
All switches are with insignificant status, and all push buttons are one-bit status.
Metering (bay controller display):
all currents,
all voltages,
active and reactive power (both directions).
The scaling of analogue signals shall allow for a dynamic range of 5.0 p.u. for current signals and 2.0
p.u. for voltage signals.
Indication
A separate block of the bay level control system shall provide backup control system - backup panel
(used in case of the break of communication with the substation processor or in case of maintenance
work in the switchgear). If the substation control system is switched off or defective, the scheme shall
provide the possibility of controlling at the bay level by authorized personnel with button commands.
This shall be still possible even if the power supply module within a feeder unit fails.
The backup system shall include a mimic diagram (mosaic) providing the following functions:
Metering: All voltages (V-switch), one current (phase "4"),
HV switching equipment position status (circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches),
Command of the circuit breaker and disconnectors,
Pole discordance signal for all switch gear devices,
Motor drivers not ready signal,
Pressure low signal,
MCB trip signal,
Aux DC out signal,
Switch on/off local control,
Breaker trip circuit supervision signal,
Protection failure signal,
Protection trip issued - breaker tripped signal.
All switching operations performed by the backup system shall be recorded in the bay level computer
(switches states - 2 bits, push buttons - 1 bit).

Volume 2 Page 144
The following display and control devices shall be mounted on the front panel of the I/O units:
An analogue display showing values of phase and line voltages (switched), and central current
(phase "4"),
Control command indicators,
Indication of alarms with memory for transient signal(s),
Backup control switch,
A push button for the signal indications resetting,
A push button for signalisation lights testing (Annunciators),
Supply switch.
Control
Control outputs of the bay level computer shall enable direct control of the operational elements
(switch coils, tap changer, etc.).
One two-position switch shall be provided on the control panel performing the following functions:
LOCAL - only local control is enabled; the interlocking function is on bay level only, no synchroniza-
tion,
REMOTE - only remote control is enabled.
In both cases, all data are transmitted to the higher level (control centre).
The BCU shall allow operation of the switchgear (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) and other
equipment (e.g. tap changers) located in the bay according to: commands received from the substa-
tion control system, the portable PC terminal or the local mimic backup control panel.
It shall be possible to disable control of each switching element separately, both locally and remotely.
Output
The digital output command unit shall offer a minimum of interface relays for direct operation of circuit
breakers and other switchgear apparatus as well as for signalling outputs. The output relay for opera-
tion of switchgear devices shall be of the heavy-duty type for up to 220 V DC, with the current rating of
10 A at 110 V DC + 20%. The signal output relays shall be designed for a voltage rating of up to 220 V
DC and a continuous current of 1 A DC.
The required signal levels for the input and output units are as follows:
Digital output signals 110 V DC.
Command for disconnectors and for circuit breakers.
All commands are given in two-step sequences.
Fault Analysis Function

An event recorder Sequence of Event (SoE), fault location and fault recorder function (disturbance re-
corder) shall be provided at the bay level. This function shall be provided through independent meas-
urement of the signals by the bay level computer or in conjunction with the digital relay system. SOE is
mandatory in bay computer and relay protection. For fault recorder and fault location function logging,
linking between digital relay system (serial interface ports between the bay level digital relays) and
substation control system shall be provided. The unit shall be capable of storing past events in a data-
base; no data shall be lost on interruption of the auxiliary supply.
Communication
A communication port for operation and maintenance through portable computers shall be provided for
maintenance and emergency control purposes. Each bay level computer shall have a port for connec-
tion the portable PC, to be used for:
bay operations,
stored data reading,
the recorded analogue signals analysis (if needed),
maintenance.

Volume 2 Page 145
The switching operations performed by the backup system shall be recorded in the bay level comput-
er. The switching operations with or without interlocks should be done by authorized personnel only.
Provisions for password protection or physical key interlock shall be made.
Synchrocheck Function
The synchro-check functions of the protection relays shall be used to ensure safe and reliable closing
and reclosing operations. Circuit breaker operation shall be possible when synchronization conditions
between two systems to be connected are fulfilled (voltage difference, phase angle difference, fre-
quency difference). The busbar voltage shall be the reference voltage.
Synchronization criteria (U, f) shall be displayed on operator VDU. Means for remote synchronization
check shall be possible.
Interlocking System
This requirement involves perfect collection and processing of all switchyard positions of the whole
substation at all times. Unclear information, such as intermediate switchgear positions, switchgear
fault, faulty data transfer must never allow switching operations.
Because faults can have serious effects on the operating personnel, the function and design of
switchgear interlocking systems must be extremely safe.
The switchgear interlocking system should provide both bay interlocking and substation interlocking
facilities.
This system should operate properly in the event of control system outage. The interlocking system on
bay level will be managed through conventional (wire) interlocking and should be enabled in case of
an emergency command from a backup panel. Same elements of the interlocking system (wire bay in-
terlocking) should be used for the bay controller from command and interlocking (from a bay level). For
substation interlocking (inter bay interlocking), only software interlocking should be used. For medium
voltage switchgears (aux. supply), only combined protection and control units should be used. The
Contractor can choose an optimal communication medium for them, and software only interlocking.
For circuit breaker command from backup panel, no synchronization check is foreseen. Global inter-
locking shall provide the following functions:
Interlocking at the bay level and on the inter-bay or station level in conjunction with the station con-
trol system. While inter-bay interlocking will normally be performed at the switchyard control level, it
shall be possible to manually override the inter-bay interlocking at the bay level if the substation
control system is not functioning,
The central unit of the switchyard interlocking system (if needed) shall communicate with corre-
sponding feeders through its own serial data lines, which are independent from the other compo-
nents of the control system,
Simple extension shall be possible without changing of the hardware on switchgear level,
Serial data transmission to the interlocking system shall be continuously monitored,
Self-monitoring of the switchgear interlocking units, the station connection and the parameterised
interlocking conditions shall be provided,
Modification of the interlocking system shall be easily possible by changes in the software.
Interlocking Functions
The subsystem shall meet the requirements and fulfil the functions as follows:
The interlocking functions on the bay and switchgear level in connection with substation control
system. Whereas under normal conditions the interlocking functions will be provided on the substa-
tion level, provisions shall be made to overcome interlocking on the bay level if the substation con-
trol system is locked.
Self-monitoring of the switchgear interlocking functions / units, the station connection and the pa-
rameterised interlocking conditions shall be provided.

Volume 2 Page 146
If a central unit will be provided for the higher-level station interlocks as an independent element, it
could be integrated in the bus tie. The central units of each switchgear Interlocking system shall
communicate with the corresponding feeders through its own serial data transmission network,
which shall be independent from the other components of the control and protection system.
A solution with an interlocking system independent from the substation control system (e.g. central
substation computer control system) is preferable.
If defects in the feeder units appear, the rest of the system shall remain operational in terms of sta-
tion interlocks as well as the last switchgear status. This assumes that the identified defective bay
unit will not carry out incorrect switching operations. However, in case of emergencies, authorized
personnel can operate the defective unit located on the back-up panel with a push button. This
shall be still possible even if the power supply module within feeder unit has failed.
Extension of the system shall be easily possible without hardware changes on the substation level.
5.21.6.2 Substation Control Level
For detailed technical data, please refer to the Technical Data Schedules.
5.21.6.2.1 General
The central substation control unit is a microprocessor(s) based device (hardware and software) with
an adequate performance level to satisfy requests for substation control remote communication with
the National Load Despatch Centre, local by controllers, protection devices and with sub-RTU units.
There are two HMI (workstation, the second workstation can be used as an Engineer workstation) with
two VDUs, two substation servers working in hot stand-by redundant mode, two gateways, printer,
work place for maintenance and GPS.
The substation control system must support various protocols also for the existing part (in upper or
lower direction), which are by the rule from the IEC family (61850, 60870-5-101, 60870-5-104 60870-
5-102 and 60870-5-103). Furthermore, it must support future expansions of the substation control sys-
tem (meaning end stage of substation project), having a 25% reserve of resources as minimum.
Communication inside the substation should preferably be done through fibre optic cables. Communi-
cation toward LDC is performed via the existing gateway of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation.
The substation level equipment shall comprise the following elements:
HMI (main and backup) including two video display units for one HMI, keyboards, mouse and print-
ers, one HMI being used for operation (It is the main one). An engineer workstation is available. In
case of failure of the main HMI, the engineer workstation can be used as HMI for operation.
Two hardware station computers working in hot stand-by mode,
Communication devices to enable data exchange with NLDC via the gateway of Aminbazar
230/132/33 kV
Workplace for engineering and maintenance when laptop for maintenance will be connected.
GPS receiver that should run on SNTP protocols. The satellite clock will provide the reference time
to the comprehensive Substation Control and Monitoring System and protection relays through
IEC61850 substation LAN
It shall be possible to transmit single or all data to the substation level on request in the moment they
occur.

Volume 2 Page 147
It shall be possible to access the stored data and to analyse and evaluate them on each hierarchical
level (starting from bay level up to control centre). The access and analysis of the data from the local
port shall not disturb the normal performance of other control functions on the substation level.
The control substation computer shall also collect and process commands both from the control and
display unit and from the control centre and shall distribute these commands to the individual I/O units
of the bay computers.
The substation computer shall be capable to address to all terminals (at the bay and substation level)
according to actual and final stage substation configuration; additional 20% spare should be foreseen.
The substation computer should be capable of maintaining a record of current and previous HMI con-
figurations and should allow easy configuration changes by means of a GUI-based system.
The substation computer shall be equipped with terminals (monitor, keyboard and printers) as follows:
For the substation operator (main terminal and backup terminal),

For the protection Employer's Representative for diagnostic purposes (conventional PC with mod-
erate performance), and
Additional interfaces for portable HMI connection (maintenance notebook PC with moderate per-
formance).
5.21.6.2.2 Substation Control Level Functions
The substation control level equipment shall provide the following functions:
Duplex communication with NLDC,

Communication with substation protection system (including disturbance recordings),
Status indication,
Remote and local control of switchgear devices (circuit breakers, disconnectors, earth switches),
Alarm annunciation/processing/recording,
Measurement,
Data acquisition/logging/processing/distribution, trends of analogue values, customized reporting,
Fault recording,
Registration/tagging,
Sequential switching commands bay and switchgear oriented,
Sequence of events recording (SOE),
Remote parameterizing,
Transformer control,
Communication with interlocking system,
Cooperation with automatic voltage control,
Disturbance (oscillate) viewing,
Fault location viewing (%, km),
Clock control (GPS time distribution),
Self-monitoring,
Communication with HMI.
The substation control system should have a structure according to a "button-up" logic. This means
that data from lower levels (e.g. bay level) are not transmitted 1:1 to the higher level (e.g. substation

Volume 2 Page 148
level), but as a pre-processed package. Especially in case of greater faults, the higher-level network
control centre can be relieved by this method, because the data concentration in the switchgears dur-
ing stress situations avoids the so-called "Christmas tree" effect in the NLDC. Choice of authority for
controlling should be done by software, according to hierarchy, without the possibility of emitting
commands from two different places at the same time.
The substation control system shall provide all control and signalling facilities required in the substa-
tion such that the status of the substation can be ascertained and all the necessary control and switch-
ing operations can be carried out from the central control room.
The above-mentioned functions shall be provided either locally in the substation and/or from the con-
trol centre. Operator communication and interfacing with the control system shall be via an interactive
menu, keyboard (functional or conventional) and mouse.
To limit the number of cables and ensure extension of the system, the exchange of the information be-
tween distributed single bay units and the central substation system shall be performed through re-
dundant fibre optic wire.
Data acquisition and processing shall take place in real time with a resolution of 10 ms. for switching
operations and 1 ms. for fault data generated by the digital protection equipment. Analogue value
measurement shall be carried out every 1 second.
Every action shall be confirmed by return signals generated in chronological order, they shall be pro-
cessed and displayed on a screen (VDU) and simplified mimic board on the backup control panel (with
LED indicators displaying only status of switching equipment) and shall be transferred to the control
centre.
A facility to print out events and alarms shall also be provided.
In the event of loss of supply, the system shall restore and update the status of all devices automati-
cally when the supply recovers. The updating process shall not inhibit the rest of the system functions.
5.21.6.2.3 Voltage Regulation
Control of the transformer tap changer (rise and lower) from the substation computer keyboard shall
be provided with simultaneous indication on screen. The tap changers (OLTC) control and indication
from the control centre shall also be provided.
Each transformer (with OLTC) shall be equipped with its own voltage regulator or shall be controlled
by complex joint voltage regulation system provided by third party. Selection of automatic or manual
initiated tap changer control shall be provided. Parallel regulation is not foreseen, and such operation
must produce a warning but shall be an allowed operation.
5.21.6.2.4 Protection Monitoring System
The Contractor shall propose the protection monitoring system which is (as a function) independent
from the station control system for the remote relay monitoring and fault analysis. It shall have the
possibility to be used for station diagnostics. This system shall allow for:

Volume 2 Page 149
Monitoring and diagnostic of protective equipment,

Access to the relays and overview of relay setting from a local and remote location,
Protection performance analysis,
Fault recording and fault location determination,
Analogue fault data acquisition and storage,
Transmission of fault data to remote location for analysis,
Reports,
Communication with control system connection of the HMI for diagnostic functions of the primary
equipment,
Remote parameter reading/setting for protection devices is welcomed.
At the substation level, an expert system / advanced help utility should be provided with facilities for
transmission data to the control centre.
5.21.6.2.5 Data Security
Substation control and supervision system shall provide the security and diagnostic functions of the
individual system elements especially for:
Monitoring and diagnostic of auxiliary equipment:

Auxiliary supply,
Auxiliary air conditioning systems,
UPS systems.
Monitoring and diagnostics of the air conditioning system,
Monitoring and diagnostics of the firefighting system,
Monitoring and diagnostics of the alarm system,
Access to the files,
Transmission and execution of commands,
Serial data communication,
Data storage,
Coordination of functions,
Conformity of the substation equipment with the single line diagram.
To achieve high reliability of the system operation, actual faults shall be time tagged in the moment
they occur but not in the cycle time of the process. Software data and parameters shall be stored in
solid-state memory, which does no lose its contents in a case of loss of supply. The software and da-
tabase shall automatically restore after recovery of voltage.
5.21.6.2.6 Substation Management
MMI / VDU, cursor controlling device (mouse, trackball) and keyboard shall be provided to enable the
operator to interface with the substation control system. The keys shall have special functions con-
forming to system operation requirements. The meaning of the text or symbols shall be intuitive and
easily learnt; it shall be in function boxes in the operation windows of the screen (dialogue interactive
window).
The movement of the cursor in the operation window shall be done using arrow keys or mouse. Con-
trol and monitoring shall be implemented via the following displays on the operator's VDU:

Volume 2 Page 150
A set of single line diagrams,

Event list,
Analogue signals list, and
Alarm list.
It shall be possible to sectionalise and zoom the single line diagram as necessary to achieve a clear,
easy read displays. Different voltage levels shall be marked by different bus colours.
Control from the substation level shall block the control from the control centre, and control from the
bay level shall block the control from the substation level. Each operation command shall be confirmed
by the executor with "ready" signal.
It shall be possible to print out the screen as a hard copy / on request. The device selected for opera-
tion shall be presented by graphics on the background and shown in its actual state. The status shall
be expressed with different graphics or symbols and colour. It shall be possible for the Employer to
easily select and modify colours on the mimic diagram.
Mimic Diagram
The mimic diagram (single-line) on operator VDU shall visualize substation the configuration with the
status of all the switching devices in simplified form.
The VDU shall have a low radiation, digital, high-resolution semi-graphic /or full graphic display. The
substation computer should be capable of maintaining a record of current and previous HMI configura-
tions and should allow easy configuration changes by means of a GUI-based system.
For simple operation, a functional keyboard might be applied, with keys related to self-explanatory
fields showing what happens when the corresponding key is pressed. In this way, it shall be possible
to choose detailed diagrams and lists. The contents of these diagrams and lists can be parameterised,
i.e. they could be modified at a later stage. In each mode of visualization, the VDU screen shall be di-
vided on the peculiar fields, which shall guarantee clear display and arrangement of all information. If
needed, it might be proposed that each workstation has two VDUs.
The Employer is proposing the VDU screen subdivision into minimum three areas:
Message field,
Display field,
Command field.
The message field shall give the following information as a minimum:
Actual date and time,
Operational responses,
Operator prompts,
Summary information for the message overview and selection guide.
The display field shall give the following information as a minimum:
Switchgear overview diagram,
Detailed diagram,
Alarm indication list,
Event list,
Analogue measurements
The switchgear overview diagram can be configured as a single line diagram of substation, chosen
switchgear, or bay and shall offer a clear overview of complete switchboard to operator. It shall indi-
cate which feeders are switched on, which are off and which switching devices are actually operated.
The actual measured values (chosen by operator) shall also be displayed. The overview diagram
ought to be used for overview only and not for control. For control, the detailed diagram shall be se-
lected.

Volume 2 Page 151
At this mode, the image shall show the switching status of all switching devices of the feeders, and the
menu of the functional keys shall allow choice between switch controls.
The actually connected apparatus and equipment of the different voltage levels shall be differentiated
by different colours.
Annunciation of all unacknowledged alarms shall be provided. Once accepted, an alarm shall be
transmitted to the alarms display pages of the display system. Analogue measurements shall be dis-
played in digital form and include:
Transformer winding and oil temperature,
Transformer tap changer position,
(RMS) voltages (phase and line),
(RMS) currents,
MVA, MVar, MW (both directions),
MVArh, MWh (both directions),
Phase angle and power factor,
Frequency,
Aux. supply measurements (all AC and DC),
Ambient temperature.
For billing metering, only control measurement of active and reactive energy (both directions) is fore-
seen. Accuracy class for active power is 0.2 and 1% for reactive power. Energy meters are with pulse
outputs.
Values that are above / below the Employer's definable limits, shall be marked by colour coding (dif-
ferent colouring respectively).
Reports
Events and alarms, which occur during operation, could be displayed on the screen, printed or option-
ally recorded on some memory device.
The Contractor shall propose the optimal structure of such a list as default. It shall be easy for the
Employer both to modify the structure and the contents of this list.
The events shall be presented according to priority. On first positions shall be switching commands,
followed by protection indications after an excitation, with all corresponding details (e.g. fault location,
tripping signal). After that, the alarm annunciations shall be placed. This information shall be differenti-
ated for incoming and outgoing indications by colours (fast flashing light / slow flashing light principle)
and marked by different set of characters.
As already mentioned before, all events shall also be continuously logged in chronological order by
the pertinent printer. The layout of this events list shall be identical to the display on the VDU.
Messages shall contain in one line:
Time and date of event,
Switchgear bus voltages,
Source of information,
Designation of fault (event),
Information text.
In addition to real time given in left section, the right section shows the relative time with ms. accuracy
(12:13:51.35).
The event list shall contain all events occurring in the substation in chronological order. The event re-
corder shall have sufficient capacity to avoid any loss of data in the case of the set of events occurring
simultaneously; the applied procedures shall not allow adulteration of information.
The alarm list shall contain the currently active fault and warning signals throughout the substation in
chronological order. The warning recorder shall have sufficient capacity and procedures to prevent
loss or adulteration of information. When the warning signal has been acknowledged by the operating
personnel, the outgoing information shall be cancelled, the way of signalling of information shall be
cancelled or the way of signalling of permanent information shall be changed. Independently from the

Volume 2 Page 152
warning, the recorder shall record each information and cancellation log in the moment it occurs ready
for editing as a report.
Real Time Clock

It shall be possible to synchronize time locally, remotely (e.g. from the control centre) and externally
(radio clock signal - GPS). Time distribution (to the bay level) is through IEC protocol, or via synchro
impulses (from substation time reference). The system should support the automatic adjustment of
daylight time saving mode, either in auto mode or manually, as initiated by the operator.
5.21.6.3 System Design
5.21.6.3.1 Hardware
The system hardware shall be designed as interchangeable elements of the standard formats or as
compact modules (according to IEC 60297). It shall have an "open" structure and design so that ex-
tension of the system should be easy. The hardware shall meet the following specifications.
The Construction
All the bay control, interlocking, and associated equipment shall be placed in the cubicles (placed in
kiosk), meeting the following requirements:
The enclosures shall be finished inside and outside. All cabinet metal shall be thoroughly cleaned
and sanded, and welds chipped to obtain a clean smooth finish. All surfaces shall be treated to re-
sist rust and to form a bond between the metal and paint.
The enclosures shall be back-to-wall standing, floor mounted, and shall not exceed 220 cm in
height, 80 cm in width and 80 cm in depth.
Maintenance access to the hardware and wiring shall be through lockable, full height, front doors
only.
Provisions for bottom cable entry shall be provided.
Stable signal and safety ground networks shall be provided in the enclosure. The safety ground
shall be isolated from the signal ground and shall connect to the ground wire of the power line in-
put. The signal ground shall terminate at a separate stud connection sized for a lugged 16-mm
ground wire. Each ground network shall be a copper busbar, braid, or a cable. Use of the enclosure
frame, skins, or chassis mounting hardware for the ground network is not acceptable. All enclo-
sures shall be equipped with duplex 220 V AC 50 Hz, three-wire outlets.
All enclosures shall be provided with maintenance lamp.
All enclosures shall be dust proof and shall meet IP 51 standard at bay level and IP 41 at substa-
tion level.
All interconnections shall meet the following requirements:

All cabling between component units of the system and subsystems, including optical fibre LAN
connections, shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall be shown on the drawings supplied by
the Contractor.
Each end of interconnection cable shall be identified by marker that includes cable number and the
identifying number and location of each of cable's terminations; this information shall conform to
the Contractor's drawings and shall be either bind on or clip on.
All wiring shall use copper conductors and have flame-retarding insulation. Conductors in multi-
conductor cables shall be individually colour-coded.
Wherever possible, the use of disconnecting-type plugs or connectors is recommended to facilitate
replacement of defective components. The connectors should have a suitable design (locked with
screw or clamp) to prevent disconnections during normal operation without user intervention.

Volume 2 Page 153
Wiring between stationary and movable components, such as wiring across door highness or to
components mounted on extension slides, shall allow for full movement of the component, without
binding or chafing of the wiring.
No more than two wires shall be connected to one clamp.
The Local Area Network will be based on:
Twisted pair wire consists of copper wires that are twisted into pairs. Computer network cabling
(wired Ethernet as defined by IEEE 802.3) consists of 4 pairs of copper cabling that can be uti-
lized for both voice and data transmission. The transmission speed ranges from 100 to 1000
Mbit/s. Twisted pair cabling will be based on shielded twisted-pair (STP) of category 6 will be
used.
Optical fibre of multi-mode type
Switches of different types
Switches with electrical 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet ports
Switches withelectrical 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet ports and optical ports 100/1000 Mbit/s
Assembly and Component Identification

Each assembly (to the level of the printed circuit cards) shall be clearly marked with the Manufac-
turer's part number, serial number, and the revision level of the component. Changes to assem-
blies shall be indicated by an unambiguous change to the marked revision level.
Where custom parts are provided (such as a read-only memories), the part shall be marked such
as to specifically identify the part where similar parts may exist.
All replaceable hardware elements and especially printed-circuit cards shall be keyed for proper in-
sertion.
Maintainability and Availability

The equipment configuration shall facilitate major unit isolation for easy and precise troubleshooting,
efficient routine maintenance and shall achieve very high system availability. The complete system
shall, where feasible, be self-checking with any detected failures that would adversely affect opera-
tions automatically logged and indicated on the operator's video display unit (VDU) as an alarm.
Error messages generated by the software system shall be printed on the computer console, printer
and/or displayed on the Employer's Representative's VDU.
The substation level equipment shall be arranged in such a way that failures or removal for mainte-
nance of any single bay level unit shall not cause substation or system performance degradation, no
loss of display nor printing of event messages, nor other outputs from other bay level units.
Environmental Requirements
The equipment shall be able to successfully undergo the tests described in IEC 60255.
Application of the SWC waveform to any input or output, including the power input and communication
channel connections, shall not result in loss or change of data from any input or output being tested.
The control and supervision system shall not start or restart its internal logic as a result of SWC wave-
form application, nor shall the contents of any internal memory be affected by the SWC test.
The SCADA equipment shall be capable of operating under sustained supply voltage variations of -
20% to +15% and frequency variations of -2.5% to +2.5%.
The equipment shall be suitable for operation under the following environmental conditions:
Temperature -5C to +55C
Humidity 60 days at 93% RH and temperature of 40C
Dust protection IP 50.
System Size and Performance

The substation level equipment shall be sized to cover the following requirements:
Communication with bay level units and field level I/O units,

Volume 2 Page 154
Capability to process a continuous throughput of at least five (5) events per second for display on
the VDUs,
The installed primary memory must be sized to cover the requirements of this specification, it shall
have at least 25% unrestricted spare capacity, i.e. excluding all requirements for residents and
overlays for second memory resident s,
It shall be capable of expanding the installed primary memory sized for the above by an additional
100%,
It shall have at least a 32 bit CPU, and a one minute average CPU free time excluding disk of 60%
or more, while running the entry software system in the hardware configuration to be delivered,
It shall have a secondary memory (hard disk, flash disk) sized to cover the requirements of this
specification, and additionally a minimum of 50% unrestricted spare memory,
It shall provide access for at least all peripherals associated with the computer subsystem, the con-
trollers for the man-machine interface equipment specified and the communications controller/ front
end computer system,
In response to a control command, the delay between completion of an operator's keying sequence
and the response of the device as observed on the VDU shall not exceed 2 seconds. This time ex-
cludes the operating time of the device being controlled-
Status changes - the delay between a spontaneous status change of device and the appearance of
the corresponding logged message on the VDU shall not exceed 5 seconds. This delay shall apply
for a simultaneous change of 10% of the total points in the system.
Measured values - measured values (analogue and digital) which are rapidly varying quantities
scanned with such a rate that they will be updated at least once every 1 sec. This scan rate shall
apply to a maximum of 15% of all measured values.
It shall display a visual acknowledgement of acceptance or rejection by the control system of oper-
ator actions on the VDU and, if applicable, on the keyboard within 0.5 s of initiation of the action on
the keyboard.
Data transfer to remote control centres should satisfy IEC 60870-5-101/104 standards, according
the following table:
Data Type Latency Cycle Interval

Analogue measurement 4s 4s
Counters 16 s 15 min/1h
Two bits digital signals 2s 2s
One bit digital signals 2s 2s
Digital controls 0.5 s N/A
SOE 5 min N/A
Quality - General
The Manufacturer of the system shall have a certified quality assurance system in design, production,
installation and servicing.
Only equipment designed and manufactured by Manufacturers with proven record of successful sub-
station control, supervision system applications and operations in the electrical power utility field will
be acceptable.
The basic control and supervision system and its equipment and software configuration shall exist as
a fully developed product. The system shall employ standard equipment and shall provide functional
requirements of this specification.
Standard equipment means equipment that is currently on the market and that has an established
reputation of good performance and with manuals and complete parts list available.

Volume 2 Page 155
5.21.6.3.2 Software
The software for the substation control and supervision system shall enable performance of the follow-
ing functions:
Central control and interlocking of HV switching equipment,

Signalling of the HV switching equipment status,
Measurement of analogue values of busbar,
Measurement of analogue values of feeders,
Logging of analogue values,
Reports,
Protection system monitoring,
Supervising and monitoring of diagnostic functions,
Transformer load and behaviour monitoring,
Modelling and simulation,
Aid to decision making (expert),
Coordination of access to the object bus,
Others (individual Employer's software).
The substation control and supervision system software submitted by the Contractor as a basic soft-
ware shall be made in a high-level language (e.g. C++) and should allow modifications by the Employ-
er in conformity with detailed instructions submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the
necessary documents, compilers and development system to enable the Employer to modify and
maintain the software. All future updates deemed necessary for functional troubleshooting and general
application improvements shall be delivered free of cost by the Contractor and shall be covered by a
software license. The license should cover an adequate number of concurrent users and it should be
possible to extend the number of users by 50%.
The software shall be provided for the purposes to generate the following reports:
History of the states of HV switching equipment,

Interlocking conditions,
Analogue signals value and trends,
Circuit or device power measurements,
Limit values,
Service history of devices on indicate maintenance requirements (diagnostics),
Owner developed diagnostic of the switchgear equipment,
Owner developed expert system / advanced utilities.
The system software shall have a modular structure and shall comprise firmware and standard soft-
ware functions. It shall be possible to combine the modules to suit the configuration of the substation
and the Employer's operating philosophy.
It shall be possible to use software supplied by the Employer in the system. The Employer may extend
the software using a high-level language (e.g. C++). All the hardware and software facilities shall be
accessible for the Employer for development and maintenance of the software. The Employer shall al-
so have the possibility to make changes in the software with using the local Employer output.
The Contractor shall provide detailed instructions for adjusting software to the Employer's require-
ments.

Volume 2 Page 156
5.21.6.4 Implementation
The Contractor (after contract award) shall create the initial substation database (including definitions
and parameters of control, analogue and status points), static and dynamic parts of all the VDU dis-
plays, reports etc., following the Employer's specifications. All these activities must comply with the
Employer's current regulations, technical recommendations, domestic standards an operation philoso-
phy and practice.
Following the above, the Employer will submit comments to the Contractor and both parties will closely
work together to develop the final database and VDU display screens including the displays in English
language.
The Contractor will be fully responsible for accuracy and reliability of database, displays and reports.
All operator-displayed information (menus, commands and process massages) shall be in English.
5.21.6.5 Substation Management System (SCMS)
5.21.6.5.1 Operation
Operation has two aspects:
Operation of the SCMS: setting of markers (warnings, operator comment), acknowledgement of

alarms, withdrawal of information, printouts and displays and control of switches,
Operation of the primary and secondary equipment: by means of control operations, it shall be
possible to give commands to primary and secondary objects and systems.
All control operations, if performed on a display, shall be menu driven, eventually combined with func-
tion keys.
All control operations shall consist of two steps: a selection phase and an execution phase.
It shall be possible to interrupt a selection at any time. A selection shall automatically be interrupted if
the given command is not the right one or if it is not given within a certain, adjustable, time period after
the selection has been made.
All control operations shall be reported by the SCMS.
Within the SCMS, it shall be possible to define more control locations i.e. at substation level and at
bay level. At every control location, it shall be possible to prohibit control from a higher level. Control
from a certain location is only allowed if information of the objects concerned is available at that loca-
tion.
For emergency situations, it shall be possible to give commands to objects even when the SCMS is
down. These commands will be without interlocks.
5.21.6.5.2 Data Processing
An operational database shall contain all data needed for real time process operations.

Volume 2 Page 157
The SCMS shall be able to process all data resulting from the substation systems, objects etc. and
from the SCMS itself. Data consist, amongst others, of:
System and process- events,

System and process-alarms,
Measurements:
Analogue values,
Digital values,
Metering data,
Processing consists, amongst others, of:
Presentation,
Monitoring,
Alarming,
Logging,
Archiving,
Preparation and transmission to the NLDC.
Because information is treated by several disciplines, it shall be possible to assign information to one
or more categories.
The time resolutions of the inputs shall be configurable with a minimum of 1 ms. The addition of a time
stamp to an event or alarm shall be configurable.
All data that is to be processed has to be valid. If invalid data exist, a warning message shall be gen-
erated. Processing of invalid data, resulting in invalid information, shall be prohibited; in certain de-
fined cases, old valid information may be used instead.
When (re)starting a (sub)system, all data that is used by or that the concerned functions are responsi-
ble for, shall be updated.
It shall be possible to replace status and numerical data manually. Every replacement shall be report-
ed by the SCMS.
Processing of information shall allow a distinction between the source and the nature of information;
for instance, information resulting from invalid and/or manually changed data shall be clearly recog-
nizable as such.
Combinations of data, including data resulting from fast processes, shall be possible. It shall be possi-
ble to transfer the time stamp of an initiating event to a resulting event.
All events and alarms, originating from the SCMS and the substation including manually changed,
shall have identical processing possibilities.
All data in the system shall have a unique and functional identification (name) which shall be con-
sistent throughout the total system and also in the presentation to the Employer.
This identification shall be clearly understandable for the operator and shall not need any cross refer-
ence tables or other lists. The same is valid for the status of signals; presented status shall be clearly
understandable.

Volume 2 Page 158
Data identification shall consist of:
Equipment type identification,

Location identification,
Equipment identification,
Signal identification,
Data type identification.
Within these restrictions, names and text shall be freely configurable with at least 12 characters per
identification.
Presentation
The SCMS shall be able to present all information available within the SCMS. Presentation must be
done in a clear and structural way. Information shall be available as:
Overviews to be used for operation, allowing control commands,
General overviews of the installation, not allowing control commands,
General overviews of the status of alarms and events,
Overviews of alarms to be acknowledged,
General overviews of measurements,
Reports.
It shall be possible to define subsets from the information available in the SCMS. The SCMS shall
have the possibility to present information that will support the operation of the SCMS and the availa-
ble functions (help function) as well as information to support the operation of the substation (vademe-
cum function). Vademecum information can consist of:
Time of appearance,
Meaning of the information,
Possible cause of an alarm or event,
Who is to be warned in a certain situation.
All information to be printed shall also be available on a display.
It shall be possible to add to each display a number of lines to present the latest alarms. Displays shall
be called up directly (i.e. by name) or from a menu. It shall also be possible to call up a display from
another display.
Dynamic information shall be updated regularly.
Capability shall be provided for defining split multi-window areas to display multiple displays simulta-
neously on the same screen, as well as multi-screen mode, panning, scrolling and zooming.
If information consists of more pages, page down and page up shall be possible. It shall be possible to
present events in chronological order.
A distinction in presentation shall be made between acknowledged, not acknowledged and active
alarms. An alarm shall be presented when it is valid or when it has not been acknowledged yet.
Acknowledgement of alarms shall be possible individually and per page.
The SCMS shall be able to calculate and present trend curves with the following possibilities:
Trends per day, week, month and year
Automatic and manual scaling
Zooming in/out
At least 4 curves visible at the same time
Adjustable colours per curve
If a command is blocked or, for whatever reason, cannot be given, this shall be presented to the oper-
ator.
Presentation of information shall be independent from the control authorization. Information shall be
presented in the native language.
On each VDU, every available display shall be called up. Every (sub)system shall present its status on
the equipment itself.

Volume 2 Page 159
Logging
It shall be possible to tabulate and summarize information on paper in a clearly structured way. Lists to
be printed shall be clearly identifiable and shall be dated.Information to be printed shall be:
A list per type of event or alarm,
A list per part of the installation (i.e. bay),
General information,
Reports,
Lists of archived information.
Printing shall have the following possibilities:
Printing on demand,
Printing automatically at a certain time,
Printing automatically at a definable occasion.
If more printers are available, it shall be possible to choose which printer shall be used. This shall be
configurable by the operator. In case of non-availability of the assigned printer, the system shall pro-
vide adequate feedback by informing the operator about the status and by providing an alternate
printer path and/or a changeover to an alternative configuration. In any case, the non-availability of the
printer should not result in loss of data, and the data shall be spooled inside the system to be printed
as and when the printer is available again.
All control operations shall be logged, also if they are blocked. Besides the object concerned also the
kind of command (open, close or higher, lower etc.) shall be logged. All status changes of HV objects
shall be logged as well.
Every new type of printout shall start at a new page.
The information per line shall at least consist of:
Time stamp,
Equipment identification,
Signal identification,
Status.
Every page shall have a date stamp. In case a printer is not responding, information shall not be lost.
If more than one printer is available, it shall be possible to configure printers to replace each other. In
case of failure of a printer, another printer shall take over after a certain, adjustable, waiting time. No
information to be printed shall be lost. Also in this situation, the difference between types of listings
shall be clear.
Measuring
The SCMS shall be able to process measurements originating from the primary and secondary instal-
lation.
It shall be possible to execute calculations on these data and on combinations. Results shall be treat-
ed in the same way as other measurements.
Data coming from metering devices shall be subject to the methods and accuracy that is common
practice in this discipline.
Monitoring
All data (status, numerical), entering the SCMS (events, alarms, and measurements) or generated
within the SCMS, shall be monitored on:
Violating minimum or maximum levels/thresholds,
Status change,
Too long transition time,
The appearance of combinations of the above mentioned situations.
As mentioned above, the SCMS shall generate a message in every substation. In case of a too long
transition time, it shall be possible to indicate the corresponding phase.

Volume 2 Page 160
Thresholds shall be definable per measurement.

The SCMS shall monitor its own functioning, including its power supply and connections to peripheral
subsystems and other systems. Failures shall be reported by the SCMS.
In case of failure or complete breakdown of a (sub) system, a message shall be generated on the
SCMS itself and to the next higher level.
Overflow of buffers or archives shall be reported. Overflow shall not influence the functioning of the
SCMS (except for the buffers or archives concerned).
It shall be possible to initiate or carry out actions on the appearance of a certain situation (status, val-
ue, and combinations). Actions can be:
Acoustic signal,
Starting a,
Generating a message -logging.
Monitoring and actions to be carried out shall be freely configurable.
Archiving
To allow fault analysis, to store data for longer time periods or to process data at a different location, it
shall be possible to archive data periodically or spontaneously. Available time stamps shall also be ar-
chived.
Information received by the bay level control system (two bits digital and analogue signals) shall be
time tagged and stored for one year. The storage media shall be hard disk, re-writeable optical drive,
or solid-state (flash) memory.
Processing of archived data and presentation of retrieved information shall be possible on the SCMS
itself. Processing of archives on standard PCs with standard software shall also be possible.
It shall be possible to archive information instead of printing it. This shall be configurable by the opera-
tor.
The operator shall have the possibility to retrieve archived data or information and to process, present
or print it. It shall be possible to use search criteria to get subsets of the archived data or information
and to sort data and information.
It shall be possible to backup archives without interrupting the operation of the SCMS. When, how and
from which data or information archives will be made shall be freely configurable.
Suppression of Data Processing

It shall be possible to suppress the processing of data. This suppression shall be independent from
the type of data and shall be determined by the position of a switch (i.e. maintenance switch) or the
status of an alarm or event. It shall also be possible for the operator to activate the suppression man-
ually.
Suppression shall be possible for every control location.
Suppression shall be freely configurable on the following items:
Which alarm(s) or event(s)
The kind of processing
At what status of which signal
5.21.6.5.3 Control
Commands
By means of commands, it shall be possible to control primary and secondary equipment.
For the sake of a safe control of objects, it shall be possible to specify checks: general checks as well
as specific checks. A command shall be prohibited if the related conditions are not met.

Volume 2 Page 161
General checks concern for instance the position of maintenance switches, the control location switch
and possible manually inserted blockings. Specific checks concern the status and/or alarms of objects
in the bay concerned or elsewhere in the substation.
Along with the checks mentioned before, the following requirements have to be fulfilled before a com-
mand to an object is allowed:
Only one command is given at the same time per substation,
The right object has been selected,
No blocking exists for the bay and/or object concerned.
It shall be possible to define at least two levels from which objects can be controlled:
A level from which control of the whole substation is possible,
A level from which control of a limited (functional) part of the substation is possible (i.e. a bay). This
control location shall functionally be as close as possible to the objects concerned.
The hierarchical order of control depends on the functional distances of the control level to the objects:
commands from a certain level can always be prohibited from a level that is functionally closer to the
objects.
Continuous and pulse commands shall be possible.
Commands, and the reaction of objects on it, shall be monitored. Continuous commands shall be in-
terrupted if the object has reached its new position or, in the case of a too long transition time, after a
certain adjustable waiting time.
Automatic repetition of commands is not permitted.
Switchgear Interlocking
To minimize the possibility of switching loads with disconnectors or earthing live sections, definition of
an interlocking function for every object shall be possible to minimize the danger for personnel and/or
equipment. The concerned interlocking shall prohibit a command that is not allowed.
The interlock function shall only use actual and valid information. In case, needed information is not up
to date or invalid, the concerned command shall be prohibited.
It is fundamental that every command given by means of the SCMS will go through the concerned in-
terlock function.
Switchgear interlocking shall be freely configurable.
It shall be possible to configure a bypass for each interlock. If implemented, this bypass shall be acti-
vated per object and before each command that is given. After the command has been given, the by-
pass shall automatically and immediately become inactive. The status of the bypass being active
should be clearly presented and protected by adequate security levels.
Sequential Switching
To make control of the substation more comfortable and more secure, is shall be possible to configure
sequential switching (SSP) in the SCMS. Starting of these shall be possible:
Automatically,
Triggered by an event,
By the operator.
Starting a SSP may be possible from the level at which control of the whole substation is possible, or
from the next higher hierarchical level.
A SSP is only allowed to give a command if no blocking exists for the object concerned and when the
preceding command (if applicable) has been finished correctly and in good order.
SSPs shall be able to run in two modes:
Fully automatically: once started the performs all commands automatically (if no blocking, etc. ex-
ist),
Step by step: the waits after each performed command for the operator to permit the next step.
The active mode is to be decided by the operator.

Volume 2 Page 162
It shall be possible to interrupt a SSP at any moment, either by the operator or automatically; all ob-
jects shall remain in their position at the moment of interruption, already active commands must be fin-
ished.
Every SSP shall generate the following messages when applicable:
running,
interrupted,
finished (in a regular way, no faults etc.).
It shall be possible to define conditions to prohibit a SSP from starting or, when it is running, to inter-
rupt it. Conditions can be general (independent of the bay) or can be bay specific.
If a SSP is interrupted, this shall be reported, including the reason for this interruption.
Only one SSP is allowed to be active at the same time in the substation. SSPs shall be freely configu-
rable.
Synchronizing
It shall be possible to couple asynchronous and synchronous networks and generators automatically
by means of an automatic synchronous coupler (ASC). The ASC function shall be used with every
closing command to a circuit breaker. If the conditions for closing are valid, one and only one closing
command shall be given to the circuit breaker.
The time during which the ASC function is allowed to be active (to synchronize) shall be adjustable.
After the allowed synchronizing time has expired or after a closing command has been given, the ASC
function shall be reset automatically.
Reset of the ASC function by the operator shall be possible at every moment of a synchronization cy-
cle, which shall stop at that particular moment. Already given commands must be finished.
The following information shall result from the ASC function and shall be processed by the SCMS:
Voltage difference (measuring),
Frequency difference (measuring),
Phase angle difference (measuring),
Alarms,
Events.
The measuring signals to be used with each synchronization depend on the actual configuration of the
substation. Switching the right signals to the ASC shall be the responsibility of the SCMS.
It shall be impossible to couple measuring circuits to each other.
5.21.6.5.4 Operation Support Functions
The SCMS shall be able to support the management of the substation and of the grid concerned, us-
ing the data present in the SCMS. The following functions shall be available:
Accumulated running time of pumps (transformer), number of OLTC changes,

Monitoring the H2 contents of transformer oil (as minimum).
Examples of other functions that shall be possible:
Load and lifetime monitoring of transformers.
Monitoring the load of HV circuits,
Number of normal and on-fault switching operations of the circuit breaker.

Volume 2 Page 163
5.21.6.5.5 Interfacing to Other Control Systems
General
All data transfer shall be monitored in terms of overruns, quality errors and response timeouts. Repeti-
tive failure of a communication link, even without disturbing communication, shall initiate an operator
alarm.
Data concerning a control command always has the highest priority. The communication protocols
used shall be transparent. Communication facilities shall be adequate for the functioning of systems to
be connected.
Information exchange shall never result in loss of data.
Operation
The SCMS shall be able to process operations from the NLDC.
Control operations from the NLDC shall be treated in the same way as control operations given
within the substation itself.
Processing in the SCMS of operations from the NLDC shall be freely configurable.
Monitoring from NLDC

To monitor the substation from the NLDC, it shall be possible to send all information in the SCMS
to the NLDC.
It shall be possible to suppress information (grouping), intended to be sent from the SCMS to the
CC, from actually being sent.
Suppression shall be freely configurable on the following items:
Which alarm(s) or event(s),
At what status of which signal.
Time stamps, if present, shall also be sent with the information concerned. The information sent to the
NLDC shall always be valid and reliable. Failure of the total SCMS or parts thereof shall be reported to
the NLDC.
Data processing and reduction, means of data processing and information reduction, it shall be possi-
ble to limit the amount of information to be sent to the NLDC. However, the processing and reduction
shall not prohibit the NLDC from detecting the nature of a problem.
The way of processing and reduction shall be freely configurable.
5.21.6.5.6 Interfacing to Substation Installations
The SCMS shall be able to accept status signals, analogue signals and pulses. These signals origi-
nate from events, alarms and (accountable) measurements in the secondary and primary installations.
Analogue Signals
For every analogue input, the following variables shall be adjustable:
Range,
Uni/bipolar,
Threshold,
Range in SI units.
The electrical characteristics of the signal shall not be changed by the input. All analogue inputs shall
have galvanic separation between each other and between earth.
For every analogue output, following variables shall be adjustable:
Scaling factor,
Maximum output value,
Minimum output value.

Volume 2 Page 164
Metering Pulses
For every signal, the following variables shall be adjustable:
Contact dither time,
Number of permitted changes per second,
Retrieval time,
Point of time,
Periodical,
From the hardware,
From a higher level,
reset/ no reset at retrieval,
Normal closed or normal open contacts,
Single or double pole signal.
Status Signals
For every status input, the following variables shall be adjustable:
Contact dither time,
Number of permitted changes per second,
Single or double pole signal,
Transition time.
The SCMS shall be able to give out status signals. Every status output shall have the following adjust-
able variables:
Single or double pole signal.
Digital Measuring Signals

The SCMS shall be able to read and process at least the following codes:
1 out of n,
Binary,
Gray,
BCD.
The measuring signal may have a width of 1 to 4 bytes. By means of digital measurement inputs, the
SCMS shall be able to read tap changer status signals. In-between positions shall also be processed.
The processing shall be freely configurable.
The SCMS shall be able to give out digital measurement values with a width of 1 to 4 bytes using at
least the following codes:
1 out of n,
Binary,
Gray,
BCD.
Commands
For every command, the following variables shall be adjustable:
Maximum command time: adjustable from 0, 1 to 50 s. with 0.1 s. steps,
Address of the input to report back the status - single or double pole command,
Continuous or pulse command.

Volume 2 Page 165
Interfacing to Protections
If protections are not integrated in the SCMS, the SCMS shall be able to process data originating from
protection systems, digital as well as more conventional protections, to retrieve protection data
(events, alarms, measurements) and to configure protection functions.
The SCMS shall be able to relay this data to other systems without altering it (transparent).
Fault records stored in protection devices shall be automatically transmitted to and stored in the
SCMS for further evaluation.
Interfacing to Metering Devices

Serial communication with metering devices is preferred. However, the SCMS shall also be able to
process pulsed information and analogue signals.
5.21.6.5.7 Authorisation
It shall be possible to configure authorization levels, especially for functions that allow control of ob-
jects or change of process variables.
If an authorization level has been defined for a function, it shall be impossible to use the function con-
cerned without the necessary authorization. It shall be possible to indicate the authorization level.
It shall be possible to use other means for authorization (i.e. key lock, card reader etc.) in combination
with a number of authorization levels.
System maintenance and supervisory control shall only be possible after authorization.
System Operation
By defining authorization levels, the following activities shall be blocked or permitted:
Adjustment of variables,
Control of objects,
Maintenance or management of the system (diversity in functions and/or system parts shall be
possible).
Definition of authorization levels shall also be possible for:
Objects,
Groups of objects,
Functions.
Authorization levels shall not interfere with control and monitoring from a higher level. For each opera-
tor, a dedicated set of authorizations shall be configurable. The use of passwords shall be possible.
The possibility to totally block the presentation and control in the substation shall be present.
Choice of Control Location

It shall be possible to configure one or more control location switch over functions. These functions
shall offer the possibility to switch over control for a specific bay or for the whole substation.
This function is meant to take control from a higher level to a control location in the substation or to
give control to a higher level. Control from a location shall only be possible if control has been taken to
it or given to it. A higher level shall never be able to take control from a lower level; a lower level shall
always be able to take control from a higher level.
It shall be possible to configure an automatic switch over of the control of the substation. The moment
of and reasons for activation of this switch over shall be freely configurable.
It shall be possible to use authorization in conjunction with the switch over function. The actual status
of a control location shall be presented at every location that influences or is influenced by this loca-
tion.
It shall be possible to send the status of the active control location to the NLDC. If this concerns the
control for a bay or for the whole substation shall be configurable. Processing of data in the SCMS
shall be independent from a control location and its status.

Volume 2 Page 166
5.21.6.5.8 System Support Functions
These functions are meant to support the SCMS maintenance of hardware and software. It is pre-
ferred that system maintenance will not interfere with normal operation of the system; control and
monitoring of the substation shall be possible (on-line maintenance). However, for special occasions, it
shall be possible to switch off the SCMS or part of it in case this is needed for maintenance (off-line
maintenance).
From this function, it is not allowed to control the substation.

General
The SCMS shall be maintainable by exchanging hardware and/or by changing or loading system or
application software.
Making backups shall be possible without interfering with the functioning of the SCMS or the function /
application concerned.
The SCMS shall offer the possibility to configure the processing of events, alarms and measurements
as well as the presentation and logging of information.
System software activities that are normally carried out by the Contractor shall also be possible on the
SCMS itself.
An operational database contains all data needed for real time process operations. A system database
contains all data needed for configuring the system and the treatment of data.
All process data as well as system variables shall be fully accessible. Entering or changing data, vari-
ables, definitions or configurations shall be done in a clear and efficient way. A warning shall be given
if conflicts can result from changes. Entering invalid or unnecessary data shall be prohibited. All ac-
tions concerned with the above activities shall be menu driven.
System maintenance shall be clearly distinguishable from other activities and functions. The SCMS
shall be fully self-documenting.
The location of I/0 boards, definition of I/0 on these boards and the name to be used shall be freely
configurable.
Displays shall be configurable/changeable interactively.
Configuration of displays and reports shall be free. It shall be possible to configure the system from a
central location.
Software shall be loaded in a simple and normally used way. Implementing new system software shall
not interfere with already implemented and functioning applications.
Online testing of functions, including monitoring of the test, shall be possible.
Database Generation / Editing

Data base generation/editing shall provide the operator the means to change, edit or add data records
in the source database. Data shall be tested and checked for validity at the time it is entered. After the
operator has finished editing the source database, global checks shall be performed to ensure com-
pleteness of the data set.
If data does not pass all checks, data modifications cannot be transferred to the operational database.
The operator may prepare several data modifications and activate these modifications by transferring
them to the operational database, at an operator-controlled time.
All performed changes to the source database shall be logged. This function shall also offer the possi-
bility to make a backup of data. In case of hot standby redundancy, an update of the database in the
standby system shall automatically be performed every time a record has been changed.
Provisions shall be implemented to import data into the source database from other IT systems.
The possibility to enter attribute data (relating to graphic elements) in the form of relational data base
files shall exist.

Volume 2 Page 167
Display Generation / Editing

This function shall offer the operator the possibilities of a full graphic editor. Full graphic displays, as
used in the system, can be built and maintained. Creating, editing, changing or deleting displays shall
be possible without software modifications. A library of the used symbols, operators and fields shall be
maintained in the system itself. Any change to the system library should update the changes on all
displays.
Report Generation / Editing

The report generation function shall provide the operator with the possibility to generate and edit re-
ports, defining/changing the contents and layout, and to manage the output of each report to a printer,
a file or a VDU.
Programming Services
A set of different programming services shall enable the maintenance Employer's Representative to
update (systems) software and/or reload new releases of already used one.
These functions shall be used for computer system maintenance only. This function does not contain
SCMS configuration services like generation/ edit functions.
Application Software Services

A set of different parameter services shall enable the maintenance Employer's Representative to de-
velop and update application software and/or reload new releases of application software.
System Management
System management shall provide services for the SCMS concerning security and reliability of the
performed processes and the data concerned.
This function manages and shall be responsible for:
Operating modes
Process operation (on-line),
Test,
Training,
Redundancy management
Hot standby,
Spare,
Resource sharing,
Monitoring
Communication (LAN),
Fault detection and recovery
Errors are recognized,
Actions to recover faults are initiated,
Start-up/changeover
The start-up of the system is coordinated and performed in phases,
In case the system has to be reconfigured, the changeover of devices and equipment may be
performed manually or automatically,
Data consistency
Data sources and information exchange are controlled the location of services/functions is ad-
ministrated,
Time/date synchronization within the SCMS.

Volume 2 Page 168
System Resource Monitoring

By means of this function, the maintenance Employer's Representative shall be able to check the ca-
pacities of the SCMS for the functions that are implemented. Bottlenecks in CPU capacity and com-
munication shall be reported
Training Simulator
This function shall provide an environment that allows operators to be trained in the principles and
practices of SCMS functions.
New and inexperienced operators shall be enabled to get familiar with all aspects of the SCMS and of
the substation involved. Situations can be simulated to train operators what to do and when.
Experienced operators shall be enabled to get familiar with new EMS applications and/or with changes
in the substation installations.
The simulator shall offer a real time operator environment without influencing the substation; hence,
operator actions will not decrease the availability and security of the substation.
Remote Maintenance
To allow remote localization of faults, it shall be possible to remotely retrieve information concerning
the condition of the substation installations and the SCMS. The information presented shall always be
valid and actual.
In addition, information stored for the purpose of maintenance of substation equipment can be re-
trieved.
The use of this function shall need authorization. Control of objects from this function shall be prohibit-
ed.
5.21.6.6 Integrity and Reliability
Information presented to the operator or used by the SCMS shall always and in all situations be relia-
ble and actual. Information that is not actual or reliable shall be marked as such. Faulty information
shall not be utilized by the system unless this has been approved.
All failures or discrepancies from normal functioning shall be reported by the system to the operator
including an identification of the problem and the function or hardware concerned.
The total SCMS and every subsystem shall be fail-safe. Faults occurring in a (sub)system or equip-
ment shall never propagate to other (sub)systems or equipment. In case of communication failures be-
tween levels, the systems concerned shall continue operation and perform their functions as far as the
missing information allows this. Systems at a lower level shall always be able to function stand-alone
from the higher level.
A fault shall never interfere with other functions nor are any unsafe situations in the switchyard permit-
ted. If necessary, the function or (sub)system concerned shall be switched off and/or shall be brought
to a safe condition.
No false commands are allowed under any condition.
No information shall be lost due to overloading of the system.
All information shall be time stamped.

Volume 2 Page 169
The status (failure/functioning/activated) of equipment and protection functions shall be visible at the
equipment itself.
It shall also be possible to manually initiate on-line as well as off-line tests. Automatic tests shall not in-
terfere with control commands. Tests shall never result in control commands to objects.
Availability
The availability of the system shall be such that 99.8% of time control from a central location (in the
substation or the CC) is possible. A bay shall be operable by means of the SCMS for 99.9% of time.
Maintainability
Equipment on bay level shall have a maintenance interval of not less than 50,000 hours. Equipment
on substation level shall have a maintenance interval of not less than 30,000 hours.
Time Synchronization
The SCMS shall always be synchronized to the absolute local time and date. At the start of the SCMS,
it will automatically be synchronized.
It shall be possible to define a fixed difference between the absolute time and the time used in the
SCMS.
The availability of the signal to synchronize the system shall be enough to guarantee a maximum de-
viation of the system time from the absolute time of 0.2 ms.
In case the synchronization signal is absent, the deviation of the system time from the absolute time
shall not exceed 0.1 ms. per 24 hours.
Start-up
After a power breakdown, the SCMS equipment or parts thereof shall restart automatically at return of
power, updating automatically all process information and resuming normal operation. Temporary loss
of power supply (up to 30 s.) shall not result in loss of application software or dynamic data relevant to
the process under control.
At breakdown and at start-up no commands or invalid messages are allowed.
5.21.7 Material Inspection and Testing
Approval of systems inspection and test results, acceptance of hardware and software/firmware or
waiving of inspection and tests thereof, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
furnishing equipment which meets the requirements of these specifications, nor shall such actions in-
validate any claim which the Employer may make because of defective or unsatisfactory hardware,
software and firmware.
The Employer reserves the right to request the additional tests on the system and/or its elements at no
extra charge on any work the Employer determinates not to be in accordance with these specifica-
tions. Whenever the result of any inspection or test performed or requested by the Employer in ac-
cordance with the requirements of this section indicates that the specific hardware, software, firmware
or documentation does not meet the specification requirements, the Contractor shall replace, modify
or add, at no cost to the Employer, adequate hardware, software, firmware or documentation as nec-
essary to correct the noted deficiencies.

Volume 2 Page 170
5.21.8 Routine Tests
The Contractor shall perform routine tests in accordance with the requirements of the Contractor's test
specification approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall permit the Employer access to the
equipment and software to determine or assess compliance with the provisions of these specifications
and to witness the Contractor's routine tests. The Contractor shall submit test reports of routine tests.
The routine tests shall include:
Visual check for completeness,

Wiring check,
Test of conformity with IEC standards,
Functional test of the individual systems at the works and commissioning.
5.21.9 Type Test
The Contractor shall carry out all type tests (if technical full equivalent type test not available) called
for in these specifications and as required in the standards to obtain required performance data. The
Employer may waive the requirements for type tests called for in these specifications and/or specified
in the standards, provided the Contractor can submit results of tests on identical equipment together
with test certificates from an independent testing internationally accredited agency approved by the
Employer and proof that the equipment covered by the test certificates is identical to the equipment
being supplied.
5.21.10 Factory Acceptance Tests
Prior to shipping the substation control and supervision system from the Contractor's plant, it shall be
subjected to the following tests and inspections:
5.21.11 Inspection
Representatives of the Employer shall have free entry into the shops of the Manufacturer at any time
during design, manufacturing, or testing of the equipment and into any mill, shop, or factory where the
hardware or software/firmware described in these specifications is produced.
The Contractor shall provide to the Employer's Representative, free of cost, all reasonable facilities,
equipment, and documentation necessary to satisfy the Employer's Representative that the substation
control and supervision system are manufactured in accordance with the specifications. The inspec-
tion rights described above shall apply to facilities of the Contractor or Contractor's subcontractors
where the system is manufactured. These inspection rights shall not apply to the facilities of subcon-
tractors supplying unit components to the system manufacturer. Such items will be inspected and
tested by the Employer's Representative at the manufacturing site. Inspections by the Employer will
include visual examination of the physical appearance of the hardware, cable dressings, and equip-
ment and cable labelling. The Contractor's documentation will also be examined to verify that it ade-
quately identifies and describes all system hardware, software, firmware and spare parts. The Em-
ployer shall have access to inspect the Contractor's and Manufacturer's quality assurance standards,
procedures, and records, which are applicable to this project. Inspection shall not relieve the Contrac-
tor of the responsibility for furnishing material and equipment conforming to the requirements of the
specifications nor shall such inspection invalidate any claim, which the Employer may make because

Volume 2 Page 171
of defective or unsatisfactory substation control and supervision system hardware, software, or firm-
ware.
5.21.11.1 Test Procedures
The Contractor shall submit the substation control and supervision test plans for approval six (6)
weeks prior to the start of FAT and SAT. Fully approved FAT and SAT test procedures shall be sub-
mitted to the Employer at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of the tests. The Employer
will only approve test procedures if they are inclusive, thoroughly testing each section of the equip-
ment. The Contractor shall use IEC standards as a guide in preparing the substation control and su-
pervision test procedures.
The test procedures shall include the following:

The test schedule, including provision for eight hours of unstructured tests to be performed by Em-
ployer,
The purpose of each test,
The function to be tested,
The plans/ procedures to be followed,
Specific references to project documentation for correlation with the procedures and for verification
of the documentation,
The test set -up, equipment, and conditions for each part of the test,
All test inputs and outputs,
Test software/firmware descriptions and listings,
A copy of any certified test data to be used in lieu of testing,
Expected results,
The acceptance criteria,
Procedures for handling the variances that are identified during testing.
5.21.11.2 Test Records
The Contractor shall maintain a complete record of all test results. This record shall be keyed to the
steps enumerated in the previously approved test procedures. The record shall include the following
items:
Reference to the appropriate section of the test plan,

Description of any special test conditions or special action taken,
Test results (pass/fail).
A copy of the test records shall be delivered to the Employer at the completion of the tests.
5.21.11.3 Test List
The factory acceptance tests shall test the substation level equipment while communicating with all
bay level equipment.
The Contractor shall verify the operation of the output devices in the I/O units and simulate the correct
response of the remote devices. The test boards may be used for one or more I/O units at a time and
be moved as required.

Volume 2 Page 172
The factory acceptance tests shall commence by switching on power to all equipment bootstrapping
and loading the software system for each computer terminal, verifying that each step is properly de-
scribed in the operating instructions. The substation control system shall be tested with all software
loaded and running.
The test shall include:
Inventory check and inspection for general appearance, cabling drawing conformance and label-
ling,
Checks of proper functioning of all hardware, software and firmware by a true exercise of all sys-
tem functions,
An input overload test, in which all test inputs are changed simultaneously and following which the
system shall proceed with normal processing of data and shall not require outside manipulation for
return to normal operating conditions (for telemetry inputs, values shall be changed beyond the set
alarm limit),
Verification of compliance with operating speed requirements,
Verification that orderly computer system shut-down procedures are initiated following an interrup-
tion of the AC supply,
Verification that system performance is not affected by AC power source abnormalities involving
voltage variations of 10%,
Demonstration to the Employer's satisfaction that the control system and its component parts meet
all performance requirements of these specifications and all performance claims made by the Con-
tractor. This demonstration shall include verification of functional requirements, and verification that
are not unduly interdependent, furthermore verification that incorrect manipulation via the man-
machine interface is properly identified and does not cause causes system lockups,
Test of all discrete input points,
Test of all control outputs,
Test on bay interlock units,
Test on assembled interlocking system,
Check of analogue accuracy, noise rejection and overvoltage protection on 10% of all analogue
points,
Test of SOE buffering, retrieval, and local logging,
Test of equipment spare through substitution,
Demonstration of techniques and methods for modifying the database, including point additions
and deletions,
Demonstration of techniques for changing a communications port to use another protocol,
Test of communication within protection monitoring system, and dialogue with distributed protection
demonstration.
Demonstration of access level controls and security protocols implemented and adequacy of the
same.
5.21.12 Commissioning and Site Performance Tests
The Contractor shall be responsible for field installation, commissioning and test. The Contractor will
perform the installation and testing under the Employer's supervision (as a witness). All hardware will
be aligned and adjusted, interfaces to all inputs established operation verified, and all test readings
recorded in accordance with the Contractor's recommended procedures. The field performance test
will exercise all functions of the system and duplicate selected factory acceptance tests to the extent
possible. This testing will include, but not be limited to, the following conditions:

Volume 2 Page 173
Each subsystem initialisation,

Diagnostics of primary equipment and self-diagnostic,
Checks of proper functioning of hardware, software, and firmware by exercising of selected subsys-
tems functions,
System communication interfaces including failure modes,
Database modification and expanding,
Inspection and approval of the HMI presentations (Note: all labels on single line diagrams should
be in English),
Test dialogues,
Operation of HV apparatus,
Test of interlocking system,
Test of event list (Note: event list should be in English),
Test of measuring functions (including trends),
Test of operation of tap changer,
Test of alarms (Note: alarms should be in English.),
Test of substation monitoring system.
5.21.13 Packing Shipping and Transport
The Supplier shall define the packing in which the equipment is delivered. The shippinglist shall state
the precautions to be taken during unpacking, repacking and transport of the equipment.
The document list to be supplied with each equipment is contractual. It must be added to the special
specifications.
5.21.14 Documents Shipped with the Equipment
As a minimum, the documents included in the equipment packing must allow the Employer to:
correctly unpack the equipment,

install and commission it in accordance with the instructions,
understand its operation,
ensure maintenance and repair operations,
correctly repack the equipment or a part of it.
5.21.15 Spare Parts and Tools
The Contractor shall supply spare parts for all substation control and supervision equipment. The
number of spare components shall be dependent on the total number of modules installed. The spares
shall consist of one unit of each type of module or printed circuit card installed, plus one additional
spare unit for every ten units installed. In addition, the Contractor shall provide consumable items con-
sisting of not less than 5,000 sheets fanfold paper for each printer as well as a one-year supply of
printer ribbons or cartridges for each printer.
Spare parts and materials supplied shall be additional to those used up during commissioning.
Regarding the main components of the substation control monitoring system, the following spare parts
shall be provided:

Volume 2 Page 174
One workstation,
One station computer,
All the necessary BCU modules/boards,
Two switches with optical and Ethernet ports,
Two switches with Ethernet ports,
One power supply module,
Spare GPS clock server.
The Bid must include a complete set of software tools for configuration, editing, set-ups, testing etc. for
all devices and/or modules (hardware and software). In addition, all communication parts must be in-
cluded. If needed, the Bid must specify all testing plugs, cords, sockets, interfaces, test equipment,
tools etc.
All utility software must work under Windows 7 professional operating system, and must work on a
maintenance notebook PC (as a minimum). Necessary interfaces (LAN, optic, RS232/485, modem...)
shall be foreseen.
The following tools and test equipment shall be provided:

Laptop with all the software used on the project IEDs and its accessories,
5.21.16 Training
The Contractor should offer a training plan for the Employer's personal for all delivered substation
subsystems (hardware and software). Training, range and other details related to the training course
are subject to the Employer's approval. Training must be on a sufficient level to enable the Employers
to use, maintain, modify and expand the control system.
The training for 4 Employer's Representatives from the Employer for 10 days on the SCADA equip-
ment included in the contract shall enable them to do the maintenance, respectively.
All courses instruction and documents shall be in English language. The personnel selected by the
Employer for this training will have the basic knowledge required to benefit from the training.
International travel, local transportation abroad and hotel accommodationshall be taken into account
for quotation.
The Bidder shall be responsible for providing all necessary documentation and facilities to properly
train the Employer's staff. Training fees shall be included in the contract.
5.21.17 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide hard copies of the complete documentation. In addition, the documenta-
tion for both hardware and software shall be provided on magnetic media or on CD ROM together with
copies for viewing and printing of the documents.

Volume 2 Page 175
5.21.17.1 Hardware Documentation
The Contractor shall provide documentation for all hardware supplied to the Employer. Documentation
describing the circuitry, operation of the circuitry, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures shall
indicate the applicable hardware revision level.
Documents shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Schematic and terminal-block diagrams,

Manuals for installation and maintenance,
Complete technical specifications of the equipment,
Catalogues,
Flow charts,
Descriptions and logic block diagrams of hardware and software,
Test report.
5.21.17.2 Software Documentation
The Contractor shall supply documentation for all software and firmware provided with the delivered
system. This documentation shall include the following data as a minimum:
An inventory of all modules to be provided and a cross-referenced index to the software / firmware
documentation.
A functional overview document, which describes the software / firmware on a subsystem basis
and includes a brief description of the hardware interfaces. This document shall functionally de-
scribe all software / firmware to be provided with simplified block diagrams. The relationship among
each, the database, and the system hardware shall be included.
A software / firmware documentation standards manual that describes in detail the documentation
format for items stated below.
Existing design documentation and Employer's manuals for the Contractor's standard software /
firmware that satisfies the requirements of the specification submitted to the Employer in their exist-
ing form.
Standard software and firmware, which requires modification to fulfil the Employer's requirements
in the specifications, shall be subject to the Employer review and approval.
The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of the communication protocols and a list of the da-
ta and transfer telegrams utilized for the substation control system and remote communications.
In addition, where third party or custom-built software is used, including the operating system, the
Contractor shall deliver valid software licenses to cover the lifetime operation of the system. The li-
cences should adequately cover the support and update procedures such as further patches issued by
the software supplier to cover at least the defects liability period.
The following software packages shall be provided:
Complete SCADA software with two full licences for severs (minimum 5 user licences),
Two full licences for HMI (minimum 5 user licences),
One full additional licence for HMI (for 5 users),
A database server software with minimum 5 user licences for every server,
Antivirus, anti-spyware and anti-worm server software package with 25 user licences
5 Microsoft Office software packages,
Acronis Backup software.

Volume 2 Page 176
All documentation shall be in English.
5.21.18 Software Structure
The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and shall be strictly divid-
ed into various levels. It shall be possible to extend the station with minimum possible effort. Mainte-
nance, modification or extension of components of any feeder may not force a shutdown of the parts
of the system which are not affected by the system adaptation.
Confirmation that the software programs will be supported for a minimum of 20 years is required to be
submitted with the bid.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain any license required for the operation software.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Client against all claims of infringement of any patent, registered
design, copyright, trademark or trade name or other intellectual property right.
5.21.18.1 Station Level Software
(a) Human Machine Interface (HMI)

The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS functions
and shall be independent of project specific hardware version and operating system. It shall fur-
ther include tools for picture editing, engineering and system configuration. The system shall be
easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt according to specific user requirements. The system shall
contain a library with standard functions and applications.
(b) Operating System

A Windows NT workstation operating system shall be used for the operator station as it sup-
ports several standard system features, e.g. support for several Windows office applications,
multitasking, security levels, data exchange mechanisms (DDE, OLE), open data base commu-
nication standards (ODBC) and a standardised, user-friendly look & feel HMI.
5.21.18.2 Bay Level Software
(a) System Software

The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in a
non-volatile memory. Its lowest level shall assure system performance and contain basic func-
tions, which shall not be accessible by the Application and Maintenance Engineer for modifica-
tion. The system shall support the generation of typical control macros and a process database
for user-specific data storage.
(b) Application Software

In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the application
software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block elements. The
functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested. They shall form part of a library.
The application software within the control/protective devices shall be programmed in a func-
tional block language.

Volume 2 Page 177
5.21.19 System Functions
5.21.19.1 Control Unit Functions
(a) Control
The different high voltage apparatuses in the station shall either be operated manually by the operator
or automatically by programmed switching sequences.
The control function shall comprise:
1) Commands from different operator places, e.g. from the associated control centre (NLDC), sta-
tion HMI, or the control panel (in control room) according to the operating principle
2) Select-before-execute commands
3) Operation from only one operator place at a time.
4) Operation depending on conditions from other functions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck,
operator mode, or external status conditions.
The control function shall also include:
1) Prevention of double operation
2) Command supervision
3) Selection of operator place
4) Block/de-block of operation
5) Block/de-block of updating of position indications
6) Manual setting of position indications
7) Overriding of the interlocking function (Second key switch.)
8) Switchgear run time supervision
(b) Status Supervision

The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch, etc., shall be perma-
nently supervised. Every detected change of position shall be immediately visible on the screen in the
single-line diagram, be recorded in the event list, and a hard copy printout shall be produced. Alarms
shall be initiated in case spontaneous position changes took place.
Each position of an apparatus shall be indicated using two binary auxiliary normally closed (NC) and
normally open (NO) contacts. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent
or indicate an excessive running time of the operating mechanism to change position.
(c) Interlocking
The interlocking function prevents unsafe operation of apparatuses such as isolators and earthing
switches within a bay or station-wide. The operation of the switchgear shall only be possible when cer-
tain conditions are fulfilled. The interlocking function is required to be decentralised so that it does not
depend on a central control device. Communication between the various bays for the station interlock-
ing shall take place via bay communication system.
An override function shall be provided, which can be enabled to by-pass the interlocking function via a
key/password, in cases of maintenance or emergency situations.
(d) Measurements
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly to the voltage
transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without intermediate transducers. The correlated
values of active power (W), reactive power (VAr), frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U)
and current (I) shall be calculated.
(e) Event and Alarm Handling

Volume 2 Page 178
Events and alarms shall be generated either by the switchgear, by the control devices or by the station
level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI. Alarms shall be recorded in a
separate alarm list and shall appear on the screen. All or a freely selectable group of events and
alarms shall also be printed out on an event printer. The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with
a time resolution of 1 ms. The time tagging shall be done at the lowest level where the event occurs,
and the information shall be distributed with the time tagging.
(f) Time Synchronisation

The time within the SAS shall be set via a GPS clock receiver connected directly to the bay level LAN.
The time shall then be distributed to the control/protective devices via the high speed optic fibre bus.
An accuracy of 1 ms within the station is required.
(g) Synchronism and Energising Check

The synchronism and energising check functions shall be distributed to the control and/or protective
devices and shall have the following features:
1) Adjustable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
2) Energising for dead line - live bus, or live line - dead bus.
3) Settings for manual close command and auto-reclose command shall be adaptable to the oper-
ating times of the specific switchgear.
(h) Voltage Selection

The voltages, which are relevant for the synchrocheck functions, depend on the station topology i.e.
on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct voltage for synchronising and
energising is derived from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers, isolator, and earthing switch
and shall be selected automatically by the control and protection IED.
5.21.19.2 HMI Functions
(a) General
The operator station HMI shall provide basic functions for supervision and control of the substation.
The operator shall give commands to the switchgear via the station monitor with the help of mouse
clicks on soft-keys.
The HMI shall provide the operator with access to alarms and events displayed on the screen. Be-
sides these lists on the screen, there shall be a print out of hard copies of alarms or events in an event
log. The alarm list shall indicate persisting and fleeting alarms separately.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities and all unacknowledged alarms shall be accessible
from any screen selected by the operator.
The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
1) single-line diagram showing the switching status and measured values
2) control dialogues
3) measurement dialogues
4) blocking dialogues
5) alarm list, station / bay oriented
6) event list, station / bay oriented
7) system status
8) checking of parameter setting

Volume 2 Page 179
(b) HMI Design Principles

Consistent design principles shall be provided with the HMI concerning labels, colours, dialogues and
fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out.
The object status shall be indicated using different status colours for:
1) selected object under command
2) selected on the screen
3) not updated, obsolete value, not in use or not sampled
4) alarm or faulty state
5) warning or blocked
6) update blocked or manually updated
7) control blocked
8) normal state
9) busbar colouring to show live & dead bus.#
(c) Process Status Displays and Command Procedures

The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages, frequency, active
and reactive power as well as the positions of circuit breakers, isolators and transformer tap changers
aredisplayed in the station single-line diagram.
In order to ensure a high degree of security against unwanted operation, a special "select-before-
execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a switch, the operator shall be
able to recognise the selected device on the screen and all other switchgear shall be blocked. After
the "execution" of the command, the operated switch symbol shall blink until the switch has reached its
final new position.
The system shall permit the operator to execute a command only if the selected object is not blocked
and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated The interlocking conditions shall be checked by
the interlocking scheme which is implemented on bay level.
After command execution, the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new switching position is
reached or an indication that the switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the rea-
son for non-functioning.
(d) System Supervision Display

The SAS shall feature comprehensive self-supervision such that faults are immediately indicated to
the operator before they possibly develop into serious situations. Such faults are recorded as faulty
status in a system supervision display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation in-
cluding all switchgear, IEDs, communication links, and printers at the station level etc.
(e) Reports
The SAS shall generate reports that provide time-related information on measured values and calcu-
lated values. The data displayed shall comprise:
Trend reports:
1) day (mean, peak)
2) month (mean, peak)
3) semi-annual (mean, peak)
4) year (mean, peak)
Historical reports:
1) day
2) week
3) month
4) year

Volume 2 Page 180
It shall be possible to select the displayed values from the database online in the process display.
Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to
select the time period for which the specific data are kept in the memory.
This report shall be printed automatically at pre-selected times. It shall also be possible to print this re-
port on request.
(f) Trend Display (Historical Data)

A trend is a time-related follow-up of process data. The analogue channels of all connected bay level
devices on the 400 kV and 230 kV level shall be illustrated as trends. The trends shall be displayed in
graphical form as columns or curve diagrams with 10 trends per screen as maximum.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or difference) online in the
window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals online in the picture as well as the se-
lection of threshold values for alarming purposes.
(g) Event List

The event list shall contain events, which are important for the control and monitoring of the substa-
tion. The time has to be displayed for each event.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at any time for the
whole substation or sections of it.
A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of
occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the computer. The information shall
be obtainable also from printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:
1) position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices
2) indication of protective relay operations
3) fault signals from the switchgear
4) violation of upper and lower limits of analogue measured value
5) loss of communication
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall be designed
to enable viewing of events grouped per:
1) date and time
2) bay
3) device
4) function
5) alarm class
(h) Alarm List

Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be immediately
transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau and shall
constitute an evaluation of all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting
faults. Date and time of occurrence shall be indicated.
The alarm list consists of a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be re-
ported on one line that contains:
1) The alarm date and time
2) The name of the alarming object
3) A descriptive text
4) The acknowledgement state
The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms, which shall be either audible or only displayed on
the monitor. Acknowledged alarms shall be marked at the list.

Volume 2 Page 181
Faults that appear and disappear without being acknowledged shall be specially presented in a sepa-
rate list for fleeting alarms. For example due to bad contacts or intermittent operation.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.
(i) Object Picture

When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single line diagram, first the asso-
ciated bay picture shall be presented. In the selected object picture, all attributes such as
1) type of blocking,
2) authority
3) local / remote control
4) NLDC/SAS control
5) errors,
6) etc.,
shall be displayed.
(j) Control Dialogues

The operator shall give commands to the system by means of soft keys located on the single line dia-
gram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for soft key activation. Data entry is performed with
the keyboard.
(k) User Authority Levels

It shall be possible to restrict the activation of the process pictures of each object (bays, apparatus,
etc.) to a certain user authorisation group. Each user shall then be given access rights to each group
of objects, e.g.:
1) Display only
2) Normal operation (e.g. open/close apparatus)
3) Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlock)
4) System administrator
For maintenance and Engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorisation levels shall
be available:
1) No Engineering allowed
2) Engineering/configuration allowed
3) Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure. Only the sys-
tem administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights.
5.21.19.3 System Performance
The refresh/update times on the operator station PC under normal and calm conditions in the substa-
tion shall be according to the levels specified below:
Function Typical Values

Exchange of display (first reaction) <1s
Presentation of a binary change in the process display < 0.5 s
Presentation of an analogue change in the process display <1s
From order to process output < 0.5 s
From order to update of display < 1.5 s

Volume 2 Page 182
5.21.19.4 System Reliability
The SAS system shall be designed to satisfy very high demands for reliability and availability concern-
ing:
1) Solid mechanical and electrical design

2) Security against electrical interference (EMI)
3) High quality components and boards
4) Modular, well-tested hardware
5) Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
6) Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
7) Detailed graphical documentation, according to IEC 61131-3, of the application software
8) Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
9) After sales service
10) Security
11) Experience of security requirements
12) Process know-how
13) Select before execute at operation
14) Process status representation as double indications
15) Distributed solution
16) Independent units connected to the local area network
17) Back-up functions
18) Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient conditions
20) Panel grounding to provide immunity against transient ground potential rise
5.21.19.5 Configuration Tools
The configuration of the station HMI shall be made using the operator station working in Windows NT
environment. The various functions shall be customised by easy to use interactive configuration tools.
Configuration shall include the visual presentation of the object, adaptations needed in process data-
base and adaptations of the communication configuration data.
A portable personal computer (PC) as a service unit shall be foreseen for on-site modifications of the
control and protection devices. The service unit shall be used for documentation, test and commis-
sioning.
The PC based service & support system shall be used for the following purposes:
1) System configuration
2) System testing
3) Help functions
4) Program documentation
5) Down- and up-loading of programs
6) System commissioning
7) Data base management
8) Changing peripheral parameters
The service & support system shall be able to monitor data in the running substation control system
and to present changing variables on the display screen in graphic representation.

Volume 2 Page 183
5.21.19.6 Documentation
The following documentation shall be provided for the system during the course of the project and they
shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel:
1) List of drawings
2) Control room layout
3) Assembly drawing
4) Single line diagram
5) Block diagram
6) Circuit diagram
7) List of apparatus
8) List of labels
9) Functional design specification (FDS)
10) Test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT)
11) Logic diagram
12) List of signals
13) Operator's manual
14) Product manuals
15) Calculation for uninterrupted power supply (UPS) dimensioning
16) High-quality SCD file.
This back-up control shall be used during emergency conditions, or bay control IED is out of service or
when control from HMI workstation or from remote NCC has been lost.)
5.21.19.7 Indicating Meters in Local Back-up Control Panels
Each circuit shall be equipped with Indicating meter for measurement of three phase currents, voltag-
es, frequency, power factor, active and reactive power. Repeat pulse outputs are to be provided from
all energy meters, where specified.
5.21.20 Availability Calculations
The Contractor shall submit availability calculations for the offered substation automation system.
5.22 Busbar Voltage Selection
Where required, selected voltage references, one for each busbar, shall be employed for all indica-
tions, metering, protection and synchronizing where appropriate. The correct voltage selection for the
requirements of each circuit according to the busbar to which it is connected shall be obtained by di-
rect use of auxiliary contacts on busbar selector switches.

Volume 2 Page 184
5.23 Synchronising
5.23.1 Synchronising Scheme
Synchrocheck facilities are required at all circuit breakers controlling feeder circuits and bus coupler
circuits, and LV circuit breakers controlling transformers. Interlocking is not required between the HV
and LV circuit breaker on the transformer circuit since the transformer could be energised from either
network.
The system provided under the Contract is to be to the approval of the Engineer and is to be such that
the synchronising circuit must be established before the circuit breaker can be closed. Check syn-
chronising relays to prevent circuit breaker closing under adverse conditions are to be included where
specified.
Synchrocheck relays shall check the phase and magnitude and slip frequency of the voltage differ-
ence across the open circuit breaker with contacts connected to prevent inadvertent manual closing
outside acceptable limits.
It shall be possible when closing via HMI Workstation or remote NCC to close a circuit breaker when
both the line side and the busbar side of the circuit are dead by bypassing the check synchronising re-
lay. The dead line/dead busbar check shall be made by means of 3 phase undervoltage devices. The
primary circuit shall be deemed to be dead if the voltage of all three phases is less than 20% of nomi-
nal voltage.
It shall only be possible to operate on one circuit at a time.
5.24 Diagrams
The Contractor shall submit schematic diagrams for consideration of the Engineer within six months of
the contract commencement date. Prior to preparation of schematic diagrams, the Contractor shall
provide single line, block and logic diagrams in order to agree the circuit schemes and operating
modes.
The Contractor will be provided with a set of drawings for Substations as soon as possible after award
of Contract. As part of the contract documentation, the Contractor shall provide integrated sets of
complete drawings (schematic and wiring diagrams and cable schedules etc.) for protection and sub-
station automation. The detail list of documentation is given under clause 5.19.9.6.
5.25 Current Transformer Calculations
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed calculations substantiating the parameters of the
current transformers he proposes to provide. They shall be presented within six weeks of the contract
commencement date.

Volume 2 Page 185
5.26 Energy Meter (Tariff Metering)
5.26.1 Meter Requirements
1. Programmable meter
2. Adjustable different tariff
3. 110-400V flexible input voltage setting
4. 1(10) A current rating
5. Accuracy class to be 0.2 for kWh and 0.5 for kVARh
6. Four quadrant meter
7. RS232/485 port for modem interface
8. Standard metering protocol for remote interface
9. Data storage of 16 channel@30min interval and of 90 days
10. Optical head and software to upload and download of meter data
11. Password protection for programming and for configuration
12. Configurable display, including meter ID, power quadrant display etc.
13. Provision for quick reading scroll, reset etc. (programmable)
5.26.2 Additional Requirements
1. Online test facility of meter (with TTB) and with security sealing provision
2. TTBs should be at the suitable accessible panel front location with meter
3. Meter cabinet should be exclusively for tariff metering only and have sufficient security sealing
provision, provided with 220 V, 5 A, two-pin socket outlet for modem power, auxiliary bias pow-
er, testing equipment power, etc.
4. All main metering CTs and VTs should be directly terminated to the metering panel including
star point (4 wire)
5. The backup metering circuit may be shared for other purpose
6. The VT MCBs (both main and backup) should be located in the metering panel; downstream VT
MCB rating should be less than that of upstream
7. All CT & VT terminals should have security sealing provisions.
5.26.3 Normal Display List
Scroll Order Display Item Name

1 Complete LCD test
2 Present date
3 Present time
4 Current billing total kWh-Del
5 Current billing total kWh-Rec
6 Current billing total kVARh-(Q1+Q4)
8 Current billing maximum kW-Del
9 Current billing maximum kW-Del Date
10 Current billing maximum kW-Del Time
11 Current billing cumulative kW-Del
12 Current billing maximum-Rec
13 Current billing maximum kW-Rec Date

Volume 2 Page 186

14 Current billing maximum kW-Rec Time
15 Current billing cumulative kW-Rec
16 Phase A Voltage
17 Phase B Voltage
18 Phase C Voltage
19 Phase A Current
20 Phase B Current
21 Phase C Current
22 Phase A voltage angle
23 Phase B voltage angle
24 Phase C voltage angle
25 Phase A current angle
26 Phase B current angle
27 Phase C current angle
28 System PF-arithmetic
29 Line frequency
5.26.4 Alternate Mode Display List

1 Complete LCD test
2 Present date
3 Present time
4 Current billing total kWh-Del
5 Current billing total kWh-Rec
8 System PF-arithmetic
9 Line frequency
Load profile (cumulative meter reading) and Instrumentation profile data in the following format should
be stored in intervals of 30 min for at least 100 days:
5.26.5 Interval Date (Load Profile)
Interval Data Mode: Cumulative Engineering Units
Time kWh-Del kWh-Rec KVARh-(Q1+Q4) kVARh-(Q2+Q3)
Date: 1/31/2015
00:00 0 0 0 0
00:30 0 0 0 0
01:00 0 0 0 0
01:30 0 0 0 0

Volume 2 Page 187
5.26.6 Interval Date (Instrumentation)
Set-1
End Phase A End Phase A

Time End Phase A Voltage Voltage Voltage Average System kW
Date: 1/31/2015
13:45 61.0544 61.1424 61.072 0
Set-2
End Phase A End Phase A End Phase A Average System

Time Current Current Current PF-Arithmetic
Date: 1/31/2015
13:45 0.0008 0.0004 0.0004 -0.7002
Self-read feature for at least 12 months' billing history.

Volume 2 Page 188
6. Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
6.1 Scope
A complete cabling system for the substation auxiliary power requirements and the control and protec-
tion multicore cabling shall be designed, provided, installed and commissioned by the Contractor as
specified in the Project Requirements and schedules. All ducts, cable racking and supports are to be
supplied under the Contract. The Contractor shall, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the competence
of the electricians and jointers, he proposes to employ on the cable installation and jointing works.
6.2 General Description of Installation
The complete cabling installation, including that associated with control and instrumentation, shall be
managed by the Contractor, who shall be responsible for design, procurement, installation and
works/site testing of the whole installation.
The Contractor shall employ a cabling computer program to facilitate the above and the Bidder shall
describe in his Tender the cabling management procedures he will adopt. A cable scheduling system
will be imposed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide an installation in accordance with the best modem practice and complete
in every detail for continuous operation.
Cabling areas will include those which have natural ventilation. Cabling shall therefore be designed for
the maximum ambient temperatures expected.
To cater for future requirements, adequate provision shall be made for the associated cables in re-
spect of trench sizes, space for future racks or trays and numbers of cables permitted in areas or
spaces required for future equipment.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer drawings for approval showing the proposed cable routes,
cross-sections of the trenches and arrangements of the cable racks and trays.
The Contractor shall prepare and provide all necessary cable schedules. The cable numbering system
to be used shall be advised to the Contractor and this system shall be followed.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary power, multicore and communications cables required as
required and specified in the Project Requirements.
6.3 Standards
The cables shall comply with British Standards or IEC standards and recommendations, or any other
Internationally recognised standards, subject to the approval and acceptance of the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 189
6.4 Cable Installation
6.4.1 General
The cabling system shall be designed to incorporate maximum practical security, to ensure that an in-
cident such as fire causing loss of cable circuits in any one route would at worst result in the interrup-
tion in operation of one unit only. Cables with reduced fire propagation characteristics shall be provid-
ed.
Cables shall be satisfactory for operation under the atmospheric and climatic conditions prevailing at
the site and under such variations of current, voltage and frequency as may be met under fault and
surge conditions on the system.
Cables shall be derated to allow for the likely number of cables following a given route.
The methods of installation shall be as follows:
(a) directly buried

(b) in concrete trenches (on racks or trays)
(c) in ducts
(d) in air
Control and instrumentation cables shall be screened/shielded to minimise interference, where neces-
sary.
6.4.2 Installation Criteria
Specific requirements shall be as detailed in the project requirements.
System security shall be achieved by ensuring that cables are segregated or separated from each
other as appropriate. Segregation shall be achieved by laying cables associated with any one high
voltage circuit of a pair on separate trays or racks at least 600mm apart from the cables of the other of
the pair with an airspace, but not necessarily a physical barrier, between them.
In general, to minimise interference, control cables and instrumentation cables shall be separated from
power cables.
The following group classifications will be allocated for each cable:
Group A: Single core power cables,

Group B: Multicore power cables,
Group C: Multicore control cables and protection cables,
Group D: Multi-pair control and instrumentation or indication cables.
In general, single core (Group A) and multicore (Group B) power cables shall be allocated to separate
racks. In a similar manner, multicore control (Group C) and multi-pair (Group D) instrumentation ca-
bles shall generally be allocated to separate trays.

Volume 2 Page 190
There shall generally be a minimum separation of 600 mm between instrumentation cables (Group D)
and power cables (Groups A and B), and a minimum separation of 300 mm between control cables
(Group C) and power cables (Groups A and B). However, both these separation distances may be re-
duced where the two types of cable only run in parallel for a limited distance, provided the Contractor
demonstrates that the level of interference resulting will not be detrimental to the operation of the
equipment concerned.
6.4.3 Reduced Fire Propagation
A cable installation with reduced fire propagation characteristics shall be provided, utilising cables with
organic compounds which are capable of extinguishing or considerably reducing the spread of flame
along the cable.
Consideration shall also be given to ensuring that the minimum toxic or corrosive products are given
off on combustion of any organic component used in cable construction.
6.4.4 Type Approval
Cables and accessories for use at all voltages shall have satisfactorily passed type approval tests
equal to those required by the International Electro technical Commission or equivalent, and details for
the cable designs offered shall be given in Schedule E of Particulars and Guarantees.
The Contractor is to certify that the cables and/or accessories offered will be identical in all essential
particulars in respect of design, materials and workmanship with the cables and/or accessories for
which type approval certificates are offered in support of his tender. The Contractor shall also ensure
that all materials used will be subjected to and shall have satisfactorily withstood such tests as are
customary in the manufacture of the types of cables specified. Records of such tests shall be available
for inspection, if required by the Engineer.
6.4.5 Cable Sizing and Routing
The Contractor shall be responsible for all cable sizing and routing design, procurement, installation
and testing.
Proposals for the following aspects of cable design shall be submitted for approval:
Routing cables along the shortest route compatible with segregation/separation and capacity limita-
tions
Sizing cables in accordance with length grouping, ambient temperature and current rating
Recording estimated lengths and later measured lengths for each cable
Progressing the cable installation
Producing and progressing cable schedules, cable termination schedules, and support steelwork
schedules and drawings
All necessary de-rating factors shall be applied when sizing cables, to allow for maximum ambient
temperatures, soil temperatures, values of thermal resistivity of soil, and grouping as necessary.

Volume 2 Page 191
Due allowance shall be made for the method of installation, depth of laying, spacing and grouping fac-
tors.
All power cables shall be adequately rated to withstand the thermal and magnetic effects of short-
circuit fault currents equivalent to the short circuit fault rating of the associated switchgear, except
when advantage can be taken of the peak current limiting effects of MCCB's and fuses. Screens
and /or outer sheaths shall be designed to carry the full ground fault current.
The short-time rating of all transformer and interconnector feeders shall correspond to the maximum
short-circuit conditions and be based on the previous maximum continuous rating operating tempera-
ture, followed by the initial asymmetric peak current, followed by the thermal steady state r.m.s. fault
current for the total duration required for the associated main and back-up protection to operate and
isolate the circuit. When protected by a circuit breaker which is not of the current limiting type, the ca-
ble shall withstand the maximum fault current, including asymmetric peak, for at least 3 seconds with-
out damage.
For 400V motor supply cables the rating shall be based upon the duration of the let-through current of
the associated main circuit breaker or fuse protection. The fault currents considered shall not include
for the reduction due to the impedance of the cables concerned.
Maximum conductor temperatures permissible during the passage of short-circuit current shall be in
accordance with cable Manufacturer's recommendations and joints and terminations shall be designed
to match the cable characteristics.
For all alarm, control, indication, instrumentation, metering and protection cables, the Contractor shall
determine the impedances, load burdens and other requirements of the cabling and associated
equipment and shall provide cabling for satisfactory operation. Particular attention shall be given to
protection circuits and the Contractor shall ensure that satisfactory operation will be achieved under
overload or short circuit conditions on the system.
The Contractor shall furnish copies of calculations and other details to show how the ratings and
cross-section areas of all cables have been obtained and the de-rating factors for which allowance has
been made. Where a cable is routed through differing types of installation conditions, the condition giv-
ing the lowest cable rating shall determine the cable size.
The sizes of all cables shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and the Engineer may require
the Contractor to increase the cross-sectional area of the conductor to ensure that the required current
carrying capacity and performance is obtained. All such changes shall be made by the Contractor
without extra cost.

Volume 2 Page 192
6.5 Cable Construction
6.5.1 Oversheaths
All cables shall have a black flame retardant low smoke PVC oversheath material, to meet the fire re-
tardant characteristics of BS 4066 and IEC 60332.
PVC sheathing shall comply with IEC 60540 and shall have flame retardant properties such that the
Oxygen Index is not less than 30 when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. D2863-77. Test certificates
stating measurement values for sample drum lengths of cable shall be provided.
The external surface of the oversheath shall be embossed along two or more lines approximately
equally spaced around the circumference with the words "ELECTRIC CABLE" in English. Figures for
the relevant voltage grade, together with Manufacturer's name, shall be embossed on the oversheath.
The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. The maximum size
of the character shall be 13 mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter of the
cable. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of the next
shall not be greater than 150mm.
The minimum thickness of oversheath shall not fall below the Manufacturer's stated value by more
than 0.2mm plus 20 percent.
A means of identifying the Manufacturer shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.
6.5.2 Armouring
All multicore cables shall be provided with galvanised steel wire armour. Single-core cables shall have
copper or aluminium wire or tape armouring.
The armour shall be protected by an overall PVC or plastic sheath.
6.5.3 Laying Up
The cores of multicore cables shall be laid up with a right hand direction of lay. Where necessary, non-
hygroscopic fillers, which may be applied integrally with the bedding, shall be used to form a compact
and circular cable.
6.5.4 Cable Drums
Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made of timber, pressure impregnated against fun-
gal and insect attack, or made of steel suitably protected against corrosion. They shall be lagged with
closely fitting battens.
Each cable drum shall bear a distinguishing number on the outside of one flange. Particulars of the
cable, i.e. voltage, conductor size and material, number of cores, type, length, gross and net weights

Volume 2 Page 193
shall also be clearly shown on one flange. The direction of rolling shall be indicated by an arrow on
both flanges. The method of drum marking shall be to the Engineer's approval.
Cable spare lengths shall be wound on to steel drums before they are handed over to the Employer's
stores.
6.5.5 Sealing and Drumming
Immediately after the Works tests, both ends of each cable length shall be sealed by means of a
shrinkable cap and the end projecting from the drum shall be adequately protected against mechanical
damage during handling. The ends of each drum length of multicore cables shall be masked red and
green in accordance with BS 6346 or BS 5467.
6.5.6 Spare Cable
Spare cable and accessories, as detailed in the schedules, are required to be included in the Contract.
6.5.7 Jointing Accessories
Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths and straight through jointing between shorter lengths
will not be permitted.
Jointing accessories shall include all necessary internal and external fittings, insulating materials, sol-
dering metal, glands, filling and drain plugs, armour clamps, earth bonding terminals and filling com-
pounds as appropriate.
Mechanical glands for the termination of elastomeric or thermoplastic insulated cables into straight-
through joints and termination accessories shall meet the requirements of BS 6121 and shall be cor-
rectly designed for the termination of the armouring. The gland shall not only adequately secure the
armour to provide efficient electrical continuity but shall also provide a watertight seal between the
oversheath and the inner extruded or taped bedding to prevent the ingress of moisture. All glands
shall be fitted with a substantial earth bond terminal.
The armour clamping device shall be capable of clamping the cable armour so that the clamp with-
stands any short circuit current from the armour wires, through the gland body to the integral bonding
connector.
Sealing end porcelains shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified so that the glaze is not de-
pended upon for insulation. The glaze shall be smooth and hard, completely cover all exposed parts of
the porcelain and for outdoor types shall be a uniform shade of brown.
Porcelains must not engage directly with hard metals and, where necessary, gaskets shall be inter-
posed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces in contact with gaskets
shall be accurately ground and free from glaze.
Outdoor sealing ends and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric conditions, proximity to the
coast, fumes, ozone, acids, alkalis, dust or rapid changes of air temperature between 15C and 65C
under working conditions.

Volume 2 Page 194
6.6 Types of Cable
6.6.1 Low Voltage Cables
These cables shall be in accordance with IEC 60502 with a voltage rating of 0.6/ 1 kV. They cables
shall have stranded copper conductors.Insulation shall be XLPE with an operating temperature of
90C.
6.6.2 Control Cables and Instrumentation Cables
6.6.2.1 General
Two types of cable shall be provided for the control and instrumentation cabling.
The first is multicore cable with stranded (7/0.67mm wires) copper conductors of min 2.5sq.mm which
is suitable for voltages up to 300V to ground a.c. or d.c. and currents up to 5A. These cables shall be
used where a low impedance is essential i.e. the secondary wiring of current or voltage transformers
and for circuit breaker or contactor controls.
The second type designated "SIGNAL CABLE" is defined as those cables carrying milliamp, analogue
or digital signals at low voltage levels (110V d.c. maximum) used on instrument and Logic Transmis-
sion Systems. These cables shall be multiple twisted pairs, screened and PVC covered with conduc-
tors sized 1.5mmminimum. The use of cable cores shall be such that each plant analogue signal is
transmitted in a twisted pair. Under no circumstances shall the signal positive be in a different twisted
pair to the negative. 20% spare capacity shall be included in all multiple twisted pair cables. The com-
binations of multiple twisted pair cables used throughout the plant shall be restricted to 2, 5, 10, 20,
30, 50 and 100 pairs.
Inductive interference between primary and secondary cables due to load, switching or unbalanced
fault conditions associated with the primary circuit shall be avoided. The more sensitive telephone,
communication, analogue and digital circuit cables shall be spaced at least 600mm from power ca-
bles.
6.6.2.2 Multicore Control Cables
Cables shall comply with the construction here above and shall have cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulation.
All cables shall be provided with a low smoke PVC oversheath.
Multicore control cables shall be generally in accordance with IEC 60502 with a voltage rating of
0.6/1 kV, except that 2.5 mm copper conductors shall be stranded (7/0.67mm wires). Standard de-
signs shall be for cables with 2, 3, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 and 36 cores, and single strand conductors will be
accepted at 1.5 mm.
All these cables shall have galvanised steel wire armouring.

Volume 2 Page 195
These cables shall be used where a low impedance is essential, e.g. for the secondary wiring of cur-
rent and voltage transformers and for circuit breaker and contactor control circuits.
6.6.2.3 Multi-Pair Instrumentation Cables
Multi-pair instrumentation cables shall be provided in accordance with industry standards.These ca-
bles shall have solid copper conductors, typically of 0.9 mm diameter laid in twisted pairs, triplets or
quads. The cables shall be polyethylene or XLPE insulated. They shall have galvanised steel wire ar-
mouring.
Cables shall be provided with either an overall metallic tape screen or individual tape screens round
each conductor bundle to reduce interference from adjacent circuits.
These cables shall be used for circuits with a voltage rating not exceeding 125 V to earth and a cur-
rent rating not exceeding 20 mA, where considerations of interference and cross-talk are of great im-
portance. Typical applications include communications, computer signals, transducer circuits and
alarms.
6.6.2.4 Oversheaths
All the cable types above shall have a black flame-retardant low smoke PVC oversheath. In normally
manned locations, especially the control building, cables shall have a low smoke, zero halogen over-
sheath, so as to minimise the generation of smoke and corrosive acid gases in the event of a fire.
6.6.2.5 Telephone Type Cables (TWPVC)
Construction
Multi-pair cables with 1/0.9mm tinned copper conductors complying with IEC 60228, PVC insulation,
individual twisted pairs, PVC bedding, single wire armoured and low smoke PVC sheathed overall.
Insulation
PVC insulation shall be "Hard Grade" to BS 6746 with a radial thickness of 0.7mm nominal 0.57mm
minimum. Minimum insulation resistance per 1000 metres of conductor at 20C shall be 10,000 Meg-
ohms. Cable laid parallel to overhead lines shall be polyethylene insulated polyethylene inner sheath
for l5kV between conductors and armour with a thickness of insulation 0.8mm nominal 0.66mm mini-
mum. The Contractor shall provide calculations to show induced voltage levels under overhead line
ground fault conditions.
Laying Up
The insulated conductors shall be uniformly twisted together with a right hand lay to form a pair. The
length of lay is not to exceed 150mm and the lays for each adjacent pair are to differ from one another
in length. In any case, the length of lay of the pairs shall be such that any cross-talk from pair to pair is
the least possible.
Core Identification
The insulation of the cores shall be colour coded in accordance with IEC 60189-2 for 20 unique ca-
bling elements (pairs) as described in Appendix A of IEC 60189-2.

Volume 2 Page 196
6.6.2.6 Pilot Cables
Telephone-type cable laid in the ground alongside HV power cables shall take into account the effects
of induced voltages.
6.7 Straight-through Joints
Each cable shall be run in one continuous length. Straight-through joints will not be permitted.
6.8 General Methods of Cable Installation
The arrangement of cables and the methods of laying shall be approved by the Engineer. Cables shall
be installed by the following methods only:
in concrete trenches
in ducts
on cable racks or trays.
Concrete trenches shall be provided in switchrooms. Cables shall be installed in a manner which per-
mits the required ratings and with due regard to the number of cables following a given route, including
future plant extensions.
All cables routed under roads and access ways usable by vehicular traffic shall be installed in ducts.
At all such crossings spare ducts shall be installed; the number of spare ducts shall be two, or 20% of
the total number of ducts installed at each crossing, whichever is greater.
Mechanical protection to the Engineer's approval shall be installed at all, points where the cable is vul-
nerable to mechanical damage. Locations where this protection shall be installed shall include all
points where cables pass through a wall, floor, side or top of a cable trench. In outdoor locations ca-
bles shall be provided with mechanical protection from ground level to a minimum height of 1 metre or
the cable box on the apparatus, whichever is lower.
Cables shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid undue risk of damage during installation. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary rollers and supports, and bending radii shall comply with the
recommendations of cable specifications and be to the approval of the Engineer.
Sunshields shall be provided in all locations where the cable would otherwise be subjected to direct
sunlight.

Volume 2 Page 197
6.9 Cables laid directly in the Ground
The method of installation shall be as follows:
Trenches shall be excavated to the minimum depth shown in Drawing for cable trench. Covers shall
be provided over cables laid in the trench.
Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced before inspection and approval by the Engineer of the
cables and accessories in-situ.
The Contractor shall lay the cables direct in the ground in the following manner:
70mm minimum of builders fine and graded and washed sand or other approved material shall be
placed to form a bed for the cables.
After the cables have been laid they shall be covered with additional riddled sand well punned over
and around the cables. No mechanical punners shall be used for this work. Protective covers of con-
crete shall be provided and installed.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the soil on the site is unsuitable for backfilling, the Contractor
shall arrange for the importation of suitable material.
Where three single core cables are laid direct in the ground and form one three phase circuit, they
shall unless otherwise stated, be laid touching one another in trefoil formation, with one cable upper-
most. In order to maintain a trefoil formation the three cables shall be tied together with tarred twine or
by other approved means at intervals of 1.5m.
Unless otherwise approved, auxiliary control cables shall be laid under the same covers as the power
cables and there shall be at least 50mm of riddled sand between the two types of cable.Above the
protective covers (tiles) there shall be provided 150mm wide Teri-tape in yellow with "CAUTION -
ELECTRIC CABLE" in English.
After any cable has been laid and until all of the cables to be laid in the trench have been covered with
their protective covers, no sharp metal tools, such as spades or fencing stakes, shall be used in the
trench or placed in such a position that they may fall into the trench. Rollers used during the laying of
cables shall have no sharp projecting parts liable to damage the cables.
6.10 Cables drawn into Ducts
Ducts and pipes 35mm minimum in excess of cable diameter shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor in accordance with the building and civil works section.
Ducts shall be of rigid PVC and shall be surrounded by concrete of minimum thickness of 150.
Before pulling cables through ducts, the Contractor shall remove any loose material from the ducts,
and prove them by drawing through a mandrel of slightly less diameter than the duct. Any lubricant
used shall have no deleterious effect on the cables.

Volume 2 Page 198
Any ducts or pipes not used shall be sealed by plugs (detail subject to approval) supplied by the Con-
tractor before backfilling.
The ducts shall be water and vermin proof sealed, after completion of cable installation.
6.11 Cables installed in Concrete Trenches
The cable trench system shall be designed by the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer. It shall
be complete with removable covers and shall comply with the building and civil works Section.
All cables routed in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by means of cleats or racks and
raised from the trench floor by means of suitable spacers. All cables shall be run in a neat and orderly
manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall not be acceptable without the prior approval
of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing the trench covers free of charge dur-
ing the execution of his work as directed by the Engineer.
6.12 Cables Supported on Racks, Trays, etc.
6.12.1 General
All single core and multicore main power cables shall be installed in cleats or saddles fixed at inter-
vals. Multicore power cables shall be installed on trays or racks but segregated from other cables on
the same tray by a space of 300 mm.
All control cables shall be installed on racks or trays with adequate clamps, cleats or ties to avoid ex-
cessive sagging. The Contractor shall include for the preparation and provision of single line cable
routing drawings and detailed cable supporting steelwork drawings, necessary to enable the Engineer
to give his approval for all main and subsidiary routes before installation commences.
Ample allowance shall be made in the design for additional cabling for future extensions.
Racks and trays shall be secured to channel or similar inserts installed in accordance with Building
and Civil works section.
All cables shall be run with a particular regard to neatness of appearance. Multiple runs shall be ar-
ranged so that cables entering or leaving the run do so in a logical manner.
Trays and supporting steelwork shall be securely bonded and grounded to the main earth-
ing/grounding system. Bonding and grounding connections shall be adequate to carry prospective
fault currents without exceeding thermal or voltage limits.

Volume 2 Page 199
6.12.2 Supporting Steelwork
All supporting steelwork shall be hot dip galvanised after manufacture and shall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
Steelwork section shall not be less than 50 x 50 x 6 mm for steel channels and 50 x 50 x 5 mm for an-
gles.
On all main cable runs, supporting structures shall be designed and drilled to accommodate additional
cable racks or cleats to the extent of 20% of cables installed under the Contract and those required for
known future extensions. The spacing between supporting structures shall be not greater than 1 m un-
less otherwise approved by the Engineer.
In cases where cables or their supports must be fixed to structural metal work, care shall be taken to
avoid eccentric load transfer to beams or other structural metal. Also, local overloading or deformation
of structures shall be avoided. The Contractor shall, if required, demonstrate that the loading resulting
from the attachment of cabling steelwork has been taken into account in the steelwork design.
6.12.3 Cable Clamps, Cleats, Saddles and Ties
For single core cables carrying three phase alternating current, non-magnetic trefoil cleats shall be
used and for other single core and three core cables claw type single or multicore unit cleats shall be
used. The cleating arrangements for single core cables shall be adequate to withstand all short circuit
forces.
Cable clamps shall be used at any change of direction of cable laying, but at agreed intervals on
straight runs cable ties of approved design may be used.
Every non-flexible type cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than 1 m from its termi-
nal gland to prevent stressing the termination, and on vertical runs passing through floors, immediately
above the floor.
6.12.4 Trays and Racks
The Contractor shall provide all necessary trays or racks which shall be fixed at not more than 1 m
centres. On all main runs trays or racks shall be installed to accommodate additional cables to the ex-
tent of 50% of those installed under the Contract or known future requirements.
Cables shall be installed on trays, in general as follows:
Up to 16 mm - double layer touching.

25 to 70 mm - single layer touching.
Above 70 mm - single layer with 25mm (minimum) spacing.
All cable trays shall be perforated.
All trays and racks shall be galvanised to a thickness not less than 1.6 mm and shall be PVC coated in
exposed areas. The erection of steelwork, trays or racks shall not proceed until the Engineer's ap-
proval for such has been obtained.

Volume 2 Page 200
Where cables are run on trays or racks, they shall be tied to the tray at 1 m intervals using materials
approved by the Engineer.
The cable tray system shall have minimum of 20% spare cable capacity throughout.
6.13 Cables Installed on Structural Steelwork and Brickwork or

Concrete
The majority of cables shall be routed on steel racks or trays but where cables have to be installed on
buildings and building framework the cables shall be held by spacer saddles or cleats screwed or
welded in position. The Contractor shall supply all necessary spacer saddles or cleats and fix these in
position in the least obtrusive manner possible, copper cleats being used for copper sheathed MICS
cable.
Cables shall not be routed on tiled, lagged or other special finished surfaces.
6.14 Terminations
6.14.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all terminations, checking and setting-to-work the
completed installation. All cables provided as part of the Contract shall be terminated at both ends.
For control wiring the cable tails shall be so bound that each wire may be traced back to its associated
cable without difficulty. Cores in twisted pairs or groups shall be kept together. Any spare cores shall
be numbered and terminated in the spare terminals furthest away from the cable gland. All cables
shall be long enough to permit a second termination if necessary at a future date to the remotest ter-
mination location in the panel.
Cable glands shall be used at all equipment to support the weight of cable from the terminations and
to seal the cable to the equipment, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.PVC, XLPE, silicone
rubber and PTFE insulated cables shall be terminated via glands to BS 6121.
Glands in all outdoor locations and within the Substation and other areas where water may impinge on
cables shall be type EIU, with inner and outer seals and armour clamp. Unarmoured single core ca-
bles in these areas shall have type A2 glands.
Glands in indoor locations with the exceptions as noted above shall be type C for armoured cables
and type A2 for unarmoured single core cables.
PVC shrouds shall be supplied and installed over each gland.
6.14.2 Power Cables
The Contractor shall ensure that the correct phase rotation and connections are achieved. Particular
care shall be taken in the case of heavy cables, where subsequent correction may be difficult. Phase

Volume 2 Page 201
tests will be witnessed by the Engineer and, if found necessary, the Contractor shall carry out the re-
versal of phase connections. Connections to electric motors shall be made as specified. Where motors
have tails rather than bushings, a heat shrink or equivalent PVC tube for insulation of the crimp joint
shall be provided.
Where insulated glands are provided, the Contractor shall ensure that the insulation is maintained af-
ter jointing the cable and shall, if required, demonstrate this to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
tails of two or three or four core cables in air insulated terminations shall be identified by a band of ap-
proved tape of appropriate colour over the self-sealing tape.
Single core cables shall be similarly identified by coloured tape over the cable beneath the gland.
6.15 Terminating and Jointing Conductors
Compression (indentation) type cable lugs and ferrules shall be provided and all necessary tools, in-
cluding dies and other materials for making compression joints, shall be provided by the Contractor,
who shall comply with the recommendations of the supplier of cables and lugs in the preparation and
execution of each termination.
For stud type terminals approved crimping lugs shall be used.
Where clamp type terminals are used, the conductor shall be terminated without lugs, with the excep-
tion of flexible conductors having wires of 0.3mm or smaller which shall be fitted with crimps to more
than one conductor shall be terminated in each clamp.
6.16 Core Identification
A uniform core identification system shall be used throughout the Station. The following clauses out-
line the broad requirements but the exact implementation shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Approved numbered ferrules shall be supplied and fitted to every cable core of control and instrument
cables at each termination. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of interlocking ring insulating materials
such as plastic which shall be black engraved on yellow background and have a glossy finish. The fer-
rules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. Identification marks on self-sticking cloth shall not
be used. The ferrules shall be of "O" or "D" cross section. Ferrules of "C" type cross section shall not
be used.
Single d.c. wires shall be identified by a red or blue coloured ring (positive or negative polarity) fol-
lowed by the identification of the polarity concerned (instrumentation, klaxon, alarm, etc.).
Direct a.c. circuits shall be identified by a yellow end piece followed by an identification of the phase
concerned.
Wiring for secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall be identified by a grey end piece and wires
in current transformer secondary circuits shall be identified by a green end piece. This identification
shall be completed by a terminal index.

Volume 2 Page 202
All markings for terminal blocks, cables, cable conductors and wiring shall be located on the corre-
sponding fault finding drawing.
Characters suitably marked "TRIP" in white shall be fitted on all wires associated with trip circuits.
A common system of ferrule numbering shall be adopted such that ferrule numbers at terminations
shall agree with ferrule numbers on the internal wiring of equipment.
6.17 Cable Identification and Schedules
The Contractor shall prepare and submit computerised cable schedules, the content and style of
which shall be to the general approval of the Engineer. These shall include cable identification num-
bers for all cables except those provided for lighting and small power circuits and those which are
connected to the load side of distribution boards for lighting and small power circuits.
The cable identification number system shall be such as to give a brief general indication of the type
and function of individual cables and shall be approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor may use a fully computerised system for rating, and routing of cables, but shall provide
a system that readily permits the cables to be scheduled on the following basis in sequence of cable
identification number:
a) By cable identification number only

b) By type and size of cables
c) By function of cable
d) By main LV AC and DC,switchboard, actuator boards.
e) By agreed electrical and mechanical plant functional groups.
The Contractor shall provide copies of the cable schedule in an approved format. The Contractor shall
provide a standard software package together with a suitable personal computer to permit the Engi-
neer to access, display, print and edit the schedules. The schedules shall be accessed by simple in-
teractive dialogue using 'menu-selection' or other approved procedure.
In addition, the Contractor shall provide selected copies of the above schedules in a computer print-
out format agreed intervals.
Each end of every cable, except those provided for lighting and small power circuits and which are
connected to the load sides of distribution fuse boards, shall be identified with a separate cable refer-
ence number fitted in a suitable position under the cable termination.
Where cables enter and leave ducts or pipes, suitable identification markers shall be fitted.
The materials of the markers and fastenings shall be such as to avoid corrosion or deterioration due to
incompatibility of materials and shall ensure permanent legibility.

Volume 2 Page 203
Inspection and testing during manufacture and after installation on site shall be in accordance with
Section 15 of this Specification.

Volume 2 Page 204
7. Earthing System and Lightning Protection
7.1 Scope
These chapters describe the general requirements for the earthing and lightning protection and shall
be read in conjunction with the project requirements and schedules.
7.2 References
7.2.1 American Standards
ANSI/IEEE/std 80 IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

ANSI/IEEE/std 81 IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potential of a Grounding System
7.2.2 German Standards
VDE 0140 Earthing Systems for Power Installations with Rated Voltages above 1 kV
BS EN 13601 Specification for copper for electrical purposes: high conductivity copper rec-
tangular conductors withdrawn or rolled edges.
BS EN 13601 Specification for copper for electrical purposes. Rod and bars
BS EN 12449 Specification for copper and copper alloys. Tubes
BS 2874 Specification for copper and copper alloy rods and sections (other than forging
stock).
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steel
BS 6360: Specification for conductors in insulated cables and cords.
BS 6651 Protection of Structures against Lightning
BS 6746 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing
7.3 General
An earthing system generally in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 80 and BS 7430 shall be
designed under this Contract. The earthing system shall include earth electrodes to provide the con-
nection to the general body of the earth, all earthing conductors and connections to all electrical
equipment and metallic structures on the site. The earth electrodes shall limit the potential rise under
fault conditions and buried conductors shall be provided to limit potential differences on the site and
adjacent to the site to ensure safety to people and animals.

Volume 2 Page 205
Protection for all electrical equipment against lightning shall also be provided.
7.4 Extent of Work
The Work under this Section comprises the design, supply and installation including excavation, back-
filling and site testing of earthing systems and connections to electrical apparatus at 400 kV and
230kV substation. Also included is the lightning protection scheme and the provision of portable earth-
ing devices.
The Contractor shall be required to undertake all necessary earth resistivity tests at the substation
sites and, from these tests, to undertake the design of the earthing systems. These designs, as well as
providing safe passage to earth for the stated earth fault currents, shall also include calculation of
step, touch and mesh potentials, which shall be within the allowable limits of the standards quoted in
this specification.
The design calculations of step, touch and mesh potentials, accompanied by full installation drawings
and material requirement schedules, shall be submitted to, and receive the approval of, the Engineer
before materials procurement or installation commences.
7.5 Soil Survey
The preliminary Bid design shall be based on a value of 100 ohm-m. soil resistivity.
Not later than one month after the site has been handed over for access, the Contractor shall carry out
an earth resistivity survey of the sites and report in writing to the Engineer in accordance with the ap-
proved programme. The report shall detail the methods and instruments used and the results of the
surveys. Based on the results the Contractor shall include in the report his proposals for the resistivi-
ties to be used in the design of the earthing system.
The surveys shall show the variation of resistivity across the site and with the depth below the site.
The Contractor shall consider if there is a need to model the resistivity in two layers and if there is any
advantage in the use of deep rod electrodes.
The surveys shall also determine the depth and nature of any underlying rock, which may limit the
depth for driving earth rods or if boring will be necessary for installing earth rods.
The weather conditions prior to and at the time of the surveys shall be recorded in the report and an
assessment made of the seasonal variations in resistivity based on meteorological data for the area.
The programme for the project should, as far as possible, time the resistivity surveys to take place dur-
ing a dry season.
The report should also state if there are any indications that the ground is corrosive to bare copper.
The report shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with the design of the earthing sys-
tem.

Volume 2 Page 206
7.6 Fault Current and Duration
Each site shall be provided with an earth grid of buried conductors designed for an earth fault current
of 63 kA one second for 400 kV and 50kA one second for 230 kV. The preliminary earthing design
shall be such that the potential rise shall not exceed 5 kV.
7.7 Earth Electrode System Design
7.7.1 Design Calculations
The design of the earth electrode systems shall be based on the approved earth resistivity data and
the system fault currents and their duration.
The design calculations shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall be based on the methods
given in the standards listed. The calculations shall include the following parameters:
(a) earth resistance of the whole system and of its components

(b) earth potential rise
(c) step, touch and mesh potentials inside and outside the perimeter fence
(d) requirements for a high resistance surface layer
(e) conductor ratings
Earthing points shall be provided such that the combined resistance of the earth grid and all other
earthing points does not exceed the allowable limit dictated by the standards for the fault current and
duration specified measured during the dry season.
The earth potential rises shall not exceed the CCITT limits appropriate to the classification of the sys-
tem unless special precautions are taken to cater for transferred potentials.
Step, touch and mesh potentials shall be within the permitted limits calculated in accordance with the
standards given in IEEE 80 for the proposed surface layer
7.7.2 Earth Electrode
The earth electrode shall comprise a system of bare conductors forming a mesh buried near the sur-
face of the ground and supplemented, if required, by one or more of the following electrodes:
(a) a system of interconnected rods driven into the ground

(b) a mesh system of bare conductors buried in the ground
(c) structural metalwork in direct contact with the ground
(d) reinforcing steel in buried concrete
(e) a system of bare conductors buried near the surface of the ground outside the perimeter fence

Volume 2 Page 207
7.7.3 Mesh System
The mesh system shall be designed to limit touch, step and mesh potentials taking into account the
combined length of the mesh conductors, other buried conductors and rods but excluding any buried
conductors outside the perimeter fence. Due regard shall be given to non-linear distribution of the fault
current giving rise to the highest potentials at mesh comers.
The rating of the mesh conductors shall be compatible with the fault cur-rents after allowing for parallel
paths of hard drawn high conductivity copper strip with a minimum conductor size of 150 mm.
The conductor shall be installed in trenches excavated by the Contractor to a depth of 500mm. The
system will be installed after all foundations have been laid and the site filled to 100mm below finished
level. When the earthing grid has been laid and backfilled, bricks will be laid up to finished site level.
Where the excavated material is rocky or may be difficult to consolidate, the backfilling shall be carried
out using other material to the approval of the Engineer. The cost of such material shall be deemed to
be included in the Contract.
7.7.4 Earthing Rods
If the design calculations show that a mesh alone is unable to limit the potentials to the required val-
ues, then the mesh shall be supplemented by the use of interconnected earthing rods driven into the
ground or installed in bored holes.
Rods shall be installed inside the perimeter fence to enclose the maximum possible area compatible
with the earthing of any metallic fence. (The spacing between rods shall not be less than their length,
unless rating considerations determine otherwise). The copper rod electrodes of 15mm diameter shall
be interconnected in groups of four to eight rods by insulated copper conductors and non-ferrous
clamps to form a ring. Each group shall be connected to the mesh by duplicate insulated copper con-
ductor via disconnecting test links.
Individual rods may be connected directly to the mesh, provided the rod can be disconnected for test-
ing.
The calculation of potentials in the design of the complete installation shall be made without the group
of rods with the lowest estimated resistance to simulate the condition with the group disconnected for
testing.
7.7.5 Other Conductors
As an alternative to rods to supplement a mesh, additional bare copper conductors with a cross-
section area of not less than 150 mm may be used. They shall be buried in the ground within the pe-
rimeter fence to enclose the maximum possible area compatible with the earthing of any metallic
fence. Such conductors may be laid below the mesh, below foundations or in areas where there is no
plant. It shall be shown by calculation that the step potentials are low in such areas.
The conductor shall be in a ring, or a part of a ring, with at least two widely separated connections to
the mesh or other parts of the earthing system.

Volume 2 Page 208
7.7.6 Reinforcing Steel
The reinforcing steel in the foundations of buildings containing the primary electrical equipment may
be used as auxiliary electrodes, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall show in
the design calculations that the fault currents and d.c. stray currents will not damage the structure.
Steel reinforcing mesh in the floors of the building may also be used for the control of step and touch
potentials within the building, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7.7.7 Conductors Outside Perimeter Fence
If the design calculations show that the step and touch potentials outside the perimeter fence or wall
exceed the limits, then additional bare conductors shall be buried in the ground outside the fence in
the form of rings encircling the whole site.
The distance of the conductors from the fence and the depth shall be determined in the design to en-
sure that step and touch potentials are within the limits.
The minimum conductor size shall be 75 mm copper and shall be connected to the fence or the mesh
with 75 mm conductors at each comer of the site and at intervals of not more than 100 m. These con-
ductors shall not be included in the calculations called for above.
7.8 Design of Earthing System
7.8.1 Earthing System
An earthing system shall comprise the following components:
(a) the conductors between the earthing electrode and the main earthing bar
(b) the main earth bar
(c) the conductors between the main earth bar and the metallic frames, enclosures or supports of
electrical equipment
(d) the conductors between structural metalwork and non-electrical equipment and the main earth
bar
The rating of earth system conductors connected between an item of electrical plant and the earth
electrode system shall be sufficient to withstand the fault currents and duration, after allowing for the
parallel paths through the earth system conductors, with any one conductor disconnected.
The design of earth system shall take into account the corrosiveness of the soil based on the soil sur-
vey.
The design comprising all the above mentioned items shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
within four months of the award of Contract.

Volume 2 Page 209
7.8.2 Connection of System Neutrals and Earth
The system neutral points within a substation shall have duplicate connections to the closest earthing
point.
The earth electrodes of a neutral earthing point shall be arranged in two groups with a conductor from
each group to a test link and there shall be duplicate bare copper conductors of cross sectional area
not less than 150 mm from each test link to the earth grid. The duplicate connection may be in the
form of a ring.
Neutral earthing connections between the substation system (transformer) neutral and the test links
shall be of bare copper tape, secured and supported on stand-off insulators so that there is no contact
between copper tape and transformer tank.
Neutral earthing conductors shall normally be buried directly in the ground but where necessary, they
may be cleated to walls, fixed to cable racks or laid in the cable trenches.
7.8.3 Main Earthing Bar
The main earthing bar shall be in the form of a ring or rings of bare conductors surrounding, or within,
an area in which items to be earthed are located. Where two or more rings are installed, they shall be
interconnected by at least two conductors which shall be widely separated.
The main earthing bar, or parts thereof, may also form part of the earth electrode system, providing
this is bare conductor.
Each main earthing bar shall be connected by at least two widely separated conductors to the earth
electrode system.
The minimum conductor size for the main earth and interconnections between earthing bars and the
earth electrode system shall not be less than 150 mm.
7.8.4 Electrical Equipment and Structure Connections to Earth
Connections between: (a) all HV electrical equipment and (b) LV electrical equipment comprising sub-
stantial multi-cubicle switchboards and the main earth bar shall be duplicated. The bare copper con-
ductor size shall have a minimum cross section area of 150 mm.
All substation equipment, including disconnectors, earthing switches, main transformer tanks, current
and voltage transformer tanks, switchgear, electrical supporting steelwork and gantries etc. shall all be
connected with the earth grid.
Surge arresters installed for the protection of transformers and reactors shall be connected by low re-
actance paths both to the transformer tanks and to the earthing system.
Capacitor voltage transformers used in connection with line traps shall be connected by direct low re-
actance paths to a single earth rod for each arrester, in addition to the earth grid.

Volume 2 Page 210
Where necessary an earthing mat shall be installed at all operating positions for outdoor HV equip-
ment manual operating mechanism boxes and local electrical control cubicles to ensure the safety of
the operator. The mat shall be directly bonded to the cubicle and the conductors forming the mat and
the bonding connection shall have a minimum copper cross-section area of 75 mm.
Galvanised structures comprising bolted lattice components shall not be used as the sole earth con-
nection path to post and strain insulators or to overhead line earth conductors.
Buildings containing electrical equipment shall be provided, at each level, with a ring of earthing con-
ductors which shall have duplicate connections to the earth grid outside the building. The frames of all
switchgear, control and relay panels and other electrical equipment and exposed structural metal work
shall be connected by branches to a ring. The ring and branch conductors shall be of the same mate-
rial as the earth grid. Strip run within buildings, inside cable trenches or above ground level on appa-
ratus shall be neatly supported in non-ferrous clamps.
Fixed earthing connectors for use with portable earthing devices specified below shall be provided on
each busbar and on both sides of high voltage equipment.
Rigid loops in the copper earthing strip branch bond between the equipment and the earthing grid
shall be provided adjacent to each item of high voltage equipment for use with the portable earthing
devices. The rigid loops shall be marked green.
Connections between other LV electrical equipment and the earth bar need not be duplicated. The
single conductor shall be rated to withstand the fault rating of the equipment.
7.8.5 Connections to Non-Electrical Structural Metalwork and Equipment
All metalwork within the project area which does not form part of the electrical equipment shall be
bonded to the main earth bar except where otherwise specified. The bonding conductor size shall be
not less than 150 mm.
Individual components of metallic structures of plant shall be bonded to adjacent components to form
an electrically continuous metallic path to the bonding conductor.
Small electrically isolated metallic components mounted on non-conducting building fabric need not be
bonded to the main earth bar.
7.9 Materials and Installation
7.9.1 Earthing Conductors
Conductors shall be of high conductivity copper in the form of circular conductors stranded to IEC
60228 (BS 6360) or solid rods or bars to BS 1433.
Conductor sheaths shall be of PVC to meet the requirements of BS 6746 Grade TM1 or IEC 60502
Grade ST1 with a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
Bare strip conductors only shall be used for earth electrodes or voltage control meshes.

Volume 2 Page 211
Conductors buried in the ground shall normally be laid at a depth of 500 mm in an excavated trench.
The backfill in the vicinity of the conductor shall be free of stones and the whole backfill shall be well
consolidated. Earthing conductors not forming part of a voltage control mesh shall be laid at the depth
required by the approved design and, in the case of a PVC sheathed conductor, at the same depth as
any auxiliary power or control cables following the same route.
All conductors not buried in the ground shall be straightened immediately prior to installation and sup-
ported clear of the adjacent surface.
7.9.2 Earthing Rods
Earth rods shall be driven to a depth below the ground water table level, to be determined by the Con-
tractor during soil investigation and survey of site.
The earth rods shall be of hard-drawn high conductivity copper with a diameter of not less than 15 mm
with hardened steel driving caps and tips. The rods should be as long as possible but couplings may
be used to obtain the overall depth of driving required by the design.
The rods shall be installed by driving into the ground with a power hammer of suitable design to en-
sure the minimum of distortion to the rod. Where it is not possible to drive rods to the full depth re-
quired due to the presence of a strata of rock, then holes shall be drilled or blasted in the rock. The
holes shall be filled with bentonite or other approved material prior to inserting the rod. If difficult driv-
ing conditions arising from hard or rocky ground are encountered or are anticipated or there is a need
for deep rods, then high tensile steel rods shall be used. 11igh tensile steel rods shall have a molecu-
larly bonded high conductivity copper coating with a minimum radial thickness of not less than 0.25
mm. The overall diameter shall be not less than 12 mm. Rolled external screw threads shall be used
on the rods for coupling and after rolling the thickness of the copper coating on the threaded portion
shall be not less than 0.05 mm.
Rods, driving caps and tips shall abut at couplings to ensure that the couplings and screw threads are
not subject to driving forces. All screw threads shall be fully shrouded at the couplings. Alternatively,
conical couplings may be used to the approval of the Engineer.
High conductivity copper for earth rods shall have a minimum copper content (including silver) of
99.90% to ISO 1337, Cu-ETP or Cu-FRHS (BS 2894 Grade C101 or C102) for copper earth rods and
to ISO 1337 Grade Cu-ETP (BS 28734 Grade C101) for the molecular bonded copper coating of steel
rods.
The steel for copper-clad steel rods shall be low carbon steel with a tensile strength of not less than
570 N/mm to ISO 630, Grade Fe 430A (BS 4360, Grade 43A) or better.
Couplings for copper rods shall be of 5% phosphor bronze (copper-tin-phosphorous) to ISO 427,
CU Sn4 (BS 2874, Grade PB 102M) and for copper bonded steel rods of 3% silicon or 7% aluminium
bronze to BS 2874, Grade CS 101 and BS 2871, Grade CA 102.

Volume 2 Page 212
7.9.3 Fittings
Clips for supporting strip conductors not buried in the ground shall be of the direct contact type and
clips for circular conductors shall be of the cable saddle type. The clips shall support the conductors
clear of the structure.
Conductors shall be connected to earth rods by a bolted clamp to facilitate removal of the conductor
for testing the rod.
Disconnecting links shall comprise a high conductivity copper link supported on two insulators mount-
ed on a galvanised steel base for bolting to the supporting structure. The two conductors shall be in di-
rect contact with the link and shall not be disturbed by the removal of the link. Links for mounting at
ground level shall be mounted on bolts embedded in a concrete base.
Disconnecting links mounted at ground level and the connections at the earth rods shall be enclosed
in concrete inspection pits, with concrete lids, installed flush with the ground level.
All conductor fittings shall be manufactured from high strength copper alloys with phosphor bronze
nuts, bolts, washers and screws. Binary brass copper alloys will not be acceptable. All fittings shall be
designed for the specific application and shall not be permanently deformed when correctly installed.
Sheathed conductor support fittings may be of silicon aluminium, glass-filled nylon or other tough non-
hygroscopic material for indoor installations.
Fittings not in direct contact with bare or sheathed conductors may be of hot-dip galvanised steel. Bi-
metallic connectors shall be used between conductors of dissimilar materials and insulating material
shall be interposed between metallic fittings and structures of dissimilar materials to prevent corrosion.
7.9.4 Joints
Permanent joints shall be made by exothermic welding below ground, or crimping for above ground
connections.
Detachable joints shall be bolted and stranded conductors at bolted joints shall be terminated in exo-
thermically welded lugs or a crimped cable socket. The diameter of any holes drilled in strip conduc-
tors shall not be greater than half the width of the strip.
Connections to electrical equipment shall be detachable and made at the earthing studs or bolts pro-
vided on the equipment by the Manufacturer. When an earthing point is not provided, the point and
method of connection shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Connections to metallic structures for earthing conductors and bonding conductors between electrical-
ly separate parts of a structure shall be either by direct exothermic welding or by bolting using a stud
welded to the structure. Drilling of a structural member for a directly bolted connection shall only be
carried out to the approval of the Engineer.
Bolted joints in metallic structures, including pipework and which do not provide direct metallic contact,
shall either be bridged by a bonding conductor or both sides of the joint shall be separately bonded to
earth, unless the joint is intended to be an insulated joint for cathodic protection or other purposes.

Volume 2 Page 213
When the reinforcing in concrete is used as a part of the earthing system, the fittings used to provide a
connection point at the surface of the concrete shall be exothermically welded to a reinforcing bar.
This fitting shall be provided with a bolted connection for an earthing conductor. The main bars in the
reinforcing shall be welded together at intervals to ensure electrical continuity throughout the reinforc-
ing.
No connections shall be made to reinforcing bars and other steelwork which do not form part of the
earthing system and are completely encased in concrete.
7.10 Lightning Protection
Overhead earthwire shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes. The
screens shall be of aluminium clad steel wires of not less than 50 mm. total section, and connected to
provide low impedance paths to earth.
The layout of the earth wires shall be such that equipment to be protected generally lies within areas
bounded by two or more conductors, in which case the protected angle shall not exceed 45. Where
equipment is protected by a single earth wire, the protective angle shall not exceed 35 to the vertical.
The overhead earthwire shall be suitable for extension to protect the substation equipment to be in-
stalled in future stages of development.
7.11 Earthing of Fences
7.11.1 Method
Metallic fences shall be separately earthed unless they come within 1.8m of any equipment or struc-
ture above the surface of the ground and which is connected to the main earthing system. If the sepa-
ration of 1.8m cannot be obtained, the fence shall be bonded to the main earthing system.
7.11.2 Separately Earthed Fences
The earthing of a fence shall be provided by connecting certain metallic fence posts to an earth rod by
a copper conductor. The earth rod shall be driven adjacent to the posts inside the fence line to a depth
of not less than 3.0m. Where no metallic posts are provided, the earth rods shall be connected directly
to the metal wires, mesh or other components of the fence.
If, owing to the nature of the ground, it is not possible to drive earth rods, then fence posts shall be
connected to the centre point of a 20 m length of bare copper conductor buried in the ground at a
depth of 500 mm, running closely parallel to the inside of the fence.
The earth rods or bare conductor electrodes shall be installed at each comer post, below the outer
phase conductors of overhead line connections passing over the fence, at each gate and at intervals
of not more than 100 m.

Volume 2 Page 214
7.11.3 Bonded Fences
Fences which need to be bonded to the main earthing system of the installation shall be connected by
copper conductors to the nearest accessible point on the main earthing system at each point where
the fence comes within 1.8 m of any electrical equipment. Bonds shall also be made to each corner
post, below the outer phase conductors of overhead line connections passing over the fence, at each
gate and at intervals of not more than 100 m.
7.11.4 Bonding of Fence Components
Fences made up of bolted steel or other metallic components do not require bonding between compo-
nents. Where such fences have non-metallic components, bonds shall be installed to maintain conti-
nuity between metallic components. Reinforced concrete components shall be treated as being non-
metallic.
Longitudinal wires for supporting other fence components, or for anti-climbing guards and the wires of
chain link, shall be directly bonded to each fence earth electrode or to each bond to the main earthing
system.
Metallic components on masonry, brick, concrete or similar boundary wall shall be treated in the same
manner as metallic fences.
Wire fence components coated for anti-corrosion protection shall be earthed in accordance with this
Clause.
7.11.5 Gates
The fixed metallic components on both sides of the gate shall be directly bonded together by a copper
conductor installed under the surface of the access way. Flexible conductors shall be installed to bond
the moving parts of the gates to the metallic fixed parts. An earth rod or a bond to the main earthing
system shall be installed at each gate.
7.11.6 Potential Control Outside Fences
Where the approved design calculations show that the touch or step potentials outside the fence or
boundary wall would otherwise be excessive, bare copper conductors shall be buried in the ground
outside the fence or boundary wall at such depths and spacings as are shown in the approved design
calculations to give acceptable touch and step potentials. The conductors shall form complete rings
surrounding the installation and each ring shall be bonded to the adjacent ring and to the fence at
each comer, below the outer phase conductors of overhead line connections passing over the fence,
at each gate and at intervals of not more than 100 m. In this case separate earth electrodes are not
required for the fences.
If the boundary fence or wall is substantially non-metallic, the rings of conductors shall be bonded to
the main earth system at each comer of the site and at intervals of not more than 100 m. Any metallic
components on such boundary fences or walls shall be bonded to the earthing system in accordance
with this Specification.

Volume 2 Page 215
If the boundary fence is metallic and is not within 1.8 m of any part of the main earthing system or
equipment bonded thereto, the fence and outer conductor rings shall not be connected to the main
earthing system unless the approved design calculations show otherwise.
Any meshes formed by bonding the outer conductors to the main earthing system shall be sub-divided
by additional conductors, if required, to give acceptable touch, step and mesh potentials.
7.11.7 Conductors
All conductors used for earthing and bonding the fences and components and for outer rings shall
have a cross-sectional area of not less than 70 mm
Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm. cross section between the overhead
earthed screen wire and the main substation earthing system at each support unless the galvanised
steel support structure has sufficient area and current carrying capacity.
Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free pin type joints between clamps and supports.
Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines, including
bimetal connectors where necessary.
The design of all structures shall generally comply with Section 11 of the specification and in addition
is to ensure that in the event of breakage of one earth wire, the Factor of Safety is not less than 1.5.
7.12 Portable Earthing Devices
Portable earthing devices for use with outdoor 400 kV and 230 kV apparatus in substations shall be
supplied in the numbers stated in Schedule A of Requirements and shall comprise:
(a) Copper alloy earth end clamp for connection to the rigid loops in equipment earth bonding con-
nections.
(b) Aluminium alloy line and busbar end clamp to suit the connectors of the type supplied under the
Contract.
(c) Flexible stranded aluminium alloy conductor with clear protective PVC sheath, sized suitable for
the specified fault level and duration.
(d) Telescopic operating pole of glass fibre or similar material, of sufficient length to reach the
height of connections to high voltage equipment from ground, but retractable into a carrying
length not exceeding 2.5 m, and complete with non-slip hand grips.
The preferred types of portable earthing devices are Raguar Stalskog and Karl Pfisterer.

Volume 2 Page 216
8. Batteries, Chargers and DC Switchgear
8.1 Scope
These clauses describe the General Technical Requirements for Batteries, Chargers and DC switch-
gear for use in substations for 110V DC power for switchgear operations, protection, control, alarms,
indications, and emergency lighting.
The equipment to be supplied, installed and commissioned is shown on bid drawings of this specifica-
tion.
8.2 References
8.2.1 IEC Standards
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and theiracces-
sories.
IEC 60146 Semiconductor converters
IEC 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters ; Basic requirements
IEC 60146-1-3 Semiconductor converters ; Transformers and reactors.
IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 60439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies (BS EN 60439)
IEC 60623 Vented nickel cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells
BS EN 60269 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC.
BS 381C Specification for colours for identification coding and special purposes.
BS 5634 Method of Test for Potassium Hydroxide.
BS 6231 Specification for PVC insulated cables for switchgear and control gear wiring.
8.3 Design Requirements
8.3.1 General
Batteries shall be located in separate mechanically ventilated rooms, which will be provided with sinks
and water supplies. Storage facilities will be provided for electrolyte, distilled water and maintenance
equipment.
The voltage measured at the main distribution switchgear shall not vary by more than plus 10 per cent
or minus 20 percent of the nominal voltage under all charging conditions when operating in accord-
ance with the requirements of this Section.

Volume 2 Page 217
Two 100% duty batteries shall be connected to duplicate 100% duty chargers, having boost and float
facilities, in such a way that either charger can be disconnected without interrupting the output of the
other charger or the battery.
The complete equipment shall preferably be a Manufacturer's standard but any departure from this
specification shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
8.4 Batteries
8.4.1 Type of Battery
The battery shall be of the high performance Nickel Cadmium pocket plate type complying with
IEC 60623 and shall be designed for a minimum life expectancy of 25 years.
Battery cases shall be of high impact translucent plastic or annealed glass and shall be indelibly
marked with maximum and minimum electrolyte levels. The design of the battery shall permit the free
discharge of the gases produced during the normal operating cycle, whilst excluding dust. Spray ar-
resters shall be included.
The electrolyte shall be free from impurities and the Potassium Hydroxide used shall comply with BS
5634. Dilution of the alkaline electrolyte and topping up of cells shall be carried out using distilled wa-
ter only.
A complete set of test and maintenance accessories, suitably boxed, shall be provided for each bat-
tery.
A syringe hydrometer and a durable instruction card shall be included in each set.
Cells shall be numbered consecutively and terminal cells marked to indicate polarity.
Cells shall be permanently marked with the following information:
Manufacturer's reference number and code

Year and month of manufacture
Voltage and nominal capacity at 5 hour discharge rate
The electrolyte capacity and general design of the cells shall be such that inspection and mainte-
nance, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less than twelve months.
8.4.2 Initial Charge and Test Discharge
The initial charge, test discharge and subsequent re-charge of the battery must be carried out under
continuous supervision. Resistors, instruments, leads, and the other apparatus will be necessary for
the initial charge, test discharge and subsequent recharge of the battery.

Volume 2 Page 218
8.4.3 Battery Duty
Each battery shall have sufficient capacity to supply the following continuous and intermittent loads for
the periods specified, with the chargers out of service.
Standing DC loading for protection, control, indications and alarms for ten hours. This loading shall be
determined from all equipment to be supplied on this Contract. In addition the future circuit require-
ments estimated on the same basis as the present requirements.
At the end of five hours the battery shall have sufficient capacity to complete the operations listed be-
low, at the end of which duty the system voltage shall not have dropped below 90 per cent of the nom-
inal voltage with the standing loads, specified above, connected.
1. Two closing operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery.
2. Two tripping operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery. Where
busbar protection is provided, it shall be assumed that all circuit breakers in any one busbar
protection zone trip simultaneously.
3. Charging of DC motor wound circuit breaker closing springs (where applicable) to enable the
closing operations to be carried out.
4. At the end of these duties, the battery voltage shall not have dropped such that the voltage at
the battery terminals falls below 90 % of the nominal system voltage when supplying the stand-
ing load.
5. In addition, the voltages at the terminals of all components in the system (eg. relays, trip and
closing coils) shall not be outside of the individual voltage limits applying to them.
6. A margin of 10 % shall be allowed for derating of this battery over its life time.
All quantities derived in this manner shall be quoted in the Tender, but shall not be used for ordering
materials until specifically approved by the Engineer. Detailed calculations, and loading characteristics
on which these are based, shall be submitted to the Engineer at an early stage.
8.4.4 Location of Batteries
The batteries shall be housed in a ventilated battery room. The charging equipment and distribution
switchboards shall be housed in a separate room.
Battery rooms shall be dimensioned and the ventilation system designed to cater for the installation of
48V communications batteries. Suitable outgoing feeders shall also be provided on the station AC dis-
tribution boards to supply these future DC systems.
The floor of the battery room shall be coated with a suitable electrolyte resistant protective coating.
The floor shall be fitted with a drain and shall have sufficient slope to prevent any major electrolyte
spillages from entering into other areas.
No ducts or any other items shall penetrate the floor or create a means whereby spillage can drain
away apart from the drain provided for this purpose.

Volume 2 Page 219
8.4.5 Battery Mounting Connections and Accessories
Batteriesshall be placed on timber boards mounted in double tiers on steel stands of robust construc-
tion and treated with acid resisting enamel or gloss paint to BS 381C No.361. The cells shall be ar-
ranged so that each cell is readily accessible for inspection and maintenance and it shall be possible
to remove any one cell without disturbing the remaining cells. The stands shall be mounted on insula-
tors and be so dimensioned that the bottom of the lower tier is not less than 300mm above the floor.
Alternatively, batteries may be mounted in a similar manner on treated hardwood stands.
Batteries shall be supplied and erected complete with all necessary connections and cabling. Connec-
tions between tiers, between end cells and between porcelain wall bushings shall be by PVC cables
arranged on suitable racking or supports. Before jointing, joint faces shall be bright metal, free from
dirt, and shall be protected by a coating of petroleum jelly. Terminal and inter-cell connections shall be
of high conductivity corrosion free material.
Cartridge fuses shall be provided in both positive and negative leads, positioned as close to the bat-
tery as possible and shall be rated for at least three times the maximum battery discharge cur-rent at
the highest operating voltage. The two fuses shall be mounted on opposite ends of the battery stand
or rack in an approved manner. These fuse links shall comply with BS 88 Clause DC. 40 and shall be
bolted in position without carriers.
Warning labels shall be fitted to warn personnel of the danger of removing or replacing a fuse whilst
the load is connected and that fuses should not be removed immediately following boost charge due
to the possible ignition of hydrogen gas.
Fuses between the battery and charger shall be located adjacent to the battery in a similar manner to
that described above. A warning label shall be placed on the charging equipment indicating the loca-
tion of these fuses and the fact that they should be removed to isolate the charger from the battery.
It shall not be possible to leave the battery disconnected (by means of switches or removal or opera-
tion of fuses) without some local and remote indication that such a state exists.
One set of miscellaneous equipment, including two syringe hydrometers, one cell-testing voltmeter,
two cell-bridging connectors, two electrolyte-pouring funnels, two electrolyte thermometers, battery in-
struction card for wall mounting, electrolyte airtight containers, labels, tools and other items necessary
for the erection and correct functioning and maintenance of the equipment, shall be provided for each
station.
8.5 Control and Charging Equipment
Each battery charging equipment shall comply with the requirements of BS 4417 (IEC 60146:), shall
be of the Thyristor-controlled, automatic constant voltage type with current limit facilities and shall be
suitable for supplying the normal constant load, at the same time maintaining the battery to which it is
connected in a fully charged condition. All equipment shall be naturally ventilated.
All the equipment for each charger shall be contained in a separate ventilated steel cubicle. The
charger cubicles shall normally be mounted immediately adjacent to the DC distribution panel to form
a board and shall be of matching design colour and appearance.

Volume 2 Page 220
Where their ratings permit, chargers shall preferably be designed for operation from a single-phase
AC auxiliary supply with a nominal voltage of 230 V. Otherwise a three phase 400V supply may be uti-
lised. Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically for all DC loads between 0 and 100%, ir-
respective of variations in the voltage of the ac supply within the following limits:
Frequency variation: 47 to 51 Hz
Voltage variation: 15%
The mains transformer shall be of a suitable rating and design. Clearly marked off-circuit tappings
shall be provided on the primary windings and change of tapping shall be by means of easily accessi-
ble links. The transformer shall be of the natural air-cooled type capable of operating continuously at
full load on any tapping with the maximum specified ambient temperature.
All rectifiers and semi-conducting devices employed in the charger shall be of the silicon type. They
shall be adequately rated, with due regard to air temperature within the charger enclosure, for the
maximum ambient temperature.
The rating of the charger on float charge shall be equal to the normal battery standing load plus the
recommended finishing charge rate for the battery.
Each charger shall also incorporate a boost charge feature which shall, after having been started, pro-
vide an automatically controlled high charge rate sufficient to restore a fully discharged battery to the
fully charged state within the shortest possible time without excessive gassing or any form of damage
to the battery. The boost charge shall be initiated manually or automatically upon detection of a signifi-
cant battery discharge. An adjustable timer shall be provided to automatically switch the charger to the
float condition after the correct recharge period.
Should the AC supply fail while a battery is on boost charge, the switching arrangements shall auto-
matically revert the charger to float charge status and then reconnect the battery to the distribution
board.
The output voltage regulator shall be adjustable for both float and boost charge modes, within limits
approved by the Engineer, by means of clearly marked controls located inside the cubicle.
Although it is not intended that the charger be operated with the battery disconnected, the design of
the charger shall be such that with the battery disconnected the charger will maintain the system volt-
age without any damage to itself and with a ripple voltage no greater than 2.0% rms of the nominal
output voltage.
The charger shall automatically adjust the charging current from a value not less than the battery ca-
pacity divided by 10 hours to a minimum value of not more than the battery capacity divided by 200
hours. The charging circuitry shall be so designed that the failure of any component will not give a sit-
uation which will cause permanent damage to the battery by overcharging.
Each charger shall have a float charge maximum current rating sufficient to meet the total standing
load current on the dc distribution board plus a battery charging current equal numerically to 7% of the
battery capacity at the 10 hour rate.
Each charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that with the output voltage
set at approximately 1.45 V per cell at 50% load and rated input voltage and frequency, the output
voltage shall not vary by more than plus 3% to minus 2% with any combination of input supply voltage

Volume 2 Page 221
and frequency variation as stipulated in this specification and output current variation from 0-100% of
rating.
Each charger shall be suitable for operating alone or in parallel with the other charger. When operating
with both chargers, one charger shall be arranged to supply the standing load with the second charger
in the quiescent standby mode.
Each charger shall also have a taper characteristic boost charging facility which shall be selectable by
a float1boost charge selection switch and which will give boost charging of 1.60 -1.75 voltage per cell.
Each charger shall be designed with a performance on boost charge such that with rated input voltage
and frequency the charger output shall not be less than its rating in Watts at 1.3 V and 1.65 V per cell,
and also the output voltage shall be 1.60 - 1.75 V per cell over an output range of 0 - 100% of rating.
The boost charging equipment shall be capable of recharging the battery within six hours following a
one hour discharge period.
In the event of the battery becoming discharged during an AC supply failure, the rate at which recharg-
ing commences shall be as high as possible consistent with maintaining the automatic charging con-
stant voltage feature and with the connections remaining undisturbed as for normal service.
The charger shall have an automatic boost/quick charge feature, which shall operate upon detection of
a significant battery discharge. When, after a mains failure, the AC supply voltage
returns and the battery has been significantly discharged, the charger will operate in current limit. If the
current limit lasts for more than a specified time and the charging current does not fall back to float
level, the automatic high rate charge shall be activated.
An override selector switch shall be provided inside the charger unit to enable a first conditioning
charge to be made, in line with the battery Manufacturer's recommendations, for batteries which are
shipped dry and require forming at site.
A blocking diode unit shall be incorporated in the output circuit of each charger to limit the load voltage
during boost charging of the battery. The diode unit shall not be in service in the normal float charging
mode. Should the stabiliser fail in the boost charging mode, the charger shall automatically revert to
the float mode.
An anti-paralleling diode shall be provided in each positive feed to the DC distribution board to prevent
faults on one supply affecting the other. These diodes shall be continuously rated to carry the maxi-
mum possible discharge current likely to occur in service and a safety factor of 4 shall be used to de-
termine the repetitive peak reverse voltage rating. The 12 t rating of the diodes shall be such that in
the event of a DC short circuit, no damage to the diodes shall result.
Each charger shall be capable of sustaining, without damage to itself, a continuous permanent short
circuit across its output terminals. The use of fuses, MCBs or other similar devices will not be accepta-
ble in meeting this requirement.
Suitable relays shall be provided for each charger to detect failure of the incoming supply and failure
of the DC output when in float charge mode. These relays shall operate appropriate indicating lamps
on the respective charger front panel and shall have additional voltage free contacts for operating re-

Volume 2 Page 222
mote and supervisory alarms. These alarms shall be immune from normal supply fluctuations and
shall not be initiated when any one charger is taken out of service.
The charger shall also be fitted with a device to de-energise the charger in the event of a DC output
float over voltage.
Each charger shall be provided, as a minimum, with the following instrumentation, indication and
alarm facilities:
indicating lamps for the AC supply to the rectifier and DC supply from the rectifier.
indicating lamps for float and boost charging operations.
voltmeter - input voltage.
voltmeter - output voltage.
ammeter - output current.
alarm - charger failure.
alarm - mains failure.
The following battery alarms shall also be provided
battery fuse failure

diode assembly failure
battery circuit faulty
low DC voltage
high AC voltage
earth fault +ve
earth fault -ve
Lamp test facilities shall be included.
A "charger faulty" alarm for each charger and a "battery faulty" alarm shall be provided in the substa-
tion control room and to the SCADA system where applicable.
Each battery charger shall be equipped with charge fail detection equipment to give local indication
and remote alarm if the voltage from the charger falls below a pre-set level which will be lower than
the nominal float charge voltage. Suitable blocking diodes shall be provided to prevent the battery
voltage being supplied to the equipment and so prevent charge fail detection.
The device shall not operate on switching surges or transient loss of voltage due to faults on the AC
system. The voltage at which the alarm operates shall be adjustable for operation over a range to be
approved by the Engineer.
Each charger shall be equipped with a switch-fuse for the incoming AC supply and an off load isolator
for the DC output.
Bidders shall include particulars with their tender on the method of adjustment included to compensate
for ageing rectifier elements. The construction of the charger shall be such that access to all compo-
nents is readily available for maintenance removal or replacement. Internal panels used for mounting
equipment shall be on swing frames to allow for access to the charger interior.

Volume 2 Page 223
8.6 Distribution Switchboards
The switchboard shall comply with the requirements of BS 5468 (IEC.60439)
The distribution switchboard shall be of the cubicle type or otherwise incorporated in the cubicles for
battery chargers. Double pole switches and fuses or switch fuses (miniature circuit breakers to BS
4752 or IEC 60157 may only be used if it can be shown that there will be no discrimination problems
with sub-circuits) shall be fitted to the DC switchboard as required by substation services but, as a
minimum requirement, that set out in the Schedule B of Requirements.
Distribution panels shall be mounted adjacent to the charger control panel and shall be of the cubicle
type complying with the general requirements of cubicle type control panels. No equipment associated
with the chargers shall be installed in the distribution board.
Distribution panels shall incorporate double-pole switches and fuses for each of the outgoing DC cir-
cuits and double-pole isolators for the incoming DC supplies The panel shall be provided with a volt-
meter and centre zero ammeter on each incoming circuit.
A double pole switch or contactor shall be provided for the purpose of sectionalising the busbar.
A battery earth fault detecting relay, which will centre tap the system via a high resistance, shall be in-
corporated in the distribution panel.
A low voltage detecting device for the system shall be incorporated in the distribution panel. No-volt
relays will not be accepted for these devices. The voltage setting shall be adjustable over an approved
range.
In addition to any other requirements specified elsewhere, the battery earth fault detecting relays and
low voltage devices shall each have three alarm contacts, one for local visual annunciation, one for
the station control panel alarm indication and one for potential free contact for external supervisory
alarms. A lamp test facility shall be provided.
Connections between the battery and the distribution cubicle shall be made in PVC insulated cable as
required. Cable laid in runs where it may be subject to damage shall be protected by wire armouring,
be sheathed overall and be cleated to walls as required.
Cable boxes or glands shall be provided as appropriate for all incoming and outgoing circuits of the
distribution switchboard and associated battery chargers. Each circuit shall be suitably labelled at the
front of the panel and at the cable termination where the terminals shall be additionally identified.
Charging and distribution switchboards shall be provided with an earthing bar of hard drawn high con-
ductivity copper which shall be sized to carry the prospective earth fault current without damage or
danger.
The cubicles for the chargers and distribution boards shall be of rigid, formed sheet metal construc-
tion, insect and vermin proof, having front facing doors allowing maximum access to the working parts,
when open. The design of the cubicles for the chargers shall be such as to prevent the ingress of dust
and minimise the spread of flames or ionised zones, shall be to IEC 60529 IP52, but at the same time
shall provide all necessary ventilation and cooling. The design of the frames shall allow the clamping
and holding of all chokes, transformers and similar sources of vibration, so that vibration will be mini-

Volume 2 Page 224
mised, satisfy relevant standards, and not limit the life of the equipment. The frame shall allow the fix-
ing of lifting and so that the equipment remains properly mechanically supported whilst being trans-
ported, lifted and installed.
8.7 Labelling
All relays, instruments and control devices, and each unit of the equipment, shall be provided with a
label. All labels and lettering shall be of sufficient size to provide easy reading from the normal operat-
ing or maintenance positions and shall consist of black lettering on a white background. All warning
and danger labels shall have white lettering on a red background. Labels shall be of the non-corrodible
type and lettering shall be of motorway script or similar. If plastic labels are used, these shall be lami-
nated to avoid warping.
8.8 Special Tools
The Contractor shall provide a complete set of all special tools and services necessary for the erection
and maintenance of the complete equipment.
Section 15 of this specification.

Volume 2 Page 225
9. LV AC Distribution Switchgear
9.1 Scope
These clauses describe the General Technical Requirements for LVAC switchboards for supplies to
"Substation Services" including outdoor switchyard lighting and control building services (Section 13).
9.2 References
IEC 60044-1 Current transformers

IEC 60044-2 Voltage transformers
IEC 60044-5 Low voltage fuses
IEC 60269
IEC 60439-1 Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies.
IEC 60644 Specification for high-voltage fuse links for motor circuit applications.
IEC 60898 Electrical accessories - Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for house-
hold and similar installations.
IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear -General
IEC 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear -Circuit breakers
IEC 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear -Switches,disconnectors and
fusecombination units.
IEC 60947-4 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear -Electromechanicalcontactors and
motorstarters.
9.3 Switchboard Design
9.3.1 General
Main switchboards and MCB sub-distribution boards for substation and building supplies will be con-
structed to IEC 60439, (BS EN 60439) in accordance with the following:
The classification of the main switchboards shall be:
(a) The external design of switchboards shall be of the multi- tier, multi-cubicle type.
(b) Installation shall be indoors.
(c) Switchboards shall be free standing and fixed to the floor.
(d) Enclosures degree of protection shall be not less than IP42.
(e) Switchboards shall be of metal clad construction.
(f) All instrumentation and metering shall be fixed to a hinged lockable compartment.
(g) Switchboards and all associated equipment shall be suitable for use on a 400/230 volt, three
phase, four wire, 50 Hz system having the neutral solidly earthed.
(h) Each circuit shall be clearly labelled to show the destination of the associated cable and the
"ON" and "OFF" positions of the switches.

Volume 2 Page 226
(i) Distribution boards for exterior use shall be galvanised, weatherproof and to category EP55 de-
gree of protection.
The equipment shall be of the single busbar type with circuit equipment housed in separate compart-
ments.
Where two or more incoming circuit breakers are provided at substations, these shall be mechanically
and electrically interlocked to prevent more than one circuit closing at the same time.
The enclosures of all switchboards shall be dustproof and vermin proof. Access doors shall be mount-
ed using concealed hinges. All removable covers shall be fitted with captive screws. Anti-condensation
heaters with control switches shall be provided on switchboards. They shall be suitable for a tropical
climate.
9.3.2 Rating
Incoming supplies to all switchboards shall be protected at the point of supply. All switchboards shall
be suitably rated for a prospective short-circuit breaking capacity of 15 kA at 400V for three seconds.
9.3.3 Busbars
Busbars shall be capable of carrying the full rated current continuously without exceeding the maxi-
mum temperature specified in IEC 60439 under site ambient conditions.
Busbars shall be of copper, individually covered with a heat resistant phase coloured PVC. Busbar
links between panels shall not be used. Neutral busbars shall have the same cross sectional areas as
the phase busbars. Busbars shall be of the same current rating throughout their length and shall be
capable of extension at both ends with the minimum disturbance to the busbar and cubicle enclosure.
9.3.4 Busbar and Circuit Shutters
For draw-out equipment shutters shall be provided over busbar and circuit orifices to close automati-
cally and positively when the equipment is isolated or withdrawn. Means shall be provided for padlock-
ing the sets of shutters. Busbar orifice shutters shall be painted signal red and labelled 'BUSBAR' in
white letters. Circuit orifice shutters shall be painted lemon yellow.
One blanking cover of each size shall be provided to prevent access to a circuit compartment when
the equipment has been completely withdrawn from the panel.
9.3.5 Circuit Labels
Approved type title labels are to be fitted externally on the front cover of each distribution board giving
details of the points controlled by each circuit. The circuit list shall be typed or printed stating the loca-
tion of the equipment served, rating of the protective unit and the circuit loading. The lists shall be
mounted on the inside of the cover door and shall be protected by an acrylic sheet slid into a frame
over the circuit list, the list and cover to be easily removable to permit circuit modifications.

Volume 2 Page 227
9.4 Circuit Breakers
All MCB and MCCB circuit breakers shall be high speed fault limiting, thermal/magnetic type with quick
break, trip free mechanisms which prevent the breaker being held in against overloads or faults, shall
comply with IEC 60947 (BS EN 60898 and be fitted with overcurrent releases of both thermal and in-
stantaneous type. Short circuit performance shall be to IEC 60947.
Where circuit breakers incorporate thermal overload protection and short-circuit protection, their set-
tings shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer.
Tripping arrangements shall be such as to ensure simultaneous opening of all phases. Arc extinction
shall be by de-ionising arc chutes.
Circuit breakers on the incoming circuits shall have facilities for locking in the "off" position.
The fault interrupting capacity of the circuit breaker shall not be less than that of the switchboard itself,
or if this is not the case, back up fuses shall be included.
9.5 Switch Fuses
Each switch-fuse unit shall be housed in a separate metal compartment and provided with a hinged
metal door, interlocked with the switch mechanism so that:
(a) The door cannot be opened whilst the switch is closed.

(b) The door, on opening, automatically locks the switch in the "off' position. Facilities shall be in-
corporated to allow for the deliberate release of this interlock for maintenance purposes, should
it be desired to observe the switch in operation.
An insulating barrier shall be fitted to segregate the fuses and neutral link from the switch and the
connections of the latter shall be effectively shielded by an inner metal screen when the compartment
door has been opened to obtain access to the fuses.
The switch-fuses may be either of the combination fuse-switch type or of the type with the switch and
fuse in separate units. In either case, interlocking shall be provided to prevent access to the fuses until
the associated switch is opened and provision shall be made for padlocking the switch in the "on" and
"off' positions.
The switch shall have a quick make and quick break action, independent of the speed at which the
switch handle is operated, and shall be entirely suitable for switching the inductive loads associated
with motor circuits.
9.6 Oil Filtration Socket Outlet and Plug
The contract shall include heavy-duty weatherproof three phase and neutral interlocked switched
socket outlets and plugs suitable for supplying the transformer oil filtration units.

Volume 2 Page 228
Section 15 of this specification.

Volume 2 Page 229
10. National Load Dispatch Centre (NLDC)
10.1 Scope
In order to provide the tele-control & tele-metering facilities required at the existing National Load Dis-
patch Centre (NLDC) at Rampura, the complete design, supply, delivery, installation, testing & com-
missioning of new hardware and software, extension of the existing equipment, necessary adjustment,
adaptation, modification, integration and configuration of new and existing equipment in NLDC, shall
be provided for integration of new plants, in new and existing substations, which are in the scope of
the work, under this Contract.
The NLDC is located in Dhaka (Rampura & Biddut Bhaban) and is connected through a fibre optic
network to communications equipment and remote terminal unit (RTU)/industrial gateway of SAS sys-
tem located at different power station/ substation.
The SCADA system of NLDC is based on M/S Areva T&D e-terra platform.
The manufacturer of the telecommunication system fibre optic multiplexer equipment for communica-
tion and protection shall be: ABB (CH/S) or GE (Canada/UK/USA) or equivalent. and equipment shall
be incorporated into the existing system.
Existing Fiber Optic Multiplexers used in PGCBs Grid network are ABB make FOX 515/615 and Areva
make MSE 5001type. The proposed Fiber Optic Multiplexer shall have to be integrated with existing
telecommunication Network Management System and compatible with existing equipment.
The industrial gateway will be implemented at the 400, 230 or 132kV substations for remote monitor-
ing and control from the NDC. It will provide all necessary control and monitoring facilities for 400, 230
or 132kV level lines, transformers and auxiliaries.
All plant supplied under this contract shall be equipped with potential-free auxiliary contacts for indica-
tions and alarms. CT and VT circuits shall be fitted, where required, with the appropriate shorting and
fused terminals. All required electrical quantities shall be transmitted to the NLDC through the industri-
al gateway of the substation automation system.
Supply and installation of necessary equipment such as IED/relay, transducers, DI, DO card etc. for
integrating new bay through existing RTU / gateway at far end substation is supplier scope of work.
All HV breakers, motorized disconnectors, tap changers, etc. shall be controlled form NLDC through
the gateway or RTU of the substation automation system using IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. Cabling be-
tween the substation automation gateway and the communication equipment shall be included in this
contract.
Necessarymodificationsof thesoftwareandhardwareatthe NLDCmasterstationshall alsobedoneunder-

thiscontracttoaccommodateallthenewsystemsextended under this contract.
In order to provide the tele-control facilities required at the national load dispatch centre (NLDC), the
Contractor shall supply and install two (2)industrial gatewaysat the new 400kV and 230kV substations
and one (1)industrial gateway at the 132kV substations for integration into the NLDC SCADA system.

Volume 2 Page 230
Data communication from switch to gateway and switch to SAS server will independent.
In case of 2 gateways, they will be configured as master hot standby mode, or one gateway will report
to the main station and the other will report to the backup station.
All required electrical quantities (digital and analogue) shall be transmitted to the NLDC through the
industrial gateway of the substation automation system (SAS).
The communication protocol to be used for data exchange between the NLDC and the substation shall
be IEC 60870-5-104.
The gateway shall be capable of reporting to both the main master station at Rampura (through VLAN
network) and thestandby master station at Biddut Bhaban (through routed network) simultaneously. It
will be configured according to the signal list, communication parameter, IP address, station address
etc. provided by PGCB.
One laptop for each supplier & same software version is required with Acronis True Image or Ghost or
similar software for system back up & restoration
The following work shall be done at the Master Stations Rampura (Dhaka) and the Backup Station at
Biddut Bhaban (Dhaka) for integration purposes:
SCADA Database Modelling

The following activities will be carried out based on the data list & single line diagram
Preparation and update of COMTOP(communication topology)
Preparation and update of RTUTOP(RTU topology)
Preparation and update of SUBTOP(substation topology)
Preparation and update of system calculation database.
Network Database Modelling

The following activities will be carried out
Preparation and update of NETTOP(network topology)
Preparation and update of NETPARM(parameter value of X-former, lines, unit)
Preparation and update of NETTAB topology
Generation Database Modelling

Preparation and update of GENTOP(generator topology)
Preparation and update of GENPARM (heat rate curve, unit regulation, capability curve etc.)
Preparation and update of GENTAB topology
DTS Database Modelling

Preparation and update of DTSTOP
Preparation and update of DTSPARM
Preparation and update of DTSAB topology
Alarm Database Modelling

Preparation and update of ALARM topology
Preparation and update of ALARM category, priority, exception

Volume 2 Page 231
Validation
Cross validation of all databases and create update copy of those databases.
On-lining of databases in DTS (Simulator) server
Checking and modifying (if require) topology of substations, devices, network etc.
Creation of VLAN at polling servers & communication channel for data.
On lining of error free data base both master & backup master station.
Substation Display
The following activities will be carried out to build single line diagram for stations configured in SCADA
database
Preparation and update of SCADA general display
Preparation and update of SCADA online station display
Preparation and update of Network application station online display
Preparation&upde of NETWORK_MAP display
Preparation& update of all GENERATION display
Preparation& update of all LOAD display
Preparation& update of area control centresdisplay
Modification of existing displays wherever required.
Tuning of EMS applications such as state estimator, real-time contingency analysis, real-time secu-
rity enhancement, optimal power flow voltage,VAR dispatch generation at NLDC to be carried out.
End-to-EndTest
Verification of all required signals at NLDC.
Verification of continuous and complete reporting.
Quality and accuracy of field data.
Other works /activities which are not explicitly mentioned but are required for the NLDC integration
shall be included in the scope of works.
10.2 Requirements
Following requirements are only minimum requirements and for information only. Final scope of re-
quirements will be defined during the design
10.2.1 Indications
The following indications shall be provided:
400 kV &245kV circuit breaker, disconnector and earth switch positions.

Transformer tap change selection on auto/manual.
Transformer tap position.
Control switches on Local/Supervisory.
Trip relays operated.
Auto-reclose on/off

Volume 2 Page 232
10.2.2 Load Flows, System Voltage and Frequency
Electrical quantities shall be provided to enable the following measurements:
Power flow (MW and MVar), voltage (kV) and current (A) on all 400 kV feeder circuits,as well on
the 230 kV side of 400/230 kV transformers.
Tap position indication for 400/230 kV transformers
400 kV busbar voltage and frequency.
400 kV feeder voltages
10.2.3 Alarms
Alarm facilities shall be provided to alert the System Control Engineer at NLDC in the event of the fol-
lowing operations:
Remote/local Switch for all Circuit Breakers

Tripping of 400 & 230 kV circuit breakers
Busbar protection operated
Feeder main 1 protection operated
Feeder main 2 protection operated
Feeder back-up protection operated
Protection class-1 (distance, differential).
Protection class-2 (over current, earth fault).
Protection class-3 (bus bar).
Circuit breaker fail protection operated
Feeder-end protection operated
Auto-reclose operated
Transformer protection operated (per transformer)
Transformer non-trip alarms (per transformer)
Transformer winding/oil temperature alarm (per transformer)
Transformer alarm (Buchholz alarm, oil level low).
Transformer trip (Buchholz trip, PRD trip)
Transformer temperature alarm (oil temp alarm, winding temperature).
Transformer temperature trip (oil temp trip, winding temperature trip).
Tap change out of step alarm
Tap change incomplete alarm
Tap changer Alarm.
Tap changer trip.
Tap changer high limit.
Tap changer low limit.
Auto reclose operated
Circuit breaker faulty alarm (e.g. low pressure)
Protection faulty alarm
Busbar protection faulty alarm
Battery fault (per battery)
Battery charger fail (per battery)
LV AC system fail
Substation common alarm
Communication equipment alarm urgent
Communication equipment alarm non-urgent

Volume 2 Page 233
Teleprotection channel fail.

Circuit breaker spring uncharged
Circuit breaker motor supply trip
Auto reclose blocked
DC supply failure
10.2.4 Controls
The following facilities shall be controlled from the NLDC.
400 & 230 kV circuit breakers and motorised disconnectors (open/close)

33 kV circuit breaker (open/close) for load shed feeder
Trip relay reset
Auto-reclose in/out
Transformer tap change raise/lower
Tap change control remote/supervisory
Auto/non-auto voltage control.
10.2.5 Network Parameters
Line length, line conductor type, short circuit data for zero sequence (%R, %X, % of full charging Sus-
ceptance) etc.
10.2.6 Interfaces
This contract includes an industrial grade gateway to the NLDC. The gateway shall have adequate
capacity (minimum 25% additional spare point with license) to meet to the future extensions of the
substation. The cabling between the gateway and the communication equipment shall be provided
under this contract as well.
In case of a WINDOWS operating system-based gateway, there should be USB port, VGA port,
HDD /flash memory with one spare, TFT monitor with mouse and keyboard etc. Harddisk should be
50% free and CPU loading maximum of 30% at any condition. If the gateway is firmware-based, then
two (2) control cardsare required.
Gateways also shall have eight (8) LAN portsand redundant power supply. There should be GPS facil-
ities for time synchronization. Cyber security has to be ensured at field SCADA interface level. Sup-
ported protocol shall be IEC 60870-5-104, 61850 & MODBus etc.
At the existing substations, extensions of the existing gateway or RTU shall be provided and
included in the contract price.

Volume 2 Page 234
11. Supporting Structures for Outdoor Equip-

ment
11.1 Scope
Where specified structures shall be provided under this contract for supporting the conductors, bus-
bars, insulators, isolating switches, circuit breakers, current and voltage transformers, surge arresters,
line traps, coupling capacitors, sealing ends or cable boxes and cables where necessary and other
items of plant generally as shown on the relevant drawings. Facilities shall also be provided where
specified for the termination of the incoming transmission lines.
All structure designs shall be such as to facilitate inspection, painting, maintenance, repairs and op-
eration with the continuity of supply being the prime consideration.
11.2 Structure Arrangement
The arrangement of the high level structures supporting conductors and/or busbars shall be either lat-
tice structures primarily composed of angle sections, or low visual impact A-frame type structures pri-
marily composed of welded hollow or composite sections. Angle, hollow or composite sections shall
be either steel or aluminium as specified. For lattice structures a fully triangulated system of bracings
shall preferably be adopted. For A-frame structures the primary connections between major compo-
nents shall be bolted, for ease of transportation and erection.
Low level support structures shall be either lattice structures primarily composed of angle sections or
'moment' type structures primarily composed of welded hollow or composite sections.
The design and arrangement of supporting structures shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The type of arrangement of high-level structures and acceptable materials for both high and low level
structures shall be as specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements.
11.3 Design
11.3.1 General
The supporting structures shall be designed to ensure that the specified minimum phase, earth and
section clearances are maintained under all conditions. Where applicable special attention shall be
paid to the design of the line termination structures to ensure minimum phase clearance is obtained
for the complete range of angles of entry specified.
The strength and rigidity of structures shall be such that the alignment of the equipment which they
carry shall not be affected by the static and dynamic loads to which the structures are subjected.

Volume 2 Page 235
The assumptions made in the overall structural design especially in the load transfer between the gan-
try beam and column shall be adequately reflected in the design and detailing of the beam-column
connection.
11.3.2 Assumed Loading Combinations
The supporting structures shall be designed to resist the ultimate applied loading, determined in ac-
cordance with the following load combinations:
Load Combination 1 - Design Wind, Coincident Temperature, (Ice)
(a) The wind pressure specified in Table 11-1 below applied to the projected area of all conductors
and electrical equipment;
(b) The wind pressure specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements applied to the projected
area of all members of the windward face of structure;
(c) Where appropriate the conductor and/or earthwire tensions or busbar forces, including due al-
lowance for both horizontal and vertical deviations / inclinations;
(d) Self weight of the conductor, earthware, insulator, equipment and structure;
(e) When stated in the Schedule of Technical Requirements the effects of the specified radial ice
thickness shall be taken into account in the determination of the wind area of the conductor,
earthwire, busbar, electrical equipment and the supporting structure, the conductor and earth-
wire tensions and the self-weight of the equipment and the structure.
The wind directions considered shall include transverse, longitudinal and if appropriate 45 to the ma-
jor axis of the structure.
Table 11-1: Wind Pressures
Line Description
1. Structure Arrangement [clause 11.2]

High level Lattice or A-Frame
Low level Lattice or Moment
Primary material Steel
2. Load Combination 1 [clause 11.3.2] Structures on- Conductor, Insulator,

ly Equipment, Busbars, etc..
Wind pressure at 10 m above G.L. qref kN/m2 3.54 1.21
Power law factor 0 0.095
Coincident temperature C 5
Radial ice thickness mm 0
Density of ice kg/m -
Load combination 2
Minimum temperature C 5
Maximum operating temperature C 80
Load combination 3
Seismic coefficient g 0.1
Coincidence temperature C 5

Volume 2 Page 236
Line Description
3. Line Termination Structure [clause 11.3.3] Phase Earthwire

Conductor designation Mallard 7 x 4.0
Type ACSR/SA GSW
Number of sub-conductors 2 -
Maximum working horizontal tension per sub- kN 20.0 4.5
conductor
Wind pressure kN/m 1.40 1.76
Radial ice thickness mm 0 0
Maximum downlead span m 75 75
Maximum angle of entry horizontal deg. 45 45
Vertical deg. 30 30
Low duty tension set wind area m 0.7 -
Mass kg 100 -
4. Partial Load Factors [clause 11.3.4] Steel Aluminium

Load combination
1 1.35 n.a.
2 1.0 n.a.
3 1.0 n.a.
4 1.5 1.5
5. Safety and Access Requirements [clause

High Level Low Level
11.3.7]
Step bolts Yes No
Ladders: Yes No
Cage protection No No
Fall arrest system No No
6. Partial Material Factors [clause 11.3.8]

Steel 0.85
Aluminium -
Foundations 0.76
7. Minimum Member Thickness [clause 11.3.8] Steel Aluminium

Main member mm 6.0 n.a.
Other bracing members mm 5.0 n.a.
Secondary (redundant) members mm 5.0 n.a.
Plates mm 6.0 n.a.
Bolt diameters mm 16.0 n.a.
Minimum thickness specified shall apply to both
hot rolled and hollow sections
8. Protective treatment (clause 11.6)

Galvanising thickness n 85 n.a.
Protection procedure BS 729 no

Volume 2 Page 237
Load Combination 2 - Still Air, Short Circuit, Minimum Temperature or Maximum Operating
Temperature
(a) Conductor and/or earthwire tensions or busbar forces including the dynamic affects calculated
in accordance with IEC 865-1.
(b) Self weight of the conductor, earthware, insulator, equipment and structure;
Unless agreed to the contrary, the "resultant spring constant" (s) of both supports of one span for
7
strained conductors shall be taken as 10 N/m for steel structures.
Load Combination 3 - Still Air, Seismic, Coincident Temperature (Ice)
(a) Conductor and/or earthwire tensions or busbar forces;

(b) Seismic forces;
(c) Self weight of the conductor, earthware, insulator, equipment and structure;
(d) When stated in the Schedule of Requirements the effects of the specified radial ice thickness.
Seismic forces shall be applied as a static horizontal force transversely and alternatively longitudinally
to the major axis of the structure, and shall be equal in value to the seismic coefficient stated in the
Schedule of Technical Particulars multiplied by the self-weight of the conductor, earthwire, busbar,
electrical equipment and structure, and applied at the centre of gravity of the equipment and structure
as appropriate.
Load Combination 4 - Still Air, Erection, Coincident Temperature
(a) Conductor and/or earthwire tensions or busbar forces;

(b) Self weight of the conductor, earthware, insulator, equipment and structure.
For erection conditions any one complete phase conductor bundle or busbar or earthwire shall be as-
sumed not to be erected in any one span.
For the purposes of design all high level structures shall be considered as terminal structures. For mul-
ti-bay continuous structures, central columns shall be designed for the most onerous condition of ad-
jacent bays being loaded or unloaded.
11.3.3 Line Termination Structures
For details of the incoming transmission line phase conductor and earthwire details, and angles of en-
try reference should be made to the Schedule of Technical Requirements.
11.3.4 Partial Load Factors
The partial load factors to be applied to the loading combinations determined in accordance with
Clause 11.3.2 shall be as specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements.

Volume 2 Page 238
11.3.5 Wind Loading
The reference wind pressure to be adopted for the design of the outdoor supporting structures shall be
based upon the value specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements. The reference wind pres-
2
sure qref N/m at a height of 10m above ground level shall be subjected to variation for height and
shape of the structure or equipment under consideration to give the total wind load.
The total wind load on the structure or equipment surface shall be determined from the expression:
The total wind load on the structure or equipment surface shall be determined from the expression:
H
F =q C W
10
Where
Fw = The calculated total wind load on the structure or equipment:
q ref = reference wind pressure
H= Height to top of the panel under consideration
= power law index
Cshp = aerodynamic shape factor
WA = windward face area of the structure or equipment
The aerodynamic shape factor Cshp shall be as specified:
Flexible conductors 1.0

Earthwires 1.2
Tubular busbars Re < 4.1 x 105 1.2 [1]
4.1 x 105< Re < 8.2 x 105 0.6
Support insulators, porcelain for apparatus or cap & pin insulator strings 1.2 [2]
Flat truss structures consisting of profiles 1.6
Square & rectangular lattice towers & supports consisting of profiles 2.8
Sharp edged structures & components other than above 2.0
Flat truss structures consisting of tubes 1.2
Square & rectangular lattice towers & supports consisting of tubes 2.1
Notes: [1] Re = Reynolds Number [2] Based on external diameter of insulator.
11.3.6 Equipment and Conductor Terminations
All supporting structures shall be provided with such holes, bolts and fittings as may be necessary to
accommodate insulators, isolating switches and other equipment provided under the Contract.
Where incoming transmission lines and/or conductors and/or earthwires are terminated at structures
with tension sets, approved shackle or swivel attachments shall be provided. To facilitate maintenance
and erection, additional attachment points shall be provided adjacent to the main termination attach-
ment. The supply and connection of the incoming transmission line will be undertaken under a sepa-
rate contract.
Structures required to support cable sealing ends shall be provided with arrangements for supporting
the cables. Attachment holes for the connection of earthwire bonds shall be provided adjacent to the

Volume 2 Page 239
earthwire attachment point. Attachment holes for the connection of the substation earthing grid shall
be provided on the vertical face of the structure, approximately 300mm above the top of concrete.
Foundation holding-down bolts shall not be used for the attachment of earth connections.
11.3.7 Safety and Access Requirements
To facilitate safe inspection and maintenance all supporting structures which cannot be maintained
from ground level shall be provided with climbing facilities, inter-circuit screens, guards etc. in appro-
priate positions as agreed with the Engineer.
All members inclined at 40 or less to the horizontal, shall be designed to resist a mid-point load of 1.5
kN, with no other loading being considered.
Where specified step bolts of an approved type shall be fitted to supporting structures at not more than
450 mm centres starting as near as practicable to the base and continuing to within 1m below the top
of the structure. It shall be noted on the erection drawings that all step bolts are to be removed after
construction for a distance of 2.0m above ground level. Adequate clearance shall be provided be-
tween the step bolts and any obstructions which might interfere with their use. Step bolts shall not be
less than 16mm diameter, project not less than 150mm, and be fixed with nut, washer and nut.
Where specified ladders of an approved type generally in accordance with the requirements of BS
4211, 450mm wide and 350mm rung spacing shall be fitted to supporting structures. They shall be in-
corporated into the structure either integrally or separately. Where specified cage protection or fall ar-
rest systems shall be fitted to the ladder. Means shall be provided to prevent unauthorised access of
ladders.
Inter-circuit screens shall be provided where necessary to prevent access between adjacent circuits
on multi-bay structures. Inter-circuit screens shall be fabricated from a 50mm x 50mm mesh formed
from 3mm diameter galvanised steel wire.
All structures shall be fitted with identification/notice plates as appropriate.
11.3.8 Structural Design
The allowable ultimate unit stresses used in the determination of the nominal member strength of sup-
porting structures shall be based on the following:
Lattice steel structures ASCE 10-97

Steel A frame or moment structures BS 5950
Aluminium structures BS 8118: Part I
Partial factors to be applied to member nominal strength determined in accordance with the above
stated codes shall be as specified in the Schedule of Technical Requirements. For ASCE 10-97 the
appropriate reference stress levels shall be based on the values specified in BS 5950.
The maximum allowable slenderness ratios shall not exceed the following:
Steel/Aluminium
For column or support leg members, beam chords 120

Volume 2 Page 240
For other load bearing compression members 200

For secondary (redundant bracings) 250
For tension only members 350
Members shall be of such shape, size and length to preclude damage or failure from vibration or
stress reversal, including the detailing of connections.
Minimum member thickness and diameter of bolts shall be as specified in the Schedule of Technical
Requirements
Holding down bolts shall be used to connect the structures to their foundations. The design of holding
down bolts shall make adequate provision for combined axial and shear forces.
The nuts of all bolts attaching conductors, busbars or earthwire tension sets etc., shall be locked with
a locknut. No screwed threads shall form part of a shearing plane between members, and bolts shall
not project more than 10mm beyond the nut.
11.3.9 Design Submissions
The Contractor shall submit all design calculations, drawings and method statements as required. All
sets of calculations shall be complete, bound, properly titled and given a unique drawing number. An
agreed system of identification of the structure design reference, fabrication drawings and substation
general arrangement drawings shall be used.
Calculations shall contain a Design Information sheet, derivation of all applied loadings including sag
and tension and dynamic tension calculations, the design load for each member group under the criti-
cal loading case, member size, slenderness ratio, allowable load, end connection detail and founda-
tion load schedule. Codes or standard references should be quoted and where computer programs
are used, a full explanation in the English language shall be provided to assist the Engineer's approval
of the calculation.
11.4 Materials
All steel shall comply with BS EN 10025 or BS EN 10210 as appropriate and shall be suitable for all
usual fabrication processes including hot and cold working within the specified ranges. The Contractor
must take due cognisance of the minimum ambient temperature, quality of steel, charpy impact value
and stress relieving.
The quality of finished steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 10163. All steel shall be free from blis-
ters, scale, lamination, segregation's and other defects. There shall be no rolling laps at toes of angles
or rolled in mill scale.
Hot rolled steel plate 3mm thick or above shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
10029.
Bolts and nuts shall be ISO Metric Black Hexagon to BS 4190 and shall be threaded ISO Metric

Volume 2 Page 241
Course Pitch to BS 3643: Part 2, Tolerance Class 7H/8g. Only one grade of steel shall be used per
bolt diameter. Washers shall be in accordance with BS 4320 Grade E and BS 4464 Type B as appro-
priate.
Consumables used in metal arc welding shall be in accordance with the relevant standard.
All materials for aluminium. structures shall be in accordance with BS 8118: Part 2.
11.5 Workmanship
The Contractor shall submit panel assembly (fabrication) drawings which shall show all materials in
place, complete with all fabrication and connection details. A complete tabulation listing all pieces,
bolts, nuts, washers etc. shall also be shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall make changes to
the fabrication details which the Engineer determines necessary to make the finished structure con-
form to the requirements and intent of the specification.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed Method Statement of his proposed fabrication procedures in-
cluding quality control procedures to ensure satisfactory assembly and erection, interchangeability of
similar members, accuracy of dimensions, position and alignment of holes.
All welding shall be carried in accordance with BS 5135 for steel structures and BS 8118 Part 2 for al-
uminium structures. All members shall be stamped on before galvanising or other protective coatings,
using characters 10mm high and shall be clearly legible after galvanising.
11.6 Protective Treatment
Unless otherwise specified after fabrication, all structural steelwork, including bolts, nuts and washers
shall be hot dipped galvanised to meet the requirements of BS 729. Bolt threads shall be cleaned of
surplus spelter by spinning or brushing. Dies shall not be used for cleaning threads other than on nuts.
Nuts shall be galvanised and tapped 0.4mm oversize and threads shall be oiled.
Excessively thick or brittle coatings due to high levels of silicon or phosphorous in steel, which may re-
sult in an increased risk of coating damage and/or other features that make the final product non-fit-for
purpose shall be cause for rejection. Protective treatment for aluminium shall be in accordance with
the requirements of BS 8118.
Galvanising thickness and aluminium protection procedure shall be as specified in the Schedule of
Technical Requirements

Volume 2 Page 242
11.7 Quality Control
11.7.1 General
Routine tests on raw materials and fabricated individual members shall be undertaken in accordance
with BS EN 10025, BS EN 10210 and BS 8118 as appropriate.
All steel ex-mills or received from merchant's stock shall be marked to identify the cast or casts from
which it was rolled in accordance with Section 9 of BS EN 10025 and Section 10 of BS 102 10, and
shall be covered by the appropriate (mill) certificate. The optional impact test BS EN 10210 option 1.6
for quality JO is required.
The material grades or alloy categories of individual pieces of steel/aluminium shall be capable of pos-
itive identification at all stages of the fabrication process.
Bolts and nuts shall be covered by the appropriate test certificate to prove compliance with BS 4190.
11.7.2 Welding
Unless specified to the contrary all structural welds shall be undertaken using approved welding pro-
cedures in accordance with BS EN 288. All welders shall be tested to the requirements of BS EN 287.
All welding shall be subject to a non-destructive testing (NDT) programme, which shall include visual,
ultrasonic and magnetic particle testing as appropriate. Visual inspection shall be in accordance with
BS 5289, ultrasonic to BS 3923 and magnetic particle to BS 6072. Acceptance criteria shall be in ac-
cordance with BS 5135, except for porosity and BS 8118: Part 2. All welds especially butt welds must
be continuous to ensure a pickle-tight connection when galvanised.
The Contractor's NDT programme shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the com-
mencement of fabrication.
11.7.3 Check Erection
Prototype structures shall be check erected in order to verify the accuracy of detailing and fabrication.
The degree of check erection shall be sufficient to verify not only the main structure, but all auxiliary
steelwork. Sufficient blocking and support shall be provided to prevent distortion and overstressing of
members to ensure proper fit. Assembly shall be accomplished without extraordinary effort to align bolt
holes, or to force pieces into position. Bolt holes shall not be reamed or enlarged. Any damage to pro-
tective coatings during check erection if the check erection is undertaken on coated structures, shall
be recoated at the fabricator's cost.
11.7.4 Galvanising
Tests on galvanised members and components shall be carried out at the works to ensure compliance
with the requirements of BS 729.

Volume 2 Page 243
11.7.5 Tolerances
The fabrication tolerances after galvanising for steel members, which are not to be considered cumu-
lative shall be as follows:
a) On linear dimensions of nominal sections as per BS 4, BS 4848, BS EN 10024,

BS EN 10034 & BS EN 10056-2.
b) On overall length of member 1 mm
c) On centres of holes 1 mm
d) On groups of holes 2 mm
e) On back-gauges 1 mm
f) On corresponding holes in opposite faces of a member 1 mm
g) On specified hole diameter on the punch side (in the black), 0.3%
or when drilled - 0 mm
h) Taper on the punched holes as measured between the specified hole diameter 1.0 mm
on the punch side and the hole diameter on the die's side (in the black)
i) On specified bends, open and closed flanges 0.02%
The permitted tolerances for straightness after galvanising shall not exceed an offset of 1: 1000.
Tolerances for aluminium structures shall be in accordance with BS 8118: Part 2.
11.7.6 Erection
The Contractor shall when requested provide the Engineer with a Method Statement detailing his pro-
posed erection methods. Due cognisance shall be taken of the relevant parts of BS 5531 and current
health and safety legislation.
All structural members stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground where possible. Contact with
substances likely to attack the protective coatings shall be avoided and all members kept in a clean
and tidy condition. Care shall be taken to prevent damage/deterioration of any protective coating dur-
ing transportation, storage and erection. Unless otherwise agreed damaged members shall be re-
placed. The renovation of damaged areas of protective coatings shall be carried out using techniques
agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the structures are not strained or damaged in any way during erec-
tion. Structures shall be erected vertically within a tolerance at the top, or the centre of the beam of
0.5% of the overall structure height before equipment installation or conductor/busbar stringing.

Volume 2 Page 244
12. Buildings and Civil Engineering Works
12.1 General
This section covers all earth work, foundations and buildings associated with the project together with
roads, surfacing, cable trenches and tunnels, boundary walls, guard houses, foul and storm drainage
and water supply.
12.1.1 Scope of Work
The work includes the design, detailing, construction and maintenance of the following:
1. performance of site investigation

2. foundations for all equipment to be installed in outdoor switchyards, control buildings, indoor
switchgear and any other building required for the project
3. complete buildings consisting of structural reinforced concrete frames, brick walls, concrete roof
and floor slabs.
4. roadways generally within sites, surfacing the entire area within site boundary and surface water
drainage.
5. cable trenches, cable tunnels, cable ducts and pipe ducts
Included in the scope of work is the detailing, construction and maintenance of the following items
which shall generally be constructed to the Employer's standards but full working drawings shall be
prepared by the Contractor:
a. guardhouses
b. the relay houses
c. auxiliary control building
Guardhouse, as stated in item (a) shall be designed as per enclosed drawing.
The Bidder shall state which approved local building Contractor(s) he proposes to employ to carry out
the work.
12.1.2 Contractor to Satisfy himself as to all Conditions
The Contractor shall assess:
a. access conditions at all sites, plus ground conditions and ground bearing capacity
b. transport costs, materials costs and restrictions of availability of supply of materials locally
c. importation restrictions and delay due to customs controls
d. restrictions imposed by existing equipment on sequence of construction, access etc.
e. restrictions caused by cable laying and overhead line Contractors
f. ground conditions and temporary works required to provide support during excavation

Volume 2 Page 245
12.1.3 Way Leaves, Land Purchase and Planning Permission
The Employer will be responsible for the purchase of all land within the permanent site boundary and
the purchase of all land required to the base of the fill of any batter slopes. The Employer will also be
responsible for obtaining land to provide a permanent single access to each site from a nearby road or
waterway.
The land development is not in the Contractors scope.
During the construction period the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining this access in a rea-
sonable condition by reinstating damage caused by his construction traffic and Employer traffic. The
Contractor shall provide durable surface to access road.
Should the Contractor require more than one single access to a site or require additional land for con-
struction activities outside the permanent site boundary, he shall be responsible for the purchase or
way leave of the required land.
The Employer will be responsible for applying for planning permission. The Contractor shall be re-
sponsible for completing the approved site survey and the approved site layout plan, together with the
approved architectural elevations of all facades of any buildings, by the key date given in the pro-
gramme for each site so that the Employer may use these drawings to apply for planning permission.
12.1.4 Site Survey Drawings
For each site the Contractor shall prepare a survey at 1:200 scale showing existing ground levels on a
minimum 10 metre grid and details of all features above and below the ground within the site boundary
and up to 15 metres beyond it by the key date stated in the programme. Levels shall be related to
bench marks clearly indicated on the plan. The plan shall be submit to approval by the Engineer and
the agreed substation building floor levels shall be given on each site plan.
The Contractor shall propose the building floor level to the Engineer. It shall generally be 1000mm
above the crown of the nearest public road or final site level or the highest known flood level, which-
ever is the greater.
12.1.5 Earth Works
Cut and fill where required shall be carried out by the Contractor. Source of fill material shall be
planned and approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a level or
uniform sloping site to suit his substation layout design. The final soil levels (i.e. the level below the
brick surfacing) shall be stated on the site survey plan to be prepared by the Contractor.
Earth works to make the substation land suitable for installation of supporting structures and equip-
ment, for extinction of the control building and related dependencies, with drainage to evacuate water
in all conditions and of sufficient size to allow access to maintenance equipment and gravelling of
switchyard surface.
Access road and switchyard internal circulation ways shall be extended. Extend drainage network
made of perimeter trenches, switchyard internal sub soil drainage trenches or pipes.

Volume 2 Page 246
All fill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm deep to a minimum of 90% optimum density
as defined by the Proctor Test.
12.1.6 Engineer's and Employer's Accommodation/Surveying Equipment
On each major site the Contractor shall provide an office of approx. size 5 x 6m equipped with desk, 2
chairs, light and fan for the sole use of the Engineer and his inspectors. Similar facilities are to be pro-
vided for the Employer.
The Contractor shall also provide in the Engineer's site office one set of personal computer. The PC
shall be fully equipped with all peripherals.
The Contractor shall loan his surveying instruments to the Engineer and his staff when required. In-
strument checks shall be carried out at monthly intervals.
12.1.7 Programme
The Contractor's programme shall at Bid stage define the following key dates for each site. Where
drawings are to be submitted for approval, they shall be submitted at least 6 weeks before the key
dates to allow for the Engineer to comment and his comments to be incorporated in the drawings:
1. Issue of approved site survey drawing complete with soil levels and floor levels
2. Issue of approved electrical layout drawings
3. Completion of site investigation field work
4. Issue of approved Site Investigation Final report
5. Completion of loading tests on a foundation on each fill site and any other site where settlement
is likely to be a problem
6. Issue of approved drawings required for planning permission
7. Issue of a full complete set of civil building drawings
8. Construction start date
9. Date access will be given for:
a) Installation of equipment in buildings
b) Installation of outdoor plant
10. Construction finish date
The Contractor's programme shall outline the number of sites he proposes to build at any time and
shall show the order of completion of sites and how crews will move from site to site. This information
shall be used to establish the number of expatriate site supervisors required.
The drawing programme shall ensure that complete set of approved civil building drawings will be is-
sued at least 21 days before construction start at any site, in accordance with the Project Require-
ments in Schedule A of Volume 3 of 3.
The Construction programme shall be expressed in an 'S' curve for the whole project, with the per-
centage (of the total value of work in the schedules) given for each site each month. The overall per-
centage completion of the project each month shall also be given.

Volume 2 Page 247
12.1.8 Monthly Progress Certificates/Progress Reports
In accordance with the Project Requirements in Volume I the Contractor shall submit agreed progress
certificates for each site before the seventh day of the next month. These certificates shall state the
percentage completion of each item in the schedules and shall state the overall percentage comple-
tion of each site and that site's contribution to overall project percentage completion. An updated 'S'
curve shall be submitted with the progress certificates.
In addition, the Contractor shall provide a monthly
Environmental and Social and Compensation Inspection Report

Health & Safety Report
12.1.9 Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall provide all temporary buildings, workshops, cement and lime stores and latrines
required for his use. The Contractor shall agree the location of these buildings with the Engineer, after
submitting a drawing showing their proposed location.
When a Contractor is placed in possession of a site, or part of a site, he shall erect temporary fencing
immediately to protect the site until the boundary wall shall be erected.
12.1.10 Site Supervision
Although the civil and building works may be let as a sub-contract to an approved local Contractor, the
main Contractor shall ensure that an expatriate supervisor in his direct employ is continuously availa-
ble at each site during construction. This supervisor shall have at least a working command of spoken
English and be able to read, understand and discuss specifications and drawings.
The Contractor shall notify the Employer and Engineer in writing of every concrete pour and founda-
tion casting the day before the work starts.
12.1.11 Designs and Drawings
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval for the use of all design codes and standards be-
fore design work starts. All design and drawing work shall be completed in the Contractor's own coun-
try, in direct coordination with the electrical plant design.
The Contractor shall supply one copy of all of codes for the Engineer in Dhaka. If non-English equiva-
lent National codes are adopted, the Contractor shall supply English translations of these Codes to the
Engineer.
One copy of calculations shall be submitted together with drawings. To avoid possible misunderstand-
ings, calculations will not be approved separately from drawings.
The Contractor shall generally submit a complete set of drawings for each substation for approval after
initially getting the electrical layout of each substation approved. Where possible, drawings shall be
standardized and general drawings (00) issued covering several sites.

Volume 2 Page 248
For each substation the Contractor shall provide a co-ordination plan at scale 1:200 showing bus bar
sizes, structure types, foundation types, cable trenches, roads, ducts, buildings, boundary walls, earth-
ing, drainage and all services in this Contract.
12.2 References
12.2.1 General
The design and construction shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant Codes and Standards.
Any proposed substitution for the listed Standards by an equivalent Standard will be subject to ap-
proval by the Engineer. Relevant Standards include, but are not limited to, those listed in subsection
2.2 below.
12.2.2 Design and Construction Standards
BS12 Portland Cement

BS EN 124 Gully and Manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas
BS 812 Testing aggregates
BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes
BS 1722 Part 10: Anti-intruder fences
BS 1881 Testing concrete
BS 2853 Design and testing of overhead runway beams
BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete
BS 3921 Clay bricks
BS 4449 Steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 5262 External renderings
BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways
BS 5572 Sanitary pipework
BS 5628 Code of practice for use of masonry
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations
BS 6031 Code of practice for earthworks
BS 6367 Code of practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas
BS 6399 Part 1: Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
BS 6399 Part 2: Code of practice for wind loads
BS 6465 Sanitary installations
BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning
BS 6700 Design, installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for domes-
tic use
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS 8005 Sewerage
BS 8100 Lattice towers and masts
BS 8102 Code of practice for protection of structures against water from the ground
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
BS 8206 Lighting for buildings
BS 8215 Code of practice for design and installation of damp-proof courses in masonry
BS 8290 Suspended ceilings
BS 8301 Code of practice for building drainage

Volume 2 Page 249
12.3 Design
12.3.1 Architectural and Structural Requirements of Buildings
All new buildings shall be designed to be architecturally pleasing in appearance and to withstand the
tropical climate with minimal maintenance.
Architectural elevations of all elevations of buildings shall be agreed before other detail plans are pre-
pared.
Air conditioning units shall be provided in rooms listed in Section 13. Air conditioned rooms shall have
2
a false ceiling such that the overall thermal transmittance of the roof shall be below 0.45 Watts/m C.
The false ceiling shall be made from non-combustible materials, and shall be easily removable to pro-
vide easy access to small power cables.
All buildings shall be reinforced by a reinforced concrete frame which shall be capable of resisting a
horizontal earthquake force of 0.2G.
Two storey buildings shall be designed. First storey is cable basement. Second storey shall be de-
2
signed to have at least 3.5 metres high with an imposed load of 2.5 kN/m floor loading. An external
concrete open staircase shall be provided. The roof shall be a flat in situ concrete slab designed for
2
2.5 kN/m live load and galvanised steel shall be provided up to the roof.
The roof shall be waterproofed with lime terracing 2:2:7 lime, shurki (powdered brick) and brick chips
0.75" down, which shall be beaten in accordance with local practice. The entire roof area shall be laid
in one continuous operation. The minimum compacted thickness of terracing shall be 25mm at the low
points of the roof with a 1: 150 slope to those points formed by a layer of terracing of increasing thick-
ness. Once laid, the terracing shall be covered with a layer of bitumen emulsion and the edge of the
terracing shall be protected against erosion into the downpipes. Downpipes shall be 100mm diameter
cast iron pipe placed outside the wall but shall be enclosed in a facing brick buttress. There shall be at
least one downpipe per 100m of roof. The Contractor shall guarantee the roof against leaks for a pe-
riod of 5 years from the Taking Over Certificate date. The roof shall project at least 450mm beyond the
face of all walls to form a sunshade and rain shelter to the walls below. The upper surface of this pro-
jection shall be sloped and a drip provided.
The main entrance to all buildings shall be shaded, either by a projection of the roof over the entrance
veranda or by a separate roof at a lower level. This area of roof shall also be lime terraced and
drained by rainwater pipes.
The roof parapet wall shall be about 0.8 metre high with an in situ concrete coping with DPC below it.
Where facing bricks are used below the roof level, they shall also be used above roof level. An archi-
tectural feature shall be provided by panels of open decorative blockwork (Mirpur ceramics or similar
approved) to ensure good air circulation over the roof. Air bricks shall be provided at 750 mm centres
in solid portions of parapet wall.
The head of each downpipe shall be fitted with an enlarged hopper and purpose made cast iron grill
set into a recess in the roof projection.

Volume 2 Page 250
Window openings shall be fitted with protruding concrete sunshades above and at the sides of the
openings.
All external walls shall be 230mm first class brickwork plus a 50mm thick layer of Mirpur Ceramics fac-
ing bricks or similar approved, or rendered with cement render and painted as required by the archi-
tectural plan. The internal walls shall also be generally of 105mm thick first class brickwork. Internal
walls shall all be rendered and receive one sealer coat plus two finishing coats of emulsion paint. All
brickwork shall be tied into the concrete frame by galvanised ties. Externally, rendered walls shall re-
ceive primer plus two finishing coats of PEP acrylic external quality paint or similar approved. At least
two air bricks shall be provided to each room in which staff work/rest.
Particular attention must be given in the design of buildings and layouts to fire prevention and safety of
personnel at all times. Buildings housing switchgear and control equipment shall be designed as far as
practicable to exclude pollution under all likely weather conditions. Fire-proof or flame-retarding mate-
rials are to be used for floor, wall and ceiling finishes. Where areas are designed as having a fire re-
sistance rating then materials shall be shown to have passed approved standard tests for that class of
fire resistance.
The height of control rooms shall provide about 1 metre clearance over the top of the cabinets to the
underside of the false ceiling. In the switchgear rooms, about 1 metre clearance shall be provided over
the switchgear to the underside of the roof slab but the Contractor shall provide a greater clearance if
it is required to remove equipment. The clearance maybe reduced below downstand beams provided
no equipment is required to be removed from the top of the switchgear. All rooms in any building shall
be one height.
Rooms shall have walls and roof slabs adequately insulated. Maximum thermal transmittance values for
all rooms shall be 0.7 watts/m/C for walls and 0.57 for roofs. Air conditioning units shall be provided
in rooms listed in Section 13. Air-conditioned rooms shall have a false ceiling such that the overall
2
thermal transmittance of the roof shall be below 0.45 Watts/m /C. The false ceiling shall be made
from non-combustible materials, and shall be easily removable to provide easy access to small power
cables. Suspended ceilings, with acoustic tiling and incorporating lighting and air-conditioning fixtures
shall be used in corridors, offices, control room and SCADA rooms of the buildings and as per sched-
ule of finishes
All structures shall be designed to carry the loads imposed by the structure itself, together with live
loads in accordance with an approved standard or code of practice. The roof shall be designed for
2.5 kN/m live load.
All doors opening outwards from the buildings shall be provided with panic latches or bolts which over-
ride any locking device, for escape in the event of fire. All doors shall be provided with overhead door
closures of adequate capacity. Door labels incorporating electrical hazard warning in Bangla and Eng-
lish shall be fixed to each entry door. Vision panels shall be provided to frequently used doors.
Window openings shall be fitted with protruding concrete sunshades above and at the sides of the
openings.
Float operated submersible pump of capacity 25 cum/hour at a head of 8 meters to be provided for
sump of basements. The pumps shall be fixed in all respect ready for operation and discharge into
storm water drainage system.
The domestic water supply system shall include all plumbing, underground pipework, high and low
level storage tanks, valves, fittings and pumps (including the provision of a standby pump) for the pro-

Volume 2 Page 251
vision of a pressurized water supply system for the static water tank and all buildings within the com-
pounds.
On completion of the installation and prior to putting to use, the system shall be sterilized in accord-
ance with an approved Code of Practice.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply serving the
substation buildings. Every cistern, sink, basin, etc., shall be provided with as stop-cock in the supply
pipe adjacent to the fitting. Each basin, sink and shower unit is to be provided with both hot and cold
water. Provision shall be made for connection to the drinking water supply.
Toilets shall be provided with 1 no. western type WC, 1 no. Asiatic, type WC, 1 no. wash-hand basin,
and 1 no. wall mounted mirror.All necessary fittings and accessories shall be provided.
Battery rooms shall be supplied with sink and drainer.
Control buildings housing switchgear and control equipment shall include a cable basement to facili-
tate connection to the equipment. Basements shall be constructed so as to protect the building sub-
structure from water in accordance with BS 8102.
12.3.2 Ground Conditions, Foundations and Site Investigation
(a) Fill Sites
Fill will be placed by the Contractor. On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 metres the Contract
assumes piled foundations shall be installed below buildings. If piled foundations are found to be un-
necessary in the Final Site Investigation Report, a reduction in Contract value shall be agreed on the
basis of schedule rates.
Piles shall be concrete (cast in situ or precast) complying with BS 8004.
On every fill site the Contractor shall prove that his switchyard foundation will not suffer settlement
greater than 20 mm by constructing a foundation and load testing this to twice the design bearing
pressure for a minimum of 20 days.
Outdoor equipment shall be provided with spread footings or pile foundation depending on the sub-soil
investigation report. The bearing capacity of the proposed soil level for outdoor equipment shall be
checked by the plate bearing test. The Contractor shall impose the site layout on the survey to check
for uneven depth of fill below any foundation and where uneven depth of fill exists his foundation pro-
posals shall restrict final differential settlement to a 1 in 400 slope.
If a fill site has not been exposed to one wet season before foundation work starts, the Contractor
shall flood the site to a depth of 50mm for 10 daysat the Contractors own cost (not required on hy-
draulic fill sites). The reason for this is that silty sands generally compact to a denser condition on first
time flooding.
On all fill sites the Contractor shall pipe rainwater from down pipes down to paddy level and shall pre-
vent water ponding in open foundations and backfill all foundations as soon as possible.

Volume 2 Page 252
The Contractor shall monitor settlement of the fill (by placing concrete posts 50 x 50 x 750mm deep on
a 10 metre grid and taking readings) at 30 day intervals from the time he is given access to each fill
site.
When a fill site is handed over to the Contractor, the Contractor shall become responsible for main-
taining the entirety of the fill in good condition, including all better slopes.
(b) Unfilled Sites
Original delta levels are generally below road level. Therefore most sites are historically fill sites but fill
settlement can sensibly be considered complete, where fill is over 3 years old.
(c) Site Investigation
Detailed methodology for subsoil investigation shall be submitted before implementing the subsoil in-
vestigation. All laboratory tests shall be done at the test facility approved by the Employer.
The Contractor may appoint a Subcontractor to carry out the site investigation but all work and all lab
work shall be witnessed by one of his own staff who shall countersign all recorded data.
Boreholes shall be taken on a 25 metre grid with at least three additional boreholes inside each build-
ing. Additional boreholes may also be required where uneven fill depth is encountered.
The number and location of boreholes shall be approved with the site survey drawing showing existing
ground levels specified in the section 12.1.4. The boreholes shall be located to an accuracy of + 0.5m
and shall be located to site layout considering existing obstacles at the field.
Boreholes shall be a minimum of 30 metres depth or twice building footing width, whichever is greater.
All boreholes shall be backfilled with compacted sand.
Borehole log together with a summary of all required laboratory tests is required to be prepared. Soil
test locations are required to be indicated on the geographical map.
In each borehole the following tests shall be carried out:
Standard penetration tests at 1.5 metre intervals.

Undisturbed samples shall be taken at around 2.0 metres depth and 3.0 metres depth and tested
by unconfined compression tests.
One-dimensional consolidation tests shall also be carried out on undisturbed samples taken at 2, 3
and 4 metres depth. The samples shall be saturated and the range of applied pressure shall fully
reflect the in situ conditions. Graphs showing void ratio (e) and applied pressure shall be submitted
along with the coefficient of compressibility for the range of loading anticipated.Mv shall be given in
m/MN and shall be recorded at each stress increment. The coefficient of consolidation, cv, shall be
given in m/year.
Particle size analysis shall be carried out for each stratum and specific gravity, moisture content,
liquid limit and plastic limit determined.
Ground water level shall be determined by dipping the boreholes. Where collapse of the boreholes
occurs, casing shall be used and left in until the water level remains constant for two days.

Volume 2 Page 253
In cohesive soils a vane tests to BS 1377: Part 9 shall be carried out at three different depths. The
Contractor shall check the sensitivity of soil and ground water at each site to concrete and take all
measures necessary to ensure the long term durability of concrete.
(d) Site Investigation Report
The site investigation and analysis of the data in a final report giving full details of foundation pro-
posals shall be completed at each site by the programmed date. During site investigation, Geograph-
ical map shall be prepared indicating the locations of soil test.
The report shall be submitted by the key date at each site given in the programme. The Contractor
shall submit 2 copies of the report to the Engineer. The report shall propose full details of foundations
and loading thereon and shall provide estimates of likely settlements and differential settlements. The
report shall be the work of the Contractor's own foundation engineers.
If the Contractor uses a local site investigation Contractor, he shall appoint one of his own staff to
oversee the entire operation and each piece of data shall be countersigned by this person.
Where estimated settlement exceeds 25mm, the Contractor shall construct one foundation at an early
stage an test load this foundation to confirm settlement predictions.
(e) Foundations
Regardless of the result of soil investigation report, the foundations of control building, transformer
foundations, gantry structures for terminating lines and for transformers shall be provided with piles.
The minimum depth of all foundations shall be:
a) Transformer bases and bund 1.5 m

b) All other switchyard foundations 1.1 m
c) Control building foundations, 1.5 m
including all wall foundations
and internal wall foundations
d) Boundary wall foundations 1.1 m
All formations shall be hand rammed or mechanically compacted before placing 70mm minimum
thickness of Class B concrete blinding, within 24 hours of bottoming excavation, which blinding shall
project 75 mm minimum distance beyond all footings. Each footing shall be inspected by the Engineer.
Where soil condition is poor (on fill sites or already filled sites) or where the Contractor leaves founda-
tions exposed and soil conditions deteriorate, one of the following measures shall be carried out as
agreed with the Engineer:
i) Blinding depth and projection shall be increased

ii) If any soft soil layer found below any shallow foundation the soft soil shall be removed and re-
placed with compacted viti sand and top 200mm of the fill viti sand khoa compaction
(sand:khoa=2:3) shall be placed. All fill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm
deep to a minimum of 90% optimum density as defined by the Proctor Test. The cost of this
work shall be borne by the Contractor and deem to be included in civil works price.

Volume 2 Page 254
The Contractor shall propose the allowable bearing pressure for all foundations based on soil strength
parameters only and shall not be increased while wind loads exceeds 25% of dead load as well as
2
shall not exceed 125kN/m . Between column footings all walls, including all internal walls, shall be
provided with a reinforced concrete strip footing of minimum dimension 800mm wide by 250mm deep
placed at the same level as column footings and linked structurally to the footings. In addition column
footings shall be tied at foundation level and also floor level by beams to every adjacent column in
both orthogonal directions.
These beams shall be designed to resist 1 in 200 differential settlements without distress and shall be
capable of resisting the earthquake load of 0.1G.
The deepest parts of any foundations shall be completed first. All foundations shall be completed and
backfilled, including all cable tunnel and cable trench work inside buildings, before walls are raised
above floor levels. All other foundations shall be backfilled within 7 days of completing concreting.
All exposed concrete and the outer surfaces of cable trenches and cable tunnels shall receive two
coats of bitumen mastic paint before backfilling to reduce ingress of water. The Concrete surface shall
be ground smooth and all air holes etc. filled (rubbed down with a cement slurry) before painting.
The Contractor shall monitor settlement of all foundations each month and report this settlement to the
Engineer until settlement has reduced to less than 1.5mm in 3 months.
The tops of all foundations shall terminate 200mm. above site average finished surface level for new
Substation & for existing substation the level should be as per existing. All exposed edges shall have
20 mm x 20 mm. chamfers.
Excavation shall only be carried out when the ground water table is at least 1000mm below foundation
level. The excavation shall be kept dry during the construction period by providing sumps and pumps
as required. During the rain season, shelters shall be erected over all open excavations.
Any over excavation shall be filled with Class B concrete.
All backfill shall be compacted to 95% maximum dry density as defined by BS 1377 test method,
part 4, 2.5 kg rammer.
Before starting foundation work the Contractor shall clear all sites of trees, tree roots, shrubs, debris,
surplus soil, and any buildings.
Foundations shall be designed to resist uplift, assuming the water table is at ground level and the
weight of soil resting on a foundation is that included within a 15 frustum.
On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 metres, the Contractor shall provide piled foundations in
accordance with BS 8004 for control buildings. The design of foundations for transformer, gantry,
equipment support structure, etc. shall be as per requirement of subsoil investigation report. One
working pile chosen by the Engineer shall be load tested at each site to 150% of design load in ac-
cordance with BS 8004.

Volume 2 Page 255
12.3.3 Drainage
The entire surface within boundary walls shall be of uniform sloping site, sloping at 1 in 150 minimum
slopes to open channels around the entire perimeter. These channels shall be designed for a rainfall
intensity of 60mm per hour. Outside the boundary wall the Contractor shall be responsible for drainage
up to 20 metres from the wall and will at some sites need to construct outlets with suitable erosion pro-
tection down to paddy level.
The concrete wall of cable trenches shall project at least 70mm. above brick paving level to prevent
run off entering the cable trench. The floors of all cable trenches/tunnels shall be sloped to soakway
as described in 12.3.16.
The cable trenches will thus form barriers to surface water drainage. If the cut-off area exceeds 30 m
it shall be drained by a 200mm minimum diameter concrete pipe to the boundary drain. The Contrac-
tor's drainage design shall avoid all ponded water to avoid forming a mosquito breeding ground.
All drainage pipework within buildings shall be ductile iron, generally of 100mm diameter. Floor drains
shall be placed in each battery room and toilet.
External pipework shall be 150mm. minimum diameter concrete pipes at a minimum depth of invert of
700mm. Where pipes, including existing pipes alongside site, are less than 400mm above adjacent
foundations they shall be surrounded in concrete. Where required, drainage pipes shall be kept below
cables, allowing 1.1 m cover to top of pipes.
Manholes shall be of brick construction with 600mm. x 600mm clear openings and airtight ductile iron
covers to BS EN 124. Manholes shall be located at each change of direction. Minimum fall on all pipe-
lines shall be 1 in 80. Manholes shall not be located in roads.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with local authority WASA where a connection
to a public sewer is proposed. Where high water levels in public sewers may cause effluent to back up
into a site, non-return valves shall be fitted. The Contractor shall provide all protection required to ex-
isting sewers and shall deepen foundations, including boundary wall foundations, where required to
ensure all foundations are below adjacent sewers. The Contractor shall draw longitudinal sections of
all pipelines.
Each control building shall be provided with a septic tank designed for 10 users and a soak away of
open brick construction 11m deep by 2.2m diameter filled with broken bricks. The septic tank shall be
located at least 15 metres from buildings. Other buildings shall have septic tanks designed for the re-
quired number of users. All foul drains shall be vented by a vent pipe to above roof level. The inner
surface of all manholes and septic tanks shall be painted with 2 coats of bitumen mastic paint to pro-
tect it against sulphate attack. The septic tank shall have access holes directly over the inlet pipes and
outlet pipes. Where public sewers exist alongside a site, the Contractor shall connect directly to the
foul sewer, provided effluent from the sewer is treated.
The Contractor shall construct the drainage first to ensure that at no stage is rainwater ponded on any
part of the site. All rainwater shall be able to run off the site or shall be immediately pumped off site by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all necessary drains before casting any roof and large
concrete area which will create large run off. The condensate drains for the air conditioning shall also
be connected to the drainage. Two vents of minimum height 2.2m shall be provided on each septic
tank.

Volume 2 Page 256
If a town's water supply is unreliable, the roof rain water shall be collected in an underground tank of
standard Employer's design. Scope of this work shall be agreed at Bid stage.
12.3.4 Surfacing
For the whole of the switchyard outdoor equipment area the ground shall be surfaced with gravel or
other readily available local stone as approved by the Engineer. The switchyard surfacing shall be
clean, thoroughly washed when necessary, and free from clay, soil or contaminating material and shall
be graded from 20 - 45mm, laid and lightly compacted to a finished thickness of 175mm. Below the
gravel layer there shall be a 75mm brick layer with cement mortar (1:6), laid over a 75mm level of fine
sand spread over the finished fill site.
The substation plot, outside of the designated switchgear equipment areas, shall be turfed. Turf shall
be of good quality, free from weeds and shall be a minimum of 40mm thick. Samples of the turf which
is proposed to use shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The turfs shall be laid to even
surfaces on a bed of vegetable soil, which shall be raked and consolidated to provide a suitable bed.
On sloping surfaces the Contractor shall provide and fix wooden pegs to retain turfs.
All areas to be surfaced shall first be treated with a total weed killer in accordance with the Manufac-
turer's instructions. Weed killer shall only be applied in dry weather when there is no risk of it being
washed out to adjacent agricultural areas.
12.3.5 Roads
All roads within the site boundary shall be provided by the Contractor, plus access road outside the
site boundary to connect to any adjacent public road or waterway. The extent of roads required is
shown approximately on Bid drawings but the scope of the work may change.
The road surface shall be finished by concrete paving or equivalent. All roads shall be of reinforced
slabs of approximately 25 cm thickness fitted with construction joints. Paving schedule and methodol-
ogy shall be approved by the Employer.
Road layout shall generally permit vehicles to turn easily to avoid having to reverse out. Road layout
shall be designed by the Contractor. The Contractor's Liability for roads outside the site shall be as
stated in the Project Requirements of Volume 1.
The width of access road from outside the site boundary to connect to any adjacent public road shall
be 6 meters. All roads within the site boundary shall be generally 6 metres wide between the outer
edges of kerbs for main road and 3 meters wide for sub road.

Volume 2 Page 257
The road edge shall be formed by a flush Class B concrete kerb 300mm wide by 250mm deep, placed
over one layer of bricks laid flat. The road shall be a Class A concrete slab 150mm deep with 1:50
cross fall and stiff broom concrete finish reinforced with 6mm bars at 125mm centres longitudinally and
6mm bars at 400mm centres transversely placed 60mm below the upper surface. Expansion and con-
traction joins shall be detailed on site plans. Expansion joints shall have oil resisting grade polysul-
phide sealant. Below the slab shall be a layer of polythene 0.5mm thick laid over one layer of 1st class
bricks laid on edge in herringbone fashion in and on cement mortar (mortar designation iv) laid over
one layer of 1st class bricks laid flat in and on a layer of sand laid on in situ soil which shall be com-
pacted as agreed with the Engineer. If the soil is clay a 75mm drainage layer of broken bricks shall
additionally be placed over the soil.
The radius of the road edge at comers shall not be less than 3 metres and 1.2 metres either side of
the road shall be kept clear of obstacles. Bollards or raised kerbs shall be provided where required to
protect items alongside a road from vehicles. Ducts shall be provided below roads for all services in
this Contract and for all future services.
Where mortar designations are referred to see BS 5628 Mortar designation iv is 1 cement: 2 Lime: 8
to 9 sand.
At each new substation site a two bay hard standing car port, complete with sun shades, is to be pro-
vided adjacent to the control building.
12.3.6 Water Supply
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a water supply both for construction and for opera-
tion of the completed sites. If a town's water supply is not available, the Contractor shall install a tube
well of 40mm minimum diameter and 100m minimum depth but in that case guideline specified by
WHO for drinking water is required to be satisfied. The Contractor shall supply and commission power
supplies and all pumps required by tube wells.
If a town's water supply is available, the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary ar-
rangements with WASA to connect a supply. If the pressure in the supply is inadequate to supply the
roof tank continuously, the Contractor shall install an 1800 litre low level tank and pumps. This tank
shall be below ground with a 200mm minimum air void around the tank to protect it from contamina-
tion. The pump control panel shall be located in the building. Water levels shall be controlled by float
switches but the panel shall provide also for manual operation.
The supply shall be connected to an 1800 litre roof tank of 16 gauge galvanised steel plate with a lid
secured by bolts. The tank shall be raised 400mm clear of the line terracing on four brick piers of min-
imum 350mm square. All supplies in buildings shall be fed from the roof tank. The supply to the tank
shall have a valve at waist height. The tank shall have an overflow returning to the location of this
valve. No pipes shall pass through the roof directly over any room. Pipework shall be routed up the
outside of the building and return pipes shall return down the outside of the building before entering
through the wall. Pipework shall be galvanised steel secured by clamps at 1-5 metre intervals and
painted with alkyd paint to match walls.

Volume 2 Page 258
12.3.7 Plumbing and Sanitary Fittings
The Contractor shall prepare a drawing of all plumbing and building drainage for each building. Sani-
tary fittings and plumbing materials shall generally be of approved local manufacture.
Every tap and cistern shall have stop cocks in the supply pipe. One external tap shall be provided on
each building. Battery rooms shall be provided with a stainless steel sink of approximate dimensions
900 x 600 x 200mm with a draining board to one side. The battery room floor drain shall be connected
to the foul drainage. All floor drains shall have P traps.
Mirrors shall be installed over toilet wash basins. Care shall be taken in orientation of toilets to avoid
offending religious sensitivities. Toilets shall generally be orientated North South where possible. Each
shower shall have a wall on two sides and a porcelain shower tray sunk into the floor. No hot water is
required in any control building. Soap dishes shall be provided beside each shower.
Only foul water from WC pans shall be connected to septic tanks. All other water shall flow to surface
water drains.
12.3.8 Control Building Floors
All topsoil containing roots shall be removed and the in situ soil compacted before placing backfill. All
backfill, including the backfill to column footings, below the floor shall be sand but around the perime-
ter walls a band of broken brick 600 mm wide shall be placed with drain holes placed in the walls at
2.5 metre centres. The floor and all cable trenches shall be made of Class A concrete. The ground
floor slab shall have a minimum thickness of 125 mm reinforced concrete Class A plus 25 mm thick
terrazzo. Below the slab shall be placed a layer of polythene sheet of 0.5 mm thick and a layer of
compacted sand plus broken bricks (sand:broken bricks=2:3) at least 75 mm thick, hand rammed to a
smooth upper surface.
The floor/equipment layout shall minimise the number of cable trenches over which station staff have
to walk. Where power cables traverse a building to reach a switchgear room on the far side they shall
generally be contained within a dedicated cable basement or cable tunnel.
All sand backfill shall be compacted to 92% optimum density and shall be tested. The fill within a build-
ing, above ground level, shall not be placed until all backfill outside the building is completed. All floor
slabs shall have a damp proof membrane of 0.5mm thickness.
Each control building shall have a ramp at a slope of approximately 1 in 7.5, of 1.5m minimum width
with a Concrete Class A slab of min depth 125mm with a stiff brush concrete surface finish, or other
agreed non slip surface.
The first floor of control building shall have homogeneous floor tiles. Verandas and internal steps shall
also have homogeneous floor tiles. External steps shall have approved quality marble tiles. Verandas
and external steps shall also have homogeneous floor tiles where public access is given to buildings.
Elsewhere, concrete surfaces shall be used for all external floors/steps. Verandas shall have a mini-
mum 1: 50 slope to shed rainwater away from buildings. Maximum length or breadth of any panel shall
be less than 1.75 metres. 200mm high skirting shall be installed beside each wall. Concrete floors and
steps shall also be treated with 3 coats of Lithurin or other approved concrete dust proofer.

Volume 2 Page 259
If floor tiles are not adequately durable to withstand switchgear movement when rolled out to the
maintenance position, then galvanized steel chequered plates shall be inserted in the floor to resist the
abrasion from switchgear wheels.
12.3.9 Cable Basement
Below ground level basements to buildings shall be of waterproof construction; designed and con-
structed in reinforced concrete to BS 8007 and BS 8102 [Type C (Drained protection) ]. The external
walls and base slab shall be a minimum 350mm thick. The design shall assume that the ground water
table is at ground water level.
The walls and floor of the basement shall have a drained cavity with ventilation provided. The cavity
shall drain to a sump, equipped with one hand operated and one electric pump, to facilitate the re-
moval of water. The electric pump shall be of the submersible type with automatic control by float
switches. The hand driven pump shall be rotary action and valve less giving smooth non-pulsating
flow.
The basement shall be provided with air extraction equipment, 100% standby equipment to give unin-
terrupted ventilation, sufficient to change the air 6 times per hour. Air supply and exhaust shall be from
within the building at ground floor level in a protected location and shall not connect directly to the out-
side. The stairs leading to the basement shall be enclosed with, from ground level and at basement
floor level, entry through security door sets. Sufficient air ducting shall be provided to ensure adequate
ventilation to the basement even if the extract fans cease to operate.
The basement shall be equipped with lighting and small power.
Where cables enter the building all ducts and trenches shall be sealed; the ends of all ducts entering
trenches shall be bell-mouthed. The floor shall be screened, the walls finished as per the schedule of
finishes.
12.3.10 Battery Room Floors
Battery rooms shall have a concrete floor sloping to a cast iron floor drain. The concrete surface shall
be treated with Nitocote epoxy resin coating (Nitoflor primer plus two coats of Nitocote in accordance
with Manufacturer's instructions), or similar approved material, to ensure resistance to battery electro-
lyte. There shall be no cable trenches in battery rooms. Cable entrances through the floor shall be pro-
tected by a raised plinth 50mm high around the opening with the annulus around the cable sealed af-
ter installation. The door of the battery room will open outside the room.
12.3.11 Control Room Floors
Control rooms where specified in the bid drawings shall have a raised floor (Multi access floor). The
Contractor shall submit the drawings showing required details for construction of raised floor for ap-
proval by the Employer's representatives.
The raised floor shall be made of poly-urethane material having functions of fire resistance, waterproof
and soundproof. Each panel of raised floor shall be installed on the structure frame. The floor material

Volume 2 Page 260
shall have function to easily accommodate cables, communication wiring, etc. on its lower part. The
floor material shall include the shock-absorbing material and finishing stuff.
Panel elements shall be produced without fading or peeling on the finishing stuffs and trim by the in-
jection moulding of finishing stuff with panel elements at the same time. By the injection moulding, the
panel's thickness and the other standard (width, length, thickness, opposite angle, right angle, flatness
angle, etc.) should be precise.
Pedestal elements shall have the function of support for the panel element of raised floor material.
Shock-absorbing material shall be installed on the top of pedestal elements and prevent any vibration
or impact of the panel elements.
The materials for raised floor shall be as shown below or similar. The details should be approved by
the Employer.
Panel stuff: polyurethane

Panel dimension: 600 x 600 0.5mm (including finishing stuff, trim)
Panel thickness: 40 0.5mm (including finishing stuff)
Panel inside core: particle board 35mm
Panel frame: width 3mm poly-urethane
Finishing stuff: anti-static laminate tile
Under structure: zinc electric galvanizing
Central concentrated load transformation: less than 2.5 mm with 4,900 N
The materials should be kept on the well-ventilated places against rain and direct ray of light. When
transporting and handling the stuffs, the handler should be alert not to be damaged. The damaged
materials have to be taken out. The finishes of stuff have to be stuck in the panel element.
The floor surface must be dry before construction; also the impurities like dirt and other obstruction
should be removed. The under-structures (Pedestal set) are installed at intervals of 600mm from the
starting point of construction like radial shape. At this time, the under-structure is fixed strongly on the
floor surface by using an adhesive. When each supporting structure is connected to the frame (string-
er), the levelling work shall be done together. Horizontal angle shall be checked again after the con-
struction is finished.
Panel lifter and other accessories necessary for maintenance shall be provided by the Contractor.
12.3.12 Site Clearance, Obstructions and Adjacent Structures
The Contractor shall be responsible for clearance of:
(1) Trees, shrubs and any vegetation including the extraction of all roots and compaction of backfill
where roots have been extracted.
(2) The removal of all buildings, sheds or any other structures above or below ground including the
removal of any septic tanks, drains or other underground services.
(3) The removal of any existing surfacing, roads, foundations or any other obstruction.

Volume 2 Page 261
All material cleared away by the Contractor shall be the property of the Employer and shall be re-
moved by the Contractor to a site in the Project area upon instructions of the Employer. The Employer
may remove any buildings or structures himself from sites before the commencement of site works.
Where an existing service, existing equipment or adjacent building is to be retained, the Contractor
shall take all necessary measures to protect the item concerned from damage and shall be responsi-
ble for ensuring that no movement of foundations occurs during or after completion of construction.
Any existing electrical equipment/cables which have to be modified or repositioned shall be included in
the works at no extra cost. Any buried gas or water main services which require to be diverted shall be
deviated by the Employer at his cost. However, where it is possible to retain these existing services
and build new structures around them, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to build in the
service at no extra cost.
12.3.13 Guard Houses, Boundary Walls, Fences and Entrance Gates
The guard house serves for control of entrance. The gatekeeper shall be able to watch the area before
and behind the guard house. The guard house shall be provided with water supply and toilet. Small
power and lighting facilitates are to be provided in the Guard Houses.
Where sites are within existing Employer's boundary walls, the Contractor shall erect a permanent
fence 2.9m high in accordance with BS 1722 part 10 or similar approved.
12.3.14 Windows
Even natural light shall be provided by windows to illuminate all areas of buildings. Window area shall
be about 6% of floor area to limit solar heat gain. Tops of windows shall generally be below 2.5 metres
from floor level but toilet windows may be higher. The bottom of windows shall be generally at least
1.25 metres above floor level to provide good protection to staff. Each window shall be provided with a
sunshade projecting about 500mm from the wall above and at the upper sides of the window. Few
windows shall be placed on south facing walls. Windows shall be spaced to give a wide view of the
switchyard.
Windows shall have single glazing with 6mm thick glass, reinforced with wire mesh where windows
are placed in or over doors.
Window frames shall be anodised aluminium.
Glass panels shall be placed over doors to provide natural light to internal corridors and rooms where
required.
External sills shall have a sloping tile or similar detail with drip.
The Contractor shall prepare a window schedule for each building.The schedule shall clearly indicate
both fixed and opening windows.
The control and switchgear rooms in particular shall have opening windows to allow adequate ventila-
tion.

Volume 2 Page 262
Guard Houses are to include for opening windows with burglar bars and shutters. Small power and
lighting facilitates are to be provided in the Guard Houses.
12.3.15 Doors
Internal doors and door frames shall be anodised aluminium. Main Entrance/Exit doors and door
frames shall be steel.
The minimum size of the structural openings for doors shall be 1550mm. wide for double doors and
930 mm wide for single doors. Door height shall generally be 2100mm but switchgear and control
rooms shall have a removable transom and removable panel over the door or a taller door to provide a
total height of about 2500mm. All door sizes and widths shall be adequate to get in and get out all
equipment and future equipment.
All external doors shall have weather boards, hydraulic closers and cabin hooks to hold the door open.
External doors shall open inwards, except for switchgear room doors which must open outwards and
be fitted with panic release latches.
Each door leaf shall have three 150 mm heavy iron hinges equally spaced. Door furniture shall be of
approved local manufacture and shall generally be of brass. All corridor doors, external doors and rest
room (toilet) doors shall be fitted with hydraulic closers. Door stops shall be fitted where required. Door
frames shall generally be set 200 mm off a wall junction to enable the door to open fully through 90.
All external doors shall be shaded by either the roof canopy or a separate precast concrete canopy
over the top and the upper sides of a door.
The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of all doors and all door furniture for each building.
12.3.16 Brickwork
Brickwork shall be designed to BS 5628. External panels of brickwork shall be checked for wind pres-
sure calculated in accordance with BS 6399 for a wind speed of 160 kph 3 second gust.
Bricks shall be first class bricks from approved Manufacturers. 10 bricks shall be tested in accordance
2
with BS 3921 to determine water absorption and crushing strength, which shall exceed 20N/mm . Mor-
tar shall generally be of Mortar designation (iii), 1: 1: 5 to 6. cement, lime, sand.
All brick panels shall be tied to the concrete frame with galvanised ties of approved design. Ties shall
be painted with bituminous paint.
Facing bricks shall be from Mirpur ceramics or similar approved size shape and color. Facing bricks
shall be tied back to the main wall. External walls shall be minimum 230mm thick brickwork, rendered
internally and clad externally with facing bricks or rendered as required by the architectural plan.
Bricks shall be compacted down onto a full bed of mortar. Vertical joints shall be completely filled with
mortar. Joints shall be raked out about 10mm deep where walls are to be rendered.

Volume 2 Page 263
Brick walls shall be constructed so that tops of all meeting walls are about the same level with maxi-
mum variation of 0.75m. Only 18 courses per day shall be laid. New work shall be protected from sun-
light and drying winds for 4 days.
Lime and cement for all brickwork shall be stored in a dry building with a raised dry floor.
Reinforcement by mild steel rods shall be provided where required by the design. Additionally open-
ings over 500mm. wide shall be reinforced for 2 courses above and below the opening, two 6mm. bars
per course extending 900mm beyond the opening both sides where possible.
All exposed brickwork shall be rendered and painted where not faced with facing bricks.
12.3.17 Expansion Joints, Joint Fillers and Sealants
Expansion joints shall be placed in floors beside all ground floor walls. All filler board shall be bitumen
bound fibre board. Any expansion joints on roofs shall be raised and protected by a metal flashing.
All expansion joints shall be sealed by polysulphide sealants, applied in accordance with the Manufac-
turer's instructions. Sealants shall be oil resisting grade where required. Sealant colours shall match or
blend with adjacent wall colours.
12.3.18 Cable Trenches in Switchyards
Cable trench sizes shall be standardised. Layout drawings shall be submitted for each substation
showing layout and size of trenches. No trench shall cross a road; power cables shall be placed in
ducts of minimum 150mm diameter with bell-mouthed ends. Ducts shall extend 1500mm minimum be-
yond the edge of roads. Spare ducts shall be installed for likely future development.
Floors and walls of trenches shall be constructed of Class A reinforced concrete of minimum 150mm
thickness, with the external surface painted with two coats of bitumen mastic paint. Walls and covers
shall protrude at least 70mm above site finish level and the top of the wall shall be flat with no rebate.
Floors shall be sloped at 1: 150 minimum slopes to brick soak ways placed below the trench at low
3 2
points; the volume of each soak away shall be 2.5m per 150m of trench.
Covers shall be of reinforced concrete Class A. Each cover weighs less than 55 kg. The minimum
depth shall be 70mm, with down stand ribs along each side providing a minimum overall depth of
100mm. The ends of the cover shall overhang the wall by 15mm and in the centre of each end there
shall be a hand hole of minimum size 100mm by 20mm high. This hole shall allow air to ventilate the
trench so that heat built up in the trench shall be reduced. No gaps larger than 5mm shall be left be-
tween adjacent covers so that the cables are always shaded. Cover slabs shall sit squarely and uni-
formly on the trench walls without the need for bedding or shims. Because portable fire extinguishers
will be rolled over and along trenches, each cover shall be capable of resisting a 250kg point load at
mid span. The Contractor shall provide ramps up to the edge of covers in several locations, as agreed
on site, to enable the wheeled extinguisher to mount the covers. Longitudinal edges may be inclined at
10 to the vertical, thus creating a larger gap at the bottom of adjacent slabs, again to reduce heat
build-up. The upper surface of covers shall have a stiff broom non slip concrete finish. All sharp edges
shall be stoned smooth. Outer edges shall be chamfered.

Volume 2 Page 264
Longitudinal fire separation walls and transverse fire separation walls as required by the cable section,
may be of brick or reinforced concrete.
12.3.19 Cable Trenches in Buildings
The base and walls of the trench shall be of reinforced Class A concrete of minimum thickness 110mm
with the outside face painted with 2 coats of bitumen mastic paint. Cable trays may be supported by
Unistrut P3300 inserts, or similar approved or drilled anchor bolts.
The building layout shall minimise trench lengths. Where power cables pass through a building to
reach the far side, this shall generally be in a tunnel section. The Contractor shall be responsible for
providing all trenches and ducts in a building, including ducts for outgoing power cables up to the site
boundary and including any pulling pits required.
Trench covers shall be sheets of checkered plate or similar approved or wood fibres impregnated and
compacted in synthetic resin, or a computer flooring composite board.
The weight of each cover shall be restricted to about 30 kg. The upper surface shall be non-slip. De-
2
flection shall be limited to 1/250 of span under a load of 3kN/m . Only one thickness of board shall be
used to standardize the edge support detail. The recess to receive the cover shall be protected by
steel or brass on the vertical edge and bedding surface. Covers shall fit snugly around all cables.
Where cables enter the building, all ducts/trenches shall be sealed. Fire/oil barriers shall be required
to separate hazardous equipment. The ends of all ducts entering trenches shall be bell-mouthed.
Any beams used to support large span covers shall be removable. All metal work shall be painted as
specified in the paint section.
All covers shall bed down evenly. Full detailed fabrication drawings shall be provided for all covers.
12.3.20 Rainwater Pipes
Down pipes shall be 100mm minimum diameter placed on the outside of walls but enclosed in a brick
2
buttress of facing bricks. One downpipe shall be provided for each 100m of roof area. The head of the
downpipe shall be enlarged to 200mm diameter and a purpose made cast iron grill provided over the
head. This grill shall be sited in a recess in the roof slab projection.
The foot of the pipe shall have a 90 bend and water shall be discharged into either:
i) a small open channel conveying the water to the boundary channel

ii) a pipeline conveying the water off the site. Rainwater shall not be connected to the septic tank
or allowed to discharge directly onto switchyard paving.
12.3.21 Switchyard Foundations
The tops of all foundations shall be set at the same level, which shall be raised above the general
switchyard level for the purpose of preventing surface water coming into contact with the equipment
structures and holding-down bolts. The distance between the general surface level and the top of
foundations shall be at least 200mm. All exposed concrete surfaces shall be painted with an acrylic

Volume 2 Page 265
weatherproofed or bituminous paint, and flat areas shall be sloped to shed water. No base shall permit
ponding of water in any way, and free drainage shall also be possible from all areas inside any grout-
ing.
Bases shall generally be of Class A reinforced concrete.
Bases shall have all recesses for cables and earthing detailed on drawings. The drawings shall clearly
show the orientation of each base and the location of all recesses. Where new foundations are adja-
cent to existing foundations; the Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the extent of the existing
foundation and ensuring its stability.
For anchorage design of switchyard foundations shear force, vertical accelerations, overturning mo-
ments and torsion due to mass eccentricities of the equipment for the earthquake load of 0.2G are re-
quired to be considered. Mild steel ductile bolts and headed studs cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be
used. Thick plate washer is required to be welded to the equipment base plate. Normal washer shall
be used under a nut in all cases.
12.3.22 Transformer Bases
The transformer base, together with its surrounding bund shall form a raft to distribute the load from
the transformer over the entire area within the bund wall. The bund shall extend at least 700mm be-
yond any part of the transformer and its radiators. The level of the top of the bund and the skids shall
be 200mm above general switchyard level. Skids shall extend to the edge of the bund.
50mm below the top of the wall shall be placed a layer of stone 225mm deep set on a galvanised grill
painted with two coats of bitumen mastic paint. The volume of the bund below the stone shall equal
125% of the total volume of oil in the transformer and its radiators.
Rainwater will tend to collect in the bund. To evacuate rainwater a fixed submersible pump controlled
by sensors and switches (Aqua Sentry or equal) shall be provided at each bund with power supplies
and drainage manhole conveniently located. The bund water control system shall differentiate be-
tween water and oil to ensure that the pump will not be activated while oil is present in the bund.
The transformer base and the bund shall be founded a minimum 1.0 metres below average switchyard
finished level.
Below the skids the walls shall be at least 600mm wide. Piers shall be provided below the jacking
points. Each base shall be provided with two galvanised steel removable pulling posts on the other
side of the access road to the bund and also at the back of the transformer bund.
The entire concrete surface of the bund and the transformer base which is not buried shall receive two
coats of bitumen mastic paint. Skids shall receive 3 coats of bitumen mastic paint before being cast in.
A carriage way shall be provided with rail connected with all transformer bases.
Transformers shall be anchored to resist the earthquake load of 0.2G.

Volume 2 Page 266
12.3.23 Blast Walls
The Contractor shall construct blast walls to reduce the risk of fire spreading from each three phase
transformer unit to an adjacent transformer unit or control building. Blast walls shall also be construct-
ed to resist impact forces causing from a transformer explosion damaging adjacent equipment.
The width of the blast walls for transformers shall be 500mm higher than the tops of transformer or
same height of the tops of the HV bushing and 300mm wider at both sides than the width of trans-
former. The minimum thickness of blast walls shall be 200mm.
The wall may be constructed in Class A reinforced concrete with all exposed edges chamfered.
12.3.24 Paints and Painting
All paints shall be of approved makes and colours and proven suitability for the prevailing climate and
shall be approved by the Engineer. All surfaces for painting shall be cleaned down prior to being
painted and rubbed down to a smooth finish.
All externally exposed concrete and render of the control buildings, boundary walls, blast walls and
guard posts shall be painted with a fungicide, Snowcem primer and two coats of Snowcem. All ex-
posed facing bricks and Snowcern painted surfaces shall be treated with one coat of clear silicone
(5%) water proofing solution.
All exposed parts of foundations, the outer faces of cable trenches and cable tunnels shall be painted
with two coats of bitumen mastic paint.
All ungalvanized metalwork shall receive two coats of red oxide paint at least 4 days before installation
and shall receive two finishing coats of paint after installation, each coat being of different colour. Sur-
face preparation before painting shall be SA 2.5 or an agreed rust convertor acid shall be used. All
galvanized steel, including all brick ties, boundary wall wire supports, crane beams, and baseplates
and holding down bolts and concrete plinths shall receive two coats of bitumen mastic paint. Galva-
nized steel shall not be painted until the surface has weathered.
Internal walls when fully dry shall have the surface rubbed down with sandpaper and be painted with a
sealer and 2 finishing coats of plastic emulsion paint before equipment is installed. A further finishing
coat shall be applied after completion of installation.
One day shall be allowed for drying of each coat before the next coat is applied.The interior of all sep-
tic tanks and manholes carrying foul sewage shall receive two coats of bitumen mastic paint.
12.3.25 Furniture
The Contractor shall supply a complete set of tables, chairs, stools, desks, benches, storage shelves
and drawing cabinets as described in the Project Requirements, Volume I with layout top, for drawing
examination, lockable cabinets for spares and test equipment and key boxes in each control building.
These shall generally be of steel of local manufacture and shall be of robust durable construction. In
each rest room (toilet) two couches, approximately 900mm wide by 1900mm long with back rests
against the wall, shall be provided.

Volume 2 Page 267
The full details and specification of these materials shall be agreed before purchase. The Contractor
shall arrange for a list of items to be handed over to the Employer, who will sign for receipt of a com-
plete set as stated on the list.
Furniture shall be provided for new substations only.
12.3.26 Concrete
Only two grades of concrete shall be used. Class A shall be used for all structural work, piling and for
all foundations which are not unreinforced massive blocks. Class B concrete shall be used for blinding,
pipe surround and unreinforced or nominally reinforced concrete. Road slabs and floor slabs shall all
be reinforced Class A concrete.
Class A Class B
Minimum cement content 360 kg/m 170 kg/m

Maximum water/cement ratio 0.55 -
Coarse aggregate type broken stone Jhama brick
Max. coarse aggregate size 200 mm (40 mm piling) 25 mm
Method of batching volume batching volume batching
Minimum characteristic of trial:
Mix at 28 days 30 N/mm -
Minimum characteristic strength of trial mix at 7 days 14 N/mm -
Minimum characteristic strength of works cubes at 28 days 20 N/mm -
Slump range (minimum / maximum) 30 mm / 100 mm min. 50 mm
Slump for concrete placed below water in piling (minimum / 150 mm / 200 mm
maximum)
It should be noted that minimum specified cement content will produce significantly stronger concrete.
The Contractor's design shall be based on a 28 day crushing strength of 30N/mm. Design shall be in
accordance with this Contract and BS 8110 or other agreed standard.
Minimum cover to rebar shall be 60mm where concrete is in contact with backfilled soil against a shut-
tered face, 100mm where concrete is cast against soil, and 30mm for all above ground concrete. In
detailing bars which traverse a member, a reduction of 5mm shall be made for a bent bar and 10mm
for a straight bar to ensure adequate cover. Exposed ends of sunshades and roof projection shall
have 70mm minimum cover.
All concrete design shall ensure easy access for vibrators of 50mm. minimum diameter. Because of
the slowness of concreting using local methods of transport, congested reinforcement details and
shapes which are difficult to concrete should not be used. The location of all cold joints shall be
agreed in writing with the Engineer and all joint surfaces shall be scabbled. All joints shall be horizon-
tal or formed against vertical stop ends. All cold joints shall be indicated on drawings. Roof slabs shall
generally be cast in one continuous operation.

Volume 2 Page 268
12.3.27 Concrete Reinforcement
The Contractor may use locally available mild steel bars from approved sources or import steel bars to
any agreed standard. No bar or stirrup shall be smaller than 6mm diameter to ensure adequate rigidity
during concreting.
If locally purchased bars are used, bending tests and tensile tests shall be carried out to ensure the
bars meet the design standard adopted and weight per unit length shall be tested regularly.
Bar bending lists shall generally be shown on drawings, where possible with a diagrammatic represen-
tation of each bar to ensure clarity and ease site communication. The Engineer will not systematically
check the accuracy of every bar on bar lists when approving drawings. The Contractor shall therefore
arrange to check all bar lists. Drawings shall detail all chairs and ties and include these on bar lists.
Bars shall be tied at every intersection and the ends of tie wire bent away from concrete surfaces.
Anti-crack bars shall be provided at changes in slab or wall thickness and at the comers of every rec-
tangular opening.
12.3.28 External Render
All brickwork which is not faced with facing bricks shall be rendered. Concrete columns and walls shall
be rendered and painted in accordance with BS 5262 with a 3mm spatter dash coat a 12mm under-
coat followed by a 9mm finishing coat. Surface preparation shall be as described in BS 5262. Joints
shall be provided in all render where brickwork panels abut concrete columns and grade beams, as
required by BS 5262.
A mix type II or III shall generally be used. The finishing coat shall be weaker than the undercoat.
The tops of all foundation blocks and all protruding concrete foundations shall also be rendered where
required by the Engineer.
PVA Bonding agents shall not be used because of the risk of early drying in the tropics. All concrete
surfaces to be rendered shall have the entire surface scrabbled and brushed with a stiff brush to re-
move all loose material. The surface of the undercoat shall be roughened to ensure bonding of the fin-
ishing coat.
All render once completed shall be kept continuously damp for 10 days, after which if shall be treated
with a fungicide. Any existing backgrounds shall be treated with a fungicide and all growth cleaned af-
ter 5 days of contact with the fungicide.
12.3.29 Goalposts
In each outdoor switchyard with live conductors crossing roads the Contractor shall erect a permanent
goalpost at the edge of the danger area with red and white metal warning boards hanging down from
the goalpost to warn high vehicles of the overhead danger. This structure shall conform and match
those supporting structures in Section 12 of this Contract for the high voltage switchgear.

Volume 2 Page 269
12.3.30 Lifting Beams
In two storey control buildings a galvanised steel lifting beam shall be provided for hoisting equipment
to all upper floors. The beam shall be fixed permanently in place and shall project the required dis-
tance from the building to lift the largest equipment from road transport. Beams shall be designed in
accordance with BS 2853 and deflection shall be limited to 1/900th of span. An approved (Morris of
Loughborough 190 Series with Morris 164 travelling trolley or similar approved) hand chain hoist with
hand geared travel and travelling trolley of capacity to suit the heaviest equipment or future equipment
shall be provided on each beam. The chains shall reach to lorry level and provision shall be made to
hang up the chains to one side when not in use.
Inward opening doors shall close around the beam and be shaped to a close fit.
12.3.31 Stairs
Two storey buildings have an external staircase, which shall have a minimum clear width of 1,8 metre
with a maximum slope of 30, all detailed in accordance with BS 5395. External staircases shall not be
enclosed but shall be completely protected against rain by roof projections; steps shall be open with
non-slip nosing. Internal staircases shall be terrazzo with non-slip nosing. Solid rendered and painted
walls, at least lm high, shall be provided alongside each flight of stairs.
All roofs which are not accessible by stairs shall be provided with a galvanised steel fixed ladder.
12.4 Concrete Workmanship
12.4.1 General
At all stages in the production, mixing, placing and curing of concrete, the work will be inspected by
the Engineer's representative. If any material, dimension or practice is not at least equal to the stand-
ards set out herein, it shall be rejected and alternatives compliant with the said standards, and in addi-
tion to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shall be implemented.
12.4.2 Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall be capable of passing through a 20mm sieve and be retained on a 5mm
sieve. Fine aggregate shall be not larger than 5mm and not smaller than 0.06mm and shall be sharp in
texture.
All aggregates shall be free of harmful quantities of organic impurities, clay, silt, salt or unsound parti-
cles. The amount of clay, silt and fine dust present in aggregate, whether as coatings or separate par-
ticles, may not be more than:
15% by weight in crushed sand

3% by weight in natural or crushed gravel sand
1% by weight in coarse aggregate.

Volume 2 Page 270
If the Engineer considers that any aggregate which the Contractor proposes to use contains an excess
of fine particles or any harmful substances, the Contractor shall either replace the aggregate or, at his
option and entirely at his expense, institute a series of approved tests at an approved laboratory to de-
termine the nature and extent of the fine particles and harmful substances. Following receipt by the
Engineer of the results of the analysis and tests, he will advise the Contractor in writing whether the
proposed aggregate may or may not be used. The Engineer's decision in this respect shall be final.
Tests to determine the extent of impurities or fine particles shall include (but shall not be restricted to)
the relevant tests specified in BS 882:1992, ASTM. C40-79 (Colorimetric test) and ASTM. C33-82.
12.4.3 Sampling
At least four weeks before he envisages first receiving aggregate from any source the Contractor, in
the presence of the Engineer, shall obtain samples for testing. Samples shall be taken in accordance
with the procedure quantities laid down in BS 812 and shall be subjected to those tests which the En-
gineer considers necessary to demonstrate the soundness of the material.
Such tests shall be carried out in an approved manner at the Contractor's expense and may include
the manufacture, both in the laboratory and at site, of test cubes or cylinders to determine crushing
strength.
12.4.4 Grading
The Contractor shall ensure that his offer includes the full cost of obtaining and transporting suitably
graded stone aggregates to site.
Grading of aggregates should, together with the required minimum cement content and water cement
ratio, ensure adequate durability, density and characteristic strength of the finished concrete. The
Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer the make-up of the mix he proposes to use, together
with the grading analysis for the particular material and any details concerning his or others' experi-
ence with the use of aggregate obtained from the same source.
12.4.5 Cement
Ordinary Portland Cement shall comply with BS 12. The Contractor may obtain cement, bagged or in
bulk, from any approved source in Bangladesh but shall always submit sufficient samples from each
delivery, as required by the Engineer, to ensure that all cement complies with the minimum require-
ments of BS 12. All cement shall be stored in a weather tight shed at least 300mm off the floor. Regu-
lar checks shall be made on the weight of cement in each bag.
12.4.6 Water
All water used in the preparation of concrete for foundations shall be clean, fit for drinking and free
from all earth, vegetable matter and alkaline substances, whetherin solution or in suspension, and
shall comply with BS 3148.

Volume 2 Page 271
12.4.7 Reinforcing
Where reinforcing is specified in any foundation design, it shall comply with BS 4449 or an approved
similar standard. Before any reinforcing is used, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certi-
fied mill certificate, verifying its grade and quality, and proof test such samples as the Engineer con-
siders necessary. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, dust, loose rust and
paint, oil or any other coating which in the opinion of the Engineer may destroy or reduce bond.
12.4.8 Storage
The Contractor shall ensure that all the materials he provides for the preparation of concrete shall be
stored in a manner which prevents contamination by dust, clay, water or any other harmful material.
Heaps of coarse and fine aggregate shall be separated by at least one metre.Where aggregate is
tipped directly onto the ground, the bottom 20cm of the heaps shall not be used.
Bagged cement shall be protected from rain, mixing water or damp soil during storage/transport. Ce-
ment from accidentally split or damaged bags shall not be used.
Where the Engineer considers it necessary, special precautions shall be taken to ensure that aggre-
gate stored on site shall remain dust free. Such precautions may include the bagging of aggregate at
the pit if sites are adjacent to dusty roads or if heavy rain is liable to wash out fine material or saturate
the aggregate to an extent which might influence the water content of a mix.
Where the Contractor establishes central depots for receiving cement prior to despatch to individual
sites, he shall ensure that the cement storage areas are sufficiently raised above the surrounding
ground to prevent contamination of the cement by surface water. The material from which storage
plinths are made shall be approved by the Engineer.
12.4.9 Design Mix
Prior to ordering any aggregate the Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the source(s) of his aggre-
gates and deliver samples to the Engineer. The Contractor will authorise at an approved laboratory
tests to show the sieve analyses, relative densities, moisture content of the samples of aggregate from
each source. At least four test specimens of concrete shall be mixed at an approved laboratory and
tested after 7 and 28 days.
Depending on the moisture content of the samples of aggregate the Contractor will report to the Engi-
neer on the expected water/cement ratio and the aggregate/cement ratio of concrete to be produced
on site.
Following the successful testing of the laboratory samples the Contractor shall make trial mixes at site
(from which he will take at least 4 test specimens) using the proportions advised to the Engineer (and
in the presence of the Engineer) and using the equipment he intends to use in the normal day to day
manufacturing of concrete. The minimum 28 day crushing strength of any such test specimen shall be
2
not less than 20.7 N/mm .
After successful testing of the test specimens made at site, the Engineer may then approve the
source(s) of aggregate and the mix design.

Volume 2 Page 272
No changes to the approved mix design will be permitted unless the type or source of aggregate dif-
fers from those already tested, in which case further tests at both the laboratory and at site will be
made.
Any concrete placed which does not conform to the approved mix designs, shall be removed and re-
placed by the Contractor at his own cost.
12.4.10 Mixing and Placing of Concrete
Proportions of aggregates and cement and the quantity of water for each batch of concrete shall be
closely monitored by an experienced mixer operator. Aggregate shall preferably be weight batched
but, where this is not possible, volume batching shall be permitted, provided that the net volumes of
the loading equipment are approved by the Engineer. Containers for measuring quantities of water
shall be clearly marked and only approved quantities of water shall be used in the manufacture of
concrete.
Mechanical mixers shall be in good condition and well maintained. After loading, the constituent parts
of the concrete shall be mixed together for a period of not less than two minutes or 30 revolutions of
3
the barrel, whichever is the greater. For mixers with a capacity greater than 1.5m these periods may
be increased if the Engineer so requires.
When the constituents are adequately mixed, the fresh concrete shall be discharged from the mixer
and placed in the foundation with the minimum of delay. Chutes shall be used to ensure that fresh
concrete is not dropped by more than 1.5 metres.
No concrete shall be placed until all form work, installation of parts to be embedded, and preparation
of surfaces involved in the placing have been approved. No concrete shall be placed in or through wa-
ter, except with the written permission of the Engineer, and the method of depositing such concrete
shall be approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall not be placed in running water and shall not be subjected to the action of running water
until after the concrete has hardened for seven days. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials
that have become encrusted with dried mortar or grout from concrete previously placed, mud or other
foreign material, shall be cleaned of all such refuse before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is
placed. Immediately before placing concrete, all surfaces of foundations upon or against which the
concrete is to be placed shall be free from standing water, mud and other foreign matter. The surfaces
of concrete which have set, and against which new concrete is to be poured, shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove all foreign material and laitance, and be saturated with water immediately before
placing concrete. Concrete shall be deposited continuously and as rapidly as possible until the unit be-
ing poured is complete. If for any reason the work is stopped before completing the unit of operation, a
construction joint shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. Concrete shall
be so deposited as to maintain, until the completion of a unit, a plastic surface approximately horizon-
tal.
The method and equipment used for transporting concrete shall be such that concrete having the re-
quired composition and consistency will be delivered as near as practical to its final position without
segregation or loss of slump. All concrete mixing and placing equipment and methods shall be subject
to approval by the Engineer. Concrete placement will not be permitted when, in the opinion of the En-
gineer, weather conditions or other pertinent factors prevent proper placement and consolidation.

Volume 2 Page 273
Bidders are reminded that, as a minimum standard, the following series of inspections should be car-
ried out by the Contractor before concreting can begin:
1 Formwork coated with mould oil and correct in type, quantity and condition
2 Centre lines of template to coincide at the centre peg
3 Formwork to be well strutted and correctly located
4 Vibrator to be in working order
5 Mixer to be in working order
6 There is provision to maintain continuous mixing and pouring, by hand if necessary, in the event
of a mixer breaking down
7 Where necessary, re-bar is on site ready bent and complete with tie wire, stirrups and concrete
or plastic preformed spacer packs
8 A reliable level is at hand
9 There is sufficient aggregate, cement and water to complete the pour
10 Excavations are safe and not cluttered around the top edges
11 The mixer barrel is clean, and the paddles are complete and in place and the barrel will rotate at
the speed specified by the Manufacturer
12 A suitable chute is in place
13 Both an air thermometer and concrete thermometer are on site
14 There is a large quantity of hessian sacking at hand
Where any of the above items are not complied with, the Engineer may suspend concreting pending
their implementation.
12.4.11 Testing of Concrete
Samples shall be taken and tested in accordance with BS 1881. Testing shall be carried out by an ap-
proved laboratory, who shall arrange to immediately notify the Contractor and the Employer in writing
of any cube failure. Failed cubes shall be kept for reference.
Concrete for the test specimens shall be taken at the point of deposit. To ensure that the specimens
are representative of the concrete, a number of samples shall be taken from different points. Each
sample shall be large enough to make one test specimen and shall be taken from one point in the
work.
The tests specimens shall be stored at the site at a place free from vibration, under damp sacks for
24 hours + 1/2 hour, after which time they shall be removed from the moulds, marked and stored in
water at a temperature of 10 to 21C until the test date. Specimens which are to be sent to a laborato-
ry for testing shall be packed for transit in damp sand or other suitable damp material, and shall reach
the laboratory at least 24 hours before test. On arrival at the laboratory, they shall be similarly stored
in water until the date of the test.
One compression plate of the testing machine shall be provided with a ball seating in the form of a
portion of a sphere, the centre of which coincides with the central point of the face of the plate. Test
specimens shall be placed in the machine in such a manner that the load is applied to the sides of the
specimen as cast.
2
Cube strengths for concrete are to be not less than 14.8N/mm within seven days after mixing and
2
20.7N/mm within 28 days after mixing.

Volume 2 Page 274
One cube shall be tested at 7 days to obtain an indication of the concrete strength. The remaining
three cubes shall be tested at 28 days and the average of their strengths shall be calculated. Should
the average of the cube strengths fall below the specified 28 days cube strength, the Engineer may
order the affected concrete to be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense, or the Engineer
may allow the Contractor to take a cylinder for further testing in accordance with BS 1881, if Schmidt
Hammer readings indicate below strength concrete.
The diameter of the cylinder shall be not less than three times the size of the maximum aggregate and
its length will be at least double the diameter, after allowing for preparation and facing prior to the test.
Both a report and compression test will be completed for the sample in accordance with BS 1881. On-
ly one such test will be permitted from any one sample and if the crushing strength of the sample is in
excess of that required by the design the Engineer may, after the Contractor has made suitable re-
pairs to the part disturbed by taking the sample, accept the concrete.
In addition to cube sampling, 30% of concrete pours shall be tested by Schmidt Hammer. The Con-
tractor is to pay for all remedial work and testing. Readings shall be taken at locations agreed with the
Engineer and shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least 15 readings shall be taken such that, after
discarding the highest and lowest, some 12 readings remain from which the mean shall be calculated.
Readings shall be restricted to the middle third of a beam, slab or column and shall not be closer than
50mm to an edge or closer than 50mm. to any other readings. Immediately on completion of hammer
testing, the concrete surface shall be painted to seal it with two coats of snowcem primer.
12.4.12 Formwork
Formwork shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the concrete as called for on the Plans
and shall be sufficiently strong to carry the dead weight of the concrete without undue deflection or
bulging, and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. It shall be properly braced and tied together
so as to maintain position and shape. Members used in forms at exposed surfaces shall be dressed to
uniform thickness and shall be free from loose knots or other defects. Joints in forms shall be horizon-
tal or vertical. At all unexposed surfaces and rough work, undressed timber may be used. Timber re-
used in shutters shall have nails withdrawn and surfaces to be in contact with concrete thoroughly
cleaned before being reused. Formwork shall not be disturbed until a minimum of 48 hours has
passed from time of placement and concrete has hardened sufficiently to support any construction
loads that may be imposed when stripping forms, metal wedges or tools shall not be used to pry pan-
els loose. If wedging is necessary, it shall be done with wood wedges lightly tapped to break adhesion.
All columns and beams will have exposed edges chamfered 20 mm x 20mm.
12.4.13 Reinforcing Steel
Steel reinforcing bars shall be positioned in the concrete at the places shown on the drawings, or
where reasonably directed by the Engineer.
Before reinforcing bars are placed in position, surfaces shall be cleaned of heavy flaky rust, loose mill
scale, dirt, grease and all foreign matter. Once in position, reinforcing bars shall be maintained in a
clean condition until they are completely embedded in concrete. Reinforcing bars shall have at least
the minimum concrete cover shown on the drawings. Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and

Volume 2 Page 275
secured in position, such that they will not move during placing of concrete. Precast concrete block
spacers may be used for supporting reinforcing bars.
12.4.14 Consolidation of Concrete
Concrete shall be consolidated to maximum practical density, without segregation, by vibration so that
it is free from pockets of coarse aggregate and closes against all surfaces and embedded materials.
Vibration of concrete in structures shall be by electric or pneumatic-driven immersion type vibrators of
50mm minimum diameter, operating at speeds of at least 8,000rpm when immersed in concrete. The
vibrator shall be inserted vertically at close enough intervals so that the zones of influence overlap.
The vibrator shall be inserted to the full depth of the layer being treated and withdrawn slowly. When
concrete is being placed in layers, the tip of the vibrator shall extend approximately I 00mm. into the
underlying layer. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete horizontally. Care shall be exercised to
avoid over-vibration of the concrete and direct contact between the vibrator and reinforcing shall be
avoided.
12.4.15 Curing of Concrete
For foundations where excavations are to be backfilled immediately following the striking of shutters,
the concrete is to be thoroughly wetted before backfilling commences. Where shutters are to be struck
and backfilling of the excavation is not to take place immediately, the concrete is to be covered with
wetted hessian sacking and be enclosed in polythene sheeting to avoid rapid drying of the concrete.
12.4.16 Hot Weather Concreting
In hot weather the following additional precautions shall be taken.
(a) In hot weather suitable means shall be provided to shield the aggregate stockpiles from the di-
rect rays of the sun or to cool the mixing water/aggregates to ensure that the temperature of the
concrete when deposited shall not exceed 32C.
(b) In hot dry weather suitable means shall be provided to avoid premature stiffening of concrete
placed in contact with hot dry surfaces. Where necessary the surfaces, including reinforcement,
against which the concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from the rays of the sun and shall
be sprayed with water to prevent excessive absorption by the surfaces of water from the final
concrete.
12.5 Workmanship of all Other Materials
This specification only describes concrete work in detail. All other materials workmanship shall be in
accordance with an agreed standard. Before starting any new item of work the Contractor shall submit
samples of the materials to the Engineer for approval in writing and the method of installation shall al-
so be approved. The first item of any type to be installed shall be inspected and checked in detail by
the Engineer before other items are constructed.

Volume 2 Page 276
12.6 Fire Extinguisher
12.6.1 Control Room/Communication Room/Battery Rooms
These rooms shall be protected by a portable CO2 fire extinguisher system. The system shall consist
of all equipment required for directing the CO2 gas discharge at a fire including, but not limited to, CO2
cylinders and necessary piping, a flexible hose along with a jet nozzle. The effective reach of CO2 gas
jet release shall be sufficient to fight small fires that could develop in a control room area. Fire extin-
guishers shall be placed at strategic locations as per instruction of project engineer. The quantity of
extinguisher at each new substation are given in Table-1.
12.6.2 Cable Room/Outdoor Switchyard
These areas shall be protected by a portable dry-type ABC powder fire extinguisher system. The sys-
tem shall consist of all equipment required for directing the dry ABC powder discharge at a fire includ-
ing, but not limited to, a wheel carriage(only for 15kg capacity) loaded with portable cylinders and nec-
essary piping and a flexible hose along with a jet nozzle and pressure gauge. The extinguisher mate-
rial shall be non-explosive, non-hazardous, non-corrosive, non-toxic. The effective reach of jet release
shall be sufficient to fight small fires that could develop in an outdoor switchyard, cable room and
storeroom area. Fire extinguishers shall be placed at strategic locations as per the instructions of the
Project Engineer. In addition, sand buckets shall also be provided, with a metal frame for hanging
buckets and shallbe placed at locations directed by project engineer. The quantities of extinguishers at
each new substation are given in the table below:
Type, characteristics Quantity

CO2 type, 5 kg 5 sets
CO2 type, 3 kg 5 sets
ABC dry powder type, 5 kg 5 sets
ABC dry powder type, 15 kg, including wheel carriage 4 sets
Sand bucket, with metal frame, with all accessories 2 sets

Volume 2 Page 277
13. Lighting, Small Power, Heating and Venti-

lation
13.1 Scope
This section of the specification includes for the interior and exterior lighting, small power, heating and
ventilation systems.
Whenever practicable, fixtures shall be sourced locally. All lamps, fittings, plugs, sockets and general
accessories of the same size and types shall be similar and interchangeable throughout the installa-
tion.
The lighting and small power equipment and installation shall comply with other sections of this Speci-
fication as appropriate.
All civil works associated with this section of the works shall be deemed to be included as part of the
works in this section. No additional payments will be made for such requirements.
The requirements of this section of the works are subject to the Main Conditions and Specifications
laid down in other sections of the Bid Document.
13.2 References
British Standards
BS 7671 Code of Practice Regulations for Electrical Equipment in Buildings 15th Edition.
Institution of Electrical Engineers
BS 6004 Specification for PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for electric power and
lighting
BS 6346 Specification for PVC insulated cables for electricity supply
BS 6500 Specification for insulated flexible cords and cables
BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands
BS EN 60947 Specification for control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and
1200V DC
BS 4533 Luminaries
BS 3677 Specification for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps
BS 1363 Specification for 13A fuse plugs and switched and unswitched socket outlets
BS 1362 Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic and similar purposes
(suitable for use in plugs)
BS 4568 Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric threads of 150 form for
electrical installation
BS 4066 Test on Electric cable under fire conditions
BS 4434 Specification for safety aspects in the design construction and installation of re-
frigerating appliances and systems
BS 5970 Code of Practice for thermal insulation of pipework and equipment
BS 848 Fans for general purposes

Volume 2 Page 278
BS 6540 Method of test for atmospheric dust spot efficiency and synthetic dust weight
arrestance
BS 2871 Specification for copper and copper alloys: tubes
BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineer-
ing purposes, plate, sheet and strip
Institution of Heating and Ventilation, Engineers Guide to Current Practice.
American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Engineers
Recommendations
Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association of U.K., Specification DW /
121
13.3 Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall be responsible for the efficient and good working of the installations comprising
this section of the Specification for the agreed period as set out in the Specification document.
13.4 Approvals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval copies of all his calculations forming the ba-
sis for the designs of the specified systems, which shall be shown on the working drawings, also to be
submitted for approval.
Any approvals shall not, however, relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibilities which in-
clude obtaining local authority approvals for electrical wiring installations.
13.5 Lighting Requirements
The lighting installations shall be designed to give the standard service illuminations and shall incorpo-
rate emergency lighting where indicated. Control rooms, relay rooms, telecommunications equipment
rooms, offices and stores shall have the service illumination measured at 850 mm above finished floor
level. All other areas shall have the service illumination measured at floor level.
The installations shall also meet the limiting glare index requirements as set out in the specified codes
of practice. This section of work gives proposals for the types of lighting fittings to be used in the area,
type of control to be employed, number of socket outlets and the types of mounting expected to be
suitable for the respective areas. Where discharge and fluorescent light sources are to be used in are-
as containing rotating or reciprocating machinery, the fittings shall be allocated between the 3 phase
and neutral in such a manner as to avoid stroboscopic effects. When 3 phase lighting installations are
to be used, contactor switching controlled by pushbuttons located in the area to be illuminated is pre-
ferred.
In all rooms and corridors having two entrances the lighting installation shall have two way switching,
the switches being located in appropriate positions adjacent to the entrances.

Volume 2 Page 279
Emergency lighting shall be arranged to illuminate all stairways, exits and entrances and provide some
illumination in operational areas within the control building and the switchyard, e.g. circuit breaker and
transformer locations.
Security lighting shall be installed around the perimeter walls illuminating the external area and shall
be controlled from the gatehouse. The level of illumination for security lighting shall be measured at a
distance of 3 metres outside the boundary wall.
13.6 Schedule of Design Requirements
The lighting system shall include provision for ease of erection, maintenance, cleaning, lamp replace-
ment and future extension. Lamp replacement and maintenance should, unless otherwise approved,
be possible without necessitating outages on main plant items.
Lighting apparatus shall be of top quality, designed to ensure satisfactory operation and service life
under all variations of load, frequency and temperature. Sodium discharge lighting shall be used for
road and security lighting. Switchyard floodlighting shall use 500W Halogen lamps unless otherwise
specified.
Key to Abbreviations:
L Local switches
S1, S2 etc. Socket outlets or fused spur circuits
P.B Pushbutton for remote control
T.S Time switch control
C Ceiling mounted
W Wall mounted
P Pole or earth mast mounted
M Recessed modular mounting
D Suspended
F Flush installation
S Surface installation
A Automatic on mains failure.
BH Behind ceiling diffuser.
13.7 Coding Systems
The Contractor shall, when preparing drawings showing the respective designs, use a code to identify
each lighting fitting and socket outlet.
The code shall comprise letters and figures so compiled that the following information can be readily
identified:
1. The lighting distribution board to which the fitting or socket outlet is connected.
2. If connected to the normal supplies or to the emergency DC supplies.
3. The circuit number and phase of the distribution board to which the fitting is connected.
4. The sequence of the fitting in a particular circuit.

Volume 2 Page 280
13.8 Distribution Boards
The distribution boards and all component parts shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
the latest standards and designed to suit the fault level of the transformers supplied. The Contractor
shall demonstrate by calculation that this has been complied with.
Each, current carrying component shall be so designed that under continuous rated full load condi-
tions in the climatic conditions at Site the maximum total temperatures permitted under the relevant
Standards are not exceeded.
Each distribution board shall have a rustproof metal case of sheet steel with either a galvanised or
enamelled finish. The colour of the enamel finish shall match the colour of other switchgear. The metal
casing is to be provided with a number of knock-outs or other approved form of cable entries, corre-
sponding to the circuit capacity of the distribution board, and a suitable screened brass earthing stud.
Busbars, including neutral bar, shall be of high conductivity copper supported to withstand all normal
and fault condition stresses.
All busbars, neutral bars and primary conductors are to be PVC sleeved in respective phase and neu-
tral colours.
Distribution boards for exterior use shall be galvanised and weatherproof.
Neutral bars shall have an appropriate number of ways relative to the size of the board. They shall
have a rating not less than that of the associated phase busbars.
The metal surface adjacent to any live part and all spaces between phases shall be protected by bar-
riers of fireproof insulation material.
The distribution boards shall be either single pole or triple pole and neutral types and shall be
equipped with means to provide overcurrent protection to each circuit. This protection may comprise
an HRC fuse or a miniature circuit breaker, both of which shall be removable without exposing live
connections.
Fuse bases and bridges, where used, shall be of an approved non- hygroscopic insulation suitable for
the receipt of HRC fuses.
Residual current circuit breakers shall be incorporated to protect all lighting circuits, socket outlets and
supplies to appliances, etc. These shall comply with the requirements of the main electrical part of this
Specification.
The current rating of the busbars in each distribution board is not to be less than the sum of maximum
current rating of all outgoing circuits. The neutral connection for each circuit is to be direct to the neu-
tral busbar.
Title labels of an approved type and inscriptions are to be fitted externally on the front cover of each
distribution board giving details of the points controlled by each circuit. The circuit lists shall be typed
or printed stating the location of the equipment served, rating of the protective unit and the circuit load-
ing. The lists shall be mounted on the inside of the cover door and shall be protected by an acrylic
sheet slid into a frame over the circuit lists. The lists and cover are to be easily removable to permit
circuit modifications.

Volume 2 Page 281
The cables feeding the distribution boards will be connected directly to the incoming isolator or neutral
bar as appropriate, unless otherwise indicated by the Specification.
Switchfuse units or isolators connected on the incoming side of a distribution board shall be mechani-
cally attached to the board with solid copper electrical connections between the units. A suitable insu-
lated barrier is to be supplied to prevent copper or carbon dust released under fault conditions passing
from one unit to the other.
Distribution boards for use on the direct current system shall be double pole types equipped with ade-
quately rated fuses.
Mixed capacity boards shall be employed and all contactors and time switches associated with the re-
spective outgoing circuits shall be accommodated within the distribution board.
13.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers
Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of the main electrical part of this Specifi-
cation.
13.10 Cables
Cables shall be XLPE insulated, single wire armoured and PVC sheathed overall and be manufac-
tured and tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 5467, 600/1000V grade or equivalent. The
outer sheath shall be coloured black and incorporate flame retardant characteristics to meet the re-
quirements of BS 4066 and IEC 60332. Jute fillings will not be permitted. Cables shall comply with the
requirements of the cable section of this Specification.
Flexible type cables for pendant cords and final connections to fixed apparatus are to be butyl or sili-
cone rubber insulated and sheathed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of
BS 6500, 300/500V or 300/300V grade as applicable.
The conductor is to comprise multi-strands of 0.25 mm wire. The number of strands are to be not less
than 30 and in all cases of a number suitable for the protection rating of the respective circuits.
All cables used for lighting and small power shall have copper conductors.
The Contractor is to select conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet the following condi-
tions:
(a) That the minimum conductor size for lighting circuits is to be 1.5 mm2 and for socket outlets
2
2.5 mm .
(b) That the size is to be adequate for the current to be carried as set out in the cable Manufactur-
er's specification.
(c) That the size is sufficient to keep the voltage drop in the phase and neutral conductor to the far-
thest lighting or power point, under normal full load conditions, to within the final circuit limit
specified in BS7671. Diversity will not be allowed.

Volume 2 Page 282
13.11 Cable Terminations
Terminations for cables shall comprise compression type glands with armour and bonding clamps to
meet the requirements of Type E1 to BS 6121, or equivalent, and are to be designed to secure the
armour wires, to provide electrical continuity between the armour and the threaded fixing component
of the gland and to provide watertight seals between the cable outer sheath and gland and between
the inner sheath and threaded fixing component. The glands are to project at least 10 mm above the
gland plate to avoid moisture collecting in the cable crutch.
Earth bond terminal attachments are to be provided.
Terminations for rubber insulated cables are to comprise compression type glands where the function
of the gland is to secure the outer sheath of the cable, in accordance with the requirements of Type A2
to BS 6121 or equivalent. A watertight seal is to be provided between the outer sheath and the gland.
Only one cable is to be terminated in each gland.
13.12 Sealing and Drumming
Immediately after the works tests, both ends of all cables shall be sealed against the ingress of mois-
ture, dirt and insects and the end projecting from the drum shall be adequately protected against me-
chanical damage during handling and shall be fitted with a pulling eye bonded to cores, sheath and
armours.
13.13 Conduit
All wiring shall be installed in screwed heavy gauge welded steel conduit or heavy gauge PVC con-
duit, at the discretion of the Engineer. No conduit less than 20 mm diameter will be permitted.
Surface mounted - steel - switchrooms, battery rooms, i.e. painted blockwork.

Flush mounted - PVC - relay control rooms which have a decorative finish.
Steel conduits shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 4568, Part 1 or equivalent, heavy gauge
screwed and welded Class B and shall be galvanised. Conduit fittings are to be manufactured of good
quality galvanised malleable cast iron and of small circular pattern to BS 4568, Part 2 or equivalent,
with internally tapped spouts minimum length 21 mm. threaded to the correct length at intersections,
tees, draw throughs and stop-ends.
Conduit fittings of PVC shall be of the plain bore pattern suitable for a push-on compression type joint-
and shall be sealed with a hard setting vinyl cement to prevent ingress of vermin, water, dust, etc. In-
spection bends, solid or normal bends, elbows or tees are not to be used except with the approval of
the Engineer.
Conduit runs shall, wherever possible, be concealed in ceilings, voids and walls, chases etc., and in
rooms of secondary importance (with back outlet entries to switch boxes etc. especially on fair faced
brickwork) otherwise the conduits shall be securely fixed to the surface of walls using heavy cast dis-
tance saddles. Where plastered finishes are called for, buried conduit systems shall be provided.

Volume 2 Page 283
Where the system of wiring is concealed, the 'loop-in' system of conduit shall be used and the 'loop-
ing-in' boxes shall conform to BS 31, Class B3.
A separate insulated earth conductor, coloured green and yellow, shall be run in PVC conduits and
such facilities shall be provided at all terminal points.
Wherever the installation is specified as being flame-proof, the conduit runs entering these areas shall
have a barrier box inserted in the run immediately before the conduit passes into the flame-proof area.
All conduit work inside the flame-proof area shall be carried out with solid drawn galvanised conduit
and all conduit fittings, sockets and accessories shall be galvanised and certified suitable for Group 1
hazard. At the completion of the wiring all machine faces on accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned
and greased, prior to the screwing or bolting of all accessory cover plates into their final flame-proof
secure position.
The ends of all steel conduits shall be reamered to remove all burrs or sharp edges after the screw
threads have been cut. All dirt, paint or oil on the screw threads, the conduit, sockets and accessories
must be removed prior to erection. All conduits shall be swabbed through prior to installation of cables.
The ends of the conduit shall butt solidly in all couplings. Where they terminate in fuse-switches, dis-
tribution boards, adaptable boxes or non-spouted switch boxes, they shall be connected thereto by
means of smooth bore male brass bushes, compression washers and sockets. All exposed threads
and all bends shall be painted with an aluminium spirit paint after erection.
All conduit and accessories, after being installed, shall be examined and all parts where the surface
has been chipped or scratched shall be painted.
All conduits shall be kept 80 mm clear of water, gas and other services. Should this prove impractica-
ble, then they shall be properly bonded by means of pipe clamps or other device ensuring mechanical-
ly sound, electrically continuous connection.
The method of installing PVC conduit and fittings shall conform strictly to the Manufacturer's recom-
mendation. These recommendations shall be submitted when seeking approval to the system pro-
posed. In general the clauses dealing with steel conduit shall apply.
PVC tube not exceeding 25 mm in diameter shall be bent cold by means of the appropriate spring and
the tube shall be saddled as quickly as possible after bending. When bending larger sizes of tube, the
tube must be heated in an approved manner until it is pliable. A 90 bend shall have a radius of not
less than five times the outside diameter of the tube.
Joints between conduits and conduit fittings shall be watertight and shall be made by means of a sol-
vent adhesive as recommended by the Manufacturer. Care shall be taken to ensure that the tube is
clean and free from damp and grease and in particular dust, mould and oil.
The Contractor shall provide PVC tube ends and flexible covers to prevent ingress of concrete grout
into the tubing and boxes.
All bends are to be made on Site to suit conditions and not more than two right angle bends will be
permitted without the interposition of a draw box. No tees, elbows, sleeves, either of inspection or solid
type, will be permitted. Generally long straight conduit runs from point to point shall have draw boxes
installed at maximum intervals of 10 metres.

Volume 2 Page 284
Deep boxes or extension rings on standard circular conduit boxes shall be used where necessary in
order to bring the front of each box flush with the surface of the ceiling or wall. Where conduits are laid
direct on the shuttering of the reinforced slab construction, conduit extension rings or deep boxes shall
be used to raise the run of conduit to between the top and bottom reinforcing. Galvanised draw wires
or other approved types shall be provided where conduits are not to be wired on completion or are to
be wired by others.
All draw boxes and junction boxes shall be of ample size to permit the cables being drawn in and out.
They shall be made of malleable iron or PVC approved type and the jointing surface machined to en-
sure a dust tight joint. All circular boxes shall be provided with long spouts internally threaded incorpo-
rating a shoulder for the proper butting of the conduit and a solid brass earth terminal tapped and
screwed into the base of the box.
All conduit boxes shall be screwed on or in walls, ceilings etc. by countersunk wood screws of appro-
priate size. Holes in boxes shall be adequately countersunk to ensure the complete recession of the
fixing screws. All inspection and draw-in boxes shall be provided with covers fixed by round head
brass screws.
Where surface conduit is specified, it shall be fixed by means of distance saddles and shall terminate
in raised back pattern conduit boxes. Surface conduits shall not be bent or set to enter accessories,
and where they turn through walls back outlet boxes shall be provided. Conduits shall be fixed at
1200 mm centres on vertical runs and 900 mm apart on horizontal runs.
Vertical conduit runs shall have saddles at 300 mm maximum from their points of emergence from
floors or ceilings and the remaining saddles shall be fixed consistent with the requirements of spacing
and appearance. Saddles shall be fixed on each side of every bend at 300 mm maximum from the
point of intersection of the centre line conduit.
Conduits in ceiling cavities shall be supported independent of the suspended ceiling.
Where conduits cross expansion joints, the Contractor shall allow for the installation of expansion
couplers at the positions of the expansion joint and at fight angles to it. He shall provide a bonding
earth wire between each terminal fitted in the nearest conduit box each side of the coupler.
All flexible metallic tubing shall be galvanised watertight pattern fitted with sweated brass adaptors.
External earth conductors, wrapped around the tubing, shall be provided.
Where conduits are laid in slab floor etc., the Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in
attendance whilst the concrete pouting or screeding operation is being carried out, in order to avoid
damage being caused to the conduits and also to ensure that the conduit work is in sound condition,
properly and efficiently maintained during this installation period.
Particular care should be taken when setting out conduit runs to outlet points where they are to be fit-
ted to furniture, kitchen fittings, etc. The Contractor shall ascertain exact details of the furniture and fit-
tings construction in order that all conduit work shall wherever possible be concealed.
Conduits installed in chases of walls and floors shall be firmly secured by wrought iron pipe hooks or
crampets and these fixings shall in themselves be sufficient to hold the conduits in place. Conduits in-
stalled in chases shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint before erection and a further coat
shall be applied to all accessible surfaces including the hooks and the crampets after erection.

Volume 2 Page 285
Recessed conduits buried in plaster shall permit a full 6mm. depth of cover over its entire
length.Provision shall be made for the tapping of condensed moisture.
Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt or rubbish entering the conduit system during erection.
Screwed metal caps or plugs shall be used for protecting open ends.
All conduit systems shall be erected completely with all conduit accessories connected. They shall
then be offered for inspection and approval by the Engineer before any cables are installed. Conduit
boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit.
Where a conduit is exposed to different temperatures (either by surrounding air conditions or by virtue
of the surrounding medium with which it is in contact) at any particular time, the section of the conduit
at the higher temperature shall be isolated from the section at the lower temperature by means of a
conduit box filled with an approved permanently plastic compound, after completion and testing of all
wiring. Such a condition would arise if a conduit running in a warmed building is run to exterior points.
Where galvanised conduit is specified, all conduit, accessories, switch boxes and all associated appa-
ratus used in the installation must also be galvanised. Galvanised conduit shall be used when mount-
ed outside a building, installed in floor chases subject to dampness or accidental flooding, or buried in
the ground. Conduit systems shall be weatherproof when erected outside a building. Exposed conduit
threads shall be given a coat of zinc rich paint.
Conduit buried in the ground shall be wrapped with PVC self-adhesive tape half lapped. The taping
shall be extended for a distance of 150 mm beyond the point where the conduit emerges from the
ground. Joints in galvanised conduit systems shall be made watertight using lead, aluminiurn paint
and hemp and/or gaskets. The joints shall be partially screwed up before the paint and hemp are ap-
plied to maintain continuity.
All adaptable boxes shall be grey iron pattern unless otherwise specified. Where adaptable boxes are
fitted flush, the cover plates shall be heavy gauge metal with 12 mm overlap on all sides. The internal
depth of a box shall be not less than 40 mm.
Covers shall be secured by a screw at each comer and by additional screws as necessary to provide a
maximum spacing of 300 mm between adjacent screws. Fixing screws shall be brass (round or
cheese head).
Covers for boxes shall be of the same material as the box. For boxes mounted in weatherproof situa-
tions, the cover shall have a machined surface around the perimeter mating with a similar machined
surface on the box and shall be complete with a gasket.
Every flush outlet box to which a luminaire pull cord switch or similar is to be fitted, shall be equipped
with an approved type of break joint ring.

Volume 2 Page 286
13.14 Cable Trunking
Where trunking is specified it shall be constructed of 1.65 mm minimum thickness zinc coated mild
steel or PVC and shall have a removable cover throughout its length with centre screw latch fixings.
Trunking shall be rigidly fixed and supplied complete with purpose manufactured fittings, connectors,
dividers, flanges, cable retaining clips, racks and copper earth continuity links. As an alternative, if ap-
proved, a proprietary brand of heavy duty plastic trunking may be acceptable. When submitting details
for approval, full installation instructions as recommended by the Manufacturer shall be included in the
details.
All cables installed in trunking shall be labelled and identified in an approved manner. Clips shall be at
600 mm from centres. Vertical cable trunking shall be fitted with cable pin racks arranged to avoid any
strain on the cables.
All trunking shall be rust proofed, primed and painted and fixed at intervals not greater than 1,000 mm.
13.15 Cable Trays
Cable trays, where required as part of the Contract supply, are to be the perforated galvanised sheet
type.
Trays are to have upturned edges and be of a width suitable for the number of cables to be supported
and are to be supplied with purpose- made galvanised steel brackets suitable for mounting from the
building structure. External cable trays shall be provided with covers.
Where site cutting of trays or support bracket steelwork is unavoidable, recutting bare steel shall be
protected with two coats of an approved zinc rich paint immediately after cutting.
13.16 Cable Jointing
The Contractor shall be responsible for the sealing and jointing of all cables supplied and installed as
part of this Section of the Contract. Straight jointing of cables is not permitted without the written con-
sent of the Engineer.
13.17 Contactors
Contactors shall comply with BS 5424 or equivalent and shall be of the electrically held-in types con-
tained in heavy gauge sheet steel cases suitable for panel mounting. Each contactor shall be continu-
ously rated and suitable for thirty inductive switching operations per hour.

Volume 2 Page 287
13.18 Switches and Pushbuttons
Switches shall be rated for 15 amps, shall be single pole types and be provided with an earth terminal.
Switches shall be one way, two-way or intermediate as required and, where mounted together, they
shall be fitted in a common box.
Switches for use in areas designated for surface installation shall be quick-make-quick-break fixed grid
industrial types mounted in galvanised malleable iron boxes with protected dolly and arranged where
necessary for multi-gang switching.
Switches for use in areas designated for flush installation shall be micro-break types fixed to white
plastic cover plates and mounted in galvanised steel flush type boxes.
Switch-boxes shall be galvanised and fitted with screwed stainless steel front plates having a 6 mm
overlap minimum for flush installations. They shall be suitably barriered and labelled where two phas-
es are connected in the same box.
Switches mounted externally shall be of weatherproof pattern to IP55 level fitted with machined box
and cover joint, brass operating handles, neoprene weathertight seals and external fixing feet.
Where DC emergency lighting circuits are to be switched, double-pole quick make, quick break
switches with pillar type terminals and earthing straps shall be provided.
Switches shall be mounted 1.4 m above finished floor level.
Pushbutton switches shall either be flush or surface types contained in galvanised steel boxes and be
single pole rated for 5 Amps. Pushbuttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic material, be non-swelling
and so fitted as to avoid any possibility of sticking.
The terminals for all switches shall be adequate to accommodate 2 conductors, each a minimum of
2
1.5 mm in area.
13.19 Lighting Fittings
Illustrations and/or samples of all lighting fittings which the Contractor proposes to purchase shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before issuing any sub-orders.
Lighting fittings for interior and exterior use are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
appropriate sections of BS 4533, IEC 60162 or equivalent and together with all components are to be
suitable for service and operation in the tropical climate stated.
Each fitting is to be complete with all lampholders, control gear, internal wiring, fused terminal block,
earth terminal and reflectors or diffusers as specified. The design of each fitting is to be such as to
minimise the effect of glare and such that the ingress of dust, flies and insects is prevented, where
open type fittings are used it is to be impossible for insects to become lodged therein.
The control gear for use with fluorescent lamps is to be quick or resonant start type without starters.

Volume 2 Page 288
Chokes are to be impregnated and solidly filled with polyester resin, or other approved high melting
compound, are to be manufactured to restrict the third harmonic content to less than 17% of the un-
corrected current value, and are to be silent in operation.
The built-in ballast units shall comply with IEC 60082 and shall include radio interference suppressors
and capacitors to correct the fitting power factor to a minimum of 0.85 lagging. Control gear noise lev-
els shall be minimal.
Fittings shall be supplied complete with closed end vitreous enameled metal reflectors or totally en-
closed opal plastic diffusers, which shall be fully interchangeable.
Dispersive reflector fittings suitable for mercury bulb fluorescent or tungsten filament lamps shall be of
heavy gauge sheet steel finished vitreous enamel. They shall be fitted with anti-vibrators and arranged
for conduit box mounting, direct or pendant, on galvanised ball and socket dome type lids.
Bulkhead fittings shall have cast bases tapped for conduit entry, hinged bezels, heat resisting pris-
matic glasses fitted with neoprene gaskets and porcelain lampholders. Circuit cable shall not be con-
nected direct to bulkhead fittings but shall terminate in a fixed base connector mounted in a conduit
box adjacent to the fitting. Final connections to each fitting shall be carried out with silicone rubber
covered cable. All bulkhead fittings shall be watertight pattern.
2
Internal connections are to comprise stranded conductors not less than 0.75 mm covered with heat
resistant insulation to the requirements of BS 6500 or equivalent. All internal wiring is to be adequately
cleated to the fitting casing with an approved form of cleat. The finish of fittings for interior use is to be
impervious to deterioration by atmospheric reaction. Fittings for exterior use shall have a vitreous
enamel, natural aluminium or galvanised finish according to the Manufacturer's standard product.
Lampholders for tungsten lamps up to 150 watts shall be brass or porcelain BC type and for higher
ratings shall be ES or GES type according to size. Fittings for housing tungsten lamps exceeding 150
watts rating are to be provided with an approved method of dissipating heat from the lamp cap and
terminal housing.
Lampholders as applicable are to be suitable for the lamp specified.
Lighting fittings are to be of the type description as generally set out in the schedule appended to this
section of the Specification. The type references used are to be repeated in the Schedules and on the
drawings.
13.20 Lamps
The Contract includes the supply and erection of all lamps and tubes necessary to complete the instal-
lation.
Fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BS1853, IEC 60081 or equiv-
alent, shall be bi-pin types and shall have colour rendering values of X = 0.335 and Y= 0.342 (i.e.,
Colour 2) on the CIE chromaticity scale.
Tungsten lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 161 or equivalent and shall
be bayonet cap for lamps up to and including 100 watts. Lamps rated for 150 watts and higher shall

Volume 2 Page 289
have Edison screw caps. Low wattage lamps used in exit signs and emergency lighting units may be
small or miniature Edison screw.
Discharge lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 3677 or equivalent. Mercu-
ry vapour lamps shall be fluorescent types having a 10% red ratio colour correction, whenever used.
13.21 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets
Each socket outlet shall comply with the requirements of the BS 1363 or equivalent and shall be the
interlocked shuttered and switched types arranged for surface or flush mounting in single or multi-
gang units as appropriate.
Each fused spur outlet shall be equipped with double pole isolator, a fuse to BS 1362 or equivalent
and where required front entry for flexible connection.
Each socket outlet and fused spur outlet shall be equipped with a galvanised metal box with earth
terminal.
Each group of five socket outlets is to be provided with a matching fused plug top.
All socket outlets for exterior use shall be galvanised and weatherproof and be equipped with
screwed dustproofed cap attached to the socket by means of a chain.
13.22 Time Switches
Time switches for use with lighting systems shall be the synchronous motor wound types protected by
a suitably rated fuse for 230 volts operation with a nine hour reserve spring and are to be fitted with a
twenty-four hour hand set dial, two "OFF" and two "ON" levers and manual operation pushbutton. The
main contacts shall be rated for 20 Amps on a 230 Volt 50 Hz AC supply.
Time switches shall be suitable for mounting in the distribution boards supplying the circuits to be con-
trolled.
13.23 Poles
Lighting poles shall be tapered, of hot dip galvanised steel with bituminous preservative inside and
outside at the base and shall be approved by the Engineer.
Each pole shall be equipped with a base section compartment of 470 mm by 150 mm to house an in-
spection trap, lockable door, fused cut out, cable entry and terminations for both the incoming and
outgoing power cables and secondary cables feeding the light sources.
Poles for substation lighting shall support the floodlights at 11m above ground level and poles for ac-
cess roadway lights shall support the lanterns at 4.5m above ground level.

Volume 2 Page 290
The Contractor shall ensure each pole is provided with foundations suitable for the ground conditions
occurring at each site.
13.24 Interior Installations
Wiring for the lighting and socket outlet installations shall comprise PVC cables drawn into conduits at-
tached to walls, structural or roof steelwork or ceilings as appropriate (see chapters 13.13 and 13.14).
Surface and flush type installations are required according to the particular area as indicated in the
schedule appended to this section.
In areas where flush type installations are indicated the wiring shall be drawn into conduits buried un-
der wall finishes or concealed above ceilings as appropriate.
All fixings shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and all metalwork used shall be galvanised. Fix-
ings to structural steelwork shall be with purpose made brackets or clamps; the drilling of structural
steelwork will not be permitted.
Cleats with two screw fixings shall be used for supporting conduits at not greater than 2m intervals.
All switchboxes, socket outlet boxes and items of a similar type shall be fixed with two screws or bolts.
Switches and pushbuttons for lighting circuits shall be mounted at 1400 mm above finished floor level.
Socket outlets shall be mounted 500 m above finished floor level but those for use with workshop
benches shall be mounted 150 mm clear of the bench working surface.
Lighting fittings shall be attached to ceilings, walls, trunking or roof steelwork or suspended therefrom
as appropriate.
Where fittings are to be suspended, rod type suspension units shall be employed.
Final connections to all suspended lighting fittings shall be with heat resistant flexible cable terminated
in porcelain clad connectors in the ceiling or junction box which shall also terminate the main circuit
cable. The cable length shall be such that the suspension unit supports the full weight of the lighting
fittings.
Where recessed type lighting fittings are to be installed suspension units shall be used to prevent the
weight of the fittings being applied to the suspended ceiling. It shall be possible to carry out mainte-
nance from the underside of the fitting without disturbing the false ceiling. To facilitate this need the fi-
nal connection to each fitting shall be with heat resistant flexible cable from a plug in type ceiling rose
mounted above the false ceiling.
All cables not contained within conduit for their whole route shall be terminated with a cable gland.
Where lighting fittings are mounted direct on walls or ceilings, the main circuit cables may be connect-
ed into the fitting terminal block. Where terminal blocks do not exist within the lighting fitting, flexible
heat resistant cable shall be used connected to a separate junction box.

Volume 2 Page 291
Earth continuity shall be maintained throughout the entire wiring installation with separate insulated
earth continuity conductors of adequate cross-section ultimately connected to a common earth termi-
nal at the respective distribution board.
Within the interior installation adequate provision shall be made for connection to small ventilating
fans, which are not energised from the central air conditioning control and starter panel.
Each and every trunking route shall be bonded across all joints with external copper bonding links
supplied for the purpose.
13.25 Exterior Installation
Exterior substation lighting fittings shall be attached to substation walls at high level or pole mounted
as appropriate. Security lighting round the perimeter wall/fence is to be provided.
When locating the floodlights for the switchyard lighting, the Contractor shall ensure that all floodlights
are outside safety clearance for the high voltage switchgear at the particular location.
Cables to exterior lighting shall be laid direct in ground, laid in concrete trenches or cleated to build-
ings structures as appropriate to the route requirement. The cables shall be terminated at a cut-out lo-
cated at the base of each support. Wiring between the cut-out and the control gear or lantern shall be
with multicore cable run within poles or with cable drawn into galvanised steel conduit attached to the
supporting structure.
13.26 Emergency Lighting
Emergency lighting shall comprise lighting fittings of the types indicated in the schedule appended to
this section of the Specification.
The system shall be so arranged that on failure of the normal a.c. supplies to the lighting installation
the emergency lighting system will automatically be switched on. Other than those of the "on demand"
type, all emergency lighting shall be switched "off" 5 minutes after restoration of normal supplies. Each
emergency lighting unit shall have a minimum 3 hour rating.
Sufficient fittings of Type E3 shall be provided in each room to enable the rooms and building to be
evacuated safely.
In addition, in designated working areas emergency manually switched lighting, to give not less than
30 lux, shall be provided utilising type E4 fittings. Switches shall be labelled to the approval of the En-
gineer.
The security lighting scheme shall illuminate the area to 6 metres inside the perimeter wall to the light-
ing level specified.

Volume 2 Page 292
13.27 Telephone System
A complete conduit/duct system shall be provided throughout the building to enable the telephone ca-
bles to be run to the proposed extension points. This includes telephone wiring to operators' desks
and office in the control building.
Telephone instruments, the PABX and connections to PTT exchange lines shall be carried out by oth-
er Contractor.
13.28 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Socket Outlets
All lighting schemes are to utilise fittings and lamp types which are available locally in Bangladesh to
ensure that replacements are readily acceptable.
Lighting fittings described in this Schedule shall also meet the general requirements of the Clause for
Lighting Fittings of this Specification.
Type F1 Shall indicate a basic channel complete with control gear and lampholders for one fluo-
rescent lamp, equipped with an open ended metal reflector having upwardlight slots.
Type F2 Shall indicate a fitting which shall comply generally with the descriptionfor Type Fl but be
equipped for use with two lamps.
Type F3 Shall indicate a recessed modular fitting suitable for mounting in a suspended ceiling and
equipped with a clear prismatic controller. The metalwork and trim are to comprise a rigid
welded unit so arranged as to be invisible when erected complete with controller. The fit-
ting is to be equipped with a pre-wired removable gear tray and adjusting facilities to en-
able levelling relative to the ceiling to be carried out after erection. The assembly is to be
complete with control gear and lampholders for one 1500 mm long 65 watt fluorescent
lamp.
Type F4 Shall indicate a fitting which shall generally comply with the description F3 but with an
open type grid diffuser.
Type F5 Shall indicate a dust-tight, weatherproof and vapour resistant fitting, having a grey polyes-
ter fibre glass reinforced chassis containing the control gear and having lampholders for
one 1500 fluorescent lamp. The fitting shall be complete with a vacuum formed acrylic dif-
fuser which is secured to the body with injection moulded toggles and sealed with a neo-
prene gasket.
Type F6 Shall indicate a weatherproof bulkhead fitting with a cast aluminium base and vandal re-
sistant diffuser equipped with control gear and lampholders for two fluorescent lamps.
Type E1 Shall indicate a self-contained, self-sustained (normally off) emergency lighting unit,
complete with integral batteries and control gear, with the words "EXIT" in white letters on
red background in English and Arabic. It shall be energised from the batteries under
mains failure conditions. The mains failure device shall be sensed by an unswitched
phase connection from the local lighting circuit.

Volume 2 Page 293
Type E2 Shall indicate a self-contained, self-sustained (normally off) wall mounted emergency
lighting unit comprising a pilot light and two 100 watt spotlights complete with integral bat-
teries and control gear. The pilot light shall be energised under mains failure conditions
with manual "on demand" switches for the spotlights. The mains failure device shall be
sensed by an unswitched phase connection from the local lighting circuit.
Type E3 Shall indicate a self-contained, self-sustained (normally off) wall or ceiling mounted
emergency lighting unit complete with integral batteries and control gear. The lamps shall
be energised under mains failure conditions. The mains failure device shall be sensed by
an unswitched phase connection from the local lighting circuit.
Type E4 Shall indicate a 110V DC wall or ceiling mounted emergency lighting unit which shall be
manually switched and be similar to type E3.
Type H1 Shall indicate forward throw floodlight fitting comprising a sheet steel vitreous enamelled
or spun aluminium reflector housing a 500 Watt Halogen lamp. The fittings to be com-
plete with wall mounting bracket.
type H2 Shall indicate a semi cut-off roadway and perimeter security lantern with housing manu-
factured from a one piece LM6 aluminium alloy casting enamelled white internally and
equipped with reflector bowl of heat resisting glass, all suitable for housing the lamphold-
er and control gear for one 150 Watt sodium vapour lamp. The fitting to be equipped with
pole arm suitable to give an outreach of 1 metre.
Type S1 Shall indicate a 13 Amp single or double gang flush mounted switched socket outlet.
Type S2 Shall indicate a 13 Amp single or double gang surface mounted switched socket outlet.
Type S3 Shall indicate an ironclad one gang heavy duty 4 pole interlocked switched socket outlet
with scraping earth connection suitable for use on a 400V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz for 125A.
Each socket is to be supplied complete with cable box with 2 glands, suitable for termi-
nating a PVCWPVC cable and shall be fitted with a screwed dustproof cap attached to
the top of the socket by means of a chain. Matching plugs to be provided in each socket.
TypeS4 Shall indicate a 15 amp 3 phase 4 wire switched socket outlet with plug flush mounted.
13.29 Schedule of Lighting Requirements
13.29.1 Control Building
Location Service Illuminance (Lux) Glare Index

Control relay room 400 25
Behind panels 100 -
Office 500 20
Battery room 100 -
toilet 100 -
Corridors, stairs 100 20

Volume 2 Page 294
13.29.2 Outdoor Areas
Location Service Illuminance (Lux) Glare Index

Switchyard floodlighting 20 -
Transformer compounds 150 -
Roadway lighting 20 -
Perimeter wall security 20 -
Control building exterior 20 -
13.30 Air Conditioning and Ventilation
13.30.1 Scope of Work
This Section of the works covers the design, supply, delivery, installation, commissioning and setting
to work of the heating and ventilating systems for the control building.
All heating and ventilating systems shall be fully automatic in operation and shall be capable of main-
taining internal conditions within the bands of temperature and humidity specified hereafter.the substa-
tions are normally manned and allowance shall be made for at least four persons on site in the design.
13.30.2 Heating
Electrical heating shall be provided for each room of the building. Except for the battery room, the
heating shall comprise of 1500mm long tubular heaters with a load of 60 watts/foot (300mm) which
shall be mounted in double tier banks. Electric heaters shall be fitted with bright plate safety guards af-
fording full protection to the heating tubes. The Contractor shall assess the thermal performance of the
building and ensure that the sizes of units are adequate to maintain internal temperatures of 5 C
when the external temperature is -3 C, measured 1200mm above finished floor level out of an air
stream.
The heaters in each room shall be controlled by contactors which have thermostats connected into the
coil circuit. Thermostats shall be located in each room and have a maximum cut-off temperature of
17 C.
Each heater bank shall be equipped with a local isolator. The lower tubular heater shall be mounted at
500 mm above finished floor level.
13.30.3 Air Conditioning
The following areas shall be air conditioned:
Office
Control & Relay Protection room
Telecommunication/SCADA/PLC room
AC & DC Auxiliary Power Supply room

Volume 2 Page 295
Air conditioning shall be provided in the form of Air Cooled Split System Air Handling Units. The sys-
tems shall handle predominantly recirculated air with a controlled quantity of fresh air introduced either
at each unit or independently via a separate supply and extract system. Supply air distribution ducts
for the Control/Relay room shall be located in the false ceiling serving supply diffusers. Return (recir-
culated) air shall be drawn in through the front of each unit.
The cooling medium for the split System Air Handling Units shall be direct expansion provided by air
cooled refrigeration condensing units located on the roof of the building or wall mounted on building
exterior, and interconnected by refrigerant pipework to multi circuit direct expansion cooling coils.
Air conditioning system shall be thermostatically controlled to maintain internal conditions under con-
tinuous operation within the limits stated. Plant shall be arranged to facilitate maintenance and future
replacement of equipment.
13.30.4 Mechanical Ventilation
Supply and extract ventilation shall be provided to serve the following areas:
Battery Room
Toilets (Extract only)
Cable basement
Supply air handling plants shall consist of a sand trap fresh air intake louvre, insect screen, pre-filter,
bag filter, electric air heater battery, fan and distribution ductwork.
The air intake shall not face the prevailing wind.
Extract ventilation shall be provided by means of wall mounting fans, roof extract units or ducted sys-
tems with louvered discharges to atmosphere. Individual extract fans shall be provided for Battery
room and toilets.
Extract fans for battery room shall be corrosion resistant throughout, with a 4 mm PVC lining.
13.30.5 Basis for Design
(a) External Design Conditions
The external conditions for the calculation of duties for the mechanical services shall be with mean
monthly, maximum and minimum values as below:
Maximum ambient shade temperature: 45 C

Minimum ambient shade temperature: 4 C
Maximum daily average temperature: 35 C
Maximum annual temperature: 25 C
Relative humidity: maximum 100%, minimum 80%
Solar radiation: 100 mW / m

Volume 2 Page 296
All plant and equipment installed externally, or which can be affected by external condition shall be
capable of withstanding without damage or deterioration the effects of solar radiation, rain, wind, dust,
sand storms or other weather phenomena prevalent in the area in which particular building is located.
(b) Internal Design Conditions
Air conditioningsystems shall be capable of maintaining internal l conditions in all air conditioned areas
within the following bands or, if necessary for the satisfactory operation of the equipment housed,
more stringent requirements:
For substations 22+4 C DB, 40 to 70% R.H.
The following air change rates/hour shall be provided in mechanically ventilated area:
Battery rooms 10
Toilets 12 (extract only)
Cable basement 6
Other general areas 4
All air conditioning and ventilating systems shall be designed for continuous operation. Plant shall be
arranged to facilitate maintenance and future replacement of equipment.
The Contractor shall calculate heat gains and losses under the specified conditions for each part of
each building, taking into account solar radiation, thermal transmittance through roofs, walls,floors and
windows, fresh air requirements, heat emission from installed e1ectrical equipment and lighting, per-
sonnel, infiltration and any other sources. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the heat
transfer coefficients for all materials used in building construction. In the event of any change in mate-
rials. design or method of building construction, the Contractor shall at all times be responsible for re-
checking the design of all systems to ensure that they are capable of meeting the specified design re-
quirements.
13.30.6 Air Cooled Condensing Units
The cooling medium for the air conditioning shall be direct expansion refrigeration provided by air
cooled condensing units located externally.
The condensing units shall be of the fully packaged type requiring only site connection of refrigeration
pipework, isolated electrical supply and input from the control system.
The individual item of refrigerant equipment shall be matched such that the required performance of
the evaporator is achieved concurrently with the satisfactory operation of the compressor and ade-
quate heat rejection at the condenser. Each system as a whole shall maintain the correct duty at the
design ambient and operate at the maximum ambient conditions stated without exceeding the safe
operational limits of any individual item of equipment and without causing any safety device to oper-
ate.
All electrical equipment, control, magnetic coils and solenoids shall be manufactured specifically for
operation at the electrical characteristics specified herein and such items designedfor any other char-
acteristics shall not be used.

Volume 2 Page 297
Air cooled condensing units and air handling units that are inter-connected on site with refrigerant pip-
ing shall all be supplied by the same Manufacturer.
The casings of the condensing unit shall be weatherproof and shall incorporate adequate access and
inspection panels secured in place by rustproof fasteners.
The whole of the casing shall be treated for corrosion and weather resistance and ungalvanised mild
steel shall not be used (even if painted). The unit shall be finished in not less than two coats of weath-
er resistant finish, such as baked enamel of a light reflective colour.
The access panels shall be adequately sized for the service and removal of all working parts of l the
unit. All panels shall be stiffened and supported to prevent flexing and drumming.
Electrical equipment shall he contained in a fully weatherproofed enclosure with internal division be-
tween the power connections and equipment and the control connections and equipment.
13.30.7 Refrigeration Systems
Liquid lines shall be insulated where they are in direct sunlight or where they pass though non-air con-
ditioned areas.
Suction lines shall be insulated over their entire length.
All insulation to refrigerationpipework shall be of flexible, closed cell l foam phenolic rubber type with a
temperature range of -40C to +105C. They shall havea thermal conductivity of 0.0375 w/m C at
21C and a water vapour transmission of less than 6.0 ng/Ns.
The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the following tables:
Location Insulation Thickness for O.D. Pipe Size Range
Suction Lines
6-10mm 12-22mm
Exposed to weather 13mm 19mm
In air conditioned spaces 9mm 19mm
In non-air conditioned spaces 9mm 9mm
Liquid Lines
Exposed to weather and in non-air- 9 mm 19 mm
conditioned spaces
The refrigerant used shall conform to BS 4334 Group 1 or equivalent and shall be non-explosive, non-
combustive, non-toxic and non-irritating.
Packaged air conditioning plant items requiring interconnection with refrigeration piping on site shall
be leak tested by the Manufacturers and delivered to site with a holding charge of refrigerant.

Volume 2 Page 298
13.30.8 Console Air Conditioning Units
Console model room air conditioners shall be of the slim-line pattern and complete with 4-way adjust-
able grilles, heavy gauge zinc coated stove enamelled sheet steel casing with single or two colour
decorative finish. Electrical-heaters shall not be fitted.
The casing and position shall be such as to protrude not more than 250 mm into the air-conditioned
space and no external projection beyond the building line will be permitted other than the fixing of the
condenser cooling air grille.
The units shall be extremely quiet ill operation, the noise level not being higher than 30 dB. All sec-
tions of the casing shall be acoustically and thermallyinsulated.
Compressors shall be of the fully hermetic type, fitted with resilient mountings and complete with ther-
mal overload protection and starting relays.
Evaporators shall be manufactured of' copper tube with copper or aluminiumfins mechanically bonded.
The evaporator fan shall be of double inlet, double width type and complete with continuously rated to-
tally enclosed electric motor.
Filters shall be of the washable type, suitably positioned for easy access for cleaning.
Automatic control by means of an integral thermostat shall be provided, together with the safety con-
trol to prevent excessive cooling.
Motors shall be air-cooled and units shall be complete with internally mounted condenser cooling fans
with totally enclosed motors.
Fresh air shall be introduced separately by means of a central fresh air plant, where these units are
proposed to serve individual offices in a building.
Units shall be supplied as a whole and be suitable for easy removal and re-positioning should this be
desired at a later date.
13.30.9 Ductwork
All sheet metal ducting shall be manufactured andinstalled in accordance with the Institution of Heat-
ing arid Ventilation Engineers Guide to Current Practice Section B 16, the American Society of Heat-
ing, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, or the Heating and Ventilating Contractors Associa-
tion of United Kingdom Specification DW/142 or equivalent international standards for sheet metal
ductwork for low velocity low pressure air system with air velocity of up to 10 m/s.
Ail ductwork and fittings serving hazardous areas, such as battery rooms where corrosive fumes are
expected, shall be of rigid PVC materials.

Volume 2 Page 299
13.30.10 Condensate Drains
Provision shall be made for condensate to be passed into the rainwater drainage system. Condensate
drains must be routed directly into the drainage system or individual soakaways. Pipes discharging on-
to substation or building brick paving will not be permitted.
13.30.11 Extract Ventilation Units
This clause covers fan poweredextract ventilation units for mounting in walls and windows, on roofs
and in plant rooms.
Extract units shall incorporate propeller. aerofoil, axial, centrifugal or hybrid type fans which shall be
constructed in accordance with the relevant sections of this Specification.
Roof units shall comprise a galvanised sheet steel base suitable for use as a weathering skirt, a mild
steel fan/motor mounting frame and a spun aluminium cowl. The sheet steel base shall be constructed
to support the fan/motor without distortion and where the fan is belt driven shall incorporate a rigid
subframe for motor mounting. Fans shall be diaphragm mounted or fitted with a cylindrical casing de-
signed for removal from the unit from inside or outside the building without disturbing the weathering
skirt or cowl fixings. The cowl shall be weatherproofed and shall be hinge mounted to provide com-
plete access to the fad/motor.
Lubricating points shall be extended to a convenient access point.Stainless steel nuts, bolts and
washers shall be used for all fixings exposed to the weather.
13.30.12 Air Filters
All filter media hall be properly bonded and protected against filter fibre or particle migration. The di-
rection of air flow shall be clearly marked on all filter panels and on installation frames.
Access to filters shall be through removal panels fitted with quick release fasteners and rubber sealing
gaskets.
Each disposable panel filter system shall be provided with 4 complete spare sets for use during the
commissioning period. These sets shall be in addition to any filter cells supplied as spares in accord-
ance wit11 the general clauses of this specifications.
Filter performance shall, unless otherwise noted, be taken to mean the Overall Gravometric Efficiency
against BS 6540:Part I Duct Test or equivalent.
Filter media of all types and sizes shall be supported in rigid peripheral frames with internal or external
wire support of the media to ensure that the media shall not collapse under air flow. The
holding frames shall incorporate accurately sized channel sections to provide agood fitting for the fil-
ters.
The type of washable and/or disposal panel filters shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

Volume 2 Page 300
13.30.13 Grilles and Louvres
Grilles shall be of aluminium construction and shall be fixed by means of subframe with spring clips or
screw fixings.
The corners of front flanges of grilles and subframes shall be mitred and jointed to produce a clean
unbroken appearance and visible aluminium sections shall be free from extrusion marks.
Front flanges shall be at least 30mm wide and shall incorporate a lip of at least 4.5 mm and a felt gas-
ket. Blades shall be fixed at even centres with intermediate mullions giving support for blades of more
than 550 mm long. Grille finish shall be anodised natural aluminium colour except where otherwise in-
dicated.
Allgrilles shall be fitted with an opened blade damper for regulation purposes and shall be fittedwith
acoustically lined inlet plenums where necessary in order to comply with the acoustic limits of this
Specification.
Outdoor air louvres shall be of all extruded aluminium construction fitted with opposed blade dampers
in the connected ducting where necessary for air flow regulation, Movable blade louvres shall not be
used.
Louvres shall be weatherproof and shall incorporate an aluminium wire mesh screen on the inside sur-
face.
The dimensions of louvres for mounting inthe building structure shall suit the concrete block or brick
modules and shall be fixed to a hardwood frame.
13.30.14 Control Equipment
Each item of shall be provided with local isolation and/or emergency stop buttons to facilitate mainte-
nance, inspection and emergency operation.
The control system shall be of the electronic type, capable of providing the degree of thermostatic con-
trol specified. The Contractor shall provide full wiring diagram of all control circuits giving terminal con-
nection reference.
The control system shall incorporate all necessary safety interlocks for the successful operation of the
mechanical plant and system. All of the individual control elements shall be provided by the same
Manufacturer.
Temperature sensors shall be of the resistance type using nickel based elements and shall be accu-
rate to +1over the range of 0C to 30C. The sensor resistance shall be compatible with the measuring
bridge of the matching control box.
13.30.15 Electrical Connections
All electrical power control cables and wiring associated with the air conditioning and ventilation sys-
tems, including all connections between control panels, valves, thermostats, sensing probes and other
like items shall be supplied, installed and connected up as part of this contract.

Volume 2 Page 301
The cabling and wiring system shall comply with the requirements of the relevant clauses of this
Specification and be either surface or flush installation as appropriate.
Cables and wiring shall comprise either PVCWPVC laid in cleats or trenches, or PVC drawn into gal-
vanised conduits and trunking.
Final connections to electric motors and all other items of plant subject to movement and vibration
shall comprise flexible cable in flexible conduit.
13.30.16 Manufacturers
Wherever possible all air conditioning and ventilating plant shall be selected from a single Manufactur-
er's product range and origin. Where this is not possible, because of practical or technical constraints.
then the number of different sources of origin shall. be kept to a minimum. Local service facilities shall
be available for the equipment proposed.
The Contractor shall provide, with his submission, illustrated technical literature covering all plant and
equipment offered.
13.30.17 Standards
All air conditioning and ventilation equipment shall conform to British Standards, Chartered Institution
of Building Services or ASHRAE recommendations or other recognised International Standards.
13.30.18 Approval
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval copies of all his calculations forming the ba-
sis for the selection of all air conditioning and ventilating plant, plant selection details and full working
drawings. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibilities.
13.30.19 Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all installations covered by this section of
the Specifications for the period stated elsewhere in the Specification.
13.31 Earthing and Bonding
All equipment being supplied under this Section shall be effectively bonded to ensure earth continuity
throughout the system. Continuity may be provided by means of cable armouring but a separate earth
continuity conductor shall be included with all wiring in conduits. No reliance shall be placed on metal
to metal joints in conduits for earth continuity. The earth continuity conductors shall as far as possible
be in one continuous length to the furthest part of the installation from the controlling switchboard. The
earth conductor shall connect all metal cases housing electrical equipment. The branches shall be
connected to the main conductor by permanently soldered on mechanically clamped joints.

Volume 2 Page 302
13.32 Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall be required to prove that the installed system meets the design requirements and
Specification to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 303
14. Fibre-Optic Multiplexer Equipment for

Communication and Protection
14.1 Scope of Specification
This specification describes the communication requirements for the transport of voice, data and pro-
tection signals between the new substations existing substations and the National Load Dispatching
Centre (NLDC) in Rampura, including engineering, configuration, testing, installation, commissioning
and training.
The scope of work is to connect the Substation Automation System to the existing communication sys-
tem to be installed under this contract for securing the transport of voice, data and protection signals,
complete system for new substations and extension and integration into the existing system for exist-
ing substations.
The scope of work is to connect REMOTE END substations, too. All necessary equipment, ma-
terial and services shall be included in the contract price.
All materials and equipment offered shall be brand new, from the Manufacturer's normal and standard
construction, designed and manufactured according the latest technological methods.
For the purpose of standardisation of operating performance and facilities offered equipment shall be
compatible with the existing ones.
For standardization of operation performance, facilities and spare requirements, the fibre optic multi-
plexer equipment for communication and protection to be supplied under this project shall consist of
equipment which can totally be integrated into the existing telecommunication system in PGCB's net-
work, including the telecommunication network management system. The fibre optic multiplexeres
presently used in PGCB's network are:
ABB FOX 515/615, and

Areva MSE 5001
The manufacturer of Telecommunication System - Fibre optic multiplexer equipment for communica-
tion and protection shall be: ABB (CH/S) or GE (Canada/UK/USA) or equivalent.

Volume 2 Page 304
14.2 Summary of Standards
The Equipment shall comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations for the plesiochronuous and syn-
chronous hierarchies.
The equipment shall be KEMA type tested.
14.2.1 PDH Interfaces
The PDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:
ITU
ITU-T G.702 General aspects of digital transmission systems - Terminal equipment Digital hier-
archy bit rates
ITU-T G.703 Digital transmission systems - Terminal equipment - General Physical/electrical
characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.704 Digital transmission systems - Terminal equipment - General Synchronous frame
structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706 General aspects of digital transmission systems - Terminal equipment- Frame
alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame
structures defined in recommendation G.704
ITU-T G.71 1 Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies
ITU-T G.712 Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels
ITU-T G.732 General aspects of digital transmission systems - Terminal equipment - Character-
istics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s
ITU-T G.735 Characteristics of primary multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offer-
ing synchronous digital access at 384 kbit/s and/or 64 kbit/s
ITU-T G.736 General aspects of digital transmission - Characteristics of a synchronous digital
multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s
ITU-T G.737 Characteristics of external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offering
synchronous digital access at 384 kbit/s and/or 64 kbit/s
ITU-T G-823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks, which are based on the
2048 kbit/s hierarchy
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate
14.2.2 Architecture of Optical SDH Interfaces
The architecture of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommendations:
ETS/EN
ETS 300 147: Synchronous digital hierarchy multiplexing structure
ETS 300 417: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements of transport
functionality of equipment
ETS 300 417-1-1 / Generic Processes and Performance

Volume 2 Page 305
EN 300 417-1-1 V 1. 1.2:

ETS 300 417-2-1 / SDH and PDH Physical Section Layer Functions
EN 300 417-2-1 VI.1.2:
ETS 300 417-3-1 / STM-N Regenerator & Multiplex Section Layer Functions
EN 300 417-3-1 V 1. 1.2:
ETS 300 417-4-1 / SDH Path Layer Functions
EN 300 417-4-1 V 1. 1.2:
ITU
ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional
blocks
ITU-T G.803 Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy
(SDH)
ITU-T G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) network protec-
tion architectures
ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital
hierarchy
ITU-T G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical
fibre cables
ITU-T M.2101.1 Performance limits for bringing into service and maintenance of international SDH
paths and multiplex section
ITU-T T.50 International Reference Alphabet (IRA) - Information technology 7 bit coded char-
acter set for information interchange
14.2.3 Synchronisation and Timing of Optical SDH Interfaces
The synchronisation and timing of optical SDH interfaces shall conform to the following recommenda-
tions:
ETS/EN
ETS 300 417-6-1 / Synchronisation Layer Functions
EN 300 417-6-1 V 1. 1.2
ETS 300 462-1 / Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for synchro-
EN 300 462-1-1 V 1. 1. 1 nisation networks; Part 1: Definitions and terminology for synchronisation
networks.
EN 300 462-4-1 V1.1.1 Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for synchro-
nisation networks; Part 4-1: Timing characteristics of slave clocks suita-
ble for synchronisation supply to Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment
ETS 300 462-5 / Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for synchro-
EN 300 462-5-1 V1.1.2 nisation networks; Part 5: Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable
for operation in Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment

Volume 2 Page 306
ITU
ITU-T G.813: Timing characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment
slave clocks (SEC)
14.3 Abbreviations
ADM Add-drop multiplexed

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
CAP Carrier-less Amplitude and Phase
CAS Channel Associated Signalling
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
EN European Norm
EOW Engineering Order Wire
ETS European Telecommunications Standards
GPS Global Positioning System
HDSL High Density Subscriber Line
IEC International Electrical Commission
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ITU International Telecommunication Union
LAN Local Area Network
MCMI Multi Coded Mark Inversion
MS Multiplex Section
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
OS Optical Section
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
RS Regenerator Section
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SOH Section Overhead
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
VC Virtual Container
VF Voice Frequency
14.4 General Requirements
The digital multiplex equipment shall be universal, software-controlled, and provide various interface
cards to connect tributary interfaces signals such as voice, teleprotection and data to aggregate inter-
faces. On aggregate level 2Mbit/s and 8Mbit/s electrical interfaces complying with ITU-T recommenda-

Volume 2 Page 307
tions G.703 / G.704 and 2Mbit/s HDSL interfaces shall be available. In addition, optical STM-1 aggre-
gate interfaces on 155Mbit/s shall be available. All modules shall form an integrated part of a shelf.
The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kbit/s signals and allocate them to
determined time slots in the 2Mbit/s streams. Path protection on 64 kbit/s and 2Mbit/s shall be sup-
ported.
It shall be suitable for operation in substation with harsh environment with high electromagnetic inter-
ference, be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real time signals such as voice,
SCADA, teleprotection and status/control signals.
The equipment offered shall already be working successfully in telecommunication networks operated
by power utilities. It shall comply to the latest ITU-T standards and be able to be interconnected with
telecommunication equipment.
Any equipment in the network shall be manageable from a control centre and there shall be means to
supervise external/existing equipment as well.
As a minimum modules for the following user signals shall be available as plug-in units for the digital
multiplexer:
Analogue subscriber interface: subscriber and exchange side

4-wire E&M voice interface
G.703, 64kbit/s data Interface
X.24/V. 11 (RS-422), Nx 64kbit/s data interface
V.24/V.28 (RS-232), data interface
V.35, Nx 64kbit/s data interface
Data interface V.36 (RS-449), Nx 64kbit/s data interface (V. 10)
Alarm collection interface
Teleprotection command interface
Binary signal (status and control) interface
2Mbit/s electrical interface for unframed signals acc. to ITU-T G.703 and framed signals acc. to
G.703 and G.704.
Additionally, the equipment shall provide the following aggregate interfaces:
STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) optical 1+1 interface for medium and long distances, with automatic laser shut
down.
STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) optical add-drop interface for medium and long distances, with automatic laser
shut down
STM-1 (155 Mbit/s) electrical interface
2 Mbit/s HDSL interface
The equipment shall be equipped with a ringing generator for analogue subscriber interfaces.
These specifications deal with the technical requirements for the fibre optic cables, fibre optic and mul-
tiplex equipment and PLC to be used in the telecommunication system of Aminbazar 400 kV Substa-
tion,of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV Substation, Mongla 400 kV Substation and Meghnaghat 400 kV
Substation.
The following types of fibre optic cables and telecommunication equipment shall be used:

Volume 2 Page 308
Fibre optic ducted cables (FD),

Fibre optic patch cords (FP),
Optical Distribution Frame (ODF),
Configurable SDH/PDH multiplex equipment,
Digital PLC
Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
All the equipment shall comply with the requirements specified herein; for additional features see the
technical data schedules.
For detailed technical data, please refer to, Technical Data Schedules.
14.4.1 Equipment Requirements
14.4.1.1 Fibre Optic Cables
14.4.1.1.1 Fibre Optic Ducted Cables
The ducted fibre optic cables will be connected to OPGW comprising ITU-T.G655 cores. The fibre op-
tic ducted cables between the optical distribution cabinet in substations buildings and hood closures
mounted on gantries of the O/H lines shall have the following characteristics:
48 cores,
Operational wavelength shall be 1550 nm ,
Maximum optical attenuation shall be 0.25 dB/km at 1550 nm,
G655 fibre optics: maximum chromatic dispersion coefficients shall be 3.5 ps/nmper km at 1550
nm,
Maximum attenuation loss variation at temperature range of -25C to + 70C shall be 0.05 dB/km,
The tensile strength of the cable shall be such that a nominal pulling tension of 1000 N shall cause
no temporary or permanent optical degradation or mechanical cable damage, for optical cables for
blowing-in, and 2000 N for optical cables for mechanical pulling in,
The permissible bending radius of the cable shall be recommended by the Contractor,
The optical fibre shall be made of germanium dopes silica or pure silica glass. The diameter of the
unclogged optical fibre shall be 9.5 m with a tolerance of 0.5 m,
The cladding of the optical fibre shall be made of lower refractive index silica glass,
The diameter over cladding shall be 125 m with a tolerance of 3 m,
The optical fibre shall have a primary coating made of silicone or similar material with physical and
mechanical properties of at least those of silicone acrylate. The diameter over primary coating shall
be 250 m with tolerance 15 m,
The strength member of the fibre optic cable shall provide protection against buckling, kinking and
strain. The material to be used shall be fibre reinforced plastic,
The outer jacket shall be made of polyethylene. Nominal thickness of the outer jacket shall be 1.5
mm. The Manufacturer may propose a thicker jacket, if necessary,
The anti-termite protection shall be made of rigid plastics (UV proven) over the outer cable jacket,
The jackets for all the cables shall be durably marked at intervals not exceeding one meter.

Volume 2 Page 309
14.4.1.1.2 Fibre Optic Patch Cords
The fibre optic patch cords between optical distribution frame and optical line equipment in substations
buildings shall have the same characteristics as fibre optic ducted cable with the following exceptions:
The number of fibres shall be 1 for each patch cord.
Anti-termite protection of cable is not required.
Patch cords are more flexible and are ended with connectors.
14.4.1.2 Optical Distribution Frame
14.4.1.2.1 General
All fibres of the substation fibre optic cables shall be ended and spliced in the optical distribution
frame.
The optical distribution frame shall be installed in freestanding or wall-standing distribution racks.
Assignment between substation fibre cable and optical terminal equipment shall be made by the help
of jumper fibres on the optic distribution frame.
Capacity of the optic distribution frame shall allow free assignment between each individual fibre of the
station fibre optic cables and the relevant optical I/O ports of the SDH multiplexers.
When there are several station fibre optic cables coming from several distinct directions in one station,
only one optic distribution frame may be proposed with the adequate connection capacity covering the
needs of all the links and SDH multiplexers.
The optic distribution frame shall be equipped with low loss optical connectors of the screw-on type.
Auxiliary connectors shall be provided to facilitate testing and maintenance of the fibres. All spare fi-
bres shall be properly terminated and spliced on connectors.
14.4.1.2.2 Optical Distribution Frame Characteristics
The optical distribution frame with connectors for fibre optic ducted cables shall have the following
characteristics:
Capacity for 48 fibres.
Maximum optical attenuation shall be 0.1 dB per splice.
The housing of the box shall be standing type, tamper-proof sealed and of rugged construction
The optical connectors shall be LC/PC type.
14.4.1.3 SDH Equipment
14.4.1.3.1 General
The fibre optic equipment supplied under the current project shall be based on the Synchronous Digi-
tal Hierarchy (SDH) technology.
The SDH system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode fibre optics and shall
comply with the following ITU.T. Recommendations: ITU.T. G.707, G.708, G.709, G.757, G.758.

Volume 2 Page 310
SDH equipment shall be of STM-16 level (2500 Mbit/s).

The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual cir-
cuits (E1 etc.) from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM frame. Cross
connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network
components.
The SDH optical multiplexer equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating
functions. The aggregate ports of the SDH optical multiplexer equipment shall be capable of operating
in a 1+1 protected mode as part of a point to point link, or as an East/West mode when used in a drop
and insert chain. All features and functions of the SDH multiplexer equipment shall be readily software
configurable to suit operational requirements of the fibre optic communication system.
The SDH multiplexer equipment shall be capable of being used as cross connect, a hub, add/drop and
or terminal multiplexer.
The multiplexer shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehen-
sive range of plesiochronous or synchronous tributaries including 2 Mbit/s, Ethernet 10/100 and STM-
1.
The SDH multiplexer shall be housed in a rack and shall comprise, but not be limited to, the following
functional elements:
Optical line interface,
Electrical line interface,
Tributary module,
Switching unit,
Control and alarm functions,
Engineering Order wire (EOW) unit for service telephone,
Service data interface.
14.4.1.3.2 Reference Standards
SDH equipment shall be compliant with the following ITU.T. Recommendations:

ITU.T. G.707,
ITU.T. G.708,
ITU.T. G.709,
ITU.T. G.757,
ITU.T. G.758.
14.4.1.3.3 Optical Line Interface
The optical line interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switching
unit into a STM-16 2500 Mbit/s stream. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an opti-
cal signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side.
Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1550 nm over 2
optical fibres. The optical interfaces shall comply with ITU.T.G.957/ 958 recommendations.
Basically, the electro-optic converter shall be of a semiconductor distributed feedback (DFB) laser di-
ode type with power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and preferably suitable for
minimizing the number of repeaters.
The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions, the launch power shall be sig-
nificantly reduced to a safe level. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are in-
terconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at
both ends of the section.

Volume 2 Page 311
Transmitters which output optical power of a sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have
mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the
equipment. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points.
Transmitters shall provide data scrambling to facilitate the continuous transmission of data timing in-
formation.
In the receive direction the line interface unit shall disassemble the incoming composite STM data
stream into its line, supervisory, control and E.O.W. signals before being sent to the switching unit.
The opto-electronic converter shall use an avalanche photodiode (APD) detector with narrow band
phase lock loop synchronisation to facilitate low jitter levels.
Receiver line decoding and de-scrambler functions shall perform the inverse function to those of the
transmitter coder sections.
The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of
the network. A BER of better than 10-9 for received signal level of -28 dBm at bit rate of 2500 Mbit/s
and at an ambient temperature of +55C shall be required as a minimum.
The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and
ageing of the system.
It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM signals to
be terminated when the equipment is configured as an Add / Drop multiplexer.
14.4.1.3.4 Electrical Line Interface
The electrical line interface shall perform the same functions as the optical line interface unit. The
STM-1 electrical line signals shall comply with ITU.T.G.707 recommendation.
14.4.1.3.5 Tributary Module
The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction / insertion of 2 Mbit/s tributaries to and from
the STM-16 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption.
It shall permit any 2 Mbit/s channel to be inserted or dropped without causing deterioration of the
transmission quality. The drop and insert functions shall be user configurable both locally and remotely
through a user interface unit.
The tributary module shall be capable of supporting higher tributary data rates up to 140 Mbit/s or
STM-1.
The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance
with ITU.T.G.707 recommendation that shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the
switching unit.
14.4.1.3.6 Optical Tributary Module
The optical tributary module shall allow the connection of a minimum of four data channels from the
SCADA system.
14.4.1.3.7 Switching Unit
A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any
tributary port or any other line port. Additionally, it shall allow full cross connections between tributar-
ies.

Volume 2 Page 312
The switching unit shall be designed to avoid complete failure of drop / insert and cross connect func-
tions provided.
14.4.1.3.8 Control and Alarm Functions
Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring,
alarm and fault monitoring, system configuration, bandwidth management, dynamic allocation, auto-
matic re-routing, prioritising of channels, testing and maintenance facilities. These functions shall inter-
face to the network management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to
be carried out locally and remotely.
The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status of
the SDH multiplexer equipment. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit
error monitoring facilities.
The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH multiplexer equipment:
Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment,
Bit error rate (BER) threshold high,
Optical receive level low,
Multiplex input failure,
Loss of clock signal,
Distant alarms,
Power supply failure or out of limits.
An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and, if
applicable, adjacent repeater station alarms, showing the location of each alarm displayed. It is pref-
erable that the system shall be able to provide details of origin, date of the occurrence of alarms.
The alarm concept shall conform to ITU.T.G.812 recommendation. Test points shall be available on
each unit to help in failure diagnosis.
14.4.1.3.9 Employer's Representative Order Wire (EOW) Unit
An Employer's Representative order wire system providing call, ring and speech facilities shall be pro-
vided with each SDH multiplexer. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM bit
stream, either by utilising overhead bytes in the system code, or by using specially provided multiplex-
er equipment. The system shall be configured as an omnibus circuit, with a telephone handset, selec-
tive calling to reach any station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and re-
peater site.
14.4.1.3.10 Service Data Interface
The SDH equipment shall have service interface for telecommunication management system (1200
bps, ITU-T Rec. V.11).
Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH overhead bit
stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers
to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system.
The number, bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder.

Volume 2 Page 313
14.4.1.3.11 Lightning Protection
The SDH multiplexer equipment shall be shielded from damage by lightning or power induction. The
equipment shall be capable of withstanding surges at the rate of 2 kV per microsecond at least.
14.4.1.3.12 Connector
The equipment shall be provided with connectors having the following features:
Insertion losses less than 0.5 dB,
Durability: 500 mating cycles at least,
Return loss: >40 dB,
Cable retention: 100 N.
14.4.1.3.13 Power Budgeting
The Bidder shall provide power budget calculation to prove that the proposed equipment will operate
-9
on the link within acceptable bit error rate of 10 or better.
The result of the power budget calculations shall indicate the maximum link's length covered with the
proposed SDH multiplexers by taking into account the:
Transmit power at point S: x dBm (characteristic of the proposed SDH multiplexers),
Receive power at point R: y dBm (characteristic of the proposed SDH multiplexers),
Equipment margin: 3 dB,
Cable margin: 3 dB,
Fibre attenuation at 1550 nm: 0.23 dB/km,
Splicing loss: 0.1 dB,
Quantity of splicing per km: 0.33/km (for OPGW).
The Bidder shall also take into account in the calculations the additional attenuation introduced by the
optic heads (connectors, fibres jumpers) and the station fibre optic cables (with splicing at the terminal
junction box).
A 6 dB transmission margin as a minimum is required.
14.4.1.3.14 Synchronisation
The comprehensive SDH system will be synchronised using the signal of SDH equipment indicated by
PGCB. The synchronisation solution shall be compliant with ITUT.G803 recommendation.
14.4.1.4 Digital Multiplexer Interfaces
14.4.1.4.1 General
Digital multiplexer provides data, teleprotection and telephone channels. Modules of the digital multi-
plexer shall be preferably integrated within the rack of the SDH equipment.

Volume 2 Page 314
14.4.1.4.2 Telephone Units
It shall be possible to use the following telephone and data interface modules even if these modules
are not installed within the frame of this Project.
The VF channel and signalling units shall be of 2 wires for FXS. These units shall be of plug in type.
The nominal VF levels and adjustable range shall be with 2 wire working (600 ohms):
transmit 0 dBm,
receive 0 dBm,
the levels shall be adjustable over the range of 15 dB from -12 dBm to +3 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB.
14.4.1.4.3 Teleprotection Signalling Terminal Unit
Teleprotection functions shall be provided by dedicated SDH modules:
No. of input commands: 2 x 4,
No. of output commands: 2 x 4,
Command inputs: optocoupler 24 V to 110 V DC,
Command outputs: By solid-state relay 110 V DC / 2 A,
Power supply 48 V DC plus pole earthed.
Both cyclic and manual loop tests of transmission while the system is in service shall be provided. Us-
ing the built-in test socket and a hand-held terminal operational information and equipment settings
shall be read out.
The following indications shall be provided:
Indications on the front of panel of the existence of guard signal shall be available at both ends.
Loop test facilities shall be provided at both ends.
Test points for the checking of levels shall be provided on the front of panels.
The design shall be such that if a real trip signal is actuated by the protective relays during a loop test,
the real tripping impulses shall override the test facilities to effect actual tripping of breakers to protect
the systems.
Alarms contacts will be provided to indicate the position, operating status and abnormalities of the pro-
tection signalling terminals.
Each separate alarm relay that indicates any of these alarms should have at least two voltage free
contacts. In addition, there should be an alarm indication on each panel to show separately the nature
of each alarm. The following alarms are to be signalled:
Transmitter failure,
Input power failure,
Receiver alarms,
Interruption or
Prolongation of tripping signal.
All alarms shall be wired up to telecommunication management system and power control system.
During the receiver alarm signal, the protection signal should be blocked completely, i.e. the final trip
of relays should be completely disabled.
14.4.1.4.4 Optical Booster
Optical boosters/amplifiers shall be used for long distance links to avoid the implementation of inter-
mediate optical regenerators.

Volume 2 Page 315
Optical boosters/amplifiers shall be fully compliant with ITU-T Recommendations applicable to SDH
equipment.
The operating wavelength will be 1550 nm.
Optical boosters/amplifiers will be used for 2500 Mbit/s bit rate (STM-16). The output optical power will
be in the range of +10 dBm to +26 dBm depending on the length of the optical link. The following
alarm contacts will be available:
Low output power
Output power failure
Power supply failure
Optical boosters/amplifiers will be provided with relevant interfaces for maintenance/configuration pur-
poses by means of a laptop. All necessary software for maintenance/configuration operation shall be
provided.
14.4.1.5 Digital PLC (Power Line Carrier)
14.4.1.5.1 General
Transmission shall be carried out by single side band (SSB) with suppressed carrier amplitude modu-
lated equipment. Other modulation types can be taken into consideration.
The nominal bandwidth is 8 kHz (4 kHz for each transmission direction) or 16 kHz (8 kHz for each
transmission direction) depending on the transmission bit rate. The equipment shall operate within a
frequency range from 40 kHz to 500 kHz.
Basically, digital PLC equipment comprises three main parts:
User interface module providing the digital user interfaces (for voice, data and teleprotection pur-
poses).
Modem module to process interface signals to provide an adapted signal for high frequency signal
modulation.
High frequency module comprising an amplifier. This module converts the modem signal into a car-
rier frequency. On the reception side, this module retrieves the relevant signal from the high fre-
quency signal to be processed by the modem
The digital PLC equipment shall comply with the following standards:
IEC 604945: Single sideband power-line carrier terminals
IEC 60834-1: Teleprotection equipment of power systems - Performance and testing
IEC 60950-1: Information technology equipment - Safety
IEC 61000-6-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-6-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), generic standards - Immunity for industrial
environments.
IEC 61000-6-4: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Emission standard for industrial environ-
ments
IEC 721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions
IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s)
14.4.1.5.2 Services
The PLC equipment shall integrate all the applications that are necessary for telecommunication sys-
tems of power utilities, i.e.:

Volume 2 Page 316
Voice frequency channel for telephone communications

Asynchronous data channels
Synchronous data channels (only applicable for digital PLC)
Teleprotection channels
Digital PLC shall be provided with Ethernet IEEE 802.3 interfaces.
PLC equipment configuration shall be flexible in order to adapt the needs to the transmission link ca-
pacity.
14.4.1.5.3 Interfaces
The PLC equipment shall have the capability to propose the following interfaces:
4-wire E&M PAX interface
2-wire subscriber interface (FXS/FXO)
2-wire PABX interface
Asynchronous data channel (200 to 19200 bit/s) according to V24, V28 ITU Recommendations.
Synchronous data channel according to X24, V11, G.703 ITU Recommendations (Digital PLC)
Ethernet 10/100 port
14.4.1.5.4 User Interface

The PLC equipment shall provide a RS 232 or Ethernet port for connecting a laptop to offer the follow-
ing facilities:
Setting of the operation frequencies and transmission bandwidth
Setting of the user ports for voice, data and teleprotection with respect to levels, data speed.
Polling of alarms
14.4.1.5.5 Technical Features
Output Power: an output power of 20 or 40 W shall be considered. Basically, the attenuation of the
OHL for the carrier signal ranges from 10 to 30 dB according to the OHL length. The signal to noise
ratio shall be better than 20 dB.
Carrier Oscillators: The generation of carrier frequencies shall be fully synthesized. It shall be pos-
sible to select the carrier frequencies within the whole carrier frequency range by a user-friendly PC
software.
Accuracy and stability of the main oscillator frequency: 20 ppm.
Automatic Gain Control: Automatic gain control (AGC) shall be provided as part of the present pro-
ject. The Tenderer shall state the means of obtaining AGC and the degree of regulation reached.
Range of AGC operation on PLC = 40db
Receiver Sensitivity The receiver sensitivity of the PLC equipment receiver shall be -30 dBm.
Impedance The PLC equipment impedance at the high frequency access shall be 75 Ohms
Power Supply: The PLC equipment shall be power supplied by a 48 V DC system.
Nominal voltage: 48 Vdc
Power supply range: 48 Vdc +20% -15%
Power consumption to be indicated by the Contractor.

Volume 2 Page 317
14.4.1.6 Main Distribution Frame
Main distribution frames shall be provided in substations where interface between various telecommu-
nication / SCADA / telephone equipment is required. The distribution frames shall be equipped to pro-
vide the termination of internal network terminations.
The MDF shall consist of a rack and quick-connection components. The cabinets shall be vermin
proof. Provision shall be made for earthing the cabinet to the earthing system at each station.
The rack shall constitute the number of vertical rows needed to meet the connection requirements at
each station with a capacity of at least 50% in terms of components and 100% in terms of space kept
for future augmentation. The rack shall be expandable to the right or the left by using rows of the same
height.
The cables shall be terminated on tag blocks installed on these vertical rows, each capable of ac-
commodating at least 10 pairs. Access to the cable termination tag blocks shall be from the front.
The interconnection components shall be solderless and screwless electrical connections in accord-
ance with IEC 60050, part 581:
the connection shall be realised according to the insulation piercing method. It shall be made by
clamping an insulated conductor into a connecting terminal which cuts or pierces the insulation and
grips the core, without previous stripping of the insulation. Such a connection is achieved in a frac-
tion of the time required for conventional soldering, screwing or wrapping connections,
the insulation piercing connection component shall be designed for wires with single case conduc-
tors with diameters in the range 0.2 to 1.4mm, and for wires with stranded conductors with a con-
ductor cross-section from 0.05 to 1.5mm, used in the communication technology and for infor-
mation processing equipment and installations,
the connection and disconnection shall be realised with an unique quick connect; one tool to be
provided with each cabinet and installed in such a manner that it cannot be removed from the cabi-
net.
The Contractor shall provide the following information on the proposed insulation piercing connection
component:
climatic category,
current carrying capacity,
contact resistance,
quantity of connection / disconnection operations allowed by the connector,
influence on data transmissions,
the recommended method for easily marking the pairs, strips and rows.
14.4.1.7 Installation Requirements
The installation work shall include the installation of: all equipment, all indoor and outdoor cables to be
supplied by the Contractor as well as the connection to the existing equipment including the clarifica-
tion of interfaces if this is required under this section and all the temporary works necessary for instal-
lation.

Volume 2 Page 318
The Contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, material, equipment and services, and shall per-
form all work necessary for installing the specified equipment and accessories ready for commercial
operation. The work includes transportation of all materials to the site, storage at site and transporta-
tion from storage to the place of installation. Everything required for complete and operating equip-
ment, although not expressly called for in the technical specifications or drawings, shall be performed
and provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
In order to expedite completion of the project, multiple installation crews shall be provided by the Con-
tractor such that several site installations (substations and / or power plants) can proceed simultane-
ously.
14.4.2 Special Equipment and Tools
The test equipment and tools shall be sufficient to allow efficient routine maintenance, fault diagnosis,
fault location, fault remedy and repair to be undertaken during installation, commissioning and testing
works to be provided in the scope of the contract.
Each set of test equipment shall be supplied new, complete with suitable carrying cases with provision
for holding all necessary cables, manuals, cabling, clips, adapters and probes for connection to all rel-
evant equipment to be tested.
The Contractor shall use its own tools and test equipment during installation. The equipment used for
the installation operations which are similar to operations during maintenance should be of the same
kind as the corresponding tools delivered.
Tools and test equipment are covered by the contractual conditions of guarantee, to end not before
the end of the Defect Liability period whatever the date of first use.
The Bidder shall propose suitable test equipment batches for the all systems supplied as part of the
contract, i.e.: telecommunication equipment, concerning in particular the SDH optical network, togeth-
er with all other specific kind of equipment.
The list of tools and test equipment shall include description and use, and justification of the quantity
proposed.
The corresponding unit rates and the total price of each item shall be provided in the Price Schedules.
The unit rate shall remain firm during the execution of the contract.
The Contractor shall provide at least, the following tools:
Laptop PC with communication port and all relevant test software.
14.4.3 Installation Requirements
In addition to the General Technical Specifications, the following shall be fulfilled:
The Contractor shall install the equipment accurately in accordance with the specifications, instruc-
tions and drawings. He shall perform the installation works under the supervision of the Employer.
The Contractor shall install all optical ducted cables and patch cords.

Volume 2 Page 319
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval documents showing the schedule of in-
stalling all the equipment, electrical conduits and appurtenances prior to the beginning of the instal-
lation works.
The necessary test records and data shall be submitted to the Employer for approval during the in-
stallation work.
All cables shall be identified by means of bands (one at each end) with indicated numbering code
defining type and size of cable, etc.
14.4.4 Performance Guarantees
The equipment shall comply with the following requirements:
Reliability:
MTTR - 5 hours,
MTBF - 20 years,
for fibre optic cable - number of failures during one year exploitation: maximum one on 1000
km.
Availability >99.995%,
Electromagnetic compatibility and insulation shall comply with requirements for emission and im-
munity EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 and IEC 61000,
Electrical safety shall comply with the safety requirements according to IEC 60950,
Seismic conditions: fibre optic and multiplex equipment shall be designed to resist earthquake load-
ings resulting from accelerations specified in the General Technical Specifications,
Ambient conditions for normal operation:
Climatic conditions shall comply with IEC requirements,
Temperature range: -5C to 50C - -5C to 50C (for fibre optic cable),
Relative humidity < 95%.
14.4.5 Inspection and Tests
14.4.5.1 General
Concerning general test requirements, the following shall apply:
Testing procedures and time schedules shall be specified by the Contractor and shall be subjected
to approval of the Employer.
Tests shall be carried out in order to determine whether the material and apparatus comply with the
technical specifications. All tests shall be arranged to represent the working conditions as closely
as possible. All test results shall be subject to the approval of Employer.
All tests on the equipment both at the Manufacturer's factory and after completion of erection at site
shall be made in accordance with IEC recommendations if not otherwise agreed by the Employer.
If the IEC recommendations are not available for the particular tests, the scope, standards and
methods applied shall be specified by the Contractor and will be subject to the approval of the Em-
ployer.
Any additional tests as may be needed to confirm guaranteed data or to ensure the completeness
and safety of the equipment may be ordered by the Employer.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate standard instruments and other measuring equipment
necessary to carry out the tests.

Volume 2 Page 320
A written notice of the time and place of all shop tests shall be given to the Employer at least 4
(four) weeks in advance, so that he may be present if he so desires. The Contractor's records of all
tests shall be furnished to the Employer immediately on completion of each test.
Following the tests at site, the Contractor shall, at his own expense and within the terms of Con-
tract, rectify any defect and replace any defective part, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
14.4.5.2 Workshop Tests
14.4.5.2.1 Type Tests
The type tests (if technical full equivalent type test not available) as specified below shall be carried
out on one complete item of each kind of equipment at the Manufacturer's works in accordance with
the latest revision of the relevant IEC Publications except where otherwise specified. The test result
shall be submitted to the Employer for his consideration and his approval immediately after completion
of tests.
The following type tests shall be performed:
a. Measurement of voltage, current and level at check points,
b. Measurement of transmitting output and receiving input level,
c. Measurement of output frequency and its stability,
d. Checking of permissible supply voltage variations and power consumption.
14.4.5.2.2 Factory Acceptance Tests
The factory acceptance tests shall be carried out in the presence of PGCB personnel on all the
equipment to be supplied in accordance with the requirements set out in the relevant IEC publications.
The test results shall be submitted to the Employer for consideration immediately after completion of
tests.
The following factory acceptance tests shall be performed:
a. Visual check of the equipment to verify conformity with the specifications,
b. Verification of the equipment features (measuring of voltage, current and level at each check
point; supervisory and alarm test),
c. Verification of the equipment performances.
Those tests must include:
Equipment start test,
Simulation of real working conditions,
Verification of proper: voltage variation range, diagnostics, performances, functionality, applied
software, etc.,
Equipment start test after mains failure,
Verification of equipment operation in a case of allowable voltage variation.
14.4.5.3 Site Tests
14.4.5.3.1 General
On arrival at site and during and after completion of erection, all items of equipment shall be inspected
and tested to ensure that there shall be no delay in commissioning due to supply of incorrect or dam-
aged equipment. The site tests are subdivided into two stages:
tests during and after completion of erection of all equipment,

Volume 2 Page 321
commissioning tests.
14.4.5.3.2 Tests During and After Completion of Installation
In order to ensure correct installation of the equipment as well to prove that the equipment has been
correctly installed, the following tests shall be performed during and after completion of erection on all
equipment:
Verification of proper and complete erection of all equipment,
Verification of proper DC supply voltage, connections to main distribution frames, connections to
earthing, fuses, labelling, diagnostics, performances, functionality, and applied software, etc.,
Preliminary checking of operation.
14.4.5.3.3 Commissioning Tests
The main objective of the commissioning tests is to check the proper and safe operation of the equip-
ment and in particular, to verify and confirm performance guarantees as defined in the technical speci-
fications and the technical data schedules.
Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with a detailed commissioning test method prepared
by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.
All optical fibres of OPGW shall be tested in the field from end to end at each applicable location using
the ODTR method:
Optical fibre attenuation at 1550 nm (maximum attenuation 0.23 dB/km),
Optical fibre splice loss at 1550 nm (maximum attenuation 0.1 dB/splice),
Checking of complete cable installation (outdoor and indoor) and all connections to main distribu-
tion frames in substations,
Measurement of insulation resistance (for complete cable installation), wire-wire (in one cable pair),
wire-earth,
Checking the optical budget, transmission margin and bit error rate of each fibre optic link,
Checking of operation of complete system,
Checking of supervisory system signalling,
Measurement of channel properties,
Checking of operation of complete telephone network (call test, speech quality),
Checking of operation of complete protection system.
For performance of the tests, the applicable approved standards (IEC publications) shall be observed.
Details of methods of measurement, conditions and conduct of the tests at site shall be mutually
agreed between the Employer and the Contractor and laid down in a separate defining the sequence
of the tests, the equipment preparation and operation procedure to be followed.
The Employer, in collaboration with the Employer, is responsible for obtaining the agreements from
any authority about specific conditions of the test operation.
Appropriate standard and special instruments and other measuring equipment, shall be provided by
the Contractor.
14.4.5.3.4 Guarantee Test
The guarantee test operation shall be carried out under supervision and responsibility of the Contrac-
tor.
During this period, the Employer's staff shall be made fully acquainted with the operation and the rou-
tine maintenance of the plant.

Volume 2 Page 322
The time schedule of test operations and issuing of the corresponding certificates shall be under the
terms specified in the General Conditions of Contract.
14.4.6 Documentation
The documents necessary for the qualification and operation of an equipment can be classed into
three categories:
the identification file,

the documents supplied with the equipment,
the documents related to quality control.
All the technical documents related to the project shall be provided in two formats:
conventional paper,
CD ROM.
They shall be in English. The "paper documents" shall be supplied in A4 format files, the paper sheets
to be punched with the international spacing.
14.4.6.1 Identification File
This is the totality of the documents which define equipment from the point of view of its operation as
well as of its construction.This file is a contractual reference document, used to ascertain that a mass-
produced equipment is identical to the equipment which was qualified.
The file must include, in addition to the specifications, as a minimum, the following documents:
14.4.6.1.1 Diagrams, Drawings, Lists of Components
The diagrams, drawings and list of documents must obligatory be present in the file:
functional block diagram,
circuit diagram,
construction drawing,
component location drawings,
dimensional drawing,
list of documents.
In the case of non-complex equipment, several of these documents may be compiled into a single
document.
14.4.6.1.2 Operation Manual, Instructions for Use
This document is intended for the user and comprises one or several sections in which the various in-
formation regarding the operation, commissioning and maintenance are detailed. It shall include, but
not be limited to:
The functional characteristics:

Volume 2 Page 323
definition of the main use of the equipment,

operating principles,
characteristics and main features (accuracy, stability, etc.),
characteristics and features of each sub-assembly or module,
detailed description of circuits (drawings),
electrical parameters (voltage, current, amplitude and shape of signals, etc.) for every main point of
the circuit diagrams and, notably, for the test points.
The technological characteristics:
size characteristics, weight,
physical distribution of the equipment in assemblies, sub-assemblies, modules,
comments on the construction drawing (internal and external connections),
information related to the mechanical construction (functional drawing or mobile parts),
accessibility of the various elements (safety dismantling, re-assembling).
Commissioning instructions:
Set up of the equipment. The conditions of equipment set-up are defined by:
instructions for the complete mounting of the equipment with installation and layout drawings,
directions for the installation in rooms (ventilation, accessibility, etc.),
directions for equipment enabling (instructions for connecting, earthing, etc.).
Preparation for operation. The commissioning instructions for an equipment are defined by:
the description of all the steps to perform to prepare the equipment for the provided functions
(power application, adjustments, ...) with their sequence order
the indications for the preliminary adjustment of the equipment with respect to the values to be
measured corresponding to normal operation (possibly characteristics of measurement equip-
ment such as input impedance).
Maintenance instructions:
List of preventive maintenance operations giving:
nature,
periodicity,
duration (as appropriate).
Description of maintenance operations: For each operation, all the necessary instructions shall be
provided (when an instruction is common to several operations, a single description is tolerated).
These instructions relate, among others, to:
safety rules,
measurements to be performed on circuits (methods, equipment, typical values within toleranc-
es),
adjustments (list and location of devices),
non-electrical upkeep.
Troubleshooting method: A guide is drafted to methodically locate failures. It includes, in particular,
an analytical chart linking element failure to the nature of the observed problem. For equipment fit-
ted with a self-test system, the manual shall state the efficiency of this system.
Description of repair operations
Repair instructions concerning:
safety rules,
means to be implemented (measurement equipment, room, tools, transport conditions),
operation method,
adjustments after element exchange.

Volume 2 Page 324
14.4.6.1.3 Packing - Storage - Transport
The Supplier shall define the packing in which the equipment is delivered. The shipping list shall state
the precautions to take when unpacking, repacking and transporting the equipment.
The document list to be supplied with each equipment item is contractual. It must be added to the
special specifications.
14.4.6.2 Documents Shipped with the Equipment
As a minimum, the documents included in the equipment packing must allow user to:
correctly unpack the equipment,

install and commission it in accordance with the instructions,
understand its operation,
ensure maintenance and repair operations,
correctly repack the equipment or a part of it.
The document list to be supplied with each equipment item is contractual. It must be added to the
special specifications.
14.4.7 Spare Parts
The spare part batches to be provided shall be sized consistently with:
The Employer's maintenance policy,

Quantity of equipment installed,
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) constraints.
The availability of spare parts shall be ensured for the expected life time of the system and at least
for 10 years from the scheduled final acceptance date.
Spare part shall be located according to the instructions given by the Employer.
All spare parts (as well as test and measurement equipment) supplied under the contract shall be
strictly interchangeable with the parts they are intended to replace, and shall be treated and packed in
cubicles / cabinets completed with proper rack, or in packing wooden case, for long storage under the
prevailing climatic conditions, after it had been checked at site.
All component subassemblies with finite MTBF shall be supplied as spare parts. The spare parts shall
be categorised as follows:
Category 1: Consumable spare parts (such as fuse, lamps etc.); which are generally not avail-
able in Bangladesh.
Category 2: Consumable spare parts which are easily available in Bangladesh.
Category 3: Essential spare parts required to maintain each equipment item supplied under this
contract.
The Bidder shall prepare a list of spare parts showing the unit price and quantities of each, as a part of
his Bid. The quantities shall be the maximum from amongst the following three methods of calcula-
tions:

Volume 2 Page 325
1. Twenty percent (20%) for category 1, five percent (5%) for category 2 and ten percent (10%) for
category 3 of the total number of supplied component subassemblies.
2. One (1), if the total number of supplied component subassemblies is less than ten (10).
3. Manufacturer's recommendations for 10 years of operation. Regarding the main components of
the telecommunication system, the following spare parts shall be provided:
One SDH equipment with STM-16,
One optical booster
One PLC
All necessary interfaces,
The Bidder shall also provide full justification of quantities of spare parts offered, showing clearly that
the quantities conform to the criteria mentioned above. If at any stage during the execution of the con-
tract and especially during the guarantee period, it is found that the quantities of spare parts fall short
of the criteria specified above, the Contractor shall supply the balance spare parts free of charge.
All defective parts shall be replaced during the guarantee period by the Contractor free of charge. In
addition, the Contractor shall deliver free of charge at the end of the guarantee period additional
spares which have not been mentioned in the list of recommended spare parts and which were re-
quired during the guarantee period.
All unit prices for spare parts shall remain unchanged for ordering up to the date of final acceptance.
Supply of spare parts:
1. Spare parts should not be utilised as replacement part during installation period and shall be de-
livered to the Employer's stores in new and good condition before completion of the work.
2. Any part found faulty by the Employer shall be changed immediately with the new one.
3. The procedure for handing over will be advised by the Employer's Representative.
14.5 Tributary Units
14.5.1 4-Wire Interface (VF Interface)
This interface shall provide 8 voice channels with a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3.4 kHz and 2 signalling
channels (M => E, M' => E') per voice channel.
Each interface shall be configurable to operate with or without CAS. With CAS it shall use the a and b
bits for the two signalling channels.
The level shall be software adjustable within the following range:
Input: +7.5 to -16 dBr

Output:+7.0 to -16 dBr
Modules where each interface can be individually configured with 1+1 path protection shall be availa-
ble.

Volume 2 Page 326
14.5.2 Analogue Subscriber Interface
An interface with at least 10 subscribers as well as high-density analogue subscriber card with 60
subscribers shall be available. The ringing generator shall be integrated in the subscriber module in-
terface. The ringer frequency shall be adjustable for 20Hz, 25Hz, and 50Hz.
The following main functions shall are supported:
Downstream signalling:
Ringing
Metering
Polarity reversal
Reduced battery
No battery
Upstream signalling:
On/off-hook
Pulse and DTMF dialling
Flash impulse
Earth key
General:
Constant current line feeding

Line test
Permanent line checks
CLIP (On-hook VF transmission)
Metering after on-hook
14.5.3 Exchange Interface
This interface shall provide 12 interfaces to connect remotely connected analogue subscribers to an
exchange. It shall provide the following functions:
pulse dialling
tone dialling (DTMF)
earth key function
metering function(12 kHz or 16 kHz)
flash impulse
polarity reversal
indication of busy lines
The following parameters shall be configurable by software:
input voice level -5 to +4 dBr

output voice level -7.5 to -1 dBr
metering pulse enable/disable
signalling bit definition

Volume 2 Page 327
loop back of voice to the telephone
14.5.4 PartyLine Telephone System (Engineering Order Wire)
An engineering order wire (EOW) facility shall be provided at each multiplexer. The EOW shall be con-
figured as a party line and use in band DTMF signalling to call another EOW-Terminal. The terminal
shall have an integrated DTMF decoder allowing to program a subscriber call number (LA digits), and
two group call numbers (LA digits each).
14.5.5 V. 24N.28 RS232 Interface
It shall support the following bit rates:
0... 0.3 kbit/s transp. (V. 110)

0.6... 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (V. 110).
ble.
14.5.6 V.11/X.24 Interface
This interface shall comply to the ITU-T X.24 recommendation for signal definition and to V. 11 for
electrical characteristics.
It shall support the following bit rates:
48, 56, Nx 64 kbit/s (N = 1... 30) synchronous

0.6... 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous (X.30)
ble.
14.5.7 V.35 Interface
This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V.35 and V. 110 recommendations. It shall support the fol-
lowing bitrates:
48, 56, Nx 64kbit/s (Nx = 1... 30) synchronous

0.6... 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous
ble.

Volume 2 Page 328
14.5.8 V.36 / RS 449 Interface
This interface shall comply with the ITU-T V.36 and V. 110 recommendations. It shall support the fol-
lowing bit rates:
48, 56, Nx 64kbit/s (N = 1... 30) synchronous

0.6... 38.4kbit/s synchronous / asynchronous
ble.
14.5.9 64 kbit/s Co-directional Interface
This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G.703 part 1.2.1 for co-directional data transfer. A module
shall have at least 8 interfaces.
ble.
14.5.10 LAN Interface
There shall be a l0BaseT interface available with Router Bridge and FRAD Function available. The fol-
lowing specification shall be covered:
Ethernet connection: 1013aseT

LAN protocols: IP, IPX
Routing protocols: static IP route, OSPF2 V2
WAN protocols: PPP, Frame Relay (including RFC 1490)
The interface shall be manageable locally, remotely, with the management system of the platform. The
LAN interface shall support linear-, ring- and star-configurations. The WAN side shall support link ca-
pacities n*64kBit/s and 2Mbit/s.
14.5.11 Alarm Interface
This interface shall provide means to collect various alarms, which will be displayed, on the network
management system. It shall be used to manage non-PDH equipment with the PDH network man-
agement system.
It shall have at least 24 binary inputs and at least 4 outputs, which can be switched by the network
management system.
It shall be possible to connect an input to an output so that if an alarm occurs, the output contact will
be switched.
It shall be possible to label an alarm. The label-text shall be read from the interface module so that it
can be indicated on the network management system as well as on the local craft terminal.

Volume 2 Page 329
14.5.12 Teleprotection Interface
The protection of the overhead lines shall be arranged as detailed in Section 5. Teleprotection equip-
ment shall be provided for permissive tripping and direct tripping on the lines.The permissive tripping
signals are required to operate circuit breaker trip relays in conjunction with the distance protection
and directional earth fault relays.The direct tripping signals are required to operate remote circuit
breaker tripping relays.
Technical Requirements
This interface shall provide means to transmit four bi-directional command channels. The signals
shall be adjustable from 24 to 250VDC by means of software.
All inputs and outputs shall be isolated and with EMC immunity for harsh environment.
Security, dependability and transmission speed shall be selectable and programmable.
It shall be able to drop and insert commands, transfer commands as a transit station, it shall be
possible to have AND- and OR-connections between commands.
The interface shall support T-nodes.
The teleprotection interface shall provide an integrated non-volatile event-recorder which shall be
synchronisable either internally or by GPS or a command counter which counts trip commands.
The teleprotection interface shall provide means for signal delay measurement.
1+1 protection must be available; the switching shall be done within less than l0ms. The interface
shall do automatic loop test every 60s.
Under no circumstances shall the interface cause trip-commands in case of power supply failure or
when put in or out of service.
It shall be possible to synchronise all teleprotection interfaces with one GPS in one station. The
GPS time shall be distributed over the teleprotection channel.
An 8-bit command addressing shall be used to prevent tripping if the signal is inadvertently re-
routed through the telecommunication network.
14.5.13 Optical Protection Relays Interface
This interface shall have an optical port to connect protection relays for teleprotection to the multiplex-
er. It shall operate on 1300nm use MCMI line coding and be suitable for teleprotection relays.
14.5.14 Binary Contact Interface
This interface shall provide means to transmit binary signals.

The inputs and outputs shall be isolated.
The inputs shall be suitable for 24VDC to 60VDC.
Outputs shall be solid state relays.
The interface shall provide a 24VDC short circuit proofed auxiliary power supply.
It shall be able to drop and insert commands, transfer commands as a transit station, it shall be
possible to have AND- and OR-connections between commands.
The teleprotection interface shall provide an integrated event recorder, which shall be synchronisa-
ble either internally or by GPS.

Volume 2 Page 330
14.5.15 2NIbit/s G.703 / G.704 Interface
This interface shall comply with the ITU-T G.703 and G.704 recommendations.
The interface module shall have at least four interfaces to be activated individually. It shall be pos-
sible to have 128 interface modules a multiplexer.
In order to connect different equipment, the interfaces shall be available with the impedance of 120
ohms and 75 ohms.
The interface shall support CRC-4 multi-frame according to ITU-T G.704 (enabled and disabled by
software).
The CAS signalling according to ITU-T G.704 table 9 shall be activated optionally.
The interface shall be able to extract the 2.048 MHz clock, which can be used to synchronise the
multiplex equipment.
The interface module shall support 2Mbit/s loop-back of the incoming signal as well as the loop-
back of the internal signals.
14.6 Telephone System
An IP phone facility shall be provided at each new substation. The IP phone shall be incorporated by
IP connection from upstream substation through IP network in the operational telephone system which
is controlled from the existing call manager at NLDC Dhaka. At least three IP telephone sets proper to
above mentioned administrative telephone system shall be provided at each new substation.
New substations will become remote subscribers in the administrative telephone system. Facility for
minimum 10 x 2 W remote subscribers shall be provided and installed at the substation and the re-
mote subscribers shall be connect with the nearest existing exchange of the existing telephone net-
work.
Necessary cards required at the nearest exchange and its associated multiplexer shall be included in
the contract price. At least three telephone sets proper to the above mentioned administrative tele-
phone system shall be provide at each new substation
The trunk numbering plan shall be compatible with the present scheme in service in Bangladesh. The
telephone signalling (dialling) system shall be compatible with the present system.
An alarm system shall be provided to indicate traffic failure including blown fuses, loss of power sup-
ply, etc. In addition, contacts shall be provided to facilitate extension of the alarms to the telecontrol
equipment.

Volume 2 Page 331
14.7 Communications DC Power Supply Equipment
14.7.1 General
14.7.1.1 Basis of Design
The equipment shall comply with IEC 60146 and 60478.
The charger shall be of either the Thyristor-controlled type or of the SMPS type. The batteryshall be
nickel cadmium type - as detailed in a separate section of this Specification.
The design and selection of equipment and components shall be based on achieving a minimum life-
time of 20 years, when operating under the specified service conditions.
14.7.1.2 Operating Principle
The output of the charger shall, during normal operation, continuously supply the power requirements
of the load whilst simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode. In the event
of an interruption in the a.c. mains supply to the charger, the battery shall supply the load require-
ments for not less than the specified standby time - whilst maintaining the output voltage within per-
missible limits.
Upon restoration of the a.c. mains supply, the rectifier shall automatically resume supply of the load
requirements whilst simultaneously recharging the battery at the float voltage.
14.7.2 Configuration
The power supply installation shall comprise two batteries and two charging sources. each charger
shall be able to float charge both batteries as well as supplying the total load.
The total battery capacity shall be able to supply the total load (comprising the delivered load together
with 20%. spare for future use) for at least 10 hours in the event of failure of the a.c. mains supply.
The d.c. power supply equipment is required to limit the output voltage to the load within plus 15% and
minus 15% of the nominal value, provided these values do not exceed the voltage guarantee of the
load equipment. The power supply output positive shall be earthed.
14.7.3 Charger
14.7.3.1 General
The charger shall operate according to the constant voltage current limiting principle and shall incorpo-
rate a soft start feature to gradually accept load on initial energising.
The charger shall restart automatically upon restoration of the a.c. mains supply following a mains
supply interruption, and recharge the battery at the float voltage.

Volume 2 Page 332
Internal cooling shall be by natural ventilation. Forced cooling is not acceptable.
The charger shall be suitable for operation in parallel with one or more chargers, and shall include a
current sharing facility.
The charger shall be of sufficient output capacity for the application, parallel operation of chargers
(where required) is for the purpose of redundancy and not to satisfy the output current requirements.
14.7.3.2 Charger Output
The output characteristic shall provide an output voltage regulation of 1%, over the specified a.c.
mains voltage and frequency range and for load changes 0-100%. The output voltage regulator shall
be adjustable within limits approved by the Engineer and shall be so designed that special tools are
not required for such adjustment. Compensation for battery temperature shall be provided.
The charger shall have protection against overloads or short circuits and shall limit the output current.
Recovery to a constant voltage characteristic shall occur automatically at the end of the overcur-
rent/short circuit.
14.7.3.3 Boost Charging
Manual boost charging shall be provided. A boost timer shall be included to prevent overcharging.
Operation of boost charging shall disconnect the charger and battery from the load. It shall not be
possible for both chargers to be selected to boost charging at the same time, or for the load to become
disconnected from both batteries and chargers simultaneously.
If the a.c. mains supply fails during boost conditions, the two batteries shall be automatically connect-
ed in parallel by "no volt" contactors to the load.
It shall not be possible to connect a "boosted" battery to the load until its terminal voltage has fallen
below the load equipment upper voltage limit.
14.7.3.4 Noise and Interference
To avoid unacceptable levels of electrical noise in the load equipment smoothing of the d.c. output is
required. This shall achieve a psophometric noise level at the output, for loads between 0 and 100%,
not exceeding the equivalent of 2 rnV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T
(CCITT).
The relative harmonic content of the input current shall comply with the European Directive for EMC,
the EN 60555-2 standard. In the case of SMPS chargers active power factor correction (i.e. boost for
step up converter) shall be provided to control the power factor.
The production of radio frequency interference voltages shall not exceed the values of suppression
grade "N", as defined in EN 55014/55015 - for Thyristor-controlled type chargers, and suppression
grade "B" as defined in EN 55022 for SMPS type chargers.

Volume 2 Page 333
The performance of the d.c. power supply equipment unit shall not be affected, or in any way degrad-
ed, by the use of the following when the severity of the electromagnetic radiation environment corre-
sponds to Class 3, in accordance with IEC 801-3:
private mobile radio operating in designated or planned radio frequency bands

current cellular radio equipment
future cellular equipment
mobile data equipment.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the radio frequency bands applicable in the locality.
14.7.3.5 Efficiency/Rating
The charger efficiency shall not be less than 80%.
All chargers supplied shall preferably have the same rating, or be in fixed multiples, to limit the number
of different charger ratings.
14.7.3.6 Instruments, Controls and Alarms
The charger shall be equipped with the following:
a.c. mains input circuit breaker

d.c. output circuit breaker
charger output current meter
charger output voltage meter
alarms for charge fail, d.c. volts high etc.
Each alarm shall be provided with local annunciation and two sets of potential free contacts, for con-
nection to external alarm monitoring systems.
14.7.4 Battery
14.7.4.1 Type
Nickel cadmium cells shall be of the pocket plate type in accordance with IEC 60623.
Cell containers shall be of the moulded plastic type, non-flame propagating and mechanically shock
resistant. They shall provide for the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material.
Sec-14: Fibre Optic Multiplexer

Manufacturer's reference number and code
year and month of manufacture
voltage and nominal capacity at the 10 hour rate
cell number.

Volume 2 Page 334
14.7.4.2 Mounting
The batteries shall be mounted on metal stands, or racks, in a manner such that all the plates of each
cell are visible for inspection, test and maintenance purposes. Stands or racks shall have a maximum
of two tiers. In all cases adequate space must be left between the tiers for maintenance purposes and
to permit the topping up of electrolyte. Stands or racks shall have a protective finish of not less than
two coats of electrolyte resisting enamel or gloss paint. Alternatively, an epoxy resin sintered finish
may be used.
At locations where the battery is not housed in a separate battery room the battery stand/rack shall be
fitted with cladding. The cladding shall permit the free flow of air to the battery, and shall be removable
for maintenance purposes.
Cell containers shall be accurately set up in alignment on the stand or rack with lead and/or rubber
discs under the feet moulded on each container. Cell lids shall be so positioned that at least one top-
ping up aperture is on the access gangway side of the cell and not obstructed by any inter-cell con-
necting arrangements.
14.7.4.3 Battery Main Fuses
Bolted cartridge fuses shall be provided in both positive and negative leads and positioned as close to
the battery as possible and shall be rated at five times the charger float output rated current. A car-
tridge fuse shall be provided in the charger input lead to the negative pole of the battery and rated at
twice the charger float output rated current. These fuses shall be mounted preferably on the end of the
battery stand or rack. These fuse links shall comply with BS 88.
Class DC 40 or equivalent and shall be mounted in fuse carriers with an insulated barrier between the
poles.
The cable or busbar to the battery shall be firmly supported at a point near the cell terminal pillar.
Where two cables are used they shall be terminated one to either side of the terminal pillar. These ca-
bles shall be arranged as to allow some flexibility and to avoid any forces being applied to the cell ter-
minal pillar.
14.7.4.4 Connections
The positive pole of each battery shall be connected to station earth via a single bolted link at the dis-
tribution cubicle. Low resistance inter-cell connectors shall be used. Connections between tiers of cells
and between end cells and fuses shall be made with insulated copper rod which shall be of equivalent
cross-section to the distribution busbars.
Connections from the battery fuses to the chargers and distribution cubicles shall be made with insu-
lated cable of equivalent cross-section to the distribution busbars. The positive and negative terminals
of each cell shall be clearly indicated. The positive and negative terminals of the complete battery shall
be indicated by red and black marking respectively.

Volume 2 Page 335
14.7.4.5 Capacity
The battery capacities shall be 200 ampere hours at the 10 hour rate.
14.7.5 D.C. Distribution and Instrumentation
14.7.5.1 General
The distribution section shall be designed for incoming and outgoing d.c. supplies as follows:
Two independent supplies (including one for future use) incoming from the batteries and associat-
ed chargers. The battery negatives shall be connected to the distributed busbar through a single
pole switch. The 48V battery positive shall be directly connected to the positive busbar.
Each load equipment shall be connected to a distribution outlet. The use of teed supplies to more
than one load equipment will not be permitted.
Double pole miniature or moulded case circuit breakers to IEC 157 shall be supplied, fitted with
auxiliary contacts which operate when the circuit breaker trips.
The MCBs shall be rated to meet the load requirements and shall be labelled with the destination of
the load. Outgoing connections shall be brought to terminals, mounted in the cubicle, provided with
strip connectors and cable lugs. The number of outlets shall cater for the quantity of load equipment
items plus 50%, with a minimum of 10 outlets being provided, Space shall also be available for the in-
stallation of 10 extra outlets for future use.
14.7.5.2 Instruments and Alarms
Instrumentation shall comprise:
battery ammeter (charge and discharge)

battery voltage
load current ammeter
busbar voltage
An alarm indication shall be provided if the busbar voltage falls outside set limits.
The MCB auxiliary contacts and the high/low voltage alarm shall each provide local annunciation and
two sets of potential free contacts, for connection to external alarm monitoring systems.
14.7.6 Housing
The above covers the mounting/housing for batteries.
A modular construction is preferred for the battery charger and d.c. distribution/instrumentation, with
each unit comprising a single 19" or ETSI standard rack configuration, all mounted in a single cubicle.
The modular construction shall provide:
simple plug in units for easy assembly and servicing

individual battery charger unit removal in safety, without loss of output power to theload.

Volume 2 Page 336
expansion of capacity at a later date
In the case of Contractors who do not offer a modular construction, separate cubicles are required for
each charger and the d.c. distribution/instrumentation.
14.8 Schedule of Requirements
No. Description Unit Required
1.0 General:
1.1 Type of multiplexer SDH: ADM
1.2 Complying to ITU-T rec. Yes
1.3 Transmission Capacity Mbit/s STM-1: 155
1.4 Access capacity on 64 kbit/s channels Minimum 200
1.5 Access capacity on 2 Mbit/s channels Minimum 40
1.6 Redundant central processor Shall be available
1.7 Digital cross connect function Fully non-blocking
2.0 Available Aggregates

2.1 Optical aggregates (ITU-T G.957) L- 1.1, L- 1.2
3.0 Available Trunk Interfaces

3.1 HDB3, 2 Mbit/s interfaces per module No. Minimum 8
3.2 Complying to ITU-T rec. G.703, transparent
G.704, selectable
3.3 HDSL, 2Mbit/s interface: 4 or 2
no of copper wires No. 30 or 15
Capacity on 2Mbit/s or on lMbit/s ch 30/2 pairs
Capacity selectable ch / pair of wire 30/1 pair
15/1 pair
4.0 Available User Interfaces

4.1 Voice interfaces for trunk lines:
4.1.1 1 + 1 corn path protection, available for all yes
4.1.2 Analogue, 4wire with E&M:
Input level dBr +7.5..-16
Output level +7.0..-16.5
4.1.3 Analogue, 2wire with E&M:
Input level dBr +6.5..-12.5
Output level -1.0..-20
4.1.4 Digital, 2Mbit/s CAS or PRI
4.2 Voice interfaces for remote subscriber:
4.2.1 2 wire, subscriber side dBr
4.2.2 12 wire, PABX side dBr
4.3 Integrated teleprotection
4.3.1 Interface for commands:
4.3.1.1 Number of independent commands No. 4
4.3.1.2 Transmission time max. ms 6
4.3.1.3 Signal voltage Vpeak 250

Volume 2 Page 337
No. Description Unit Required
4.3.1.4 1 + 1 corn path protection Yes

4.3.2 Interface(s) for differential protection:
4.3.2.1 Electrical interface: G.703 kbit/s 64
4.3.2.2 Optical interface kbit/s Minimum 64
4.4 Data: channels per module
4.4.1 1 + 1 com path protection, available for all Yes
4.4.2 V.24N.28 (RS-232): up to 38.4kbit/s No. 4
4.4.3 V.11/X.24(RS-422): 64kbit/s No. 4
4.4.4 V.35: 64kbit/s No. 4
4.4.5 V.36 (RS-449): 64kbit/s No. 2
4.4.6 G.703: 64kbit/s No. 8
4.4.7 Ethernet:
10Base T No. 1
WAN capacity Mbit/s Min: 2x2Mbit/s
Protocols Min.: IP
4.5 Integrated alarm gathering module:
4.5.1 Number of external alarms per module No. Min. 20
4.5.2 Auxiliary power supply for ext. contacts Yes
4.6 Network Management System
4.6.1 Type/Name of configuration tool
4.6.2 For fault / configuration management Yes/ yes
4.6.3 For local / remote operation Yes/ yes
4.6.4 Data communication network (DCN) Ethernet/IP or Ethernet /OSI
4.7 Ambient Conditions:
4.7.1 Storage: ETS 300 019-1-1,class 1.2 C / % hum -25..+ 55 /class 1.2
4.7.2 Transport: ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.2 C / % hum -25..+ 70 /class 2.2
4.7.3 Operation: ETS 300 019-1-3, class IIE C / % hum -5 .. +45 / class 3. 1 E
4.8 Power Supply
4.8.1 Operation VDC 48 / 60 (-15/+20%)
4.8.2 Fully redundant power supply Yes

Volume 2 Page 338
15. Quality Assurance, Inspection, Testing,

Commissioning and Warranty
15.1 Scope of Section
The whole of the plant covered by this Contract will be subject to inspection and witnessing the tests
by the Employer during manufacture, erection and on completion. The inspection and witnessing the
tests at Manufacturer's works may be done by the Employer or an Independent Inspection agency.
The approval of the Employer/Engineer or the passing of any such inspection or test will not, however,
prejudice the right of the Employer to reject the plant if it does not comply with the specification when
erected or when in service.
The Employer/Engineer or their designated representatives are entitled to attend the factory ac-
ceptance tests, according to clause SCC23 of section-8 of volume-I, which shall be performed at the
Manufacturer's works/testing laboratories. Factory acceptance tests shall be performed for the follow-
ing equipment:
power transformer 400/230 kV,

communication equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for bearing the costs for the above mentioned witnessing of facto-
ry acceptance tests by two (2)Employer's engineers in each visit, considering visa fees and health in-
surance to cover all medical costs that may be required during visit, the return air fare, hotel charges,
travelling expensesfrom airport to hotel and hotel to place of testing and return, , together with a per
diem allowance of USD 100 for actual working days, excluding travelling time, for each visit and for
each of the Employer's Engineers.
The Contractor shall provide training for of 4 (four) Employer's Engineers at the Manufacturer's prem-
ises, for installation, testing, operation and maintenance of the following equipment:
Operation and maintenance of HV switchgear equipment including power transformer

Basic and design of substation automation system & protection equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for bearing the costs for the above mentioned trainings for four
Employer's Engineers in each training, considering visa fees and health insurance to cover all medical
costs that may be required during visit, the return air fare, hotel charges, travelling expenses from air-
port to hotel and hotel to place of testing and return, food, laundry, together with a per diem allowance
of USD 100 for minimum 10 (ten) working days, excluding travelling time, ( as per the necessary and
agreed training schedule) for each training and for each of the Employer's Engineers.
The Contractor shall provide, during and after the installation, on-site training for operation and
maintenance of the works, for 10 (ten) Employer's staff, in the duration of minimum 1 (one) weeks.

Volume 2 Page 339
The Contractor shall be responsible for bearing all costs for the above mentioned training. All costs
are deemed to be included in the contract price.
For notification of testing, four weeks shall be deemed as reasonable advance notice.
Within 45 days of the letter of acceptance for the contract the contractor shall submit a quality assur-
ance programme and a work quality programme for the Engineer's approval.
The Contractor shall have an approved quality management system.
After the award of Contract, the Engineer shall have the right to carry out a review of the quality as-
surance procedures operated by the Contractor. The Engineer's review may consider quality assur-
ance in relation to the design and manufacture of plant items, but may equally investigate the Contrac-
tor's quality assurance procedures for the overall control of the wide range of design activities neces-
sary for a complex project of this type, and the dissemination of paperwork, design drawings and data
amongst the various design and manufacturing organisations within the Contract. The Contractor shall
give all necessary help and assistance to the Engineer in carrying out such a quality assurance re-
view. The Contractor shall consider and discuss the results of the review and make any reasonable
improvements in his procedures.
Before any plant is packed or despatched from the Main or Sub- Contractors' works, all tests called for
shall have been successfully carried out in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise agreed.
30 days' notice shall be given when the plant is ready for inspection or tests and every facility shall be
provided by the Contractor and his Subcontractors to enable the Engineer and Employer to carry out
the necessary inspection and witnessing of tests.
In the cases where tests or inspection are specified as being carried out on only a sample of the total
quantity of items in the Works, and where one or more items of the sample fail the test or inspection, a
further batch of the items, at least equal in quantity to the proportion originally specified, shall be test-
ed or inspected. This process shall continue until a sample proves completely acceptable.
15.2 Subcontracts
Within two months of acceptance of the Bid and in order to facilitate the inspection of bought-out mate-
rials and plant, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval three copies of all sub-orders
placed by him as soon as they are issued. One copy of any drawing or schedule referred to in the sub-
order shall be submitted simultaneously unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer. Any reference to
price may be deleted from the copies so submitted.
The sub-orders and drawings submitted to the Engineer shall cover all components which are subject
to electrical and mechanical pressure or stress when the plant is in operation and also auxiliaries and
spares which are to be despatched to Site direct from the Subcontractor's factory.
Sub-orders are to include a statement advising the Subcontractor that the items being ordered will be
subject to inspection and test by the Engineer and Employer.
The Contractor shall advise his Subcontractors of all the pertinent clauses in the Specification when
ordering bought out plant, equipment or materials.

Volume 2 Page 340
Every suborder or subcontract shall contain the following information:
Main Contractor's name and sub-order or sub-contract number.

Quantities and description of work.
Delivery requirements.
Delivery consignment instructions.
Details of Employer and/or main Contractor's applicable drawing or schedule numbers.
Name of the Engineer.
A note advising that the plant or equipment which is the subject of the order shall comply in every
respect with the Engineer's, Specification and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer, Em-
ployer and the Contractor.
A reference, particularised in the accompanying Specification, covering the following information:
Employer's name
Project title
Contract No.
Engineer's reference number
Subcontractors shall comply with all the applicable requirements of this Specification and the onus is
upon the Contractor to ensure that Subcontractors comply with these requirements.
For the purposes of this clause, interworks orders shall be treated as sub-orders.
15.3 Guarantees
The Contractor shall state and guarantee the technical particulars listed in the Technical Schedules
and other sections as specified by the Contract for testing procedures. These guarantees and particu-
lars shall be binding and shall not be departed from without the written permission of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall further guarantee that all equipment supplied complies with the Contract Docu-
ments.
The tolerances permitted in the IEC and British Standards shall apply unless otherwise stated.
15.4 Quality Audit
The quality programme established by the Contractor shall be followed for all inspection and testing
procedures.
The Engineer and Employer may, from time to time, visit the Manufacturer to carry out a quality audit
of the Manufacturer's organisation.

Volume 2 Page 341
15.5 Measuring and Testing Equipment
At prescribed intervals, or prior to each use, all measuring and testing equipment used in inspection
shall be calibrated and adjusted against certified equipment having a known valid relationship to inter-
nationally recognised standards.
The Manufacturer shall prepare a calibration schedule showing equipment type, identification number,
location, frequency of checks, method of checking and action to take when results are unsatisfactory.
15.6 Inspection Plan and Procedure
The Inspection Plan, as submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval, shall cover the fol-
lowing:
Relevant International Standard. For each of the following stages of the work, the acceptance crite-
ria shall be stated.
The stages of inspection which shall include but not be limited to the following:
Tests to review or approve certification of material;
Review and approval of manufacturing procedures;
Witnessing tests or review and approval of certification of operator's qualification to carry out the
work required;
Visual and dimensional examination of components;
Pressure tests on casings and vessels;
Non-destructive examination of materials in progress;
Functional tests on sub-assemblies, performance tests, type tests on complete units;
Examination of painting, packing and documentation for shipment.
The Engineer will indicate the inspection requirements on the agreed inspection programme in ac-
cordance with the following.
Hold point - Requires a mandatory inspection by the Engineer. This inspection or test shall be wit-
nessed by the Engineer and Employer and further progress in manufacture shall not be made until the
plant is approved by the Engineer.
Witness point - Inspection or test of material may be carried out by the Engineer and Employer at their
discretion.
Document review - Certification of material and functional test shall be approved by the Engineer be-
fore despatch from the works.
15.7 Test Certificates
Triplicate sets of all test records, test certificates and performance curves, whether or not they have
been witnessed by the Engineer and Employer, shall be supplied to the Engineer for all tests carried
out in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.

Volume 2 Page 342
Sets of all test certificates shall be endorsed with sufficient information to identify the material or
equipment to which the certificates refer, and shall carry in the top right hand comer the following ref-
erence:
Employer's name
Project title
Contract No.
Engineer's reference number
All test documentation shall be in the English language.
15.8 Material Tests
The Contractor shall provide test pieces as required by the Engineer to enable him to confirm the qual-
ity of the material supplied under the Contract. Such test pieces shall be prepared and supplied free of
charge and any cost of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
If any test piece fails to comply with the requirements of the appropriate specifications for the material
in question, the Engineer may reject the whole of the material represented by that test piece; the Con-
tractor's or Subcontractor's designers and metallurgists will be consulted before any material is so re-
jected.
If the Engineer is furnished with certified particulars of tests which have been carried out for the Con-
tractor by the suppliers of material, he may, at his own discretion, dispense with the previously men-
tioned tests.
15.9 General Requirements for Tests at Manufacturers' Works
15.9.1 Testing of Plant
Tests at Manufacturers' works shall include mechanical, electrical and hydraulic tests to ensure that
the plant being supplied complies with the requirements of the Specification.
Works tests shall include all routine electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in accordance with the
relevant IEC or British Standards, except where departures therefrom and modifications thereto are
embodied in this Specification.
Should the plant or any portion thereof fail under test to give the required performance, further tests
which are considered necessary by the Engineer shall be carried out by the Contractor and the whole
cost of the repeated tests borne by the Contractor. This also applies to tests carried out at the Subcon-
tractors' works.
The Employer or its representative or independent inspection agency may witness the tests. Sufficient
notice (minimum of 30 working days) shall be given to enable the necessary arrangements to be
made.

Volume 2 Page 343
If the plant, or any portion thereof, fails under test to give the required performance, such further tests
cost of the repeated tests shall be borne by the Contractor. This also applies to tests carried out at
Subcontractors' works.
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the specified standards. When no standards are speci-
fied, the test procedure shall be agreed between the Employer and the Contractor.
Specific details of tests to be carried out at the Manufacturers' works are defined elsewhere in this
Specification.
15.9.2 Rejection of Plant
If any item fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect whatsoever at any
stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at Site, the Engineer may reject the item, or de-
fective component thereof, whichever he considers necessary, and after adjustment or modification as
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and/or test.
In the event of a defect on any item being of such a nature that the requirements of this Specification
cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to be replaced by the Contractor, at his
own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Employer.
15.10 Specific Requirements for Tests at Manufacturers' Factories
15.10.1 Pressure Vessels
a) All pressure vessels shall be designed, fabricated, inspected and tested in accordance with an
approved pressure vessel code or standard.
b) An approved method of radiographic or other non-destructive testing shall be used for proving
all welding, at all positions of possible high stress concentration, such as large branch welds,
and their vicinities after all heat treatment is completed. This shall be done whatever the pro-
gramme of non-destructive testing before heat treatment.
c) Hydrostatic test shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5500.
15.10.2 Substation Automation System, Control, Relay Protection and Meter-

ing
All equipment for substation automation system, control, relay protection and metering shall be fully
assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subject to the complete routine and functional test
For factory acceptance test all equipment for substation automation system, control, relay protection
and metering, for each substation, shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected
to visual and functional tests
All control and relays and associated equipment shall be routine tested to prove the quality and accu-
racy. Routine tests shall be in accordance with relevant IEC Recommendations supplemented by ad-

Volume 2 Page 344
ditional tests as are considered necessary by the Employer. Routine test reports shall be submitted for
each relay and piece of equipment. The reports shall record all measurements taken during the tests.
All relays shall be subjected to the appropriate routine tests as listed below, the individual tests being
as detailed in IEC 60255 or as otherwise agreed with the Employer.
Accuracy of calibrated pick-up and drop-off levels over the effective range of settings
Insulation tests
Accuracy of timing elements
Correct operation of flag (or other) indicators
Mechanical requirements, integrity/safety of draw-out units, check of contact pressure and align-
ment.
15.10.2.1 Wiring
All circuits shall be subjected to the high voltage test specified in the relevant IEC or approved stand-
ard. The insulation resistance of all circuits shall be measured before and after any high voltage tests.
For AC secondary injection tests a substantially sinusoidal test supply shall be used.
The operating and resetting level (current and/or voltage) and timing of all relays shall be measured
over an agreed range of settings for all relays.
For directional relays phase-shifting transformers shall be used to determine the maximum torque an-
gle and the boundaries of operation/restraint.
Other relays shall be fully tested in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
All DC elements of protection relays shall be tested for operation at 70% rated voltage.
All DC supplies shall be checked for severity of current inrush when energised by switching on or in-
serting fuses or links.
15.10.2.2 Mechanical Inspection
All panel equipment is to be examined to ensure that it is in proper working condition and correctly ad-
justed, correctly labelled and that cases, covers, glass and gaskets are in good order and properly fit-
ting.
15.10.2.3 General
Sufficient tests shall be performed on the relays and protection schemes to:
establish that the correct equipment has been supplied and installed.
confirm that the various items of equipment have been correctly interconnected.
confirm performance of schemes designed on the bases of calculation e.g. differential protection.
to provide a set of figures for comparison with future maintenance values allowing the condition of
the equipment to be determined.

Volume 2 Page 345
15.10.2.4 Secondary Injection
Secondary injection shall be carried out on all AC relays, using voltage and current of sinusoidal wave
form and rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory operation and range adjustment.
The polar characteristic of all distance protections shall be recorded at a minimum of 30 degree inter-
vals.
For circulating current protection employing high impedance voltage operated relays, the points of in-
jection for relay voltage setting tests shall be across the relay and stabilizing resistance.
The fault setting for the type of protection is to be established by secondary injection, where it is im-
practicable to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across the appropriate
relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors, and CT's connected.
15.10.2.5 Primary Injection
All current operated relays shall be tested by injection of primary current to record the actual relay set-
ting and as a final proof of the integrity of all secondary connections.
The stability of all differential schemes shall be checked by injection of primary current.
Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor and the methods employed for a
particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer.
Tests are to be carried out as follows:
Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transformers as a group, care
being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.
Overall primary injection to prove correct interconnection between current transformer groups and
associated relays.
Fault setting tests, where possible, to establish the value of current necessary to produce operation
of the relays.
15.10.2.6 DC Operations
Tests are to be carried out to prove the correctness of all DC polarities, the operating levels of DC re-
lays and the correct functioning of DC relay schemes, selection and control switching, indications and
alarms. The correct functioning of all isolation links and fuses shall also be checked.
15.10.2.7 Tests on Load
Tests on load shall also be done to demonstrate stability and operation of protection relays as required
by the Engineer.
All tripping, control, alarm and interlocking circuits shall be functionally tested to prove satisfactory and
fool-proof operation and/or resetting. The functional and safety aspects of all shorting and/or isolation
links, fuses and switches devices shall be proved.

Volume 2 Page 346
The total burdens connected to all voltage transformer circuits shall be measured and recorded.
The total capacitance of all wiring and apparatus connected to the negative pole of each main tripping
battery shall be measured and recorded; the value shall not exceed 10 microfarad.
The continuous current drain of all trip circuit supervision relays shall be measured and shall not be
greater than half the minimum current required for tripping. The supervision current shall be measured
with the circuit breaker (or other device) both open and closed.
15.10.3 Relays
All relays and associated equipment shall be routine tested to prove the quality and accuracy. Routine
tests shall be in accordance with relevant IEC Recommendations supplemented by additional tests as
are considered necessary by the Employer. Routine test reports shall be submitted for each relay and
piece of equipment. The reports shall record all measurements taken during the tests.
All relays shall be subjected to the appropriate routine tests as listed below, the individual tests being
as detailed in IEC 60255 or as otherwise agreed with the Employer.
Accuracy of calibrated pick-up and drop-off levels over the effective range of settings
Insulation tests
Accuracy of timing elements
Correct operation of flag (or other) indicators
Mechanical requirements, integrity/safety of draw-out units, check of contact pressure and align-
ment.
15.10.4 Electrical Instruments and Meters
One instrument and meter of each type and rating shall be subjected to the tests as specified in
IEC 60051.
15.10.5 AC Switchboards
Routine tests shall include general inspection and electrical operation tests.
15.10.6 Contactors
One contactor of each type and rating shall be subjected to type tests as specified in IEC 60292-1.
15.10.7 PVC Cable
Each size and rating of PVC cable shall be subjected to type tests as specified in BS 6346. Routine
tests are detailed in Section 5 of this document.

Volume 2 Page 347
15.10.8 Switchgear (Other than GIS)
All circuit breakers shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine tes-
tes according to the IEC 62271-100.
For factory acceptance test one or at least 20% of the circuit breakers of each type, shall be fully as-
sembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine testes according to the IEC 62271-100.
15.10.9 Disconnectors and Earth Switches
All disconnectors and earthing switches shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and sub-
jected to routine testes according to the IEC 62271-102.
For factory acceptance test one or at least 10 % of the disconnectors and earthing switches of each
type, shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine testes according to
the IEC 62271-102.
15.10.10 Current and Voltage Transformers
All current transformers and voltage transformers shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works
and subjected to routine testes according to the IEC 60044.
For factory acceptance test three or at least 20 % of the current transformers and voltage transform-
ers of each type, shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine testes
according to the IEC 60044.
15.10.11 Structures of Electrical Equipment
Sample tests on the assembly and galvanising of the structures shall be carried out. A mechanical
type test with the structure loaded with working load multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall
be carried out.
15.10.12 Surge Arresters
All surge arresters shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine tes-
tes according to the IEC 60099-4.
For factory acceptance test three or at least 20 % of the surge arresters of each type, shall be fully
assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine testes according to the IEC 60044.
15.10.13 Batteries and Battery Chargers
Battery: The Contractor shall demonstrate that the battery will perform the duties
specified.
Battery charger: Routine tests according to IEC 60146 (BS 4417)
DC Switchboard: Routine tests according to IEC 60439 (BS 5486:Part 1)

Volume 2 Page 348
Complete charge and discharge tests on each of the combined batteries and chargers shall be con-
ducted and results recorded so as to permit verification of the ampere-hour capacity of the battery.
During these tests the Engineer shall select at random reference cells and the voltage curves thereof
shall be checked when the battery is discharged over three and ten hour periods. The alarm levels
and the automatic voltage control feature of the charger shall be demonstrated over the specified load
range. Where load changeover facilities are included, integrity of the changeover system without break
or voltage variations during loading of the standby or test charger shall be demonstrated.
15.10.14 Control Panels
Routine operation tests and insulation resistance tests shall be carried out.
15.10.15 Busbars
Routine tests including millivolt drop tests shall be carried out in accordance with the specified stand-
ard.
15.10.16 Instruments
Calibration tests shall be witnessed on all important pressure gauges and other instruments as re-
15.10.17 Neutral Earthing Resistor
Routine leakage and over voltage tests.

Bushing insulator wet flashover tests (internal and external).
15.10.18 Power Transformers
Inspection and testing during manufacture shall be in accordance with the General Conditions of Con-
tract and this section of the Specification.
Works tests shall include all routine electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in accordance with the
relevant IEC Standard, except where departures therefrom and modifications thereto are embodied in
this Specification. For Plant not covered by any IEC Standard or specifically mentioned in this Specifi-
cation, such tests as are relevant shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Should the Plant, or any portion thereof, fail under test to give the required performance, further tests
costs of the repeated tests borne by the Contractor. This also applies to tests carried out at the Sub-
contractors' works.
After satisfactory completion of the witnessed tests at the Works, the Plant shall be submitted for the
Employer's approval during dismantling preparatory to shipment. No item of Plant is to be despatched
to Site until the Employer has given his approval in writing.

Volume 2 Page 349
All power transformers shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's works and subjected to routine
testes and special tests
For factory acceptance test all power transformers shall be fully assembled at the Manufacturer's
works and subjected to repetition of the all routine testes and special tests
15.10.18.1 Main Transformers
Routine Tests
All transformers shall be subject to the following routine tests in accordance with IEC 60076 and the
requirements of this Specification.
Measurement of winding resistance on all tap positions and phases.
Ratio, polarity and phase relationship.
Impedance voltage.
Load loss at normal, maximum and minimum taps.
No load loss and no load current at normal voltage Un and at +5% Un and at +10% Un.
Magnetising current at nominal voltage Un and at -5% Un and +5% Un and at +10% Un.
Insulation resistance.
Dielectric withstand tests:
On uniformly insulated windings with highest voltage Um = 36kV, tests shall comprise:
induced over voltage withstand.
short duration power frequency voltage withstand.
full wave lightning impulse withstand for line terminals.
lightning impulse chopped wave at 115% of the full wave level.
On non-uniformly insulated windings with highest voltage Um 145 W, tests shall comprise:
induced over voltage withstand combined with partial discharge.
lightning impulse chopped wave at 115% of the full wave level.
On non-uniformly insulated windings with highest voltage Um = 245kV, tests shall be carried out
according to a combination of methods 1 and 2 and comprise:
induced line to earth overvoltage withstand test at 460kV (method one routine test).
lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% of the full wave level.
induced power frequency overvoltage withstand test with partial discharge measurement.
Insulation Resistance
Type Tests
Temperature rise test:
The test shall be in accordance with IEC 60076-2, and shall be carried out on one transformer of
each size and type. Temperature-rise tests shall be conducted on the tapping corresponding to the
maximum losses.
Noise level tests:
A noise level test to IEC 60076 shall be carried out on one transformer of each type specified under
items 1 and 2 in accordance with IEC 60551.

Volume 2 Page 350
Special Tests
Measurement of Zero Phase - Sequence Impedance
The test shall be in accordance with IEC 60076-1 Clause 8.7 and shall be carried out on one trans-
former of each type.
15.10.18.2 Voltage Control Equipment
Routine Tests
Each finished tap changer shall be subjected to the routine tests specified in JEC.214 but in addition
the mechanical test shall be carried out at rated voltage and no load.
Type Tests
Shall be carried out entirely in accordance with IEC 60214 except that evidence of the service duty
type test shall be in excess of 100,000 operations.
15.10.18.3 Magnetic Circuit
Routine Tests
Each core completely assembled shall be tested for one minute at 2,000V AC between core bolts,
side plates, structural steelwork and core at the core and coil stage. After the transformer is tanked
and completely assembled, a further test shall be applied between the core and the earthed structural
steelwork to prove that the core is earthed through the removable link, at one point only.
15.10.19 Outdoor Bushing Assemblies with Porcelain Insulators
Hollow insulators tested in accordance with IEC 60233, complete bushings in accordance with IEC
60137.
Routine Tests
Routine tests shall include:
Oil leakage test
50Hz dry withstand test
Power factor/voltage test
Partial discharge test on all bushings of which the major insulation is either oil impregnated paper
or resin impregnated paper.
15.10.20 Tanks
Routine Tests
Oil Leakage:All tanks, conservators and oil filled compartments, which are subjected in service or dur-
ing maintenance to oil pressure, shall withstand without leakage a hydraulic pressure test equal
to69 kN/m or the normal pressure plus 34kN/m whichever is the greater, for 24 hours during which
time no leakage or oil ingress into normally oil free spaces shall occur.

Volume 2 Page 351
15.10.21 Cooling Plant
Routine Tests
Coolers: Pressure test to be as specified above.
Motors and Control Gear: To the requirements as specified.
15.10.22 Gas and Oil-Actuated Relays
Routine Tests
Oil leakage:When subject to an internal oil pressure of 207kN/m for fifteen minutes.
Gas collection
Oil surge
Performance test under service conditions.Voltage: 2kV for one minute between electrical circuits
and casing.
15.10.23 Galvanizing
Routine Tests
To the requirements of BS 443 or BS 729 whichever is applicable
15.10.24 Earthing Transformers
Routine Tests
Measurement of winding resistance
Ratio, polarity and phase relationships
Measurement of impedance voltage
Measurement of loss
Short duration power frequency voltage-withstand test
Induced overvoltage withstand test
Insulation resistance of each winding
Special Tests
Measurement of zero-phase sequence impedance
15.10.25 Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment
Works tests shall be in accordance with the IEC standard.
15.10.26 Deleted
15.10.27 Telephone Equipment
Comprehensive system testing including subscriber to subscriber tests with transit working shall be
carried out with the exchanges fed from normal, high and low volts. Hunting, alternative routing and
priority facilities, etc., shall be checked.

Volume 2 Page 352
15.10.28 Teleprotection Equipment
Back to back tests shall be carried out to determine the satisfactory operation of the teleprotection
equipment.
These tests shall be via fibre optic multiplexer equipment links, simulated lines or communication
channels dependent on the actual application.
Random tests shall be performed which demonstrate to the Engineer the ability of the equipment to
operate satisfactory (reliability) and within the specified time limits (speed) in the presence of interfer-
ing signals or noise and also the ability not to malfunction (security) in the presence of interfering sig-
nals or noise at levels likely to occur when the equipment is installed in the power system substations.
15.10.29 Transducers
Transducers shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60688-1.
15.11 Dismantling Prior to Shipment
After the satisfactory completion of all tests at the factory, the plant shall be submitted for the Engi-
neer's approval during dismantling preparatory to shipping. No item of plant shall be despatched to
site until the Engineer has given approval in writing.
15.12 Inspection and Testing during Site Erection
15.12.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission to the Engineer of all plant supplied under the
Contract for inspection and testing during site erection, to ensure correct erection and compliance with
the Specification.
During the course of erection, the Contractor shall provide access as required by the Engineer for in-
specting the progress of the works and checking its accuracy to any extent that may be required.
The Contractor shall provide, at his own cost, all labour, materials, stores, and apparatus as may be
requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out all tests during erection, whether or not the
tests are specifically referred to in this specification.
Tests on completion of erection shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment to carry out the site
tests, but where required in the Schedule of Prices, shall include the cost of the equipment so that the
Employer may have the option to buy the equipment on completion of the Contract.
The Contractor shall submit a written programme of tests and checks according to this Clause for the
approval of the Engineer.

Volume 2 Page 353
A brief description of all tests and testing procedures shall be provided before tests commence and
the method of testing, unless otherwise specified, shall be agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide experienced test personnel and testing shall be carried out during normal
working hours as far as is practicable. Tests which involve existing apparatus and outages may be
carried out outside normal working hours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the
necessary outage arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing programme.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing, at the time of commencement of site erection, of
the site supplies which will be required for the operation of the test equipment, to enable the Engineer
to arrange accordingly or to agree alternative arrangements should this be necessary.
The Contractor shall record the results of the tests clearly, on an approved form and with clear refer-
ence to the equipment and items to which they refer, so that the record can be used as the basis for
maintenance tests during the working life of the equipment. The required number of site test result
records shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer as soon as possible after completion of
the tests.
No tests as agreed under the programme of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction or
agreement of the Engineer in writing.
The Contractor's test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and, where necessary,
shall be appropriately calibrated by an approved authority at the Contractor's expense. Details of the
test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test sheets in cases where the instrument
or equipment characteristics can have a beating on the test results.
The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some variation upon the
instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by changed conditions at Site or by dif-
fering design, manufacture, or construction techniques.
The Bidder is required to submit proposals for site dielectric tests and to include in his price the costs
of such tests and of such equipment as deemed necessary.
15.12.2 Mechanical Equipment
The extent of testing during erection shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Checking the accuracy and alignment of plant erected. The accuracy shall comply with the rele-
vant standards, the specification or the plant Manufacturer's requirements as may be applicable
or, where no requirements exist, to a standard to be agreed between the Engineer and the Con-
tractor.
b) Checking the alignment of rotating equipment to the Manufacturer's requirements.
c) Non-destructive testing of site welds as required by the relevant standard and as detailed in this
specification.

Volume 2 Page 354
d) Hydrostatic testing of pipework systems at a pressure of 1.5 times the design pressure but not
less than 4.5 bar for a period of 2 hours, or at such other conditions as may be required by the
pipework design code.
Air piping shall be subjected to an air pressure test rather than a hydrostatic test.
e) Site fabricated tanks and vessels shall be subjected to hydrostatic tests in accordance with the
relevant standards.
f) Hydrostatic tests shall be carried out on steam generating units in accordance with the boiler
design code.
After the hydrostatic test is carried out, the complete assembly shall be drained and any non-
drainable sections shall be injected with an oxygen-absorbent chemical and elements plugged.
g) Pressure vessels and other parts, including pipework, that are made up on site and are subject
to pressure or vacuum under normal or abnormal working conditions, shall be subjected to a
site hydraulic test at approved pressures and for approved periods in accordance with the rele-
vant standard. Where no appropriate standard exists the hydraulic test pressure shall not be
less than 1.5 times design pressure or at such pressure to be agreed by the Engineer.
Should, in the opinion of the Contractor and with the agreement of the Engineer, an hydraulic
test be impracticable due to excessive loading on foundations other than steel, an air pressure
test may be employed in accordance with requirements set out in BS 5500.
Vacuum tests shall be carried out at the maximum test vacuum obtainable and the condition
maintained for a period of two hours with the system isolated. The Contractor shall state in the
Schedule of Guarantees the fall in vacuum anticipated during this period but the rate of fall shall
not exceed that which would occur due to the designed air leakage rate being attained.
h) Calibration checks on all instrumentation.
i) Tests to demonstrate the correct functioning of the control loops, protective devices, interlocks
and alarms.
Flushing out of all pipework systems which have not been fully cleaned and sealed before ship-
ping to site.
k) Other tests as specified which have not been previously conducted.
15.12.3 Electrical Equipment
15.12.3.1 General
A general check of all the main switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be made and shall include a
check of the completeness, correctness and condition of earth connections, labelling, arcing ring and
horn gaps, clearances, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, pipework, valves, blanking plates and all other
auxiliary and ancillary items. Checks shall be made for oil and gas leaks and that insulators are clean
and free from external damage. A check shall be made that loose items which are to be handed over
to the Employer e.g. blanking plates, tools, spares, are in order and are correctly stored or handed
over.

Volume 2 Page 355
The following general tests are to be carried out on electrical equipment after erection at site:
Routine high voltage tests to the appropriate IEC Standard. Where no relevant standard exists,
tests shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Insulation resistance tests on all electrical equipment.
Continuity and conductivity resistance tests.
Test operation of alarm and tripping, devices to local and remote.
Rotational tests on all motors.
Polarity tests on CTs and VTs.
Oil tests.
Grounding system and electrode tests.
Ratio, Vector Grouping and magnetising current tests on each transformer.
Calibration of winding and oil temperature devices.
Vector group and phasing tests on VT circuits.
Magnetisation current/voltage tests and winding resistance tests on all current transformers.
Primary and secondary injection tests on relays, protection devices and equipment.
15.12.3.2 Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall be visually inspected.In the case of gas type circuit breakers testing will be re-
quired on the gas system to prove the gas pressure, quantity, dryness and dielectric strength.
Contact resistance tests shall be carried out. In the case of multi-interrupter circuit breakers resistance
tests will be required at each interrupter or pair of interrupters as well as through the series of inter-
rupters on each pole.
Operational tests shall include local and remote trip/close. Timing tests shall be carried out on all cir-
cuit breakers, except those which are below 66kV and which are neither assembled at Site nor have
mechanically ganged pole operation.
Local air components associated with pneumatic operation, including air compressors, shall be tested
and air loss measurements and pressure and alarm settings checked. Tests shall be made also on
mechanical and hydraulic operating systems.
15.12.3.3 Disconnectors and Earth Switches
Manual operation of disconnectors and earth switches shall be subject to operational tests to confirm
contact pressures, contact resistances, simultaneous operation of all phases and the ease of opera-
tion.
Motorised operation of disconnectors, and earth switches shall be tested to prove the motor operation,
including local and remote operation, and timing tests shall also be carried out. Motor protection shall
be tested.
Checks shall be made on interlocks, local and remote indications and operation of auxiliary contacts.
Earth switches shall be tested to confirm the opening and closing sequences and checks shall be
made on interlocks, indications and manual locking devices.

Volume 2 Page 356
15.12.3.4 Busbars and Connections
Flexible busbars and connections shall be tested to ensure that the correct tensions, sags and clear-
ances will be maintained over the range of environmental conditions and loads without stress to other
equipment. If dynamometers are used to check the sags and tensions, they shall be checked both be-
fore and after use.
Rigid busbars and connections shall be tested to ensure that the busbars will not cause overloading of
the supporting insulators under load conditions and under the range of climatic variations applicable to
the site and that expansion and contraction of the equipment is fully accommodated by flexible con-
nections.
Conductivity tests shall be carried out on all connections and joints which are made on site, without
exception.
15.12.3.5 Earthing System
Tests shall be made on the effectiveness of the bonding and earthing which will include conductivity
tests on selected joints, on the main earthing system, and at the connections to equipment and struc-
tures. Checks shall also be made on precautions taken to avoid corrosion. attack on the earthing sys-
tem.
Test probes at approximately 300 and 600 metres separation will normally be required to effectively
test the earthing system. The use of transmission line conductors may be arranged to simplify these
testing procedures.
The earth resistance shall be measured during the installation and on completion as follows:
of each earth rod after driving

of the earth grid after completion and backfilling of the trenches
of each group of earth rods or earth point after completion of the connection from the test link ter-
minal
of the completed installation without any connections outside the substation
The tests shall be carried out by a method and with equipment approved by the Engineer. All tests are
to be witnessed and the equipment and method used recorded with the test results.
The Contractor may also be called upon to provide assistance in the measurement of earth resistance
after earth connections to the system have been completed.
15.12.3.6 Control Relays and Metering Panels, Instruments and Protective Devices
a) Wiring
After complete erection and cabling, all circuits shall be subjected to the high voltage test specified
in the relevant IEC or approved standard.
The insulation resistance of all circuits shall be measured before and after any high voltage tests.
For AC secondary injection tests a substantially sinusoidal test supply shall be used.
The operating and resetting level (current and/or voltage) and timing of all relays shall be measured
over an agreed range of settings for all relays.

Volume 2 Page 357
For directional relays phase-shifting transformers shall be used to determine the maximum torque
angle and the boundaries of operation/restraint.
Other relays shall be fully tested in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
All DC elements of protection relays shall be tested for operation at 70% rated voltage.
All DC supplies shall be checked for severity of current inrush when energised by switching on or
inserting fuses or links.
b) Mechanical Inspection
All panel equipment is to be examined to ensure that it is in proper working condition and correctly ad-
justed, correctly labelled and that cases, covers, glass and gaskets are in good order and properly fit-
ting.
c) General
Sufficient tests shall be performed on the relays and protection schemes to:
establish that the equipment has not suffered damage during transit.
establish that the correct equipment has been supplied and installed.
confirm that the various items of equipment have been correctly interconnected.
confirm performance of schemes designed on the bases of calculation e.g. differential protection.
to provide a set of figures for comparison with future maintenance values allowing the condition of
the equipment to be determined.
d) Secondary Injection
Secondary injection shall be carried out on all AC relays, using voltage and current of sinusoidal
wave form and rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory operation and range adjustment.
The polar characteristic of all distance protections shall be recorded at a minimum of 30 degree in-
tervals.
For circulating current protection employing high impedance voltage operated relays, the points of
injection for relay voltage setting tests shall be across the relay and stabilizing resistance.
The fault setting for the type of protection is to be established by secondary injection, where it is
impracticable to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across the appro-
priate relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors, and CT's connected.
e) Primary Injection
All current operated relays shall be tested by injection of primary current to record the actual relay
setting and as a final proof of the integrity of all secondary connections.
The stability of all differential schemes shall be checked by injection of primary current.
Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor and the methods employed
for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer.
Tests are to be carried out as follows:
Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transformers as a group,
care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.
Overall primary injection to prove correct interconnection between current transformer groups
and associated relays.
Fault setting tests, where possible, to establish the value of current necessary to produce op-
eration of the relays.
f) DC Operations
Tests are to be carried out to prove the correctness of all DC polarities, the operating levels of DC re-
lays and the correct functioning of DC relay schemes, selection and control switching, indications and
alarms. The correct functioning of all isolation links and fuses shall also be checked.

Volume 2 Page 358
g) Tests on Load
Tests on load shall also be done to demonstrate stability and operation of protection relays as re-
All tripping, control, alarm and interlocking circuits shall be functionally tested to prove satisfactory
and fool-proof operation and/or resetting. The functional and safety aspects of all shorting and/or
isolation links, fuses and switches devices shall be proved.
The total burdens connected to all voltage transformer circuits shall be measured and recorded.
The total capacitance of all wiring and apparatus connected to the negative pole of each main trip-
ping battery shall be measured and recorded; the value shall not exceed 10 microfarad.
The continuous current drain of all trip circuit supervision relays shall be measured and shall not be
greater than half the minimum current required for tripping. The supervision current shall be meas-
ured with the circuit breaker (or other device) both open and closed.
15.12.3.7 Batteries and Chargers
Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and adjustment,
the battery and charger alarm systems and battery capacity.The open-circuit cell voltages of the bat-
teries when fully charged shall be recorded.The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation
shall be tested.
15.12.3.8 Power Cables
Each completed circuit shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance.
15.12.3.9 Current Transformers
A magnetisation curve shall be obtained for each current transformer in order to:
Detect damage in transit or installation
Prove that the correct cores have been wired out to the relevant terminals
For high impedance relay schemes, to confirm that correct relay settings have been calculated.
The DC resistance of each current transformer secondary winding shall be measured and also the
transformers and connecting leads, each item being recorded separately.
The insulation resistance of all secondary circuits shall be measured at 1000 volt and recorded.
Primary current injection tests shall be conducted on all current transformers using adequate primary
current to prove correct ratio, polarity and, for differential protection schemes, to prove the correct rela-
tive polarities of all current transformers of each scheme.
15.12.3.10 Voltage Transformers
The transformer ratio and polarity shall be checked using a primary voltage high enough to give a
clearly measurable secondary voltage or by using rated primary voltage and comparison with an al-
ready proven voltage transformer. The phasing and phase rotation shall be checked. For three phase
voltage transformers a test shall be conducted to show that energising each primary winding produces

Volume 2 Page 359
an output from only the correct phase secondary winding. The residual voltage of any open delta or
broken delta winding shall be measured with rated primary voltage applied.
15.12.3.11 Control and Instrumentation Equipment
The following general tests shall be performed on control and instrumentation equipment at site:
High voltage testing of all circuits, as specified in the relevant IEC or approved standard.
Insulation resistance testing of all circuits.
Functional tests of all tripping, control, alarm and interlocking circuits.
The testing of all equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions or as advised by
the Engineer.
15.12.3.12 Transformers and Ancillary Equipment
The following tests shall be performed:
Insulation resistance tests on bushings.

Insulation resistance test at 500V between core and core clamping structure.
Voltage withstand tests on insulating oil to BS 148.
Ratio.
Phase relationship.
Magnetisation characteristics of current transformers of winding temperature devices.
Calibration of winding temperature devices.
Tap Selector and Diverter Switch alignment.
Calibration of automatic voltage control equipment.
Proving tests as necessary on control schemes.
Measurement of winding resistance on all taps and phases.
Where applicable the above tests shall also be carried out on earthing transformers.
15.12.3.13 FOX, Teleprotection and Communication
Tests shall be exhaustive and shall demonstrate that the overall performance satisfies every require-
ment specified.The following tests shall be carried out:
Physical inspection unit testing and demonstration of diagnostic aids as appropriate of al equip-
ment in stand-alone mode.
System testing of 48V power supply equipment.
System testing of FOX equipment for speech and teleprotection.
System testing of telephone equipment.
System testing of teleprotection equipment to plant.

Volume 2 Page 360
15.13 Staffing
During pre-commissioning the Contractor shall provide all necessary supervisory and operating staff.
The only involvement of the Employer's staff will be in accordance with the training and instruction as
in this specification.
During the commissioning phase, the Employer's operating staff will operate plant and equipment un-
der the supervision of the Contractor's supervisors.
The Contractor shall have satisfied himself as to the capability of the Employer's operators to carry out
such operations as he may direct and shall remain responsible for the successful performance of such
operations. Throughout the whole of the Commissioning Period the Contractor shall provide suitably
qualified and experienced operating staff, who shall instruct the Employer's staff in the correct operat-
ing procedures.
The Contractor shall provide a team of suitably qualified and experienced engineers and technicians
to pre-commission and commission the overall plant. The Contractor shall also ensure that a suitably
qualified commissioning engineer from the respective Manufacturer's own service organisation shall
visit the site to check the erection or installation of each significant plant item, and to supervise the
commissioning of the plant item until the basic functioning of the item has been demonstrated to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
At all times the Contractor shall ensure that his staff and any Subcontractor's or seconded staff, ob-
serve all prescribed safety rules and permit systems.
15.14 Taking Over
After satisfactory completion of the tests on completion, the Engineer will issue a Taking Over Certifi-
cate for the plant. The issue of any such certificate shall not however relieve the Contractor of any of
his responsibilities in respect of proving that the performance of the plant meets the guaranteed val-
ues.
The Taking Over Certificate shall make reference to a schedule of outstanding minor defects and
omissions which have been accepted by the Engineer as not affecting the full and safe operation of
the plant. The Contractor shall rectify such defects and omissions not later than 3 months after Taking
Over.
The date certified in the Taking Over Certificate shall be the date on which the tests on completion
were completed.
15.15 Defects after Taking Over
In accordance with the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for making
good defects or damage which may appear or occur during a 12 month guarantee period from the
date certified in the Taking Over Certificate.

Volume 2 Page 361
Following any remedial work or replacement of any component part during the 12 months, the guaran-
tee period for such a part shall be extended, commencing from the date at which the remedial work
was completed.
Immediately prior to the completion of this period the Employer reserves the right to request the Con-
tractor to open up for inspection the whole or any part of the Plant. The Employer will provide the la-
bour to work under the direct supervision of the Contractor's representative for the purpose of such in-
spection.
The Contractor shall submit for approval the arrangements he intends making under this Contract for
the making good of defects and for providing the supervisory service detailed above.
15.16 Final Acceptance Certificate
Application for the Final Certificate may be made to the Engineer after the Contractor has ceased to
be under any obligation under the Contract. This shall include the submission of final contract record
drawings and fully bound version of the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals. If a Taking-
Over Certificate has been issued in respect of any Section or Portion of the Works, only one Final Cer-
tificate will be issued after all the said obligation has ceased. Final Certificate will be issued after all
the said obligation has ceased. Where the Contractor has carried out replacements or renewals to the
Works, the Contractor's obligations shall continue, but the right of the Contractor to apply for a Final
Certificate other than for the replacements or renewals shall not be affected by that fact.

Volume 2 Page 362
16. Power Cables and Cable Terminating Ac-

cessories
16.1 Scope
This chapter describes the general technical requirements for the 230 kV power cables & cable termi-
nating accessories and installation of cables and shall be read in conjunction with the project require-
ments, schedules and drawings in the specification.
The 230 kV cables and accessories shall be suitable for connecting the 400/230/33 kV power trans-
formers with 230 kV AIS switchgear.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the cables have been designed, built and installed in accord-
ance with the relevant international standards and the specification. It shall also operate and perform
on a site in accordance with the requirements of the specification and in the environment defined
therein.
The design shall be proven by the submission of test certificates covering all specified tests deemed to
be pertinent to the plant and to the conditions in which it will operate at the time of Biding.
The scope of work also includes supply and installation of cable sealing ends at both ends including
terminating insulators.
16.2 Standards
The cable and accessories shall comply with this specification and the latest version of relevant IEC,
BS or approved equivalent.
16.3 Conditions of Operation
All cables shall be suitable for operation, at the guaranteed continuous ratings specified, throughout all
seasons of the year. The nominal system voltage to which the cables will be connected is 230kV and
the highest operating voltage Um will be 245kV.
Cable shall be designed to operate continuously at temperature of 90C. Each conductor and the met-
al sheath/screen shall be capable of carrying the specified fault current for the specified time and its
final temperature shall not exceed 250C. Adequate measure should be taken to protect against in-
gress of moisture and water.
Short circuit earth fault rating of cable metal sheath or metallic screen for 230 kV cable shall be 50 kA
for 1sec. respectively.
The maximum continuous current carrying capacity and maximum permissible conductor temperature,
and the factors for determining such rating and temperature, shall be based on IEC recommendation

Volume 2 Page 363
No. 287 and subsequent amendments, and all conditions obtaining on Site. The following conditions
for the design of the cables shall be assumed:-
Transmission capacity for 230 kV cable circuit: 520 MVA
Other conditions for cables laid in concrete ducts/tunnels/buried pipes shall be assumed:
Max. ambient air temperature: 45C

Continuous conductor temperature: 90C
Max. conductor temperature under fault: 250C
The Contractor shall confirm that the cable sizes are adequate for the required circuit ratings based on
the specified foregoing parameters, and he shall also confirm that the cables are adequate for the
short-circuit requirements specified. The Contractor will be required to produce cable design calcula-
tions to verify that the selected cable sizes are suitable for the selected cable laying conditions in con-
crete cable ducts, tunnels or buried pipes.
If the Contractor considers that the conditions and the proximity to other power cables, spacing and
method of installation are likely to reduce the maximum current carrying capacity he shall increase the
cable conductor cross section accordingly.
The conductor section of the cable circuits shall be adequate for carrying the specified short-circuit
current when operating under the specified load conditions without deterioration of the dielectric or
other component materials of the cable.
16.4 Type Approval
Cables and accessories shall have satisfactorily passed type approval tests in accordance with theS-
pecificationanddetailsofthecabledesignsofferedshallbegiveninthe Schedule of Particulars and Guaran-
tees. Type test reports shall include cable design details and design drawings of each jointing acces-
sory included in the type test.
The Contractor shall certify that the cables and/or accessories offered will be identical in all essential
particulars in respect of design, materials and workmanship with the cables and/or accessories for
which type approval certificates are offered in support of this bid.
The Contractor shall also ensure that all materials used will be subjected to and shall have satisfactori-
ly withstood such tests as are customary in the manufacture of the types of cable specified.
Records of such tests shall be available for inspection, if required by the Engineer.
16.5 Cable Lengths
Cables shall be supplied in maximum drum lengths bearing in mind the transport limitations in gaining
access to the site. Cables shall be installed in maximum possible lengths and straight through jointing
between shorter lengths will not be permitted.

Volume 2 Page 364
The cable routes on the drawings attached to the Bidding Documents are provided for information on-
ly, and it is Contractor's responsibility to establish the exact quantities of cables and accessories re-
quired to complete the whole of the works as described in the Specification.
16.6 Cable Drums
Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made of steel suitably protected against corrosion.
They shall be lagged with closely fitting battens in accordance with the relevant BS or equivalent IEC
standard.
Each cable drum shall bear a distinguishing number on the outside of one flange. Particulars of the
cable, i.e. voltage, conductor size and material, number of cores, type, length, gross and net weights
shall also be clearly shown on one flange. The direction of rolling shall be indicated by an arrow on
both flanges. The method of drum marking shall be to the Engineer's approval.
Cable maintenance lengths and spare lengths shall be wound on to steel drums before they are hand-
ed over to the Employer's stores. Particulars of the cable(as stated above) shall be clearly marked on
one flange.
16.7 Spare Cable
In addition to the cable maintenance lengths supplied against the Schedule of Spares the Employer
shall have the option to purchase from the Contractor at the rates stated in the Schedule any spare cut
lengths of cable for future maintenance purposes.
Brass or other approved sealing caps of the correct size shall be supplied for each end of spare cut
cable lengths to enable them to be properly stored for future maintenance purposes. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the immediate sealing of such cut lengths and the cost thereof shall be
deemed to be included in the contract price.
16.8 Special Tools
Special tools used for the purpose of the cable installation, they shall be handed over to the Employ-
er's stores after the taking over of the installation.
Price for such special tolls is to be considered as included in the price schedule.
16.9 Cable Jointing Instructions and Drawings
Copies of the instructions for the jointing of each type of cable terminating and jointing accessories
supplied shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any work is commenced at site. One
copy of each instruction shall be bound into each copy of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions
to be supplied to the Engineer at the completion of the Contract for the use of the Employer.

Volume 2 Page 365
The following drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer. "As in-
stalled" drawings of cable routes shall be drawn to a scale of 1/200. The route shall be dimensioned in
such manner that it may be used for pinpointing accurately the cables in the future. All drawings shall
be submitted for approval before the issue of the Taking-Over certificate.
16.10 Cable Specification
16.10.1 General
This Specification applies to single core cables with triple extrusion type solid dielectric. They shall be
generally manufactured in accordance with the relevant International Electrotechnical Commission
Publication (IEC) and British Standard (BS) where applicable.
16.10.2 Conductors
Conductors shall be of stranded plain annealed copper wires to IEC or BS filled to make the cables
longitudinally watertight by extrusion during stranding. This shall be to prevent ingress of water into the
cable should the outer sheath become damaged. The allowable operating temperature of conductor
and waterproofing shall be 90C.
16.10.3 Conductor Screen
Semi-conductive tape for preventing ingress of semi-conductive XLPE and gluing onto the stranded
conductors temperature resistance up to 250C. Semi-conductive extruded cross-linked material to
provide a smooth cylindrical equi-potential surface to which the insulation can be intimately bonded.
The material shall be compatible in all respects with its conductor and insulation materials.
16.10.4 Insulation
Cross-liked polyethylene (XLPE) melted together with the conductor screen capable to operate at con-
tinuous conductor temperature of 90C and short circuit temperature of 250C. Cross-linking process
using curing is not permitted, dry process shall be given.The insulation of the completed cable shall be
substantially free from voids and contaminants.
16.10.5 Insulation Screen
Semi-conductive compound of extruded layer firmly bonded to the XLPE insulation. The conductor
screen, the insulation and the insulation screen are to be extruded in a single process to keep the in-
terface smooth.
16.10.6 Metallic Screen
Where the cable core screens are inadequate to meet the earth fault current specified, a metallic layer
of adequate cross-sectional area shall be included in the design applied over the screen. The metal-

Volume 2 Page 366
liclayer shall be Copper screen with counter helix filled with swelling powder sheathed in accordance
with latest BS or IEC Publication.
16.10.7 Intermediate Layer
An intermediate layer of suitable compound shall be provided in between metallic screen and alumini-
um sheath if necessary.
16.10.8 Corrugated Seamless Aluminium Sheath
Metallic sheath shall consist of the extruded corrugated seamless aluminium sheath. Aluminium used
for the sheath shall have the minimum purity of 99.5% and shall be of best quality metal free from pin-
hole flaws and other imperfections. The minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below 85% of the
specified nominal thickness by more than 0.1 mm.
16.10.9 MDPE Outer Sheath
After applying the bitumen compound over the aluminium sheath, the extruded MDPE outer sheath
shall be applied.
The nominal thickness of outer sheath shall be not less the specified value. The minimum thickness at
any point shall not fall below 85% of the specified nominal thickness by more than 0.1mm.
An outer graphite coating shall be applied to outer sheath as an electrode for the voltage test on the
extruded outer sheath.
16.10.10 Identification of Cable
The outer PVC sheath of all cables shall carry the following identification marks in three meter inter-
vals approximately.
"Electric Cables- 230000 Volts/33000 Volts and cross section in mm cu. PGCB, the name of the manu-
facture and the year of fabrication."
The letters and numerals shall comply with IEC or BS Publication.
16.11 Sealing and Drumming
Immediately after the works tests, both ends of the cable shall be sealed against the ingress of mois-
ture, dirt and insects and the end projecting from the drum shall be adequately protected against me-
chanical damage during handling. The cable drums shall be arranged to take a round spindle and be
lagged with strong, closely fitting so as to take a round spindle and be lagged with strong, closely fit-
ting battens so to prevent damage to the cable. Only steel cable drum shall be used.

Volume 2 Page 367
The complete cable shall be rolled on steel cable drums capable of withstanding the rough handling
during transport without damage of the cable and enabling easy and safe unrolling of the cable during
erection.
Each drum shall have marked in indelible point on both flanges, the following indications besides the
shipping instructions.
Destination
Type of cable
Exact length
Net and gross weight
Trade mark
An arrow pointing in the direction of unrolling.
16.12 Terminating Accessories
Detailed drawings showing the types of cable sealing ends, terminal boxes and glands proposed for
the installation shall be submitted at the time of Bidding. All cable sealing ends and terminal boxes
shall be designed with jointing faces below compound level which will ensure the retention of the filling
medium and/or cable compound under operating conditions and exclude the entry of air, dust or mois-
ture. Cable sealing ends and terminal boxes designed for use with fluid or semi-fluid filling media shall
have fanged joints, the faces of which shall be machined.
An earthing strip shall be provided on all boxes terminating lead sheathed cables.
The external dimensions, fixing cables and terminal arrangements for all sealing ends and terminal
boxes shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be provided with all necessary fittings, including external flexi-
ble connections as required. The design of flexible connections shall be to approval.
Drain plugs shall be of ample size to permit the filling medium to be removed. The contact faces of the
cable sockets shall be thoroughly cleaned, the lugs shall be placed in the most suitable positions and
arranged as required to avoid unnecessary bending of cable cores inside the box. Provision shall be
made for earthing the body of the box, and for expansion of the conductors in the box. Provision shall
also be made for the expansion of the filling medium and arrangements made to prevent the formation
of air spaces when filling.
16.13 Installation of Cable
16.13.1 Cable Tunnels and Trenches with Pits, Ducts and Drains
The Contractor shall design and construct cable tunnels required for connecting 230 kV power cables.
Width and height of cable tunnels shall conform to required cable spacing and working spaces. The
structure of cable tunnels is reinforced concrete and must be designed enough bearing capacity cause
by some parts of cable tunnel are under heavy equipment.

Volume 2 Page 368
The Contractor shall design and construct all trenches required for the work. The depth of the cable
trenches shall be minimum 1.5 meter from the Substation switchyard, finished level and the width shall
conform to required cable spacing and working spaces.
The thickness of cable tunnel or trench wall and floor shall be minimum 150mm and should be de-
signed to withstand the subsoil water pressure.
Cables in cable tunnels or trenches shall be laid on cable supports at every (half) meter interval.
Cable trenches shall be covered with concrete trench covers. Trenches will be built with the top edge
of the walls 50mm above the finished switchyard level.
The cable tunnels and trenches shall have a suitable bed slope with sufficient number of drainage pits
so that water could be drained off naturally as well as by artificial means.
The removable trench covers shall be of recast reinforced concrete adequately designed to safely with-
stand a load of 2,500 N at the centre of each cover. The trench covers shall be of such size as to facilitate
their handling by manual labour.
16.13.2 Supports and Racks
Cable laid supports and racks together with fixing clamps, bolts,nuts and screws for outdoor installa-
tions and in outdoor concrete lined trenches shall be of hot dip galvanised steel.
Cable support and rack designs shall be submitted for the written approval of the Engineer before
Manufacturer or erection.
The single core cables shall be clamped to the racks with smooth finish split packing pieces or cleats
with bores of the correct size for the cable diameters. The cleats shall be of Silicon aluminium, glass
filled nylon or other tough non-hygroscopic or non-magnetic material. Wooden cleats are prohibited.
16.13.3 Bonding
The cables shall be installed as an insulated sheath system. Single core cable sheaths may either be
solidly bonded (single bonding).
Bonding leads shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to carry the maximum imposed short circuit
current level. A schematic diagram detailing the proposed bonding systems and stating bonding leads
cross section shall be submitted with the Bid.

Volume 2 Page 369
16.14 Tests
16.14.1 Type Tests
The cable shall be tested and shall satisfy the most recent relevant IEC publications.The tests need
not be carried out again if they can be provided by already existing type tests reports of recognized la-
boratories.If the cable is not yet type tested, the relevant tests shall be carried out.
16.14.2 Routine/Sample Tests
The cable shall be tested and shall satisfy the most recent relevant IEC Publication.
16.14.3 Tests at Site
After completion of the erection and before commissioning, each cable shall be submitted to the fol-
lowing test:
Verification of the proper and complete erection of the cable and the terminals.
Verification of the proper phase displacement.
Verification of the proper earthing of the sheath.
DC voltage test.
AC voltage test.
16.15 Earthing System
The cable sheath for single bonding of cable and cable end termination structures shall be earthed at
earthing mat by extending the earthing system.

Volume 2 Page 370
17. Power Line Carrier, Teleprotection And

Communication Equipment
17.1 Power Line Carrier
17.1.1 General
Power line carrier equipment shall be installed on the 400 kV and 230 kV transmission networks asso-
ciated with the project.The carrier frequency range available is between 50 to 500 kHz.
Drawing No. 1731/SS/1/017shows the existing and planned arrangements of power line carrier sys-
tem. All materials and equipment offered shall be brand new, from the manufacturer's normal and
standard construction, designed and manufactured according the latest technological methods.
Existing power line carrier (PLC) and communication equipment which are of has been supplied by
ABB of Switzerland. For the purpose of standardisation of operating performance and facilities offered
equipment shall be compatible with the existing ones.
Equipment providing increased signalling capacity, based on digital techniques shallbe offered satisfy-
ing the following requirements:
the high frequency bandwidth requirements are no greater than the SSB type.
the digital equipment will not affect analogue equipment in service on the same line.
an applicable schedule of technical particulars and guarantees is prepared and included with the
Bid.
full details of in service installations are included.
Should equipment manufactured by a different supplier be proposed, Biddersare to verify that the
equipment shall be fully compatible with existing system and equipment and provide evidence that the
equipment has been successfully interfaced with the existing type and is in continuous commercial
operation.
17.1.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive carrier frequency allocation plan which shall be subject
to the approval of the Employer.Before approval however, the Contractor shall agree all carrier fre-
quency plans and power output with the governing radio frequency licencing authority to ensure non-
interference with air traffic control, and marine navigation beacons, etc.
17.1.3 Line Coupling
(a) General
The high voltage transmission system is a three phase 50Hz system solidly earthed with the following
design parameter detailed elsewhere in this specification:

Volume 2 Page 371
Rated Voltage (kV) 245420

Nominal Voltage (kV) 230400
Symmetrical Short Circuit Current, 1 sec(kA) 6350
Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage(kVp) 10501425
Continuous Switchgear Rating(A) 16002000
All current carrying equipment shall be capable of withstanding these conditions for a period of one
second.
(b) Method of Coupling
Coupling of the carrier signals to the double circuit transmission lines shall be phase to phase by
means of capacitor voltage transformers supplied under this contract.
The Contract shall include all line traps and mountings, coupling filters, conductor clamps, HF connec-
tions, matching transformers, HF cables and glands required to complete the HF installation at site.
(c) Line Traps
New line traps shall have at least the same continuous rating as the switchgear and shall be capable
of withstanding the short circuit current for one second.
The preferred value of coil inductance is 0.2 millihenries although other values will be considered de-
pending upon the Bidders frequency plan.
The line traps shall be broad band tuned by means of a tuning device, which shallpreferably be ar-
ranged to permit interchange without removing the line trap.The ohmic resistance shall preferably be
600 ohms or greater.
The line trap shall have a protective device which utilises non-linear resistor type arrestors and the
nominal discharge current shall be 10kA.
Bidders shall submit type test reports or be expected to demonstrate that their line traps satisfy the
tests recommended in IEC publication 353 - Line Traps, with regard to temperature rise, short time
current rating, protective discharge, and also the HF rejection bandwidth.
All line traps shall be provided with bird barriers and clearly visible rating plates which will include the
following data:
i) Manufacturer's name
ii) Type
iii) Serial number
iv) Rated continuous current
v) Rated short time current with respect to time
vi) Rated coil inductance
vii) Total mass (kg)
whilst the tuning device shall be similarly marked detailing:

Volume 2 Page 372
ii) Type
iii) Serial number
iv) Frequency band(s) etc., in kilohertz
v) Rated protective level of the tuning device.
Line traps are to be mounted on capacitor voltage transformers, supplied under this Contract andBid-
ders shall detail the type of mounting and connecting plates available for the line conductor and bus-
bar connections.
17.1.4 Capacitor Voltage Transformers
New capacitor voltage transformers (CVT)and lattice steel structures shall be provided suitable for
mounting line traps on them.
The capacitor shall have a rated capacitance of not less than 6000pFat the working voltage, an im-
pulse withstand voltage as specified and meet the insulation level and test voltage equivalents of IEC
recommendation for each device (IEC Publication 358 - Coupling Capacitors and Capacitor divid-
ers).Creepage distances will be 25mm/kV (based on maximum phase to earth voltage).
Full technical details of the capacitor voltage transformers shall be provided in the Schedules of Guar-
antees and Technical Particulars.
17.1.5 HF Coupling Units
The high frequency coupling units shall be assembled in a sheet steel box or similar and be suitable
for mounting on the pedestal support for the capacitor voltage transformer, or coupling capacitor.The
filters are to be suitable for outdoor use in a hot dusty/humid climate and are to have weatherproof
door seals together with breather holes to avoid condensation.The units are to have an earthing switch
which should preferably be interlocked with the box door/lid such that the latter cannot be opened un-
less the earth switch is closed to earth the device, and clear indication of the ON/OFF position of this
switch should be indicated.The terminal of the filter which shall be connected directly to the substation
earth shall be clearly designated.
The coupling device shall meet in full the safety and protection requirements of the IEC recommenda-
tion for such devices (IEC publication 481 - Coupling devices for power line carrier systems).
The tuning range of the coupling unit(s) shall be suitable for the HF carrier frequency allocations being
provided on this Contract. Full details of the Bidder's proposals shall be submitted for approval by the
Employer and appropriate Authority. The device shall be fitted with a rating plate clearly defining, but
not limited to, the following data:
ii) Type
iii) Serial number
iv) Peak envelope power
v) Available bandwidth or working range

Volume 2 Page 373
Bidders shall be expected to demonstrate that their equipment complies with the following tests:
(a) Drain coil

measurement of impedance at power frequency
current carrying capacity at power frequency 1 amp RMS continuous and 50 amps RMS for
0.2 seconds.
(b) Power frequency voltage tests on the isolation transformer of 5 kV RMS for one minute between
each coil and earth, and between each coil and screen.
(c) Composite loss at several frequencies within the working range of the filter.
(d) Return loss at several frequencies within the working range of the filter.
(e) Impulse voltage test on each phase to phase filter, in accordance with Section 6 of IEC Publica-
tion 60.
The coupling filters detailed above shall be mounted on the CVT or CC pedestals, unless a waterproof
housing is provided in the base of the coupling capacitor or CVT, at a height such that the external HV
(primary) terminal on the coupling filter shall be at a minimum height of 2440mm above ground level.
Full technical details of the HF coupling units shall be provided in the Schedule of Technical Particu-
lars.
17.1.6 High Frequency Cable
Sufficient high frequency cable suitable to connect the coupling filters with the indoor PLC high fre-
quency units shall be supplied.The cable shall preferably have a characteristic impedance of 75 ohms
unbalanced or 150 ohms balanced depending upon the impedance of the coupling filters and the in-
door equipment.The cable shall be PVC covered, steel wire armoured with a further outer sheath of
PVC.
Bidders shall clearly show the make-up of the cable, together with details of the cable mechanical and
electrical characteristics.Bidders shall also state the "short" time and continuous test voltages with
which their cable complies.
17.1.7 Power Line Carrier High Frequency Unit
(a) General
The design and selection of equipment and components shall be based on achieving a minimum
lifetime of 20 years when operating under the specified service conditions.
The design and performance requirements of the digitalpower line carrier equipmentshall be equiva-
lent or better than IEC 495.
The equipment to be provided shall be of the digital transmission signalling type,constructed on a

modular basis with modules plugging into 19" (480 mm) shelves.The equipment shall be composed
completely of solid state integrated circuits with a minimum of discrete components.
Equipment providing increased signalling capacity, based on digital techniques shall be offered satis-
fying the following requirements.

Volume 2 Page 374
The high frequency bandwidth requirements are no greater than the SSB type
The digital equipment will not affect analogue equipment in service on the same line.
Full details of in service installations are included.
(b) Information to be Submitted with the Bid
The Bidder shall submit the following with the Bid:
i) a technical description, which shall include full details of the design, operation, construction,
performance and maintenance aspects of the equipment.
ii) detail performance of the equipment .
iii) a proposed frequency plan.
(c) Deleted
(d) DigitalCarrier Terminal Equipment
The equipment design shall be based on complete flexibility over the RF frequency spectrum and also
in the selection of services to be transmitted.RF allocation shall be achieved with programmable syn-
thesisers and easily tuned RF filters.The allocation of the frequency band and of the services to be
transmitted shall be carried out by means of a laptop computer with suitable software installed, it shall
be interactive so that programming/reprogramming can be readily carried out at the factory and also at
site.
The combined bit stream (containing speech/data etc.) shall be suitably digitally modulated (e.g. QAM,
or PSK etc.) and converted to the selected nominal carrier frequency band for transmission over the
power line.
The nominal impedance at the carrier frequency output shall be 75 ohms (un-balanced) or 150 ohms
(balanced).Provision shall be made for terminating the output in an appropriate dummy load.The re-
turn loss within the nominal carrier frequency band in the transit direction shall be not less than 10dB.
Bidders shall provide calculations to justify operation of the PLC over the transmission line(s).This
shall include allowance for line length/construction, coupling losses, adverse weather and fail margin -
6
to obtain a suitable minimum BER (typically 10- ).
There shall not be any limitations in paralleling the digital PLC with other similar digital PLC terminals
on the same transmission line, or with analogue PLC equipment.Bidders shall show clearly the meth-
ods of transmission used, and identify the necessary RF frequency spacing between PLC equipment,
also any interface equipment needed.The switching off/on of a PLC terminal connected with any other
PLC terminals in parallel, shall not cause any interference with other still working PLC.
1. Telephone Channels
To implement speech channels into the data stream the speech shall be sampled.Together with
the associated signalling and error coding a bit rate derived from a basic sampling rate of 8
kbit/s shall be typically provided.The interface of each speech channel shall cover the required
application and provide for both 4-wire and 2-wire termination.The telephone channel shall be
suitable for 4-wire working at transit stations as determined by the requirements of the tele-

Volume 2 Page 375
phone scheme.Circuits terminating at a station shall be suitable for connection to a two-wire tel-
ephone exchange, 2/4 wire switching shall therefore, be available as a standard facility.
Bidders shall state the method of telephone signalling.
Bidders shall state the relative 4-wire levels used for speech transmission and reception.
All speech and VT signal input and output circuits shall be balanced and have a nominal imped-
ance of 600 ohms.The return loss within the effectively transmitted frequency band shall be not
less than 17 dB.
The interface of the speech channel shall include for inter PAX tie lines and "Long line" tele-
phones.The speech channel interface shall manage the following types of interface:
E&M
MFC
DTMF
Decadic
2. Data Transmission
Data channels shall be time multiplexed into the output bit stream.The interface for the data
channels shall be RS 232 (V.24/V.28).The data channels shall be configured as any combina-
tion of synchronous or asynchronous channels.
Bidders shall state the capacity/number of data channels which can be equipped on a link.
Where an audio data channel interface is required to/from and FSK modem, a suitable 600 ohm
FSK interface shall be provided.The centre frequency, shift frequencies, and modem levels
which shall be managed shall be configurable.
3. Receivers
To provide for level stability on the audio services, the receiver dynamic range shall be approx-
imately 30 dB.Where PLC is required to signal over long transmission lines, proposals for main-
taining adequate output capacity and suitable level stability on the audio services shall be in-
cluded.
An alarm shall be raised in the event of the BER becoming degraded.
(e) Service Telephone
A service telephone shall be provided for the PLC terminal.The handset shall be located in the termi-
nal cubicle.A means of telephone calling the equivalent telephone at the remote end of the link shall
be included.
(f) Service Conditions
The noise generated within the terminals and the cross talk attenuation between speech and VF sig-
nalling channels shall comply withIEC recommendation 495.
The level of spurious emission shall be clearly stated in the schedules, together with the frequency re-
sponse of the speech channel referred to 800Hz and the VFT signalling channels referred to 3.0 kHz.
The equipment shall operate to its stated performance with a variation in power supply voltage of
+20% and -15% of the nominal value.

Volume 2 Page 376
(g) Voltage Withstand Requirements
The equipment shall be designed to withstand satisfactorily the insulation tests defined in Section 7 of
IEC recommendation 495.
The equipment shall not be subjected to interference by the presence of electrical noise generated by
disconnector switching operations.The bandwidth of such noise extends from 10 kHz to 1 MHz and
can peak to 1200 volts at the coaxial termination.Limiting diodes of the avalanche type should be pro-
vided at the HF cubicle terminals in order to limit this voltage to 400 volts peak to peak.
(h) Test and Alarm Facilities
Clearly designated test points shall be provided on modules where adjustments are required or refer-
ence points are applicable.However, Bidders may offer alternative methods e.g. a hand held mainte-
nance unit or laptop computer with appropriate software.
Supervisory facilities shall be provided for monitoring the HF output amplifier current, the BER and the
cubicle supply voltage etc.
Alarm lamps or LEDs on the terminal shall as a minimum requirement show alarms for 'receiver fail',
'transmitter fail' and receive low BER.Bidders shall provide details of all alarms available on their
equipment.An alarm lamp shall be provided on the cubicle, visible with the cubicle door closed.
In addition to the local annunciation on the PLC terminal, each alarm shall be provided with two sets of
potential free contacts, for connection to external alarm monitoring systems.
17.2 Teleprotection Equipment
The protection of the overhead lines shall be arranged as detailed in Section 5.Teleprotection equip-
ment shall be provided for permissive tripping and direct tripping on the lines.
The permissive tripping signals are required to operate circuit breaker trip relays in conjunction with
the distance protection and directional earth fault relays.
The direct tripping signals are required to operate remote circuit breaker tripping relays and hence
shall have inherent security against mal-operation due to noise present in the bearer channel.
The Bid shall include a technical description of the equipment, which shall include a description of the
design, operation, construction, performance and maintenance aspects of the equipment.
17.2.1 Technical Requirements
The teleprotection equipment shall be of modular construction and will preferably be mounted in the
power line carrier units and work satisfactorily under the service conditions specified.
Manufacturers shall clearly state the precautions taken in the design of their receiver to safeguard the
output against the presence of noise in the channel, and show the difference between their range of
equipment used for "direct" and "permissive" signalling.

Volume 2 Page 377
In the case of the "direct" tripping equipment it shall not be possible to cause a trip output under any of
the following conditions:
(a) Removal or reinsertion of any printed circuit module in either transmitter or receiver of a link,
including the PLC equipment.
(b) Switching on/off of the power supply to the teleprotection equipment.
(c) Switching on/off of the power line carrier equipment at either end of the 400kV line.
(d) Shorting of the output of the teleprotection transmitter or shorting of the input to the teleprotec-
tion receive.
(e) Operation of disconnectors in the high voltage switchgear.
(f) When the level of the input signal to the receiver is below the receiver fail alarm threshold.
17.2.2 Signalling Conditions
Bidders shall state the precautions taken in the design of the receiver to safeguard the output against
the presence of noise in the communications media.Under no circumstances shall a direct trip signal
output occur due to:
an equipment fault
removal/restoration of power to the teleprotection or communications equipment
shorting of the teleprotection transmitter/receiver
operation of primary switchgear plant
removal of reinsertion of any PCB in a teleprotection or communications media terminal.
Teleprotection signal outputs shall be inhibited when the level of the input signal to the receiver is be-
low the fail alarm threshold.
Bidders shall provide the following performance graphs:
Transmission time: SNR versus operate time.

Security: SNR versus probability of an unwanted command output.
Dependability: SNR versus probability of failure of an output command.
Bit Error Rate/Performance Details
FSK modems shall be programmable with respect to both signalling speed and centre frequen-
cy.Bidders shall state the VF allocation required by the teleprotection equipment.
Equipment operating on a frequency shift principle, shall continuously transmit a low level (guard) sig-
nal to monitor the communications channel and as much of the terminal equipment as possible.The
trip frequency shall be transmitted at an increased level output.
Similarly, equipment which transmit coded signal messages for tripping/signalling, shall also transmit
guard codes.

Volume 2 Page 378
17.2.3 Signal Transmission Times
The transmission times required from receipt of an input to the provision of a command output at the
remote location, shall be less than
20 milliseconds for permissive tripping

40 milliseconds for direct tripping
Equipment capable of transmitting more than a single teleprotection signal is only acceptable provided
the specified transmission times are met under all circumstances, including when morethan one/all
signal inputs are initiated simultaneously or part way through a code transmission.
Equipment used for direct tripping shall have the facility to hold on the output signal, so as to be suita-
ble for applications with circuit breaker automatic reclose schemes, to prevent the remote circuit
breaker reclosing until the faulted plant is disconnected from the HV system as detailed in a separate
section of this Specification.
Direct tripping and permissive signals shall have a trip extension facility.The extension time shall be
selectable, typically 200ms.
Bidders shall advise the minimum input pulse length (and the corresponding output), that is required to
provide a guaranteed output.Also any limitation on the maximum output pulse length.
17.2.4 Interface
Data and control interfaces shall comply with CCITT RS232 and V24/V28 recommendations.
For digital communications media the interfaces shall comply with X21.
The transmitter signal command shall be initiated by means of the protection equipment switching
both poles of the station dc supply to the teleprotection input.
The receiver command output shall be a semiconductoror relay arrangement providing two sets of
"contacts", with the "contacts" normally open ("contacts" shall be closed for a command output).These
command output contacts shall be used for switching both poles of the station d.c. supply to the pro-
tection equipment.
The receiver shall also provide two sets of potential free command output auxiliary contacts, for con-
The rating of the above "contacts" shall be to the plant requirements.
The insulation requirements of the protection interface shall be 2 kV rms for one minute (IEC recom-
mendation 255).
Individual counters shall be provided to show the number of teleprotection input and ouput commands
which have been executed.

Volume 2 Page 379
17.2.5 Service Conditions
The equipment shall operate to its stated performance with a variation in power supply voltage of
+20% and -15% of the nominal value.
The equipment shall incorporate measures to ensure that signals are received and executed in the
presence of noise on the communications channel.In the case of coded messages for example,
transmission of a single "trip" code is a non-preferred arrangement.
17.2.6 Voltage Withstand Requirements
Voice frequency, signalling and alarm circuits, when free from earth, shall be capable of withstanding
without damage a voltage of 500 V d.c. applied for one minute between the terminals of the circuit
connected together and earth.
The equipment shallnot be subject to interference by the presence of electrical noise generated by
disconnector switching operations.The bandwidth of such noise extends from 10 kHz to 1 MHz.
17.2.7 Test and Alarm Facilities
Clearly designated test points shall be provided on modules where adjustments are required or refer-
ence points are applicable.Supervisory facilities shall be provided for monitoring the teleprotection in-
put and output at the interface to the communications media.
The alarm output shall be maintained for a minimum period of 100ms, and the operational output shall
not be possible until the alarm output condition is removed.
A separate low level (or BER) shallbe given, but not prevent operation, when the input signal level
drops by typically 6dB from normal.Bidders shall detail the alarm facilities which are available from
their equipment and state the level or BER at which the receiver will cease to function.
Alarm lamps or LEDs shall be provided on the equipment, together with two sets of potential free con-
tacts, for connection to external alarm monitoring systems.A cubicle alarm lamp shall also be provided,
visible with the cubicle door closed.
17.2.8 Housing
Terminal equipment shall be constructed on a modular basis, accommodated in a 19" or ETSI stand-
ard rack configuration, mounted in a cubicle.Equipment required to operate over PLC shall be mount-
ed in the PLC equipment rack.

Volume 2 Page 380
17.3 Operational Telephone System
A new PAX operational telephone system and equipment (suitable for at least 50 percent spare ca-
pacity of the required trunk interfaces and 30 subscriber interfaces) shall be provided and installed at
Rampura substation and shall interconnect with the existing network.Bidders shall be deemed to have
investigated the existing system.
The trunk numbering plan shall be compatible with the present scheme in service in Bangladesh.
The telephone signalling (dialling) system shall be compatible with the present system.
An alarm system shall be provided to indicate traffic failure including blown fuses, loss of power sup-
plies etc.In addition, contacts shall be provided to facilitate extension of the alarms to the telecontrol
equipment.
17.4 Communications DC Power Supply Equipment
17.4.1 General
17.4.1.1 Basis of Design
The equipment shall comply with IEC 176 and 478.
The charger shall be of either the Thyristor controlled type or of the SMPS type.The battery shall be
nickel cadmium type - as detailed in a separate section of this Specification.
The design and selection of equipment and components shall be based on achieving a minimum life-
time of 20 years, when operating under the specified service conditions.
17.4.1.2 Operating Principle
The output of the charger shall, during normal operation, continuously supply the power requirements
of the load whilst simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode.In the event
of an interruption in the a.c. mains supply to the charger, the battery shall supply the load require-
ments for not less than the specified standby time - whilst maintaining the output voltage within per-
missible limits.
Upon restoration of the a.c. mains supply, the rectifier shall automatically resume supply of the load
requirements whilst simultaneously recharging the battery at the float voltage.
17.4.2 Configuration
The power supply installation shall comprise two batteries and two charging sources.each charger
shall be able to float charge both batteries as well as supplying the total load.

Volume 2 Page 381
The total battery capacity shall be able to supply the total load (comprising the delivered load together
with 20% spare for future use) for at least 10 hours in the event of failure of the a.c. mains supply.
The d.c. power supply equipment is required to limit the output voltage to the load within plus 15% and
minus 15% of the nominal value, provided these values do not exceed the voltage guarantee of the
load equipment.The power supply output positive shall be earthed.
17.4.3 Charger
17.4.3.1 General
The charger shall operate according to the constant voltage current limiting principle and shall incorpo-
rate a soft start feature to gradually accept load on initial energising.
The charger shall restart automatically upon restoration of the a.c. mains supply following a mains
supply interruption, and recharge the battery at the float voltage.Internal cooling shall be by natural
ventilation.Forced cooling is not acceptable.
The charger shall be suitable for operation in parallel with one or more chargers, and shall include a
current sharing facility.
The charger shall be of sufficient output capacity for the application, parallel operation of chargers
(where required) is for the purpose of redundancy and not to satisfy the output current requirements.
17.4.3.2 Charger Output
The output characteristic shall provide an output voltage regulation of 1%, over the specified a.c.
mains voltage and frequency range and for load changes 0-100%.The output voltage regulator shall
be adjustable within limits approved by the Engineer and shall be so designed that special tools are
not required for such adjustment.Compensation for battery temperature shall be provided.
The charger shall have protection against overloads or short circuits and shall limit the output cur-
rent.Recovery to a constant voltage characteristic shall occur automatically at the end of the overcur-
rent/short circuit.
17.4.3.3 Boost Charging
Manual boost charging shall be provided.A boost timer shall be included to prevent overcharging.
Operation of boost charging shall disconnect the charger and battery from the load.It shall not be pos-
sible for both chargers to be selected to boost charging at the same time, or for the load to become
disconnected from both batteries and chargers simultaneously.
If the a.c. mains supply fails during boost conditions the two batteries shall be automatically connected
in parallel by "no volt" contactors to the load.
It shall not be possible to connect a "boosted" battery to the load until its terminal voltage has fallen
below the load equipment upper voltage limit.

Volume 2 Page 382
17.4.3.4 Noise and Interference
To avoid unacceptable levels of electrical noise in the load equipment smoothing of the d.c. output is
required.This shall achieve a psophometric noise level at the output, for loads between 0 and 100%,
not exceeding the equivalent of 2 mV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T
(CCITT).
The relative harmonic content of the input current shall comply with the European Directive for EMC,
the EN 60555-2 standard.In the case of SMPS chargers active power factor correction (i.e. boost for
step up converter) shall be provided to control the power factor.
The production of radio frequency interference voltages shall not exceed the values of suppression
grade "N", as defined in EN 55017/55015 - for Thyristor controlled type chargers, and suppression
grade "B" as defined in EN 55022 for SMPS type chargers.
The performance of the d.c. power supply equipment unit shall not be affected, or in any way degrad-
ed, by the use ofthe following when the severity of the electromagnetic radiation environment corre-
sponds to Class 3, in accordance with IEC 801-3:
private mobile radio operating in designated or planned radio frequency bands

current cellular radio equipment
future cellular equipment
mobile data equipment.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the radio frequency bands applicable in the locality.
17.4.3.5 Efficiency/Rating
The charger efficiency shall not be less than 80%.
All chargers supplied shall preferably have the same rating, or be in fixed multiples, to limit the number
of different charger ratings.
17.4.3.6 (f) Instruments, Controls and Alarms
The charger shall be equipped with the following
a.c. mains input circuit breaker

d.c. output circuit breaker
charger output current meter
charger output voltage meter
alarms for charge fail, d.c. volts high etc.
Each alarm shall be provided with local annunciation and two sets of potential free contacts, for con-

Volume 2 Page 383
17.4.4 Battery
17.4.4.1 Type
Nickel cadmium cells shall be of the pocket plate type in accordance with IEC 623.
Cell containers shall be of the moulded plastic type, non flame propagating and mechanically shock
resistant.They shall provide for the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material.
manufacturer's reference number and code

year and month of manufacture
voltage and nominal capacity at the 10 hour rate
cell number.
17.4.4.2 Mounting
The batteries shall be mounted on metal stands, or racks, in a manner such that all the plates of each
cell are visible for inspection, test and maintenance purposes.Stands or racks shall have a maximum
of two tiers.In all cases adequate space must be left between the tiers for maintenance purposes and
to permit the topping up of electrolyte.Stands or racks shall have a protective finish of not less than
two coats of electrolyte resisting enamel or gloss paint.Alternatively, an epoxy resin sintered finish may
be used.
At locations where the battery is not housed in a separate battery room the battery stand/rack shall be
fitted with cladding.The cladding shall permit the free flow of air to the battery, and shall be removable
for maintenance purposes.
Cell containers shall be accurately set up in alignment on the stand or rack with lead and/or rubber
discs under the feet moulded on each container.Cell lids shall be so positioned that at least one top-
ping up aperture is on the access gangway side of the cell and not obstructed by any inter-cell con-
necting arrangements.
17.4.4.3 Battery Main Fuses
Bolted cartridge fuses shall be provided in both positive and negative leads and positioned as close to
the battery as possible and shall be rated at five times the charger float output rated current.A car-
tridge fuse shall be provided in the charger input lead to the negative pole of the battery and rated at
twice the charger float output rated current.These fuses shall be mounted preferably on the end of the
battery stand or rack.These fuse links shall comply with BS 88.
Class DC 40 or equivalent and shall be mounted in fuse carriers with an insulated barrier between the
poles.
The cable or busbar to the battery shall be firmly supported at a point near the cell terminal pil-
lar.Where two cables are used they shall be terminated one to either side of the terminal pillar.These
cables shall be arranged as to allow some flexibility and to avoid any forces being applied to the cell
terminal pillar.

Volume 2 Page 384
17.4.4.4 Connections
The positive pole of each battery shall be connected to station earth via a single bolted link at the dis-
tribution cubicle.Low resistance inter-cell connectors shall be used.Connections between tiers of cells
and between end cells and fuses shall be made with insulated copper rod which shall be of equivalent
cross-section to the distribution busbars.
Connections from the battery fuses to the chargers and distribution cubicles shall be made with insu-
lated cable of equivalent cross-section to the distribution busbars.The positive and negative terminals
of each cell shallbe clearly indicated.The positive and negative terminals of the complete battery shall
be indicated by red and black marking respectively.
17.4.4.5 Capacity
The battery capacities shall be 200 ampere hours at the 10 hour rate.
17.4.5 D.C. Distribution and Instrumentation
17.4.5.1 General
The distribution section shall be designed for incoming and outgoing d.c. supplies as follows:
two independent supplies (including one for future use) incoming from the batteries and associated
chargers.The battery negatives shall be connected to the distributed busbar through a single pole
switch.The 48V battery positive shall be directly connected to the positive busbar.
Each load equipment shall be connected to a distribution outlet.The use of teed supplies to more
than one load equipment will not be permitted.
Double pole miniature or moulded case circuit breakers to IEC 157 shall be supplied, fitted with
auxiliary contacts which operate when the circuit breaker trips.
The MCBs shall be rated to meet the load requirements and shall be labelled with the destination of
the load.Outgoing connections shall bebrought to terminals, mounted in the cubicle, provided with strip
connectors and cable lugs.The number of outlets shall cater for the quantity of load equipment items
plus 50%, with a minimum of 10 outlets being provided,Space shall also be available for the installa-
tion of 10 extra outlets for future use.
17.4.5.2 Instruments and Alarms
Instrumentation shall comprise
battery ammeter (charge and discharge)

battery voltage
load current ammeter
busbar voltage
An alarm indication shall be provided if the busbar voltage falls outside set limits.
The MCB auxiliary contacts and the high/low voltage alarm shall each provide local annunciation and
two sets of potential free contacts, for connection to external alarm monitoring systems.

Volume 2 Page 385
17.4.6 Housing
The above covers the mounting/housing for batteries.
A modular construction is preferred for the battery charger and d.c. distribution/instrumentation, with
each unit comprising a single 19" or ETSI standard rack configuration, all mounted in a single cubicle.
The modular construction shall provide:
simple plug in units for easy assembly and servicing

individual battery charger unit removal in safety, without loss of output power to the load.
expansion of capacity at a later date
In the case of Contractors who do not offer a modular construction, separate cubicles are required for
each charger and the d.c. distribution/instrumentation.

Volume 2 Page 386
18. Drawings
The drawings provided in this section are solely for the purpose of bid information and bid preparation.
They present the typical details of the project facilities and plant requirements for the following.
List of Bid Drawings
SL Drawing No. Drawing Title

1. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SLD.1 Single Line Diagram 400 kV
2. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SLD.2 Single Line Diagram 230 kV
3. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/LAY.1 Substation Layout -400kV Switchyard
4. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/LAY.2 Substation Layout -230kV Switchyard
5. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SEC.1 Sectional Diagram- 400 kV Switchyard
6. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SEC.2 Sectional Diagram -230 kV Switchyard
7. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLK.1_TLD Protection SLD- Line Bay 400 kV
(Meghnaghat)
8. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLK.1_TLD Protection SLD- Line Bay 400 kV
(Gopalganj)
9. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLK.2 Protection SLD - Transformer Bay 400 kV& 230 kV
10. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SAS.1 Substation Automation System - Architecture
11. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/DC.1 LV DC System 110 V & 48 V
12. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/AC.1 LV AC System 400/230 V & UPS
13. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/TCO.1 Telecommunication System - Architecture
14. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/TCO.2 Telecommunication System - Block Diagram
15. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/COM.1 SDH Telecommunication System - Aminbazar 400 kV
Substation
16. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/COM.2 Digital PLC System - Aminbazar 400 kV Substation
17. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/COM.3 Control and Monitoring System - Aminbazar 400 kV
Substation
18. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLD.1 Building - SPR (Switchyard Panel Room)
19. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLD.2 Building Auxiliary & Control &Telecom house
20. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLD.3 Building - Left & Right Elevation
21. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/BLD.4 Building - Front & Back Elevation
22. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/CIV.1 Property Line, Boundary Line & Security Wall
23. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/CIV.2 Guard House
24. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/CIV.3 Gantry & Cable Trench
25. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/CIV.4 Road

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CABLE 230 kV CABLE 230 kV CABLE 230 kV

400 kV Equipment NOTES:-
1. There are wave traps in two phases (R & Y phase) of each
230 kV line
No. Equipment LA LA LA
A A
BB Tubular Busbars 420 kV, 4000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, TR-3 TR-2 TR-1 LEGEND:-
Circuit Breaker 420 kV, SF6 gas insulated, 3150 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
CB 3 phase, 3 motor-wounded spring operating mechanisms; equipped with

DISCONNECTOR DOUBLE BREAK
Control Switching Device
Disconnector 420 kV without Earthing Switch, 3150 A, 63 kA, 1 sec, 3
LA LA LA DISCONNECTOR WITH EARTH SWITCH
DS phase, 3 motor & manual operating mechanisms, horizontal, three
column, double break
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Disconnector 420 kV with Earthing Switch, 3150 A, 63 kA, 1 sec, 3 phase, 6 DS DS
DS/ES motor & manual operating mechanisms, horizontal, three column, double
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
break
B B
Earthing Switch 420 kV, 63 kA, 1 sec, 3 phase, 3 motor & manual operating
ES mechanisms, vertical, single column CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
Current Transformer 420 kV, single phase, oil, hermetically closed, head
CT type, 4000/1/1/1/1/1/1/ A/A; 0,2 Fs=10/5P20/5P20/5P20/5P20/5P20, CB CB WAVE TRAP
15/30/30/30/30 VA
Capacitive Voltage Transformer 420 kV, single phase, oil, hermetically
CVT closed, 400/3/110/ 3/110/ 3/110/ 3 kV/V; 0,2 / 1/3P/ 1/3P; AUTO TRANSFORMER
25/75/75VA FUTURE
Surge Arrester 420 kV, Ur = 336 kV, Uc = 268 kV, LD 3; calculation shall be
LA required during design for confirmation
AUX. TRANSFORMER
Post Insulator 420 kV, 12.5 kN; calculation shall be required during design LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
PI
for confirmation
C 400/235/34,5 kV, 400/520 MVA, ONAN/OFAF, YNa0d1, Si 420/245/36 kV; LA LA LA MOTOR C
Autotransformer with tertiary winding, 3 phase, oil immersed, TO AC BOARD TO AC BOARD
CVT CVT CVT
TR hermetically closed, with on-load tap changer, with single phase, 3-core
current transformers in all bushings. Characteristics of CTs will be defined
during design. ES FUTURE
MAIN BUS II; 400 kV; 4000 A; 63 kA; 1 sec
Final drawings will be defined

CVT during design
33 kV Equipment CB DS/ES CB DS/ES CB DS/ES
No. Equipment The arrangement and

D CB
Circuit Breaker 36 kV, vacuum, 630 A, 25 kA, 1 sec, orientation will be definded D
3 phase, 1 motor-wounded spring operating mechanisms
Disconnector 36 kV without Earthing Switch, 630 A, 25 kA, 1 sec, 3 phase,
during design
DS 1 manual operating mechanisms, vertical break, horizontal or wall
mounting All drawings are subject to
CT
Current Transformer 36 kV, single phase, post type, horizontal or wall approval
mounting, 800/1/1/1/ A/A; 0,2 Fs=10/5P20/5P20, 15/30/30 VA
Inductive Voltage Transformer 36 kV, single phase, post type, horizontal

IVT
or wall mounting, 33V3/110V3/110V3 kV/V; 0,2 / 1/3P; 25/75 VA
SA Surge Arrester 36 kV, Ur = 30 kV, Uc = 24 kV, LD 3

E E
PI Post Insulator 36 kV
CB CB CB CB
F F
DS/ES DS/ES DS/ES DS/ES
CVT
Purpose of Issue: Rev Date Drawn Approved
FUTURE
EMPLOYER:
MAIN BUS I; 400 kV; 4000 A; 63 kA; 1 sec

ES
G G
ENGINEER:
LA CVT LA CVT LA CVT LA CVT
PROJECT:
Bidding Document for Design, Supply, Installation,

Testing & Commissioning of the 400/230 kV
Substation Aminbazar, on Turnkey Basis
1 2 1 2
GOPALGANJ - MONGLA MEGHNAGHAT DRAWING TITLE:
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 400 kV

H H
Scale: Approved Size:
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0
CSP VBC VBC
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY DRAWING NUMBER:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ SLD.1
Rev:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
1. There are wave traps in two phases (R & Y phase) of each
230 kV line
A A
LEGEND:-
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
DISCONNECTOR DOUBLE BREAK
DISCONNECTOR WITH EARTH SWITCH
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
B B
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
WAVE TRAP
AUTO TRANSFORMER
AUX. TRANSFORMER
LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
C MOTOR C

during design
The arrangement and

D orientation will be definded D
during design
All drawings are subject to
approval
E E
230 kV Equipment
F F
No. Equipment
BB Busbars 245 kV,2000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec

Circuit Breaker 245 kV, SF6 gas insulated, 3150 A, 50 kA, 1 sec,
CB 3 phase, 3 motor-wounded spring operating mechanisms
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, 2000 A, 50 kA, 1 sec, 3
DS phase, 3 motor & manual operating mechanisms, horizontal, three
column, double break, in parallel Purpose of Issue: Rev Date Drawn Approved
Disconnector 245 kV without earthing switch, in series, 2000 A, 50 kA, 1 EMPLOYER:

SDS sec, 3 phase, 3 motor & manual operating mechanism, horizontal, double
column, centre break, in series
G Disconnector 245 kV with Earthing Switch, 2000 A, 50 kA, 1 sec, 3 phase, 6 G
DS/ES motor & manual operating mechanisms, horizontal, three column, double ENGINEER:
break, in parallel
Current Transformer 245 kV, single phase, oil, hermetically closed, head
CT type, secondary reconnected, 800-1600/1/1/1/1/1/ A/A; 0,2 Fs=10/0,2
Fs=10/5P20/5P20/5P20, 5/15/30/30/30 VA PROJECT:

Capacitive Voltage Transformer 245 kV, single phase, oil, hermetically Testing & Commissioning of the 400/230 kV
CVT Substation Aminbazar, on Turnkey Basis
closed, 230V3/110V3/110V3 kV/V; 0,2 / 1/3P; 25/75 VA
Surge Arrester 245 kV, Ur = 192 kV, Uc = 153 kV, LD 3. Calculation shall be
SA
required during design for confirmation. DRAWING TITLE:
Post Insulator 245 kV, 10 kN; calculation shall be required during design SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 230 kV
PI
H for confirmation H
Cable End 245 kV, 2000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, single phase, together with two Scale: Approved Size:
CE Drawn: Checked:
spare cable phases NTS A0
CSP VBC VBC
Cable 245 kV, 2000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, single phase, together with two spare
C DRAWING NUMBER: Rev:
cable phases
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ SLD.2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
A
All dimensions are approximate A

during design
B
The arrangement and B
orientation will be definded
during design

approval
C C
SPR SPR
D D
E E
SPR
SPR
6m
F F
FEASIBILITY STUDY 0 11/08/2015 MBB AHB

EMPLOYER:
Post insulators are not shown in the drawing

G G
Busbars are tubular ENGINEER:
All possible connections should be tubular

PROJECT:
All dimensions are approximate Bidding Document for Design, Supply, Installation,
KfW PROJECT No. xxxx

DRAWING TITLE:
SUBSTATION LAYOUT 400 kV

H H
Drawn: Checked:
1:250 A0
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY

MBB AKBAR AKBAR
DRAWING NUMBER: Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ LAY.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:
A
All dimensions are approximate A

during design
The arrangement and

B
orientation will be definded B
during design

approval
A
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G

SUBSTATION LAYOUT 230 kV

H H
Approved Size:
Drawn: Checked:

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ LAY.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
All dimensions are approximate

A A

during design
The arrangement and
B orientation will be definded B
during design
approval
C C
D 400 kV BUS - 2 400 kV BUS - 2 D
FENCE Cable SA ROAD SA TR SA VT DS DS CB ROAD CT DS DS CT CB ROAD CT DS DS CT ROAD CB DS DS VT SA FENCE
E SECTION A-A' E
Not all post insulators are shown in the drawing

F
Busbars are tubular F
All possible connections should be tubular

REVISED AS PER COMMENTS 1 24/08/2015 MBB AHB
FEASIBILITY STUDY 0 11/08/2015 MBB AHB

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:


DRAWING TITLE:
CROSS SECTION 400 kV

H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0
CSP VBC VBC
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SEC.1
Rev:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:

A A

during design
The arrangement and
B
during design B

approval
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G

CROSS SECTION 230 kV

H H
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/SEC.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
A A
LEGEND:-
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
DISCONNECTOR
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
B LIGHTNING ARRESTOR B
PROTECTION RELAY DETAILS

87 : DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
21 : DISTANCE PROTECTION
68 : POWER SWING BLOCK
79 : AUTO RE CLOSE
25 : SYNC CHECK
C 67 : DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION C
67N : DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
87B : BUSBAR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
50/51 : OVER CURRENT PROTECTION
50N/51N : EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
BCT : TRANSFORMER BUSHING CT

D
during design D
The arrangement and

during design

approval
E E
F F
FOR TENDER 0 29/09/2016 DAI VBC

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:
DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF

400/220/33kV AMINBAZAR GRID SUBSTATION
DRAWING TITLE:
400kV TRANSMISSION LINE (Meghnaghat) & BUS PROTECTION

H H
Scale: Size:
Drawn: Checked: Approved
NTS A0
DAI SIS VBC
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BLK.1_TLD (Meghnaghat)

Rev:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
A A
LEGEND:-
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
DISCONNECTOR
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CIRCUIT BREAKER

79 : AUTO RE CLOSE
25 : SYNC CHECK
C 67 : DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION C

D
during design D
The arrangement and

during design

approval
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:
DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,

TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY DRAWING TITLE:
400kV TRANSMISSION LINE (Gopalganj) & BUS PROTECTION

H H
Scale: Size:
NTS A0
DAI SIS VBC
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BLK.1 _TLD (Gopalganj) 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-
A A
LEGEND:-
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
DISCONNECTOR
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
AUTO TRANSFORMER
AUX. TRANSFORMER
C C
79 : AUTO RE CLOSE
25 : SYNC CHECK
87T : TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
67 : DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION
D 50BF : BREAKER FAIL PROTECTION D
64REF : RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

during design
The arrangement and

E orientation will be definded E
during design

approval
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:
DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,

TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF
DRAWING TITLE:
400/220/33 kV TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

H H
Scale: Size:
NTS A0
DAI SIS VBC
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BLK.2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
FOR TENDER 0 08/03/2016 MBB VBC

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

ARCHITECTURE
H H
Scale: Size:
NTS A0
TENDER PURPOSE ONLY DRAWING NUMBER:

MBB BKP VBC
Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ SAS.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGENDS :-
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A A
A AMMETER
V VOLTMETER
BATTERY
RECTIFIER
DC/DC CONVERTER
B B

during design
The arrangement and
during design

C
approval C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR

110V & 48V DC DISTRIBUTION
H H
Scale: Size:
NTS A0
MBB BKP VBC

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ DC.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGENDS :-
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
AUX. POWER TRANSFORMER

A ZNynM
A
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A AMMETER
V VOLTMETER
B B

during design
The arrangement and
during design
C
All drawings are subject to C
approval
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR

LV AC & UPS DISTRIBUTION
H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0
MBB BKP VBC
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ AC.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
ARCHITECTURE
H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0

MBB BKP VBC
Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ TCO.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
BLOCK DIAGRAM
H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0

MBB BKP VBC
Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ TCO.2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGENDS :-
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
SDH TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - AMINBAZAR 400 kV SS

H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0

MBB BKP VBC
Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/COM.1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGENDS :-
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
DIGITAL PLC SYSTEM - AMINBAZAR 400 kV SS

H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0

MBB BKP VBC
Rev:
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ COM.2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGENDS :-
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM - AMINBAZAR 400 kV SS

H H
Drawn: Checked:
NTS A0
MBB BKP VBC

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/COM.3 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:

A and in mm A
B B
C C
D D
E
All drawings are preliminary E
Final drawing will be subject to approval
5,000 The 9mx5m Room is for SPR with CRP only
Other dimension (16.4mx6.6m) Room is for Auxiliary,

CRP & telecom House.
F F
Dimension shall be finalized during execution

Dimensions are in milimeter
9,000
EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
AUXILIARY & TELECOM HOUSE

H H
Date: Approved Size:
Drawn: Checked:
17.11.2016 A3
CSP VBC VBC
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BLD.2
Scale:
NTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-

A and in mm A
B B
PNL
PNL
PNL
C C
Access Floor Access Floor
Duct Duct
Duct
D D
E E
All drawings are preliminary
F
All dimensions are approximate F
Final drawing will be subject to approval Dimensions are in meter
EMPLOYER:
G G
ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

DRAWING TITLE:
RELAY HOUSES
H H
Date: Size:
17.11.2016 A3
CSP VBC VBC
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BLD.1
Scale:
NTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10 11
"
4750 4000 4000 4750
I I I f--l=r======i' ----:;ti
ITTI
.______ii___, I I I I
l~I ITT1
l j l rj ,
"" :11
RIGHT ELEVATION
4750 4000 4000 4 750
~ ======;=l..j
-1 iIP
ITTi ' =l-1
i. P=I-
650 i i i
i__
0
0
0
[ : '"" . "
f ~ r J ~ d i ITl I r " ~ ~, -
- In tee
LEFT ELEVATION lklclng~i.mlll'ltfar~:IU~,Nlcllallcin,

T~a.C~r't'IU<:il1t'o(ll.c:lllt23QW
aJbltu!lon~~on~k9
l!llJ~LI"FTl~BE.VATlOtt
I TENDER PURPOSE ONLY I

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ BlD~
11 1Z
10 11
"
~
iI' ~ + = ~ ~
20000
t = + ~ i
D
D
L;
1~"1. I~~]
'
1
rn
D
REMOVABLE ! i 8.,_ REMOVABLE
!!
1 ~-- '
!
!
rnrn
I 1 ii I
tu bJ
i
I
~
!
~ rn D
FRONT ELEVATION
I 20000 ~
:: 4000 >f 4000 ,f' 4000 'f 4000 >f 4000 :
rn rn
~ ~ ml!l!llm

'
I~
. i I
~I
i .
,Ii
I!
f
[Lll
i !i
!I i D
REMOVABLE i i I : D
REMOVABLE
i
!
!
' I t
S'
!
i
I I
r
.. I to I !I
-
D
D
D
n
BACK ELEVATION
- In tee
ltd"lgOoc:unentlor~~.ntca:stlorl.
T~&CGl'T'rilllciqcrl'h~IN
Si.Jbna!IM Nr'tlbamr, M MNlly lallill
llUl.DltG- FRONT & MCK EIRYATKW

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ Bl.DA
10 11 1Z
10
" "
ll . '" .
I I I
., .Jl
-m-\ BRICKS, PL.ASTER ... COLOR \
c
~
'>
I
I
R~
~
~R b
~b
r ~"
D \ >
SECURITY WALL
FRONT VIEW
BARBED WIRES BRICK.!!. PLASTER ... COLOR
~I PROPERTY LINE
J.
1. 2500
{n'P .) 10000
-
BOUNDARY I SECURITY WALL
ELEVATION BOUNDARY I SECURITY WALL
- In tee
SIDE VIEW ~~~c=.:=r~~~kii~

SliDrtattonNN'tXID'. anTIKIW9ylalll
1- PAl;HRTYLJtE.lll;ll,lf1o\RY~l:'.l!JEQJAITYWAU_

PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/
""'' ,.
"
~ . u Q
v
. L e ~
q ' I ' J
1~1
f- f-f-f-
I 1 I,
~h
~ I ~
] ; ~I --
f-
UI a.6
! u
f
l .s!j fh !I l~
~rt g
.51 ~ <
~d
PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/
~~1 I I
J ~ ~i~
r ~;I
~ ~
II p~ i I I
-
z~
~ 0 ~
Ill
8
,----------, la
:::)
A.
I I
. II:
Ill
Cl
.
I I
z
I I -
...Ill
w
I (/) I
=>
. I 0
J:
I
.
- r- .
I 0 I 0
0
I
~
<(
=>
C)
I
.
'
"'
-------'
-
I I
~ ~
CJ t5l
tE
I I
D I
JD ~ ( I .
.,
I<
.
I
I
0
0 .
I I 0
L __________ _J "'
. .,
/~ -
.
0
0
"
~- "'
-------'
-
I -----',
~ ~
- -~ - e-
:
~o
0
0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - zo s
~ ~ ~
r-
'
3:
w
EB
~ 5
~
\ . ~" z
~ ~
"'w
!ii ~
a...
\j ...fil .. 0
0
0
-+
" ,,., ~ "
-
0
0 "
~ .. <O
0
J: ~----
c
~ I.
~
<!l 1 009 oom: ~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-

and in mm
A A
400 kV 230 kV
B B
A 6,000 4,500
B 6,000 4,200 - 4,500
C 24,000 17,400 - 18,000
D 14,000 - 24,000 11,500 - 18,000
E 8,000 6,000
C C
D D
E E
F F

EMPLOYER:
G G
CABLE TRENCH TYPE 1 CABLE TRENCH TYPE 2 ENGINEER:
PROJECT:

All dimensions are in mm Substation Aminbazar, on Turnkey Basis
DRAWING TITLE:
132/33 kV SUBSTATION
GANTRY & CABLE TRENCH
H H
Scale: Size:
1:100 A0
MBB BKP VBC
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ CIV.3 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTES:-

A
and in mm A
B B
C C
Max. 2%
WEARING COURSE
BASE COURSE
D D
ROAD-BASE
E E
SUB-BASE
F F
L
MAIN ROAD 6,000
OTHER ROADS 3,000
EMPLOYER:
G WEARING COURSE Min. 50 G

ENGINEER:
BASE COURSE Min. 70

ROAD - BASE Min. 150 PROJECT:

SUB - BASE Min. 200 Testing & Commissioning of the 400/230 kV
DRAWING TITLE:
ROAD
H H
Drawn: Checked:
All dimensions are in mm NTS

MBB BKP VBC
A0
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS/ CIV.4 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Source: Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd. (PGCB) - QF-SPL-14

Volume 3
Issued on: 24th April, 2017
Country: Bangladesh
Employer:
Consultant:
Phone: +49 (6172) 1791-800; Fax: +49 (6172) 944 95 20
Volume 3
VOLUME 1


VOLUME 2
Scope of Work
Technical Specifications
Drawings forming Part of Specifications
VOLUME 3

Schedule C: Bar Chart Program of Key Activities-Delivery & Completion Time Schedule

BGD 2440 SS Vol 3_Final.docx
Volume 3
Schedule A: Introduction and Preamble to the Price and Technical

Schedules 1
1.1 Description of Overall Project 1
1.2 Description of this Package 2
1.3 Method of Reference 4
1.4 Basic Scope of Supply of Plant and Services 4
1.5 Detailed Description of the Scope of Supply 6
1.6 Detailed Description of the Scope of Supply for Telecommunication and SCADA
System 13
1.6.1 Telecommunication System 13
1.6.2 SCADA, Control and Monitoring Equipment 16
1.7 Type Test Requirements for Major Plant / Equipment 13
1.8 Terminal Points 24
1.8.1 Transmission Line Circuit Connections 24
1.8.2 Substation Connections 24
1.8.3 Communication and SCADA Equipment 25
1.9 System Electrical Parameters 26
1.9.1 System Conditions 26
1.9.2 System Earthing 26
1.9.3 Minimum Substation Clearances 26
1.9.4 Low Voltage AC System 27
1.9.5 Low Voltage DC System 27
1.10 Climatic Conditions 28
Schedule B: Bid Prices & Schedules 29
General 29
Pricing 29
Schedule B: Schedules of Rates and Prices 30
Schedule No. 1: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supply from Abroad 30
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the
Employer's Country 30
Schedule No. 3: Design Services 30
Schedule No. 4: Installation and Other Services 30
Schedule No. 5: Grand Summary 30
Schedule No. 6: Recommended Spare Parts 30
Schedule C: Bar Chart Program of Key Activities - Delivery &
Completion Time Schedule 31
Schedule D: Manufacturers, Places of Manufacture and Testing 34
Schedule E: Technical Particulars and Guarantees 38
1. General 38
2. Technical Data Schedules 38
2.1 A: Switchgear 420 kV 39

Volume 3

2.1.1 A1: Circuit Breaker 420 kV 39
2.1.2 A2.1: Disconnector 420 kV, without Earthing Switch 42
2.1.3 A2.2: Disconnector 420 kV, with Earthing Switch 45
2.1.4 A2.3: Earthing Switch 420 kV 48
2.1.5 A3: Current Transformers 420 kV 51
2.1.6 A4: Voltage Transformers 420 kV 53
2.1.7 A5: Surge Arresters 420 kV 55
2.1.8 A6: Post Insulator 420 kV 57
2.2 B: Switchgear 245 kV 58
2.2.1 B1: Circuit Breaker 245 kV 58
2.2.2 B2.1: Disconnector 245 kV, Double Column, Centre Break, without
Earthing Switch 61
2.2.3 B2.2: Disconnector 245 kV, Three Column, Double Break, without
Earthing Switch 64
2.2.4 B2.3: Disconnector 245 kV, Three Column, Double Break, with
Earthing Switch 67
2.2.5 B3: Current Transformers 245 kV 70
2.2.6 B4: Voltage Transformers 245 kV 72
2.2.7 B5: Surge Arresters 245 kV 74
2.2.8 B6: Post Insulator 245 kV 76
2.3 C: Switchgear 36 kV 77
2.3.1 C1: Circuit Breaker 36 kV 77
2.3.2 C2: Disconnector 36 kV 80
2.3.3 C3: Current Transformer 36 kV 82
2.3.4 C4: Voltage Transformer 36 kV 84
2.3.5 C5: Surge Arrester 36 kV 86
2.4 D: Transformers 88
2.4.1 D1: 400/233/33 kV 400/520 MVA ONAN/OFAF Autotransformer 88
2.5 F: Auxiliary Transformers 98
2.5.1 F1: 33/0.415 kV 200 kVA Auxiliary Transformer 98
2.6 G-P: Control, Relay Protection, Substation Automation System & Metering 102
2.6.1 14291 - Control Cubicle for OHL 102
2.6.2 14292 - Control Cubicle for Power Transformers HV Side 102
2.6.3 14293 - Control Cubicle for Power Transformers LV Side 103
2.6.4 14294 - Control Cubicle for LV AC & DC 103
2.6.5 14295 - Control Cubicle for SCADA Server & SCADA System 104
2.6.6 14101 - Protection Cubicle No. 1 for OHL 104
2.6.7 14102 - Protection Cubicle No. 2 for OHL 105
2.6.8 14103 - Protection Cubicle No. 3 for Power Transformer HV Side 105
2.6.9 14104 - Protection Cubicle No. 4 for Power Transformer LV Side 106
2.6.10 14105 - Protection Cubicle No. 5 for Busbars 106
2.6.11 14250 - Control and Monitoring Equipment - General 107
2.6.12 14251 - Bay Control Unit for OHL 108
2.6.13 14252 - Bay Control Unit for Power Transformers HV & LV 110
2.6.14 14253 - Bay Control Unit for LV AC & DC 112
2.6.15 14254 - Back-Up Control Panel 114
2.6.16 14255 - Front Panel Annunciation for OHL & Power Transformers 114
2.6.17 14256 - Front Panel Annunciation for Control Room 115
2.6.18 14261 - SCADA Server 116

Volume 3

2.6.19 14262- Operator Workstation 117
2.6.20 14263 - Printer 118
2.6.21 14264- Monitoring Workstation 119
2.6.22 14271 - Weather Station 120
2.6.23 14272 - Time Synchronization Device 121
2.6.24 14273- Ethernet Switch Process LAN 122
2.6.25 14274 - Ethernet Switch Control Room 123
2.6.26 14281 - Protection Monitoring Software 124
2.6.27 14282 - SCADA Software 124
2.6.28 14297 - Fibre Optic Cables 125
2.6.29 14298 - Fibre Optic Cables & Terminal Equipment 127
2.6.30 14299 - Special Control Equipment and Tools 129
2.6.31 14001 - Protection Terminal for OHL - Main 1 130
2.6.32 14002 - Protection Terminal for OHL - Main 2 134
2.6.33 14003 - Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 1 138
2.6.34 14004 - Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 2 141
2.6.35 14005 - Protection Terminal for LV side of Power Transformer 144
2.6.36 14006 - Automatic Voltage Regulation 147
2.6.37 14007 - Protection Terminal for Busbars 149
2.6.38 14010 - Busbar and Breaker Failure Protection Bay Unit 152
2.6.39 14011 - Trip Circuit Supervision Relay 155
2.6.40 14012 - Tripping Unit - High-Speed Tripping Relay 156
2.6.41 14013 - Test Socket 157
2.6.42 14301 - SDH Equipment 158
2.6.43 14302 - Digital Multiplexer Interfaces 159
2.6.44 14303 - Teleprotection Signalling Interface 160
2.6.45 14304 - Optical Booster 161
2.6.46 14305 - Digital PLC 162
2.6.47 14306 - Optical Distribution Frame 163
2.6.48 19001 - Battery 164
2.6.49 19002 - Battery Charger 165
2.6.50 Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment 1666
2.7 Digital Fault and Disturbance Recorder (DFDR) 1688
2.8 230kV Cable 170
2.9 33kv Cable 171
2.10 Technical Information 1733
Schedule F: Departures from the Specifications 1777
Schedule G: Proposed Alternative Standards to which Equipment shall
be Provided 1788
Schedule H: Proposed Contract and Site Organization 17979
Personnel 17979
Schedule I: Drawings and Documents to be submitted with the Bid 1800
Schedule J: Proposed Subcontractors 1833

Volume 3 Page 1
Schedule A: Introduction and Preamble to the

Price and Technical Schedules
1.1 Description of Overall Project
Providing access to affordable and reliable electricity to all citizens is a national goal of the Govern-
ment of Bangladesh (GoB). In 1996, the GoB split the transmission segment and formed the Power
Grid Company of Bangladesh (PGCB). PGCB is fully responsible for all transmission assets.
Bangladesh is facing chronic power shortages that could undermine its economic sustainability. Inad-
equate, irregular power and poor quality power supply was identified to be the major constraints for
sustaining economic growth and development of the country.
The Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd (PGCB) is responsible for construction, operation and
maintenance of the national power transmission grid.
The Bangladesh Power Development Board (BPDB) is planning to develop 1320 MW thermal power
projects based on imported coal at Mongla (Khulna).
Power from the generation projects at Mongla would be partly consumed in the nearby areas like
Khulna, while the major portion of the power would be brought to the capital city Dhaka.
It is envisaged to transfer power from Mongla to Dhaka through the Mongla-Aminbazar 400 kV high-
capacity transmission system.
It is planned to integrate the 400kV corridor from Mongla to Aminbazar into the transmission system
from the Roopuur nuclear power project for transfer of power to Aminbazar Substation in Dhaka area
via Jajira.
PGCB plans to construct the Aminbazar-Maowa-Mongla 400kV, approx. 176 km long, double circuit
transmission line to evacuate power from a 1,320 MW power plant at Rampal, Mongla, to the
400/230 kV substation at Aminbazar.
The GoB received from the Asian Development Bank (ADB) Loan No. 2966 BAN: Power System Ex-
pansion and Efficiency Improvement Investment Program (Tranche-1).
The remaining costs will be financed from PGCB funds.

Volume 3 Page 2
1.2 Description of this Package
The work covered by this specification is related to the Substation Aminbazar -the construction of a
new 400/230/33 kV substation part and the extension and renovation of the existing 230/132 kV sub-
station part.
The scope of works under this turnkey contract is: design, supply, manufacture, quality assurance,
inspection and testing, delivery, new packing for export, insurance, shipment & transport to the site,
complete construction and installation, jointing, terminating, bonding, earthing, painting, setting to
work, site testing and commissioning, defect liability for all equipment, including all civil works.
Especially the civil design has to incorporate countermeasures against flooding so as not to affect any
substation equipment during the wet season.
The Contractor's responsibility is to provide that all parts of the works be completed in every respect
for commercial operation, to the requirements of the Engineer. All details, accessories etc. required for
the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the works not specifically mentioned in this
specification are deemed included in the contract price.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all and/or any item(s) of work required for the safe, effi-
cient and satisfactory completion and functioning of the works, are included in the Bid Price whether
they be described in the specification or not.
In case of extension and renovation works, not all required as-built drawings may be available for the
existing plant and equipment, which required modification/renovation; the Contractor is also responsi-
ble to make drawings as required to complete the works.
The Bidder is be deemed to have visited site, inspected, gathered data and verified details of the as-
built system in order to design, supply and interface their new equipment.
All necessary materials, adjustments, dismantling, remedial and tiding-up work in order to complete
the work specified shall be included in the contract price.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all and/or and any item(s) of work required for the safe,
efficient and satisfactory completion and functioning of the works, are included in the bid price whether
they be described in the specification or not.
The scope also includes witnessing of factory acceptance tests by the Employer's Engineer (two Engi-
neers in each visit, and actual working days for each visit, excluding travelling time) for:
power transformer 400/230 kV

The scope also includes training at the Manufacturer's premises for four Employers' Engineer in each
of the following (each for a period of minimum 10 (ten) working days, excluding travelling time) for:

Volume 3 Page 3
Operation & Maintenance of HV switchgear equipment including power transformer

The bid price shall include costs of training during and after the installation. The Contractor should
provide trainer(s) (authorised by the Manufacturer) for on-site training on operation and maintenance
of the works, for each new substation, for ten Employer's staff for minimum 1 (one) week.
The bid price shall include supply and delivery of mandatory spare parts, maintenance tools and test
equipment.
The bid price shall include all other miscellaneous works required.
The "Schedule of Requirements" for equipment, materials and services and the detailed technical
specifications of equipment and materials shall be read in conjunction with the scope of works de-
scribed herein.
The drawings provided in the bidding documents are indicative only and hence do not reflect the entire
scope of works.
The programme of works shall be as shown in Time Schedule for Delivery and Completion. Within one
month of acceptance of the bid, the Contractor shall submit a programme chart detailing times re-
quired for the design, supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning for the complete work.
The descriptions presented below outline the basic requirements for each Section of the Works. This
is not intended to detail each item necessary to complete the works, but to outline the facilities to be
provided under the contract.
The Contractor is to carry out the works taking full account of the limitations imposed by existing sites
and the requirement to maintain all existing supplies during the construction works.
Any temporary works, structures, connections, etc., necessary to achieve this requirement are to be
included in the bid price.

Volume 3 Page 4
1.3 Method of Reference
The following method of reference shall be used to identify the various required items:
Denomination Description
A 420 kV switchgear
B 245 kV switchgear
C 36 kV switchgear
D 400/235/33 kV auto transformer
E Neutral earthing equipment
F Earthing / auxiliary transformers
G Control, protection, substation automation and metering etc.
H Telecommunication System - Fibre optic multiplexer equipment for communication
and protection
I Multicore low voltage power and control cables
J Batteries, chargers and dc distribution
K LVAC distribution
L Civil works, building and foundations
M Building lighting, small power and air conditioning
N Switchyard lighting
P Earthing and lightning protection
Q 230 & 33kV kV cable
R Witnessing FAT, Training & Social program (Provisional sum)
1.4 Basic Scope of Supply of Plant and Services
The scope of work under this contract includes design, supply, delivery, installation, testing & commis-
sioning on turnkey basis of:
complete new 400 kV air insulated switchgear (AIS) substation.

complete new 400 kV one and half breaker tubular busbar system for eight (8) bays
four (4) 400 kV overhead line bays (Meghnaghat-1 &Meghnaghat-2 and Gopalganj-1 & Gopalganj-
2),
three (3) 400 kV transformer bays
space for future extension for one (1) 400 kV bay
three (3) three phase, 400/230/33 kV, 520 MVA autotransformers,
extension of existing 230 kV double busbars for three (3) bays
two (2) fully equipped 230 kV line bays
renovation of three (3) existing 230 kV line bays to be used for 400/230kV transformer bays
cable connection of 230 kV between 400/230kV power transformers and 230 kV transformer bays
including two spare single phase cables
connection of 230 kV between existing transmission lines and new transmission line bays
necessary dismantling and removal of the existing equipment from the site
necessary works for re-design, re-location, modification and re-connection of the existing equip-
ment/switchgear for connection with the new equipment/switchgear

Volume 3 Page 5
The scope of work furthermore includes:
two (2) 33 kV transformer/auxiliary power transformer bays

two (2) three phase, 33/0.415 kV, 200 kVA, auxiliary power transformers
associated substation control and monitoring system, relay protection, metering, telecommunica-
tion, AC & DC auxiliary power supply, cables, metal structure, earthing and lightning protection
230 kV transformer bays shall be connected to new control and monitoring system, relay protec-
tion, metering and telecommunication system, but all existing control and monitoring function shall
remain. Existing HV equipment shall be used but all primary connections (cable 230 kV etc. ) and
secondary connections shall be provided under this contract. Control, monitoring and operation
shall be possible both from 400 kV Substation and 230 kV Substation.
New 230 kV line bays shall be connected to existing control and monitoring system, relay protec-
tion, metering and telecommunication system, in existing 230 kV substation. Complete new HV
equipment and new primary and secondary connections shall be provided under this contract. Con-
trol, monitoring and operation shall be possible only from existing 230 kV Substation.
outdoor civil works for necessary de-installation and removal of the existing equipment from the site
land development of switchyard area and boundary wall will be done by other contractor.
complete outdoor civil works, including 400 kV, 230 kV and 33 kV gantry foundations, 400 kV, 230
kV and 33 kV equipment foundations, power transformers and auxiliary transformer foundations, oil
pit, blast walls, substation main gate, internal fencing, access road, internal roads and parking,
concrete culvert, surface and switchyard drainage system including outfall, cable trench including
soak pit, PVC pipes etc., switchyard surface finishing and gravel surfacing
outdoor civil works for connection of new equipment/switchgear with the existing equipment /
switchgear including but not limit to roads, gates, guard houses, security boundary wall and internal
fencing, drainage system, cable tranches, etc.:
complete civil works and facilities for new relay, control and auxiliaryhouses, including foundation
works, superstructure works, finishing works such as rendering, colour, water supply, sanitary, floor
finishing, rain water drainage system, lightning protection, etc.
supply and delivery of mandatory spare parts, maintenance tools and test equipment.
Arrangement for witnessing FAT and for training schedule. Arrangement of STI, STD and HIV/AIDS
alleviation program
The basic equipment to be supplied, installed and commissioned is shown on the bid drawings.

Volume 3 Page 6
1.5 Detailed Description of the Scope of Supply
No. Description Quantity

A 420 kV switchgear, equipment connection and steel structures
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 420 kV shall be designed,
supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, One (1) lot
comprise the following:
Circuit Breaker 420 kV, 4,000A, 63 kA /1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL,
three pole (three nos single phase CB per set, seven set will be gang oper-
Eleven (11)
A1 ated & another four set will be single phase operated ), live tank type, SF6
set
gas insulated, equipped with Control Switching Device, equipped with three
motor-wounded spring-stored operating mechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV without Earthing Switch, 4,000A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50Hz,
1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post type, Twenty two
A2.1
motor operated disconnector, equipped with 3 motor & manual operating (22) set
mechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV with Earthing Switch, 4,000A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50Hz,
1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post type,
A2.2 Seven (7) set
motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated earthing switches,
equipped with 3 + 3 motor & manual operating mechanism.
Earthing Switch 420 kV, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three
A2.3 pole, post type, motor operated earthing switches, equipped with 3 motor & Two (2) set
manual operating mechanism for bus.
Current transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed,
A3 head type, 6-core, multi ratio, 4,000/1A, 63kA /1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV Forty five (45)
BIL, post type current transformer.
Capacitor voltage transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermeti-
cally closed, 3-secondary winding, 400/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 Twenty seven
A4
kV/V/V/V, 63kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, capacitor type voltage (27) nos
transformers.
Surge arrester 420 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless,
Twenty one
A5 metal oxide type, Ur = 336 kV, Uc = 268 kV, 10kA nominal discharge cur-
(21) nos
rent, 50 Hz Calculation shall be required during design for confirmation
Post insulator 420 kV, single phase, 12.5 kN, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 /
1,050 kV BIL Calculation shall be required during design for confirmation.
A6 One (1) lot
Higher size than 12.5kN if required as per calculation shall be within the the
same contract price.
The lot of conductors 420 kV, for two TUBULAR busbars, in one and half
breaker type busbar system, and for connection of the 420 kV switchgear,
A7.X One (1) lot
4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three phase. All possible
connection should be tubular.
The lot of insulators and fittings including all necessary clamps and con-
A8.X One (1) lot
nectors required for completing 420 kV switchgear.
The lot of gantry steel structures and equipment supports required for com-
A9.X One (1) lot
pleting 420 kV switchgear.
B 245 kV switchgear, equipment connection and steel structures
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 245 kV shall be designed, One (1) lot

Volume 3 Page 7

supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract,
Circuit Breaker 245kV, 2000A, 50kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, three
pole (three nos single phase CB per set with electrically ganged or single
B1 mechanically ganged three phase combined CB), live tank type, SF6 gas in- Two (2) set
sulated, equipped with three motor-wounded spring-stored energy operating
mechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in series, 2,000A, 50kA / 1
sec, 50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, three pole, centre break, post type, motor
B2.1 Two (2) set
operated disconnectors without earthing switches, equipped with 1 motor &
manual operating mechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000A, 50kA / 1
sec, 50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post
B2.2 Six (6) set
type, motor operated disconnectors without earthing switches, equipped
with 1 motor & manual operating mechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV with Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000A, 50kA / 1 sec,
50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post
B2.3 Two (2) set
type, motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated earthing switches,
equipped with 1 + 1 motor & manual operating mechanism.
Current transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed,
B3 head type, 5-core, multi ratio, secondary re-connected,800-1600/1A, 50kA / Six (6) set
1 sec, 50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, post type current transformer.
Capacitor Voltage Transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermeti-
B4 cally closed, 2-secondary winding, 230/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 50kA / Six (6) set
1 sec, 50Hz, 1,050/460 kV BIL, capacitor type voltage transformers.
Surge arrester 245kV, single phase,heavy duty station class, gapless, metal
Twenty four
B5 oxide type, Ur = 192 kV, Uc = 153 kV, 10kA nominal discharge current,
(24) nos
50Hz Calculation shall be required during design for confirmation
Post insulator 245 kV, single phase, 10 kN, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / Twenty four
B6
460 kV BIL (24) nos
The lot of conductors 245 kV, for extension of existing double busbar sys-
B7.X tem and for connection of the 245 kV switchgear, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 One (1) lot
Hz 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, three phase
B8.X One (1) lot
B9.X One (1) lot
C 36 kV Switchgear, equipment connection and steel structures
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 36 kV shall be designed,
supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, One (1) lot
Circuit breaker 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, three
C1 pole (gang operated), vacuum circuit breaker, for outdoor installation, Two (2) set
equipped with one spring-stored energy operating mechanism
Disconnector 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, three pole,
C2 vertical break, post type, horizontal or wall mounted, manually operated dis- Two (2) set
connectors
C3 Current transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 3-core, single ratio, 630/1A, 25 kA Six (6) nos

Volume 3 Page 8

/ 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, post type current transformer.
Inductive voltage transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 2-secondary winding,
C4 33/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, induc- Six (6) nos
tive type voltage transformers.
Surge arrester 36 kV, single phase, gapless, metal oxide type, Uc = 30 kV,
C5 Nine (9) nos
Ur = 24 kV, 10 kA nominal discharge current, 50 Hz,170/70 kV BIL,
The lot of conductors 36 kV, for connection of the 36 kV switchgear, 630 A,
C7.X One (1) lot
25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, three phase.
C8.X One (1) lot
C9.X One (1) lot
D Transformers
The set of complete equipment 400/230/33 kV for transformation of energy
shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, One (1) lot
under this contract, comprise the following:
The Auto-transformer 400/235/33 kV,420/520 MVA, YNa0d1, ONAN/ONAF,
with tertiary winding, three phase, oil immersed, hermetically closed, with
D1 Three (3) sets
on-load tap changer; with single phase, 3-core current transformers in all
bushings. Characteristics of CTs will be defined during design
The set of Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall be pro-
D2 Three (3) sets
vided for the new 400/235/33 kV autotransformer units
F Earthing/Auxiliary Transformers One (1) lot
The set of complete equipment 33/0.415 kV for transformation of energy for
auxiliary power supply shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, test- One (1) lot
ed and commissioned, under this contract, comprise the following:
The auxiliary power transformer 33/0.415 kV, 200 kVA, ZNyn11, ONAN, oil
immersed, three phase, with off-load tap changer; with single phase, 2-core
F1 Two (2) sets
current transformers in all bushings. Characteristics of CTs will be defined
during design
G Control, Protection, Substation Automation and Metering
The lot of complete equipment for control, protection, alarm, SAS and me-
tering panels for the 400 kV & 230kV & 33 kV system as well as LV AC and
LV DC system shall be designed, calculated, supplied, delivered, installed,
tested and commissioned, under this contract.
The sequence of the control panels and protection panels shall mirror the
actual switchyard layout. Space shall be provided adjacent to the control
and relay suites for each voltage level to accommodate sufficient panels for One (1) lot
the future circuits indicated in the substation layout drawings.
A control panel shall accommodate complete switchgear.
New equipment shall be connected with and integrated into the exist-
ing system.
The equipment to be supplied, installed and commissioned is shown on Bid
Drawings comprising the following.
Control, protection and SAS for four(4) sets of 400 kV Overhead Line cir-
G1.1 Four (4) sets
cuits, including Control & Protection Cubicles

Volume 3 Page 9

Existing Control, protection and SAS for two(2) sets of 230 kV Overhead
G1.2 Line circuits, including Control & Protection Cubicles, shall be re-designed, Two (2) sets
re-connected, re-tested and re-commissioned
Control, protection and SAS for three(3) set of 400/235/33 kV Auto Trans-
G2.1 former circuit and associated Earthing/Auxiliary Transformer circuits, includ- Three (3) sets
ing Control & Protection Cubicles for HV side
Control, protection and SAS for three(3) set of 400/235/33 kV Auto Trans-
G2.2 former circuit and associated Earthing/Auxiliary Transformer circuits, includ- Three (3) sets
ing Control & Protection Cubicles for LV side
Control, protection and SAS for two(2) set of 33/0.4 kV Auxiliary Transform-
G2.3 Two (2) sets
er circuits, including Control & Protection Cubicles
Control, protection and SAS for complete LV part of the Substation, AC &
G3.1 One (1) set
DC, including Control & Protection Cubicles
Substation Automation System for complete Substation, including software
G4.1 One (1) set
and tools, including SCADA server and equipment
Control, protection and SAS for two 400 kV busbars, in one and half breaker
G5.1 One (1) lot
type busbar system, including control & protection cubicles
Extension/modification of existing for two 230 kV busbars, including control
G5.2 & protection cubicles and also integration with SAS which is under this con- One (1) lot
tract
Tariff metering panel(s) to accommodate programmable & recordable digital
3-phase, 4-wire import and export MWh and MVAr meters (accuracy class
Seven (7)
G6.X 0.2) for each line and transformer feeder.
sets
For each feeder, minimum two (2) meters (main-1 & main-2) are to be pro-
vided.
Digital Fault and Disturbance Recorder (DFDR) to accommodate all 400kV
G7.X One (1) set
feeders and all new 230kV transformer feeders.
The lot of hardware and software to provide tele-control & telemetering facil-
ities required both at the existing National Load Despatch Centre (NLDC) at
Aftabnagar and the back-up station at Biddut Bhaban for integration of the
complete new 400/230/132 kV substation.
All required electrical signals shall be transmitted to the NLDC and the back-
up station through the industrial gateway of the substation automation sys-
G8.X One (1) lot
tem.
All HV circuit breakers, motorized disconnectors, tap changer, etc., shall be
controlled from the NLDC through the gateway of the substation automation
system using the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
All necessary modification works in the software of the master station of the
NLDC and the back-up station are to be carried out.
Extension of the existing equipment, necessary adjustment, adaptation,
G9.X modification, integration and configuration of new and existing equipment in One (1) lot
NLDC
Telecommunication System - Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment for
H
Teleprotection and Communication
Telecommunication System
Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment
H1.X One (1) set
New equipment shall be connected with and integrated into the exist-
ing system.

Volume 3 Page 10

The set of complete equipment for outdoor and indoor fibre optic multiplexer
equipment for protection & communication at substation shall be designed,
supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract.
Fibre optic multiplexer equipment is to be provided for.
Distance relay carrier signal (main and back-up)
Bus protection / breaker failure relay
SCADA data from switchgear and control system
VOIP System (2-IP Phone).
2-W Remote Subscriber (10 Telephone Sets)
Hot-line telephone system
H2.X Deleted
The lot of underground optical fibre (48 cores) cables from terminal box at
gantry structure to MDF (Main distribution Frame) shall be designed, sup-
H3.X plied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned in control room. The One (1) lot
Contract includes supply and installation of MDF and digital cables with ad-
equate length.
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-
protection, for each 400 kV Transmission Line, including Line Traps, Cou-
H4.X Four (4) sets
pling units, cables etc., shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed,
tested and commissioned
I Multicore Low Voltage Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
The complete set of multicore low voltage auxiliary power and control cables
between all items of equipment supplied under the contract and for connec-
tion and integration of the new equipment with the existing equipment shall
I1.X be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned with One (1) lot
necessary gland, terminated, and identified by colours & tags. The produc-
tion of the overall substation cable routing and core schedules shall also be
provided.
J LV DC, Batteries, Chargers and DC Distribution
The complete lot consists of two (2) sets 110V substation batteries complete
with chargers and distribution switchboard shall be designed, supplied, de-
livered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, to provide
all DC supplies to equipment being supplied for the new substation.
One set shall be used as standby supply.
Necessary DC distribution switchboards shall be provided at the various
place of the substation, according to the detail design
The system shall generally be as shown in the bid drawings and shall in-
clude the following.
J1.X One (1) lot
(a) Two (2) sets Ni-cadmium 100% batteries complete, each capacity
shall not be less than 400 Ah at the 5 hours rate of discharge. During
execution stage the capacity shall be confirmed with calculation by
the contractor considering the bays under scope of work and future
bays (at least 12 400kV bays & 6 230kV bays and two 33kV bays) as
per clause 8.4.3 of section 8 of Volume 2 of 3 of the biding document.
The battery with higher capability if required after calculation shall be
supplied within the same price.

Volume 3 Page 11

(b) Two (2) sets battery chargers complete, each float charge shall not
be less than 100 A rating. The rating shall be on the load and boost
charging rate and the higher charging charger after calculation shall
be supplied within the same price.
(c) One (1) set of DC distribution switchboards.
The complete lot consists of two (2) sets of 48V DC system complete with
chargers and distribution switchboard shall be designed, supplied, deliv-
ered, installed, tested and commissioned in the control building to provide
all DC supplies for fibre optic multiplexer equipment for communication and
protection. One set shall be used as standby supply.
The system shall generally be as shown in Bid Drawings and shall include
the following.
(a) Two (2) sets 100% Ni-cadmium batteries complete, each capacity
shall not be less than 200 Ah at the 5-hours rate of discharge. Dur-
J2.X ing execution stage the capacity shall be confirmed with calculation One (1) lot
by the contractor considering the bays under scope of work and fu-
ture bays (at least 12 400kV bays & 6 230kV bays and two 33kV
bays).The battery with higher capability if required after calculation
shall be supplied within the same price.
(b) Two (2) sets battery chargers complete, each float charge shall not
be less than 70 A rating. The rating shall be on the load and boost
charging rate and the higher charging charger after calculation shall
be supplied within the same price.
(c) One (1) set of DC distribution switchboard.
K LV AC Distribution
The complete lot LVAC switchboard for substation services shall be de-
signed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this
contract, to provide the 400/230V supplies to all equipment being supplied.
The system shall generally be as per Bid Drawings and shall include one
125A outdoor weatherproof, 3-phase with neutral and earth switched socket
K1.X One (1) lot
outlet and plug to IEC 60309; to be installed, cabled and connected adja-
cent to the auto transformers.
Necessary DC distribution switchboards shall be provided at the various
place of the substation, according to the detail design
L Civil Works, Control Building and Foundations

The land development of complete switchyard area will be done by another
L1.X Null
contractor
The lot of complete design, supply and construction of outdoor civil works,
including 400 kV and 230 kV and 33 kV gantry foundation, 400 kV and 230
kV and 33 kV equipment foundation, power transformers and auxiliary trans-
former foundations, oil pit, boundary wall, blast walls, substation main gate,
security boundary wall and internal fencing, access road, internal roads and
L2.X One (1) lot
parking, concrete culvert, surface and switchyard drainage system including
outfall, cable trench including soak pit, PVC pipes etc., switchyard surface
finishing and gravel surfacing.
All necessary outdoor civil works for re- and de-installation and removal of
the existing equipment/material/foundations/roads/fence etc. from the site

Volume 3 Page 12

One (1) lot of complete design, supply and construction of civil works and
facilities for a new relay & control & auxiliary houses, including foundation
works, super structure works, finishing works like rendering, colour, water
L3.X supply, sanitary, floor finishing, rain water drainage system, lightning 12ro- One (1) lot
tection, etc.
All necessary indoor civil works for re- and de-installation and removal of the
existing equipment from the site
L4.X Fire alarm & fire fighting system One (1) lot
M Building Lighting, Small Power, Air Conditioning and Ventilation
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-
stalled, tested and commissioned, to provide lighting, LV power supply, air
M1.X One (1) lot
conditioning system, ventilation and emergency DC lighting for the substa-
tion relay &control& auxiliary houses.
N Switchyard Lighting
stalled, tested and commissioned, to provide switchyard lighting for security,
N1.X One (1) lot
roadway and switchyard and emergency DC lighting at strategic locations
for equipment operations and inspections.
P Earthing and Lightning Protection
stalled, tested and commissioned, of earthing system and lightning protec-
P1.X One (1) lot
tion screen including connections, connectors and clamps, to suit the sub-
station overall arrangement and provide supporting design calculations.
The sets of 3-phase portable (maintenance) earthing equipment devices
P2 with connectors and telescopic glass fibre operating pole suitable for plant Four (4) sets
supplied.
Q Cable 230 kV & 36kV
stalled, tested and commissioned of 245 kV, 2,000A, 50kA / 1 sec, 50Hz,
Eleven (11)
1,050/460 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable. Approximate lengths are 150
Q1 sets x 200 m
and 250 meters respectively
= 2,200 m
(Payment will be at actual quantity basis if quantity increases or decreases
during execution)
Twenty two
Q2 stalled, tested and commissioned of 245 kV, 2,000A, 50kA / 1 sec, 50Hz,
(22) sets
1,050/460 kV BIL, cable end terminal end for single phase XLPE cable
stalled, tested and commissioned of 36 kV, 630A, 25kA / 1 sec, 50Hz,
170/70 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable. Approximate lengths are 150 me-
Q3 450m
ters.
(Payment will be at actual quantity basis if quantity increases or decreases
during execution)
Q4 stalled, tested and commissioned of 36 kV, 630A, 25kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, One (1) lot
170/70 kV BIL, cable end terminal end for single phase XLPE cable

Volume 3 Page 13

witnessing of factory acceptance tests as per GCC 23 of volume 1 by the
Employer's Engineer (two Engineers in each visit, and minimum 5 (five)
working days for each visit, excluding travelling time) for:
power transformer 400/230 kV

R1 instrument transformers 400 kV, One (1) lot
Factory acceptance tests shall be organized separately for each equipment.
The both equipment 400 & 230 kV (circuit breakers, disconnectors, instru-
ment transformers, surge arresters) should be manufactured at the same
location.
The scope also includes training at the Manufacturer's premises as per
GCC 23 of volume 1 for four Employers' Engineer , in each of the follow-
ing(each for a period of minimum 10 (ten) working days, excluding travelling
time) :
R2 One (1) lot
Operation & Maintenance of HV switchgear equipment including power
transformer
R3 STI, STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation program One (1) lot
1.6 Detailed Description of the Scope of Supply for Telecommu-

nication and SCADA System
1.6.1 Telecommunication System
1.6.1.1 Introduction
The communication part of the project shall provide the interconnection between Aminbazar 400 kV,
Mongla 400 kV, Meghnaghat 400 kV, and Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substations.
The purpose of the telecommunication system is to provide all the necessary telecommunication
channels at the new 400 kV Aminbazar Substation for the following subsystems:
SCADA for data exchange between the substations and the National Load Despatch Centre
(NLDC),
Teleprotection to enable the communication between line differential protection relays and between
distance protection relays,
Telephone to enable telephone communication between the substations and NLDC,

Volume 3 Page 14
Metering: Data transfer between meters and the entity in charge of collecting and processing me-
tering data,
Any other telecommunication channels.
1.6.1.2 Architecture of the Overall Telecommunication System
The communication system to be implemented will be based on a fibre optic system including OPGWs
and SDH multiplexers (STM-16 and STM-4) and digital PLC used as a backup.
The main outline of the scope of work and supply is as follows:
Two (2) new SDH & PDH multiplexers with two (2) optical boosters and one(1) optical distribution
frames (ODF) at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation.
Two (2) new SDH & PDH multiplexers with two (2) optical boostersand one (1) 48 cores ODF at
Mongla 400 kV Substation
Two (2) digital PLC and two (2) Line Matching Units (LMU) at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation
Two (2) digital PLC and two (2)LMU at Mongla 400 kV Substation
The length of the communication links is indicated below:
Aminbazar 400 kV Substation-Mongla 400 kV Substation: 175 km (OPGW and PLC link)
Aminbazar 400 kV Substation-Meghnaghat 400 kV Substation: 56.13 km (OPGW)
Aminbazar 400 kV Substation-Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV Substation: about 500 m (underground fi-
bre optic cable and PLC link)
A scheme of the overall telecommunication system is attached at following drawings:
COM.1 / SDH Telecommunication System -Aminbazar 400 kV S/S and

COM.2 / Digital PLCSystem-Aminbazar 400 kV S/S
1.6.1.2.1 Scope of Work and Supply at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation
The scope of work and supply of the telecommunication system shall include:
One optical fibre cable from the gantry of Mongla 400 kV OHL to the substation communication
room at Aminbazar Substation including 48 cores and non-metallic (underground) but with the
same optical characteristics with the OPGW (compliant to ITU-T-G 655 recommendation),
One optical fibre cable from the gantry of Meghnaghat 400 kV OHL to the substation communica-
tion room at Aminbazar Substation including 48 cores and non-metallic (underground) but with the
same optical characteristics with the OPGW (compliant to ITU-T-G 655 recommendation)
One underground cable including 48 cores and non-metallic compliant to ITU-T-G 655 recommen-
dation for connecting Aminbazar 400 kV Substation to Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV Substation.
Optical Distribution Frames (ODF). 3 (three) optical distribution frames of 48 cores capacity each
shall be provided at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation. ODF will be installed in the telecommunication /
control room to facilitate the termination of fibres, testing and isolating of both the optical fibre cable
and fibre optic terminal equipment,
One Optical SDH / PDH multiplexer including:
Duplicate CPU
Duplicate power supply

Volume 3 Page 15
Fouroptical STM-16 ports

Six optical STM-4 ports
One 16x2 Mbps (E1) drop card
One 8x2 Mbps (E1) elect. Card
One card with four ports 10/100 Base T LAN
One card with four ports 10/100 Base T Router
One card with 10x2-w voice for FXS
Fourcard with 4x4 commands for distance protection
The optical SDH / PDH multiplexer shall be preferably of ABB FOX 515/FOX 615 type to ensure
fully integration with existing FOX 515/FOX 615.
Duplicate CPU
Two optical STM-16 ports
Two optical STM-4 ports
One card with 2x4 commands for distance protection
The optical SDH / PDH multiplexer shall be preferably of ABB FOX 515 family to ensure fully inte-
gration with existing FOX 515.
Due to the length of the 400 kV OHL Aminbazar-Mongla (175 km) two optical boosters are re-
quired.
Two digital PLC with Ethernet facilities and two LMU in the direction of Mongla 400 kV Substation
(phase-to-phase coupling). A coaxial cable for connecting PLCs to LMUs.
One digital PLC with Ethernet facilities and one LMU in the direction of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV
Substation. The LMU shall be directly connected to the related LMU of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV
Substation
1.6.1.2.2 Scope of Work and Supply at Mongla 400 kV Substation
The scope of work and supply of the telecommunication system shall include:
Optical Distribution Frames (ODF). 1 (one) optical distribution frame of 48 cores capacity shall be
provided at Mongla 400 kV Substation. ODF will be installed in the telecommunication / control
room to facilitate the termination of fibres, testing and isolating of both the optical fibre cable and fi-
bre optic terminal equipment
Duplicate CPU
Fouroptical STM-16 ports
Six optical STM-4 ports
Fourcard with 4x4 commands for distance protection

Volume 3 Page 16
The optical SDH / PDH multiplexer shall be preferably of ABB FOX 515/FOX 615 type to ensure
fully integration with existing FOX 515/FOX 615.
Duplicate CPU
One optical STM-16 port
One card with 2x4 commands for distance protection
The optical SDH / PDH multiplexer shall be preferably of ABB FOX 515 family to ensure fully inte-
gration with existing FOX 515.
Due to the length of the 400 kV OHL Aminbazar-Mongla (175 km) two optical boosters are re-
quired.
Two digital PLC with Ethernet facilities and two LMU in the direction of Mongla 400 kV Substation
(phase-to-phase coupling). A coaxial cable for connecting PLCs to LMUs.
1.6.1.3 Engineering Services
General
The engineering services shall be provided by the Contractor to the necessary extent and detail of a
turnkey project. They shall include drawings, instructions and all other technical documents required to
allow the Contractor to build, erect, commission, operate and maintain the telecommunication system,
even if these are not specifically mentioned in these Technical Requirements.
Design Services
The Contractor shall design in detail the general layout of the telecommunication system, based on
the preliminary design and modifications agreed. This general layout shall be submitted to the Em-
ployer / Employer's Representative for approval and comments. It shall also include all detailed struc-
tural drawings, detailed descriptions and reports required to permit an exact understanding of the solu-
tion adopted.
Once the general layout is approved, the Contractor shall include following as a minimum requirement:
design of all works required for the implementation and extension of the telecommunication sys-
tem, general layouts of the telecommunication system, engineering of telecommunication system,
all necessary calculations.
These engineering services shall also include:
design reports,
complete drawings of all system,
integration in the existing telecommunication system.
1.6.2 SCADA, Control and Monitoring Equipment
1.6.2.1 Overall Scope of Work and Supply
The SCADA system will be based on:
The communication with the NLDC shall be via the supplied gateway for Control and Monitoring

Volume 3 Page 17
System of Aminbazar 400/230 kV substation.

Industrial gateway will be implemented at Aminbazar 400 kV substation for remote monitoring &
control from the National Despatch Centre. It will provide all the necessary control and monitoring
facilities for 400 kV level (line bay ,400kV side of 400/230 kV power transformers) and auxiliaries.
The 230 kV side of the 400/230kV new transformer bay will be monitored through existing Micom
C264 RTU. Contractor shall supply & install of necessary equipment such as sub rack of Micom
C264 RTU, IED/relay, transducers, DI, DO card etc. for integrating 230 kV new bays through exist-
ing RTU.
Contractor shall supply, install 2 (two) numbers of Industrial gateway and will be configured as
master - hot standby mode or one gateway will report to main station & another will report to back-
up station. Gateway shall be capable report to both Main master station at Rampura (through
VLAN network) & Standby Master Station at Biddyut Bhaban (through routed network) simultane-
ously. It will be configured according to the signal list, communication parameter, IP address, sta-
tion address etc. provided by PGCB. The Gateway shall have adequate capacity (minimum 25%
additional spare point with license) to meet to the future extensions of substation.
In case of windows operating system based gateway there should be USB port, VGA port,
HDD/flash memory with one spare parts, TFT monitor with mouse and key board etc. Hard disk
should be 50% free and CPU loading maximum of 30% at normal condition. If gateway is firmware
based then 02(two) nos. of control card is required. Gateways also have minimum 06 nos LAN port
& redundant power supply. There should be GPS facilities for time synchronization. In addition,
cyber security has to be ensured at field level with firewall. Supported Protocol shall be IEC 60870-
5-104, 61850 & MODBus etc.
One laptop for each vendor & same software version is required with Acronis True image or Ghost
or similar software for system back up & restoration.
All necessary adaptation work and configuration of the existing SCADA platform of the NLDC to in-
tegrate the new Aminbazar 400 kV Substation and the new bays of 400/230 kV Aminbazar substa-
tion shall be provided.
A scheme of the control and monitoring system is attached at following drawing:
COM3 / Control and Monitoring System - Aminbazar 400 kV S/S
1.6.2.2 Adaptation and Configuration of the NLDC
The SCADA system of the National Load Despatch Centre is based on ALSTOM platform. The com-
munication protocol to be used for data exchange between the NLDC and the substations shall be IEC
60870-5-104 for the data transmission from Aminbazar substation.
Adaptation work and configuration of the NLDC will mainly consist of:
Modelling the new Aminbazar 400 kV substation and new bays of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV sub-
station.
Database update of NLDC (ABB Network Manager Platform).
Configuration of ABB Network Manager Platform to display the single line diagrams, statuses,
alarms, measurements of the new Aminbazar 400 kV substation and new bays of Aminbazar
230/132/33 kV substation.
Database creation / modification & update at respective SCADA/EMS servers at both master sta-
tion.
Creation of associate display and modification of existing displays wherever required.
Point to point test.

Volume 3 Page 18
1.6.2.3 Scope of Work and Supply at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation
1.6.2.3.1 Substation Control and Monitoring System at Aminbazar 400 kV Substation
The substation control system refers to the station level and bay level controls. The station level con-
trol equipment shall include the following:
Station Level:
Re-arrangement of the bays
2 (two) independent station computers operating on a main and hot standby basis,
2 (two) operator workstations including 2 x 21" colour monitors (complete with appropriate desk
and chair). The second operator workstation shall have the capability to be used as Employer's
Representative workstation,
Black and white A 4 laser printer,
Colour A 3 laser printer,
Common bay control unit for monitoring auxiliary power supply and all other equipment on a sub-
station level (telemetry, telecommunication, HVAC, fire protection, etc.),
Satellite clock, which should run on SNTP protocols. The satellite clock will provide the reference
time to the comprehensive Substation Control and Monitoring System and protection relays
through IEC61850 substation LAN., The satellite clock system will be complete with GPS receiver,
antenna and time synchronisation ports.
Interface for laptop computer for maintenance, information transfer and emergency HMI,
Non-fail power supply system,
Communication network equipment (substation local area network, field communication network,
optical couplers, etc.),
Optical connection to the exiting RTUofAminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation for data exchange
with the NLDC.
Configuration of the new/existing gateway.
The station computers in the substation must be separate machines from the station HMI (operator
workstation) and should be located in the control panels, and not on the control desk with the HMI.
Bay Level:
The control system of the bay level of Aminbazar 400 kV substation shall be carried out with micropro-
cessor based Bay Control Unit (BCU) control system. All BCUs shall be provided with IEC 61850 Edi-
tion 2 communication ports. The connections between BCUs and the station level shall be based on
redundant fibre optic links. These communication ports will be used for control, indication and alarm
systems to the substation automation system and SCADA. The following bays shall be provided with
BCU:
Mongla 400 kV overhead line 1
Mongla 400 kVoverhead line 2
Meghnaghat 400 kV overhead line 1
Meghnaghat 400 kV overhead line 2
Autotransformer 400/230/33 kV No1
400 kV busbar measurement No1
400 kV busbar measurement No2
Auxiliaries

Volume 3 Page 19
The architecture of the Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS) at Aminbazar 400 kV sub-
station is attached.
A bay control unit (BCU) shall provide the following:
Control for each individual circuit / bay with a LCD mimic and user interface for control and monitor-
ing of the circuit / bay,
Interface for protection devices that cannot directly interface with the substation control system lo-
cal area network,
Interface for laptop computer for maintenance, information transfer and emergency HMI,
Interlocking functions (soft and hard wired).
Station level control functions shall include the following:

Control of all switching devices,
Real-time indication of events and alarms,
Display of analogue values and high / low limit checking,
Display of historical values,
Data archiving,
Disturbance monitoring and analysis,
Trend display,
Protection and control relay setting information,
Protection relay fault and disturbance records,
Time synchronization,
Interlocking function to prevent unsafe operator action (display message if operator attempts an in-
appropriate action),
Self-check and diagnostic,
Manual data setting by the operator, including:
Hand dressed data entry,
Control inhibit setting,
Alarm inhibit setting,
Maintenance tag setting,
High / low limit setting.
Remote access to substation control system from SCADA system using a TCP / IP link.
All peripheral devices that constitute the substation automation system should be supervised and
monitored by Control through IEC 61850 or any other compatible protocol.
1.6.2.3.2 General Principle and Description of SCMS
The substation control and monitoring system shall have distributed client/server architecture. It shall
consist of:
The BCU equipment, which will be installed at the bay level,

The substation level equipment, to be installed in the control room,
A redundant communication network between station level and bay level for data exchange to limit
the number of cables and ensure extension of the system. The exchange of information between
distributed single bay unit and central substation control level shall be performed through redun-
dant fibre optic wires. The communication network shall be based on the following architecture:
One optical double-ring LAN with protection and BCU,
One UPT CAT 5 redundant LAN at substation level.

Volume 3 Page 20
The station level equipment will be power supplied from the two independent AC sources:
One from the AC station auxiliaries 230 V AC 50 Hz,

The second one from a UPS,
An automatic change over shall prevent supply interruption.
In the event of loss of supply or disconnection for any reason, the system shall reboot automatically
(without loss of stored information) and will update statuses of all devices when the power supply re-
covers. The updating process shall not inhibit control functions.
The substation control level must support future expansion of substation control system, having a 25%
of resources as minimum.
At bay level, all control functions, data acquisition interlocking functions shall be done in the bay con-
trol devices within the bay level equipment. Each feeder shall be equipped with an individual bay con-
trol device.
For the data acquisition of substation auxiliaries, information (LV/MV switchgear, station battery,
charger, UPS etc.,) a local RTU (or BCPU) shall be provided and installed in the control building. The
bay control devices shall be connected to the station level via a redundant optical fibre communication
link.
The bay level equipment shall comprise at least the following elements:
Bay control unit (BCU). Bay computer shall be separate unit (not incorporated in the protection
unit).
Input / output modules for digital and analogue signals,
Communication with protection equipment and analogue signals,
Redundant optical fibre communication with substation level or ring bus communication,
Backup mimic panel for maintenance control and measurements. One two position switch shall be
provided on control panel:
Local: Only local control is enabled, the interlocking function is on bay level only, no synchroniza-
tion,
Remote: Only remote control is enabled.
In both cases, all the data must be transmitted to the higher level (NLDC),
Communication port for operation / maintenance from a laptop computer.
Bay control units shall be supplied from 110 V DC.
In the event of loss of supply or disconnection for any reason, the system shall reboot automatically
(without loss of stored information) and will update statuses of all devices when the power supply re-
covers. The updating process shall not inhibit control functions. There should not be any loss of data
due to the loss of auxiliary supply.
It shall be taken into consideration that additional bay control units can be added to the system, with-
out disturbance of the system, for future expansion. A provision of 20% in bay units' expansion is re-
quired, as well as a provision of 10% in I/O signals, within each bay.
Control and supervision of the system will be possible from different levels:
NLDC,

Volume 3 Page 21
Substation control level from the operator workstation,

Bay control level.
On all levels, a correct interlocking will be ensured which provides the highest safety for staff and
equipment. On the substation control level, the interlocking is managed by the microprocessor-based
system, on the bay level it is performed by hard wiring.
The substation control system shall follow the specifications of IEC family 61850, 60870-5-101/104,
60870-5-102 and 60870-5-103. It is an obligatory requirement that the same Manufacturer supplies
equipment and software for both the substation control and supervision system and the protectionsys-
tem.
List of Signals
The list below states the types of signals for the different configurations of bay types to assist in the
determination of needs and possibilities for each of analysed systems of the future substation. The es-
timated signals are shown in the tables and include but not limited to:
Signalling:
Protection (start, tripping, zones/phases, AR, communication send/receive),
Automatic systems (start, tripping, operation, working mode)
Central systems (backup trips, trip during long power swing, busbar protection and breaker failure,
protection off, remote control off, feeder maintenance off),
Switching equipment (manual control, emergency trip),
Mode of operation: Local / Remote.
Warning:
Protection (faults),
Automatic systems (faults),
Fault locator (faults),
Event recorder (faults),
Control systems (voltage control),
Breaker (control blocking from a gas pressure low, a gas pressure low, AR inhibit from driver fault,
driver supply voltage loss, driver fault, pole discordance).
High voltage switch position:
Breaker (separate pole - each 2 bits),
Disconnectors (separate pole - each 2 bits),
Earth switches (separate pole - each 2 bits).
Control:
Breaker (close, open),
Disconnectors (close, open),
Line earth switch (close, open),
Automatic systems (off, on,)
Voltage regulation systems (choice of voltage level, regulation mode, tap changer control).
Series interfaces:
From digital protections and disturbance recorder,
From diagnostic system of primary equipment,
From monitoring system (transformer, etc.).

Volume 3 Page 22
Measurements:
Phase currents,
Phase voltages
Real power and energy for both directions,
Reactive power and energy for both directions,
Frequency, power factor,
Device switching statistics.
Metering (for planning / operation not for commercial purpose):

Real energy for both directions,
Reactive energy for both directions.
Auxiliary systems:
Aux 33 kV AC,
Aux.400/230 V AC,
Aux.110V DC,
Aux.220V AC UPS,
Aux.48 V DC,
Fire protection,
Security light,
Alarm system,
HVAC,
Telecommunication alarms,
GPS time synchronizing input (NTP Protocol).
1.6.2.4 Scope of Work and Supply at Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV Substation
The existing SCMS of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV Substation will be extended to integrate the new
three 230 kV incoming feeders coming from Aminbazar 400 kV Substation.
Three BCUs shall be provided with IEC 61850 Edition 2 communication ports. The connections be-
tween BCUs and the station level shall be based on redundant fibre optic links. These communication
ports will be used for control, indication and alarm systems to the substation automation system and
SCADA. The following bays shall be provided with BCU:
230 kV incoming feeder No1

A bay control unit (BCU) shall provide the following:
Control for each individual circuit / bay with a LCD mimic and user interface for control and monitor-
ing of the circuit / bay,
Interface for protection devices that cannot directly interface with the substation control system lo-
cal area network,
Interface for laptop computer for maintenance, information transfer and emergency HMI, Interlock-
ing functions (soft and hard-wired).
All necessary optical/Ethernet switches shall be provided to connect the new BCUs to the station level
of SMS.

Volume 3 Page 23
All necessary adaptation work shall be provided for:
Modelling the new bays of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation

Database update of SCMS of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation
Configuration SCMS of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation to display the single line diagrams,
statuses, alarms, measurements of the new bays of Aminbazar 230/132/33 kV substation
Configuration of the existing gateway to integrate data of Aminbazar 400 kV substation to be ex-
changed with NLDC
The signal list will follow the same rules indicated for Aminbazar 400 kV substation.
1.6.2.5 Engineering Services
General
The engineering services shall be provided by the Contractor to the extent and detail necessary for a
turnkey project. They shall include drawings, instructions and all other technical documents required
allow the Contractor to build, erect, commission, operate and maintain the substation systems, even if
these are not specifically mentioned in these Technical Requirements.
Design Services
The Contractor shall design in detail the general layout of the SCADA and substation control system,
based on the preliminary design and modifications agreed. This general layout shall be submitted to
the Employer / Employer's Representative for approval and comments. It shall also include all detailed
structural drawings, detailed descriptions and reports required to permit an exact understanding of the
solution adopted.
Once the general layout is approved, the Contractor shall include the following as a minimum require-
ment:
Design of all works required for the implementation and extension of the SCADA and substation
control system,
General layouts for the SCADA and substation control system,
Engineering of SCADA and substation control system,
All necessary calculations.
These engineering services shall also include:
Design reports,
Complete drawings of all systems,
Integration in existing SCADA system.

Volume 3 Page 24
1.7 Type Test Requirements for Major Plant / Equipment
Please refer to Schedule-I of this Volume 3 of the tender document
1.8 Terminal Points
1.8.1 Transmission Line Circuit Connections
The slack spans including overhead earth wires between the 400 kV overhead line terminal towers
and the substation gantry structures shall be supplied and terminated by the overhead line Contrac-
tors. All required insulators and hardwires shall also be supplied by the overhead line Contractors.
Eyebolts/U-bolts or other suitable fixtures for terminating the slack spans on the switchyard gantry
shall be provided under this substation contract.
The overhead line Contractor shall provide a jumper from the slack span of sufficient length to termi-
nate on the substation entry equipment. The supply of appropriate clamps and the actual termination
of the jumper to the substation equipment shall be carried out under this contract.
PLC facilities such as line trap and coupling capacitor, new or currently used in existing substations
shall be carried out under this contract.
Bonding of the incoming earth wire to the station earthing screen and supply of earthing conductor and
connection of the terminal tower earth electrode into the substation earth grid shall be carried out un-
der this contract.
The overhead line Contractor shall terminate the OPGW at the substation gantry in the terminal joint
boxes provided by the overhead line Contractors. The connection between OPGW joint boxes at the
substation gantry and control room building via underground optical fibre cables shall be carried out
under this contract;it includes supply & installation of fibre optic cable of a size similar to the OPGW.
1.8.2 Substation Connections
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and shall provide all works and services inside the both
Substation. All parts of new and existing substation shall be connected at the appropriate way.
The 400/230/33 kV power transformers shall be connected with the appropriate 230 kV transform-
ers bays via 230 kV cables.
The existing 230 kV transmission lines shall be connected with the new 230 kV transmission line
bays via 230 kV cables.
Control & protection systems shall be connected.
SCADA systems shall be connected.
Communication systems shall be connected.
Telephone system shall be connected.
Earthing systems shall be separated but existence of nearby earthing system shall be considered.
Lightning protection systems could be separated but existence of nearby lightning protection sys-
tem shall be considered.

Volume 3 Page 25
Fence between two substations shall be provided as internal fence.

Substations shall be connected by roads and gates.
Cable channels between substations shall be considered, both for power cables and for control,
protection and communication cables.
All other connections between two substations shall be provided.
1.8.3 Communication and SCADA Equipment
The voice communication, tele-protection signalling and main distribution frame (MDF) for optical fibre
cable will be supplied and installed under this contract.
Necessary equipment for incorporating new & existing equipment system into the existing
SCADA system shall also be supplied and installed under this contract:
All necessary facilities, equipment, material, works and services, shall be provided for connec-
tion of the new Substation 400/230 kV Aminbazar with the existing Substation 230/132 kV
Aminbazar
Complete design, supply, delivery, installation, testing & commissioning of hardware and software
shall be provided for the tele-control & tele-metering facilities required at the existing National Load
Despatch Centre (NLDC) at Rampura for integration of the scope of the work.
In order to provide the tele-control & tele-metering facilities required at the existing NLDC, all plant
supplied under this contract shall be equipped with potential free auxiliary contacts for indications and
alarms. CT and VT circuits shall be fitted, where required, with the appropriate shorting and fused ter-
minals.
All required electrical signals for signalization and control shall be transmitted to the NLDC through the
Industrial Gateway of the substation automation system or RTU.
All HV breakers, motorized disconnectors, tap changer, etc. shall be controlled form NLDC through the
Gateway or RTU of the substation automation system using IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. Necessary
transducer, control & interposing relays, RTUs, etc. shall be used. Necessary interfacing between the
Substation Automation gateway and the communication equipment is to be carried out.
Sufficient investigations shall be made on the existing telecommunication and SCADA system
for new and existing transmission lines and associated new and existing substations so that
the necessary equipment shall be provided for complete telecommunication system after the
new and existing transmission lines and substations are connected/reconnected.
All and complete connection between the new equipment and the existing equipment for control & pro-
tection system, SCADA, communication system, and low voltage supply system shall be provided.
In addition, to implement the complete SCADA system after completion of the project, modifi-
cation of the existing software in the master and back-up computer of the national control cen-
tre, and modification / extension / renovation of hardware (installing additional printed circuit
cards or other equipment, etc. if required) shall be made under this contract.

Volume 3 Page 26
1.9 System Electrical Parameters
1.9.1 System Conditions
Equipment supplied under this contract shall be suitable for the following system conditions:
Description Unit Required

Nominal system voltage between phases kV 400 230 33
System frequency Hz 50
Rated voltage between phases kV 420 245 36
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 1425 1050 170
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage kV 1050 - -
Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV, 1 min - 460 70
Rated symmetrical short-circuit current kA, 1 sec 63 50 25
1.9.2 System Earthing
The 400/230/33kV autotransformers are solidly earthed.
The 400 kV &230 kV systems are solidly earthed at the 400/230/33 kV autotransformer neutrals but
not earthed at the Grid supply points.
The 33 kV system is solidly earthed at some of the grid substations and resistance earthed at some
other of the grid substations.
1.9.3 Minimum Substation Clearances
Air insulated connections shall have electrical clearances as listed in the following table:

Nominal system voltage kV 400 230 33
Minimum clearance between live metal parts and earth mm 3500 2100 380
Minimum clearance between live metal mm 4000 2400 430
Minimum safety clearance between ground andthe
mm 2500
nearest point not at earth potential of an insulator
Minimum safety clearance between ground and the
nearest live unscreened conductor mm 6400 4600 2800
(BS 7354: Safety Working Clearance)
Minimum insulator creepage distance
mm/kV 25
(at rated voltage between phases)

Volume 3 Page 27
1.9.4 Low Voltage AC System

Rated service voltage (3 phase, 4 wire 50 Hz) V 415 / 230
Tolerance on rated voltage % +15%, -15%
Switchgear symmetrical breaking capacity kA 15 kA, 3 sec
System earthing - solid
1.9.5 Low Voltage DC System
For d.c. motor driven auxiliaries, relays, tripping, indicating lamps and controls.

Nominal DC voltage V 110
For telecommunication & SCADA

Nominal DC voltage V 48

Volume 3 Page 28
1.10 Climatic Conditions
All plant and equipment supplied under the contract shall be entirely suitable for the climatic conditions
prevailing at site.
The project area and vicinity is close to sea level and is in a tropical climate.
The ambient shade temperature variation is between 4 C and 45 C with periods of high humidity.
Between May and November, low-lying areas are subject to flooding. Flooding countermeasure shall
be taken for the civil design, so as not to affect any substation equipment during the wet season. As
per the recorded past maximum flood water levels in the project area, sufficient ground level height for
land formation is required at the Contractor's responsibility. On certain sites, the flooding can be taken
as an advantage in that the heavy loads may be floated on barges to close proximity of the sites.
The project area is a designated zone of moderate earthquake intensity. The seismic factor is 0.1 g.
Atmospheric pollution is moderate and no special insulator design or washing is required. The area is
subject to high winds of typhoon strength.

Maximum ambient shade temperature C 45
Minimum ambient shade temperature C 4
Maximum daily average temperature C 35
Maximum annual average temperature C 25
Maximum wind velocity km/h 160
Minimum wind velocity for line rating purposes km/h 3.2
Solar radiation W/m 1000
Rainfall mm/year 2500
Relative humidity, maximum % 100
Relative humidity, average % 80
Altitude m < 1000
Atmospheric pollution - medium
Icing no ice or snow expected
Seismic factor g 0.1
Soil type - alluvial
Soil temperature (at 1.1 m) C 30 C at 1.1 meter depth
Soil thermal resistivity Cm/W 1.5
Isokeraunic level (thunderstorm days/year) days/year 80
The information in this clause is given solely for the general assistance of Bidders and no responsibil-
ity for it will be accepted nor will any claim based on this clause be considered.

Volume 3 Page 29
General
1. The Price Schedules are divided as follows:
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from within the Employers Coun-
try
2. The Schedules do not generally give a full description of the plant to be supplied and the ser-
vices to be performed under each item. Bidders shall be deemed to have read the Employers
Requirements and other sections of the Bidding Document and reviewed the Drawings to ascer-
tain the full scope of the requirements included in each item prior to filling in the rates and pric-
es. The entered rates and prices shall be deemed to cover the full scope as previously men-
tioned, including overheads and profit.
3. If Bidders are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek clarification in
accordance with ITB 7 prior to submitting their bid.
Pricing
4. The units and rates in figures entered into the Price Schedules should be typewritten or if writ-
ten by hand, must be in print form. Price Schedules not presented accordingly may be consid-
ered nonresponsive. The Bidder shall initial any alterations necessary due to errors, etc.
As specified in the Bid Data Sheet and Special Conditions of Contract, prices shall be subject to
adjustment in accordance with the corresponding Appendix (Price Adjustment) to the Contract
Agreement.
5. Bid prices shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified in the Instruc-
tions to Bidders in the Bidding Document.
For each item, Bidders shall complete each appropriate column in the respective Schedules,
giving the price breakdown as indicated in the Schedules.
Prices given in the Schedules against each item shall be for the scope covered by that item as
detailed in Volume II (Employers Requirements) or elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
6. Payments will be made to the Contractor in the currency or currencies indicated under each re-
spective item.

Volume 3 Page 30
7. When requested by the Employer for the purposes of making payments or part payments, valu-
ing variations or evaluating claims, or for such other purposes as the Employer may reasonably
require, the Contractor shall provide the Employer with a breakdown of any composite or lump
sum items included in the Schedules.
Schedule B: Schedules of Rates and Prices
Schedule No. 1: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supply from

Abroad
Schedule No. 2: Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from

Within the Employer's Country


Please see the separate Excel file for the above.
The Bidder shall fill, sign and stamp the attached price schedules and shall attach them to the bid.
(Price schedules are attached at the end of this document.)

Volume 3 Page 31
Schedule C: Bar Chart Program of Key Activi-

ties - Delivery & Completion Time Schedule
Bidders shall fill, sign and stamp the attached time scheduleand shall attach it to the bid.
Time for completion of the whole facilities shall be 30 (thirty) months from the effective date as de-
scribed in Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract, Sub-Clause 8.2.
The Bidder shall provide
Filled general time schedule, provided below and as Appendix 4 to the Section 9: Contract Forms,
Detail proposal for Mobilization Schedule, Section 4: Bidding Forms, item 5.3. and
Detail proposal for the Construction Schedule, Section 4: Bidding Forms, item 5.4.
Please find the time schedule attached.

Volume 3 Page 32
Time Schedule

Volume 3 Page 33
Time Schedule (continued)

Volume 3 Page 34

The following form shall be filled and attached to the bid. Bidders are free to propose more than one Manufacturer for each item.
Manufacturers
Manufacturer's Place of Manufacture

Item Equipment Type of Equipment Nationality
Name and Address and Testing
Power Transformer
1.1. Power transformer400/230/33 kV
1.2.1: HV Bushing
1.2.2 MV Bushing
1.2.3 LV Busing
1.2.4 On Load Tap Changer
1.2.5 Copper
1.2.6 Core plates
1.2.7 Tank
1.2.8 Radiators
1.2.9 Fan motors
1.2.10 Transformer oil
1.2.11 Oil valves
1.2.12 Oil level indicator
1.2.13 Membrane
1.2.14 Pressure relief device
1.2.15 Buholz relay
1.2.16 Gas actuated relay
1.2.17 Thermal image
1.2.18 Oil temperature indicator
1.2.19 Winding temperature indicator
1.2.20

Volume 3 Page 35

Auxiliary Power Transformer
2.1. Auxiliary power transformer 33/0.4 kV
High Voltage Equipment 400 kV
3.6. Post insulators 400 kV
High Voltage Equipment 230 kV
4.6. Post insulators 230 kV
33 kV Equipment
Control, Protection, and Metering Equipment
6.1 Control & monitoring equipment
6.2 Relay protection equipment
6.3. Control & protection panels
6.4. Metering equipment
6.5. Metering panels
6.6. DFDR

Volume 3 Page 36

Telecommunication Equipment, Telephone equipment, Fibre optic Multiplexer equipment
7.1. Communication equipment
7.2. Telephone equipment
7.3. Fibre optic Multiplexer equipment
Auxiliary Power Supply Equipment
8.1. ACU battery
8.2. Charger
8.3 DC distribution system
8.4 AC distribution system
Conductors, Insulators & Fittings, Earthing
9.1. Conductors rigid tubular
9.2. Conductors flexible
9.3. Insulators
9.4 Fittings
9.5 Copper conductor
9.6 Insulated Copper conductor
Multicore LV Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
10.1 LV Cables
10.2 Cable trays
230 kV Cables
11.1 230 kV Cables
11.2 230 kV Cable terminal
Power Line Carrier
12.1 PLC Terminal unit
12.2 Line trap
12.3 Line mathing unit
12.4 Co-Axial cable
12.5 Tele-protection equipment
13 33kV Cables

Volume 3 Page 37

13.1 33kV Cables
13.2 33kV Cable termination
Name of Bidder:
Signature of Bidder:

Volume 3 Page 38
Schedule E: Technical Particulars and Guaran-

tees
1. General
The technical data schedules hereafter provide more details on the specific technical criteria and
complement the Information given in the Bidding documents.
They form an essential part of bid submission and will be used in bid evaluation.
They should be fully completed and submitted with the bid.
2. Technical Data Schedules

Please find the technical data schedules below.

Volume 3 Page 39
2.1 A: Switchgear 420 kV
2.1.1 A1: Circuit Breaker420 kV
Minimum Requirements
No. Description Guaranteed
Unit Data
1. Circuit Breaker - General

1.1. Manufacturer Insert
1.2 Type Insert
1.3 Model designation Insert
1.4 Country of origin Insert
IEC 62271-100
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
1.6 Quality control ISO 14001
ISO 18001
1.7 Isolating and quenching medium SF6
1.8 Type of circuit breaker Outdoor
1.9 Design Double breaking
1.10 Operating mechanism Motor-wound spring
1.11 Number of poles pcs. 3 (1 per phase)
Number of operating mechanisms per circuit
1.12 pcs. 3 (1 per phase)
breaker
1.13 Control Switching Device pcs. 3 (1 per phase)
2. Circuit Breaker Characteristics

2.1 Nominal system voltage kV rms 400
2.2 Highest voltage for equipment Un kV rms 420
2.3 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 1425
2.4 Rated switching impulse withstand voltage kV 1050
2.5 Rated frequency fr Hz 50
2.6 Rated current Ir A 4000
2.7 Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc kA rms 63
Rated peak withstand current Ip (equal short-
2.8 kA 125
circuit making current)
D.C. component of the rated short-circuit breaking
2.9 % > 30
current
First-pole-to-clear factor
Terminal fault p.u. 1.3
2.10
Short-line fault p.u. 1.0
Out-of-phase p.u. 2.0
Standard value of transient recovery voltage
2.11 kV Insert
(T100)
2.12 Rate of rise recovery voltage kV/s Insert
2.13 Rated operating sequence O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO
2.14 Duration of short-circuit s 1
2.15 Rated out-of-phase breaking current kA Insert

Volume 3 Page 40
Unit Data
2.16 Auto reclosing 1p+3p
Maximum total break time (trip initiation to final
2.17 arc extinction) pos.3.7.135 acc. to IEC 62271- ms 60
100)
Time of final arc extinction (3.7..134 acc. IEC
2.18 ms 20 5
62271-100)
Opening time (trip initiation to contact separation)
2.19 Without current ms Insert
With 100 % rated breaking current ms Insert
Maximum time interval between opening inter-
2.20 ms Insert
rupters
Maximum time interval between opening of first
2.21 ms 3
and last phase of three-phase circuit breakers
Time for making (trip initiation to contact touch)
100 % making current ms Insert
2.23 Minimum dead time ms Insert
Restrike performance during capacitive current
2.24 Class C2
switching
Number of operations without maintenance
CO at no-load 10000
2.25
CO at rated current 2500
CO at rated breaking current Isc 5
2.26 The frequency of mechanical operations Class M2
2.27 Rated electrical endurance Class Min E1
2.28 Rated pressure of a circuit breaker Mpa Insert
2.29 Total mass of SF6 gas in a circuit breaker kg Insert
2.30 Rated mechanical terminal loads
2.30.1 Static horizontal force, longitudinal FthA N 1750
2.30.2 Static horizontal force, transversal FthB N 1250
2.30.3 Static vertical force Ftv N 1500
2.30.4 Dynamic horizontal force, longitudinal Fwx N Insert
2.30.5 Dynamic horizontal force, transversal N Insert
3. Circuit Breaker - Design and Construction

3.1 Circuit Breaker
3.1.1 Insulator material Porcelain
3.1.2 Minimum creepage distance mm/kV Min. 25
3.1.3 HV terminal pcs. 2
3.1.3.1 Shape Flat
3.1.3.2 Dimensions mm x mm Min 200 x 100
3.1.3.3 Number of holes Min 8
3.1.3.4 Dimensions of holes mm 14
3.1.3.5 Distance between holes mm 50
3.1.3.6 Material suitable for Al terminal
3.1.5 Weight and dimensions
3.1.5.1 Support insulator height mm Insert
3.1.5.2 Total height mm Insert
3.1.5.3 Pole weight kg Insert

Volume 3 Page 41
Unit Data
3.1.5.4 Weight of operating mechanism kg Insert
3.1.5.5 Total weight (with metal structure) kg Insert
3.1.6 Minimum distance
3.1.6.1 Between poles mm Insert
3.1.6.2 To ground mm Insert
3.2 Operating mechanism
3.2.1 Type Insert
3.2.2 Motor - auxiliary supply voltage V. AC 230/415
3.2.3 Rated power of motor W Insert
3.2.4 Control voltage V. DC 110
3.2.5 Number of making coils pcs. 1
3.2.6 Rated power of making coils W Insert
3.2.7 Number of breaking coils pcs. 2
3.2.8 Rated power of breaking coils W Insert
3.2.9 Heater Yes
3.2.10 Heater supply voltage V. Hz 230. 50
3.2.11 Total heater power W Insert
Minimum number of available contacts
3.2.12 12NO+12NC+1V
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.15 Water-tight corrosion-resistant housing IP54
3.2.17 Operating mechanism material Al or stainless steel
3.2.19 A crank for manual spring loading Yes
3.4 Accessories in central control panel
3.4.1 Anti-pumping relay Yes
3.4.2 Local/remote control selector switch Yes
3.4.3 Local operation push buttons Yes
3.4.4 Minimum pressure lock-out and alarm relays Yes
3.4.5 Service outlet (socket) - 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.4.6 Lighting switch Yes
3.4.7 Lighting - 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.4.8 Heater - 230 V, 50 HZ Yes
3.4.9 Operation counter Yes
Motor MCB (miniature circuit breakers) (for all op-
3.4.10 Yes
erating mechanisms)
3.4.11 Time phase discrepancy relay Yes
Weatherproof, corrosion resistance enclosure, Al
3.4.12 IP54
or stainless steel
3.2.16 Cu earthing rails inside central control cabinet Yes
Detachable plates, the bottom of central control
3.2.18 Yes
cabinet
Set of cables for connection of operating mecha-
3.4.13 Yes
nism and central control panel of circuit breaker
Galvanized horizontal and vertical metal structure
3.4.14 Yes
with minimum 70 m zinc layer
Overall compliance with the requirements (yes/no)

Volume 3 Page 42
2.1.2 A2.1: Disconnector 420 kV, without Earthing Switch
Unit Data
1. Disconnector- General
1.1 Manufacturer Insert
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
1.7 Type of disconnector Outdoor
Three column
1.8 Design
Double break
1.9 Number of poles pcs. 3
1.10 Type of main blade operating mechanism Motor driven
1.11 Number of main blade operating mechanisms pcs. 3
1.12 Type of earthing blade operating mechanism Not applicable
1.13 Number of earthing blade operating mechanism 0
2. Disconnector - Characteristics
2.8 Rated short withstand current Ik kA rms 63
2.9 Rated duration of short-circuit on main blades s 3
2.10 Rated duration of short-circuit on earthing blades s Not applicable
2.11 Rated maximum withstand current Ip kA 125
Capacity of making and breaking transfer load of
2.12 A 1600
busbar system at 300 V (rms)
2.13 Nominal supply voltage
2.13.1 Controls and alarm (signalling) circuits V d.c. 110
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50
2.14 Opening time s Insert
2.15 Closing time s Insert
2.16 Mechanical endurance Class M2
2.17 Rated mechanical terminal loads of terminals
2.17.1 Direct loading, static Fa N > 2000
2.17.2 Transversal loading, static Fb N > 660
2.17.3 Vertical force Fc N > 1500
2.17.4 Direct loading, dynamic N > 4500

Volume 3 Page 43
Unit Data
2.17.5 Transversal loading, dynamic N Insert
3. Disconnector - Design and Construction

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.1 Insulator material Porcelain, brown
3.1.2 Minimum creepage distance mm/kV Min. 25 mm/kV
3.1.3 Quality of insulator Min. C130
3.1.4 Rated failing load of insulator (C10) N Min. 10000
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.1.7.1 Pole height mm Insert
3.1.7.4 Pole length mm Insert
3.1.7.5 Distance between support axis of a pole mm Insert
3.1.7.6 Shipping dimensions mm Insert
3.1.7.9 Total weight kg Insert
3.1.7.10 Shipping weight kg Insert
3.2.1 Number of operating mechanism pcs. 3
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.9 Motor - auxiliary supply voltage V, DC 110
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.12 Selection switch (local/neutral/remote) Yes
3.2.13 Manual closing button Yes
3.2.14 Manual opening button Yes
Anti-condensation heater inside the operating
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet
3.2.16 Single-phase socket Yes
3.2.17 Voltage presence controller Yes
3.2.18 Motor MCB (miniature circuit breakers) Yes
3.2.19 Heater MCB (miniature circuit breaker) Yes

Volume 3 Page 44
Unit Data
Single-phase socket MCB (miniature circuit
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)
3.2.21 Equipotential bonding rails Yes
3.2.22 Housing of Al or stainless steel Yes

Volume 3 Page 45
2.1.3 A2.2: Disconnector 420 kV, with Earthing Switch
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
Three column,
1.8 Design
Double break
1.12 Type of earthing blade operating mechanism Motor driven
Rated duration of short-circuit on earthing
2.10 s 3
blades
Capacity of making and breaking transfer load
2.12 A 1600
of busbar system at 300 V (rms)
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50

Volume 3 Page 46
Unit Data

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.2.1 Number of operating mechanism pcs. 3+3
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)

Volume 3 Page 47
Unit Data

Volume 3 Page 48
2.1.4 A2.3: Earthing Switch 420 kV
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102, 60273,
1.5 Standards
60694, 60815
1.6 Quality control ISO 9001, 14001, 18001
Single column,
1.8 Design
vertical
1.10 Type of main blade operating mechanism not applicable
1.11 Number of main blade operating mechanisms pcs. not applicable
2.7 Rated current Ir A Not applicable
2.9 Rated duration of short-circuit on main blades s Not applicable
2.10 Rated duration of short-circuit on earthing blades s 3
2.12 A Not applicable
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50

Volume 3 Page 49
Unit Data

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.1.7.4 Pole length mm Not applicable
3.1.7.8 Weight of operating mechanism Kg Insert
3.1.7.9 Total weight Kg Insert
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet

Volume 3 Page 50
Unit Data
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)

Volume 3 Page 51
2.1.5 A3: Current Transformers420 kV
Unit Data
1. Current Transformers - General

1.2 Type Insert
1.5 Standards IEC 60044-1
1.7 Type Outdoor
1.8 Shape / design Head type
1.9 Sealing Hermetically closed
2. Current Transformers - Characteristics

2.6 Rated short-time thermal current Ith, 1 s kA 63
2.7 Rated dynamic current Idyn kV peak 125
Rated continuous thermal current (40C):
I core % In 200
II core % In 120
2.8
III core % In 120
IV core % In 120
V core % In 120
Rated transformer ratio:
I core A/A 4000/1
II core A/A 4000/1
2.9 III core A/A 4000/1
IV core A/A 4000/1
V core A/A 4000/1
VI core A/A 4000/1
Accuracy class:
I core 0.2
II core 5P20
III core 5P20
2.10 IV core 5P20
V core 5P20
VI core 5P20
Calculation is required
during design
Security factor:
2.11
I core Fs=10
2.12 Rated power:
I core VA 15
II core VA 30
III core VA 30

Volume 3 Page 52
Unit Data
IV core VA 30
V core VA 30
VI core 30
during design
2.13 Rated mechanical terminal loads Class Min. Class II
3. Current Transformers - Design and Construction

3.1 Insulator material Porcelain, brown
3.2 Insulating medium Oil-paper
3.3 Minimum creepage distance mm/kV Min. 25 mm/kV
Max. radio interference voltage at 0.5-2 MHz
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. IEC 60694)
Permissible level of partial discharges:
3.5 Test voltage 1.2*UM/3 pC Max. 5
Test voltage UM pC 10
3.7 Min. LV enclosure protection IP54
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
3.8.2 Position Horizontal
3.8.3 Dimensions mm x mm Min 200 x 100
3.8.4 Number of holes Min 8
3.8.5 Dimensions of holes mm 14
3.8.6 Distance between holes mm 50
3.8.7 Material suitable for Al terminal
3.10 tg test terminal Yes
3.11 Oil drain cock and sampling device Yes
3.13 Secondary reconnection Yes
Outdoor metal part made of aluminium or stain-
3.14 Yes
less steel
3.15 Mass and dimensions
3.15.1 Total mass kg Insert
3.15.2 Height mm Insert

Volume 3 Page 53
2.1.6 A4: Voltage Transformers 420 kV
Unit Data
1. Voltage Transformers - General

1.2 Type Capacitive
IEC 60044-2
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
1.7 Type Outdoor
1.8 Shape Insert
2. Voltage Transformers - Characteristics

2.8 Rated primary voltage kV 200/3
Rated secondary voltage
I winding 1103
2.9 V
II winding 1103
V
III winding 1103
Accuracy class:
I winding 0.2
2.10
II winding 1/3P
III winding 1/3P
Rated power:
I winding 25
2.11 VA
II winding 75
VA
III winding 75
2.12 Load Simultaneously
2.13 Voltage factor p.u./s 1.5/30
2.14 Rated mechanical strength Class Min. Class II
Power frequency withstand tests on secondary
2.15 kV rms 3
windings, 1 min
3. Voltage Transformers - Design and Construction

Oil-paper - Mixed dielec-
3.2 Insulating medium
tric

Volume 3 Page 54
Unit Data
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. to IEC 60694)
3.5 Test voltage1.2*UM/3 pC Max. 5
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
3.8.2 Position Vertical or horizontal
Enable sealing after accuracy class checks (seal-
3.11 Yes
ing possibilities)
3.13 Yes
less steel

Volume 3 Page 55
2.1.7 A5: Surge Arresters420 kV
Unit Data
1. Surge Arresters - General

1.2 Type Insert
Metal oxide, gapless,
1.7 Design
outdoor
1.8 Short circuit testing authority Insert authority
2. Surge Arresters - Characteristics

336
2.4 Rated voltage of surge arrester Ur kV rms Calculation is required
during design
269
2.5 Max. continuous operating voltage Uc kV rms Calculation is required
during design
2.8 Rated frequency Hz 50
2.9 Nominal discharge current In (8/20 s) kA peak 10
2.10 High current impulse of an arrester (4/10 s) kA peak 100
3. Surge Arresters - Design and Construction

3
3.1 Line discharge class Class Calculation is required
during design
Energy dissipation capacity (per kV of rated
3.2 kJ/kV 6.5
voltage)
3.3 Long duration current impulse (2000 s) A 1200
3.4 Maximum residual voltage Ures
For switching impulse current 30/60 s at 0,5
3.4.1 kV peak 675
kA
3.4.2 For switching impulse current 30/60 s at 1 kA kV peak 700
3.4.4 For lightning impulse current 8/20 s at 5 kA kV peak 775
3.5. Dielectric endurance of arrester housing)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage of arrester
3.5.1 kV 1500
housing up (1.2/50 s)
Power frequency withstand voltage of arrester
3.5.2 kV 750
housing (1 min wet)
3.6. Mechanical requirements
3.6.1 Specified short-term load SSL (Fdyn) N 1000
3.6.2 Specified long-term load SSL (Fstat) N 750

Volume 3 Page 56
Unit Data
3.7 Minimum creepage distance mm/kV 25 mm/kV
3.8. Housing insulating material Composite/Silicon
3.9 Insulating basement Yes
3.10 Surge arrester height mm Insert
3.11 Surge arrester weight kg Insert
Voltage distribution ring present / ring diame- yes / no /
3.12 Insert
ter mm
3.14 HV terminal
3.14.1 Shape Flat
3.14.2 Dimension mm x mm Min 100 x 100
3.14.4 Distance between holes mm x mm 50 x 50

Volume 3 Page 57
2.1.8 A6: Post Insulator420 kV
Unit Data
1. Post Insulators - General
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 60168
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60672
IEC 60694
Solid core, porcelain,
1.7 Design
outdoor
2 Post Insulators - Characteristics
12500
Calculation is
2.7 Failing load bending (p0) (C10) N
required during
design
4000
2.8 Failing load torsion Nm Calculation is required
during design
3 Post Insulators - Design and Construction
3.1 Insulation material Porcelain, brown
3.2 Material quality acc. IEC 60672 Min. C130
-3
3.3 Min. material density a Mgm 2.5
3.4 Min. stretch strength of material fg MPa 140
3.5 Insulator height mm Insert
3.6 Max. diameter of insulating part mm Insert
3.7 Diameter of upper base mm Insert
3.8 Number of holes on upper base Insert
3.9 Diameter distance between holes on upper base mm Insert
3.10 Hole type on upper base Insert
3.11 Diameter on lower base mm Insert
3.12 Number of holes on lower base Insert
3.13 Diameter distance between holes on lower base mm Insert
3.14 Hole type on lower base Insert
3.15 Insulator weight kg Insert

Volume 3 Page 58
2.2 B: Switchgear 245 kV
2.2.1 B1: Circuit Breaker 245 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-100, 60273,
1.5 Standards
60694, 60815
1.7 Isolating and quenching medium SF6
1.9 Design Single breaking
1.12 pcs. 3
breaker
2. Circuit Breaker - Characteristics

2.4 Rated short duration power frequency voltage kV 460
2.8 kA 125
D.C. component of the rated short-circuit breaking
2.9 % > 30
current
2.10
Short-line fault p.u. 1.0
Out-of-phase p.u. 2.0
2.11 kV Insert
(T100)
2.16 Auto reclosing 1p + 3p
100)

Volume 3 Page 59
Unit Data
2.18 ms 20 5
62271-100)
Opening time (trip initiation to contact separation)
With 100 % rated breaking current ms Insert
2.20 ms Insert
rupters
2.21 ms 3
2.24 Class C2
switching
CO at no-load 10000
2.25
2.26 The frequency of mechanical operations Class M2
2.30.1 Static horizontal force, longitudinal FthA N 1750
2.30.2 Static horizontal force, transversal FthB N 1250
2.30.3 Static vertical force Ftv N 1500

3.1 Circuit Breaker
3.1.3.1 Shape Flat

Volume 3 Page 60
Unit Data
3.2.1 Type Insert
3.2.2 Motor - auxiliary supply voltage V. AC 230/415
3.2.9 Heater Yes
3.2.12 Minimum number of available contacts (NO/NC/V) 12NO+12NC+1V
3.2.19 A crank for manual spring loading Yes
3.4 Accessories in central control panel
3.4.3 Local operation push buttons Yes
3.4.4 Minimum pressure lock-out and alarm relays Yes
3.4.5 Service outlet (socket) - 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.4.6 Lighting switch Yes
3.4.7 Lighting - 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.4.8 Heater - 230 V, 50 HZ Yes
Motor MCB (miniature circuit breakers) (for all op-
3.4.10 Yes
erating mechanisms)
3.4.11 Time phase discrepancy relay Yes
Weatherproof, corrosion resistance enclosure, Al
3.4.12 IP54
or stainless steel
3.2.18 Yes
cabinet
Set of cables for connection of operating mecha-
3.4.13 Yes
nism and central control panel of circuit breaker
Galvanized horizontal and vertical metal structure
3.4.14 Yes
with minimum 70 m zinc layer

Volume 3 Page 61
2.2.2 B2.1: Disconnector 245 kV, Double Column, Centre Break, without
Earthing Switch
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102, 60273,
1.5 Standards
60694, 60815
Double column,
1.8 Design
Centre break
1.13 Number of earthing blade operating mechanism Not applicable
1.14 Installation In series In line
2.12 A 1600
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50

Volume 3 Page 62
Unit Data

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)

Volume 3 Page 63
Unit Data

Volume 3 Page 64
2.2.3 B2.2: Disconnector 245 kV, Three Column, Double Break, without Earth-
ing Switch
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
Three column
1.8 Design
Double Break
1.13 Number of earthing blade operating mechanism Not applicable
1.14 Installation Parallel
2.12 A 1600
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50

Volume 3 Page 65
Unit Data

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet

Volume 3 Page 66
Unit Data
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)

Volume 3 Page 67
2.2.4 B2.3: Disconnector 245 kV, Three Column, Double Break, with Earthing
Switch
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
Three column
1.8 Design
Double Break
1.14 Installation Parallel
2.10 Rated duration of short-circuit on earthing blades s 3
2.12 A 1600
2.13.2 Motors V d.c. 110
2.13.3 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50

Volume 3 Page 68
Unit Data

3.1 Disconnector
3.1.5 HV terminals
3.1.5.1 Shape Flat
3.2.1 Number of operating mechanism pcs. 1+1
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.5 12NO+12NC
(NO/NC/V)
3.2.10 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes
3.2.15 Yes
mechanism cabinet

Volume 3 Page 69
Unit Data
3.2.20 Yes
breaker)

Volume 3 Page 70
2.2.5 B3: Current Transformers 245 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
1.7 Type Outdoor
1.8 Shape / design Head type

I core % In 200
II core % In 200
2.8
III core % In 120
IV core % In 120
V core % In 120
I core A/A 800-1600/1
II core A/A 800-1600/1
2.9
III core A/A 800-1600/1
IV core A/A 800-1600/1
V core A/A 800-1600/1
Accuracy class:
I core 0.2
II core 0.2
2.10
III core 5P20
IV core 5P20
V core 5P20
Security factor:
2.11 I core Fs=10
II core Fs=10
2.12 Rated power:
I core VA 10
II core VA 15
III core VA 30
IV core VA 30
V core VA 30
2.13 Rated mechanical terminal loads Class Min. Class II

Volume 3 Page 71
Unit Data

3.2 Insulating medium Oil-paper
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. IEC 60694)
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
3.10 tg test terminal Yes
3.13 Secondary reconnection Yes
3.14 Yes
less steel

Volume 3 Page 72
2.2.6 B4: Voltage Transformers 245 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Capacitive
IEC 60044-2
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
1.7 Type Outdoor
1.8 Shape Insert

2.9 I winding V 1103
II winding V 1103
Accuracy class:
2.10 I winding 0.2
II winding 1/3P
Rated power:
2.11 I winding VA 25
II winding VA 75
2.14 Rated mechanical strength Class Min. Class II
2.15 kV rms 3
windings, 1 min

Oil-paper - Mixed dielec-
3.2 Insulating medium
tric
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. to IEC 60694)

Volume 3 Page 73
Unit Data
3.5 Test voltage1.2*UM/3 pC Max. 5
Test voltageUM pC 10
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
Enable sealing after accuracy class checks (seal-
3.11 Yes
ing possibilities)
3.13 Yes
less steel

Volume 3 Page 74
2.2.7 B5: Surge Arresters 245 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
1.7 Design
outdoor

2.4 Rated voltage of surge arrester Ur kV rms 192
2.5 Max. continuous operating voltage Uc kV rms 154

3.1 Line discharge class Class 3
3.2 kJ/kV 6.5
voltage)
For switching impulse current 30/60 s at 0,5
3.4.1 kV peak 375
kA
3.5.1 kV 925
3.5.2 kV 425
housing (1 min wet)

Volume 3 Page 75
Unit Data
3.12 Insert
ter mm
3.14 HV terminal
3.14.1 Shape Flat
3.14.4 Distance between holes mm x mm 50 x 50

Volume 3 Page 76
2.2.8 B6: Post Insulator245 kV
Unit Data
1. Post Insulators - General
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 60168
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60672
IEC 60694
Solid core, porcelain,
1.7 Design
outdoor
2 Post Insulators - Characteristics
2.7 Failing load bending (p0) (C10) N 10000
2.8 Failing load torsion Nm 4000
3 Post Insulators - Design and Construction
3.1 Insulation material Porcelain, brown
3.2 Material quality acc. IEC 60672 Min. C130
-3
3.3 Min. material density a Mgm 2.5
3.4 Min. stretch strength of material fg MPa 140
3.5 Insulator height mm Insert
3.6 Max. diameter of insulating part mm Insert
3.7 Diameter of upper base mm Insert
3.8 Number of holes on upper base Insert
3.9 Diameter distance between holes on upper base mm Insert
3.10 Hole type on upper base Insert
3.11 Diameter on lower base mm Insert
3.12 Number of holes on lower base Insert
3.13 Diameter distance between holes on lower base mm Insert
3.14 Hole type on lower base Insert
3.15 Insulator weight kg Insert

Volume 3 Page 77
2.3 C: Switchgear 36 kV
2.3.1 C1: Circuit Breaker 36 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-100
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
1.7 Isolating and quenching medium Vacuum
1.9 Design Single breaking
1.12 pcs. 1
breaker
2. Circuit Breaker - Characteristics

2.8 kA 63
D.C. component of the rated short-circuit break-
2.9 % > 30
ing current
2.10
Short-line fault p.u. N.A.
Out-of-phase p.u. N.A.
2.11 kV Insert
(T100)
2.16 Auto reclosing 3p

Volume 3 Page 78
Unit Data
100)
2.18 ms 20 5
62271-100)
Opening time (trip initiation to contact separa-
tion)
2.19 ms Insert
Without current
ms Insert
With 100 % rated breaking current
2.20 ms Insert
rupters
2.21 ms 3
2.24 Class C2
switching
CO at no-load 10000
2.25
2.26 The frequency of mechanical operations Class Min M1
2.30.1 Static horizontal force, longitudinal FthA N Insert
2.30.2 Static horizontal force, transversal FthB N Insert
2.30.3 Static vertical force Ftv N Insert

3.1 Circuit Breaker
3.1.3.1 Shape Flat

Volume 3 Page 79
Unit Data
3.2.1 Type Insert
3.2.2 Motor - auxiliary supply voltage V. DC 110
3.2.9 Heater Yes
3.2.12 6NO+6NC+1V
(NO/NC/V)
3.4 Local operation push buttons
3.4.4 Heater - 230 V, 50 HZ Yes
3.4.6 Yes
cabinet
Galvanized horizontal and vertical metal struc-
3.4.7 Yes
ture with minimum 70 m zinc layer

Volume 3 Page 80
2.3.2 C2: Disconnector 36 kV
Unit Data
1.2 Type Insert
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
ISO 9001
ISO 18001
Vertical break,
1.8 Design horizontal or
wall mounting
1.10 Type of operating mechanism Hand operated
1.11 Number of operating mechanisms pcs. 1
2.9 Rated duration of short-circuit s 3
2.13.2 Heaters V a.c. / Hz 230 / 50
2.16 Mechanical endurance Class Min M1
2.17.1 Direct loading, static Fa N Insert
2.17.2 Transversal loading, static Fb N Insert
2.17.3 Vertical force Fc N Insert
2.17.4 Direct loading, dynamic N Insert

3.1 Disconnector

Volume 3 Page 81
Unit Data
3.1.3 HV terminals
3.1.3.1 Shape Flat
3.2.2 Type Insert
3.2.3 Minimum number of available contacts (NO/NC) pcs. 6NO+6NC
3.2.4 Yes
mechanism cabinet
3.2.5 Heater, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes

Volume 3 Page 82
2.3.3 C3: Current Transformer 36 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
Outdoor, post type,
1.7 Type horizontal or vertical
mounting, dry type

I core % In 200
2.8
II core % In 120
III core % In 120
I core A/A 800/1
II core A/A 800/1
2.9
III core A/A 800/1
during design
Accuracy class:
I core 0.2
II core 5P20
2.10
III core 5P20
during design
Security factor:
2.11
I core Fs=10
Rated power:
I core 15
II core VA 30
2.12
III core VA 30
VA Calculation is required
during design
2.13 Rated mechanical terminal loads Class Min. Class I

3.1 Insulator material Porcelain or araldite

Volume 3 Page 83
Unit Data
3.2 Insulating medium Oil-paper or araldite
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. IEC 60694)
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
3.11 Total mass kg Insert
3.13 Height mm Insert

Volume 3 Page 84
2.3.4 C4: Voltage Transformer 36 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Inductive
IEC 60044-2
IEC 60273
1.5 Standards
IEC 60694
IEC 60815
Outdoor, post type
1.7 Type horizontal or vertical
mounting, dry type

2.9 I winding V 1103
II winding V 1103
Accuracy class:
2.10 I winding 0.2
II winding 1/3P
Rated power:
2.11 I winding VA 25
II winding VA 75
2.14 Rated mechanical strength Class Min. Class I
2.15 kV rms 3
windings, 1 min

3.1 Insulator material Porcelain or araldite
3.2 Insulating medium Oil-paper or araldite
3.4 V Max. 2500
(acc. IEC 60694)

Volume 3 Page 85
Unit Data
3.8 HV terminals
3.8.1 Shape Flat
3.11 Total mass kg Insert
3.13 Height mm Insert

Volume 3 Page 86
2.3.5 C5: Surge Arrester 36 kV
Unit Data

1.2 Type Insert
1.7 Design
outdoor

2.4 Rated voltage of surge arrester Ur kV rms 30
2.5 Max. continuous operating voltage Uc kV rms 24

3.1 Line discharge class Class 3
3.2 kJ/kV 6.5
voltage)
For switching impulse current 30/60 s at
3.4.1 kV peak 65
0,5 kA
3.4.2 For switching impulse current 30/60 s at 1 kA kV peak 67.5
3.5.1 kV 235
3.5.2 kV 105
housing (1 min wet)

Volume 3 Page 87
Unit Data
3.12 Insert
ter mm
3.14 HV terminal
3.14.1 Shape Flat
3.14.4 Distance between holes Mm 50

Volume 3 Page 88
2.4 D: Transformers
2.4.1 D1: 400/233/33 kV 400/520 MVA ONAN/OFAF Autotransformer
Unit Data
1 General
Autotransformer three-
phase, oil immersed,
with tertiary winding,
1.2 Type
hermetically sealed, with
on-load tap changer,
outdoor
IEC 60044
IEC 60076
IEC 60137
IEC 60214
IEC 60354
1.5 Standards
IEC 60529
IEC 60815
IEC 60947
NEMA TR-1
CENELEC EN 50216
Stabilizing winding &
1.7 Tertiary winding function
auxiliary power supply
1.8 Thermal insulation class A
2 Ratings and properties

Rated power:
2.1 Primary / secondary winding MVA 520 / 520
Tertiary - minimum MVA 104
Rated power by cooling ONAN / ONAF
2.2 Primary / secondary winding MVA 420 / 520
Tertiary minimum MVA 80 / 104
Rated voltage of windings:
HV winding kV 400
2.3
MV winding kV 235
LV - stabilizing winding kV 33
2.4 Tap changer:
Manufacturer Insert
Country of origin Insert
Model designation insert
Type of tap changing On-load
Tap changer location At High voltage side
Type of voltage regulation % C.F.V.V.
Tapping range % 10

Volume 3 Page 89
Unit Data
Tapping step 1.25
Rated power 520 MVA,
Rating
all taps
2.5 Frequency Hz 50
Connection of three-phase windings (group of
2.6 YNa0d1
vector IEC 60076)
2.7 Neutral point insulation Si245
Open delta, with four
2.8 Low voltage winding connection (LV) terminals brought out
outside of the tank
3 Special technical requirements

Short circuit impedance corrected to reference
3.1 temperature of 75C at rated frequency and rat-
ed power
HV - MV, on the basis of rated power with on-
3.1.1 % 13 10 %
load tap changer in middle position
HV - LV, on the basis of rated power with on-
3.1.2 % Insert
load tap changer in middle position
MV - LV, on the basis of rated power 'x' MWA
3.1.3 % Insert
with on-load tap changer in middle position
Zero-sequence impedance, with tap changer in
middle position:
% Insert
3.2 HV/MV
% Insert
HV/LV
% Insert
MV/LV
Autotransformer capacity to withstand external
3.3
short circuits
3.3.1 Short-circuit duration s 2
Symmetrical short-circuit with-stand capacity
and asymmetrical short-circuit withstand capaci-
ty during indicated period:
3.3.2 HV winding kA 50
MV winding kA 50
LV winding kA 25
Pre-fault voltage p.u. 1.05
3.4 Guaranteed losses
th
No-load losses with tap changer in 9 regulation
position:
3.4.1 at rated voltage and rated frequency (this kW Insert
value will be evaluated)
at 110 % rated voltage, at rated frequency kW Insert
No-load losses with tap changer in 17th regula-
tion position:
at 110 % rated voltage, at rated frequency kW Insert
3.4.2 No-load losses capitalized value BDT/kW 600,000
Tolerance to be applied to no-load losses in %
3.4.3 % 10
of the guaranteed value

Volume 3 Page 90
Unit Data
On-load losses at 75C, at rated voltage and
3.4.4 rated frequency, with tap changer in normal po- kW Insert
sition (this value will be evaluated)
3.4.5 On-load losses capitalized value BDT/kW 300,000
Tolerance to be applied to on-load losses in %
3.4.6 % 10
on the guaranteed value
3.5 Ancillary equipment (fans, pumps, heaters, etc.)
Load of ancillary equipment (this value will be
3.5.1 kW Insert
evaluated)
3.5.2 Capitalized valued of ancillary equipment load BDT/kW 300,000
Tolerance to be applied to ancillary equipment
3.5.3 % 20
load in % of the guaranteed value
3.6 Insulation level
3.6.1 High voltage (HV) LI 1425SI1050
3.6.2 Medium voltage (MV) LI 1050 AC 460
3.6.3 Neutral LI 1050 AC 460
3.6.4 Low voltage (LV) LI 170 AC 70
The highest voltage for equipment (effective val-
3.7
ue)
3.7.1 High voltage (HV) kV 420
3.7.2 Medium voltage (MV) kV 245
3.7.3 Neutral kV 245
3.7.4 Low voltage (LV) kV 36
3.8 Rated insulation level
3.8.1 Induced voltage (ACSD, ACLD) kV In acc. to IEC 60076-3
3.9 Efficiencies
If cos = 1.0 and:
25 % load of the rated value Insert
3.9.1 50 % load of the rated value Insert
If cos = 0.8 (inductive) and:
3.9.2 50 % load of the rated value Insert
Voltage drop at the terminals of secondary wind-
3.10 ing at rated temperature and at the middle tap
changer position
3.10.1 cos = 1.00 Insert
3.10.2 cos = 0.95 (inductive) Insert
3.11 No-load current at rated frequency
3.11.1 At 0.90 Un Insert

Volume 3 Page 91
Unit Data
Temperature rise limits, at rated power, with com-
3.12 plete cooling system in service and at lowest volt-
age tap
3.12.1 Top oil K 50
3.12.2 Winding K 55
3.12.3 Hottest spot K 65
At the emergency cases it is allowed:
Continuous overload at the highest winding
temperature which exceeds by 2.5C the
MVA
guaranteed limit value Compliant to
3.13 %
Continuous voltage increase when the top oil IEC 60076-7
temperature exceeds the guaranteed limit by
2.5C at rated power (in % of the rated volt-
age)
Guaranteed value of overloads in % of the rated
3.14
power
Normal overloads prediction which can occur
3.14.1 once a day (in % of the rated power) within the
winding temperature rise limit of 75C
After operation under 15 min
full rated power Insert
3.14.1.1
rated power Insert
rated power Insert
3.14.1.2
rated power Insert
rated power Insert
3.14.1.3
rated power Insert
rated power Insert
Sudden transient overloads (in % of the rated
3.14.2 power) with the winding temperature rise limit of
85C
3.14.2.1
rated power Insert
rated power Insert
3.14.2.2
rated power Insert
rated power Insert
3.14.2.3
rated power Insert
rated power Insert

Volume 3 Page 92
Unit Data
Guaranteed values of loads at ambient tempera-
ture of 40C, without danger of exceeding the oil
and winding temperature limits:
3.15 with all cooling groups in operation (exclud- Insert
ing stand-by cooling group)
with one cooling group out of operation Insert
with two cooling groups out of operation Insert
4 Oil
4.1 New Insert
4.3 Type Insert
4.4 Standard IEC 60296
4.5 Minimum flash point C Insert
2
4.6 Viscosity at 20C mm /s Insert
4.7 Maximum dielectric strength kV/cm Insert
4.8 Data sheet attached Insert
4.9 Corrosive Sulphur No
4.10 PCB content Without PCB
5 Bushing
5.1 HV bushing
5.1.1 Quantity 3
5.1.2 Class kV 420
5.1.3 Manufacturer Insert
5.1.4 Type Insert
5.1.5 Rated current A 1000
5.1.6 Rated short circuit current (2 s) kA rms 50
5.1.7 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 1425
5.1.8 Rated switching impulse withstand voltage kV peak 1050
5.1.9 Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV rms Not applicable
5.1.10 Connectors
5.1.10.1 Shape mm 50
5.1.10.2 Length mm 125
5.1.10.3 Suitable for Al wire
5.1.11 Minimum creepage distance (25 mm/kV) mm/kV 25 mm/kV
5.1.12 Full vacuum withstand of complete bushing YES
5.2 Neutral bushing (identical as LV bushing)
5.2.1 Quantity 1
5.2.2 Class kV 36
5.2.4 Type Insert
5.2.6 Rated short-circuit current (2 s) kA rms 25
5.2.8 Rated switching impulse withstand voltage kV peak -
5.2.9 Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV rms 70
5.2.10 Connectors
5.2.10.1 Shape mm Flat

Volume 3 Page 93
Unit Data
5.2.10.2 Length mm -
5.2.10.3 Suitable for Cu wire
5.3 MV bushings
5.3.1 Quantity 3
5.3.2 Class kV 245
5.3.4 Type Insert
5.3.10 Connectors
5.3.10.1 Shape mm 50
5.3.10.2 Length mm 125
5.3.10.3 Suitable for Al wire
5.4 LV bushings
5.4.1 Quantity 4
5.4.2 Class kV 36
5.4.4 Type Insert
5.4.10 Connectors
5.4.10.1 Shape mm Flat
5.4.10.2 Length mm -
5.4.10.3 Adjusted for Cu wire Cu wire
6 Design Data
Maximum flux density in the legs
6.1 At rated voltage T Insert
At 105 % of the rated voltage T Insert
Maximum flux density in the yokes:
6.2 At rated voltage T Insert
At 105 % of the rated voltage T Insert

Volume 3 Page 94
Unit Data
Maximum current density in windings at rated
power and normal tap changer position:
A/mm2
6.3 HV winding 2 Insert
A/mm
MV winding Insert
A/mm2
LV - stabilizing winding Insert
Winding resistance at 75C and middle tap
changer position:

6.4 HV winding Insert

MV winding Insert

LV - stabilizing winding Insert
6.5 Core construction
6.5.1 Method of joining of legs Insert
6.5.2 Method of joining of yokes Insert
6.5.3 Joining material Insert
6.5.4 Number of legs Insert
6.5.5 Type of core steel Insert
6.5.6 Specific loss of core steel at 1.7 T inductance W/kg < 1.11
6.6 Winding conductor
6.6.1 HV winding Cu - 'Interleaved'
Cu - Interleaved / disc -
6.6.2 MV winding transposed, cured in
epoxy coating
Cu - transposed, cured
6.6.3 LV - stabilizing winding
in epoxy coating
Audible noise level (acc. to NEMA TR1), at
6.7 105 % of rated voltage, at maximum power and dB Insert
with complete cooling system in service
Radio Interference Voltage at 0.5 MHz as speci-
6.8 V 2500 max
fied in IEC 60694
7 Weights and dimensions

Total weight of autotransformer, equipped for
7.1 kg Insert*
service
7.2 Core and oil assembly kg Insert*
7.3 Total mass excluding oil kg Insert*
7.4 Tank and accessories kg Insert*
7.5 Oil mass in tank kg Insert*
7.6 Oil mass in coolers kg Insert*
7.7 Oil mass total kg Insert*
7.8 Total mass kg Insert*
7.9 Maximum shipping weight (the heaviest item) kg Insert*
Height from foundation to:
Highest point of HV bushing mm Insert*
Highest point of tank mm Insert*
7.10
Highest point of conservator mm Insert*
Highest point of lifting hook for removal of mm Insert*
core and oil assembly

Volume 3 Page 95
Unit Data
Outer dimensions:
7.11 Length mm Insert*
Width mm Insert*
7.12 Informative dimensional sketch To be enclosed with bid
Maximum shipping dimensions of tank:
Outside height mm Insert
7.13
Outside width mm Insert
Outside length mm Insert
7.14 Transportation drawing To be enclosed with bid
8 Tap changer
8.2 Type Insert
8.3 Insulation level kV Si 245
8.4 Rated current A 1600
8.5 Number of steps 17
8.6 Regulating coil At neutral point
8.7 Short-circuit withstand kA rms Insert
8.8 BIL to ground through the regulating coil kV peak Insert
Power frequency withstand voltage for 1 minute
8.9 kV rms Insert
through the regulating coil
Digital code matrix
8.10 Tap position indicator
(BCD)
8.11 Auxiliary supply 3x400 V / 230 V, 50 Hz
9 Auxiliary power supply

9.1 Motors 3x400 V / 50 Hz
9.2 Heaters 230 V / 50 Hz
9.3 Control voltage 110 V DC
9.4 Oil pump 3x400 V / 50 Hz
10 Current transformer incorporated into the power autotransformer

In all phases, 3 cores
CT in HV bushings, for protection, WTI and/or
10.1 characteristics shall be
Tap Changer
defined in design stage
CT in MV bushings, for protection, WTI and/or
10.2 characteristics shall be
Tap Changer
In all phases, 3cores
10.3 CT in neutral bushing , for protection characteristics shall be
10.4 CT in LV bushings, for protection characteristics shall be
11 Layout
11.1 Primary winding bushings Longitudinal axis
Longitudinal axis (oppo-
11.2 Secondary winding bushings
site to HV)

Volume 3 Page 96
Unit Data
To be defined in design
11.3 Conservator tank
stage
11.4 Tap changer
stage
11.5 Control cabinet
stage
11.6 Coolers
stage
11.7 Connection drawing, block diagram To be enclosed with bid
12 Cooling groups
12.1 Number of cooling groups (total) Qty. 4
12.2 Number of cooling groups (for rated power) Qty. 3
12.3 Number of stand-by cooling groups Qty. 1
12.4 Number of coolers in a cooling group Qty. Insert
12.5 Number of spare fans Qty. Insert
12.6 Rating of each cooler kW Insert
12.7 Full vacuum withstand of complete cooler mbar Yes
13 Dehydrating breather
13.1 Type of dehydrating breather Insert
13.2 Dehumidifying agent kg Insert
14 Autotransformer tank
14.1 Type of design
Thickness of transformer tank:
Sides mm Insert
14.2
Bottom mm Insert
Top mm Insert
14.3 Material of the autotransformer tank Insert
14.4 Wheels
14.4.1 Wheel number for each rail of two pair rails Two pairs
Axial inter space in transversal direction be-
14.4.2 mm 4520
tween two pairs of rails
14.4.3 Transversal distance between wheels in pair mm 1435
Distance between wheels in longitudinal direc-
14.4.4 mm 1435
tion
14.5 Corrosion protection of the tank YES
Vacuum withstand of the complete tank with
14.6 mbar 1
cooler
Over-pressure withstand of the complete auto-
14.7 bar 0.3
transformer
15 Conservator
15.1 Type With diaphragm
15.2 Number of compartments pcs. 2
15.3 Total volume of conservator m3 Insert
Minimum volume of conservator between high-
15.4 est and lowest levels as percentage of total cold % Insert
oil at 0C of the volume of autotransformer

Volume 3 Page 97
Unit Data
Pressure rise inside the tank due to oil expan-
15.5 Insert
sion
Diagraph design parameters:
Maximum diagraph stress at highest working Insert
15.6 pressure
Diagraph construction details Insert
Type of diagraph material Insert
15.7 Corrosion protection of conservator Insert
Oil level indicators with alarm for minimum oil
15.8 pcs. 2
level
16 Operating conditions
16.1 At the altitude (above sea level) m 1000
16.2 Maximum ambient temperature C + 45
16.3 Average daily temperature C + 35
16.4 Average annual temperature C + 30
16.5 Minimum ambient temperature C 5
16.6 Tertiary winding Will be used
16.7 Parallel operation Yes
Note:*These values (design data) are preliminary & tentative. These will be finalized during execution stage at
the time of approval. Actual values of weights of transformer & its oil will be shown in the nameplate.

Volume 3 Page 98
2.5 F: Auxiliary Transformers
2.5.1 F1: 33/0.415 kV 200 kVA Auxiliary Transformer
Unit Data
1 General
Power transformer
three-phase, oil im-
mersed, two windings,
1.2 Type
without tertiary winding,
with off-load tap chang-
er, outdoor
1.5 Standards IEC 60076
2 Ratings and properties
2.1 Rated power: kVA 200
2.2 Type of cooling ONAN / ONAF - ONAN
Rated voltage of windings:
2.3 MV winding kV 34.5
LV winding V 415
Tap changer:
Type of tap changing Off-load
Tapping range 5
2.4 %
Tapping step 2.5
%
Rating Rated power 200 kVA,
all taps
2.5 Frequency Hz 50
Connection of three-phase windings (group of
2.6 ZNyn11
vector IEC 60076)
3 Special technical requirements
Power transformer capacity to withstand exter-
3.1
nal short circuits
3.1.1 Short-circuit duration s 3
Symmetrical short-circuit with-stand capacity
and asymmetrical short-circuit withstand ca-
3.1.2 pacity during indicated period:
MV winding kA 25
LV winding kA -
3.2 Guaranteed losses
No-load losses with tap changer in normal posi-
3.2.1 kW Insert
tion, at rated voltage and rated frequency
Tolerance to be applied to no-load losses in %
3.2.2 % 10
of the guaranteed value

Volume 3 Page 99
Unit Data
On-load losses at 75C, at rated voltage and
3.2.3 rated frequency, with tap changer in normal po- kW Insert
sition
Tolerance to be applied to on-load losses in %
3.2.4 % 10
on the guaranteed value
3.3 Insulation level
3.3.1 Medium voltage (MV) LI 170 AC 70
3.3.2 Low voltage (LV) LI - AC 3
The highest voltage for equipment (effective
3.4
value)
3.4.1 Medium voltage (MV) kV 36
3.4.2 Low voltage (LV) kV 1.1
Temperature rise limits, at rated power, with
3.5 complete cooling system in service and at low-
est voltage tap
3.5.1 Top oil K 50
3.5.2 Winding K 55
3.5.3 Hottest spot K 65
4 Oil
4.1 New Insert
4.3 Type Insert
4.4 Standard IEC 60296
4.5 Minimum flash point C Insert
2
4.6 Viscosity at 20C mm /s Insert
4.7 Maximum dielectric strength kV/cm Insert
4.8 Data sheet attached Insert
4.9 Corrosive Sulphur NO
4.10 PCB content Without PCB
5 Bushing
5.1 MV bushing (36 kV)
5.1.1 Quantity 3+1
5.1.2 Class kV 36
5.1.4 Type Insert
5.1.6 Rated short circuit current (3 s) kA rms 25
5.1.8 Rated switching impulse withstand voltage kV peak N.A.
5.2 LV bushings (3 kV)
5.2.1 Quantity 3+1
5.2.2 Class kV 3
5.2.4 Type Insert
5.2.6 Rated short-circuit current (3 s) kA rms -

Volume 3 Page 100
Unit Data
5.2.7 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak N.A.
6 Design data
6.1 Maximum flux density, at rated voltage TT Insert
Maximum current density in windings at rated
power and normal tap changer position: 2
6.2 A/mm <4
MV winding 2
A/mm <4
LV winding
Winding resistance at 75C and middle tap
changer position:
6.4 Insert
MV winding
Insert
LV winding
7 Weights and dimensions
Total weight of transformer, equipped for ser-
7.1 kg Insert
vice
Height from foundation to highest point of HV
7.10 mm Insert
bushing
Outer dimensions:
7.11 Length mm Insert
Width mm Insert
7.12 Informative dimensional sketch To be enclosed with bid
Maximum shipping dimensions of tank:
Outside height mm Insert
7.13
Outside width mm Insert
Outside length mm Insert
7.14 Transportation drawing To be enclosed with bid
8 Dehydrating breather
8.1 Type of dehydrating breather Insert
8.2 Dehumidifying agent kg Insert
9 Conservator
With dehydrating
9.1 Type
breather
9.2 Number of compartments pcs. 1
3
9.3 Total volume of conservator m Insert
Oil level indicators with alarm for minimum oil
9.8 pcs. 1
level
10 Current transformer incorporated into the auxiliary power transformer

In all bushings, 2 cores
10.1 CT in all MV bushings, for protection characteristics shall be
In all bushings, 2 cores
10.2 CT in all LV bushings, for protection characteristics shall be
10 Operating conditions
10.1 At the altitude (above sea level) m 1000
10.2 Maximum ambient temperature C + 45

Volume 3 Page 101
Unit Data
10.3 Average daily temperature C + 35
10.4 Average annual temperature C + 30
10.5 Minimum ambient temperature C 5

Volume 3 Page 102
2.6 G-P: Control, Relay Protection, Substation Automation Sys-

tem & Metering
All auxiliary equipment such as MCBs, heaters, lighting, AC sockets, terminals, auxiliary relays, wiring
and necessary electrical/optical converters for communication, etc. shall be foreseen
Enough auxiliary relays/contactors for OHL/transformer/busbar protection shall be foreseen and deliv-
ered as built-in elements in the cubicles.
The central unit for busbar protection must be supported for min. 16 bays.
The design proposal of the cubicles is subject of approval.
The cubicles shall be delivered completely wired and tested.
2.6.1 14291 - Control Cubicle for OHL
Unit Data
14291 Control Cubicle for OHL / Code number: 14291
1.1 Control cubicle for OHL
1.1.1 Bay control unit for OHL (Code: 14251) pcs. 1
1.1.2 Back-up control panel (Code: 14254) pcs. 1
1.1.3 Front panel annunciation for OHL & TR (Code: 14255) pcs. 1
1.1.4 Ethernet switch-process LAN (Code: 14273) pcs. 1
1.2 Other equipment (specify if any) Insert
2.6.2 14292 - Control Cubicle for Power Transformers HV Side
Unit Data
14292 Control Cubicle for Power Transformers HV Side / Code number: 14292
1.1 Control cubicle for power transformers HV side
Bay control unit for power transformers HV&LV
1.1.1 pcs. 1
(Code: 14252)
1.1.4 Ethernet switchprocess LAN (Code: 14273) pcs. 1

Volume 3 Page 103
2.6.3 14293 - Control Cubicle for Power Transformers LV Side
Unit Data
14293 Control Cubicle for Power Transformers LV Side / Code number: 14293)
1.1 Control cubicle for power transformers LV side
Bay control unit for power transformers HV&LV
1.1.1 pcs. 1
(Code: 14252)
1.1.5 AVR (Code: 14006) pcs. 1
2.6.4 14294 - Control Cubicle for LV AC & DC
Unit Data
14294 Control Cubicle for LV AC & DC/ Code number: 14294
1.1 Control cubicle for LV AC&DC
1.1.1 Bay control unit for LV AC&DC (Code: 14253) pcs. 4
Front panel annunciation for control room
1.1.2 pcs. 1
(Code: 14256)
1.1.3 Weather station interface unit item (Code: 14271) pcs. 1
1.1.4 Horn on/off switch Yes

Volume 3 Page 104
2.6.5 14295 - Control Cubicle for SCADA Server& SCADA System
Unit Data
14295 Control Cubicle for SCADA Server / Code number: 14295
1.1 Cubicle for SCADA servers
1.1.1 SCADA server (Code: 14261) pcs. 2
1.1.2 Time synchronisation device (GPS) (Code: 14272) pcs. 2
1.1.4 Ethernet switch-control room LAN (Code: 14274) pcs. 2
1.2. SCADA System
1.2.1. Operator Workstation (Code:: 14262) set 2
1.2.2. Printer (Code: 14263) set 1
1.2.3. Monitoring Workstation (Code: 14264) set 1
1.2.4. Protection Monitoring Software (Code:14281) set 1
1.2.5. SCADA Software (Code: 14282) set 1
1.3. Other equipment
1.3.1. Fiberoptic cables and terminal equipment (Code: 14298) set 1
1.3.2. Special Control equipment and tools (Code: 14299) set 1
2.6.6 14101 - Protection Cubicle No. 1 for OHL
Unit Data
14101 Protection Cubicle No. 1 for OHL / Code number: 14101
1.1 Protection cubicle No. 1 for OHL
1.1.1 Protection terminal for OHL - Main 1 (Code: 14001) pcs. 1
1.1.2 Trip circuit supervision relay (Code: 14011) pcs. 6
6
1.1.3 Tripping unit (Code: 14012) pcs. (To be confirmed with
detailed design)
1.1.4 Test socket (Code: 14013) pcs. 2

Volume 3 Page 105
2.6.7 14102 - Protection Cubicle No. 2 for OHL
Unit Data
14102 Protection Cubicle No. 2 for OHL / Code number: 14102
1.1 Protection cubicle No. 2 for OHL
1.1.1 Protection terminal for OHL - Main 2 (Code: 14002) pcs. 1
1.1.2 Busbar & breaker failure protection bay unit (Code: 14010) pcs. 1
6
(To be confirmed
1.1.4 Tripping unit (Code: 14012) pcs.
with detailed de-
sign)
2.6.8 14103 - Protection Cubicle No. 3 for Power Transformer HV Side
Unit Data
14104 Protection Cubicle No. 3 for Power Transformer HV Side / Code number: 14104)
1.1 Protection cubicle No. 3 for Power Transformer HV Side
Protection terminal for power transformer Main 1 (Code:
1.1.1 pcs. 1
14003)
6
(To be confirmed
with detailed de-
sign)

Volume 3 Page 106
2.6.9 14104 - Protection Cubicle No. 4 for Power Transformer LV Side
Unit Data
14105 Protection Cubicle No. 4 for Power Transformer LV Side / Code number: 14105
1.1 Protection cubicle No. 4 for Power Transformer LV Side
Protection terminal for power transformer Main 2 (Code:
1.1.1 pcs. 1
14004)
Protection terminal for power transformer LV Side (Code:
1.1.2 pcs. 1
14005)
3
1.1.5 Tripping unit (Code: 14012) pcs. (To be confirmed
with detailed design)
2.6.10 14105 - Protection Cubicle No. 5 for Busbars
Unit Data
14106 Protection Cubicle No. 5 for Busbars / Code number: 14106
1.1 Protection cubicle No. 5 for busbars
1.1.1 Protection terminal for busbars (Code: 14007) pcs. 1
Busbar & breaker failure protection central unit
1.1.2 pcs. 2
(Code: 14010)
4
(To be confirmed
with detailed de-
sign)

Volume 3 Page 107
2.6.11 14250 - Control and Monitoring Equipment - General
Minimum Requirements Data offered

No. Description Unit Data by Bidder
1 General
2 Manufacturer
3 Country of origin
4 Standards for Environment
5 Environmental testing: Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2
6 Environmental testing: Humidity IEC 60068-2-3
7 Operating conditions: climatic conditions IEC 60654
8 Telecontrol equipment and system: environment IEC 60870-2-2
conditions
9 Standards for EMC
10 Electromagnetic compatibility - electrostatic dis- IEC 61000-4-2
charges
11 Electromagnetic compatibility - electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-4
field
12 Electromagnetic compatibility - impulse voltage IEC 61000-4-5
immunity requirements (lightning)
13 Electromagnetic compatibility - continuous wave IEC 61000-4-6
(CW) current injection
14 Electromagnetic compatibility for electrical and IEC60801
electronic equipment
15 Telecontrol equipment and system: power supply IEC 60870-2-1
and electromagnetic compatibility
16 Standards for Interfaces
17 Communication networks and systems in substa- IEC 61850 Edition 2
tions
18 Telecontrol equipment and system: transmission IEC 60870-5-101
protocol IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-102
IEC 60870-5-103
19 International standards organisation
20 Quality system model for quality assurance in de- ISO 9001
sign/development manufacture and testing
21 Quality system model for quality assurance in ISO 9002
production, installation and servicing

Volume 3 Page 108
2.6.12 14251 - Bay Control Unit for OHL
Unit Data
14251 Bay Control Unit for OHL / Code number: 14251
1.3 Terminal type Insert
1.4 Terminal version (software version) Insert
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.1 Auxiliary supply voltage
2.1.1 Rated auxiliary supply voltage V d.c. 110 15 %
Interruption in auxiliary d.c. voltage:
2.1.2 Without resetting ms > 50
Restart time s Insert
2.2 a.c. current inputs
2.2.1 Number of inputs Min. 4
2.2.2 Rated current Ir A 1
2.2.3 Permissive overload, continuous 4xIr
2.2.4 Permissive overload, 1 s 100xIr
2.2.5 Burden at Ir VA < 0.5
2.3 a.c. voltage inputs
2.3.2 Rated voltage Ph-Ph Ur V 100
2.3.3 Permissive overload, continuous % Ur 150
2.3.4 Permissive overload, 1 s % Ur 250
2.3.5 Burden at Ur VA < 0.3
2.4 Binary inputs Min. 45
2.4.1 Number of BI groups with common root Max. 4
Number of inputs per BI group with common
2.4.2 Max. 8
root
2.4.3 Rated voltage V d.c. 110
2.5 Binary outputs Min. 24
2.5.1 Number of BO with common contact Max. 4
Breaking capacity at inductive load with
2.5.3 A 0.1
L/R<40 ms, at rated voltage
Current carrying capacity at rated voltage for
2.5.4 A Insert
signalling contacts, continuous
Number of tripping contacts (high-speed out-
2.5.5 pcs. Insert
put)
2.5.6 A 5
tripping contacts, continuous
2.6 LED indications
2.6.1 Number of LED's Min. 16
2.6.2 Multi-colour LED's Yes/No Insert
2.7 Communication ports Yes
2.7.1 Port for front-connected PC
2.7.1.1 Protocols supported Insert

Volume 3 Page 109
Unit Data
2.7.1.2 Communication speed Kbit/s Insert
2.7.1.3 PC side connector type Insert
2.7.2 System interface
2.7.2.1 Number of rear ports 2
2.7.2.2 Protocols supported IEC 61850
2.7.2.3 Communication speed Mbit/s Min. 100
2.7.2.4 Connector type RJ45 or FO
2.7.3 Time synchronisation SNTP
2.8 Human-machine interface
HMI with single line diagram, measurement,
2.8.1 Yes
signalling and control
2.9 Synchronism & energising check
2.9.1 Frequency difference range mHz. Insert
2.9.2 Voltage difference range % Ur Insert
2.9.3 Phase difference range Insert
2.9.4 Operating time for synchro check function ms Insert
2.9.5 Operating time for energising check function ms Insert
2.10 Event recorder
2.10.1 Max. number of events Insert
2.10.2 Time tagging resolution ms 1
2.11 Self-supervision Yes
2.12 Measurement
2.12.1 Active power measurement Yes
2.12.2 Reactive power measurement Yes
2.12.3 Energy measurement Yes
2.12.4 Voltage measurement Yes
2.12.5 Frequency measurement Yes
2.12.6 Current measurement Yes
Bay control units must be from the same manufacturer as substation protection system. They must be
parameterized, configured and delivered as per Engineer's requirements.

Volume 3 Page 110
2.6.13 14252 - Bay Control Unit for Power Transformers HV & LV
Unit Data
14252 Bay Control Unit for Power Transformers HV&LV / Code number: 14252
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.4 mA inputs
2.4.1 Number of mA inputs pcs. Min. 4
2.4.2 Input range 4-20 mA
2.5.2 Number of inputs per BI group with common root Max. 8
2.6.3 A 0.1
2.6.4 A Insert
2.6.5 Number of tripping contacts (high-speed output) pcs. Insert
2.6.6 A 5
2.7 LED indications
2.7.1 Number of LED's Min. 16

Volume 3 Page 111
Unit Data
HMI with single line diagram, measurement, sig-
2.9.1 Yes
nalling and control
2.11 Event recorder
2.13 Measurement
2.13.3 Energy measurement Yes
Bay Control Units for Transformer HV & LV side must be from the same manufacturer as substation protection
system. Bay Control Units for Transformer HV & LV side must be parameterized, configured and delivered as per
Engineer's requirements.

Volume 3 Page 112
2.6.14 14253 - Bay Control Unit for LV AC & DC
Unit Data
14253 Bay Control Unit for LV AC&DC / Code number: 14253

1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2.5 Burden at Ir VA
2.3.5 Burden at Ur VA
2.4 mA inputs
2.4.1 Number of mA inputs pcs. Min. 4
2.4.2 Input range 4-20 mA
2.5.2 Max. 8
root
2.6.3 A 0.1
2.6.4 A Insert
2.6.5 pcs. Insert
put)
2.6.6 A 5
2.7 LED indications
2.7.1 Number of LED's Min 16

Volume 3 Page 113
Unit Data
HMI with single line diagram, measurement,
2.9.1 Yes
signalling and control
2.10 Event recorder
2.12 Measurement
Bay Control Units must be from the same manufacturer as substation protection system. Bay Control
Units must be parameterized, configured and delivered as per Engineer's requirements.

Volume 3 Page 114
2.6.15 14254- Back-Up Control Panel
Unit Data
14254 Back-up Control Panel / Code number: 14254
1.1 Scheme elements
1.1.1 Switch selector for HV apparatus pcs. 1
1.1.2 Close/open push buttons for HV apparatus Yes
1.1.3 Ammeter pcs. Min. 1
1.1.4 Voltmeter pcs. 1
1.1.5 Voltmeter selector switch pcs. 1
1.1.6 Local/Remote switch Yes
1.1.7 Push button for lamp tests Yes
1.1.8 Switchgear status indicator Yes
1.1.9 Horn on/off switch Yes
Back-up control panel must have single-line bay diagram with indicators for switchgear status and
push buttons for switchgear control for every HV apparatus in the bay.
Design proposal of the back-up control panel is subject to Engineer's approval
Back-up control panels should be delivered completely wired and tested.
2.6.16 14255- Front Panel Annunciation for OHL & Power Transformers
Unit Data
14255 Front Panel annunciation for OHL & TR / Code number: 14255
1.1 Panel mounting Yes
1.2 Number of inputs Min. 16
1.3 Contact type NO/NC
1.4 Galvanic isolation Yes
Self-monitoring
1.5 via front indication Yes
via relay contact
1.6 Response delay time Adjustable
1.7 Bright LED technology Yes
1.8 Audible device output Yes
1.9 Lamp test button Yes
1.10 Acknowledgement button Yes
1.11 Horn acknowledgement button Yes
Front panel annunciation must be parameterised, configured and delivered as per Engineer's require-
ments.

Volume 3 Page 115
2.6.17 14256- Front Panel Annunciation for Control Room
Unit Data
14256 Front Panel annunciation for Control Room / Code number: 14256
1.1 Panel mounting Yes
1.2 Number of inputs Min. 48
1.3 Contact type NO/NC
1.4 Galvanic isolation Yes
Self-monitoring
1.5 via front indication Yes
via relay contact
1.6 Response delay time Adjustable
1.7 Bright LED technology Yes
1.8 Audible device output Yes
1.9 Lamp test button Yes
1.10 Acknowledgement button Yes
1.11 Horn acknowledgement button Yes
Front panel annunciation must be parameterised, configured and delivered as per Engineer's require-
ments.

Volume 3 Page 116
2.6.18 14261- SCADA Server
Unit Data
14261 SCADA Server / Code number: 14261
1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
1.5 Type of housing Industrial 19" rack
2 Characteristics
2.1.2 Dual power supply Yes
2.2 Processor type Insert
2.3 Processor clock GHz Insert
2.4 Memory type Insert
2.5 Memory capacity MB Insert
2.6 Video display adapter type Insert
2.7 Video display adapter memory Insert
2.8 Hard disc type Insert
2.9 Rotating hard disc Yes/No Insert
2.10 Hard disc capacity GB Insert
2.11 Number of hard discs pcs. Insert
2.12 RAID controller type Insert
2.13 DVD RW type Insert
2.14 Serial interface RS232 Yes
2.15 Number of serial interfaces Min. 2
2.16 Fast Ethernet network interface card type Insert
Number of fast Ethernet network interface
2.17 pcs. 4
cards
2.18 Fans Yes/No Insert
2.19 Monitor 19" pcs. 1
2.19.2 Country of origin Insert
2.19.3 Type TFT
2.19.4 Standards IEC
2.19.5 Supply voltage
2.19.5.1 Rated auxiliary supply voltage V a.c. 110 15 %
2.19.5.2 Power consumption W Insert
2.20 Vertical frequency Hz Insert
2.21 Max. resolution Insert
SCADA servers must be in hot-standby redundant configuration.

Volume 3 Page 117
2.6.19 14262- Operator Workstation
Unit Data
14262 Operator Workstation / Code number: 14262
1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
1.5 Type of housing Insert
2 Characteristics
2.6 Video display adapter type Dual head capability
2.7 Video display adapter memory MB Insert
2.14 Sound card type Insert
Number of fast Ethernet network interface
2.16 pcs. 4
cards
2.18.3 Type TFT
2.19 Visible diagonal " Insert

Volume 3 Page 118
2.6.20 14263- Printer
Unit Data
14263 Printer / Code number: 14263
1.2 Model Insert
1.4 Standards IEC / ISO
2 Characteristics
2.2 Type Colour laser
2.3 Format A4
2.4 Resolution dpi Insert
2.5 Memory MB Insert
2.6 Parallel port Yes/No Insert
2.7 Fast Ethernet port Yes
2.8 USB port Yes/No Insert
2.9 Minimum speed Page/min Insert

Volume 3 Page 119
2.6.21 14264- Monitoring Workstation
Unit Data
14264 Monitoring Workstation / Code number: 14264
1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
1.5 Type of housing Insert
2 Characteristics
2.6 Video display adapter type Insert
2.7 Video display adapter memory MB Insert
2.14 Sound card type Insert
2.15 Serial interface RS232 Yes
2.17 Number of fast Ethernet network interface cards pcs. 1
2.19.3 Type TFT

Volume 3 Page 120
2.6.22 14271 - Weather Station
Unit Data
14271 Weather Station / Code number: 14271
1.1 Terminal Type Insert
1.3 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
Hygro-thermo transmitter with weather thermal
2.1
radiation shield
2.1.1 Input C 40..+60
2.1.1.1 Output mA 4-20
2.1.1.2 Accuracy 1/3 Class B (0.3 K)
2.1.2 Input % rel. h 0..100
2.1.2.1 Output mA 4-20
2.1.2.2 Accuracy % rel. h 3
2.2 Wind transmitter Yes/No
2.2.1 Input m/s
2.2.2 Output mA
2.2.3 Accuracy %
2.3 Wind direction transmitter Yes/No
2.3.1 Input
2.3.2 Output mA
2.3.3 Accuracy
2.4 Baro transmitter Yes/No
2.4.1 Input mbar
2.4.2 Output mA
2.5 Interface unit Yes
2.6 Overvoltage protection Yes
2.7 Installation Indoor

Volume 3 Page 121
2.6.23 14272 - Time Synchronization Device
Unit Data
14272 Time Synchronization Device / Code number: 14272
1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
1.5. Time reference source GPS
2 Characteristics
2.2 Rack mounting case Insert
2.3 Synch. Pulse output, 1 min Yes/No Insert
2.4 Fast Ethernet port / FO Yes
2.5 Serial port Yes
2.6 Protocol NTP
2.7 Updating master station computer system Automatically
At start up
Regularly
2.8. Error between M.C. and computer system ms 1
2.9 UTC GPS time signals Yes
2.10 Display MDHm
2.11 Suitable for mounting on a mosaic display Yes
2.12 Monitoring Grid System time Yes
2.13 Power System Clock
Nominal voltage V
Power requirement W
2.14 GPS
Manufacturer
Type

Volume 3 Page 122
2.6.24 14273- Ethernet Switch Process LAN
Unit Data
14273 Ethernet Switch-Process LAN / Code number: 14273
1.3 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2 Ethernet ports
Min. 6xRJ45 or
Min. 6xFO for IED con-
2.2.1 Number of ports
nections AND 2xFO
(1 GB) for process LAN
RJ45 or FO and Fibre
2.2.1 Type of ports
Optical (1 GB)
2.3 Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges Insert
2.4 Temperature range
2.4.1 Operation 0..50C
2.4.2 Storage 20..+70C
Store & Forward Layer 3
(IEC 61850), RSTP
2.5 Switching method an layer (802.1w); eRSTPTM or
RSTP (802.1D-2004)
network fault recovery
2.6 Switching latency 5s
2.7 Switching bandwidth 1.6 Gbps
2.8 Failsafe output relay Potential-free
2.9 Cyber security features
2.9.1 Multi-level passwords Yes
2.9.2 SSH/SSL encryption Yes
2.9.3 Enable/disable ports, MAC based port security Yes
2.9.4 Port based network access control Yes
2.10 System features
Automatic learning negotiation and crossover
2.10.1
detection
Port configuration, status, statistics, mirroring,
2.10.2
security
2.10.3 Network fault recovery 5 ms
2.11 Type Test Reports To be included with bid
Technical characteristics of optical ports of process LAN Ethernet switches must comply with appro-
priate characteristics of fibre optic cables for protection and control (see Code No. 14296).

Volume 3 Page 123
2.6.25 14274- Ethernet Switch Control Room
Unit Data
14274 Ethernet Switch-Control Room / Code number: 14274
1.3 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2 Ethernet ports
2.2.1 Number of ports Min. 16
2.2.1 Type of ports RJ45
2.3 Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges Insert
2.4 Temperature range
2.4.1 Operation 0..50C
2.4.2 Storage 20..+70C
Store & Forward Layer 3
(IEC 61850), RSTP
2.5 Switching method an layer (802.1w); eRSTPTM or
RSTP (802.1D-2004)
network fault recovery
2.6 Switching latency 5s
2.7 Switching bandwidth 1.6 Gbps
2.8 Failsafe output relay Potential-free
2.9 Cyber security features
2.9.1 Multi-level passwords Yes
2.9.2 SSH/SSL encryption Yes
2.9.3 Enable/disable ports, MAC based port security Yes
2.9.4 Port based network access control Yes
2.10 System features
Automatic learning negotiation and crossover
2.10.1
detection
Port configuration, status, statistics, mirroring,
2.10.2
security
2.10.3 Network fault recovery 5 ms
2.11 Type Test Reports To be included with bid

Volume 3 Page 124
2.6.26 14281- Protection Monitoring Software
Unit Data
14281 Protection Monitoring Software / Code number: 14281
1.1 Protection Monitoring Software
1.1.1 Communication with protection terminals Yes
1.1.2 Protection terminal configuration Yes
1.1.3 Protection terminal parameter setting Yes
1.1.4 Disturbance data collecting Yes
1.1.5 Disturbance data analysing Yes
1.1.6 Other software: Insert
2.6.27 14282- SCADA Software
Unit Data
14282 SCADA Software / Code number: 14282
1.1 Basic SCADA server software
1.1 Basic SCADA server software pcs. 2
Communication with 2 higher level control
1.1.1 Yes
centres
1.1.2 Real-time database management Yes
1.1.3 Data processing Yes
1.1.4 Data acquisition Yes
1.1.5 Alarm and event processing Yes
1.1.6 Data archiving Yes
1.1.7 Report generation and printing Yes
1.1.8 Redundancy management Yes
1.2 Operator workstation software pcs. 2
1.3 Communication software pcs. 2
Communication with 2 higher level control
1.3.1 Yes
centres
1.4 Application libraries pcs. 1, optional
1.5 Software tools pcs. 1
1.5.1 Database creating, maintaining and viewing Yes
1.5.2 User interface definition Yes
1.5.3 Report definition Yes
1.5.4 System configuration Yes
1.5.5 Historical data maintaining Yes
1.5.6 Database and historical data export/import Yes
1.5.7 Analysis and diagnostic tools Yes
1.5.8 Training simulator Yes
Other software tools according to Contractor's
1.5.9 Insert
concept:

Volume 3 Page 125
2.6.28 14297 - Fibre Optic Cables

1 Manufacturer
2 Type Metal-free with single
mode fibres
3 Standards:
4 for single mode fibres ITU-T-G-655
IEC 793-1
5 for fibre optic cables IEC 793-2
IEC 794-1
IEC 794-2
6 Number of optical fibres pcs. 48
7 Operational wavelength nm 1550
8 G655: Attenuation coefficient (at 1550 nm) dB/km 0.23

9 G655: Dispersion coefficient (at 1550 nm) 3.5
10 Cut off wavelength (at 1550 nm) nm - 1450
11 Tensile strength (without temporary or permanent N 1000
optical degradation and mechanical cable dam-
age)
12 Permissible bending radius mm > 400
13 Mode field diameter and tolerance um 9.5 0.5
14 Mode field non-circularity % Max 6
15 Mode field concentricity error m Max 1
16 Cladding diameter and tolerance m 125 3
17 Cladding non-circularity % Max 2
18 Primary coating material Silicone or similar mate-
rial
19 Diameter over primary coating and tolerance m 250 15
20 Type of secondary coating Loose-buffered
21 Secondary coating material Fibre-reinforced plastic
22 Central strength member Non-hygroscopic
23 Filler Jelly filler
24 Binding type (wrapper) Polyester type
25 Inner jacket
26 material PE tapes
27 radial thickness mm
28 Belt insulation
29 material PE
30 radial thickness mm 1.5
31 Outer jacket mm
32 material High density polyeth-
ylene
33 radial thickness mm 1.5
34 Anti-termite protection "Rigid" plastic over the
outer cable jacket
35 Overall diameter of completed cable mm

Volume 3 Page 126

36 Mass of completed cable kg/m
37 Manufacturer quality system in accordance with Yes
ISO 9000, 9001, 9002, 9003, 9004
38 Type test reports To be included in bid

Volume 3 Page 127
2.6.29 14298- Fibre Optic Cables & Terminal Equipment
Unit Data
14298 Fibre Optic Cables & Terminal Equipment / Code number: 14298
Sufficient quantity of adequate glass fibre op-
tic cables for overall Protection & Control &
1.1 Yes
Monitoring & Metering system should be fore-
seen and included in the bid.
Below proposed quantities shall be verified
1.2 Yes
according to Bidder's specific design.
Final quantities must be estimated and deliv-
1.3 ered as per single line diagram and substation Yes
layouts.
At least 20% spare in cable length, as well as
1.4 in number of fibres in cable, should be fore- Yes
seen.
1.5 Fibre optic ducted cables shall be foreseen. Yes
1.6 Type of fibre optic Multimode
1.7 Number of fibres in cable Min. 4
1.8 Operational Wave length Insert
1.9 Attenuation factor maximum Insert
1.10 Band-width minimum Insert
2 Characteristics
Fibre optic terminations.
Overall quantities of specific fibre optic termi-
nations should be closely related to number of
2.1 fibres in each cable (each fibre, used or spare, Yes
should be properly terminated).
At least 20% spare terminations for each pro-
posed type should be foreseen.
2.1.1 Plug connectors type Insert
2.1.2 Connection technology Insert
2.1.3 Plug pin type Insert
Optical distributor with connectors
Overall quantity of optical distributor with con-
nectors should be closely related to number of
2.2 relay houses. optical distributor with connect- Yes
ors should be foreseen for both cable ends.
At least 10% spare optical distributors with
connectors should be foreseen.
To accept metal-
2.2.1 Fibre optic cable gland
free optical cable
2.2.3 Patch-cord connection Yes
2.2.4 Type of optical connectors Insert

Volume 3 Page 128
Unit Data
Patch-cord with optical connectors
Overall quantity of fibre optic patch-cord cables
should be closely related to number of protec-
2.3 tion and control devices (terminals) in each par- Yes
ticular relay house.
At least 20% spare patch-cord cables should be
foreseen.
Quantities and specifications of optical distributor with connectors and patch-cord with optical con-
nectors predicted according to the optical ring configuration for control and according to the config-
uration of busbar protection.
Technical characteristics of fibre optic cables for protection and control have influence on optical
ports characteristics of process LAN Ethernet switches.

Volume 3 Page 129
2.6.30 14299- Special Control Equipment and Tools
Unit Data
14299 Special Control Equipment and Tools / Code number: 14299
1.1 Special Control Equipment and Tools
Special equipment and tools for setting, repair-
1.1.1 set 1
ing, handling and maintaining of control system
Software needed for configuration, setting,
1.1.2 commissioning, testing, communication, interfac- set 1
ing with substation system
1.1.3 Laptop brand-name computer pcs. 2
Test plugs, including all necessary accessories
1.1.4 set 2
(transport case, cables, plugs, etc.)

Volume 3 Page 130
2.6.31 14001 - Protection Terminal for OHL-Main 1
Unit Data
14001 Protection Terminal for OHL-Main 1 / Code number: 14001
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.4 Binary inputs Minimum 16
2.4.1 Number of BI groups with common root Insert
2.4.2 <8
root
2.4.3 Rated voltage V d.c. 110 15 %
2.5.1 Number of modules Insert
2.5.2 Number of outputs per group with common root
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
2.5.6 Number of tripping contacts (high-speed output) pcs. 6
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications
2.6.1 Number of LED's Insert

Volume 3 Page 131
Unit Data
2.8 Human-machine interface Yes
2.8.1 LCD alphanumeric display, No. of rows Insert
2.9 Number of setting parameter groups Min. 4
2.10 Distance protection
2.10.1 Number of protection zones Min. 5
2.10.2 Basic operating time ms < 25
2.10.3 Operational characteristic Quadrilateral
2.10.4 Zone 1 direction software selectable Insert
2.10.9 Minimum impedance setting Insert
2.10.10 Full scheme protection phase segregated Yes
2.11 Communication scheme logic
Intertrip
Permissive under-reach
2.11.1 Operational modes
Permissive overreach
Blocking
2.12 Power swing detection Yes
Secondary circuits supervision:
2.13 VT circuits supervision Yes
CT circuits supervision Yes
Automatic switch onto fault logic
2.14 Impedance criteria Yes
Instantaneous overcurrent criteria Yes
2.15 Multistage three-phase overcurrent protection
2.15.1 Directional Insert
2.15.2 Number of stages Min. 2
2.15.3 Setting range % Ir Insert
2.15.4 Characteristics
2.15.4.1 Definite time delayed Yes/no Yes
2.15.4.2 Normal inverse Yes/No Yes
2.15.4.3 Very inverse Yes/No Insert
2.15.4.4 Extremely inverse Yes/No Insert
2.16 Multistage earth fault overcurrent protection

Volume 3 Page 132
Unit Data
2.16.4 Type of protection Non-directional
2.17 Directional earth fault protection
2.17.1 Number of stages Insert
2.17.3 Type of protection Directional
2.17.5 Minimum polarizing voltage % Ur 3%
2.17.6 Communication scheme logic Yes
2.17.6.1 Permissive and blocking Yes
2.17.7 Single and three-pole tripping schemes Yes
2.18 Current negative sequence protection
2.18.3 Characteristic Definite time
2.19 Power system supervision
2.19.1 Broken conductor check Yes
2.19.2 Overload protection
2.19.2.1 Setting range of 1 stage % Ir Insert
2.19.2.2 Time delay range of 1 stage min > 20
2.19.2.4 Time delay range of 2 stage s > 20
2.19.2.5 Blocking external (system or HMI) Yes
Additional supervision functions (thermal state,
2.19.3 Insert
etc.)
2.20 Autoreclosing
2.20.1 Number of shots Min. 2
2.20.2 AR program 1/3 pole
2.20.3 Reclosing pulse duration s Insert
2.20.4 Dead time range s Insert
2.20.5 Counters for AR operation Yes
2.20.6 Inhibit time range s Insert
2.20.7 Reclaim time range s Insert
Synchronism & energising check during 3 ph
2.20.8 Yes
AR
2.20.9 Evolving faults treatment Yes
2.20.10 AR blocking for CB not ready Yes
st nd
2.20.11 AR operation 1/3ph in 1 and 2 zone Yes

Volume 3 Page 133
Unit Data
2.21.5 Operating time for energizing check function ms Insert
2.22 Disturbance recorder
2.22.1 Number of digital signals Min. 40
2.22.2 Number of analogue signals Min. 8
2.22.3 External/manual initiation of recording Yes
2.22.4 Sampling rate kHz Insert
2.22.5 Pre-fault time ms 300
2.22.6 Recording time ms 2000
2.22.7 Number of recorded disturbances Min. 5
Total recording time with max. analogue and bi-
2.22.8 s > 10
nary signals
2.22.9 Output file comtrade format Yes
2.23 Event recorder
2.24 Fault locator, measurement in (km) Yes
2.26 Measurement
3 Additional requirements
3.1 Test socket Yes
Setting and configuration of Protection Terminal
3.2 Yes
approved by Engineer

Volume 3 Page 134
2.6.32 14002 - Protection Terminal for OHL - Main 2
Unit Data
14002 Protection Terminal for OHL - Main 2 / Code number: 14002
1.1 Manufacturer Different than Main 1
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.4.2 <8
root
2.5.2 Number of outputs per group with common root Max. 3
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications

Volume 3 Page 135
Unit Data
2.11 Communication scheme logic
Intertrip
Permissive under-reach
2.11.1 Operational modes
Permissive overreach
Blocking

Volume 3 Page 136
Unit Data
2.17.5 Minimum polarizing voltage % Ur 3%
2.17.6 Communication scheme logic Yes
2.17.6.1 Permissive and blocking Yes
2.17.7 Single and three-pole tripping schemes Yes
2.18.3 Characteristic Definite time
2.19.2 Overload protection
2.19.2.2 Time delay range of 1 stage min > 20
2.19.2.4 Time delay range of 2 stage s > 20
2.19.2.5 Blocking external (system or HMI) Yes
Additional supervision functions (thermal state,
2.19.3 Insert
etc.)
2.20 Autoreclosing
2.20.1 Number of shots Min. 2
2.20.2 AR program 1/3 pole
2.20.3 Reclosing pulse duration s Insert
2.20.4 Dead time range s Insert
2.20.5 Counters for AR operation Yes
2.20.6 Inhibit time range s Insert
2.20.7 Reclaim time range s Insert
Synchronism & energising check during 3 ph
2.20.8 Yes
AR
2.20.9 Evolving faults treatment Yes
2.20.10 AR blocking for CB not ready Yes
2.20.11 AR operation 1/3ph in 1st and 2nd zone Yes

Volume 3 Page 137
Unit Data
2.22.3 External/manual initiation of recording Yes
2.22.8 s > 10
nary signals
2.23 Event recorder
2.24 Fault locator, measurement in (km) Yes
2.26 Measurement
3.1 Test socket Yes
3.2 Yes

Volume 3 Page 138
2.6.33 14003 - Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 1
Unit Data
14003 Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 1 / Code number: 14003
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.3.1 Number of inputs Min 4
2.3.5 Burden at Ur VA < 0,3
2.4.2 <8
root
2.5.2 Number of outputs per group with common root Max. 3
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications

Volume 3 Page 139
Unit Data
Autotransformer / Transformer Differential pro-
2.10
tection
2.10.1 Inrush restraint Yes
2.10.2 Over excitation restraint Yes
2.10.3 Basic differential current range % Ir Insert
2.10.4 Operating characteristic with 2 slope Yes
2.10.5 High non-restraint differential current range % Ir Insert
2.10.6 Operating time ms < 30
Internal CT ratio and vector group compensa-
2.10.7 Yes
tion
2.10.8 Cross block function Yes
2.10.9 Zero sequence subtraction Yes
Restricted earth fault protection for autotrans-
2.11
former / transformer
2.11.1 Low Impedance Yes
2.11.2 Internal CT ratio vector group compensation Yes
2.12.3 Characteristic Insert
2.13 Multistage three-phase overcurrent protection pcs. Min. 2
Instantaneous overcurrent protection with in-
2.13.1
rush restraint
2.13.1.1 Setting range % Ir Insert
2.13.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset ms < 30
2.13.2 Time delayed overcurrent protection
2.13.2.2 Type of protection Non-directional
2.13.2.3 Characteristics
2.13.2.3.1 Definite time delayed Yes/no Yes
2.13.2.3.2 Normal inverse Yes/No Yes
2.13.2.3.3 Very inverse Yes/No Insert
2.13.2.3.4 Extremely inverse Yes/No Insert

Volume 3 Page 140
Unit Data
2.14 Multistage earth fault overcurrent protection pcs. Min. 2
Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent protection
2.14.1
with inrush restraint
2.14.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset ms < 30
2.14.2 Time delayed earth fault overcurrent protection
2.15 Thermal overload protection Yes
2.16.3 External/manual initiation of recording
Total recording time with max. analogue and
2.16.8 s > 10
binary signals
2.17 Event recorder
3.1 Test socket Yes
3.2 Yes

Volume 3 Page 141
2.6.34 14004 - Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 2
Unit Data
14004 Protection Terminal for Power Transformers - Main 2 / Code number: 14004
1.1 Manufacturer Different than Main 1
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.3.5 Burden at Ur VA < 0,3
2.4.2 <8
root
Number of outputs per group with common
2.5.2 Max. 3
root
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
Number of tripping contacts (high-speed
2.5.6 pcs. 6
output)
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications

Volume 3 Page 142
Unit Data
Autotransformer / Transformer Differential
2.10
protection
2.10.1 Inrush restraint Yes
2.10.2 Overexcitation restraint Yes
2.10.4 Operating characteristic with 2 slope Yes
2.10.5 High non-restraint differential current range % Ir Insert
Internal CT ratio and vector group compen-
2.10.7 Yes
sation
2.10.8 Crossblock function Yes
2.10.9 Zero sequence subtraction Yes
Restricted earth fault protection for auto-
2.11
transformer / transformer
2.11.1 Low Impedance Yes
2.11.2 Internal CT ratio vector group compensation Yes
Multistage three-phase overcurrent protec-
2.13 pcs. Min. 2
tion
Instantaneous overcurrent protection with in-
2.13.1
rush restraint
2.13.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset Ms < 30

Volume 3 Page 143
Unit Data
2.14 Multistage earth fault overcurrent protection pcs. Min. 2
Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent protec-
2.14.1
tion with inrush restraint
2.14.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset Ms < 30
Time delayed earth fault overcurrent protec-
2.14.2
tion
2.15 Thermal overload protection Yes
2.16.3 External/manual initiation of recording
2.16.8 s > 10
binary signals
2.17 Event recorder
3.1 Test socket Yes
Setting and configuration of Protection Ter-
3.2 Yes
minal approved by Engineer

Volume 3 Page 144
2.6.35 14005 - Protection Terminal for LV side of Power Transformer
Unit Data
14005 Protection Terminal for LV side of Power Transformer / Code number: 14005
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.4.2 <8
root
2.5.2 Max. 3
root
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
2.5.6 pcs. 6
put)
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications

Volume 3 Page 145
Unit Data
2.10.4 Zone 1 direction software selectable Yes (F/R/ND)

Volume 3 Page 146
Unit Data
2.16.3 Type of protection Insert
2.16.4.1 Definite time delayed Yes/no Insert
2.16.4.2 Normal inverse Yes/No Insert
2.16.5 Minimum polarizing voltage % Ur Insert
2.16.6 Communication scheme logic Insert
2.18.3 External/manual initiation of recording Insert
2.18.8 s > 10
nary signals
2.19 Event recorder
2.21 Measurement
3.1 Test socket Yes
3.2 Yes

Volume 3 Page 147
2.6.36 14006 - Automatic Voltage Regulation
Unit Data
14006 Automatic Voltage Regulation / Code number: 14006
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2.1 Number of inputs 1
2.2.2 Rated current for 110 kV A 1
2.4 Voltage control function
2.4.1 Set voltage range % Ur2 Insert
2.4.2 Set voltage dead-band range % Ur2 Insert
2.4.3 Upper limit busbar voltage range % Ur2 Insert
2.4.4 Lower limit busbar voltage range % Ur2 Insert
2.4.5 Line voltage drop compensation Yes/No Insert
2.4.6 Regulation for capacitive load Yes/No Insert
2.4.7 Undervoltage blocking range % Ur2 Insert
2.4.8 Overcurrent blocking range % Ir Insert
2.4.9 Parallel operation Yes
2.4.10 Parallel operation principal Insert
2.5.2.1 Number of rear ports Min. 1

Volume 3 Page 148
Unit Data
2.5.3 External time synchronisation Insert
2.6 Tap changer, tap position BCD code
3.1 Test socket Yes
Setting and configuration of Automatic Voltage Reg-
3.2 Yes
ulator approved by Engineer

Volume 3 Page 149
2.6.37 14007 - Protection Terminal for Busbars
Unit Data
14007 Protection Terminal for Busbars / Code number: 14007
1.5 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.4.2 Insert
root
2.5.2 Max. 3
root
2.5.4 A 0.1
2.5.5 A Insert
2.5.6 pcs. 6
put)
2.5.7 A 5
2.6 LED indications

Volume 3 Page 150
Unit Data
Multistage three-phase overcurrent protec-
2.10
tion
2.10.1 Instantaneous overcurrent protection
2.10.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset ms 30
Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent protec-
2.11.1
tion
2.11.1.2 Min. operating time at l > 10*lset ms 30
Time delayed earth fault overcurrent protec-
2.11.2
tion

Volume 3 Page 151
Unit Data
2.13.5 Minimum polarising voltage % Ur 3%
2.15.8 s > 10
binary signals
2.16 Event recorder
3.1 Test socket Yes
Setting and configuration of Protection Ter-
3.2 Yes
minal approved by Engineer

Volume 3 Page 152
2.6.38 14010 - Busbar and Breaker Failure Protection Bay Unit
Unit Data
14010 Busbar and Breaker failure protection bay unit /Code number: 14010
1.3 Type of installation Distributed
1.4 Standards IEC
1.5 Central Unit (CU)
1.5.1 Terminal type Insert
1.5.2 Terminal version (software version) Insert
Central unit for busbar protection must be
1.5.3 Yes
supported for min. 16 bays
1.6 Bay Unit (BU)
1.6.1 Terminal type Insert
1.6.2 Terminal version (software version) Insert
2 Characteristics
2.1.1 CU, BU Rated auxiliary supply voltage V d.c. 110 15 %
2.1.2 CU auxiliary supply redundant Yes
2.2 a.c. current inputs BU
2.3 Binary inputs CU, BU Min. 20 / 8
2.3.2 Number of inputs per module Insert
2.4 Binary outputs CU, BU Min. 6 / 4
2.4.2 Number of outputs per module Insert
2.4.4 A 0.1
2.4.5 A Insert
2.4.6 pcs. Min. 3
put)
2.4.7 A 5
2.5 LED indications CU, BU

Volume 3 Page 153
Unit Data
2.6 Communication ports CU, BU
2.6.1.3 PC connector type Insert
2.6.2 CU, BU communication media FO
2.6.3 CU rear station (system) communication ports
2.6.3.1 Number of rear ports Insert
2.6.3.3 Communication speed Mbit/s Insert
2.6.3.4 Connector type RJ45
2.7 Busbar differential protection
2.7.2 Internal CT radio adaptability Yes
2.7.3 Multiple tripping criteria, check and bus zone Yes
2.7.4 Current transformer supervision Yes
2.7.5 External signal of load transfer starting Insert
Busbar protection system should be suita-
2.7.6 ble/adaptable for future switchgear extension Yes
or modification
2.7.7 Bay-selective intertripping Yes
2.7.8 Phase-segregated measurement system Yes
2.8 Breaker failure protection
2.8.2 Re-trip time delay range s 0-1
2.8.3 Re-trip operation mode 1/3ph Yes
2.8.4 Back-up time delay range s 0-1
2.8.5 Trip operating time setting resolution ms 1
2.8.6 Trip delay range s 0-1
2.8.7 Single-phase with/without current Yes
2.8.8 2-stage operation bay trip repeat/trip busbar Insert
Selectable operation mode (current, unbal-
2.8.9 Insert
ance, low current)
Independent settable delay times for all opera-
2.8.10 Yes
tion modes
Low current mode using the circuit breaker
2.8.11 Yes
auxiliary contact
2.8.12 End fault protection Yes
Independent breaker failure protection per bay
2.8.13 Yes
unit
2.9 Disturbance recorder CU, BU
2.9.1 Number of digital signals Insert
2.9.2 Number of analogue signals Insert

Volume 3 Page 154
Unit Data
2.9.8 s > 10
binary signals
2.10 Event recorder CU, BU
2.11 Self-supervision CU, BU Yes
3.1 Test socket BU Yes
Setting and configuration approved by Engi-
3.2 Yes
neer
Centralised, user-friendly configuration and
all necessary software tools for full param-
3.4 Yes
eterization, and (re)configuration in case of
extensions should be delivered

Volume 3 Page 155
2.6.39 14011 - Trip Circuit Supervision Relay
Unit Data
14011 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay / Code number: 14011

1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2 Binary outputs
2.2.1 Number of outputs NO/NC Min. 2/2
2.2.3 A 0.1
2.2.4 A Insert
2.3 Supervised circuits
2.3.1 Voltage range of supervised circuits V d.c. 110 15 %
2.3.2 Injected current of supervised circuits mA Insert
2.3.3 Operating time range s Insert
2.3.4 Resetting time range s Insert

Volume 3 Page 156
2.6.40 14012 - Tripping Unit - High-Speed Tripping Relay
Unit Data
14011 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay / Code number: 14011

1.3 Type Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
2 Characteristics
2.2 Binary outputs
2.2.1 Number of outputs NO/NC Min. 2/2
2.2.3 A 0.1
L/R < 40 ms, at rated voltage
2.2.4 A Insert
2.3 Supervised circuits
2.3.1 Voltage range of supervised circuits V d.c. 110 15 %
2.3.2 Injected current of supervised circuits mA Insert
2.3.3 Operating time range s Insert
2.3.4 Resetting time range s Insert

Volume 3 Page 157
2.6.41 14013 - Test Socket
Unit Data
14013 Test socket / Code number: 14013

Type
Line main 1 and 2
Line back-up and bus coupler
1.3 Insert
Transformer main 1 and 2
Bay unit BBF
Distance protection (code 14007)
1.4 Standards IEC
Each protection device must have its own test
1.5 Yes
socket
Test socket must obtain safe online protection
1.6 testing and maintaining, and performing whole Yes
tripping test with following AR
Test socket should have enough contacts to:
Short-circuit current inputs from CT's
Isolate voltage inputs from VT's
Isolate trip circuit for each phase separately
1.7 Isolate CB close command Yes
Isolate signalling voltage
Inhibit breaker failure initialising
Inhibit sending of communication signal
Allow functional testing of protection
Socket should be designed for 4 mm banana
1.8 Yes
plugs access

Volume 3 Page 158
2.6.42 14301 - SDH Equipment
Minimum Requirements Guaranteed

No. Description Unit Data
1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Optical interface(s) STM-16
4 Standard ITU-T G.707 G.708,
G.709 G.957, G.958
5 Bit rate Mbps 2,500
6 Operating lengthwave nm 1550
7 Output optical transmit level dBm To guarantee 6 dB mar-
gin as a minimum
8 Receiver threshold dBm -28 dBm at 2500 Mbps
9 Code binary NRZ
10 Permissible attenuation at maximum dispersion dB 0-30
11 Four (4) Ethernet 10/100/1000 ports Yes
12 Electrical tributary interface 2 Mbps Yes
13 Standard ITU-T G.703G.823
14 Bit rate kbps 2048
15 Code HDB3
16 Nominal impedance 75 or 120
17 Can be configured to operate as: terminal multiplexer,
add / drop multiplexer,
cross-connect equip-
ment
18 Number of 2 Mbps tributary access (interfaces) 4*63
19 Number of optical tributory interfaces (SCADA 4
channel connection)
20 Number of STM-4 optical interfaces Minimum 2
21 LCT interface
22 F interface (QD2F) RS 232 (V.24)
23 Bit rate 9.6
24 Connector type at subrack LC
25 Network management interface
26 Q interface (QD2B3) Ethernet G.773, G.784
27 Rated power supply voltage V DC 48, plus pole earthed
28 Dimensions mm
29 Mass kg
30 Mounting Rack 19
ISO 9000, 9001, 9002, 9003, 9004

Volume 3 Page 159
2.6.43 14302 - Digital Multiplexer Interfaces
No. Description Unit Data Guaranteed
1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Standards ITU-T G.703, G.704,
G.706 G.711, G.732,
G.823, V.11, V.24 V.28
4 Channel units Ethernet 10/100
V24/28
V35
X24/V11
2-wires FXS
5 Remote subscriber interface ITU-T G.711
6 Nominal impedance 600
7 Subscriber line feed Yes
8 Dialling Yes
9 Ringing detection Yes
10 PABX interface
12 Transmission speed kbps 64
13 Timing Co- and contra-
directional G.703
14 64 kbps data interface
15 Data transmission speed kbps 64
16 Timing Co- and contra-
directional G.703
18 Code AMI
19 Jitter ITU-T G.823
20 Data interface for transmission of asynchronous da-
ta channel with bit rate up to 9600 bps
21 Bit rate kbps 64
22 Data transmission speed bps 9600
23 Operating mode Asynchronous
24 Electrical interface ITU-T V.28
25 Functional interface ITU-T V.24
27 Mounting Inside SDH rack
ISO 9000, 9001, 9002, 9003, 9004

Volume 3 Page 160
2.6.44 14303 - Teleprotection Signalling Interface

1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Standards IEC 61000-4
IEC 60834-1
EN 60950-1
IEC 60255-5
4 Number of command channels pcs. 2x4

5 Electrical interfaces
6 Command inputs
7 nominal operating voltage V 48 VDC
8 optocoupler Yes
9 Command outputs
10 nominal contact voltage V 48 VDC
11 maximum switching power VA 60 W
12 maximum switching current A 0.2A
13 Voltage withstand kV Acc. to IEC 834 -1 and
IEC 225
14 Operating time incl. propagation (max) ms. 20
16 Mounting Inside SDH rack
ISO 9000, 9001, 9002, 9003 and 9004

Volume 3 Page 161
2.6.45 14304 - Optical Booster

1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Standards ITU-T G.707 G.708, G.709
G.957, G.958
4 Optical characteristics
5 Optical interface STM-16
6 Bit rate Mbps 2500
7 Operating length wave (nm) nm 1550
8 Output optical transmit level dBm up to 26
9 Optical connector type LC/PC
10 Maintenance interface
11 RS 232 or Ethernet 10/100 Mbps Yes
12 Contacts alarms
13 Low output power Yes
14 Output power failure Yes
15 Power supply failure Yes
16 Power supply
17 Rated power supply voltage V DC 48 V
18 Dimensions mm
19 Mounting
20 Quality system ISO 9001

Volume 3 Page 162
2.6.46 14305 - Digital PLC

1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Standards
4 Frequency range kHz 40-500
5 Bandwidth kHz 8 & 16
6 Output power W 10 to 40
7 Reception sensibility dBm -30
8 High Frequency Impedance 75
9 Oscillator stability ppm 20
10 AGC efficiency dB 40
11 Telephone interfaces
12 2 W remote subscriber Yes
13 2 W subscriber Yes
14 4 W E&M Yes
15 Data interfaces
16 Asynchronous 200/19200 bit/s V24/28 RS 232 Yes
17 Synchronous X24, V11, G.903 (CPL analogue) Yes
18 Ethernet Yes
19 Teleprotection interface Yes
20 Maintenance interface
21 RS 232 or/and Ethernet Yes
22 Configuration via laptop Yes
23 Alarm contacts
24 Major alarm Yes
25 Minor alarm Yes
26 MTBF h > 95000
27 MTTR h 2
28 Environment
29 Operating temperature C -5 to +45
30 Storage temperature C 40 to +70
31 Humidity up to 93%
32 Temperature test
33 IEC 721-3-3 ed.87 class 3K5
34 Electromagnetic environment IEC 61000-4
IEC 61000-6-2
35 Rated power supply voltage V DC 48 V
36 Mounting
37 Manufacturer quality system in accordance with ISO Yes
9000, 9001, 9002, 9003 and 9004

Volume 3 Page 163
2.6.47 14306 - Optical Distribution Frame

1 Manufacturer
2 Type
3 Standards IP65
4 for single mode fibres ITU-T655
IEC 793-1
IEC 793-2
5 for fibre optic cables IEC 794-1
IEC 794-2
6 Fibre optical cable gland To accept metal-free optical cable,
min 2*48 single mode fibres, with a
loose tube
Capability to accept 2*48 additional
cores
7 Patch cord connection To accept 2*48 metal-free optical
patch cords with 1 single mode fibre
each. Connected pigtails
Capability to accept 2*48 additional
cores
8 Maximum optical attenuation per slice dB 0.1
9 Type of optical connectors LC
10 Housing Tamper-proof sealed rugged con-
struction
11 Installation Mounted on wall
12 Dimensions mm
13 Mass kg
14 Manufacturer quality system in accord- Yes
ance with ISO 9000, 9001, 9002, 9003,
9004

Volume 3 Page 164
2.6.48 19001 - Battery
Unit Data
19001 110 V & 48 V Battery units / Code number: 19001

1.2 Type designation Insert
1.4 Standards IEC
110 ( for 110 V DC )
1.6 Rated voltage V
48 ( for 48 V DC )
92 ( for 110 V DC )
1.7 Number of cells per battery unit pcs
40 ( for 48 V DC )
1.8 Type of cell Ni-Cd
1.9 Operating voltage per cell V 1.2
1.10 Floating voltage per cell V 1.40 1.42
1.11 Equalizing voltage per cell V 1.55 1.65
1.13 Rated capacity at 20C
For 3h discharge time Ah Insert
For 5h discharge time Ah Insert
400 ( for 110 V DC )
For 10h discharge time Ah
250 ( for 48 V DC )
1.14 Discharge voltage per cell V 1,0
1.15 Spec. gravity of electrolyte 1 1,20,02
1.16 Positive plate - Tubular
1.17 Negative plate - Pasted
1.18 Type of container - Plastic polymer
1.19 Cell condition - Pre-charged
1.20 The battery stands steel frame Yes
1.21 The battery stands earth-quake endurance type Yes
1.22 Overall dimensions of one cell mm Insert
1.23 Quantity of electrolyte per one cell litre Insert
1.24 Length/width/height of assembled battery mm Insert
1.25 Weight of battery and stands in service kg Insert

Volume 3 Page 165
2.6.49 19002 - Battery Charger
Unit Data
19002 Battery Charger / Code number: 19003)

1.1 Manufacturer
1.2 Type designation
1.3 Type Thyristor controlled
1.4 Country of origin -
1.5 Standards IEC
1.6 Rated input voltage V 3 x 400 / 230
1.7 Rated input current (at rated output) A Insert
1.8 Input voltage variation % 5
1.9 Power factor 1 > 0,80
1.10 Efficiency % > 85
1.11 Degree of protection IP42
1.12 Noise level dB < 65 dB max
1.13 Type of rectifiers Modular with MCU
1.14 Number of modules (n+2) pcs Insert
1.15 Module rated output current A Insert
1.16 MCU protocol IEC 61850
Both constant current &
1.21 Charging characteristic
constant voltage
Insulation - HV, between input and
1.23 V AC, min 1000 V AC, 1 min
output/ground
MW; V
1.24 Insulation resistance 10 MW, 500 V DC, 1 min
DC, min
1.25 Rated capacity kVA Insert
110 ( for 110 V DC )
1.26 Rated output voltage V d.c.
48 ( for 48 V DC )
100 ( for 110 V DC )
1.27 Rated output current A
50 ( for 48 V DC )
1.29 Voltage & Frequency variation % 5
1.30 Voltage ripple % 5
1.31 Ripple frequency Hz 2
3 levels: charge, float &
1.32 Charge modes -
boost
1.33 Float voltage per cell V 1.42
1.34 Boost voltage per cell V 1.53
1.35 Float & Boost voltage adjustable - Yes
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
1.36 Measurement
Battery current
Load current
Earth-fault voltage

Volume 3 Page 166
2.6.50 Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment
Unit Data
1 General:
Manufacturer
Model No.
Type
1.1 Type of multiplexer SDH: ADM
1.2 Complying to ITU-T rec. Yes
1.3 Transmission Capacity Mbit/s STM-4: 620
1.4 Access capacity on 64 Kbit/s channels Minimum 200
1.5 Access capacity on 2 Mbit/s channels Minimum 40
1.6 Redundant central processor Shall be available
1.7 Digital cross connect function Fully non-blocking
2 Available aggregates:
2.1 Optical aggregates (ITU-T G.957) L-1.1, L-1.2
3 Available trunk interfaces:
3.1 HDB3, 2 Mbit/s interfaces per module No. Minimum 8
G.703, transparent
3.2 Complying to ITU-T rec.
G.704, selectable
No. of 4 or 2
HDSL, 2Mbit/s interface:
channels 30 or 15
no of copper wires
3.3 channels / 30 / 2 pairs
Capacity on 2Mbit/s or on 1Mbit/s
pair of 30 / 1 pair
Capacity selectable
wire 15 / 1 pair
4 Available user interfaces
4.1 Voice interfaces for trunk lines:
4.1.1 1 + 1 com path protection, available for all yes
Analogue, 4wire with E&M:
4.1.2 Input level dBr +7.5 -16.0
Output level dBr +7.0 -16.5
Analogue, 2wire with E&M:
4.1.3 Input level dBr +6.5 -12.5
Output level dBr -1.0 -20.0
4.1.4 Digital, 2Mbit/s CAS or PRI yes
4.2 Voice interfaces for remote subscriber:
4.2.1 2wire, subscriber side dBr -5 ... +4/-7.5 ... -1
4.2.2 2wire, PABX side dBr -5 ... +4/-7.5 ... -3
4.3 Integrated teleprotection
4.3.1 Interface for Commands:
4.3.1.1 Number of independent commands No. 4
4.3.1.2 Transmission time max. ms 6
4.3.1.3 Signal voltage Vpeak 250
4.3.1.4 1 + 1 com path protection yes
4.3.2 Interface(s) for Differential Protection:
4.3.2.1 Electrical interface: G.703 Kbit/s 64
4.3.2.2 Optical Interface Kbit/s Minimum 64
4.4 Data: channels per module

Volume 3 Page 167
Unit Data
4.4.1 1 + 1 com path protection, available for all yes
4.4.2 V.24/V.28 (RS-232): up to 38.4kbit/s No. 4
4.4.3 V.11/X.24 (RS-422): 64kbit/s No. 4
4.4.4 V.35: 64kbit/s No. 4
4.4.5 V.36 (RS-449): 64kbit/s No. 2
4.4.6 G.703: 64kbit/s No. 8
Ethernet:
10/100 BaseT No. 4
4.4.7
WAN capacity Mbit/s Min:2x 2Mbit/s
Protocols - Min.:IP
4.5 Integrated alarm gathering module:
4.5.1 Number of external alarms per module No. Min. 20
4.5.2 Auxiliary power supply for ext. contacts Yes
4.6 Network Management System
4.6.1 Type/Name of configuration tool
4.6.2 For fault / configuration management Yes / yes
4.6.3 For local / remote operation Yes / yes
Ethernet / IPor
4.6.4 Data communication network (DCN)
Ethernet / OSI
4.7 Ambient Conditions:
4.7.1 Storage: ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.2 C / % hum -5 ... + 55 / class 1.2
4.7.2 Transport: ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.2 C / % hum -5 ... + 70 / class 2.2
4.7.3 Operation: ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E C / % hum -5 +45 / class 3.1E
4.8 Power Supply
4.8.1 Operation V DC 48 / 60 (-15/+20%)
4.8.2 Fully redundant power supply yes
Bidder shall provide all necessary information which deemed to be necessary to complete the project
in all respects.

Volume 3 Page 168
2.7 Digital Fault and Disturbance Recorder (DFDR)
Unit Data
1 General
1.2 Type Insert
1.5 Power supply V, DC DC 110 V
1.6 Power supply - printer V, Hz AC 230 V, 50 Hz
2 Analogue inputs
2.1 Number of channels Minimum 160
2.1.1 Expandability Minimum 32
2.2 Nominal current Amp 1A / 5A
2.3.1 Nominal voltage Vac/ Insert
2.3.2 Nominal current mA/Amp Insert
2.4 Frequency response Insert
2.5 Cut-off frequency
2.5.1 Bandwidth dB insert
2.5.2 Attenuation at dB Insert
Auto adjusted anti-aliasing filters for chosen
2.5.3 Yes/No Yes
sampling rate
Simultaneously programmable sampling rate for Min 2 for FAST and
2.5.4
all feeders/inputs SLOW Recording
2.5.4.1 Locally changeable Yes
2.5.4.2 Remotely changeable Yes
2.5.5 Possible sampling rates
Samples /
2.5.5.1 Slow. 1Hz-500Hz Insert
sec
Samples /
2.5.5.2 Fast: 0.5 kHz - 6kHz Insert
sec
Samples /
2.5.5.3 Continuous (variable rate) Insert
sec
2.6 DC coupled inputs Yes/No Yes
2.7 Resolution bits 12 or better
2.8 Accuracy % Min 0.5
2.9 Burden
2.9.1 Current circuit VA Insert
2.9.2 Voltage circuit VA Insert
2.10 Over load
100% In continuously,
2.10.1 Current % In
min 600 % In for 1 sec.
2.10.2 Voltage circuit % Vn 2Vn and max. 350 Vn
3 Digital inputs
3.1 Number of channels Minimum 480
3.1.1 Expandability Minimum 96
3.2 Selectable input level N/O or N/C, 110 VDC

Volume 3 Page 169
Unit Data
Potential or potential
3.3 Type
free contact
3.4 Resolution ms Insert
4 Memory
4.1 Size MB 64 MB or higher
4.2 Type Solid state
0.1-2 user programma-
4.3 Pre-fault time (fast scanning rate) sec
ble
0.1-2 user programma-
4.4 Post-fault (fast scanning rate sec
ble
min. 180 user pro-
4.5 Pre and post-fault time (slow scanning rate) sec
grammable
4.6 In-built hard disk (auto-maintained GB min. 4 GB
5 Sensors / Triggering criteria

All sensors/triggers are preferable programma-
Yes/No Yes
ble and virtually recordable
5.1. Logical combination sensor Yes/No Yes
5.2. Three phase over or under voltage / current Yes/No Yes
5.3. Mono phase over or under voltage / current Yes/No Yes
5.4. *du/dt, dp/dt, dq/dt, [Single/3 Phases], df/dt. etc. Yes/No Yes
5.5. RMS [voltage / current] Yes/No Yes
5.6. Zero sequence Yes/No Yes
5.7. Negative, positive sequence Yes/No Yes
5.8. Frequency Yes/No Yes
5.9. DC Step Yes/No Yes
5.10. Pendling / swing Yes/No Yes
5.11. Digital level and edge Yes/No Yes
5.12. Sensor trigger Yes/No Yes
5.13. Event trigger Yes/No Yes
5.14. Manual trigger Yes/No Yes
5.15. Remote trigger Yes/No Yes
6 Clock System
6.1. Internal clock Yes/No Yes
6.2. Accuracy Insert
6.3. External synchronization Yes/No Yes
6.4. Time resolution between 2 synchronized pulses Insert
7 Output Alarm Relay Contact

250 Vac or above, 60 or
7.1. Max. operation voltage DC/AC Vac /
above
7.2. Make and carry for 0.5 sec A Min 8A
7.3. Carry continuously A Min 5A
7.4. Break ( DC ) - resistive W Insert
8 Interface for Data Communication

8.1. Full definition compression Yes/No Yes
8.2. Maximum transmission rate bits / sec Insert
8.3. Standard serial port ( EIA-232-D) Yes / No Yes

Volume 3 Page 170
Unit Data
8.4. Printer port Yes/No Yes
8.5. Dedicated serial port for modem Yes/No Yes
9 Printer Data
9.1. Printer amplitude (scaling peak to peak) Insert
9.2. Time scale mm/s Insert
9.3. Printer resolution - Insert
9.4. Auto printing Yes/No Yes
9.5 Fault priority transmission Yes/No Yes
9.6 Fault location (distance calculation) Yes/No Yes
10 Communication and remote analysing unit

10.1. Processor Pentium MHz Minimum 450 MHz
10.2. Co-processor Pentium Yes/No Yes
10.3. Main memory capacity Mb Minimum 64 MB
10.4. Colour graphics board S-VGA Yes/No Yes
10.5 Screen S-VGA Yes/No Yes
10.6 Hard disk unit GB Minimum 40 GB
10.7 Printer Yes/No Yes
10.8 Modem Yes/No Yes.
2.8 230kV Cable
Unit Data
1 General
2 Manufacturer Insert
3 Origin Insert
4 Type Insert
5 Rated system voltage Insert
5.1 phase kV 230
5.2 line to line kV
6 Max. permissible system voltage kV 245
7 Rated frequency Hz 50
8 Max. operating current A
2
9 Nominal cross sectional area mm 2000 mm2 Cu
10 Impulse withstand voltage kV 1050
11 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 460
12 Shape of conductor
2
13 Nominal cross section of Cu-screen mm
14 Thickness of outer sheath mm
15 Insulation thickness mm 23
16 Min. bending radius D 20
17 Max. pulling force
18 Max. DC resistance at 20 ohm/km

Volume 3 Page 171
Unit Data
19 Max. AC resistance at 20 ohm/km
20 Max. reactance in single configure mH/km
21 Operating capacitance F/km
22 Charging current (phase)
23 Charging load (phase)
24 Earth fault current kA
25 Short circuit rating for 1 sec kA 50
26 Current rating kA
26.1 in soil A
26.2 in air A
27 standard
2.9 33kV Cable
Unit Data
1 General
2 Manufacturer Insert
3 Origin Insert
4 Type Insert
5 Rated system voltage kV 33
5.1 phase kV
5.2 line to line kV
6 Max. permissible system voltage kV 36
7 Rated frequency Hz 50
8 Max. operating current A
2
9 Nominal cross sectional area mm 185 mm2 Cu
10 Impulse withstand voltage kV 170
11 Power frequency withstand voltage kV 70
12 Shape of conductor
2
13 Nominal cross section of Cu-screen mm
14 Thickness of outer sheath mm
15 Insulation thickness mm 8-9
16 Min. bending radius D 15
17 Max. pulling force
18 Max. DC resistance at 20 ohm/km 0.0366
19 Max. AC resistance at 20 ohm/km
20 Max. reactance in single configure mH/km
21 Operating capacitance F/km
22 Charging current (phase)
23 Charging load (phase)
24 Earth fault current kA
25 Short circuit rating for 1 sec kA 25
26 Current rating kA

Volume 3 Page 172
Unit Data
26.1 in soil A
26.2 in air A
27 standard

Volume 3 Page 173
2.10 Technical Information
Drawings and Other Technical Information to be Provided
Denomination / Description
Ref. Description Reference in the Bid
of Material in the Bid
1 Contractor's quality control system

Copy of the QA system accreditation
1.1
certificates
Quality system manual with typical
1.2
procedures and quality control sheets
1.3 Environmental management manual
1.4 Occupational health and safety manual
2 Standards
Copy of technical standards proposed
for use instead of a relevant IEC or
2.1 other international standard, with list of
differences from relevant international
standard, if any
3 Substation arrangement
3.1 Substation Single Line Diagrams
3.2 Substation Layout drawing
3.2 Cross-section drawing
4 Circuit breakers
4.1 Manufacturer's authorization letter
Manufacturer's quality assurance certif-
4.2
icates
4.3 Technical data sheet
4.4 Drawing
4.5 List of performed type tests
4.6 Type test certificates
4.7 Descriptive catalogue
Reference list for the last five years for
4.8
the offered type
4.9 List of mandatory special tools
4.10 List of mandatory spare parts
4.11 List of recommended spare parts
4.12 Training plan and program
5 Disconnectors
5.2
icates
5.4 Drawing

Volume 3 Page 174
5.8
the offered type
6 Current transformers
6.2
icates
6.4 Drawing
6.8
the offered type
7 Voltage transformers
7.2
icates
7.4 Drawing
7.8
the offered type
8 Surge arresters
8.2
icates
8.4 Drawing
8.8
the offered type
9 Control system
9.2
icates
9.4 Drawing

Volume 3 Page 175
9.8
the offered type
10 Relay Protection System

10.2
icates
Drawing, system topology, block dia-
10.4
grams
10.5 General description of hardware
10.6 General description of software
10.8
the offered type
11 Metering System
11.2
icates
11.4 Drawing
11.8
the offered type
12 Communication System
12.2
icates
12.4 Drawing, system topology

Volume 3 Page 176
12.8
the offered type

Volume 3 Page 177
Schedule F: Departures from the Specifications

Bidders shall list all departures from the requirements of the specification in this schedule, whether
they are commercial, financial, technical or of a contractual nature, and shall attach this list to the
technical proposal.
Any item not listed in this schedule is deemed in full accordance with the requirements of the specifi-
cation.
No other document or detail accompanying the tender will be considered when evaluating departures.
Bidders are not permitted to offer any alternative to this schedule.
Item Volume Clause Detail of Departure from Specification

Volume 3 Page 178
Schedule G: Proposed Alternative Standards to

which Equipment shall be Provided
The Bidder shall list below all alternative engineering and design standards, which he proposes to use
in his design, manufacture and testing of equipment to be supplied. Should these standards differ from
the specified standard in any respect, the Bidder shall detail the differences between the proposed
and specified standard.
Compliance with any standard equal or superior to those specified will be considered acceptable.
If no alternative standards are listed, it is deemed that the standards specified in the bidding document
are fully complied with.
Alternative Standard
Specified Standard Number Title

Volume 3 Page 179
Schedule H: Proposed Contract and Site Or-

ganization
Personnel
The data on their experience should be supplied using the Form below for each candidate.
The Bidder must demonstrate that he has the personnel for the key positions that meet the following
requirements:
Total Work Experience

No. Position Work Experience In Similar Projects
(years) (years)
Contractor's Representative
1 15 10
Project Director / Project Manager
2 Substation Design Engineer 12 8
3 Site Manager 10 5
4 HV Electrical Engineer 10 5
5 Protection Engineer 10 5
6 Control Engineer 10 5
7 Substation Civil Engineer 10 5
8 Health & Safety (Accident Prevention) Officer* 8 5
9 Environmental Specialist* 8 5
Social / Land Acquisition / Compensation
10 8 5
Specialist*
* Workforce Management / Health & Safety (Accident Prevention) Officer, Environmental Specialist and Social / Commu-
nity Liaison and Land Acquisition / Compensation Specialist shall be responsible inter alia for development of site - and
works-specific CESMMP, including all sub-plans as indicated in Volume II (ERQ), Annex 1 and for the implementation of
these plans, including monitoring and related reporting within the standard progress reporting of the project.
All three specialists shall be full time position, during on-site construction.
All three specialist shall be familiar with the application of the World Bank Groups General EHS Guidelines and the
Sector EHS Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and Distribution and with the other international standards
as set out in Volume II (ERQ), Annex 1.
CVs of the three specialists have to be provided with the bidding documents, including evidence for each expert for
having worked with application of the required standards.
Each of the three specialists for E&S Management should be provided with appropriate assistance in terms of addi-
tional support staff of appropriate qualification to ensure due implementation of the CESMMP.
The numbers of support staff for each of the specialists/the final team set up for E&S Management of the Construc-
tion Phase shall be provided as part of the bidding document.
The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed personnel and their experience records in the rele-
vant information forms included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms) of Volume 1 of the Bidding Document
and below.

Volume 3 Page 180
Schedule I: Drawings and Documents to be

submitted with the Bid
The following drawings/documents shall be submitted with the bid:
1. Typical single line, layout and sectional drawings of substation showing details of construction
and dimensions.
2. Outline drawings of all switchgear equipment:

Showing installed dimensions and weights;
Showing transport dimensions and weights;
3. Outline drawings of all power transformers and auxiliary transformers:

Showing installed dimensions and weights;
Showing transport dimensions and weights;
4. Typical drawing of transformer remote control panel.
5. The following Type test certificates of the equipment of similar or higher specifications (higher
voltage &higher capacity) required by the bid shall be submitted as per relevant IEC.
Power Transformer
Dielectric tests (Induced over voltage test, Lightning impulse voltage withstand test, Sep-
arate source voltage withstand test).
Short circuit withstand test (special test)
Circuit Breaker (AIS)

Lightning impulse voltage withstand dry test.
Power frequency withstand test
Short time withstand & Peak withstand current test.
Mechanical operation tests.
Short circuit Current making & breaking test.
Out of phase making & breaking test.
Disconnector (AIS)
Lightning Impulse voltage withstand dry test.
Power frequency voltage withstand dry test.
Short time withstand current test.
Current Transformer (AIS)

Short time current test.
Impulse voltages withstand tests for current transformers for service in exposed installa-
tion.
Power frequency voltage withstand test.

Volume 3 Page 181
Voltage Transformer (AIS)

Impulse voltages withstand tests for voltage transformers for service in exposed installa-
tion.
Short circuit test
Short time over voltage test
Lightning Arrester(AIS)
Power frequency voltage withstands (wet & dry) and lightning impulse voltage withstand
tests on complete arrester housing.
Operating duty test.
Long duration current impulse withstand test.
Residual voltage test.
Pressure relief test.
Artificial pollution test.
Partial discharge test
Wave trap:
Impulse voltage test
Power frequency voltage test
Radio interference test
Short time current test
Measurement of tapping loss & tapping los based on the blocking resistance
For Substation Automation System and Protection Relays

Type test certificates from independent reputed testing laboratory for Protective relays as
per IEC 61850.
Power Cable
Bending test followed by partial discharge test
Tan Delta measurement
Heating cycle voltage test
Impulse withstand test
For Insulator Units (Disc & Post)

Dry lightning impulse voltage withstand test;
Wet power frequency voltage withstand test;
Electro-mechanical failing load test;
Thermal mechanical performance test;
Impulse voltage puncture test;
Power arc test.
For Battery and Charger
A) Battery
(i) Test for capacity.

(ii) Test for retention of charge.
(iii) Endurance Test.
(iv) Ampere-hour ( at 5 hour rate) and watt-hour efficiency test.
(v) Test for voltage during discharge.

Volume 3 Page 182
B) Battery Charger
(i) Measurement of voltage regulation / AVR regulation at
a) No Load
b) Half Load
c) Full Load
(ii) Efficiency and power factor measurement test
(iii) Temperature rises test so as to determine the temperature rise of SCR, Trans-
former primary, Secondary and core, Diode, capacitor, choke and cabinet etc.
(iv) Measurement of insulation resistance
a) AC input to earth.
b) AC input to DC output.
c) DC output to earth
(v) DC voltage current characteristic
(vi) High Voltage Tests
(vii) Determination of regulation
(viii) Measurement of ripple at
a) No load
b) Half load
c) Full load
(ix) Reverse leakage test.
For Telecommunication and Fiber Optic multiplexer equipment
Test report performed in manufacturers own factory witnessed by employer//inspection

agency or performed in any independent test laboratory
For DFDR
Test report performed in manufacturers own factory witnessed by employer//inspection

agency or performed in any independent test laboratory
All the offered above equipment must be type tested. The above mentioned type tests shall be
conducted in an independent accredited laboratory (accredited based on ISO / IEC Guide 25 /
17025 by the national accreditation body of the country where laboratory is located). Such type
test reports are required to be submitted with bid.
Type test certificates or reports for power transformers shall be from independent testing labora-
tory or manufacturer's own testing laboratory. Test carried out at manufacturer's own testing la-
boratory must have been witnessed by any one or more of the following persons:
A representative from an independent testing authority/ laboratory.

A representative from independent inspection agency.
6. ISO 9001/9002 Quality Assurance Certificate or equivalent and Quality Assurance Programme
& Typical Quality Plan for the work from the Manufacturers of the following equipment:
Power transformer
Switchgears (CB, DS/ES, CT, PT)
Relays& substation automation system
Fibre optic multiplexer equipment for protection and communication
Underground power cables
Surge arrester
Wave trap
DFDR

Volume 3 Page 183

The following form shall be filled and attached to the bid. Bidders are free to propose more than one
Subcontractor for each item.
Subcontractors
The following Subcontractors are proposed for carrying out the facilities:
Item Service Subcontractor's Name and Address Nationality
1. Electrical Works Subcontractor
2 Civil Works Subcontractor
Name of Bidder:
Signature of Bidder:

Bangladesh:TenderDocumentsforthe400/230kVSubstationAminbazar Volume3,ScheduleB,Page1
Schedule No. 1. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad
Unit Price1 Total Price1
Country Foreign Foreign Taxes and Duties-

Item Description Unit Quantity Currency Currency
of origin Local Currency
Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 420 kV shall be designed, supplied, delivered,
lot 1
installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,comprisethefollowing:
Circuit Breaker 420 kV, 4,000A, 63 kA /1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole (three nos
single phase CB per set, seven set will be gang operated & another four set will be single phase
A1 set 11
operated ), live tank type, SF6 gas insulated,equipped with Control Switching Device, equipped
withthreemotor-woundedspring-storedoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV without Earthing Switch, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV
A2.1 BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnector, equipped set 22
with3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV with Earthing Switch, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL,
A2.2 three pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with motor- set 7
operatedearthingswitches,equippedwith3+3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Earthing Switch 420 kV, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, post type, motor
A2.3 set 2
operatedearthingswitches,equippedwith3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Current transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, head type, 6-core,
A3 nos 45
multiratio,4,000/1A,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1,425/1,050kVBIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Capacitor voltage transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 3-
A4 secondary winding, 400/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V/V, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / nos 27
1,050kVBIL,capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 420 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur =
A5 336 kV, Uc = 268 kV, 10 kA nominal discharge current, 50 Hz Calculation shall be required during nos 21
designforconfirmation
Post insulator 420 kV, single phase, 12,5 kN, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL
A6 lot 1
Calculationshallberequiredduringdesignforconfirmation
The lot of conductors 420 kV, for two TUBULAR busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar
A7.X system, and for connection of the 420 kV switchgear, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz 1,425 / 1,050 lot 1
kVBIL,threephase.Allpossibleconnectionshouldbetubular
The lot of insulators and fittings including all necessary clamps and connectors required for
A8.X lot 1
completing420kVswitchgear.
The lot of gantry steel structures and equipment supports required for completing 420 kV
A9.X lot 1
switchgear.
NameofBidder:SignatureofBidder:
BGD2440SSvol3ScheduleB-Priceschedules_asperADB.1.xlsx/1equipmentfromabroad ______________________________________________________

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
lot 1
B1 MulticoreLowVoltageAuxiliaryPowerandControlCables set 2
Disconnector245kVwithoutEarthingSwitch,inseries,2,000A,50kA/1sec,50Hz,1,050/460
B2.1 kV BIL, three pole, centre break, post type, motor operated disconnectors without earthing set 2
switches,equippedwith1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 /
B2.2 460 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors set 6
withoutearthingswitches,equippedwith1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV with Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460
B2.3 kV BIL, three pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with set 2
motor-operatedearthingswitches,equippedwith1+1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Current transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, head type, 5-core,
B3 multi ratio, secondary re-connected, 800-1600/1A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, post nos 6
typecurrenttransformer.
Capacitor Voltage Transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 2-
B4 secondary winding, 230/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, nos 6
capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 245 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur =
B5 192 kV, Uc = 153 kV, 10 kA nominal discharge current, 50 Hz Calculation shall be required during nos 24
designforconfirmation
B6 Postinsulator245kV,singlephase,10kN,50kA/1sec,50Hz,1,050/460kVBIL nos 24
The lot of conductors 245 kV, for double busbars system and for connection of the 245 kV
B7.X lot 1
switchgear,2,000A,50kA/1sec,50Hz1,050/460kVBIL,threephase
B8.X lot 1
B9.X lot 1
switchgear.

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
lot 1
Circuit breaker 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vacuum circuit
C1 set 2
breaker,foroutdoorinstallation,equippedwithonespring-storedenergyoperatingmechanism
Disconnector 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vertical break, post
C2 set 2
type,horizontalorwallmounted,manuallyoperateddisconnectors
Current transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 3-core, single ratio, 800/1A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 /
C3 nos 6
70kVBIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Inductive voltage transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 2-secondary winding, 33/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3
C4 nos 6
kV/V/V,25kA/1sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,inductivetypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 36 kV, single phase, gapless, metal oxide type, Uc = 30 kV, Ur = 24 kV, 10 kA
C5 nos 9
nominaldischargecurrent,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,
The lot of conductors 36 kV, for connection of the 36 kV switchgear, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz,
C7.X lot 1
170/70kVBIL,threephase.
C8.X lot 1
C9.X lot 1
switchgear.

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
D Transformers
The set of complete equipment 400/230/33 kV for transformation of energy shall be designed,
supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, comprise the lot 1
following:
The Auto-transformer 400/235/33 kV, 420/520 MVA, YNa0d1, ONAN/ONAF, with tertiary winding,
D1 three phase, oil immersed, hermetically closed, with on-load tap changer; with single phase, 3- set 3
corecurrenttransformersinallbushings.CharacteristicsofCTswillbedefinedduringdesign
The set of Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall be provided for the new
D2 set 3
400/235/33kVautotransformerunits
F Earthing/Auxiliary Transformers
The set of complete equipment 33/0.4 kV for transformation of energy for auxiliary power supply
shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, lot 1
comprisethefollowing:
The auxiliary power transformer 33/0.4 kV, 200 kVA, ZNyn11, ONAN, oil immersed, three phase,
F1 with off-load tap changer; with single phase, 2-core current transformers in all bushings. set 2
CharacteristicsofCTswillbedefinedduringdesign

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Thelotofcompleteequipmentforcontrol,protection,alarm,SASandme-teringpanelsforthe
400kV&230kV&33kVsystemaswellasLVACandLVDCsystemshallbedesigned,
calculated,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract.
Thesequenceofthecontrolpanelsandprotectionpanelsshallmirrortheactualswitchyard
layout.Spaceshallbeprovidedadjacenttothecontrolandrelaysuitesforeachvoltagelevelto lot 1
accommodatesufficientpanelsforthefuturecircuitsindicatedinthesubstationlayoutdrawings.
Acontrolpanelshallaccommodatecompleteswitchgear.
Newequipmentshallbeconnectedwithandintegratedintotheexistingsystem.
Theequipmenttobesupplied,installedandcommissionedisshownonBidDrawingscomprising
Control, protection and SAS for four (4) sets of 400 kV Overhead Line circuits, including Control &
G1.1 set 4
ProtectionCubicles
Existing Control, protection and SAS for two (2) sets of 230 kV Overhead Line circuits, including
G1.2 Control & Protection Cubicles, shall be re-designed, re-connected, re-tested and reset 2
commissioned
Control, protection and SAS for three (3) set of 400/235/33 kV Auto Transformer circuit and
G2.1 associated Earthing/Auxiliary Transformer circuits, including Control & Protection Cubicles for HV set 3
side
Control, protection and SAS for three (3) set of 400/235/33 kV Auto Transformer circuit and
G2.2 associated Earthing/Auxiliary Transformer circuits, including Control & Protection Cubicles for LV set 3
side
Control, protection and SAS for two (2) set of 33/0,4 kV Auxiliary Transformer circuits, including
G2.3 set 2
Control&ProtectionCubicles
Control, protection and SAS for complete LV part of the Substation, AC & DC, including Control &
G3.1 set 1
ProtectionCubicles
Substation Automation System for complete Substation, including software and tools, including
G4.1 set 1
SCADAserverandequipment
Control, protection and SAS for two 400 kV busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar system,
G5.1 set 2
includingcontrol&protectioncubicles
Extension of existing Control, protection and SAS for two 230 kV busbars, including control &
G5.2 lot 2
protectioncubicles
Tariff metering panel(s) to accommodate programmable & recordable digital 3-phase, 4-wire
import and export MWh and MVAr meters (accuracy class 0.2) for each line and transformer
G6.X set 7
feeder.
Foreachfeeder,minimumtwo(2)meters(main-1&main-2)aretobeprovided.
G7.X DigitalFaultandDisturbanceRecorder(DFDR)toaccommodateallfeeders. lot 1

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Thelotofhardwareandsoftwaretoprovidetele-control&telemeteringfacilitiesrequiredbothat
theexistingNationalLoadDespatchCentre(NLDC)atAftabnagarandtheback-upstationat
BiddutBhabanforintegrationofthecompletenew400/230/132kVsubstation.
AllrequiredelectricalsignalsshallbetransmittedtotheNLDCandtheback-upstationthrough
theindustrialgatewayofthesubstationautomationsystem.
G8.X lot 1
AllHVcircuitbreakers,motorizeddisconnectors,tapchanger,etc.,shallbecontrolledfromthe
NLDCthroughthegatewayofthesubstationautomationsystemusingtheIEC60870-5-104
protocol.
AllnecessarymodificationworksinthesoftwareofthemasterstationoftheNLDCandtheback-
upstationaretobecarriedout.
Extensionoftheexistingequipment,necessaryadjustment,adaptation,modification,integration
G9.X lot 1
andconfigurationofnewandexistingequipmentinNLDC

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
H
Fibre Optic Multiplexer Equipment for Teleprotection and Communication
New equipment shall be connected with and integrated into the existing system.
Thesetofcompleteequipmentforoutdoorandindoorfibreopticmultiplexerequipmentfor
protection&communicationatsubstationshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,tested
H1.X andcommissioned,underthiscontract. set 1
Fibreopticmultiplexerequipmentistobeprovidedfor.
Distancerelaycarriersignal(mainandback-up)
Busprotection/breakerfailurerelay
SCADAdatafromswitchgearandcontrolsystem
Hot-linetelephonesystem
H2.X Deleted
Thelotofundergroundopticalfibre(48cores)cablesfromterminalboxatgantrystructureto
MDF(MaindistributionFrame)shallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedand
H3.X lot 1
commissionedincontrolroom.TheContractincludessupplyandinstallationofMDFanddigital
cableswithadequatelength.
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV
H4.X Transmission Line, including Line Traps, Coupling units, cables etc., shall be designed, supplied, set 4
delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned;whichcomprisesthefollowing:
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV
H4.X(i) set 4
TransmissionLine,Couplingunits,cablesetc.
H4.X
complete400kVLineTraps set 4
(ii)
Thecompletesetofmulticorelowvoltageauxiliarypowerandcontrolcablesbetweenallitemsof
equipmentsuppliedunderthecontractandforconnectionandintegrationofthenewequipment
I1.X withtheexistingequipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedand lot 1
commissionedwithnecessarygland,terminated,andidentifiedbycolours&tags.Theproduction
oftheoverallsubstationcableroutingandcoreschedulesshallalsobeprovided.

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)sets110Vsubstationbatteriescompletewithchargersand
distributionswitchboardshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedand
commissioned,underthiscontract,toprovideallDCsuppliestoequipmentbeingsuppliedforthe
newsubstation.
Onesetshallbeusedasstandbysupply.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,
J1.X lot 1
accordingtothedetaildesign
Thesystemshallgenerallybeasshowninthebiddrawingsandshallincludethefollowing.
(a)Two(2)setsNi-cadmium100%batteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan400
Ahatthe10-hourrateofdischarge.
(b)Two(2)setsbatterychargerscomplete,eachfloatchargeshallnotbelessthan100Arating.
(c)One(1)setofDCdistributionswitchboards.
Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)setsof48VDCsystemcompletewithchargersand
distributionswitchboardshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedand
commissionedinthecontrolbuildingtoprovideallDCsuppliesforfibreopticmultiplexer
equipmentforcommunicationandprotection.Onesetshallbeusedasstandbysupply.
J2.X ThesystemshallgenerallybeasshowninBidDrawingsandshallincludethefollowing. lot 1
(a)Two(2)sets100%Ni-cadmiumbatteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan250
Ahatthe10-hourrateofdischarge.
(c)One(1)setofDCdistributionswitchboard.

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
ThecompletelotLVACswitchboardforsubstationservicesshallbedesigned,supplied,
delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,toprovidethe400/230V
suppliestoallequipmentbeingsupplied.
ThesystemshallgenerallybeasperBidDrawingsandshallincludeone125Aoutdoor
K1.X lot 1
weatherproof,3-phasewithneutralandearthswitchedsocketoutletandplugtoIEC60309;tobe
installed,cabledandconnectedadjacenttotheautotransformers.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,
accordingtothedetaildesign
L1.X The land development of complete switchyard area will be provided by another contractor lot 0
L2.X Complete outdoor civil works, excluding piling works
i) _Outdoorgantryfoundation400kVswitchyard lot 1
ii) _Outdoorequipmentfoundation400kVswitchyard lot 1
iii) _Outdoorgantryfoundation230kVswitchyard lot 1
iv) _Outdoorequipmentfoundation230kVswitchyard lot 1
v)_Outdoor equipment foundation 33kV switchyard lot 1
vi) _Outdoor gantry foundation 33kV switchyard lot 1
vii)_Transformer foundation including oilpit & carrage way lot 1
viii)_Blast wall lot 1
ix) _Security Boundary Wall with slope protection*** m
x)_Substation Main gate each 0
xi) _Chain Link Fencing*** m
xii)_Approach raod lot 1
xiii)_Internal road lot 1
xiv) _Surface drain lot 1
xv) _Cable Trench lot 1
xvi) _Switchyard surface finishing, drainage system including surface drain lot 1
xvii) _Gravel laying lot 1
xviii)_Septic tank, sowak way lot 1
xix) _Pump house including deep tubewell, motor, pump, water reservaoir, water pipe line etc. lot 1
xx) _Gurd house, sentry post, car port lot 1

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
L3.X Complete civil works for Switchyard Panel Room
1) Complete civil works for 400kV & 230kV relay, control & auxiliary house
i) _Foundation works lot 1
ii) _Super structures lot 1
iii) _All finish works lot 1
L4.X Fire alarm & fire fighting system lot 1

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Thelotofcompleteequipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedand
M1.X commissioned,toprovidelighting,LVpowersupply,airconditioningsystem,ventilationand lot 1
emergencyDClightingforthesubstationrelay,controlandauxiliaryhouses.
N1.X commissioned,toprovideswitchyardlightingforsecurity,roadwayandswitchyardand lot 1
emergencyDClightingatstrategiclocationsforequipmentoperationsandinspections.

commissioned,ofearthingsystemandlightningprotectionscreenincludingconnections,
P1.X lot 1
connectorsandclamps,tosuitthesubstationoverallarrangementandprovidesupportingdesign
calculations.
Thesetsof3-phaseportable(maintenance)earthingequipmentdeviceswithconnectorsand
P2 set 4
telescopicglassfibreoperatingpolesuitableforplantsupplied.
Q Cable 230 kV & 36kV

The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and
11setsx
commissioned of 245 kV, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, single phase XLPE
Q1 m 200m=
cable. Approximate lengths are 150 and 250 meters respectively (Payment will be at actual
2,200m
quantitybasisifquantityincreasesordecreasesduringexecution)
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and
Twentytwo
Q2 commissioned of 245 kV, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, cable end terminal set
(22)sets
endforsinglephaseXLPEcable
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and
commissioned of 36 kV, 630A, 25kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable.
Q3 Approximatelengthsare150meters. m 450
(Paymentwillbeatactualquantitybasisifquantityincreasesordecreasesduringexecution)
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and
Q4 commissioned of 36 kV, 630A, 25kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, cable end terminal end for lot 1
singlephaseXLPEcable

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Mandatory Spare Parts

A1.1 Circuitbreaker420kV,Trippingcoil set 3
A1.2 Circuitbreaker420kV,Closingcoil set 3
A1.3 Circuitbreaker420kV,Motor,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories set 2

Circuitbreaker420kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,
A1.4 set 1
oneofeachtype
Circuitbreaker420kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,
A1.5 set 1
etc.,inmotordrivemechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype
A1.6 Circuitbreaker420kV,SF6temperaturecompensatedmanometer set 2
A1.7 Circuitbreaker420kV,SF6gas(40kg)cylinder set 1

Disconnector420kVwithearthingswitch-onecompletepole,togetherwithonecompletemotor
A.22.1 driveoperatingmechanismofmainbladesandonecompletemotordriveoperatingmechanism nos 3
oftheearthingblades
Currenttransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,headtype,5-core,
A3 multiratio,secondaryre-connected,1000-2000-4000/1A,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kV nos 3
BIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Capacitorvoltagetransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,2-
A4 secondarywinding,400/V3/110/V3/110/V3kV/V/V,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL, nos 3
capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surgearrester420kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=
A5 nos 3
336kV,Uc=268kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz
A6 Postinsulator420kV,singlephase,12,5kN,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL nos 3
B1.1 Circuitbreaker245kV,Trippingcoil set 2
B1.2 Circuitbreaker245kV,Closingcoil set 2
B1.3 Circuitbreaker245kV,Motor,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories set 1

Circuitbreaker245kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,
B1.4 set 1
oneofeachtype

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
Circuitbreaker245kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,
B1.5 set 1
etc.,inmotordrivemechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype
B1.6 Circuitbreaker245kV,SF6temperaturecompensatedmanometer set 1
Surgearrester245kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=
B5 nos 3
192kV,Uc=153kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
D Transformers
D1.1 TransformerBushing420kV set 1
D1.3 Transformeroil kg 5,000
D1.4 Transformersilicagel kg 40
D1.5 Transformerventilatorwithmotor set 4

Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inTransformer
D1.6 lot 1
controlcabinet,oneofeachtype
Contactors,relays,auxiliarycontacts,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,in
D1.7 lot 1
OLTCMotorDrivemechanism,oneofeachtype
D1.8 Thermometer,oneofeachtype lot 1
D1.9 Thermostat,oneofeachtype lot 1

Portion CIP Portion
[xxxxx] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9
G11.1 Linedifferentialprotectionrelay set 1
G11.2 Linedistanceprotectionrelay set 1
G11.3 TransformerdifferentialrelaywithcompleteREFfunction set 1
G11.4 Overcurrentandearthfaultrelay set 1
G11.5 Baycontrolunit set 1
G11.6 TripCircuitSupervisionrelay,3phase set 1
G11.7 Electronicmeter,sameasinstalled,includingcommunicationunit set 1

Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeach
J11.1 lot 1
type
Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeach
K11.1 lot 1
type
Total Columns 8 to be carried forward to Schedule No. 5 - Grand Summary
1 SpecifycurrenciesinaccordancewithITB19.1oftheBDS.Createadditionalcolumnsforuptoamaximumofthreeforeigncurrencies,ifsorequired.
*** The quantity mentioned above as "set(s) or no(s) or m or m^2/sqm or CuM/m^3"may increase or decrease during execution stage, but the payment shall be at actual basis.
*** For Civil item: "Security Boundary wall with slope protection & Chain link fencing" shall be finalized during execution stage and payment shall be at actual.
Bangladesh: Tender Documents for the 400/230 kV Substation Aminbazar Volume 3, Schedule B, Page 1
Country of Origin Declaration Form
Item Description Country
420 kV switchgear, equipment connection and steel structures
Name of Bidder: Signature of Bidder:
BGD 2440 SS vol 3 Schedule B - Price schedules_as per ADB.1.xlsx / 1a Country Origin ______________________________________________________
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employer's Country
Country Local Currency Local Currency Sales & other

Item Description Unit Quantity Portion Portion
of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 420 kV shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and
lot 1
commissioned,underthiscontract,comprisethefollowing:
Circuit Breaker 420 kV, 4,000A, 63 kA /1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole (three nos single phase CB per
set, seven set will be gang operated & another four set will be single phase operated ), live tank type, SF6 gas
A1 set 11
insulated,equipped with Control Switching Device, equipped with three motor-wounded spring-stored operating
mechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV without Earthing Switch, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, three
A2.1 column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnector, equipped with 3 motor & manual operating set 22
mechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV with Earthing Switch, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, three
A2.2 column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated earthing switches, equipped set 7
with3+3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Earthing Switch 420 kV, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, post type, motor operated earthing
A2.3 set 2
switches,equippedwith3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Current transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, head type, 6-core, multi ratio, 4,000/1A,
A3 nos 45
63kA/1sec,50Hz,1,425/1,050kVBIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Capacitor voltage transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 3-secondary winding, 400/V3
A4 nos 27
/110/V3/110/V3/110/V3kV/V/V/V,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1,425/1,050kVBIL,capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 420 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur = 336 kV, Uc = 268 kV,
A5 nos 21
10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50HzCalculationshallberequiredduringdesignforconfirmation
Post insulator 420 kV, single phase, 12,5 kN, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL Calculation shall be
A6 lot 1
requiredduringdesignforconfirmation
The lot of conductors 420 kV, for two TUBULAR busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar system, and for
A7.X connection of the 420 kV switchgear, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three phase. All possible lot 1
connectionshouldbetubular
The lot of insulators and fittings including all necessary clamps and connectors required for completing 420 kV
A8.X lot 1
switchgear.
A9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting420kVswitchgear. lot 1
BGD2440SSvol3ScheduleB-Priceschedules_asperADB.1.xlsx/2equipmentemplcountry ______________________________________________________

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
lot 1
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in series, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, three
B2.1 pole, centre break, post type, motor operated disconnectors without earthing switches, equipped with 1 motor & set 2
manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, three
B2.2 pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors without earthing switches, equipped set 6
with1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV with Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, three pole,
B2.3 three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated earthing switches, set 2
equippedwith1+1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Current transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, head type, 5-core, multi ratio,
B3 nos 6
secondaryre-connected,800-1600/1A,50kA/1sec,50Hz,1,050/460kVBIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Capacitor Voltage Transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 2-secondary winding,
B4 nos 6
230/V3/110/V3/110/V3kV/V/V,50kA/1sec,50Hz,1,050/460kVBIL,capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 245 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur = 192 kV, Uc = 153 kV,
B5 nos 24
10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50HzCalculationshallberequiredduringdesignforconfirmation
The lot of conductors 245 kV, for double busbars system and for connection of the 245 kV switchgear, 2,000 A, 50
B7.X lot 1
kA/1sec,50Hz1,050/460kVBIL,threephase
B8.X lot 1
switchgear.
B9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting245kVswitchgear. lot 1

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
lot 1
Circuit breaker 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vacuum circuit breaker, for outdoor
C1 set 2
installation,equippedwithonespring-storedenergyoperatingmechanism
Disconnector 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vertical break, post type, horizontal or
C2 set 2
wallmounted,manuallyoperateddisconnectors
Current transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 3-core, single ratio, 800/1A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, post
C3 nos 6
typecurrenttransformer.
Inductive voltage transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 2-secondary winding, 33/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 25 kA / 1
C4 nos 6
sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,inductivetypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 36 kV, single phase, gapless, metal oxide type, Uc = 30 kV, Ur = 24 kV, 10 kA nominal discharge
C5 nos 9
current,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,
The lot of conductors 36 kV, for connection of the 36 kV switchgear, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL,
C7.X lot 1
threephase.
C8.X lot 1
switchgear.
C9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting36kVswitchgear. lot 1

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
D Transformers
The set of complete equipment 400/230/33 kV for transformation of energy shall be designed, supplied, delivered,
lot 1
The Auto-transformer 400/235/33 kV, 420/520 MVA, YNa0d1, ONAN/ONAF, with tertiary winding, three phase, oil
D1 immersed, hermetically closed, with on-load tap changer; with single phase, 3-core current transformers in all set 3
bushings.CharacteristicsofCTswillbedefinedduringdesign
The set of Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall be provided for the new 400/235/33 kV
D2 set 3
autotransformerunits
The set of complete equipment 33/0.4 kV for transformation of energy for auxiliary power supply shall be designed,
lot 1
supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,comprisethefollowing:
The auxiliary power transformer 33/0.4 kV, 200 kVA, ZNyn11, ONAN, oil immersed, three phase, with off-load tap
F1 changer; with single phase, 2-core current transformers in all bushings. Characteristics of CTs will be defined during set 2
design

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
Thelotofcompleteequipmentforcontrol,protection,alarm,SASandmeteringpanelsforthe400kV&230kV&33
kVsystemaswellasLVACandLVDCsystemshallbedesigned,calculated,supplied,delivered,installed,tested
andcommissioned,underthiscontract.
Thesequenceofthecontrolpanelsandprotectionpanelsshallmirrortheactualswitchyardlayout.Spaceshallbe
providedadjacenttothecontrolandrelaysuitesforeachvoltageleveltoaccommodatesufficientpanelsforthe lot 1
futurecircuitsindicatedinthesubstationlayoutdrawings.
Theequipmenttobesupplied,installedandcommissionedisshownonBidDrawingscomprisingthefollowing.
Control, protection and SAS for four (4) sets of 400 kV Overhead Line circuits, including Control & Protection
G1.1 set 4
Cubicles
Existing Control, protection and SAS for two (2) sets of 230 kV Overhead Line circuits, including Control &
G1.2 set 2
ProtectionCubicles,shallbere-designed,re-connected,re-testedandre-commissioned
Control, protection and SAS for three (3) set of 400/235/33 kV Auto Transformer circuit and associated
G2.1 set 3
Earthing/AuxiliaryTransformercircuits,includingControl&ProtectionCubiclesforHVside
G2.2 set 3
Earthing/AuxiliaryTransformercircuits,includingControl&ProtectionCubiclesforLVside
Control, protection and SAS for two (2) set of 33/0,4 kV Auxiliary Transformer circuits, including Control & Protection
G2.3 set 2
Cubicles
Control, protection and SAS for complete LV part of the Substation, AC & DC, including Control & Protection
G3.1 set 1
Cubicles
Substation Automation System for complete Substation, including software and tools, including SCADA server and
G4.1 set 1
equipment
Control, protection and SAS for two 400 kV busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar system, including control &
G5.1 set 2
protectioncubicles
G5.2 ExtensionofexistingControl,protectionandSASfortwo230kVbusbars,includingcontrol&protectioncubicles lot 2
Tariff metering panel(s) to accommodate programmable & recordable digital 3-phase, 4-wire import and export
G6.X MWhandMVArmeters(accuracyclass0.2)foreachlineandtransformerfeeder. set 7

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
Thelotofhardwareandsoftwaretoprovidetele-control&telemeteringfacilitiesrequiredbothattheexisting
NationalLoadDespatchCentre(NLDC)atAftabnagarandtheback-upstationatBiddutBhabanforintegrationof
thecompletenew400/230/132kVsubstation.
AllrequiredelectricalsignalsshallbetransmittedtotheNLDCandtheback-upstationthroughtheindustrial
G8.X gatewayofthesubstationautomationsystem. lot 1
AllHVcircuitbreakers,motorizeddisconnectors,tapchanger,etc.,shallbecontrolledfromtheNLDCthroughthe
gatewayofthesubstationautomationsystemusingtheIEC60870-5-104protocol.
AllnecessarymodificationworksinthesoftwareofthemasterstationoftheNLDCandtheback-upstationaretobe
carriedout.
Extensionoftheexistingequipment,necessaryadjustment,adaptation,modification,integrationandconfigurationof
G9.X lot 1
newandexistingequipmentinNLDC
H
Thesetofcompleteequipmentforoutdoorandindoorfibreopticmultiplexerequipmentforprotection&
communicationatsubstationshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthis
H1.X contract. set 1
H2.X Deleted
Thelotofundergroundopticalfibre(48cores)cablesfromterminalboxatgantrystructuretoMDF(Maindistribution
H3.X Frame)shallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedincontrolroom.TheContract lot 1
includessupplyandinstallationofMDFanddigitalcableswithadequatelength.
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV Transmission Line,
H4.X including Line Traps, Coupling units, cables etc., shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and set 4
commissioned,whichcomprisesthefollowing:
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV Transmission Line,
H4.X(i) set 4
Couplingunits,cablesetc.
H4.X(ii) complete400kVLineTraps set 4

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
Thecompletesetofmulticorelowvoltageauxiliarypowerandcontrolcablesbetweenallitemsofequipment
suppliedunderthecontractandforconnectionandintegrationofthenewequipmentwiththeexistingequipment
1.X shallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedwithnecessarygland,terminated,and lot 1
identifiedbycolours&tags.Theproductionoftheoverallsubstationcableroutingandcoreschedulesshallalsobe
provided.
Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)sets110Vsubstationbatteriescompletewithchargersanddistribution
switchboardshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,to
provideallDCsuppliestoequipmentbeingsuppliedforthenewsubstation.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,accordingtothe
J1.X detaildesign lot 1
(a)Two(2)setsNi-cadmium100%batteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan400Ahatthe10-hour
rateofdischarge.
Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)setsof48VDCsystemcompletewithchargersanddistributionswitchboard
shallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedinthecontrolbuildingtoprovideallDC
suppliesforfibreopticmultiplexerequipmentforcommunicationandprotection.Onesetshallbeusedasstandby
supply.
(a)Two(2)sets100%Ni-cadmiumbatteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan250Ahatthe10-hour
rateofdischarge.
ThecompletelotLVACswitchboardforsubstationservicesshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,tested
andcommissioned,underthiscontract,toprovidethe400/230Vsuppliestoallequipmentbeingsupplied.
ThesystemshallgenerallybeasperBidDrawingsandshallincludeone125Aoutdoorweatherproof,3-phasewith
K1.X neutralandearthswitchedsocketoutletandplugtoIEC60309;tobeinstalled,cabledandconnectedadjacentto lot 1
theautotransformers.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,accordingtothe
detaildesign

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8

v) _Outdoor equipment foundation 33kV switchyard lot 1
vi) _Outdoor gantry foundation 33kV switchyard lot 1
vii) _Transformer foundation including oilpit & carrage way lot 1
viii) _Blast wall lot 1
ix) _Security Boundary Wall with slope protection*** m
x) _Substation Main gate each 0
xi) _Chain Link Fencing*** m
xii) _Approach raod lot 1
xiii) _Internal road lot 1
xiv) _Surface drain lot 1
xv) _Cable Trench lot 1
xvi) _Switchyard surface finishing, drainage system including surface drain lot 1
xvii) _Gravel laying lot 1
xviii) _Septic tank, sowak way lot 1
xix) _Pump house including deep tubewell, motor, pump, water reservaoir, water pipe line etc. lot 1
xx) _Gurd house, sentry post, car port lot 1
1) Complete civil works for 400kV & 230kV relay, control & auxiliary house
i) _Foundation works lot 1
ii) _Super structures lot 1
iii) _All finish works lot 1
L4.X Fire alarm & fire fighting system lot 1

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
Thelotofcompleteequipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,to
M1.X providelighting,LVpowersupply,airconditioningsystem,ventilationandemergencyDClightingforthesubstation lot 1
controlbuilding.
N1.X provideswitchyardlightingforsecurity,roadwayandswitchyardandemergencyDClightingatstrategiclocationsfor lot 1
equipmentoperationsandinspections.
Thelotofcompleteequipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,of
P1.X earthingsystemandlightningprotectionscreenincludingconnections,connectorsandclamps,tosuitthesubstation lot 1
overallarrangementandprovidesupportingdesigncalculations.
Thesetsof3-phaseportable(maintenance)earthingequipmentdeviceswithconnectorsandtelescopicglassfibre
P2 set 4
operatingpolesuitableforplantsupplied.
Q Cable 230 kV
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned of 245 kV,
11setsx200
Q1 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable. Approximate lengths are 150 and 250 m
m=2,200m
metersrespectively(Paymentwillbeatactualquantitybasisifquantityincreasesordecreasesduringexecution)
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned of 245 kV, Twentytwo
Q2 set
2,000A,50kA/1sec,50Hz,1,050/460kVBIL,cableendterminalendforsinglephaseXLPEcable (22)sets
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and commissioned of 36 kV,
630A,25kA/1sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,singlephaseXLPEcable.Approximatelengthsare150meters.
Q3 m 450
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and commissioned of 36 kV,
Q4 lot 1
630A,25kA/1sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,cableendterminalendforsinglephaseXLPEcable

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8

A1.4 Circuitbreaker420kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,oneofeachtype set 1
Circuitbreaker420kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inmotordrive
A1.5 set 1
mechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype
Disconnector420kVwithearthingswitch-onecompletepole,togetherwithonecompletemotordriveoperating
A.22.1 nos 3
mechanismofmainbladesandonecompletemotordriveoperatingmechanismoftheearthingblades
Currenttransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,headtype,5-core,multiratio,
A3 secondaryre-connected,1000-2000-4000/1A,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL,posttypecurrent nos 3
transformer.
Capacitorvoltagetransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,2-secondarywinding,400/V3
A4 nos 3
/110/V3/110/V3kV/V/V,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL,capacitortypevoltagetransformers.
Surgearrester420kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=336kV,Uc=268kV,
A5 nos 3
10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
B1.4 Circuitbreaker245kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,oneofeachtype set 1
Circuitbreaker245kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inmotordrive
B1.5 set 1
mechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype
Surgearrester245kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=192kV,Uc=153kV,
B5 nos 3
10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
D Transformers
D1.3 Transformeroil kg 5000
Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inTransformercontrolcabinet,oneof
D1.6 lot 1
eachtype
Contactors,relays,auxiliarycontacts,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inOLTCMotorDrive
D1.7 lot 1
mechanism,oneofeachtype

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8

of origin Taxes
EXW EXW
[BDT] [BDT]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=5x6 8
J11.1 Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeachtype lot 1
K11.1 Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeachtype lot 1
Total Column 7 to be carried forward to Schedule No. 5 - Grand Summary
Column5,EXWPriceshallincludeallcustomsdutiesandsalesandothertaxesalreadypaidorpayableonthecomponentsandrawmaterialsusedinthe
2
manufactureorassemblyoftheitemorthecustomsdutiesandsalesandothertaxesalreadypaidonpreviouslyimporteditems
Schedule No. 3. Design Services
Foreign
Item Description Unit Quantity Local Currency Foreign Local Currency
Currency
Portion Currency Portion
Portion
[BDT] Portion [xxxxx] [BDT]
[xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7=4x5 8=4x6
21 420 kV switchgear, equipment connection and steel structures Lump sum 1
Total Columns 7 and 8 to be carried forward to Schedule No. 5 - Grand Summary
1 Specify currencies in accordance with ITB 19.1 of the BDS. Create additional columns for up to a maximum of three foreign currencies, if so required.
BGD 2440 SS vol 3 Schedule B - Price schedules_as per ADB.1.xlsx / 3 design services ______________________________________________________
Schedule No. 4. Installation and Other Services
Local Currency Foreign Local Currency Foreign Currency

Country Portion Currency Portion Portion
Item Description of origin Unit Quantity [BDT] Portion [xxxxx] [BDT] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
The set of complete equipment for switchgear 420 kV shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested
lot 1
andcommissioned,underthiscontract,comprisethefollowing:
Circuit Breaker 420 kV, 4,000A, 63 kA /1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole (three nos single phase
CB per set, seven set will be gang operated & another four set will be single phase operated ), live tank type,
A1 set 11
SF6 gas insulated,equipped with Control Switching Device, equipped with three motor-wounded spring-
storedoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV without Earthing Switch, 4000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole,
A2.1 three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnector, equipped with 3 motor & manual set 22
operatingmechanism.
Disconnector 420 kV with Earthing Switch, 4000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole,
A2.2 three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated earthing set 7
switches,equippedwith3+3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Earthing Switch 420 kV, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three pole, post type, motor operated
A2.3 set 2
earthingswitches,equippedwith3motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
A3 nos 45
4,000/1A,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1,425/1,050kVBIL,posttypecurrenttransformer.
Capacitor voltage transformer 420 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 3-secondary winding,
A4 400/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V/V, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, capacitor type nos 27
voltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 420 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur = 336 kV, Uc =
A5 nos 21
268kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50HzCalculationshallberequiredduringdesignforconfirmation
Post insulator 420 kV, single phase, 12,5 kN, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL Calculation shall be
A6 lot 1
requiredduringdesignforconfirmation
The lot of conductors 420 kV, for two TUBULAR busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar system, and
A7.X for connection of the 420 kV switchgear, 4,000 A, 63 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz 1,425 / 1,050 kV BIL, three phase. All lot 1
possibleconnectionshouldbetubular
The lot of insulators and fittings including all necessary clamps and connectors required for completing 420
A8.X lot 1
kVswitchgear.
A9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting420kVswitchgear. lot 1
BGD2440SSvol3ScheduleB-Priceschedules_asperADB.1.xlsx/4Installation&otherservices ______________________________________________________

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7

lot 1
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in series, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL,
B2.1 three pole, centre break, post type, motor operated disconnectors without earthing switches, equipped with set 2
1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV without Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL,
B2.2 threepole,three column, double break,posttype,motoroperateddisconnectorswithoutearthingswitches, set 6
equippedwith1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
Disconnector 245 kV with Earthing Switch, in parallel, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL,
B2.3 three pole, three column, double break, post type, motor operated disconnectors with motor-operated set 2
earthingswitches,equippedwith1+1motor&manualoperatingmechanism.
B3 secondary re-connected, 800-1600/1A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, post type current nos 6
transformer.
Capacitor Voltage Transformer 245 kV, single-phase, oil insulated, hermetically closed, 2-secondary winding,
B4 230/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, capacitor type voltage nos 6
transformers.
Surge arrester 245 kV, single phase, heavy duty station class, gapless, metal oxide type, Ur = 192 kV, Uc =
B5 nos 24
153kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50HzCalculationshallberequiredduringdesignforconfirmation
The lot of conductors 245 kV, for double busbars system and for connection of the 245 kV switchgear, 2,000
B7.X lot 1
A,50kA/1sec,50Hz1,050/460kVBIL,threephase
The lot of insulators and fittings including all necessary clamps and connectors required for completing 245
B8.X lot 1
kVswitchgear.
B9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting245kVswitchgear. lot 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
lot 1
Circuit breaker 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vacuum circuit breaker, for
C1 set 2
outdoorinstallation,equippedwithonespring-storedenergyoperatingmechanism
Disconnector 36 kV, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL, three pole, vertical break, post type,
C2 set 2
horizontalorwallmounted,manuallyoperateddisconnectors
Current transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 3-core, single ratio, 800/1A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV BIL,
C3 nos 6
posttypecurrenttransformer.
Inductive voltage transformer 36 kV, single-phase, 2-secondary winding, 33/V3 / 110/V3 / 110/V3 kV/V/V, 25
C4 nos 6
kA/1sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,inductivetypevoltagetransformers.
Surge arrester 36 kV, single phase, gapless, metal oxide type, Uc = 30 kV, Ur = 24 kV, 10 kA nominal
C5 nos 9
dischargecurrent,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,
The lot of conductors 36 kV, for connection of the 36 kV switchgear, 630 A, 25 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 170 / 70 kV
C7.X lot 1
BIL,threephase.
C8.X lot 1
switchgear.
C9.X Thelotofgantrysteelstructuresandequipmentsupportsrequiredforcompleting36kVswitchgear. lot 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
D Transformers
The set of complete equipment 400/230/33 kV for transformation of energy shall be designed, supplied,
lot 1
delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,comprisethefollowing:
The Auto-transformer 400/235/33 kV, 420/520 MVA, YNa0d1, ONAN/ONAF, with tertiary winding, three
D1 phase, oil immersed, hermetically closed, with on-load tap changer; with single phase, 3-core current set 3
transformersinallbushings.CharacteristicsofCTswillbedefinedduringdesign
The set of Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall be provided for the new 400/235/33 kV
D2 set 3
autotransformerunits
The set of complete equipment 33/0.4 kV for transformation of energy for auxiliary power supply shall be
designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned, under this contract, comprise the lot 1
following:
The auxiliary power transformer 33/0.4 kV, 200 kVA, ZNyn11, ONAN, oil immersed, three phase, with off-
F1 load tap changer; with single phase, 2-core current transformers in all bushings. Characteristics of CTs will set 2
bedefinedduringdesign

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7

Thelotofcompleteequipmentforcontrol,protection,alarm,SASandme-teringpanelsforthe400kV&
230kV&33kVsystemaswellasLVACandLVDCsystemshallbedesigned,calculated,supplied,
delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract.
Thesequenceofthecontrolpanelsandprotectionpanelsshallmirrortheactualswitchyardlayout.Space
shallbeprovidedadjacenttothecontrolandrelaysuitesforeachvoltageleveltoaccommodatesufficient
lot 1
panelsforthefuturecircuitsindicatedinthesubstationlayoutdrawings.
Theequipmenttobesupplied,installedandcommissionedisshownonBidDrawingscomprisingthe
following.
Control, protection and SAS for four (4) sets of 400 kV Overhead Line circuits, including Control & Protection
G1.1 set 4
Cubicles
Existing Control, protection and SAS for two (2) sets of 230 kV Overhead Line circuits, including Control &
G1.2 set 2
ProtectionCubicles,shallbere-designed,re-connected,re-testedandre-commissioned
G2.1 set 3
Earthing/AuxiliaryTransformercircuits,includingControl&ProtectionCubiclesforHVside
G2.2 set 3
Earthing/AuxiliaryTransformercircuits,includingControl&ProtectionCubiclesforLVside
Control, protection and SAS for two (2) set of 33/0,4 kV Auxiliary Transformer circuits, including Control &
G2.3 set 2
ProtectionCubicles
Control, protection and SAS for complete LV part of the Substation, AC & DC, including Control & Protection
G3.1 set 1
Cubicles
Substation Automation System for complete Substation, including software and tools, including SCADA
G4.1 set 1
serverandequipment
Control, protection and SAS for two 400 kV busbars, in one and half breaker type busbar system, including
G5.1 set 2
control&protectioncubicles
Extension of existing Control, protection and SAS for two 230 kV busbars, including control & protection
G5.2 lot 2
cubicles
Tariff metering panel(s) to accommodate programmable & recordable digital 3-phase, 4-wire import and
G6.X exportMWhandMVArmeters(accuracyclass0.2)foreachlineandtransformerfeeder. set 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
Thelotofhardwareandsoftwaretoprovidetele-control&telemeteringfacilitiesrequiredbothattheexisting
NationalLoadDespatchCentre(NLDC)atAftabnagarandtheback-upstationatBiddutBhabanfor
integrationofthecompletenew400/230/132kVsubstation.
AllrequiredelectricalsignalsshallbetransmittedtotheNLDCandtheback-upstationthroughtheindustrial
G8.X gatewayofthesubstationautomationsystem. lot 1
AllHVcircuitbreakers,motorizeddisconnectors,tapchanger,etc.,shallbecontrolledfromtheNLDC
throughthegatewayofthesubstationautomationsystemusingtheIEC60870-5-104protocol.
AllnecessarymodificationworksinthesoftwareofthemasterstationoftheNLDCandtheback-upstation
aretobecarriedout.
Extensionoftheexistingequipment,necessaryadjustment,adaptation,modification,integrationand
G9.X lot 1
configurationofnewandexistingequipmentinNLDC
H
Thesetofcompleteequipmentforoutdoorandindoorfibreopticmultiplexerequipmentforprotection&
communicationatsubstationshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,
H1.X underthiscontract. set 1
H2.X Deleted
Thelotofundergroundopticalfibre(48cores)cablesfromterminalboxatgantrystructuretoMDF(Main
H3.X distributionFrame)shallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedincontrol lot 1
room.TheContractincludessupplyandinstallationofMDFanddigitalcableswithadequatelength.
The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV Transmission
H4.X Line, including Line Traps, Coupling units, cables etc., shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested set 4
andcommissioned,whichcomprisesthefollowing:
H4.X The set of complete equipment for Power Line Carrier and Tele-protection, for each 400 kV Transmission
set 4
(i) Line,Couplingunits,cablesetc.
H4.X
complete400kVLineTraps set 4
(ii)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
Thecompletesetofmulticorelowvoltageauxiliarypowerandcontrolcablesbetweenallitemsofequipment
suppliedunderthecontractandforconnectionandintegrationofthenewequipmentwiththeexisting
1.X equipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedwithnecessarygland, lot 1
terminated,andidentifiedbycolours&tags.Theproductionoftheoverallsubstationcableroutingandcore
schedulesshallalsobeprovided.

Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)sets110Vsubstationbatteriescompletewithchargersanddistribution
switchboardshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,
toprovideallDCsuppliestoequipmentbeingsuppliedforthenewsubstation.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,accordingto
J1.X thedetaildesign lot 1
(a)Two(2)setsNi-cadmium100%batteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan400Ahatthe10-
hourrateofdischarge.
Thecompletelotconsistsoftwo(2)setsof48VDCsystemcompletewithchargersanddistribution
switchboardshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissionedinthecontrolbuilding
toprovideallDCsuppliesforfibreopticmultiplexerequipmentforcommunicationandprotection.Oneset
shallbeusedasstandbysupply.
(a)Two(2)sets100%Ni-cadmiumbatteriescomplete,eachcapacityshallnotbelessthan250Ahatthe10-
hourrateofdischarge.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
ThecompletelotLVACswitchboardforsubstationservicesshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,
testedandcommissioned,underthiscontract,toprovidethe400/230Vsuppliestoallequipmentbeing
supplied.
ThesystemshallgenerallybeasperBidDrawingsandshallincludeone125Aoutdoorweatherproof,3-
K1.X lot 1
phasewithneutralandearthswitchedsocketoutletandplugtoIEC60309;tobeinstalled,cabledand
connectedadjacenttotheautotransformers.
NecessaryDCdistributionswitchboardsshallbeprovidedatthevariousplaceofthesubstation,accordingto
thedetaildesign

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
_Outdoor equipment foundation 33kV switchyard

v) lot 1
_Outdoor gantry foundation 33kV switchyard

vi) lot 1
_Transformer foundation including oilpit & carrage way

vii) lot 1
_Blast wall
viii) lot 1
_Security Boundary Wall with slope protection***

ix) m
_Substation Main gate

x) each 0
_Chain Link Fencing***

xi) m
_Approach raod
xii) lot 1
_Internal road
xiii) lot 1
_Surface drain
xiv) lot 1
_Cable Trench
xv) lot 1
_Switchyard surface finishing, drainage system including surface drain

xvi) lot 1
_Gravel laying
xvii) lot 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
_Septic tank, sowak way
xviii) lot 1
_Pump house including deep tubewell, motor, pump, water reservaoir, water pipe line etc.
xix) lot 1
_Gurd house, sentry post, car port

xx) lot 1
Complete civil works for 400kV & 230kV relay, control & auxiliary house
1)
_Foundation works
i) lot 1
_Super structures
ii) lot 1
_All finish works

iii) lot 1
Fire alarm & fire fighting system

L4.X lot 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
M1.X providelighting,LVpowersupply,airconditioningsystem,ventilationandemergencyDClightingforthe lot 1
substationrelay,controlandauxiliaryhouses.
N1.X provideswitchyardlightingforsecurity,roadwayandswitchyardandemergencyDClightingatstrategic lot 1
locationsforequipmentoperationsandinspections.
Thelotofcompleteequipmentshallbedesigned,supplied,delivered,installed,testedandcommissioned,of
P1.X earthingsystemandlightningprotectionscreenincludingconnections,connectorsandclamps,tosuitthe lot 1
substationoverallarrangementandprovidesupportingdesigncalculations.
Thesetsof3-phaseportable(maintenance)earthingequipmentdeviceswithconnectorsandtelescopic
P2 set 4
glassfibreoperatingpolesuitableforplantsupplied.
Q Cable 230 kV
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned of
11setsx
245 kV, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable. Approximate lengths
Q1 m 200m=
are 150 and 250 meters respectively (Payment will be at actual quantity basis if quantity increases or
2,200m
decreasesduringexecution)
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, installed, tested and commissioned of
Twentytwo
Q2 245 kV, 2,000 A, 50 kA / 1 sec, 50 Hz, 1,050 / 460 kV BIL, cable end terminal end for single phase XLPE set
(22)sets
cablelot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and commissioned of
The
36 kV, 630A, 25kA / 1 sec, 50Hz, 170/70 kV BIL, single phase XLPE cable. Approximate lengths are 150
Q3 meters. m 450
The lot of complete equipment shall be designed, supplied, delivered, in-stalled, tested and commissioned of
Q4 lot 1
36kV,630A,25kA/1sec,50Hz,170/70kVBIL,cableendterminalendforsinglephaseXLPEcable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7

Circuitbreaker420kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,oneofeach
A1.4 set 1
type
Circuitbreaker420kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inmotor
A1.5 set 1
drivemechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype

Disconnector420kVwithearthingswitch-onecompletepole,togetherwithonecompletemotordrive
A.22.1 operatingmechanismofmainbladesandonecompletemotordriveoperatingmechanismoftheearthing nos 3
blades
Currenttransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,headtype,5-core,multiratio,
A3 secondaryre-connected,1000-2000-4000/1A,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL,posttypecurrent nos 3
transformer.
Capacitorvoltagetransformer420kV,single-phase,oilinsulated,hermeticallyclosed,2-secondarywinding,
A4 400/V3/110/V3/110/V3kV/V/V,63kA/1sec,50Hz,1.425/1.050kVBIL,capacitortypevoltage nos 3
transformers.
Surgearrester420kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=336kV,Uc=
A5 nos 3
268kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
Circuitbreaker245kV,auxiliarycontacts,inmotordrivemechanism,completewithaccessories,oneofeach
B1.4 set 1
type
Circuitbreaker245kV,Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inmotor
B1.5 set 1
drivemechanismandcontrolcubicle,oneofeachtype
Surgearrester245kV,singlephase,heavydutystationclass,gapless,metaloxidetype,Ur=192kV,Uc=
B5 nos 3
153kV,10kAnominaldischargecurrent,50Hz

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
D Transformers
D1.3 Transformeroil kg 5000
Contactors,relays,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inTransformercontrolcabinet,
D1.6 lot 1
oneofeachtype
Contactors,relays,auxiliarycontacts,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,inOLTCMotor
D1.7 lot 1
Drivemechanism,oneofeachtype

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
J11.1 Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeachtype lot 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
K11.1 Contactors,relays,MCBs,selectorswitches,pushbuttons,counters,heaters,etc.,oneofeachtype lot 1

2
R1 CostsandExpensesrelatedtoFAT lot 1 114,950USD 114,950USD
2
R2 CostsandExpensesrelatedtoTraining lot 1 105,900USD 105,900USD
3
R3 STI,STDandHIV/AIDSprogram lot 1
Total Columns 8 & 9 to be carried forward to Schedule No. 5 - Grand Summary
2 Thesecostsarefixedceilingandwillbeincludedintotalprice.Butthepaymentshallbeatactual.
3 AsdescribedinSCC22.2.7
Schedule No. 5. Grand Summary
Total Price1
Schedule Local Currency Foreign Currency

Description
No. Portion Portion
[BDT] [xxx]
1 2 8 9
1 Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad2
2 Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employer's Country2
3 Design Services
4 Installation and Other Services
Grand Total to be carried forward to Letter of Price Bid
2 Taxes and/or duties from Schedules 1 and 2 may be added to the contract price in accordance with GCC 14 (Taxes and Duties) but excluded from bid evaluation in accordance with ITB 36.4.
BGD 2440 SS vol 3 Schedule B - Price schedules_as per ADB.1.xlsx / 5 grand summary ______________________________________________________
Schedule No. 6. Recommended Spare Parts

Local Foreign Local Foreign
Country Currency Currency Currency Currency
Item Description Unit Quantity
of origin Portion Portion Portion Portion
EXW CIP EXW CIP
[BDT] [xxxxx] [BDT] [xxx]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8=5x6 9=5x7
BGD 2440 SS vol 3 Schedule B - Price schedules_as per ADB.1.xlsx / 6 rec spare parts ______________________________________________________

Bid Document Mawa Mongla

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Bid Document Mawa Mongla

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Source: Power Grid Company of Bangladesh Ltd.

Bidding Document for Design, Supply,

Issued on: 24 April, 2017

Invitation for Bids No. 01/PGCB/Sec(SSD&QC)/2017/2562

ICB No. PGCB/ADB/400kV/AMIN-SS

Part 1: Bidding Procedures

Section 1: Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

Part 2: Employers Requirements

Section 6: Employers Requirements (ERQ)

Part 3: Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

Section 7: General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

Schedule A: Introduction & Preamble to the Price & Technical Schedules

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders

1. Scope of Bid .................................................................................................................................. 1-3

B. Contents of Bidding Document .................................................................................. 1-6

6. Sections of Bidding Document ..................................................................................................... 1-6

C. Preparation of Bids ..................................................................................................... 1-8

9. Cost of Bidding .............................................................................................................................. 1-8

D. Submission and Opening of Bids ............................................................................ 1-15

23. Submission, Sealing, and Marking of Bids .................................................................................. 1-15

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

25. Late Bids ..................................................................................................................................... 1-16

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ........................................................................ 1-18

28. Confidentiality .................................................................................................................................18

F. Award of Contract ..................................................................................................... 1-23

42. Award Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 1-23

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

influencing improperly the actions of another party;

4. Eligible 4.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or government-owned

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

or enforced by ADB pursuant to the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of

4.5 Government-owned enterprises in the Borrowers country shall be eligible

4.6 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibility

4.7 Firms shall be excluded if by an act of compliance with a decision of the

B. Contents of Bidding Document

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

7.4 The Bidders designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bid

7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take an

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

the Employer on their own merits, pursuant to ITB 32.

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

name and nationality of the proposed Subcontractors, including

Bangladesh: Bidding Document for Aminbazar 400/230 kV Substation

BGD 2440 SS vol 1 sec 1.doc

Schedule No. 6: Recommended Spare Parts

(e) Recommended spare parts (Schedule No. 6) shall be quoted